WaterCAD Users Guide

WATERCAD
USER ’S GUIDE
WATER DISTRIBUTION MODELING SOFTWARE

Copyright © 1986-2003 Haestad Methods, Inc. All rights reserved.
WaterCAD User’s Guide.
WaterCAD Online Help.
This documentation is published by Haestad Methods, Inc. (“Haestad”), and is intended solely for
use in conjunction with Haestad’s software. This documentation is available to all current
Licensees in print and electronic format. No one may copy, photocopy, reproduce, translate, or
convert to any electronic or machine-readable form, in whole or in part, the printed documentation
without the prior written approval of Haestad. Licensee may download the electronic
documentation from Haestad’s web site and make that documentation available solely on
licensee’s intranet. Licensee may print the electronic documentation, in part or in whole, for
personal use. No one may translate, alter, sell, or make available the electronic documentation on
the Internet, transfer the documentation by FTP, or display any of the documentation on any web
site without the prior written approval of Haestad.
Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Haestad Methods, Inc.:
CulvertMaster, Cybernet, Darwin, FlowMaster, Graphical HEC-1, PondPack, SewerCAD,

StormCAD, WaterCAD, and WaterGEMS.
The following are trademarks of Haestad Methods, Inc.:
HEC-Pack, HAMMER, PumpMaster, and GISConnect.
Haestad Methods is a registered tradename of Haestad Methods, Inc.
AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc. ESRI is a registered trademark of

Environmental Systems Research Institute, Inc. Microsoft, Windows, Visual Studio, Word, and
Excel, are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other brands, company or product
names, or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Portions of this document include intellectual property of ESRI and its licensor(s) and are used
herein under license. Copyright © 1999-2003 ESRI and its licensor(s). All rights reserved.
37 Brookside Road
Waterbury, CT 06708-1499 USA
Phone: +1-203-755-1666
Fax: +1-203-597-1488
E-mail: info@haestad.com
Internet: http://www.haestad.com
Contents
Chapter 1: Orientation 27
Using the WaterCAD Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
What’s New? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29
Previously Added in WaterCAD v5.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30
Installation, Upgrades, and Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33
Minimum System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33
WATERCAD STAND-ALONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34
AUTOCAD MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34
RECOMMENDED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34
Installing Haestad Methods’ Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35
Uninstalling Haestad Methods’ Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35
Troubleshooting Setup or Uninstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35
Software Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-36
Upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37
Globe Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37
Network Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37
Registering Network Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38
REQUESTING A PERMANENT NETWORK LICENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39
INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR NETWORK LICENSE VERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40
NETWORK DEPLOYMENT FOLDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41
Learning WaterCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
How Do I?—Frequently Asked Questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Tutorials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Sample Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43
Haestad Methods’ Workshops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43
Contacting Haestad Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44
SUPPORT HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44
Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-45
Your Suggestions Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-45
WaterCAD User's Guide Contents-1

Chapter 2: WaterCAD Main Window 47
Main Window Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Stand-Alone and AutoCAD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
WaterCAD Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Drawing Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Layer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
PROJECT LAYERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
BACKGROUND LAYERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
DXF Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Shapefile Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Menus, Toolbars, and Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
TOOLBARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
SHORTCUT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
QUICK ATTRIBUTE SELECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
COMMAND LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
WaterCAD Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
STAND-ALONE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
AUTOCAD MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Analysis Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Draw Menu (in AutoCAD Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
EXTERNAL TOOL MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
EXTERNAL TOOL EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Report Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
USING THE ONLINE HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Online Help Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Online Help Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Online Help Favorites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Online Help Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Navigation Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Using the Online Book (PDF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
WaterCAD Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Toolbar Button Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Tool Pane Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
FILE TOOLS (STAND-ALONE ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
ZOOM TOOLS (STAND-ALONE ONLY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
CALCULATION AND DATA MANAGEMENT TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
REPORTING TOOLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
UPDATES AND HELP TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
The Tool Palette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Analysis Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Animation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Contents-2 WaterCAD User's Guide

Other Toolbar Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-82
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-83
General Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-84
File Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-84
Unit System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-84
Cursor Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-84
Calculation Results Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-84
Refresh and Auto-Refresh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-85
Chapter 3: Quick Start Lessons 87

Lesson 1: Building a Network and Performing a Steady-State Analysis . . . .3-87
Part 1—Creating a New Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-88
Part 2—Laying Out the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-90
Part 3—Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-93
Part 4—Entering Data through Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-94
Part 5—Entering Data through FlexTables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-103
Part 6—Performing a Steady-State Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-105
Lesson 2: Extended Period Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-107
Part 1—Creating Demand Patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-107
Part 2—Running an Extended Period Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
Lesson 3: Scenario Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
Part 1—Creating a New Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
Part 2—Editing and Creating Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-120
Part 3—Calculate and Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-122
Part 4—Physical Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-124
Lesson 4: Reporting Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-127
Part 1—Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-128
Part 2—Tabular Reports (FlexTables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-132
Part 3—Create a Plan and Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-136
Part 4—Contouring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-138
Part 5—Element Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-139
Part 6—Color Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-141
Lesson 5: Automated Fire Flow Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-143
Part 1—Inputting Fire Flow Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-143
Part 2—Calculating a Fire Flow Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-148
Part 3—Viewing Fire Flow Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-150
Lesson 6: Water Quality Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-151
Part 1—Computing Water Age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-152
Part 2—Analyzing Constituent Concentrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-159
Part 3—Performing a Trace Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-162
Lesson 7: Working with Data from External Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-164
Part 1—Importing Shapefile Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-166
Part 2—Importing Data from a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-173
Part 3—Converting CAD Drawing Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-181
Lesson 9: Using Darwin Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-187

Part 1—Creating the Darwin Designer Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-188
Part 2—Viewing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-199
Part 3—Using Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-201
Lesson 10: Darwin Designer Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-205
Set Up for Darwin Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-213
Create the Optimized Design Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-226
Calculate and Verify the Optimal Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-227
Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-235
Chapter 4: Starting a WaterCAD Project 237

File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-237
WaterCAD Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-238
WaterCAD Database Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-238
Shapefile/Database Connection Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-238
Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-239
Additional Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-239
Old File Format Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-239
Import Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-239
Multiple Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-240
Importing a Submodel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-240
Exporting a Submodel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-241
Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-241
Project Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-241
Project Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-242
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-242
Global Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-242
WELCOME DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-243
UNIT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-243
ENTER KEY BEHAVIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-243
WINDOW COLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-244
STICKY TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-244
AUTO PROMPTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-244
Project Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-244
FRICTION METHOD THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-244
LIQUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-245
INPUT MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-245
PIPE LENGTH ROUNDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-246
Drawing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-246
DRAWING SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-246
ANNOTATION MULTIPLIERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-247
PIPE TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-248
SYMBOL VISIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-248
MAP SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-249
Scenario Dataset Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-249
STEP 1—SPECIFY SOURCE DATASET AND TARGET GEODATABASE . . . . . . 4-249

STEP 2—SPECIFY ELEMENT ATTRIBUTES TO BE INCLUDED . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-250
STEP 3—COMPLETE SCENARIO WIZARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-251
Selection Set Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-251
Select Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-251
FlexUnits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-252
Field Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-252
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-253
Display Precision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-253
NUMBER OF DIGITS DISPLAYED AFTER DECIMAL POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-253
ROUNDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-253
Scientific Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-253
Minimum and Maximum Allowed Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-254
FlexUnits Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-254
Chapter 5: Layout and Editing Tools 255

Graphical Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-255
Using the Graphical Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-255
Working with Network Elements Within the Graphical Editor . . . . . . . . . . . .5-256
Creating New Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-256
Changing the Pipe Layout Tool to Insert a Different Type of Node . . . . . . . .5-257
Morphing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-258
Splitting Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-258
Pipe Disconnect / Reconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-259
Selecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-259
SELECTING ELEMENTS (STAND-ALONE MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-259
SELECTING ELEMENTS (AUTOCAD MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-260
OTHER GRAPHICAL SELECTION FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-260
Single Element Selection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-260
Calibration Group Selection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-261
Select From Drawing Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-261
Editing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-261
MOVING ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-262
DELETING ELEMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-262
Other Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-262
Selection Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-263
Selection Sets Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-263
New Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-263
Selection Set Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-264
Duplicate Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-264
Rename Selection Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-264
Selection Set Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-264
Delete Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-264
Find Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-265
Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-265
Zoom Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-266

Aerial View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-266
Drawing Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-267
Drawing Review Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-267
Selection Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-269
Relabel Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-269
Relabel Elements Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-270
Relabel Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-270
Elements Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-271
Element Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-271
Element Labeling Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-272
Moving Element Labels and Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-273
Quick Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-273
Chapter 6: Hydraulic Element Editors 275

Element Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-276
Using Element Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-276
Pressure Pipe Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-277
Pressure Junction Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-277
Tank Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-278
Reservoir Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-279
Pump Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-279
Valve Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-281
Element Editors’ Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-282
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-283
PRESSURE PIPE GENERAL TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-283
PIPE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-284
MINOR LOSS ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-284
INITIAL STATUS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-285
USER-DEFINED LENGTH SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-285
NODES SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-285
HYDRAULIC RESULTS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-286
WATER QUALITY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-286
Pressure Junctions General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-286
GENERAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-287
JUNCTION CALCULATED HYDRAULICS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-287
Tank General Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-287
GENERAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-288
HYDRAULICS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-288
Reservoirs General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-288
GENERAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-289
RESERVOIR CALCULATED HYDRAULICS SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-289
Pump General Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-289
Pump General Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-290
PUMP DEFINITION SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-290
INITIAL SETTING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-291
PIPES SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-292

OPERATING POINT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-292
Pump Definition Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-292
Pump Definition Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-293
Importing Pump Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-295
Valve General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-296
GENERAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-297
VALVE CHARACTERISTICS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-297
INITIAL SETTING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-298
PIPES SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-299
CALCULATED HYDRAULICS SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-299
HEAD-DISCHARGE POINTS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-299
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-300
Importing Demands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-301
DEMAND IMPORT DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-302
Section Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-302
TANK SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-303
OPERATING RANGE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-303
CROSS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-304
Constant Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-304
Variable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-304
Controls Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-305
SIMPLE CONTROL DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-305
SIMPLE CONTROL PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-306
SIMPLE CONTROL TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-306
CONTROL CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-306
NODE CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-306
TIME CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-307
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-307
Quality Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-307
WATER QUALITY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-309
CONSTITUENT SOURCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-310
INVERT ELEVATIONS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-311
Fire Flow Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-311
FIRE FLOW INPUT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-312
FIRE FLOW CALCULATION RESULTS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-313
Capital Cost Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-313
INCLUDE IN COST CALCULATION? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-314
NON-CONSTRUCTION COSTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-314
CONSTRUCTION COSTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-315
CONSTRUCTION COSTS TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-315
ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION COST OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-316
User Data Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-316
USER DATA SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-317
USER MEMOS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-317
Messages Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-317
VSP (Variable Speed Pump) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-317
Energy Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-319
PUMP EFFICIENCY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-320
EFFICIENCY SETTINGS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-320

DAILY ENERGY COST SUMMARY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-321
PEAK DEMAND SUMMARY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-321
EFFICIENCY SUMMARY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-322
Prototypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-322
User Data Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-322
User Data Extension Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-323
USER FIELD SPECIFICATION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-324
Type Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-324
Type Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-325
Format Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-326
Notes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-327
EXISTING FIELDS TO SHARE WITH DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-327
Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-327
Zone Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-328
Zone Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-328
Chapter 7: FlexTables 329

Table Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-330
Creating New Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-331
Editing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-331
Duplicating Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-331
Deleting Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-332
Renaming Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-332
Resetting Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-332
Table Setup Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-332
Table Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-333
Available Table Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-333
Selected Table Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-333
Table Manipulation Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-334
Allow Duplicate Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-335
Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-335
Editing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-336
EDITABLE TABLE COLUMNS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-336
TABLE NAVIGATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-336
Table Navigation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-336
Cell Navigation Mode (Edit Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-336
GLOBALLY EDITING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-337
Sorting and Filtering Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-337
SORTING TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-338
CUSTOM SORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-338
FILTERING TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-339
INCLUDE INACTIVE TOPOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-340
Table Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-340
CHANGING COLUMN HEADINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-341
ABBREVIATED LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-341
CHANGING COLUMN DISPLAY PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-341

LOCAL VERSUS SYNCHRONIZED UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-342
MIXING UNITS IN A TABULAR REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-342
Table Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-343
FILE (EXPORT TABLE TO ASCII FILE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-344
TABLE COPY TO CLIPBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-344
TABLE PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-344
TABLE PRINT PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-344
Chapter 8: Scenarios/Alternatives 345

Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-345
Alternatives Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-347
MERGING CHILD ALTERNATIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-349
Alternatives Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-349
Physical Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-350
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-350
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-351
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-351
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR GPVS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-352
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR JUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-352
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR RESERVOIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-352
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR TANKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-353
Active Topology Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-353
Demand Alternative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-354
Initial Settings Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-355
INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-355
INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-355
INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR TANKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-356
INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR PRESSURE VALVES . . . . . . . .8-356
INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR FCVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-356
INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR TCVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-356
INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR GPVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-357
Operational Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-357
Age Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-358
Constituent Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-358
Trace Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-360
Fire Flow Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-360
DEFAULT FLOW AND PRESSURE CONSTRAINTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-361
SELECTION SET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-362
FIRE FLOW LOADS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-362
USE DEFAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-362
Capital Cost Alternative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-363
User Data Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-363
Energy Cost Alternative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-363
Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-364
Scenario Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-365
Editing Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-365
Scenario Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-366

BATCH RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-368
CREATING SCENARIOS TO MODEL WHAT-IF SITUATIONS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-368
Scenario Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-369
SCENARIO WIZARD—STEP 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-369
Scenario Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-371
ALTERNATIVES TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-372
SCENARIO EDITOR—CALCULATION TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-372
NOTES TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-374
RESULTS TAB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-374
Chapter 9: Modeling Capabilities 377

Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-378
Steady-State Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-378
Extended Period Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-379
Optional Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-380
Global Demand and Roughness Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-381
Check Data/Validate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-382
Calculate Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-383
Flow Emitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-384
Parallel VSPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-384
Fire Flow Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-385
Fire Flow Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-386
Not Getting Fire Flow at a Junction Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-387
MANUAL FIRE FLOW SCENARIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-387
MANUAL FIRE FLOW SCENARIOS DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-388
FIRE FLOW DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-389
Water Quality Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-389
Age Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-389
Constituent Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-390
Trace Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-391
Calculation Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-391
Hydraulic Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-392
Water Quality Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-392
Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-393
Pattern Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-394
Pattern Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-395
DEFINING PATTERNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-395
TIME STEP POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-396
FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-396

Importing Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-396
Logical Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-397
Creating a New Logical Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-399
Logical Controls Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-401
Logical Control Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-401
CONTROLS TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-402
CONDITIONS TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-403
ACTIONS TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-404
Logical Control Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-405
Condition Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-406
NEW LOGICAL CONDITION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-406
SIMPLE LOGICAL CONDITION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-407
Simple Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-407
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-410
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-411
COMPOSITE LOGICAL CONDITION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-411
Action Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-412
NEW LOGICAL ACTION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-413
SIMPLE LOGICAL ACTION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-413
COMPOSITE LOGICAL ACTION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-415
Finding Controls and Control Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-416
FIND LOGICAL CONTROL DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-416
FIND LOGICAL CONDITION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-417
FIND LOGICAL ACTION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-417
Logical Control Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-418
LOGICAL CONTROL SETS ALTERNATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-418
LOGICAL CONTROLS SET EDITOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-419
Active Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-419
Active Topology Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-420
Chapter 10: GA Optimization and Calibration 421

Darwin Calibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-421
New Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-422
Optimized Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-423
ROUGHNESS/DEMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-423
STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-423
FIELD DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-423
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-424
NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-424
Manual Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-425
ROUGHNESS/DEMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-425
STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-425
FIELD DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-425
NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-425
Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-426
Calibration Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-426
Calibration Export to Scenario Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-427

GA-Optimized Calibration Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-428
Calibration Results Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-429
Field Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-429
Field Data Set Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-430
OBSERVATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-430
DEMAND ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-431
NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-432
Field Data Sets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-432
New Field Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-433
Field Data Observation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-433
Entering Fire Flow Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-434
Select Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-435
Field Data Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-435
Adjustment Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-437
New Adjustment Group Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-437
Rename Adjustment Group Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-437
Calibration Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-438
Calibration Adjustment Groups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-438
Selection Set Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-439
Calibration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-440
GA Parameters Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-442
Calibration Options Formulae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-444
Chapter 11: Cost Estimating 447

Capital Cost Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-448
Capital Cost Manager—Button Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-449
Capital Cost Manager—Center Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-450
Capital Cost Manager—Left Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-450
System Cost Adjustments Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-450
Active Cost Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-451
Energy Cost Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-451
Energy Cost Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-452
Energy Cost Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-452
Energy Pricing Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-455
Energy Pricing Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-456
Capital Cost Alternatives Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-457
Unit Cost Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-457
Unit Cost Functions Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-458
New Unit Cost Functions Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-458
Unit Cost Function Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-459
Tabular Unit Cost Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-459
GENERAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-459
ATTRIBUTE VALUE RANGE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-460
UNIT COST DATA TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-460
Formula Unit Cost Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-460
GENERAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-461

VALID COST DATA RANGE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-461
COEFFICIENTS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-461
Cost Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-461
Element Detailed Cost Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-462
Project Detailed Cost Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-463
Project Element Summary Cost Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-463
Project Summary Cost Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-463
Pipe Costs Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-464
Cost Warnings Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-464
Chapter 12: Using Darwin Designer 465

Overview: How to Use Darwin Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-465
Design Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-466
Design Events Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-468
REPRESENTATIVE SCENARIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-470
ADDING A DESIGN EVENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-471
Design Groups Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-471
ADDING A NEW GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-472
EDITING A GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-472
DESIGN AND REHAB GROUPS OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-473
Rehab Groups Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-473
Option Groups Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-474
ADDING AND EDITING DESIGN OPTION GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-475
Material Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-478
ADDING AND EDITING REHABILITATION OPTION GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-478
Function Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-481
Function Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-483
NEW OPTION GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-483
Design Type Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-483
Notes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-484
Design Event Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-484
Demand Adjustments Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-485
Pressure Constraints Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-487
PRESSURE CONSTRAINTS TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-488
Flow Constraints Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-489
FLOW CONSTRAINTS TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-490
Boundary Conditions Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-490
LOAD BOUNDARY CONDITIONS DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-491
Notes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-492
Design Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-492
Design Events Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-493
Local Design Groups Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-494
MANUAL DESIGN RUNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-494
Local Rehab Groups Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-496
Local Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-497
STOPPING CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-497
TOP SOLUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-498

Notes Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-498
Computing the Design Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-498
Results Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-498
Design Groups Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-500
Rehab Groups Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-500
Pressure Constraints Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-501
Flow Constraints Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-501
Element Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-501
Report Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-502
Graph Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-503
About Pareto Optimal Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-504
Export Design to Scenario Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-505
Schema Augmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-506
Set Field Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-507
Verification Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-507
Chapter 13: Presenting your Results 509

Element Annotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-509
Attribute Annotation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-510
The Annotation Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-510
ANNOTATION WIZARD—SELECT ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-511
ANNOTATION WIZARD—SPECIFY ANNOTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-511
Initial Placement Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-512
ANNOTATION WIZARD—SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-512
Color Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-513
Color Coding Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-513
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-514
Predefined Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-515
Element Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-515
Element Results Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-516
Tabular Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-517
Scenario Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-517
Project Inventory Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-517
Calculation Results Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-517
Plan View Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-518
Calculation/Problem Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-518
Contour Plan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-519
Totalizing Flow Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-519
Tabular Report Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-519
System Head Curve Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-520
Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-520
Pump Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-521
Tank Storage Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-521
Junction Demand Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-521

Pattern Graph and Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-521
Plotting a Variable versus Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-521
GRAPH SETUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-522
AVAILABLE SCENARIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-522
GRAPH WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-522
Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-523
GeoGrapher Graph Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-523
GeoGrapher Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-524
GeoGrapher Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-524
GeoGrapher Display Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-529
GeoGrapher Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-532
GeoGrapher Graph Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-532
GeoGrapher Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-533
CHART TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-533
SERIES TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-544
Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-547
Contour Map Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-547
Contour Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-549
Contour Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-549
Enhanced Pressure Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-550
Contour Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-550
Spot Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-551
SPOT ELEVATION INPUT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-551
SPOT ELEVATION CALCULATED RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-552
Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-552
Profile Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-552
Profile Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-553
Export Profiles (in AutoCAD Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-554
Walk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-554
Walk Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-554
Scenario Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-555
Annotation Comparison Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-555
Scenario Comparison Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-556
Graphic Annotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-557
Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-558
Scale Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-558
Preview Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-558
Plot Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-559
Print Preview Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-559
Graph Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-560
TITLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-560
AXIS (FOR GRAPHS ONLY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-560
GRID (FOR GRAPHS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-560
DISPLAY (FOR PIE CHARTS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-561
LEGEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-561
Status Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-561

Chapter 14: Engineering Libraries 563
Engineering Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-564
WaterCAD Engineering Library Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-564
Engineering Library Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-565
MATERIAL PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-565
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-566
MINOR LOSS PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-566
LIQUID PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-567
CONSTITUENT PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-568
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-568
Reaction Rates Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-569
Chapter 15: Shapefile and Database Connections 571

Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-573
Database Connection Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-574
Standard Database Import/Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-575
Database Connection Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-577
DATABASE CONNECTION TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-578
SYNCHRONIZATION OPTIONS TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-579
DATABASE TABLE LINK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-579
SELECT FIELD LINKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-581
ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-581
ODBC DATABASE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-582
ODBC DATABASE FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-582
SYNCHRONIZING VIA ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-583
ODBC DATABASE TABLES AND FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-583
Sharing Database Connections between Projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-584
SHARING DATABASE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN PROJECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-584
PREVENTING DATABASE CONNECTIVITY SHARING BETWEEN PROJECTS . . 15-584
Database Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-585
Shapefile Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-585
Shapefile Connection Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-586
SHAPEFILE CONNECTION WIZARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-586
SHAPEFILE CONNECTION LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-587
SYNCHRONIZE NOW? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-587
Shapefile Connection Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-587
SHAPEFILE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-588
Shapefile Link Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-588
SHAPEFILE LINK SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-589
Import Shapefile Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-589
SELECT ELEMENT TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-590
SHAPEFILE SYNCHRONIZATION OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-590
When Missing Connectivity Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-591
IMPORT SHAPEFILE LINK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-591
CREATE SHAPEFILE CONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-592
SHAPEFILE IMPORT EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-592
Export Shapefile Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-593

EXPORT SHAPEFILE LINK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-594
SHAPEFILE EXPORT EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-595
Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-595
SHARING SHAPEFILE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN PROJECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-596
PREVENTING SHAPEFILE CONNECTIVITY SHARING BETWEEN PROJECTS . .15-596
Shapefile Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-596
Shapefile Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-596
Chapter 16: Exchanging Data with CAD Software 599

AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-599
Converting Your Drawing in Multiple Passes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-600
Polyline to Pipe Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-600
POLYLINE TO PIPE WIZARD—STEP 1 (STAND-ALONE MODE ONLY) . . . . . .16-601
POLYLINE TO PIPE WIZARD—STEP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-602
POLYLINE TO PIPE WIZARD—STEP 4 (FOR .DXF FILES WITH BLOCKS) . . .16-603
POLYLINE CONVERSION PROBLEM DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-604
DRAWING PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-604
Importing and Exporting DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-604
Import a DXF File from AutoCAD or MicroStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-605
Exporting a DXF file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-605
Redefining WaterCAD Blocks in AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-605
Advanced DXF Import Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-606
Chapter 17: Additional Features for AutoCAD 607

AutoCAD Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-608
AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-608
Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-609
Drawing Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-609
Symbol Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-609
Rebuild Figure Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-610
AutoCAD Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-610
Drawing Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-610
Saving the Drawing as Drawing*.dwg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-611
WaterCAD Element Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-611
Element Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-612
Select Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-612
Select Text Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-612
Working with Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-612
Edit Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-613
Deleting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-613
Modifying Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-613
SCALE ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-613

ROTATE LABELS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-613
MODIFY PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-613
CHANGE PIPE WIDTHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-614
EDIT ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-614
Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-614
WaterCAD Custom AutoCAD Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-615
AutoCAD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-615
Explode Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-616
Moving Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-616
Moving Element Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-616
Snap Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-617
Undo/Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-617
Converting Native AutoCAD Entities to WaterCAD Elements . . . . . . . . . . 17-618
Layout Pipe Using Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-618
Change AutoCAD Entities to Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-618
Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-619
Import WaterCAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-619
Working with Proxies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-619
Chapter 18: Automated Skeletonization 621

Skeletonization Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-622
Common Automated Skeletonization Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-623
Generic—Data Scrubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-624
Generic—Branch Trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-624
Generic—Series Pipe Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-625
Skeletonization Using Skelebrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-626
Skelebrator—Smart Pipe Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-626
Skelebrator—Branch Collapsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-627
Skelebrator—Series Pipe Merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-628
Skelebrator—Parallel Pipe Merging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-630
Skelebrator—Other Skelebrator Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-631
Skelebrator—Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-632
Using the Skelebrator Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-633
Skeletonizer Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-634
SKELETONIZATION PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-637
Manual Skeletonization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-639
BATCH RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-640
PROTECTED PIPES AND PROTECTED JUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-641
Smart Pipe Removal Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-642
Branch Collapsing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-644
Series Pipe Merging Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-644
Parallel Pipe Merging Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-648
Add New Operation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-650
Rename Operation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-650
Skelebrator Progress Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-650

Conditions and Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-650
PIPE CONDITIONS AND TOLERANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-651
JUNCTION CONDITIONS AND TOLERANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-652
Important Skelebrator Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-653
Backing Up Your Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-653
Skeletonization and Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-653
Importing/Exporting Skelebrator Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-655
Skeletonization and Active Topology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-656
Chapter 19: WaterSafe 659

WaterSafe Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-659
Trace Analysis Project Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-660
Select Trace Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-660
Constituent Analysis Project Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-661
Select Constituent Alternatives Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-662
Age Analysis Project Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-662
Select Age Alternative Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-663
Graphing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-664
Graph Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-664
TRACE ANALYSIS GRAPH SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-664
CONSTITUENT ANALYSIS GRAPH SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-664
AGE ANALYSIS GRAPH SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-665
Graph Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-665
BAR AND PIE GRAPHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-667
Graph Print Preview Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-668
Statistics Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-668
Color Coding Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-670
Table Print Preview Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-670
Statistical Report Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-670
Graph Unit Selection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-672
Table Unit Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-672
Appendix A: Frequently Asked Questions 673

Overview: “How Do I” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-673
Import/Export Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-674
Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD/Cybernet Versions . . . . . . . . . . . A-674
CYBERNET V1 DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-674
CYBERNET V2 DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-674
WATERCAD/CYBERNET V3 AND V4 FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-675
Transitioning from Cybernet v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-675
WORKING WITH THE GRAPHICAL EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-676
REPORT TABLES (FLEXTABLES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-676
LINKS TO GRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEMS (GIS) AND DATABASES. . . . A-677
SCENARIO MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-677

USING THE SCENARIO CONTROL CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-678
DEMAND ALTERNATIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-678
COMPOSITE DEMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-679
CONTROL VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-679
PUMPS AND PUMP CURVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-680
IN SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-680
Importing EPANET Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-681
CONCENTRATION UNITS IMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-681
Importing KYPIPE Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-681
Importing Spot Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-682
Exporting Spot Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-682
Importing Database and Shapefile Data Created with WaterCAD v3 . . . . . A-682
Additional Considerations When Working with Large Model Files. . . . . . . . A-683
Modeling Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-683
Modeling a Hydropneumatic Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-684
Modeling a Pumped Groundwater Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-684
Modeling Parallel Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-685
Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-686
PARALLEL VSPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-687
Modeling Hydraulically Close Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-687
Modeling Fire Hydrants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-688
Modeling a Connection to an Existing Water Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-688
Top Feed/Bottom Gravity Discharge Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-690
Estimating Hydrant Discharge Using Flow Emitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-691
Modeling Variable Speed Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-693
TYPES OF VARIABLE SPEED PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-693
PATTERN BASED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-694
FIXED HEAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-694
CONTROLS WITH FIXED HEAD OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-695
Creating Scenarios to Model “What If?” Situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-695
How Do I Access the Haestad Methods Knowledge Base? . . . . . . . . . . . . A-696
Darwin Calibrator Troubleshooting Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-696
Display Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-699
How Do I Change Units in a Column? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-699
How Do I Control Element and Label Sizing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-700
How Do I Color Code Elements? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-700
How Do I Remove Color Coding from Pre-v3.5 AutoCAD Labels? . . . . . . . A-701
How Do I Reuse Deleted Element Labels? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-701
Editing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-701
Mouse Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-701
Laying out a Pipe as a Multi-segmented Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-702
Changing a Pipe into a Multi-segmented Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-703
Advanced Darwin Designer Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-703

Appendix B: WaterCAD Theory 713
Acknowledgements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-713
Pressure Network Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-714
Network Hydraulics Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-714
THE ENERGY PRINCIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-715
The Energy Equation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-716
Hydraulic and Energy Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-716
HYDRAULIC GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-717
ENERGY GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-717
Conservation of Mass and Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-717
CONSERVATION OF MASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-717
CONSERVATION OF ENERGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-718
The Gradient Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-719
Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-719
The Linear System Equation Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-722
Pump Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-723
VARIABLE SPEED PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-724
CONSTANT HORSEPOWER PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-725
Valve Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-726
CHECK VALVES (CVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-726
FLOW CONTROL VALVES (FCVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-726
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES (PRVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-726
PRESSURE SUSTAINING VALVES (PSVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-727
PRESSURE BREAKER VALVES (PBVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-727
THROTTLE CONTROL VALVES (TCVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-727
GENERAL PURPOSE VALVES (GPVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-727
Friction and Minor Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-727
Friction Loss Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-727
CHEZY’S EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-728
COLEBROOK-WHITE EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-728
HAZEN-WILLIAMS EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-729
DARCY-WEISBACH EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-729
Swamee and Jain Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-730
MANNING’S EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-731
Minor Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-732
Water Quality Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-733
Advective Transport in Pipes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-733
Mixing at Pipe Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-734
Mixing in Storage Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-734
Bulk Flow Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-735
SIMPLE 1ST-ORDER DECAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-736
FIRST-ORDER SATURATION GROWTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-736
TWO-COMPONENT, 2ND-ORDER DECAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-736
MICHAELIS-MENTON DECAY KINETICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-736
ZERO-ORDER GROWTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-737
Pipe Wall Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-738
System of Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-739

Lagrangian Transport Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-739
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-741
Engineer’s Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-743
Roughness Values—Manning’s Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-743
Roughness Values—Darcy-Weisbach Equation (Colebrook-White) . . . . . . B-744
Roughness Values—Hazen-Williams Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-745
Typical Roughness Values for Pressure Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-746
Fitting Loss Coefficients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-747
Genetic Algorithms Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-748
Darwin Calibrator Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-748
CALIBRATION FORMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-750
CALIBRATION OBJECTIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-750
Objective Type One: Minimize the Sum of Difference Squares . . . . . . . . . . B-750
Objective Type Two: Minimize the Sum of Absolute Differences . . . . . . . . . B-750
Objective Type Three: Minimize the Maximum Absolute Difference . . . . . . B-751
CALIBRATION CONSTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-751
GENETIC ALGORITHM OPTIMIZED CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-752
Darwin Designer Methodology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-753
MODEL LEVEL 1: LEAST COST OPTIMIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-753
MODEL LEVEL 2: MAXIMUM BENEFIT OPTIMIZATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-753
MODEL LEVEL 3: COST-BENEFIT TRADE-OFF OPTIMIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . B-753
Design Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-754
Cost Objective Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-755
New Pipe Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-755
Rehabilitation Pipe Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-755
Break Repairing Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-756
BENEFIT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-756
Pressure Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-756
Rehabilitation Benefit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-757
Unitized Benefit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-758
MULTI OBJECTIVE GENETIC ALGORITHM OPTIMIZED DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . B-760
Competent Genetic Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-762
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-763
Energy Cost Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-765
Pump Powers, Efficiencies, and Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-765
Water Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-765
Brake Power and Pump Efficiency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-766
Motor Power and Motor Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-766
Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-767
Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-768
ENERGY USAGE COST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-768
PEAK USAGE COST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-768
Storage Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-768
Daily Cost Equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-769
Variable Speed Pump Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-769
VSP Interactions with Simple and Logical Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-771
Performing Advanced Analyses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-772

References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-773
Hydraulic Equivalency Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-773
Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-773
Hazen-Williams Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-774
SERIES PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-774
PARALLEL PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-775
Manning’s Equation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-775
SERIES PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-775
PARALLEL PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-776
Darcy-Weisbach Equation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-776
SERIES PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-777
PARALLEL PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-778
CHECK VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-778
MINOR LOSSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-778
NUMERICAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-778
Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-778
Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-779
Thiessen Polygon Generation Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-780
Naïve Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-780
Plane Sweep Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-781
Appendix C: Scenario Management Guide 783

About this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-784
Before Haestad Methods—Distributed Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-784
With Haestad Methods—Self-Contained Scenarios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-785
The Scenario Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-786
Scenario Anatomy: Attributes and Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-787
A Familiar Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-787
Scenario Behavior: Inheritance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-788
Overriding Inheritance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-789

Dynamic Inheritance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-789
When Are Values Local versus Inherited? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-789
Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-790
Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-791
A Water Distribution Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-792
Building the Model (Average Day Conditions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-792
Analyzing Different Demands (Maximum Day Conditions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-793
Another Set of Demands (Peak Hour Conditions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-793
Correcting an Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-794
Analyzing Improvement Suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-794
Finalizing the Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-795
Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-796
Appendix D: Capital Cost Estimating 797

Capital Cost Estimating Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-797
Element Cost Data versus Cost Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-798
Navigating within the Cost Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-798
LEVEL OF DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-799
CONSTRUCTION VERSUS OVERALL PROJECT COST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-799
INDIRECT COSTS BY ELEMENT OR BY PROJECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-799
COST FUNCTIONS VERSUS FIXED UNIT COST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-799
SCENARIOS VERSUS COST ALTERNATIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-799
MULTIPLE SCENARIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-800
Entering Data for Multiple Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-800
PROTOTYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-800
SETTING THE INCLUDE IN COST CALCULATION BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-801
ENTERING COST ITEMS AND UNIT PRICES GLOBALLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-802
USING FILTERS TO EDIT ONLY SOME ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-802
Unit Cost Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-802
Form of Cost Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-803
MULTIPLE COST FUNCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-805
ASSIGNING COST FUNCTIONS TO ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-806
ENTERING COST FUNCTION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-806
Formula Cost Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-806
DEFINING COST FORMULAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-807
COEFFICIENTS IN COST FORMULAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-807
Tabular Cost Functions—Defining Cost Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-808
Building Cost Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-810
Associating Costs with Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-810
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-811
USING COST ALTERNATIVES TO SEGREGATE MULTIPLE PROJECTS . . . . . . D-811
Viewing Cost Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-811

Active Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-812
Use of Cost FlexTables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-812
Individual Element Costs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-813
Node and Pipe Cost Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-813
Cost Scenario Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-813
Assigning Costs to Model Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-815
Construction versus Non-Construction Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-815
Cost Considerations for Different Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-816
Pipe Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-816
COST PER ITEM VERSUS COST PER LENGTH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-816
ITEMS WITH COST PER LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-817
UNIT COST FUNCTIONS FOR PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-817
Node Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-818
TYPES OF NODES BY COST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-818
COST ITEMS FOR NODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-819
Pump Station Costs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-821
Non-Construction Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-822
OMISSIONS AND CONTINGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-823
LAND, EASEMENT, AND RIGHT-OF-WAY COSTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-823
SPECIFYING NON-CONSTRUCTION COSTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-824
Appendix E: Haestad Methods 829

Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-829
WaterGEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-830
WaterCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-830
SewerCAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-831
StormCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-831
PondPack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-831
FlowMaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-832
CulvertMaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-832
WaterSafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-832
PumpMaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-832
Haestad Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-833
Training and Certification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-833
Accreditations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-834
Internet Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-834
Instant Account Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-834
CivilProjects.com. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-834
CivilQuiz.com . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-835
Haestad Engineering Forums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-835
Appendix F: Glossary 837
Appendix G: References 849

Index 851
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867

Chapter
Orientation 1
Thank you for purchasing WaterCAD. At Haestad Methods, we pride ourselves in
providing the very best engineering software available. Our goal is to make software
that is easy to install and use, yet so powerful and intuitive that it anticipates your
needs without getting in your way.
WaterCAD is a feature-rich program with extensive online documentation that is able

to provide a level of instruction appropriate to your needs. When you first use
WaterCAD, the intuitive interface and interactive dialog boxes will guide you. If you
need more information, use the online help by either pressing the Help button present
in each dialog box, pressing the F1 key, or right-clicking anywhere in a dialog box.
Help text regarding the area of the program in which you are working will be
displayed.
Before you run WaterCAD, you should be familiar with:
• “What’s New?” on page 1-29

• “Installation, Upgrades, and Updates” on page 1-33
• “Learning WaterCAD” on page 1-42
• “Contacting Haestad Methods” on page 1-43
WaterCAD User's Guide 1-27

Using the WaterCAD Documentation
1.1 Using the WaterCAD Documentation

Note: If you cannot find the information you need in the printed book,
make sure you use the index or search the online book (.PDF) or
online help (.CHM).
These online resources contain extra information that is useful

when you are actually using the software and need context-
sensitive assistance or help with the software interface.
We designed the WaterCAD documentation to provide you content in the best possible
way. With this in mind, there is significantly more content available online than in-
print. The online content was designed to provide what you need while you are using
the software, and so the online content includes information about the WaterCAD
interface. The online content can also be updated dynamically as we update the soft-
ware, and delivered to you by download or as part of an updated software version. The
printed content was designed to help you with lessons and to be usable away from the
computer to review WaterCAD features and theory. The printed document is not as
easily updateable as the online content.
The WaterCAD documentation comes in three distinct parts:
• Printed User’s Guide—The printed user’s guide contains tutorials and the theory
on which the WaterCAD is based. Use this document at your leisure to review the
engineering standards we use and beside you at the computer to review the
WaterCAD lessons (
• Online Book—The online user’s guide is a .PDF-format file that contains the
same material as the printed user’s guide plus it includes reference content about
the WaterCAD interface, options, and dialog boxes. Updated versions of the
online user’s guide will be made available for download and be included in
updates to the software. This document is hypertext, you can search it, and you
can print page ranges from your local or network printer. Use this document to
view and print content about WaterCAD dialog boxes, windows, and other
elements of the WaterCAD software.
• Context-Sensitive Online Help—WaterCAD includes context-sensitive HTML
Help. Like the online book, the online help is fully searchable, uses hypertext, and
is updateable by download. Press F1 when using the WaterCAD software to use
the online help and get information immediately about the software feature you
are currently using.
For more information, see “Using the Online Book (PDF)” on page 2-77 and “Using
the Online Help” on page 2-72.
1-28 WaterCAD User's Guide

Orientation
1.2 What’s New?

Note: Support for AutoCAD R14 has been discontinued in WaterCAD.
Windows 2000 and XP are the only supported operating
systems.
WaterCAD includes a variety of new and enhanced features, including:
• Skelebrator™—Lets you reduce complex raw GIS assets into accurate modeling
representations while automatically preserving pipe network integrity and
hydraulic capacity. Skelebrator is available as an optional feature level.
• Reflective Data Model—Extends the data coverage in real-time by adding
custom fields, attributes, and objects.
• WaterObjects™—Adds custom functionality and developing components and
full applications using standard programming languages and scripts. WaterObjects
customization is available as an optional feature level.
• GeoGrapher™—Provides advanced visualization and graphic presentation.
• GIS-Style Background Layer Control—Lets you easily manage multiple back-
ground layers and annotation.
• Pump Definition Manager—Lets you manage custom pump definitions that can
be reused throughout your model and minimize the duplication of data.
• GEMSLinks™—Shows how to program against WaterObjects. This object
model sample written in C# lets you link elements in your model to external meta-
data, such as a pump to a picture of the pump.
• Custom Tools—You can populate the WaterCAD Tools menu with your own
custom-built tools using the new External Tools Manager.
• Parallel VSPs - You can now utilize Variable Speed Pumps (VSPs or Variable
Speed Drives - VSDs) in parallel, allowing you to more accurately model real-
world networks.
• Pipe Split—You can now split an existing pipe by placing a node element at the
point of the split using intuitive drag-and-drop functionality.
• Pipe Disconnect/Reconnect—You can now disconnect existing pipes from the
connected end node, and reconnect it to another node without deleting and
redrawing the nodes and/or pipes.
• Scalable Color Coding Legend—The color coding legend can now be resized
independently of the text height multiplier.
• AutoCAD 2004 Support—WaterCAD offers full integration with AutoCAD,
including the latest release, AutoCAD 2004. AutoCAD integration is an optional
feature level.

What’s New?
1.2.1 Previously Added in WaterCAD v5.0
• Darwin Calibration—Darwin Calibrator harnesses the power of genetic algo-

rithms to automatically calibrate pipe roughness, demands, and pipe status. An
unlimited number of calibration scenarios can be automatically generated and
ranked by their proximity to your observed data, and the adjustments suggested by
the calibrator can be automatically applied to your model. Manual calibration can
also be performed from within the Darwin Calibrator on selected groups of
elements or for all pipes and junctions in the model. The Darwin Calibrator is
available as an optional feature level.
• Active Topology Alternative—By using the Active Topology Alternatives
feature, you can temporarily remove any of the network elements from the
drawing view. While these elements are Inactive, they are not included in any
calculations. This capability allows you to maintain multiple network configura-
tion scenarios within a single project file, eliminating the need to switch between
multiple files.
• Variable Speed Pumps—You can make any pump a variable speed pump. You
can control variable speed pumps using a pump speed pattern or choose to have
the pump adjust its speed to meet a specific head at a target node.
• Energy Cost Analysis—WaterCAD can estimate the energy costs associated with
running the pumps in a network. This feature goes beyond calculating the amount
of electricity used in that it also accounts for the energy losses and gains associ-
ated with tank level changes over time.
• Logical Rule-Based Controls—Logical Rule Based Controls provide greater
flexibility and functionality than simple controls, giving you enhanced ability to
dictate the behavior of your system.
• System Head Curve Generation—WaterCAD can automatically generate
system head curves, which can be used to find the appropriate pump size for the
system or to find the operating point for an existing pump.
• General Purpose Valve—GPVs can be used to represent reduced pressure back-
flow prevention valves, well draw-down behavior, turbines, or any other device or
situation with a unique headloss-to-flow relationship.
• Demand and Pattern Import—You can import demands and patterns from
ASCII text files.
• Time Variable Reservoir—HGL patterns can now be applied to reservoirs,
providing the ability to simulate tidal activity and situations where the reservoir
represents a tie-in to another system whose pressure varies with time.
• Manual Fire Flow Scenarios—With only a small amount of input data, you can
have the program automatically create fire flow scenarios for each individual node
in which a user-defined fire flow demand is applied. You can then perform a batch
run on these scenarios to compare them, or run a steady-state or extended-period
simulation (EPS) on each individual scenario.

Orientation
• Flow Emitters—Use Flow Emitters to model fire sprinklers, irrigation systems,

leakage, or any other situation in which the node demand varies in proportion to
the pressure at the emitter node.
• Totalizing Flow Meters—By using Totalizing Flow Meters, you can determine
the total and net amount of flow passing through any network element.
• Submodel Import and Export—Export a model, or portions thereof, for import
into other projects.
• Animation Support—Animate the plan and profile views separately or at the
same time to serve as an ideal tool for presentations and output analysis.
• Quick Attribute Selector—The Quick Attribute Selector organizes the available
attributes into groups of related attribute types, allowing you to easily find the
desired attribute.
• Mouse Wheel Pan and Zoom—You can pan and zoom inside the drawing pane
using the mouse wheel.
• Time Of Day Support—WaterCAD has Time-of Day support, using a standard
24-hour clock (AM and PM).
• Enhanced Filtering Capability—In addition to the filtering options available in
previous versions, WaterCAD lets you filter using the operators Begins With and
Contains.
• Improved Element Calculation Messages—A printable list of all elements with
messages and warnings can now be accessed from the Calculation Results tab.
• Improved Element Graphs—Element graphs can now display multiple elements
simultaneously.
• AutoCAD Double-Click Support—Double-clicking an element opens the
Element Editor dialog box for that element, eliminating the need to select the Edit
menu command.
• AutoCAD Multi-line Tooltips—Hovering the mouse cursor over an element will
open a multi-line tooltip, which displays any current Annotation applied to that
element.
• AutoCAD Contour Labeling—Contour labeling can now be achieved using
WaterCAD commands. Labels can be applied to the ends or the interior of the
contour lines.
• Windows XP Support—WaterCAD is now compatible with Windows XP.
• Editable Quick View—The Quick View Window has always been the fastest
way to view the data associated with any element. Now you can use Quick View
to make input changes as well (and, as you would expect, with full undo/redo
support).

What’s New?
• Network Licensing—Purchase a multi-seat license. With the purchase of the

AutoCAD version of WaterCAD, your engineers and technicians can individually
use WaterCAD in either Stand-Alone mode or AutoCAD mode and share project
files.
• Custom Fields—Utilize user-defined custom fields for storing information,
which you can use to perform many standard operations including filtering,
sorting, and color-coding.
• User-Defined Groups—Organize your input, profiling, and reporting steps with
persistent user-defined groups of pipes and nodes by type or any other basis.
• Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion—Batch convert existing AutoCAD lines, polylines,
and blocks to water distribution elements via automated polyline-to-pipe options.
Allows you to customize polyline-to-pipe parameters.
• Drawing Review—Quickly navigate your model using the drawing review tool in
order to identify and resolve design problems in the network.
• Element Relabeling—Automatically renumber, replace, or append a prefix/suffix
to selected element labels.
• Aerial View—Access this separate window to facilitate zooming, panning, and
locating a small viewing area in the main window.
• Aligning Pipe Labels—Automatically align pipe labels and annotations with the
associated pipe.
• Cost Estimating—Perform detailed cost estimates using an integrated cost anal-
ysis modeling subsystem. Calculate a planning-level estimate of the capital cost
associated with an entire system or any portion of a system. This makes it easy to
compare the costs associated with the various scenarios, thus helping to ensure
that the most cost-effective design is chosen.
• Contouring by Selection Set—Generate contours based on any model parameter
for a subset of the model.
• Fire Flow Capacity—Analyze fire-flow capacity of predefined subsets of the
network. Color-code and contour the system or a selection set according to avail-
able fire flow.
• Labels—Automatically label pressure, flow quantity, and any other selected
input/output parameter. Dynamically updates annotations (labels) with each calcu-
lation, alternative scenario, or change in time step.

Orientation
• International Settings—Select a local date and time format.

• External Data Sources—Externalize and leverage existing enterprise data using
standard database connections. Freely exchange data for all network elements
with GIS software using exclusive dynamic shapefile connections. Extract, trans-
form, and load enterprise information to and from the model using built-in auto-
mated data tools. Avoid data preprocessing or intermediate file generation.
Preserve the consistency of external data using built-in automated data model
filters that dynamically validate and enforce model integrity.
1.3 Installation, Upgrades, and Updates

This section lets you know:
• “Minimum System Requirements” on page 1-33

• “Installing Haestad Methods’ Products” on page 1-35
• “Uninstalling Haestad Methods’ Products” on page 1-35
• “Troubleshooting Setup or Uninstallation” on page 1-35
• “Software Registration” on page 1-36
• “Upgrades” on page 1-37
• “Globe Button” on page 1-37
• “Network Licensing” on page 1-37
• “Registering Network Programs” on page 1-38
1.3.1 Minimum System Requirements
Note: Support for AutoCAD R14 has been discontinued in WaterCAD.

Windows 2000 and XP are the only supported operating
systems.
We recommend the following minimum and recommended system requirements for

running WaterCAD without significant delays.
The RAM requirement for AutoCAD Mode is due to AutoCAD and operating system
demands, not WaterCAD itself.
• “WaterCAD Stand-Alone” on page 1-34

• “AutoCAD Mode” on page 1-34

Installation, Upgrades, and Updates
WaterCAD Stand-Alone
Processor: Pentium III - 1 GHz
RAM: 128 Megabytes
150 Megabytes of free storage space,

Hard Disk:
with additional room for data files
Operating
Windows 2000 or Windows XP
System:
Display: 800 x 600 resolution, 256 colors
AutoCAD Mode
Processor: Pentium III - 1 GHz
RAM: 256 Megabytes
150 Megabytes of free storage space,

Hard Disk:
with additional room for data files
Display: 800 x 600 resolution, 256 colors
Recommended
While Haestad Methods’ software will perform adequately given the minimum
system requirements, performance will only improve with a faster system. Our prod-
ucts are designed to perform at optimal levels with a fast CPU and ample amounts of
RAM and free disk space. We highly recommend running our software on the best
system possible to maximize its potential, especially for larger models containing
thousands of pipes. We understand that an engineer’s time is a valuable commodity,
and we have designed our software to help make the most of that time.

Orientation
1.3.2 Installing Haestad Methods’ Products
Note: If you own a network license version of the software, see

“Network Licensing” on page 1-37. If you still have questions,
consult the KnowledgeBase on our Web site, http://
www.haestad.com or contact Haestad Methods technical support.
For Windows 2000 and Windows XP, follow these steps to install a single-user license
copy of WaterCAD:
1. If you have not done so, turn on your computer.

2. Place the diskette labeled Disk 1 in the floppy-disk drive (commonly the a: or b:
drive).
3. Place the CD in your CD-ROM drive (commonly the d: or e: drive).
4. If the Autorun feature of the operating system is enabled, setup will begin auto-
matically. Proceed to step six.
5. If Autorun is disabled, click the Start button on the task bar, select Run, and type
d:\setup (use the actual drive letter of the CD-ROM drive if it is not the d: drive),
and then click OK.
6. Follow the instructions of the Setup Wizard.
1.3.3 Uninstalling Haestad Methods’ Products
Haestad Methods’ products come with an uninstall option. After a single-user license
copy of a Haestad Methods’ product is installed on a computer, it must be uninstalled
before a new installation can occur.
To uninstall the program, put the original floppy disk labeled Disk 1 that came with
the product into the floppy-disk drive. On the Windows Start Bar, click
Start\Program Files\Haestad Methods\WaterCAD\Uninstall WaterCAD.
1.3.4 Troubleshooting Setup or Uninstallation
Because of the multi-tasking capabilities of Windows, you may have applications

running in the background that make it difficult for the setup routines to determine the
configuration of your current system. If you have difficulties during the installation
(setup) or uninstallation process, please try these steps before contacting our technical
support staff:
• Restart your PC.

• Verify that there are no other programs running. You can see applications
currently in use by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del. Exit any applications that are running
and restart your machine.
• Run setup or uninstall again without running any other program first.
If these steps fail to successfully install or uninstall the product, contact our support
staff.
1.3.5 Software Registration
Note: If you own a network license version of the software, see

“Network Licensing” on page 1-37. If you still have questions,
consult the KnowledgeBase on our Web site, http://
www.haestad.com or contact Haestad Methods technical support.
During the installation of the program, a dialog box will prompt you to register the
software. Please note the label with your registration information is on the inside of
the back cover of the manual.
Although this software is not copy protected, registration is required to unlock the
software capabilities for the hydraulic features that you have licensed. All registration
information must be entered into the Registration dialog box exactly as it appears on
the label.
• Company
• City
• State/Country
• Product ID
• Registration Number
After you have registered the software, you can check your current registration status
by opening the registration dialog box in the software itself.
To open the Registration dialog box:
• Select Help > About.

• Click the Registration button in the About dialog box.
The current registration status (number of licenses, expiration date, feature level, etc.)
will be displayed.

Orientation
• You can use the Copy button to place the registration information in the Windows
Clipboard so that you can paste it into another Windows application.
• You can also use the Print button to print the information shown in the Registra-
tion Form dialog box.
1.3.6 Upgrades
When you click the Registration button on the Help > About WaterCAD dialog box,
the current registration status (number of licenses, expiration date, feature level, etc.)
is displayed. To upgrade to more pipes or inlets, higher feature levels, or additional
licenses, contact our sales team today and request information about our ClientCare®
Program. We will provide the information you need to get up and running in no time!
1.3.7 Globe Button
Note: Use the Globe button to keep your investment current.
Haestad Methods makes it easy to stay up-to-date with the latest advances in
our software. Software maintenance releases can be downloaded from the
Haestad Methods’ Web site quickly and easily if you are a subscriber to our
ClientCare Program. Just click the Globe icon on the tool palette to launch your
preferred Web browser and open the Haestad Methods’ ClientCare Web site. The Web
site will automatically check to see if your installed version is the latest available. If it
is not, you will have the opportunity to download the correct upgrade to bring your
software up-to-date.
The ClientCare Program also gives you access to our extensive KnowledgeBase™ for
answers to Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ). Contact the Haestad Methods sales
team for more information about our ClientCare Program.
1.3.8 Network Licensing
Network versions of this product are available. If you purchased a network version,
your program will run at any workstation located on your network if a floating license
key is available for use. Floating licenses allow one or more concurrent users of a
particular application to access and use the full capabilities of the software if the
number of concurrent licenses does not exceed the number allowed under the terms of
the license sale. Once the number of concurrent users exceeds the licensed number,
new application sessions will run in a limited demo mode.
Network licensing is implemented using Rainbow Industries SentinelLM™ license

manager. Administrators should refer to the SentinelLM™ System Administrators
Guide for details on implementing network licensing at your location.

1.3.9 Registering Network Programs
During the installation of the network deployment folder, a dialog box will appear
asking you to register the software. The label with your registration information is on
the inside back cover of the manual. This registration data is required to enable the
software capabilities for the hydraulic network size and features that you have
licensed. All registration information must be entered into the Registration dialog box
exactly as it appears on the label.
• Company
• City
• State/Country
• Product ID
• Registration Number
After you have registered the software, you can view the current registration and
floating license usage status at any of the workstations that has the product software
installed on it.
To open the Registration dialog box:
• Select Help > About.

• Click the Registration button.
The current registration status (number of floating licenses, expiration date, feature
level, etc.) will be displayed. If all available floating licenses are in current use, the
software will run in demo mode.
Network administrators may activate network licenses and upgrade the features served
by their floating licenses by invoking the Request License option, which is activated
using the Registration button on this dialog box.
• You can use the Copy button to export the registration information to the
Windows Clipboard so that you can paste it into other Windows applications.
• You can use the Print button to print the information shown.

Orientation
Requesting a Permanent Network License

System administrators who are responsible for managing network license versions of
Haestad Methods’ software must activate their organization’s floating licenses by
obtaining a permanent license file from Haestad Methods. This may be done using the
Request License button on the Registration dialog box. This button will only be avail-
able for users who have purchased the network-licensing feature.
Note: Haestad Methods uses SentinelLM License Manager software

from Rainbow Technologies to manage network licensing for
this application. For more information concerning the
administration of the Haestad Methods floating network
licensing, please see the Sentinel online documentation that
installed with your network license server software.
To acquire a network license file, the administrator must first generate the network
locking codes for the computer that will be acting as the network license server. To get
your license server locking code, use the SentinelLM echoid utility. This is installed
with the license server software on the computer acting as the network license host for
this application.
Note: The echoid utility must be run from the same computer that will
act as the license server host for this particular Haestad
Methods application.
Write down the values for the locking codes that are posted in the echoid utility’s
message box. Be certain to record these values accurately, as they will be used by
Haestad Methods to generate a custom license file keyed to the specific license
server’s hardware signature. Once issued, a license key-code may not be installed on
another machine. You will not be able to transport the license server to another
network machine without obtaining new lock codes.
With echoid values in hand, start the Haestad Methods product application on any
workstation located on the network served by the license manager. You can even
install and run the Haestad Methods application from the same computer that will be
acting as the license server host computer.
Select Help > About to open the Registration dialog box. Open the Request License
Key dialog box using the Request License button. Fill out the form, then either e-mail
or fax the completed form to Haestad Methods using the Submit Request button.

Installation Guide for Network License Versions

To set up a Haestad Methods’ software product for operation as a network licensed
version:
1. Place the diskette labeled Disk 1 in the floppy-disk drive (commonly the a: or b:
drive).
2. Place the CD in your CD-ROM drive (commonly the d: or e: drive).
3. If the Autorun feature of the operating system is enabled, setup will begin auto-
matically. Proceed to step 5.
4. If Autorun is disabled, click the Start button on the task bar, select Run, and type
d:\setup (use the actual drive letter of the CD-ROM drive if it is not the d: drive).
Click OK.
5. To perform the following steps, you must have full administrator privileges for the
target network-based installation folders. Follow the instructions of the Setup
Wizard, which will guide you through the installation of two components:
– Network Deployment Folder—A directory installed on a network node that
is available from all client workstations on which the license product will be
installed. Users of the floating licenses will invoke the network-based installa-
tion utility SETUP.EXE, which will install and configure the application to
each client workstation.
– Network License Manager and Utilities—The license manager service
executable file that will automatically monitor availability and distribute
network floating licenses to client applications as they are started up across
the license hosting LAN. The license manager may be installed on any shared
node in the network, but is generally located on a network server machine.
6. Start the license server using the appropriate procedure for the host machine’s
operating system:
– Windows 2000 and XP—Use the loadls utility via the Service Loader menu
option to install the license server. The license manager runs as a service and
can be manually controlled via the Windows Control Panel > Services group.
7. Announce the availability of the product via e-mail. Instruct interested users to
install the product by using the Start > Run menu command and browsing to the
network deployment folder installed in step 5 to run SETUP.EXE. The license
server ships with special 30-day licenses that will allow users to begin using the
application immediately.

Orientation
8. Obtain a permanent license file for the application. A permanent license file must
be obtained from Haestad Methods within 30 days of receipt of the product
package. Request a permanent license file by following these steps:
a. At the host computer on which the license server will run, use the echoid
utility via the Locking Codes menu option to determine the locking codes
that will be used to generate license keys for your network. The license key
file will be configured specifically for the license server machine installation.
Write these locking codes down.
b. Start the Haestad Methods’ product application at any workstation where the
product has been installed. The product can even be installed directly on the
computer acting as the license server.
c. Select Help > About and click the Registration button. Use the Request
License button at the bottom of the Registration dialog box and fill out the
License Key Request form with the system administrator contact and host
server locking code information. Be certain to accurately record the locking
codes obtained during the previous steps, since inaccurate information will
result in the generation of unusable license files.
d. Click the Submit Request button. Following the instructions in the form, e-
mail or fax the form to Haestad Methods. The activation request will be
processed, and a license file will be generated and e-mailed to the system
administrator making the request.
9. Use the lslic utility located in the AdminTools directory to modify the permanent
license file managed by the network license server. After the license key file
requested above is received via e-mail from Haestad Methods, save the file attach-
ment to a computer folder on any computer resident on the network serviced by
the running license server. For future convenience, safety, and ease-of-support, it
is recommended that the license file be saved in the license manager tools direc-
tory, AdminTools. This utility must be run from the operating system prompt.
Enter lslic -F <filename>, where <filename> is the name of the
license file attachment e-mailed by Haestad Methods and saved to the hard-drive.
This step will install the new license key into the license file, lservrc, located on
the same computer and in the same directory that the license server resides.
Once these steps are completed, floating licenses will be available to concurrent users
via the network. Should the number of users exceed the number of license keys avail-
able, the unlicensed client sessions will continue to run in demo mode.
Network Deployment Folder

Interested users may install the complete product via the network deployment folder
using the Windows Start > Run command. Browse to the deployment directory, and
run SETUP.EXE to install the program to a client workstation.

Learning WaterCAD
1.4 Learning WaterCAD

Use the following:
• “Using the WaterCAD Documentation” on page 1-28

• “How Do I?—Frequently Asked Questions” on page 1-42
• “Glossary” on page 1-42
• “Tutorials” on page 1-42
• “Sample Projects” on page 1-43
• “Haestad Methods’ Workshops” on page 1-43
1.4.1 How Do I?—Frequently Asked Questions
“How Do I?” is an easily referenced topic in WaterCAD’s online documentation. It is

a listing of commonly asked questions about WaterCAD. (For more information, see
“Frequently Asked Questions” on page A-673.)To use How Do I?, click Help > How
Do I? The listing of How Do I? topics will appear. Click the topic of your choice for a
detailed explanation.
1.4.2 Glossary
The glossary contains many terms used throughout the application and the online help.
To use the Glossary:
• Click Help > Contents to open the main Help window.

• Click the Contents tab, scroll to the bottom of the bookmarks list, and click the
Glossary bookmark.
1.4.3 Tutorials
Tutorials provide a quick introduction to WaterCAD. To access tutorials, click Help >
Tutorials.
To start a tutorial, select one from the list and click the play button.
End a tutorial at any time by either pressing the Esc key (in Stand-Alone
mode), or by clicking the X button in the lower section of any tutorial dialog box.

Orientation
1.4.4 Sample Projects
To explore one of the sample projects provided to demonstrate this software’s capabil-
ities:
1. Select File > Open to access the Open Project File dialog box.
2. Choose EXAMPLE?.WCD (or EXAMPLE?.DWG, if using WaterCAD in
AutoCAD mode) (where ? represents a number 1-5) from the Sample directory,
and click Open.
These are working network models, so you can explore the systems and see how
different elements are modeled. First, calculate the system by using the GO button on
the main toolbar. Then use Quick View, Graphs, Profiles, Tabular Views, Detailed
Reports, Color Coding (“Color Coding” on page 13-513), and Contouring (“Contour
Map Manager” on page 13-547) to see how the system behaves.
1.4.5 Haestad Methods’ Workshops
Haestad Methods offers a variety of workshops dealing with topics ranging from
urban stormwater management to water distribution modeling, alternating theory,
modeling insights, and hands-on practice with software instruction. These workshops
are held at various locations, and include discounted pricing when purchasing Haestad
Methods’ software.
For more information about our workshops (such as instructors, schedules, pricing,
and locations), please contact our sales department, or visit our Web site at http://
www.haestad.com for current workshop schedules and locations. We will be glad to
answer any questions you may have regarding the workshops and our other products
and services.
Haestad Methods offers a range of other training services including on-site, online,
and on-campus training. For detailed information on the availability of these options,
visit http://www.haestad.com/education.
1.5 Contacting Haestad Methods

For information on contacting Haestad Methods, see:
• “Sales” on page 1-44

• “Technical Support” on page 1-44
• “Addresses” on page 1-45
• “Your Suggestions Count” on page 1-45

Contacting Haestad Methods
1.5.1 Sales
Haestad Methods’ professional staff is ready to answer your questions. Please contact
your sales representative with any questions regarding Haestad Methods’ latest prod-
ucts and prices.
Phone: +1-203-755-1666
Fax: +1-203-597-1488
E-mail: sales@haestad.com
1.5.2 Technical Support
We hope that everything runs smoothly, and you never have a need for our technical
support staff. However, if you do need support, our highly-skilled staff offers their
services seven days a week and may be contacted by phone, fax, and the Internet. For
information on the various levels of support that we offer, contact our sales team and
request information about our ClientCare program.
When calling for support, in order to assist our technicians in troubleshooting your
problem, please be in front of your computer and have the following information
available:
• Operating system your computer is running (Windows 2000 or Windows XP).

• Name and build number of the Haestad Methods software you are calling about.
The build number can be determined by clicking Help > About WaterCAD. The
build number is the number in brackets located in the lower-left corner of the
dialog box that opens.
• A note of exactly what you were doing when you encountered the problem.
• Any error messages or other information displayed on your screen.
When e-mailing or faxing for support, please provide additional details as follows so
we can provide a timely and accurate response:
• Company name, address, and phone number

• A detailed explanation of your concerns
• The HAESTAD.LOG and ERROR.LOG files located in the product directory
Support Hours
Monday - Friday: 9:00 AM EST to 8:00 PM EST
Saturday - Sunday: 9:00 AM EST to 5:00 PM EST

Orientation
You can contact our technical support team at:
Phone: +1-203-755-1666
Fax: +1-203-597-1488
E-mail: support@haestad.com
1.5.3 Addresses
Use this address information to contact us:
Internet: http://www.haestad.com
E-mail: sales@haestad.com
support@haestad.com
info@haestad.com
Phone: +1-203-755-1666
Fax: +1-203-597-1488
Mail: Haestad Methods
37 Brookside Road
Waterbury, CT 06708-1499 USA
1.5.4 Your Suggestions Count
At Haestad Methods, we strive to continually provide you with sophisticated software

and documentation. We are very interested in hearing your suggestions for improving
our products, our online help system, and our printed manuals. Your feedback will
guide us in developing products that will make you more productive. Please let us hear
from you (info@haestad.com)!

Contacting Haestad Methods

Chapter
WaterCAD Main 2
Window
If you are already familiar with standard Microsoft Windows interfaces, you will find
WaterCAD to be intuitive and comfortable. Even if you are not accustomed to
Windows, just a few minutes of exploring WaterCAD should be enough to acquaint
you with the flexibility and power that this program offers.
This section describes the program’s main window, menus, and toolbars, letting you
interact with this software in a quick and efficient manner. For more information about
tools for layout, annotating, and editing, see “Layout and Editing Tools” on page 5-
255.
For more information, see:
• “WaterCAD Menus” on page 2-57

• “WaterCAD Toolbars” on page 2-78
• “Status Bar” on page 2-83
2.1 Main Window Components

Main window components include:
• “Stand-Alone and AutoCAD Mode” on page 2-48

• “WaterCAD Main Window” on page 2-49
• “Drawing Pane” on page 2-50
• “Layer Controls” on page 2-51
• “DXF Properties Dialog Box” on page 2-53
• “Shapefile Properties Dialog Box” on page 2-53
• “Status Bar” on page 2-55
• “Menus, Toolbars, and Shortcut Keys” on page 2-55
• “Command Line” on page 2-57

Main Window Components
2.1.1 Stand-Alone and AutoCAD Mode
Note: AutoCAD mode is an available feature level. Contact us to

upgrade your WaterCAD Stand-Alone version to include the
AutoCAD integration feature level (for more information, see
“Contacting Haestad Methods” on page 1-43).
Both the Stand-Alone graphical editor and the AutoCAD interface perform actions
through the WaterCAD model server.
This use of a common central model enables both modes to perform the same func-
tions with the same behaviors. For example, graphical layout and model management
are virtually identical between the two modes.
Note: Because of the common WaterCAD model server, model data is

easily shared between AutoCAD and Stand-Alone modes.
One advantage of Stand-Alone mode is that your interaction is more streamlined and
dynamic by virtue of the fact that the editing environment is a dedicated network
editor. Also, since AutoCAD is not needed to run in Stand-Alone mode, less system
resources and memory are required.
A significant advantage of the AutoCAD mode is that you can create and model your
network directly within your primary drafting environment. This gives you access to
all of AutoCAD’s powerful drafting and presentation tools, while still enabling you to
perform WaterCAD modeling tasks like editing, solving, and data management. This
relationship between WaterCAD and AutoCAD enables extremely detailed and accu-
rate mapping of model features, and provides the full array of output and presentation
features available in AutoCAD. This facility provides the most flexibility and the
highest degree of compatibility with other CAD-based applications and drawing data
maintained at your organization.

WaterCAD Main Window
2.1.2 WaterCAD Main Window
Both the WaterCAD Stand-Alone interface and the AutoCAD interface have many
components common to Windows-based programs. The following figures illustrate
some of the important areas that make up the WaterCAD Stand-Alone and AutoCAD
2002 interfaces (the WaterCAD main window looks fairly similar in AutoCAD 2000
and AutoCAD 2002).
Menus
Project
Layer
Controls
Toolbars
Drawing pane
Background
Layer Control
Status bar
Scroll bars
Notice that many of the window components (such as the menus and toolbars) are
very similar for the Stand-Alone editor and AutoCAD. Other features (such as the
command line) are only available in AutoCAD.

Menus
WaterCAD toolbars
AutoCAD
toolbars
Drawing pane
AutoCAD
command line
Status bar
Scroll bars
For more information regarding the various functions and behaviors of AutoCAD,
please refer to Autodesk’s AutoCAD documentation.
2.1.3 Drawing Pane
The drawing pane, the center of WaterCAD graphical activity, is where the water
network elements are displayed. It is the main interactive area for creating elements,
editing data, and even displaying results.
In Stand-Alone mode, the drawing pane can also display a background .DXF image.
This background can be helpful for aligning and positioning elements, as well as
adding additional drafting elements for printing plan views.

In AutoCAD mode, the drawing pane is where all graphical elements, not just
WaterCAD entities, are displayed and manipulated. Lines, arcs, text, and many other
drafting elements can be created and modified within the drawing pane.
2.1.4 Layer Controls
To the left of the main drawing pane are the background and project layer controls.
These controls determine the visibility of element labels, annotation, background
drawings, and various symbols in the main drawing pane. Layer controls include:
• “Project Layers” on page 2-51

• “Background Layers” on page 2-52
Project Layers
The Project Layers pane lists the various display components divided into layers, and
allows you to control the visibility of each of these symbology layers. Selecting the
check box next to a symbology layer causes that layer to become visible in the main
drawing pane; clearing it causes it to become invisible. The project symbology layers
are as follows:
• Element Labels—The layer that contains the element labels for all elements.
• Annotation—This layer contains all dynamic annotation, as applied in the
Element Annotation Wizard.
• Flow Arrows—This layer contains the flow arrows that indicate the direction of
flow after a calculation has been successfully completed.
• Control Symbols—This layer contains the symbols that are applied to pumps,
valves, and pipes that are associated with simple and logical controls.
• Source Symbols—This layer contains the symbols that are applied to nodes that
are designated as constituent sources during water quality analysis.
• Graphical Annotation—This layer contains the lines, borders, and text that is
applied using the Graphical Annotation tool.
• Spot Elevations—This layer contains all spot elevations, including imported and
manually placed spot elevations.

Background Layers
The Background Layers pane lists all background drawings that are associated with
the current project, and provides controls that can be used to add, edit, and remove
background layers.
Background layers
When a background layer is added, it appears in the Background Layers list pane,
along with an associated check box that is used to control that layer’s visibility.
Selecting the check box next to a layer causes that layer to become visible in the main
drawing pane; clearing it causes it to become invisible.
The following controls can be found directly above the Background Layers pane:
• Check box—Select the check box next to a background layer to make that layer
visible.
• Insert—Opens a browse dialog box that allows you to choose the file to use as a
background layer.
• Edit—Opens the Properties dialog box to allow various settings of the currently
highlighted background layer to be modified.
• Delete—Removes the currently highlighted background layer.

Note: When multiple background layers are overlaid, priority is given

to the one that appears highest in the list. In other words, a layer
in the first list position will be drawn “on top of” all other layers,
since they are all below it on the list.
• Shift Up—Moves the currently highlighted background layer up one place in the
background layers list pane.
• Shift Down—Moves the currently highlighted background layer down one place
in the background layers list pane.
2.1.5 DXF Properties Dialog Box
This dialog box appears after the Insert Background Layer button is selected and after
a DXF drawing file has been chosen. The following controls can be used to define the
properties of the background layer:
• File Name—This field lists the path and filename of the .DXF to use as a back-
ground layer. The path and filename can be typed here manually to choose a
drawing file, or the file can be specified using the Browse button.
• Browse—Opens a browse dialog box, letting you select the file to be used as a
background layer.
• Label—An identifying label for the background layer.
• Background Color—This field allows you to specify the color in which the back-
ground layer elements will be displayed. Click the Ellipsis (…) button to open a
palette containing more color choices.
• 1 DXF Unit = 1—Choose a unit from the drop-down list. This is the unit associ-
ated with the spatial data within the .DXF. For example, if the X and Y coordi-
nates of the .DXF represent feet, choose ft. from the list.
• Build Display List—Select this check box (checked) to generate a display list
that will cause the file to load more slowly, but display more quickly.
2.1.6 Shapefile Properties Dialog Box
This dialog box opens after you click the Insert Background Layer button and after a
shapefile drawing file has been chosen. The following controls can be used to define
the properties of the background layer:
• File Name—This field lists the path and filename of the shapefile to use as a
background layer. The path and filename can be typed here manually to choose a
drawing file, or the file can be specified using the Browse button.
• Browse—Opens a browse dialog box, letting you select the file to be used as a
background layer.

• Label—An identifying label for the background layer.

• 1 Shapefile Unit = 1—Choose a unit from the drop-down list. This is the unit
associated with the spatial data within the shapefile. For example, if the X and Y
coordinates of the shapefile represent feet, choose ft. from the list.
• Background Color—This field allows you to specify the color in which the back-
ground layer elements will be displayed. Click the Ellipsis (…) button to open a
palette containing more color choices.
• Symbol—This drop-down menu allows you to select the symbol that will be used
to represent points in a point-shapefile-derived background layer. This control is
only available when a point shapefile has been selected.
• Size—This field allows you to specify the relative size of the symbols that will be
used to represent points in a point-shapefile-derived background layer. This
control is only available when a point shapefile has been selected.
• Build Display List—Select this check box (checked) to generate a display list
that will cause the file to load more slowly, but display more quickly. This check
box is only available when a polygon or polyline shapefile has been selected.
Tip: It is possible to display multiple layers in such a way that filled

polygons are outlined in another color.
To produce this effect, add the same shapefile to the

background layers list twice. For one of these shapefile layers,
leave the Fill Figures check box cleared and choose the desired
color. In the other layer, select the Fill Figures check box and
choose a different color. The unfilled layer must be above the
other in the list to produce the effect.
• Fill Figures?—Select this check box (checked) to cause the polygons to be filled
with the background color. When the box is unchecked, only an outline is
displayed. This check box is only available when a polygon shapefile has been
selected.

2.1.7 Status Bar
Note: When you position the mouse pointer over a toolbar button or
menu item, the status pane will display a descriptive message.
Leave the mouse over a section of the status pane to display an
informative tip.
The status bar is located along the bottom of the main application window and
provides useful information about application settings, the current user activity, file
save status, etc.
2.1.8 Menus, Toolbars, and Shortcut Keys
Anyone who has ever watched someone else use a computer should realize that not all
people use computers in the same way. Some prefer to primarily use the mouse, some
the keyboard, and others use a combination of both.
For this reason, Haestad Methods’ programs provide access to the most common
features through several means, including:
• “Menus” on page 2-55

• “Toolbars” on page 2-56
• “Shortcut Keys” on page 2-56
• “Quick Attribute Selector” on page 2-56
• “Command Line” on page 2-57
Menus
As with any Windows-based program, the menu system provides easy access to many
features. Items can be accessed by clicking the desired menu text, or by pressing the
Alt key to activate the menus and then pressing the key for the underlined letter of the
menu item you wish to access.
For example, to open an existing file you can use the mouse to select File > Open, or
you can press the Alt and F keys (Alt + F), then O on the keyboard.

Toolbars
Toolbar buttons offer one-click access to some of the most commonly used features,
giving you a quicker way to perform the most frequent operations.
For example, to open an existing file (the equivalent of selecting File >
Open), simply click the File Open button.
Shortcut Keys
Shortcut keys are Ctrl-key (Control) combination sequences that provide quick access
to common application functions. If a shortcut is available for a menu item, it will be
indicated in the menu itself.
For example, to open an existing file (the equivalent of selecting File > Open) you
can press the Ctrl and O keys (Ctrl + O) at the same time.
Quick Attribute Selector

Whenever attributes are selected, such as when setting up annotations or database
connections, you can select them from organized categories using the Quick Attribute
Selector tool.
Click the attribute field to open the menu. From this menu you can select
attributes from the list of available categories.

Command Line
The command line is a special area that is not available in Stand-Alone mode. In
AutoCAD mode, this area enables you to type commands directly, rather than using
the menus, toolbars, or shortcut keys.
For example, to open an existing AutoCAD file (the equivalent of selecting File >
Open) you can simply type the command OPEN at the AutoCAD command line.
Many of AutoCAD’s commands are easy to enter at the command line, including
accessing drafting tools (like LINE and CIRCLE) and editing tools (like MOVE and
ERASE). Modeling elements can also be manipulated through the AutoCAD
command line, just as they can be manipulated via the menus or toolbars.
For more information on the AutoCAD command line, please see the AutoCAD docu-
mentation.
2.2 WaterCAD Menus

Although the toolbars and shortcut keys provide quick and easy access to commonly
used features, the menu system provides much more comprehensive access to
WaterCAD properties and behaviors. Since toolbar buttons and shortcut keys do not
exist for all of these features, the menus are a logical choice for exploring all areas of
WaterCAD. This section will introduce you to many of the things you can do with the
menus in WaterCAD and show you how you can access these features, including the
toolbar buttons and shortcut keys that are available.
Commands are grouped under several menus, which are pretty much identical
between Haestad Methods products. This makes any Haestad Methods product look
very familiar once you already know one. The menu system for WaterCAD consists of
the following selections:
• “File Menu” on page 2-58

• “Edit Menu” on page 2-61
• “Analysis Menu” on page 2-63
• “View Menu” on page 2-64
• “Tools Menu” on page 2-66
• “Report Menu” on page 2-70
• “Help Menu” on page 2-70

WaterCAD Menus
2.2.1 File Menu
The File menu contains many of the items dealing with project management. It
provides features to create, read, write, and print project files, as well as features for
sharing data with databases and GIS systems.
New—Create a new project. When you choose this item, a dialog box will
appear so that you can enter a drive, directory, and filename for your new
project file. The Project Setup Wizard will then help you set up your new
project (for more information, see “Project Setup Wizard” on page 4-241).
Shortcut Key: Ctrl + N
Open—Load an existing project file from disk. When you select this item, a
dialog box will appear so that you can choose the name and location of the
project you want to open.
Shortcut Key: Ctrl + O
Save—Save the current project file to disk. While saving the project file, the
status pane will briefly display a message to show you the progress of the save
command.
Shortcut Key: Ctrl + S
Save As—Save the current project to disk under a different filename. When you use
this command, a dialog box will appear prompting you to enter the drive, directory,
and a new file name for your project.
Project Summary—Access the Project Summary information, such as the project

title and the project engineer (for more information, see “Project Summary” on
page 4-242).
Import > Shapefile—Build network elements from ESRI shapefiles. This command
will start the Shapefile Wizard, which will help you bring the GIS elements and their
associated data into your project (for more information, see “Import Shapefile
Wizard” on page 15-589).
Note: A similar command called “Change Entities to Pipes” is

available in the AutoCAD version under the Edit menu.
Import > Polyline-to-Pipe—Build network elements from a .DXF file. This

command will start the Polyline-to-Pipe Wizard, which will help you convert polyline
data representing geographical data into your project as pipes and nodes (for more
information, see “Polyline to Pipe Wizard” on page 16-600).

Note: WaterCAD v3 and v4 projects should simply be opened in

WaterCAD v5 (as any WaterCAD v5 project), without using the
Import command. However, once you save the project in
WaterCAD v5, the project files cannot be opened in WaterCAD v3
or v4 any longer.
Import > Network—Import data from KYPIPE v1 (see “Importing KYPIPE Data”
on page A-681), v2 or v3, EPANET 1.0 and 2.0 (see “Importing EPANET Files” on
page A-681), or Cybernet® (see “Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD/Cybernet
Versions” on page A-674) files.
Import > Spot Elevations—Bring spot elevation data from a space or comma delim-
ited ASCII file in a variety of formats.
Note: Coordinate data is included in the .WSM file so elements in the

imported submodel may overlap elements in the current
drawing. Imported elements will not overwrite the existing
elements, and may be moved to the desired location.
Import > Submodels—Combine current network with a previously exported

WaterCAD submodel. For information, see “Importing a Submodel” on page 4-240
and “Exporting a Submodel” on page 4-241.
Import > GEMS Project—Imports a GEMS .MDB file.
Import > Background Layer—Bring a .DXF drawing file or a shapefile into your
project as a background map. This command will open a dialog box that prompts you
to select the name and location of the desired .DXF or shapefile.
Import > WaterCAD—(AutoCAD mode only) Import a Stand-Alone WaterCAD file

(*.WCD) into WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode (for more information, see “Import
WaterCAD” on page 17-619).
Note: WaterCAD has the ability to import demands and patterns from
text files. This option is not available from the File Menu along
with the other import options, but can be found in the Demand
Alternative Editor and the Pattern Manager, respectively. For
more information, see “Importing Patterns” on page 9-396 and
“Importing Demands” on page 6-301.
Export > Shapefile—Export your project to ESRI shapefile format for access in GIS
applications. This command will start the Shapefile Wizard, which will help you
create shapefiles with the desired project elements and associated data.
Export > Submodels—Exports currently selected network elements to .WSM format

for importing into other WaterCAD projects.
Export > Spot Elevations—Export spot elevation data to a space or comma delimited
ASCII file.

WaterCAD Menus
Export > .DXF File—Export the entire network drawing to a .DXF format, which can
be read by all popular CAD programs. This command will open a dialog box
prompting you to enter the name and location for the .DXF file you would like to
create.
Synchronize > Database Connections—Access the Database Connection Manager

(see “Database Connection Manager” on page 15-574), which allows you to share
WaterCAD data with external databases, spreadsheets, and other ODBC compliant
sources. For more information, see “Shapefile and Database Connections” on
page 15-571.
Synchronize > Shapefile Connections—Access the Shapefile Connection Manager

(see “Shapefile Connection Manager” on page 15-586), which allows you to share
WaterCAD data with external GIS systems. For more information, see “Shapefile and
Database Connections” on page 15-571.
Synchronize GEMS Project—Brings into agreement the GEMS .MDB and the
WaterCAD .WCD.
Print—Print the current view of the project drawing to a printer. Profiles and tabular
reports are printed from their respective windows. The print command invokes the
standard Print dialog box, which allows you to select the printer and set up properties
to be used.
Shortcut Key: Ctrl + P
Print Preview—Open the Print Preview dialog box for the current view of the
project drawing. This feature allows you to see the drawing as it will be printed
before sending it to the printer.
Print Setup—Select the default printer for WaterCAD to use. You can also use this to
change options related to the printer driver, such as portrait or landscape orientation
and other printer details.
Exit—Close the current project and exit WaterCAD. If you made any changes to the
current project, you will be prompted to save the project before you exit WaterCAD.
Shortcut Key: Alt + F4
1, 2, etc.—The most recently opened project files appear at the bottom of the File
menu. Using this file list, you can quickly select and open a recently used file without
locating its drive and directory.

2.2.2 Edit Menu
The Edit menu provides access to basic commands for controlling a WaterCAD
Element, including element navigation, selection, deletion, and undo / redo.
Stand-Alone Mode
Undo [Last Action Performed]—Reverse the last reversible action performed.
Reversible actions include things such as element creation, deletion, editing, and
moves. The Undo command cannot reverse the effects of some model actions, such as
calculation, database synchronization, scenario creation, and tabular edits. Addition-
ally, to ensure that the model is maintained in a consistent state, the undo/redo history
will be flushed whenever an irreversible menu or button command is issued.
Shortcut Key: Ctrl + Z
Redo [Last Action Undone]—Reverse the effects of the last undone action. Any
action that can be undone can be redone.
Shortcut Key: Ctrl + Y
Delete—Erase selected elements. Deleting an element removes it from all aspects of

the project, including all scenarios.
Shortcut Key: Delete
Select > All—Select all of the elements in the current project.
Shortcut Key: Ctrl + A

Select > By Element > [Element Type]—Select all elements of a certain type, such
as all pipes or all junctions.
Select > By Selection Set—Select the elements contained in a predefined selection set
(for more information, see “Selection Sets” on page 5-263).
Select > Clear Selection—Resets the current selection set.
Find Element—Use the Find Element dialog box (see “Find Element” on page 5-
265) to locate an element and bring it to the center of the drawing pane. This element
search is based on the element label (note that this is not case sensitive).
Shortcut Key: Ctrl + F
Drawing Review—Open the Drawing Review window to isolate elements that may
need to be scrutinized for potential problems (orphaned nodes, elements with
messages, superimposed nodes, etc.). For more information, see “Drawing Review”
on page 5-267.

WaterCAD Menus
AutoCAD Mode
WaterCAD Undo [Last Action Performed]—Reverse the last reversible action
performed. Reversible actions include such things as element creation, deletion,
editing, and moves. The effects of some model actions cannot be reversed, such as
calculation, database synchronization, scenario creation, and tabular edits. Addition-
ally, to ensure that the model is maintained in a consistent state the undo/redo history
will be flushed whenever an irreversible menu or button command is issued.
WaterCAD Redo [Last Action Undone]—Reverse the effects of the last undone
action. Any action that can be undone can be redone.
Cut—Delete the selected entities and place them on the Windows clipboard. These
items can be pasted into other Windows programs or back into AutoCAD.
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+X
Copy—Place the selected entities from the current AutoCAD drawing on the
Windows clipboard.
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+C
Paste—Place the items on the Windows clipboard into the current AutoCAD drawing.
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+V

Paste Special—Place special items located on the Windows clipboard, such as Excel
Spreadsheets and Word documents, into the current AutoCAD drawing.
Select > All—Select all of the elements in the current project.
Select > By Element > [Element Type]—Select all elements of a certain type, such
as all pipes or all junctions.
Select > By Selection Set—Select the elements contained in a predefined selection set
(for more information, see “Selection Sets” on page 5-263).
Select > Clear Selection—Reset (empty) the current selection set.
Edit Element—Open an element’s dialog box. Select this item and click the element
you wish to edit.
Edit Elements—Edit a group of elements. Select this item, then select a group of
elements using the crosshairs or by windowing an area. After the elements have been
selected, right-click and the Table Manager will appear (for more information, see
“Table Manager” on page 7-330). The selected elements will be reported in the tables.

Modify Elements > Scale Elements—Scale the symbols representing the elements in
the current selection set.
Modify Elements > Rotate Labels—Rotate the labels of the elements in the current
selection set.
Modify Pipes > Insert Bend—Insert a bend along a selected Pressure Pipe Element.
Modify Pipes > Remove Bend—Delete a bend along a selected Pressure Pipe
Element.
Modify Pipes > Remove All Bends—Delete all the bends along a selected Pressure
Pipe Element.
Modify Pipes > Change Widths—Change the Width of the lines representing pipes.
Note: A similar command called Import Polyline to Pipe is available in

the Stand-Alone version (under the File menu).
Change Entities to Pipes—Build network elements from AutoCAD entities. This

command will start the Polyline to Pipe Wizard, which will help you convert the
desired polylines representing geographical data into pipes (for more information, see
“Polyline to Pipe Wizard” on page 16-600).
Find Element—Open the Find Element dialog box (see “Find Element” on page 5-
265), which allows you to locate an element and bring it to the center of the drawing
pane. This element search is based on the element label and is not case sensitive.
Review Drawing—Open the Drawing Review window, which is used to isolate

elements that need to be scrutinized for potential problems (orphaned nodes, elements
with messages, superimposed nodes, etc.). For more information, see “Drawing
Review” on page 5-267.
2.2.3 Analysis Menu
The Analysis menu contains items useful for managing calculations. These include the
scenario and alternative managers and the calculation commands.
Scenarios—Access the Scenario Control Center (see “Scenario Control Center” on

page 8-366), letting you analyze and recall an unlimited number of “What If?” alter-
native calculations for your model.
Alternatives—Access the Alternative Manager (see “Alternatives Manager” on

page 8-347), letting you organize your data into building blocks to be combined to
form scenarios.

WaterCAD Menus
Active Topology—Access the Active Topology Editor (see “Active Topology Alter-
native” on page 8-353), letting you temporarily remove elements from the drawing
view and network calculations.
Patterns—Access the Pattern Manager (see “Pattern Manager” on page 9-394),

letting you define automatic time-variable changes within the system.
Logical Controls—Access the Logical Controls Manager (see “Logical Control

Manager” on page 9-401), which lets you create, edit, and find rule-based or logical,
controls.
Zones—Access the Zone Manager (see “Zone Manager” on page 6-328). From here,
you can define zones in which to place network elements.
Pump Definitions—Opens the Pump Definition Manager, letting you create, manage,
and edit pump definition templates.
System Head Curve—Open the System Head Curve dialog box (see “System Head
Curve Dialog Box” on page 13-520), letting you enter the necessary input data to have
WaterCAD generate a system head curve.
Capital Costs—Open the Capital Cost Manager in order to view, edit, or

perform Capital Cost Estimating calculations. For more information, see
“Capital Cost Manager” on page 11-448.
Energy Costs—Open the Energy Cost Manager in order to view, edit, or

perform Energy Cost Estimating calculations. For more information, see
“Energy Cost Manager” on page 11-452.
Darwin Calibrator—Open the Darwin Calibration Manager.
Compute—Open the Calculation dialog box, which gives you access to

items such as calculation options and referenced alternatives. For more infor-
mation, see “Calculate Network” on page 9-383.
2.2.4 View Menu
Note: In AutoCAD mode, see the AutoCAD online help for more
information.
In both AutoCAD and Stand-Alone mode, the View menu provides access to tools
dealing with the drawing pane, toolbar visibility, and so forth.
In Stand-Alone mode, you are provided with the following tools:

Pan—Upon selection hold down the left mouse button to move the drawing.
Shortcut Key: Hold down the mouse wheel.

Zoom In—Enlarge the current view of the drawing.
Shortcut Key: + (Keypad)

Mouse: Hold down Ctrl while scrolling up with mouse
wheel.
Zoom Out—Reduce the current view of the drawing.
Shortcut Key: - (Keypad)

Mouse: Hold down Ctrl while scrolling down with mouse
wheel.
Zoom Window—Activate the user-defined zoom tool. This tool enables you
to select the corners of the area within the drawing pane that you wish to
enlarge.
Zoom Extents—Reset the drawing zoom factor such that all elements are
displayed in the drawing pane.
Zoom Previous—Return the drawing pane to the most recent view.
Zoom Center—Open the Zoom Center dialog box (see “Zoom Center” on
page 5-266), which lets you specify the central coordinates and zoom factor
to change the view in the drawing pane.
Refresh—Updates the main window view according to the latest information

contained within the WaterCAD datastore.
Auto-Refresh—Automatically updates the main window view according to

the latest information contained within the WaterCAD datastore whenever changes are
made.
Aerial View—Enable or disable the Aerial View window (see “Aerial View” on
page 5-266). This window lets you display a second view of the drawing at a larger
scale.
Quick Edit—Enable or disable the Quick Edit window (see “Quick Edit” on
page 5-273), which lets you quickly view input data, output data, and the
legend for active color coding for any element. The Quick Edit dialog box
also lets you edit the input data.
Toolbars > Standard—Toggle the display of the Standard toolbar at the top of the
window, which provides shortcuts to the most commonly used commands.

WaterCAD Menus
Toolbars > Analysis Toolbar—Toggle the display of the Analysis toolbar, which
includes the scenario selection list, as well as the time step selection list if applicable.
Status Pane—Toggle the display of information at the bottom of the window

regarding your current project.
2.2.5 Draw Menu (in AutoCAD Mode Only)
Note: You can add additional AutoCAD menus to your Haestad

Methods application menus using AutoCAD’s menuload
command. See the AutoCAD documentation for more
information.
The Draw menu is actually an AutoCAD menu that is accessible in the current
program.
2.2.6 Tools Menu
The Tools menu provides general tools for placing or modifying graphical elements,
annotating, color coding, contouring, changing the projects options, etc.
Selection Sets—Access the Selection Sets dialog box (see “Selection Sets Manager”
on page 5-263), which lets you create selection sets of elements based on element
labels, element types, filters, and other means.
Color Coding—Open the Color Coding dialog box (see “Color Coding” on
page 13-513), which lets you control the display of elements based on value
ranges such as pipe diameter, hydraulic grade, and so forth.
Element Annotation—Access to the Element Annotation dialog box (see

“Element Annotation” on page 13-509), which lets you display element
attribute labeling, such as pipe diameter and pipe flow.
Profiling—Open the Profile Setup dialog box (see “Profile Setup” on

page 13-552), which lets you generate a profile of your piping system along a
specified path.
Contouring—Access the Contour Map Manager (see “Contour Map

Manager” on page 13-547) to create and view contours.
Relabel Elements—Open the Relabel Elements dialog box (see “Relabel Elements
Dialog Box” on page 5-270), which lets you renumber some or all of your project
elements.
Element Labeling—Set the format for the labels applied to elements as they are
added to the drawing.

Prototypes—Specify the default values for new network elements.
Engineering Libraries—Declare the paths to and edit the libraries used in this
project.
User Data Extension—Open the User Data Extension dialog box (see “User Data
Extension Dialog Box” on page 6-323), where you can add and define custom data
fields. For instance, you can add new fields such as the pipe installation date.
FlexUnits—Open the FlexUnits dialog box (see “FlexUnits Manager” on page 4-

254), where you can control units and display precision for any parameter. Note that
you can also change the unit and display precision of variables from several other
areas within the program.
Layout > Select—Activate the selection tool used to highlight elements.

Once elements are selected, they may be moved or edited.
Layout > [Element Type]—Activate the corresponding element tool to place

elements in the graphical editor.
Layout > Spot Elevation—Activate the spot elevation tool, which is used to
add spot elevations.
Layout > Graphic Annotation—(Stand-Alone mode only) Activate various

annotation tools, which enable you to add lines, borders, and text elements to
the project drawing.
Layout > Legend—Activate the legend tool used to add a key for the current
drawing color coding for links and nodes.
Note: It is recommended practice top Compact Database every time a

a large amount of model data is deleted (alternatives, large
groups of elements, etc.).
Database Utilities > Compact Database—When you delete data from a WaterGEMS
project, such as elements or alternatives, the database store that WaterGEMS uses can
become fragmented, causing data storage to be inefficient. This can cause unneces-
sarily large data files, which can impact performance substantially. Compacting the
database with this command eliminates the empty data records, thereby defragmenting
the datastore and improving the performance of the file.
Skelebrator—Opens the Skelebrator dialog box, letting you perform network

reduction operations.
External Tools—This toolbar item contains all of the external tools that you have
added.
External Tools > Customize—This command opens the External Tool Manager.

WaterCAD Menus
Options—Specify settings for the current project, such as the friction method, coordi-
nate system, unit system, and auto-prompting.
Element Properties—(AutoCAD mode only) Control on which layer each type of

object and its associated text is placed. Also controls the text style for labels and anno-
tations.
Preferences—(AutoCAD mode only) Activate the AutoCAD Preferences command

in order to edit general AutoCAD settings.
Contour Labeling—(AutoCAD mode only) After exporting a contour plot to the

AutoCAD drawing, this option allows you to apply various label types to the contour.
For more information, see “Contour Labeling” on page 13-550.
External Tool Manager

The External Tool Manager lets you manage custom menu commands, which are then
located in the Tools menu for quick accessibility. You can create a custom menu
command from any executable file. Executable file types include:
• .exe
• .com
• .pif
• .bat
• .cmd
The External Tool Manager consists of the following elements:
External Tool List Pane—This pane lists the external tools that have been created.
All of the tools listed in this pane will be displayed in the Tools > External Tools
menu.
Add—This button opens the External Tools Manager, letting you create a new
external tool.
Edit—This button opens the currently highlighted tool’s External Tool Editor,
allowing you to modify its settings.
Duplicate—This button creates a copy of the currently highlighted tool.
Delete—This button deletes the currently highlighted tool.

External Tool Editor

The External Tool Editor lets you create custom menu commands, which are then
located in the Tools menu for quick accessibility. You can create a custom menu
command from any executable file. Executable file types include:
• .exe
• .com
• .pif
• .bat
• .cmd
Note: If an external tool is currently active and then activated again

from the External Tools menu, a new instance of the tool will be
launched. If your intent is simply to refresh the tool rather than
open another instance, you must add this functionality to the
external tool itself (the executable).
The External Tool Editor consists of the following controls:
Label—This field allows you to specify the name of the custom tool. Placing an
ampersand (&) character in front of a letter will cause that letter to be the shortcut key
for the command. (For example, If you name your tool &Custom Tool, C will be the
shortcut key for that command. If you name your tool Custom &Tool, T will be the
shortcut key for that command.)
Command—This field allows you to enter the full path to the executable file that the
tool will initiate.
Browse—This button opens a browse dialog box to allow you to select the executable
file that the tool will initiate.
Arguments—This optional field allows you to enter command line variables that are
passed to the tool or command when it is activated. The available arguments are:
• %(ProjDir)—This argument passes the current project directory to the executable

upon activation of the tool.
• %(ProjFileName)—This argument passes the current project file name (.WCD) to
the executable upon activation of the tool.
• %(ProjStoreFileName)—This argument passes the current project datastore file
name (.MDB) to the executable upon activation of the tool.
Initial Directory—Specifies the working directory of the tool or command.

WaterCAD Menus
2.2.7 Report Menu
The Report menu provides access to a collection of preformatted textual and graphical
reports. Furthermore, the report menu provides access to FlexTables (see “FlexTables”
on page 7-329), which enable you to create your own custom reports.
Element Details—Open the Detailed Reports dialog box (see “Element Details
Report” on page 13-515), which lets you print detailed reports for any set of elements.
Element Results—Open the Analysis Results dialog box (“Element Results Report”
on page 13-516), which lets you print reports of the results for any set of elements.
Element Graphs—Opens the Graph Setup dialog box (“Graph Setup” on page 13-
522) to let you set up custom graphs of any element or set of elements.
GeoGrapher—Opens the GeoGrapher advanced graph manager, letting you

create, edit, and manage new and previously created graphs.
FlexTables—Access the Table Manager (“Table Manager” on page 7-330),

which lets you open predefined tables or generate your own custom tables.
Scenario Summary—Generate a report for the current scenario, including an alterna-

tive summary, calculation options, etc.
Project Inventory—Generate a report summarizing the project elements, including

the number and breakdown of pipes, the number of manholes, and so forth.
Plan View—Generate plan view printable reports of the network for either the current
drawing display (Current View) or the entire drawing extents (Full View).
2.2.8 Help Menu
The Help menu contains items that relate to online documentation for
WaterCAD (which includes the information contained in the printed docu-
mentation, as well as updated information and built-in tutorials). Help menu
items can also be accessed from the Help button:
Contents: Opens the Table of Contents for the online help. For
more information, see “Using the Online Help” on
page 2-72.
How to Use Help: Accesses instructions for using the online help
system.
AutoCAD Help Topics: Accesses the AutoCAD online help.

Release Notes: Provides the latest information on the current version

of WaterCAD. This topic, which takes the place of a
README file, includes information about new
features, tips, performance tuning, and other general
information.
Services: Opens an Internet browser to Haestad Methods’ Web
site or a local page that provides an overview of the
services and products offered by Haestad Methods.
In the local page, accessed by selecting Content,
there are links to Haestad Methods Internet sites,
which are updated frequently.
Welcome Dialog Box: (In Stand-Alone mode only). Opens the Welcome
dialog box, which is also shown at program startup
(for more information, see “Welcome Dialog Box”
on page 4-243).
Tutorials: Accesses the interactive tutorials, which guide you
through many of the program’s features. Tutorials are
a great way to become familiar with new features (for
more information, see “Tutorials” on page 1-42).
Using WaterCAD: Opens a help topic with an Introduction to
WaterCAD and related elementary information.
How Do I: Provides instructions for tasks commonly performed
within the program, as well as frequently asked
questions.
About WaterCAD: Opens a dialog box displaying product and
registration information (for more information, see
“Software Registration” on page 1-36).

WaterCAD Menus
Using the Online Help

To open the online help for browsing, select Help > Contents. Use the table of
contents, index, or perform a search to locate the information you need. You can also
save a list of favorite help topics for quick reference.
Click Hide/Show to
hide or show the
Contents tab
To use context-sensitive help, click the Help button in any window or dialog box.
Note that the online help will open at the topic you want and the Contents tab is
hidden. Click the Show button in the online help toolbar to display the Contents tab.

Online Help Index
Use the Index tab to search the online help index. For most searches, the index should
provide better results more efficiently than the Search tab.
Type the
Click a topic and click Click a Related Topic
keyword you
Display to display the button to see and
want to find
selected topic select topics related to
the current one
To use the index:
1. Type the word (called keywords) you want to find.

2. Select the topic you want to see, and click Display. The topic you selected
displays in the help window. Keywords are highlighted.
3. If your keyword pertains to more than one topic, you are prompted to select the
topic you want. Click the topic to select it, and click Display.

WaterCAD Menus
Online Help Search
Use the Search tab to search for all instances of a word or words in the help system.
• If you enter more than one word, the online help will return only those topics that
contain all of the words you enter, though those topics might not have the words
all together or in the order you specify.
• If you enter more than one word inside quotation marks, the online help search
returns only topics with the complete phrase as typed.
To search for words:
1. Type the words (called keywords) you want to find.

2. Click List Topics.
3. Click the topic you want, to highlight it.
4. Click Display. The topic you selected displays in the help window; keywords are
highlighted.
Keywords are
highlighted in
the text
Type the keywords you

want to find and click
List Topics
Click a topic and click
Display to display the
selected topic

Online Help Favorites
You can use the Favorites tab to create a list of topics you frequently use.
• Click the Add button in the Favorites tab to add the current topic to your list of
favorites.
• Click Display to display the contents of the selected favorite topic in the help
window.
• Click Remove to remove the selected favorite topic from the Favorites tab.
Click Add to add the

current topic to the
Favorites tab
If you want to print the online help, consider opening the online book, which is set up
for printing.

WaterCAD Menus
Online Help Topics
Online help topics can be navigated by using hypertext and Related Topics.
Hypertext: Hypertext is blue, underlined text that is clickable.

Clicking hypertext displays the destination topic for
that hypertext link. Click Back to return to where
you were before you clicked the hypertext.
Related Topics: Related Topics is a button that displays at the end of
some help topics. If there is more than one related
topic, click the button to see a list of the related
topics. This list is hypertext. You can click an item in
the list to display the related topic. If there is only
one related topic, click the button to display that
related topic. Click Back to return to where you were
before you clicked the hypertext.
Click the Related Topic

button to see and
Click Back to return select topics related to
to the previous help the current one
topic

Navigation Arrows
In addition to the standard HTML Help navigation tools, WaterCAD online help
includes forward and backward arrows at the bottom-left of every topic that let you
navigate sequentially through the online help file. While the online book, .PDF, is
better suited to this kind of navigation, these buttons may be particularly helpful if you
are reviewing the WaterCAD lessons online (for more information, see “Quick Start
Lessons” on page 3-87).
Navigation buttons at
the bottom-left of every
topic
2.3 Using the Online Book (PDF)

Note: On-screen display of graphics in .PDF files is dependent on the
zoom level you use. For more optimal viewing of graphics in
Adobe Acrobat Reader, try using 167% and 208% zoom.
WaterCAD includes an Adobe Acrobat online book that you can open from the
WaterCAD group in your Start menu.
The online book contains reference material about using the software that is not
included in the printed book that accompanies the software. The online book is
designed so that you can view it on-screen or print page ranges.
Use the bookmarks, index, and search in the Adobe Acrobat Reader to find the
topic you want.

WaterCAD Toolbars
2.4 WaterCAD Toolbars

Toolbars include:
• “Toolbar Button Summaries” on page 2-78

• “Tool Pane Summary” on page 2-78
• “The Tool Palette” on page 2-81
• “Analysis Toolbar” on page 2-81
• “Animation Options” on page 2-82
• “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82
2.4.1 Toolbar Button Summaries
Note: In AutoCAD mode, some tools are provided by AutoCAD itself

(such as file open and save, zoom, etc.). These AutoCAD tools
are not included on the WaterCAD toolbars.
The toolbar buttons are grouped based on functionality. For example, element creation
tools are all together in the tool palette, results tools are all together, etc.
2.4.2 Tool Pane Summary
The tool pane contains buttons for project management, data management, and results
presentation. The tool pane includes:
• “File Tools (Stand-Alone Only)” on page 2-79

• “Zoom Tools (Stand-Alone Only)” on page 2-79
• “Calculation and Data Management Tools” on page 2-79
• “Reporting Tools” on page 2-80
• “Updates and Help Tools” on page 2-80

File Tools (Stand-Alone Only)
New—Creates a new project.
Open—Opens an existing project.
Save—Saves the current project.
Print Preview—Lets you see how the current view will print to the
currently-selected printer. For more information, see “Other Toolbar
Buttons” on page 2-82.
Zoom Tools (Stand-Alone Only)
Zoom Extents—Zooms to the full extents of the drawing.
Zoom In—Lets you magnify an area of the drawing.
Zoom Out—Lets you reduce the magnification of an area of the drawing,

possibly letting you see more of a large drawing.
Zoom Window—Zooms to an area selected by you.
Zoom Previous—Zooms to the previous view.
Calculation and Data Management Tools
GO—Opens the Calculation dialog box for the current scenario. For
more information, see “Calculate Network” on page 9-383.
Tabular Reports—Opens the Table Manager dialog box. For more

information, see “Table Manager” on page 7-330.

WaterCAD Toolbars
Reporting Tools
Color Coding—Color codes the network. For more information, see

“How Do I Color Code Elements?” on page A-700.
Annotation—Annotates elements with input or output data. For more

information, see “Element Annotation” on page 13-509.
GeoGrapher—Opens the GeoGrapher advanced graph manager.
Profile—Opens the Profile wizard to develop a network profile. For more

information, see “Profile” on page 13-552.
Contours—Opens the Contours window to generate contours of various

attributes. For more information, see “Contour Map Manager” on
page 13-547.
QuickEdit—Opens the QuickEdit window for easy data viewing. For

more information, see “Quick Edit” on page 5-273.
Updates and Help Tools
Globe—If you are connected to the Internet, this will take you to Haestad
Methods’ web site for product updates and other services. For more
information, see “Globe Button” on page 1-37.
Help—Accesses the on-line help system. For more information, see

“Help Menu” on page 2-70.

2.4.3 The Tool Palette
The tool palette contains a Select tool, Network Element tools, and Annotation tools.
Note: Click a tool to select it as the active tool. In Stand-Alone mode,

when a tool is selected it will be highlighted, and the cursor
appearance will change to reflect the active tool.
In Stand-Alone mode, right-click the tool palette to access the

Prototype Manager for setting the default data for each type of
network element (for more information, see “Prototypes” on
page 6-322).
• The Select tool lets you select elements for group editing, detailed reporting,
deleting, or moving elements.
• The Network Element tools let you add elements to your network. These tools
can also be used to split pipes and morph nodes.
• The Graphic Annotation tools (see “Graphic Annotation” on page 13-557) can
be used to add polylines, borders, and text to your drawing. You can also add a
link or node color-coding legend using the Legend tool.
2.4.4 Analysis Toolbar
The Analysis toolbar displays the active scenario and provides a means for changing
the current scenario and accessing the Scenario Control Center. All input and output
information displayed in the tables, profiles, element dialog boxes, and annotation will
be related to the active scenario shown on the Analysis toolbar.
You can change the current scenario from the drop-down list box. To the left of the
Scenario drop-down list box are the Extended Period Simulation Analysis controls.
These include VCR-style controls to move through the time steps or to animate the
drawing view and the Increment list box, which controls how many time steps are
skipped when the Forward or Reverse buttons are clicked. This increment also
controls which time steps are displayed during animation.
The following buttons are located to the right of the Scenario drop-down list:

WaterCAD Toolbars
Scenario Control Center—Opens the Scenario Control Center.
Active Topology Editor—Opens the Active Topology Editor.
Capital Cost Manager—Opens the Capital Cost Manager.
Energy Cost Manager—Opens the Energy Cost Manager.
Darwin Calibrator—Opens the Darwin Calibrator.
Skelebrator—Opens the Skelebrator Manager.
2.4.5 Animation Options
By clicking the down arrow next to the Play button, you can access the Animation
Options. Clicking the Animation Options button provides the following functions:
• Animation Delay—Opens a dialog box that lets you set the delay between
animated frames.
• Animate All Windows—If this option is selected, then every window capable of
being animated will animate when the play button is clicked. If the option is not
selected, then only the current window will animate.
2.4.6 Other Toolbar Buttons
Some of the following toolbar buttons appear on secondary windows, such as the Print
Preview window and the Profile window, available throughout the program:
• File
• Print
• Print Preview
• Copy to Clipboard
• Undo
• Redo

• Options
• Page Up/Down
• Close
• Help
Print Preview: Opens a Print Preview on the contents of

the current window.
Page Up/Down: Navigates between pages of a
multi-page report.
File: Exports the data in the current
window to a file format that can be used
by other applications (such as .DXF and
ASCII text files).
Copy to Clipboard: Copies data to the clipboard, where it
can be pasted into most Windows-based
spreadsheet, database, and word
processor applications.
Print: Prints the contents of the current window.
Options: Options vary depending on
the context. They may
include things such as
printer setup, or graph options for the current
window.
Close: Closes the current window.
2.5 Status Bar

Information displayed in the status bar includes (Stand-Alone only):
• “General Status Information” on page 2-84

• “File Status” on page 2-84
• “Unit System Status” on page 2-84
• “Cursor Location” on page 2-84
• “Calculation Results Status” on page 2-84
The AutoCAD status pane contains similar information, but deals with your
AutoCAD drawing status rather than your hydraulic project. For more information
about AutoCAD’s status pane, see your AutoCAD documentation.

Status Bar
2.5.1 General Status Information
General status information includes messages that relate to the user’s current activi-
ties. These messages consist of information such as menu command descriptions, and
indications regarding the progress of an executing command.
2.5.2 File Status
If changes have been made since the last time the project file was saved, an
image of a diskette appears in the status pane. If the file is currently in a saved
state, no such image will appear.
2.5.3 Unit System Status
The unit system box on the task bar indicates which unit system is currently active:
System International (metric) or U.S. Customary (English). It does not indicate
changes to units of individual fields.
2.5.4 Cursor Location
The status bar displays the current X and Y (or Northing and Easting) coordinates for
the cursor’s position within the drawing pane (see “Drawing Pane” on page 2-50).
2.5.5 Calculation Results Status
In Stand-Alone mode, if the current calculation results are out-of-date or

otherwise invalid, an indicator will appear in the status bar that signifies
that the results no longer match the state of your input data. If the results are currently
valid, no such indicator will appear.

2.5.6 Refresh and Auto-Refresh
A refresh occurs when the contents of the drawing pane are updated to reflect changes
in the model calculations. Examples include color coding, annotation, and changing
time steps of an extended period simulation. In previous versions of WaterCAD, a
refresh was performed automatically when one of these changes occurred. In
WaterCAD, you have the option of enabling or disabling Auto-Refresh.
When Auto-Refresh is enabled (the default setting), WaterCAD will automatically

update the drawing pane when changes occur. When Auto-Refresh is disabled, you
must manually click the Refresh button, select View > Refresh, or press F5 to update
the drawing view to reflect any changes that have occurred.
The benefit of turning off Auto-Refresh is the performance enhancement gained as a

result of WaterCAD only accessing the project data store when you manually instruct
it to. This performance increase will be negligible except for large models.

Status Bar

Chapter
Quick Start Lessons 3

Note: You can either perform these lessons in sequence, since each
lesson uses the results of the previous ones, or do the lessons
in any order using the catch-up files located in the
Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson directory.
The quick-start lessons give you hands-on experience with many of the features and
capabilities of WaterCAD. These detailed lessons will help you get started with the
exploration and use of the WaterCAD software. Before proceeding with the lessons,
you should run through the brief online tutorials, accessed from the Help menu. These
interactive tutorials will take you quickly through overviews of key program features.
Another way to become acquainted with WaterCAD is to run and experiment with the
included sample files, located in the Haestad\Wtrc\Sample directory. Remember, you
can right-click or press the F1 key to access the context-sensitive online help at any
time.
3.1 Lesson 1: Building a Network and

Performing a Steady-State Analysis
Note: If, at any time during this lesson, you are prompted to reset all
calculated results to N/A, click NO.
WaterCAD is an extremely efficient tool for laying out a water distribution network. It
is easy to prepare a schematic or scaled model and let WaterCAD take care of the link-
node connectivity.
In constructing a distribution network for this lesson, you do not need to be concerned
with assigning labels to pipes and nodes, because WaterCAD will assign labels auto-
matically. When creating a schematic drawing, pipe lengths are entered manually. In a
scaled drawing, pipe lengths are automatically calculated from the position of the
pipes’ bends and start and stop nodes on the drawing pane.

Lesson 1: Building a Network and Performing a Steady-State Analysis
Note: In this network, the modeling of a reservoir connected to a pump

simulates a connection to the main water distribution system.
Simplifying the network in this way can approximate the
pressures supplied to the system at the connection under a
range of demands. This type of approximation is not always
applicable, and care should be taken when modeling a network
in this way. It is more accurate to trace the network back to the
source.
In this lesson, you will create and analyze the network shown below. You will use a
scaled background drawing for most of the network; however, four of the pipes are not
to scale and will have user-defined lengths.
3.1.1 Part 1—Creating a New Project File
This lesson has instructions for use with the Stand-Alone interface and the AutoCAD
interface.
In the Stand-Alone interface:
1. Double-click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD Stand-Alone. If the

Welcome to WaterCAD dialog box appears, select the Close button.
2. If you are prompted to set up the project before you continue, click No.
3. Select Tools > Options and click the Global tab. Since you will be working in SI
units, click the Unit System drop-down list, and select System International.

Quick Start Lessons
4. Click OK.
5. Click File > Save as. In the Save File As dialog box, double-click the Lesson
folder. Type the file name MYLESSON1.WCD for your project, and click Save.
In the AutoCAD interface:
1. Double-click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD for AutoCAD. Open
the Global Options tab, accessed from the Tools > Options menu.
2. Since you will be working in SI units, click the Unit System selection box, and
select System International. Click OK.
3. Select File > Open. When prompted, do not save changes to the current drawing.
If the Select File dialog box opens, move to step 3. Otherwise, do the following:
Press the Esc key. At the command prompt, type filedia, press the Enter key to
activate the command, and then enter a new value of 1. Select File > Open again,
and do not save changes to the current drawing.
Note that the filedia variable controls whether some AutoCAD commands appear
as dialog boxes or at the command prompt.
4. Select the existing AutoCAD file LESSON1.DWG from the Wtrc\Lesson folder.
5. With the drawing open, select File > Save As. In the Save Drawing As dialog box,
double-click the Lesson folder, enter the filename as MYLESSON1.DWG and
click Save to save the file in your \Wtrc\Lesson directory.
In both the AutoCAD and Stand-Alone interfaces:
6. Now, select the Layout Elements tool in the WaterCAD toolbar. Then, move the
cursor onto the drawing pane and right-click to select Reservoir from the shortcut
menu. Click the approximate location of reservoir R-1 (see diagram above). You
will be prompted to set up the project. Click Yes to open the Project Setup Wizard.
7. In the Project Setup Wizard, title the project Lesson 1—Steady State Analysis
and click the Next button.
8. Choose your desired settings. For this lesson, use the program default values.
Click the Next button.
9. Select the Scaled button located under the Drawing Scale option. Set the hori-
zontal scale to 1 mm = 4000 mm, and the vertical scale to 1 mm = 400 mm.
10. Click the Next button to continue.
11. The element prototype buttons allow you to set default values for each element
type. We will use the default prototype values in this lesson, so click the Finished
button.

3.1.2 Part 2—Laying Out the Network
1. To draw the skeletonized water distribution network shown previously,

select the Pipe layout tool from the toolbar.
2. Then, move the cursor onto the drawing pane and right-click to select
Reservoir from the shortcut menu.
Right-click to access
the shortcut menu
3. To place the reservoir, click the approximate location of reservoir R-1 (see the
preceding Water Distribution Network diagram).
4. Next, move the cursor to the location of pump P-1. Right-click and select Pump
from the shortcut menu. Click to place it.
5. Place junction J-1 by right-clicking, selecting Junction from the shortcut menu,
and clicking the appropriate location.
6. Proceed with laying out the network by placing junctions J-2, J-3, and J-4.
7. Close the loop by clicking junction J-1.
8. Right-click and select Done from the shortcut menu.

Quick Start Lessons
Tip: To construct a pipe with bends in the Stand-Alone version, hold

down the Ctrl key and click the location of the bend. Then,
release the Ctrl key to enter the next element.
You can insert bends after a pipe is constructed by right-clicking

the pipe in Stand-Alone and selecting Bend > Add Bend. Then,
drag the new vertex to the appropriate location.
9. Create J-5.
a. Select the Pipe layout tool again.
b. Click junction J-3.
c. Move the cursor to the location of J-5, and click to insert the element.
d. Right-click and select Done.

J-5
10. Insert the PRV (Valve > PRV on the shortcut menu), and junction J-6 by selecting
the Pipe layout tool and placing the elements in their appropriate locations.
Be sure to lay out the pipes in numerical order (P-7 through P-9), so that their
labels correspond to the labels in the diagram. Right-click and select Done from
the shortcut menu to terminate the Pipe Layout command.
11. Insert the tank, T-1, using the Pipe layout tool. Pipe P-10 should connect the tank
to the network if you laid out the elements in the correct order.

Quick Start Lessons
Pipe labels should be

as you see here
12. Save the WaterCAD network by clicking the Save button or by choosing
File > Save.
3.1.3 Part 3—Entering Data
There are four ways to enter and modify element data in WaterCAD:
• Dialog Boxes—You can use the Select tool and double-click an element to bring
up its editor. In AutoCAD, click the element once with the Select tool to open the
element’s editor.
• FlexTables—You can click the Tabular Reports button to bring up
dynamic tables that allow you to edit and display the model data in a
tabular format. You can edit the data as you would in a spreadsheet.

• Database Connections—The database connection feature allows you to import

and export element data directly from external sources such as Excel spread-
sheets, GIS, Jet Databases like Microsoft Access, or any other ODBC database.
• Alternative Editors—Alternatives are used to enter data for different “What If?”
situations used in Scenario Management. For more information, see “Lesson 3:
Scenario Management” on page 3-116.
3.1.4 Part 4—Entering Data through Dialog Boxes
To access an element’s dialog box in Stand-Alone mode, double-click the element. In

AutoCAD, first click the Select tool on the toolbar, then click the element whose
attributes you wish to modify.
1. Open the Reservoir Editor for reservoir R-1, and select the General tab.
2. Enter the hydraulic grade line elevation from “Table 3-1: Reservoir Data”on
page 3-94.
Table 3-1: Reservoir Data
Ge ne ra l Ta b
Re se rvoir Ele va tion Zone
(m )
R-1 198 Connection Zone

Quick Start Lessons
3. Set Zone to Connection Zone.

a. Click the Ellipsis (…) button next to the Zone field. This action opens the
Zone Manager.
Click to set the

Connection Zone
b. Click Add.
c. Type a label for the new pressure zone, Connection Zone.
d. Click OK, and OK again to exit the Zone Manager.
e. Finally, select the zone you just created from the Zone list box.
f. Click OK to close the Reservoir Editor.

4. Open the Tank Editor for tank T-1. Enter the data from “Table 3-2: Tank Data”on
page 3-96 in the General and Section tabs.
To set a diameter of 8 m, you must set the Cross Section to Circular.
5. Leave the other parameters set to their default values. Click OK to exit the dialog
box.
Table 3-2: Tank Data
Ge ne ra l Ta b Se ction Ta b
Ma x . Initia l Min. Ba se
Ta nk Zone Se ction Dia m e te r
Ele v. Ele v. Ele v. Ele v.
(m )
(m ) (m ) (m ) (m )
T-1 Zone-1 Constant Area 226 225 220 200 8

Quick Start Lessons
6. Open the Pump Editor for pump PMP-1.

a. Click the Ellipsis (…) button to create a new pump definition.
Click to define
the pump

b. Click Add, set the Pump Definition Name to PMP-1. Click OK. The Pump
Definition dialog box opens.
c. Select Standard (3 Point) from the Pump Type list box.
Right-click and select

Design Properties to
change the units
d. Change the discharge units to l/min.

Do this by right-clicking in the Design Discharge text box, selecting Design
Properties, and selecting l/min. from the Units drop-down list in the Set
Field Options dialog box. Click OK.

Quick Start Lessons
e. After you change the discharge units to l/min., enter the discharge curve as
given in “Table 3-3: Pump Data”on page 3-99. Click OK after you finish.
Table 3-3: Pump Data
He a d Discha rge Ge ne ra l Ta b
(m ) (l/m in) Ele va tion Pum p
Pum p
Shutoff: 30.0 0 (m ) Type
De sign: 27.4 3800 PMP-1 193 3 Point
Ma x . Ope ra ting 24.8 7500
f. Upon returning to the Pump editor dialog box, select the newly created PMP-
1 in the Pump Definition drop-down list.

g. Click OK to exit the dialog box.

7. Open the Valve Editor for valve PRV-1. Use the information given in “Table 3-4:
PRV Data”on page 3-100. Leave the other parameters set to their default values.
Click OK to exit the dialog box.
Table 3-4: PRV Data
Ge ne ra l Ta b
Ele va tion Dia m e te r Pre ssure
Va lve Sta tus Se ttings
(m ) (m m ) (kPa )
PRV-1 165 150 Active Pressure 390

Quick Start Lessons
Note: You will have to use the Ellipsis (…) button to create Zone-2.
8. Enter the data for the junctions as outlined in “Table 3-5: Junction Node Data”on
page 3-102. Leave all other fields set to their default values.

Table 3-5: Junction Node Data
Ge ne ra l Ta b De ma nd Ta b
Ground
Junction Zone De m a nd
Ele va tion
(l/m in)
(m )
J-1 184 Zone-1 38
J-2 185 Zone-1 31
J-3 184 Zone-1 34
J-4 183 Zone-1 38
J-5 185.5 Zone-1 350
J-6 165 Zone-2 356
9. Finally, you need to specify user-defined lengths for pipes P-1, P-7, P-8, P-9 and
P-10, since the reservoir, tank, PRV, and nodes J-5 and J-6 are only shown in
approximate locations.
a. Double-click pipe P-1 to open the Pipe Editor.

b. Click the box labeled User Defined Length to activate this feature. Then,
enter a value of 0.01 m in the Length field.
c. Because you are using the reservoir and pump to simulate the connection to
the main distribution system, you want headloss through this pipe to be negli-
gible. Therefore, the length is very small and the diameter will be large.
d. Set the diameter of P1 to 1000 mm.
e. Repeat this procedure for pipes P-7 through P-10 using the user-defined
lengths and diameters in “Table 3-6: Pipe Data”on page 3-102.
Table 3-6: Pipe Data
User-Defined
Pipe Material Diameter Length
(mm) (m)
P-1 Ductile Iron 1000 0.01
P-2 Ductile Iron 150 N/A
P-4 PVC 150 N/A
P-7 PVC 150 400
P-8 Ductile Iron 150 500

Quick Start Lessons
3.1.5 Part 5—Entering Data through FlexTables
It is often more convenient to enter data for similar elements in tabular form, rather
than to individually open a dialog box for an element, enter the data into the dialog
box, and then select the next element. Using tabular reports, you can enter the data as
you would enter data into a spreadsheet.
1. To access the tabular report, click the Tabular Reports button on the
toolbar.
2. Select the Pipe Report and click OK. Note that the white fields are edit-
able, but the yellow fields are not.
The pipes may not be in alphanumeric order in the table. To sort the table by pipe
label, right-click the Label column heading. Select Sort > Ascending from the
shortcut menu that appears.

3. For each of the ten pipes, enter the diameter and the pipe material as outlined in
“Table 3-6: Pipe Data”on page 3-102. Notice that the C values for the pipes will
be automatically assigned to preset values based on the material; however, these
values could be modified if a different coefficient were required.
4. Leave other data set to their default values. Click the Close button to exit the table
when you are finished.

Quick Start Lessons
3.1.6 Part 6—Performing a Steady-State Analysis
1. Click the GO button to open the Scenario: Base dialog box. On the Calculation
tab, make sure that the Calculation Type is set to Steady-State.
2. Click the GO button on the dialog box to analyze the model. When
calculations are completed, a Results report is displayed.
3. The Results tab displays a summary of model results.

– Review the summary to get an idea of the results that are given. Expand the
tree view.
– There should be a green light displayed on the Results tab of the dialog box.
You can quickly tell if there were warnings or failures with a glance at the
light. A green light indicates no warnings or failures, a yellow light indicates
warnings, while a red light indicates problems.
Note: Before proceeding to the next lesson, save this project (for
example, as MYLESSON1.WCD in Stand-Alone mode or
MYLESSON1.DWG in AutoCAD mode).
4. Click Close when you are done. After a model run, all the calculated fields in
dialog boxes and tabular reports will display results. For an overview of the output
options available, see “Lesson 4: Reporting Results” on page 3-127.

Quick Start Lessons
3.2 Lesson 2: Extended Period Simulation

This lesson will illustrate how WaterCAD can model the behavior of a water distribu-
tion system through time using an extended period simulation (EPS). An EPS can be
conducted for any duration you specify. System conditions are computed over the
given duration at a specified time increment. Some of the types of system behaviors
that can be analyzed using an EPS include how tank levels fluctuate, when pumps are
running, whether valves are open or closed, and how demands change throughout the
day.
This lesson is based on the project created in Lesson 1 (see “Lesson 1: Building a
Network and Performing a Steady-State Analysis” on page 3-87). If you have not
completed Lesson 1, then open the project LESSON2.WCD (LESSON2.DWG in the
AutoCAD version) from the Wtrc\Lesson directory. If you did complete Lesson 1,
then you can use the MYLESSON1 file you created.
1. Open MYLESSON1.WCD.
2. After you have opened the file, select File > Save As.
3. Type the filename MYLESSON2 and click Save.
4. Select File > Project Summary, and change the Project Title to Lesson 2—
Extended Period Simulation. Click OK.
3.2.1 Part 1—Creating Demand Patterns
Water demand in a distribution system fluctuates over time. For example, residential
water use on a typical weekday is higher than average in the morning before people go
to work, and is usually highest in the evening when residents are preparing dinner,
washing clothes, etc. This variation in demand over time can be modeled using
demand patterns. Demand patterns are multipliers that vary with time and are applied
to a given base demand, most typically the average daily demand.
In this lesson, you will be dividing the single fixed demands for each junction node in
Lesson 1 into two individual demands with different demand patterns. One demand
pattern will be created for residential use, and another for commercial use. You will
enter demand patterns at the junction nodes through the junction editors.
1. Open the editor for Junction J-1 (double-click junction J-1) and select the
Demand tab.
2. By default, the demand pattern is set to Fixed. In the Demands table, leave the
first row set to Demand, and set the baseline load to 23 l/min.

Lesson 2: Extended Period Simulation
3. Click the corresponding cell in the Pattern column, and select the Ellipsis (…)
button that appears. This action opens the Pattern Manager.
4. Click the Add button to create a new pattern for this model.
5. In the Pattern dialog box:
a. Enter the name Residential in the Label field.
b. Leave the Start Time to 12:00:00 AM.
c. Set the Starting Multiplier to 0.5.
d. Under Format, select the button labeled Stepwise.
The resulting demand pattern will have multipliers that remain constant until
the next pattern time increment is reached.
Note: Note that the multiplier for the last time given (24 hrs.) must be
the same as the Starting Multiplier (0.5). These values are equal
because the demand curve represents a complete cycle, with the
last point the same as the first.
e. In the Pattern table, enter the times and multipliers from “Table 3-7: Residen-
tial Pattern Data”on page 3-108.
Table 3-7: Residential Pattern Data
Time
from
Multiplier
Start
(hr)
3 0.4
6 1.0
9 1.3
12 1.2
15 1.2
18 1.6
21 0.8
24 0.5

Quick Start Lessons
Pattern table
f. Click OK when you are finished to return to the Pattern Manager.
6. In the Pattern Manager, create a pattern for commercial demands.

a. Click Add, and create a pattern labeled Commercial, having a Start Time of
12:00:00 AM and a Starting Multiplier of 0.4.
b. Enter the times and multipliers from “Table 3-8: Commercial Pattern Data”on
page 3-109 into the Pattern table.
c. This pattern will also be Stepwise.
Table 3-8: Commercial Pattern Data
Tim e
from
Multiplie r
Sta rt
(hr)
3 0.6
6 0.8
9 1.6
12 1.6
15 1.2
18 0.8
21 0.6
24 0.4

Pattern table
d. Click OK after you are finished to return to the Pattern Manager.
7. Click OK to close the Pattern Manager dialog box and return to the Junction
Editor for J-1.

Quick Start Lessons
8. In the Pattern list box for the first row, select Residential from the choice list.
9. In the second row, enter a demand of 15 l/min. Select Commercial as the pattern
for this row.
10. Click OK to exit the junction J-1 editor.
11. Go into the Demands table in the editors for junctions J-2, J-3, J-4, J-5 and J-6 and
enter the demand data from “Table 3-9: Demand Patterns”on page 3-111. Use the
Residential and Commercial demand patterns already created, so just select the
appropriate pattern from the list box.
Table 3-9: Demand Patterns
Demand Tab
Residential Commercial
Junction Demand Demand
(l/min) (l/min)
J-2 23 8
J-3 23 11
J-4 23 15
J-5 350 N/A
J-6 280 76
12. Now, you will set up an additional demand pattern to simulate a three-hour fire at
node J-6.
a. In the Demand tab of Junction Editor for J-6, insert an additional Demand of
2000 l/min. in row three of the Demands table.
b. Click the Pattern column for row three and select the Ellipsis (…) button to
open the Pattern Manager.
c. Select the Add button to add a new demand pattern.
d. In the Pattern dialog box, enter a Label of 3-Hour Fire, a Start Time of
12:00:00 AM, and a Starting Multiplier of 0.00. Select the button for Step-
wise format.

e. Enter the information in “Table 3-10: 3-Hour Fire Pattern Data”on page 3-112
into the pattern table.
Table 3-10: 3-Hour Fire Pattern Data
Tim e from
Sta rt Multiplie r
(hr)
18 1.00
21 0.00
24 0.00
f. After you have filled in the table, select the Report button at the bottom of the
dialog box. Choose Graph to display a graph of the demand pattern. Notice
that the value of the multiplier is zero, except for the period between 18 and
21 hours, when it is 1.0. Since the input the demand as 2000 l/min., the result
will be a 2000 l/min. fire flow at junction J-6 between hours 18 and 21.

Quick Start Lessons
g. Click Close to exit the graph, OK to exit the Pattern dialog box and OK again
to exit the Pattern Manager.
13. Finally, select your new pattern, 3-Hour Fire, from the Pattern selection box in
row three of the demands table, and click OK to exit the Junction Editor.

3.2.2 Part 2—Running an Extended Period Simulation
To run the Extended Period Simulation:
1. Click the GO button on the toolbar.
2. Select the button for Extended Period.

– Accept the default of a Start Time of 12:00:00.
– Accept the default Duration of 24 hours.
– Accept the default Hydraulic Time Step of 1 hour.
3. Then, click the GO button to run the analysis.

4. After the model runs, the green light on the Results tab indicates that there are not
any warnings for the analysis and WaterCAD was able to compute a balanced
solution for the distribution network. Click the Close button.

Quick Start Lessons
Green light indicates

no errors and no
warnings
5. You can view results by opening individual element dialog boxes, clicking the
Report button to generate detailed reports and graphs for the individual elements,
as well as through output tables, color-coding, profiling, contouring, and annota-
tion.
a. For example, open the Valve Editor for the PRV by double-clicking the PRV
element.
b. Click the Report button.
c. Select Detailed Report. Scroll and page through the report to view the Calcu-
lated Results Summary. Notice that the PRV is throttling, except for hours 18
to 20, when the fire occurs and the downstream pressure setting can no longer
be maintained. For more information on reporting results, see “Lesson 4:
Reporting Results” on page 3-127.
6. Click Close and OK to close open dialog boxes.

7. Save this project before proceeding to Lesson 3.

Lesson 3: Scenario Management
3.3 Lesson 3: Scenario Management

One of the many powerful and versatile project tools in WaterCAD is Scenario
Management (for more information, see “Scenarios” on page 8-364). Scenarios let
you calculate multiple “What If?” situations in a single project file. You may wish to
try several designs and compare the results, or analyze an existing system using
several different demand alternatives and compare the resulting system pressures.
A scenario is a set of alternatives (see “Alternatives” on page 8-345), while alterna-

tives are groups of actual model data. Both scenarios and alternatives are based on a
parent/child relationship where a child scenario or alternative inherits data from the
parent scenario or alternative.
In Lessons 1 and 2, you constructed the water distribution network, defined the char-
acteristics of the various elements, entered demands and demand patterns, and
performed steady-state and extended period simulations. In this lesson, you will set up
the scenarios needed to test four “What If?” situations for our water distribution
system. These “What If?” situations will involve changing demands and pipe sizes. At
the end of the lesson, you will compare all of the results using the Scenario Compar-
ison tool (for more information, see “Scenario Comparison” on page 13-555).
1. This lesson is based on the project created in Lesson 2. If you completed Lesson 2,
open the project you created previously, MYLESSON2 in the Wtrc\Lesson direc-
tory.
2. Otherwise, open the file called LESSON3.WCD (LESSON3.DWG in the
AutoCAD version).
3. After you have opened the file, select File > Save As.
5. Select File > Project Summary, and change the Project Title to Lesson 3—
Scenario Management.
6. Click OK.
3.3.1 Part 1—Creating a New Alternative
First, you need to set up the required data sets, or alternatives. An alternative is a
group of data that describes a specific part of the model. There are thirteen alternative
types:
• Active Topology
• Physical

Quick Start Lessons
• Demand
• Initial Settings
• Operational
• Age
• Constituent
• Trace
• Fire Flow
• Capital Cost
• Energy Cost
• User Data
In this example, you need to set up a different physical or demand alternative for each
design trial you want to evaluate. Each alternative will contain different pipe size or
demand data.
In WaterCAD, you create families of alternatives from base alternatives. Base alterna-
tives are alternatives that do not inherit data from any other alternative. Child alterna-
tives can be created from the base alternative. A Child alternative inherits the
characteristics of its parent, but specific data can be overridden to be local to the child.
A child alternative can, in turn, be the parent of another alternative.
1. Select Analysis > Alternatives. Highlight the Demand alternative in the left pane
of the dialog box. Currently, there is only one Demand Alternative listed. The
Base-Demand alternative contains the demands for the current distribution
system.
2. You can change the default demand name to be something more descriptive of our
data.
a. Click the Rename button.
b. Type the new name, Average Daily with 2000 l/min. Fire Flow.

3. You would like to add a child of the base-demands alternative, because the new
alternative will inherit most data. Then, you can locally change the data that you
want to modify. You will modify the existing demand data by increasing the fire
flow component at node J-6 from 2000 l/min. to 4000 l/min.
a. Click the Add Child button.
b. Type the name 4000 l/min. Fire Flow for the new Alternative.
c. Click OK.
4. The Demand Alternatives editor for the new alternative opens, showing you the
data that was inherited from the parent alternative.
Notice the key at the bottom describing the check boxes. As the key indicates, all
of your data is inherited. If you change any piece of data, the check box will
become selected because that record is now local to this alternative and not inher-
ited from the parent.

Quick Start Lessons
5. Click in the Demand Summary column for node J-6. A button appears. Click this
button to open the Demand table for this node. Change the 2000 l/min. fire
demand to 4000 l/min.
6. Click OK. Click Close to exit the Alternative Editor and return to the Alternatives
Manager, and Close again to exit back to the drawing pane.

3.3.2 Part 2—Editing and Creating Scenarios
Alternatives are the building blocks of a scenario. A scenario is a set of one of each of
the thirteen types of alternatives, plus all of the calculation information needed to
solve a model.
Just as there are base, parent, and child alternatives, there are also base, parent, and
child scenarios. The difference is that instead of inheriting model data, scenarios
inherit sets of alternatives. To change the new scenario, change one or more of the new
scenario’s alternatives. For this lesson, you will create a new scenario for each
different set of conditions you need to evaluate.
1. Select Analysis > Scenarios. The Scenario Control Center opens.

There is always a default Base Scenario that is composed of the base alternatives
listed in the right pane. The left pane of the Scenario Control Center contains a list
of the scenarios. Only the Base is available initially, because you have not created
any new scenarios.
2. You should first rename the Base Scenario as something more descriptive.
a. Click the Scenario Management button and select Rename.
b. The scenario name in the left pane will become editable. Type in a descriptive
name for the Scenario, such as 2000 l/min., 3-hour Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS).
c. Then, press the Enter key.

Quick Start Lessons
3. Create a child scenario from the existing base scenario to incorporate the new
demand alternative.
a. Click the Scenario Management menu button.
b. Select Add > Child Scenario.
c. Type a scenario name of 4000 l/min. Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS) and click OK. A
dialog box for the new Scenario opens, listing the alternatives as inherited
from the base scenario.
4. Your new Child Scenario initially consists of the same alternatives as its parent
scenario, except the Demand Alternative should be the new alternative you
created, 4000 l/min. Fire Flow.
a. Select the Demand check box.
b. From the drop-down list, select the 4000 l/min. Fire Flow alternative. The
new alternative is no longer inherited from the parent, but is local to this
scenario. Click Close to exit the Scenario.

3.3.3 Part 3—Calculate and Compare
You are going to calculate both of the scenarios at the same time using the Batch Run
tool.
1. Click the Batch Run button on the left side of the Scenario Management dialog
box.
2. Select both check boxes next to the scenario names in the Batch Run dialog box.
3. Click the Batch button.
4. Click Yes at the prompt to run the batch for two scenarios.
5. After computing finishes, click OK.
6. You can see the results for each scenario by highlighting it in the Scenario list.
Click the Results tab at the top right in the dialog box to see the selected
scenario’s results.
7. Use the Scenario Comparison tool to compare the results and see how the
scenarios differ.
a. Click the Scenario Comparison button to start the Annotation Comparison
Wizard.
b. Select the 2000 l/min., 3-hour Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS) Scenario in the first
drop-down list box and the 4000 l/min. Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS) in the second
box.
The difference between the two scenarios is found by subtracting scenario 1
from scenario 2.
c. Click Next.
d. To compare the results for pressures at the junctions and velocities in the
pipes, select the Pressure Junction and Pressure Pipe check boxes. Click
Next.

Quick Start Lessons
e. Select Pressure from the drop-down list box under the Attributes column for
Pressure Junction Annotation.
f. Edit the entry in the Mask column by deleting the label name, so that only the
pressure and unit variables (%v %u) remain. Click Next.
g. Select Velocity from the drop-down list box under the Attributes column for
Pressure Pipe Annotation.

h. Edit the label in the Mask column by deleting the label name, so that only the
pressure and unit variables (%v %u) remain. Click Next.
i. Check to make sure your annotation is correct, and then click Finished.
8. A plan view opens, showing the system with annotation displaying the difference
between the two scenarios. To better view the data, maximize the window and use
the zoom buttons from the upper toolbar to look at different areas of the model.
The difference between the two is found by subtracting scenario 1 from scenario
2.
For example, if scenario 1 has a pressure of 50 kPa at a junction and scenario 2,
which represents a future scenario, has a pressure of 45 kPa at the same junction,
then comparing these pressures for scenario 1 and scenario 2 would result in anno-
tation stating a difference of -5 kPa.
When you have more than two scenarios, you can select different combinations of
the scenarios from the two list boxes and click the Update button to view the
differences between the two. You could also select the Auto Update check box,
and the differences will automatically update every time you change the combina-
tion of scenarios and time increments in the list boxes.
9. Select the Auto Update check box and use the VCR-style buttons to scroll
through different increments. Look at the difference in pressures at junction J-6
during the fire flow (between 18 and 21 hours). There is a very large pressure drop
due to the substantial increase in demand. In the next part of this lesson, you will
look at scenarios to reduce this decrease in pressure.
3.3.4 Part 4—Physical Alternative
You need to further examine what is going on in the system as a result of the fire flow,
and find solutions to any problems that might have arisen in the network as a result.
You can review output tables to quickly see what the pressures and velocities are
within the system, and create new alternatives and scenarios to capture your modifica-
tions.
1. Click the Close button to exit the Scenario Comparison Window. Click Close
again to exit the Scenario Control Center and return to the drawing pane.
2. Select the Tabular Reports button from the toolbar.
3. Highlight Junction Report in the list, and click OK.
4. Select 4000 l/min. Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS) in the Scenario list box, and set the
Time to 18.00 hr. Most of the system pressures look acceptable at this time incre-
ment; however, the pressure at J-6 is actually negative.
5. Click the Options button and select Table Manager.

Quick Start Lessons
6. Highlight Pipe Report, and click OK. In the Pipe Report table, notice that the
headloss gradient for pipes P-8 and P-9 are significantly higher than in the rest of
the system. You can reduce the headloss gradient by increasing the sizes of these
pipes. The pressure at J-6 should increase as a consequence.
7. Click Close to exit the table.
8. Create a new scenario having a new physical alternative with the pipe sizes for P-
8 and P-9 increased to 200 mm.
a. Select Analysis > Scenarios.
b. Highlight 4000 l/min. Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS) in the list of Scenarios.
c. Click the Scenario Management button, and select Add > Child Scenario.
d. Name the new Scenario P-8 and P-9 Set to 200 mm, and click OK.
e. Under the Alternatives tab of the Scenario dialog box, select the Physical
check box.
f. Click the Ellipsis (…) button to open the Physical Properties Alternatives
dialog box.
g. Click the Add Child button, and name the new Alternative P-8 and P-9 Set
to 200 mm. Click OK.
h. Under the Pipe tab for this Alternative, change the pipe sizes in the table for
pipes P-8 and P-9 from 150 mm to 200 mm.

i. Click the Close button to exit the editor, and click Close again to exit the
Physical Properties Alternatives dialog box.
j. Select the new Physical Alternative from the list box for the scenario.

Quick Start Lessons
k. Click Close to return to the Scenario Control Center.

l. Select Batch Run to run the model. Deselect the check boxes for the first two
scenarios, and select the check box for Pipes P-8 and P-9 Set to 200 mm.
m. Click Batch and select Yes to confirm and run the Scenario.
n. Click OK after the run is complete.
9. Close the Scenario Control Center and return to the drawing pane. Select
the Tabular Reports button from the toolbar.
10. Open the Junction Report. In the Scenario list box, select the new
Scenario, and examine the pressures at J-6 for 18, 19, and 20 hours. The pressures
for this node are now at acceptable levels.
If you would like to learn more about the various results presentation methods
available in WaterCAD, see “Lesson 4: Reporting Results” on page 3-127.
11. Close the open dialog boxes and save this project before proceeding.
3.4 Lesson 4: Reporting Results

An important feature in all water distribution modeling software is the ability to
present results clearly. This lesson outlines several of WaterCAD reporting features,
including:
• Reports, which display and print information on any or all elements in the system
(for more information, see “Predefined Reports” on page 13-515).
• Tabular Reports (FlexTables), for viewing, editing, and presentation of selected
data and elements in a tabular format (for more information, see “FlexTables” on
page 7-329).

Lesson 4: Reporting Results
• Profiles, to graphically show, in a profile view, how a selected attribute, such as

hydraulic grade, varies along an interconnected series of pipes (for more informa-
tion, see “Profile” on page 13-552).
• Contouring, to show how a selected attribute, such as pressure, varies throughout
the distribution system (for more information, see “Contour Map Manager” on
page 13-547).
• Element Annotation, for dynamic presentation of the values of user-selected
variables in the plan view (for more information, see “Element Annotation” on
page 13-509).
• Color Coding, which assigns colors based on ranges of values to elements in the
plan view. Color coding is useful in performing quick diagnostics on the network
(for more information, see “Color Coding” on page 13-513).
For this lesson, you will use the system from Lesson 3 (see “Lesson 3: Scenario
Management”), saved as MYLESSON3 in the Wtrc\Lesson directory. If you did not
complete Lesson 3, you may use the file LESSON4.WCD (LESSON4.DWG in
AutoCAD).
1. Open MYLESSON3.WCD.
2. Select File > Save As.
3. Type the filename MYLESSON4, and click Save.
4. Select File > Project Summary, and change the Project Title to Lesson 4 -
Reporting Results.
3.4.1 Part 1—Reports
1. Select the 2000 l/min., 3 hour fire flow at J-6 (EPS) scenario.
2. Click the GO button to open the Scenario dialog box.
3. Click GO to analyze the scenario. When the Results dialog box opens, notice that
the Results report can be saved to a file, copied to the clipboard, or printed using
the buttons in the top left corner.
This report displays key system characteristics on a formatted page. In an EPS
analysis such as this one, these characteristics are displayed for each time incre-
ment. If there were any warnings or problems, they would also appear here.
4. Click Close.
You can access the results for the current scenario (the scenario appearing in the
list box in the toolbar) at any time by clicking GO and selecting the Results tab.

Quick Start Lessons
5. Open the Tank Editor for tank T-1 (by double-clicking the tank, T-1).
6. Click the Report button at the bottom of the dialog box and select Detailed
Report to view a formatted summary report for the tank.
7. Use the Page Down button to navigate to page two of the
report.
On page two, you can see the tank’s status (draining or filling) at each time incre-
ment.
Every element can generate a report in the same general format, which includes
the name of the calculated scenario and a series of tables describing the element’s
properties and results in detail. You can print this report or copy it to the clipboard
using the buttons at the top of the dialog box. The report will print or paste into a
word processor in the exact format seen on the screen.
8. Click the Close button on the report, and then click OK to exit the Tank Editor.
9. You can also print detailed reports for several elements at one time.

In the Stand-Alone version, use the Select tool to draw a window around the
elements you want to report, or hold down the shift key while selecting the
elements individually. Then, select Report > Element Details to open the
Element Details dialog box.
In the AutoCAD version, start by selecting Report > Element Details. The
crosshairs change into a pickbox. Using the pickbox, select elements from the
drawing space that you want to report (individually or using a window), and then
right-click to bring up the Detailed Reports dialog box.
10. When the Detailed Reports dialog box opens, the elements selected from the
layout view are already highlighted for output. From this dialog box, you can edit
the element selection set (hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple elements from
the list), and then print the reports.
Click the Select button to go to the Selection Set dialog box.
11. If you want to select multiple elements based on some criteria, you can do that
here. Click Cancel to return to the Detailed Reports dialog box.

Quick Start Lessons
12. If you want, you can click the Print button to print all of the reports for the
selected elements.
13. Click Cancel to exit the dialog box.
14. Click Cancel.
15. Another type of report available is the Element Results Report. Select the
elements to be included in this report in the same way as the elements for the
Detailed Report.
16. Select Report > Elements Results. The result is a single report containing calcu-
lated analysis results for each of the elements selected.
From the Elements Results Report dialog box, you can print or copy and paste the
report for any elements. The Elements Results Report contains all of the results
calculated for the selected elements.
17. Select elements to be included in this report and click Preview to view the
resulting output.
18. Click Close when you are finished to exit the preview and the Analysis Results
Report dialog box.
19. Select Report > Scenario Summary. This report summarizes the alternatives and
options selected in the current scenario.
20. Click Close.
21. Select Report > Project Inventory (for more information, see “Project Inventory
Report” on page 13-517). This report tells you the total number of each type of
element and the total length of pipe in the system.

22. Click Close.

23. Finally, click the Capital Cost button in the toolbar.
24. Assuming Capital Cost Estimating calculations had already been run,
clicking the Report button located above the Scenario Costs tree view
would generate a Capital Cost Analysis Report. Click Close.
3.4.2 Part 2—Tabular Reports (FlexTables)
Tabular Reports are an extremely powerful tool in WaterCAD (for more information,
see “FlexTables” on page 7-329). These reports are not only good presentation tools,
they are also very helpful in data entry and analysis. When data must be entered for a
large number of elements, clicking each element and entering the data can be tedious
and time consuming. Using the tabular reports, elements can be changed using the
global edit tool, or filtered to display only the desired elements. Values that are entered
into the table will be automatically updated in the model. The tables can also be
customized to contain only the desired data. Columns can be added or removed, or
you can display duplicates of the same column with different units. The tabular reports
can save you an enormous amount of time and effort.
Tabular reports are dynamic tables of input values and calculated results. White
columns are editable input values, and yellow columns are non-editable calculated
values. When data is entered into a table directly, the values in the model will be auto-
matically updated. These tables can be printed or copied into a spreadsheet program.
Two very powerful features in these tables are Global Edit (see “Globally Editing
Data” on page 7-337) and Filtering (see “Filtering Tables” on page 7-339). Suppose
you decide to evaluate how our network might operate in five years. Assume that the
C factor for 5-year old ductile iron pipe reduces from 130 to 120. It would be repeti-
tive to go through and edit the pipe roughness through the individual pipe dialog
boxes, particularly when dealing with a large system. Instead, you will use the filter
tool in this example to filter out the PVC pipes, and then use global edit tool to change
the pipe roughness on the ductile iron pipes only.
1. Begin by setting up a new Alternative and Scenario to capture the changes to the
C values.
b. Highlight the Scenario P-8 and P-9 Set to 200 mm.
c. Click the Scenario Management button.
d. Add a Child for this Scenario called 5-yr.-old D.I.P.; click OK.

Quick Start Lessons
e. Select the Physical check box and click the New button.
f. Name the new Alternative 5-yr.-old D.I.P. and click OK.
g. Click Close to exit the Alternative Editor, and again to exit the Scenario
Control Center and return to the drawing pane.
2. To open a tabular report, select Report > Tables, or click the Tabular
Report button on the toolbar.
3. Select the Pipe Report from the list and click OK.

4. Click the Scenario list box and select the new Scenario from the list.
5. Right-click the Material column and choose Filter > Quick Filter from the
shortcut menu. You want to display only ductile iron pipes in the table. To do so:
a. Set the Column field to Material.
b. Set the Operator to =.
c. Set the Value field to Ductile Iron.
d. Click OK.
6. Use the Global Edit tool to modify all of the roughness values in the table.
a. Right-click the Hazen-Williams C column and select Global Edit.
b. Select Set from the Operation list.
c. Enter 120 into the Global Edit box.
d. Click OK. All of the values are now set to 120.
7. To deactivate the filter, right-click anywhere in the dialog box and select Filter >
Reset from the shortcut menu. Click Yes to reset the filter.

Quick Start Lessons
8. You may also wish to edit a table by adding or removing columns using the Table
Manager (for more information, see “Table Manager” on page 7-330).
a. Click the Options button at the top of the table dialog box and select
Customize.
b. Scroll through the list on the left side to see the types of data available for
placement in the table. You can highlight a particular item, then use the [ < ]
and [ > ] buttons to add or remove that column from your table.
c. For this example, you can display junction elevations in both meters and feet
by checking the Allow Duplicate Columns box, highlighting Elevation
(shown in gray) in the list of available columns, and clicking the [ > ] button.
Elevation now appears twice under Selected Columns.
d. You can adjust the order in which the columns will be displayed using the
arrows below the right hand list, or drag items up and down. Click OK, and
OK again to exit the Table Manager.
e. The revised table appears with two Elevation columns, both in meters. Drag
and drop the new column heading to relocate it next to the original Elevation
column.
f. To apply separate units to the two columns, click the Options button and
select Use Local Units, placing a check next to it to indicate this option is
active.
g. Click Close to exit the table when you are finished.
9. Click GO to open the Batch Run dialog box.

10. Click GO to compute the network for 5-yr.-old D.I.P., and then click Close.

This option allows the tabular report to have units independent of the project and
local to the table. In other words, without this option switched on, changing the
units from meters to feet in the table would change the unit for pressure
throughout the project. The Use Local Units option is ideal for displaying the
same variable with multiple units within the same tabular report.
11. Click Yes in the warning box that appears indicating that you wish to switch to
local units. To assign units of feet to one of the columns, right-click the column
heading and select Elevation Properties from the shortcut menu.
12. In the Set Field Options dialog box, select ft. from the Units list box. Click OK to
return to the updated table.
13. Click Close to exit the table when you are finished. Click GO to open the Batch
Run dialog box, and click GO to compute the network for 5-yr.-old D.I.P., and
then click Close.
3.4.3 Part 3—Create a Plan and Profile
1. To create a plan view of the distribution system, click Report > Plan View > Full
View.
This option will create a plan of the entire system regardless of what the screen
shows, while the Current View option will create a plan of exactly what is
displayed in the window at that moment.
The Plan View will be put into a separate window, which can then be printed or
copied to the clipboard. If you click the Copy button, you can paste the plan view
into a word processor.
2. Click Close.
3. You can also create a plan view in the Stand-Alone version for export to
AutoCAD or other compatible software. Click File > Export > DXF File. This
action will create a .DXF file of your network that you can then import into
AutoCAD. In AutoCAD, use plan views as a quick way to develop simple scaled
views of your primary network. Click OK or Cancel to exit the dialog box.
4. To create a profile view, select Tools > Profiling, or click the Profile
button in the toolbar. This activates the Profile Setup dialog box. In the
Profile Setup dialog box, choose the attribute you wish to profile from
the Attribute list box.
For this example, choose Calculated Hydraulic Grade.
5. Next, click the Select From Drawing button.
6. The dialog box closes, and the crosshairs change to a pick box in AutoCAD. Click
pipes P-1, P-2, P-6, P-8, and P-9, selecting a continuous path, or walk-through the
network. Right-click when you are finished (and select Done in Stand-Alone).

Quick Start Lessons
7. The Profile Setup dialog box opens with the selected elements appearing, in order,
in the list. Click the Profile button to view the profile.
8. After you create the profile, you can make adjustments to its appearance by
clicking the Options button and selecting Graph Options. A dialog box opens in
which you can change the titles, fonts, scaling, and line types used in the graph.
9. Leave everything set to the defaults for this example, and click Cancel to exit the
dialog box.
10. When you have finished setting up the graph, it can be printed or copied to the
clipboard using the buttons at the top of the Plot window.
11. Click Close to exit the Plot window when you are finished. Click Close again to
exit the Profile Setup dialog box.

3.4.4 Part 4—Contouring
The contouring feature in WaterCAD enables you to generate contours for reporting
attributes such as elevation, pressure, and hydraulic grade. You can specify the
contour interval, as well as color code the contours by index values or ranges of
values. In this lesson, you will contour based on hydraulic grade elevations.
1. To create a plan view of the water distribution system with contours,

click the Contour button from the toolbar.
2. Within the Contour Manager, choose Calculated Hydraulic Grade
from the Contour drop-down list box.
3. Create a Selection Set of elements you will use in contouring by clicking the
Ellipsis (…) button next to the Selection Set list box.
4. Click Add, name the set Contour by HGL, and click OK.
5. Define your selection set so that it consists of all junctions in Zone-1.
a. Click Select > By Filter > Pressure Junctions.
b. Under Column, select Zone.
c. For Operator, select =.
d. For Value, select Zone-1.
e. Click OK to return to the Selection Set dialog box.
6. Notice that the selected elements are now highlighted under Available Items.
Click [ > ] to move the elements to the Selected Items list, and click OK.
7. Click OK again to exit the Selection Set Manager.
8. Select Contour by HGL in the Selection Set drop-down list box.
9. Click Initialize to update the Minimum and Maximum HGL elevations. Enter:
– an Increment of 0.1 m
– and an Index Increment of 0.2 m
10. Make sure the button for Color by Index is selected, and click OK.
11. A plan view of the water distribution model is opened in a separate window, along
with contours that interpolate between the elevations of the selected network
components.
12. To improve the appearance of the contouring, press the Options button and
choose Smooth Contours.

Quick Start Lessons
13. Click Close to return to the drawing pane.
3.4.5 Part 5—Element Annotation
When you want to label network attributes in the plan view, use the Annotation
feature. With it, you can control which values are displayed, how they are labeled, and
how units are expressed. For this example, you will annotate demands at the junctions,
and flow and velocity in the pipes.
1. Click the Element Annotation option (see “Element Annotation” on

page 13-509) located in the Tools menu, or click the Annotation button
on the toolbar to open the Annotation Wizard (see “The Annotation
Wizard” on page 13-510).
2. Select the elements you wish to annotate. In this example, add annotation to the
pressure junctions and pipes. Select these elements from the list and click Next.
3. The next dialog box allows you to choose the attributes you wish to annotate for
the specified element type.
– The Attributes column is used for selecting the attribute you would like to
annotate.
– The Mask is a template of how the annotation will appear on the screen.
– The %v and %u options are added to display and control the value and units
associated with the attribute.

– The Preview column shows an example of the annotation with values for the
variables.
4. For this example, add annotation for the demand summary at each junction.
a. In the first row, the Attribute column, select Demand (Calculated) from the
list and click Next.
b. Add Discharge and Velocity annotations for the pipes in the same manner and
click Next.
c. The final dialog box of the Annotation Wizard contains a summary where you
can check your annotations.
If there are any errors, click the Back button to go backwards in the wizard
and make any necessary changes.
Click Finished.
5. The drawing will now display all of the annotations. You can try changing the
properties of an element and recalculating. The annotations will update automati-
cally to reflect any changes in the system.
6. If the annotation is crowded, you can click and drag the annotation to move it.
In the AutoCAD version, click the annotation and then click the grip to move it, or
use an AutoCAD command such as Move or Stretch.

Quick Start Lessons
Alternatively, you could go back into the Annotation Wizard, and abbreviate or
remove the Mask labels. A third option is to decrease the Annotation Height. This
option is found under the Drawing tab in the Tools > Options menu.
7. If you wish to delete the annotations, click the Annotation toolbar button, and
clear any checked boxes. Click Next, and then Finished.
3.4.6 Part 6—Color Coding
You can also review results in the plan view by color coding the elements based on
attributes or ranges of values.
1. Select the Color Coding option (see “How Do I Color Code Elements?”
on page A-700) under the Tools menu, or click the Color Coding button
on the toolbar.
2. The Color Coding dialog box allows you to set the color coding for links, nodes,
or both. You will color code by diameter (link attribute) and pressure (node
attribute) in this example. Click the Link tab, and from the Color Coding list box.
a. Select the Diameter attribute.
b. In the table, enter values of 150, 200, and 1000 mm with colors of red, blue,
and green, respectively.

c. Next, click the Node tab, and select Pressure from the Attribute drop-down
list box.
d. Click the Calculate Range button to get the minimum and maximum values
for the variable displayed at the top of the dialog box.
e. Then, click the Initialize button and the model will select the color coding
ranges in the table automatically.
f. Finally, click OK to generate the Color Coding.
3. You can add a legend to the drawing by clicking the Insert Legend button,
choosing the Link Legend or Node Legend option, and clicking
anywhere on the drawing space to place the legend. In AutoCAD, accept
the defaults when prompted about scale and legend.
4. Color coding is dynamic; that is, it updates automatically as you change time
increment or Scenario using the list boxes above the drawing pane. Notice that as
you switch from the first Scenario to P-8 and P-9 set to 200 mm, the color of these
pipes changes from red to blue.
– To turn the color coding off, open the Color Coding dialog box (double-click
the legend you placed) and set the Attribute to <None> on both the Link and
Node tabs.
– To delete a legend, select it by clicking once, and press the Delete key.
5. Close the open dialog boxes and save this project.

Quick Start Lessons
3.5 Lesson 5: Automated Fire Flow Analysis

One of the primary goals of a water distribution system is to provide adequate
capacity to fight fires. WaterCAD automated fire flow analysis can be used to deter-
mine if the system can meet the fire flow demands while maintaining minimum pres-
sure constraints. Fire flows can be computed for all nodes in the system, or you can
create a selection set consisting of specific nodes where you wish to test available
flow.
Fire flows are computed by iteratively assigning demands and computing system pres-
sures. The model assigns the fire flow demand to a node and checks the model,
checking to see if all pressure constraints are met at that demand. It will assign a new
demand and automatically re-check the system pressures if a constraint is violated.
Iterations continue until the constraints are met, or until the maximum number of iter-
ations is reached.
The purpose of this example is to walk you through the steps to create, calculate, and
analyze a fire-flow scenario. This lesson again uses the distribution system from the
previous lessons.
3.5.1 Part 1—Inputting Fire Flow Data
1. Start WaterCAD and open the file LESSON5, found in the Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson
folder.
2. Or, if you have previously completed Lesson 3 or 4, you can use your
MYLESSON3 or MYLESSON4 file. Select Project Summary from the File
menu, and change the title of the project to Lesson 5—Fire Flow Analysis. Click
OK.
3. Previously, you ran an analysis with a fire flow at node J-6 by manually adding a
large demand to the individual node. Before running the automated fire flow anal-
ysis, you will create a new Demand Alternative, removing that demand.
a. Select Analysis > Alternatives and highlight the Demand alternative in the
left pane.
b. Highlight Average Daily with 2000 l/min. Fire Flow in the right pane.
c. Click Duplicate.
d. In the Demand Summary column for node J-6 (row 6), click the word
Composite, and it changes to a button.
e. Click the Composite button to open the editor for the composite demand.

Lesson 5: Automated Fire Flow Analysis
f. Click the 2000 l/min. demand, and click Delete.

g. Select Yes to confirm, OK to close the editor, and Close to exit the Demand
Alternative.
4. You will now see the Demand Alternative Copy of Average Daily with 2000 l/
min. Fire Flow in the list. Highlight it and click the Rename button. Rename this
Alternative Base-Average Daily.

Quick Start Lessons
5. You are going to analyze the fire flows by adding to the Maximum Day Demands,
which are 1.5 times the Average Day Demands.
a. Set up the Maximum Day Demand Alternative by highlighting the Base -
Average Daily Alternative and selecting Duplicate.
b. Right-click the Base Flow column, and select Global Edit. Set the Operation
to multiply, and enter a value of 1.5. Click OK.

Note: Composite demands cannot be modified using global edit. Each

individual demand that makes up the composite demand must
be changed individually.
c. Click Close to exit the new Demand Alternative.

d. Rename this Alternative Max. Day.
6. Highlight the Fire Flow alternative in the Alternative Manager.

7. Click the Edit button to set up the Base-Fire Flow Alternative.
a. Enter a Needed Fire Flow of 3000 l/min.
b. Enter a Fire Flow Upper Limit of 6000 l/min.
c. Set Apply Fire Flows By to Adding to Baseline Demand.
This selection means that when WaterCAD performs the analysis, the fire
flow will be added to any demands already assigned to the junction. Alterna-
tively, you could have selected to replace these demands, so that the fire flow
would represent the total demand at the node.
d. For Pressure Constraints, set both the Residual Pressure and Minimum Zone
Pressure to 150 kPa.
e. Leave the check box for Use Minimum System Pressure Constraint
cleared, so that the minimum pressure will only be checked for the zone a
particular node is in.

Quick Start Lessons
Note that if you had multiple zones within your project and wanted to insure
that a minimum system-wide pressure constraint was met, you could check
the Use Minimum System Pressure Constraint box and type it in the box
provided. This box is grayed out until the check box is activated.
f. Select Subset of Junctions from the Selection Set drop-down list box.
g. Click the Ellipsis (…) button to open the Selection Set dialog box.
8. For this example, a fire flow analysis is only needed for the junctions at the four
street corners in our drawing. Choose the Select From Drawing button and click
nodes J-1, J-2, J-3, and J-4 (in Stand-Alone, you must hold down the Shift key
while making multiple selections).
9. When you are finished, right-click (and select Done in Stand-Alone).

10. The nodes you selected are now in the Selected Items list. Click OK to exit the
Selection Set dialog box. Note that the Selection Set table is now filled with your
Selection Set.
11. Click the Close button to exit the Fire Flow Alternative dialog box, and Close
again to exit the Alternative Manager dialog box.
3.5.2 Part 2—Calculating a Fire Flow Analysis
You must now set up a new Scenario to utilize the appropriate alternatives and set up
the calculation options.
1. Select Analysis > Scenarios to open the Scenario Control Center.

2. Choose Scenario Management > Add > Base Scenario.
3. Name your new Scenario Automated Fire Flow Analysis and click OK.
4. In the Alternatives tab of the Scenario dialog box, change the Physical Alternative
to P-8 and P-9 Set to 200 mm.
5. Change the Demand to Max. Day and leave all other Alternatives set to their
defaults.

Quick Start Lessons
6. Click the Calculation tab, and make sure that Steady State is selected.
7. Select the Fire Flow Analysis check box. Note that all fire flow calculations must
be performed under steady-state conditions.
8. Click Close to exit the Scenario dialog box.
9. Run the Scenario.
a. Click GO Batch Run.
b. Select the check box for Automated Fire Flow Analysis, and clear the other
Scenarios.

c. Click Batch to run the analysis, and Yes at the confirmation prompt.
d. When the calculation is complete, click OK and Close to exit the Scenario
Control Center.
3.5.3 Part 3—Viewing Fire Flow Results
Note: Another good way to review an automated fire flow analysis is to

use color coding. If you have a situation where no nodes meet
the pressure constraints for the needed fire flow, you can color
code these nodes in the plan view for easy identification. For
more information on color coding, see “Part 6—Color Coding” on
page 3-141.
1. Click the Tabular Reports button, located to the right of the GO button
on the WaterCAD toolbar, to open the Table Manager.
2. Highlight the Fire Flow Report and click the OK button to view the
report.
3. Make sure that Automated Fire Flow Analysis is selected in the Scenario list
box.
4. In the Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints column, all of the boxes are checked except
for the nodes that you did not analyze, because the specified needed flow of 3000
l/min. was available and minimum pressures were exceeded.

Quick Start Lessons
– For nodes J-1 and J-3, pressures were computed for the Fire Flow Upper
Limit of 6000 l/min. because none ever dropped below specified minimum
pressures.
– Nodes J-2 and J-4 reached their minimum residual pressures at flows slightly
below the maximum of 6000 l/min.
– Notice, also, that the report contains the Minimum System Pressure
(excluding the current node being flowed) and its location.
5. When you are finished reviewing the report, click Close in the WaterCAD Fire
Flow Report dialog box and save your file as MYLESSON5.
3.6 Lesson 6: Water Quality Analysis

In conjunction with Extended Period simulations, WaterCAD is capable of performing

a water quality analysis to compute water age, constituent concentration, or
percentage of water from a given node (trace analysis). Using these features, you can
look at factors such as residence time in tanks, chlorine residuals throughout the
system, and which tank or reservoir is the primary water source for different areas in
your system.
This lesson uses the file called LESSON6.WCD (LESSON6.DWG in the AutoCAD
version), located in the \Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson directory.
1. Open this file, and then select File > Save As.
The water distribution system has already been set up for you. It has one reservoir and
one tank. The system serves primarily residential areas, with some commercial water
use as well. There are two pumps connected to the reservoir. However, under normal
conditions, only one pump will be in use. A background drawing has been included
for reference.
If you would like to turn off the .DXF background in the Stand-Alone version, clear
the background check box in the Background Layers pane.

Lesson 6: Water Quality Analysis
3.6.1 Part 1—Computing Water Age
You will begin by running an age analysis for water in the system, assuming an initial
age of 0 for all nodes. The water from the reservoir will be an infinite supply of new
water, so the age of water elsewhere in the system will be a reflection of time from the
start of the run and how long ago the water left the reservoir. The analysis will be run
for a 2-week period (336 hours), in order to determine the equilibrium point of the
system.
1. Start by adding a new Alternative for the age analysis. Select Analysis > Alterna-
tives.
2. Click Age in the left column, to highlight it.
3. Click Add. This lets you add an age alternative.
4. Name the new alternative Initial Age = 0. Since you are assuming an initial age of
0 everywhere in the system, you do not need to enter any initial ages.

Quick Start Lessons
5. Click OK.
6. The Active Topology Alternative window opens. Click Close.
7. Click Close to close the Alternatives Manager.
8. Next, set up a new Scenario to run an Extended Period Simulation incorporating
the new Alternative.
a. Select Analysis > Scenarios. There is one Scenario already set up called
Existing - Avg Day.
b. If needed, click Existing - Avg Day to highlight it.
c. Click Scenario Management > Add > Child Scenario.
d. Type Age Analysis as the new scenario name, and click OK.

e. Under the Alternatives tab, select the Age check box, and select the alterna-
tive you just created, Initial Age = 0, from the drop-down list box.

Quick Start Lessons
f. Click the Calculation tab to view the calculation settings for this Scenario.
Extended Period Analysis should already be selected.
g. Enter a Start Time of 0.
h. Set a Duration of 336 hours.
i. Set a Hydraulic Time Step of 1 hour.
j. Select the Water Quality Analysis check box.
k. Select the Age button.
9. Click Options.
The Calculation Options dialog box opens. In this dialog box, you will find
various calculation options such as number of trials, accuracy, and tolerance
settings for each of the water quality analysis types. Leave these options set to
their default values, click Cancel to exit the dialog box, and Close to exit the
Scenario Editor.
10. Run the Scenario.
a. Click Batch Run.
b. Select the Age Analysis check box.

c. Click Batch, and then Yes and OK when prompted.

d. After the run is complete, click Close to exit the Scenario Control Center.
11. Select Age Analysis from the Scenario toolbar list box.
12. A good way to view changes in water quality attributes over time is to
use color coding. Click the Color Coding button on the toolbar.
13. Under the Link tab, set the Attribute list box to Calculated Age.
14. Click the Initialize button to set up a default color scheme. Accept this default
scheme.
If you get a message about WaterCAD being unable to determine the limits for
mapping, make sure that Age Analysis is selected in the Scenario drop-down list,
in the toolbar.
15. Click the Node tab.
16. Set the Attribute list box to Calculated Age.
17. Click the Initialize button to set up a default color scheme. Accept this default
scheme.
18. Click OK.
19. Once back in the drawing pane, click the Legend button on the toolbar.
20. Select either the Node Legend or Link Legend (in this case, the color
coding should be the same for both). Click anywhere in your drawing to
place the legend. If you do not place it correctly the first time, you can always
drag it and drop it in a new location.

Quick Start Lessons
Legend
21. Set the time increment in the toolbar to 4.00 hr.

22. Use the VCR-style buttons to scroll through time in your analysis and observe the
color changes in your network reflecting water age.
23. A good way to check if your network has had sufficient time to reach an equilib-
rium point is to look at Age vs. Time graphs for your elements.

a. Open the Tank Editor for Tank T-1 (by double-clicking the tank).
b. Click the Report button at the bottom of the editor, and select Graph.
c. Select Calculated Age as the Dependent variable.
d. Make sure Age Analysis is checked in the Available Scenarios box.
e. Click OK.

Quick Start Lessons
From the graph, you can see that once a repeating pattern is reached, the age
of the water fluctuates between approximately 34 and 49 hours in 24-hour
periods. Looking at these equilibrium ranges for various nodes can help guide
you in setting up initial water age values in subsequent runs.
f. Click Close and OK after you review the graph.
3.6.2 Part 2—Analyzing Constituent Concentrations
In this portion of the lesson, you will look at chlorine residuals in the system over
time. WaterCAD stores information on constituent characteristics in a file called a
constituent library. You will add information for chlorine to this library, set up initial
concentrations in the system, and run the simulation.
1. Select Analysis > Alternatives.

2. Click the Constituent alternative to highlight it.
3. Click Add.
4. Name the new alternative Chlorine Injection, and click OK.
5. Click the Ellipsis (…) button next to the Constituent drop-down list box to open
the Constituent Library.
6. Click the Insert button. An entry for Unlabeled appears in the table.

7. Click the Edit button, and enter the data below into the dialog box.
La be l: Chlorine
Bulk Re a ction: -0.10/day
W a ll Re a ction: -0.08 m/day
Diffusivity: 1.2e-9 m 2/s
8. Leave the Unlimited Concentration check box selected, and click OK.
9. Click Close to exit the Constituent Library. You should now be back in the
Constituent Alternative Editor.
Tip: To quickly enter the initial concentrations for an element type,

use the Global Edit feature.
10. Select Chlorine from the Constituent list box. Notice that the Bulk Reaction in
the table is automatically updated.
11. In the Pump and Valve tabs, set the pumps and valves to an initial concentration of
1 mg/l.
12. Click the Junction tab, and initialize the chlorine concentrations by entering a
value of 1 mg/l at each junction node. (Right-click the column heading and use
Global Options to Set the initial concentration.)
13. In the Reservoir tab, enter a value of 2.0 mg/l for the reservoir.
14. Set the tank’s concentration to 0.5 mg/l.
15. Close the Editor and the Alternatives Manager.

Quick Start Lessons
16. Now, open the Scenario Control Center and set up a new Scenario in order to
run the Constituent Analysis.
a. Create a new Child off of the Age Analysis Scenario by highlighting it and
clicking Scenario Management > Add > Child Scenario.
b. Type Chlorine Analysis as the new scenario name, and click OK.
c. Under the Alternatives tab, check the box labeled Constituent, and select the
Chlorine Injection Alternative from the choice list.
17. Click the Calculation tab.
18. Select the Constituent button, in the Analysis section, and leave everything else
set to the inherited values.
19. Click Close to exit the dialog box.
20. Click GO Batch Run.
21. Deselect Age Analysis.
22. Select Chlorine Analysis, then click Batch to run the model.
23. Click Yes and OK to accept the message boxes. Close the Scenario Control
Center dialog box.
24. Select sure Chlorine Analysis as the current Scenario.
25. Set up color coding (see “Part 1—Computing Water Age” on page 3-152). This
time, color code by Calculated Concentration instead of Calculated Age. Scroll
through the time steps to view how the concentrations change throughout the
network. When you look at your results using color coding, tables, and graphs, try
to discover what better initial values for chlorine concentration might be.

3.6.3 Part 3—Performing a Trace Analysis
A trace analysis determines the percentage of water at all nodes and links in the
system from a specific source node (the trace node). In systems with more than one
source, it is common to perform multiple trace analyses using the various source
nodes as the trace nodes in successive analyses. For this run, you will perform a trace
analysis to determine the percentages of water coming from the tank.
1. Select Analysis > Alternatives.

2. Click the Trace alternative to highlight it.
3. Click Add.
4. Name the new alternative Trace Analysis for Tank, and click OK.
5. In the Trace Node list box, select the tank, T-1.
6. Leave the initial percentages set to zero, and close the editor.
7. Close the Alternatives Manager.
8. Next, set up a new scenario to run an Extended Period Simulation incorporating

the new alternative.
b. Create a new child for the Age Analysis scenario by highlighting it and
clicking Scenario Management > Add > Child Scenario.

Quick Start Lessons
c. Type Trace Analysis as the new scenario name, and click OK.
d. In the Alternatives tab, select the Trace check box.
e. Select the Trace Analysis for Tank alternative from the drop-down list box.
f. In the Calculation tab, select the Trace button in the Analysis section, and
leave everything else set to the inherited values.
g. Click Close to exit the dialog box.
9. Click GO Batch Run.

10. Select the new Trace Analysis scenario and click Batch.

Lesson 7: Working with Data from External Sources
11. Use color coding (by Calculated Trace), tables, and graphs to view the results of
this run. As you scroll through the time periods, notice how the colors spread
outward from the tank during periods when the tank is draining, and recede when
the tank begins to fill. For more information on reporting features, “Lesson 4:
Reporting Results” on page 3-127.
12. Close the open dialog boxes and save this project.
3.7 Lesson 7: Working with Data from External

Sources
WaterCAD supports several methods of exchanging data with external applications,
preventing duplication of effort and allowing you to save time by reusing data already
present in other locations. For instance, you can exchange data with databases or a
GIS system, or you can convert existing CAD linework to a pipe network.
There are multiple ways of importing data from outside sources into WaterCAD. You
can set up one or more database connections to bring in information stored in many
standard database and spreadsheet formats. GIS information can be brought in through
connections to ESRI shapefiles. If you have existing drawings of your network in a
.DXF format (.DWG format in the AutoCAD version), you can have WaterCAD
convert your lines and/or blocks into distribution system elements, setting up prefer-
ences for handling situations such as T-intersections and line endpoints, and creating
tolerances to allow for drawing imperfections. Or, you can display a .DXF file as a
background drawing for use in laying out a scaled network (Stand-Alone version
only). Patterns and pump definitions can also be imported, from specially formatted
text files. These data types can only be imported in this way—since this data occupies
more than a single database field, shapefile and database connections cannot be used
to bring pump definitions or patterns into the model. Shapefile and database connec-
tions can, however, store the name of the pump definition, as well as other single-field
pump data such as elevation, label, and relative speed. This allows the pumps to be
imported into the model, and assigned a previously created (or imported) pump defini-
tion, according to the name of the pump definition. This process is demonstrated in
Part 1. Finally, WaterCAD will automatically import networks created in EPANet,
KYPIPE, and previous versions of Cybernet/WaterCAD.

Quick Start Lessons
WaterCAD also uses database and shapefile connections to export data from the
model for use externally. You can also copy tables, reports, and graphs and paste them
into other Windows applications, or save plan and profile views in .DXF format for
use when creating construction documents in CAD. This lesson covers the three main
methods of building your network using external data, summarized in the following
table.
Table 3-11: Network Building Using External Data
Method Description Advantages Disadvantages
Extremely versatile. Allows

exchange of most any model
data with a wide variety of
applications (ODBC). A
Create connections Pipes will be depicted
topographic representation of
to import and export as straight lines
the network can be created by
Database model data using connecting the to and
using node coordinates and
Connection common database from nodes, so pipe
assigning to and from nodes to
and spreadsheet bends will not be
pipes. Once a connection is
formats. transferred.
established, it can be saved for
later use, and multiple
connections can be created and
synchronized simultaneously.
More proprietary. You

Advantages are similar to those
Create connections have to have
of Database Connections,
Shapefile to import and export software that
except the topographic data
Connection model data in ESRI supports ESRI
exchange is automatic and pipe
shapefile format. shapefiles in order to
bends are accounted for.
utilize the data.
Elements are
assigned default
Convert existing Enables you to use legacy CAD labels as they are
lines, polylines, and drawings to build your network. created. Only
Polyline to
blocks in DXF/DWG You can set up tolerances to topographic data can
Pipe
format into pipes and allow for drawing imperfections, be imported, not
Conversion
other network and preferences for how nodes attribute values.
elements. will be created. Requires careful
review on the part of
the modeler.

3.7.1 Part 1—Importing Shapefile Data
In this part of the lesson, you will import ESRI shapefiles to construct the distribution
network in WaterCAD from existing GIS data. If you have ArcView, ArcInfo, or other
application that can open a shapefile, then you can, if you choose, view the files exter-
nally prior to importing them. However, you will still be able to perform the workshop
problem even if you don’t have one of these applications. This lesson uses the network
from “Lesson 6: Water Quality Analysis” on page 3-151.
The ESRI shapefile actually consists of three separate files that combine to define the
spatial and non-spatial attributes of a map feature. The three required files are as
follows:
• Main File—The main file is a binary file with an extension of .SHP. It contains
the spatial attributes associated with the map features. For example, a polyline
record contains a series of points, and a point record contains x and y coordinates.
• Index File—The index file is a binary file with an extension of .SHX. It contains
the byte position of each record in the main file.
• Database File—The database file is a dBase III file with an extension of .DBF. It
contains the non-spatial data associated with the map features.
All three files must have the same file name with the exception of the extension, and
be located in the same directory.
Listed below are the files you will be importing. Only the main files are listed;
however, corresponding .SHX and .DBF are present as well.
• PresJunc.shp
• PresPipe.shp
• PRV.shp
• Pump.shp
• Reservoi.shp
• Tank.shp
If you have a program such as ArcView or ArcGIS that allows you to view shapefiles,
begin by setting up a view with all of the shapefiles (themes) listed above turned on. If
you completed “Lesson 6: Water Quality Analysis” on page 3-151, you should recog-
nize the layout from that lesson. You can look at the data table for each of the themes
to see what you will be importing. When you have finished reviewing the shapefiles,
close the application.

Quick Start Lessons
interface.

Welcome to WaterCAD dialog box opens, click the Close button.
2. Click Tools > Options and select the Global Options tab.
4. Select File > New. Click No when prompted to save the current project.
5. In the Create Project File As dialog box, double-click the Lesson folder, type the
file name GISPROB.WCD for your project, and click Save. The Project Setup
Wizard opens.
6. In the Project Setup Wizard, title the project Lesson 7, Part 1 - Importing GIS
Data. Click Next. Click the Next button again to leave this dialog box set to its
default values.
7. In this dialog box, set up the drawing as Scaled, with a horizontal scale of 1:5000
and a vertical scale of 1:500.
8. Change the three Annotation Multipliers (Symbol Size, Text Height and Annota-
tion Height) to 2.8.
9. Click Next, leave the Prototypes set to their default values, and click Finished.
10. Before importing the shapefiles, we must import the pump definition that is refer-
enced by the pump shapefile. To do this, open the Pump Definition Manager by
clicking the Analysis > Pump Definitions.
11. In the Pump Definition Manager, click the Import button. Browse to your
Haestad/WaterGEMS/Lesson directory and select Lesson7.txt. Click Open.
The Lesson7 pump definition should appear in the list pane of the Pump Defini-
tion Manager.
1. Double-click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD for AutoCAD.

Select Tools > Options and choose the Global tab.
3. Click File > New and select No when prompted to save the existing drawing.
4. Only if the Create New Drawing dialog box does not open: Press the Esc key.
Then, type filedia at the command prompt and press Enter. Type the value 1 and
press Enter. Then, choose File > New, and do not save changes to the existing
drawing. Note that the filedia variable controls whether some AutoCAD
commands appear as dialog boxes or simply at the command prompt.

5. When the Create New Drawing dialog box opens, make sure Metric is selected,
and click OK.
6. Click Yes when prompted to set up the project. In the Project Setup Wizard, title
the project Lesson 7, Part 1 - Importing GIS Data, and click Next.
7. Click Next again to accept the defaults on the second screen.
8. In this dialog box, set up the drawing as Scaled, with a horizontal scale of 1:5000
and a vertical scale of 1:500.
9. Change the three Annotation Multipliers (Symbol Size, Text Height and Annota-
tion Height) to 2.8. Click Next, leave the Prototypes set to their default values,
and click Finished.
10. Select File > Synchronize > Shapefile Connections.

If you have not defined any shapefile connections in WaterCAD yet, you are
prompted to create a shapefile connection; select Yes to start the Shapefile
Connection Wizard. Or, if you have already defined shapefile connections in any
other WaterCAD project, start the Shapefile Connection Wizard by clicking Add
in the Shapefile Connection Manager that opens. Type the Connection Label
Lesson 7, Part 1 for this connection, and click the Next button.
11. Now, you need to select the check boxes for the types of elements you will be
importing. For this connection, select these check boxes: Pressure Junction,
Pressure Pipe, PRV, Pump, Reservoir, and Tank.
12. Click Next.

Quick Start Lessons
13. Leave the Shapefile Unit set to m, and select the check box to establish missing
connectivity data from spatial data, and click Next.
14. Click the Ellipsis (…) button next to the Shapefile field. Browse and select the
file PRESJUNC.SHP from the \Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson directory; click Open.
15. Set the Key/Label field to LABEL. This item designates the field that WaterCAD
matches with its own element labels, so that data will be assigned to the correct
place.
16. Using the Field Links table, match the data types available in WaterCAD to the
data types you will be bringing in from the shapefile.
17. In row 1, select Elevation from the WaterCAD column and ELEV from the Data-
base column. Set the Unit to m to set the coordinate from the shapefile to meters.
If the units in your shapefile were different than the units set up in WaterCAD,
then WaterCAD would automatically do the necessary unit conversions.
18. Fill in the next row, so that your entries correspond to the table below. Click Next
when you are finished.
Table 3-12: Pressure Junction Shapefile Connection
WaterCAD Database Unit
Elevation ELEV m
Base Flow DEMAND l/min

19. Set up the Pressure Pipe connections. Continue by entering the information below
for the Pressure Pipe and clicking Next to proceed to the next dialog box. The
shapefile for each type of element will be located in the \Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson
directory (for example, select the PRESPIPE.SHP file for the pressure pipe
connection), and the entry for the Key\Label field will always be LABEL. Your
Field Links tables should look like the tables that follow.
Table 3-13: Pressure Pipe Shapefile Connection
Diameter D mm
Hazen-Williams
C
C
Table 3-14: PRV Shapefile Connection
Elevation ELEV m
Diameter D mm
Initial HGL HGL m
Initial Valve
INITIAL_ST
Status
Table 3-15: Pump Shapefile Connection
Elevation ELEV m
Initial Pump
INIT_PUMP
Status
Pump Definition PUMP_DEFIN
Table 3-16: Reservoir Shapefile Connection
Elevation ELEV m

Quick Start Lessons
Table 3-17: Tank Shapefile Connection
Tank Diameter TANK_D m
Base Elevation BASE_ELEV m
Minimum
MIN_ELEV m
Elevation
Initial HGL INITIAL_HGL m
Maximum
MAX_ELEV m
Elevation
20. When you are finished setting up the shapefile connections, click Next to proceed.
The Synchronize Now? dialog box will open.
21. Make sure the Synchronize Shapefile Connection and In check boxes are
selected because you will be reading data from the shapefiles.
22. Click Finished and Yes when prompted if you want to proceed.
23. A Status Log is generated showing the elements as data that is read into the model.
After the import is complete, you should get a yellow light in this window, indi-
cating that the synchronization was successful but that there are warnings. If there
were no warnings you would get a green light and, if there were errors, a red light.

In this case, the warnings are due to the fact that you set WaterCAD to generate
our network connectivity from the GIS spatial data. The log indicates where
connectivity is being established, which is fine.
24. Close the Status Log and click OK to return to the drawing pane.
25. Now, examine the network that you imported. Notice that it looks like the network
from “Lesson 6: Water Quality Analysis” on page 3-151, and many of the pipes
have bends and curves in them. Since you have topographic information stored in
the shapefile, these bends can be imported. Because you created a scaled drawing,
the pipe lengths will be read from the layout.
Also notice that the default scenario, Base, is currently displayed as the current
scenario. Whenever data is brought in through a database or shapefile connection,
it is automatically written into the alternatives referenced by the current scenario.
Similarly, whenever data is exported, the data associated with the current scenario
will be used.
26. To run the model, click the GO button in the toolbar, and then click GO in the
dialog box. Now that you have calculated data, you could export the new data to
your GIS database by going into the database and creating a new label for it. In
“Part 2—Importing Data from a Database” on page 3-173, you will use an almost
identical procedure to export pressures using database connections.
27. After you are finished, close the Scenario Editor. Continue with “Part 2—
Importing Data from a Database” on page 3-173 or save your file as MyLesson7
and exit WaterCAD.

Quick Start Lessons
3.7.2 Part 2—Importing Data from a Database
This portion of the lesson shows you through the steps to set up a connection to a data-
base in order to create a new water distribution network from existing data.
The necessary data has been included as a Microsoft Excel 5.0 spreadsheet. If you do
not have software that can read this file type, you will still be able to perform the
workshop, but you won’t be able to open the data to view it externally.
This lesson uses the network from “Lesson 6: Water Quality Analysis” on page 3-151.
interface.
1. Open the spreadsheet file LESSON7.XLS and take a look at it. As you can see
from the worksheet tabs, the data is organized into six worksheets, one for each
type of element in the network. When setting up a spreadsheet yourself, you may
organize and group data however you like. Just make sure that the different types
of data are sorted into columns, with a descriptive heading in the topmost cell, and
include a column for your labels.
Welcome to WaterCAD dialog box opens, select the Close button.
3. Click Tools > Options and select the Global Options tab. Since you will be
working in SI units, click the Unit System selection box, and select System
International. Click OK.
4. Select File > New. Click No when prompted to save the current project. In the
Create Project File As dialog box, double-click the Lesson folder, type the file
name DBPROB.WCD for your project, and click Save. The Project Setup Wizard
opens.
5. In the Project Setup Wizard, title the project Lesson 7, Part 2 - Importing Data
from a Database. Click Next.
6. Click the Next button again to leave this dialog box set to its default values.
7. In this dialog box, set up the drawing as Schematic, and change the three Annota-
tion Multipliers (Symbol Size, Text Height and Annotation Height) to 25.
1. Open the spreadsheet file LESSON7.XLS and take a look at it. As you can see
from the worksheet tabs, the data is organized into six worksheets, one for each
type of element in the network. When setting up a spreadsheet yourself, you may

organize and group data however you like. Just make sure that the different types
of data are sorted into columns, with a descriptive heading in the topmost cell, and
include a column for your labels.
2. Double-click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD for AutoCAD.
3. Click Tools > Options and select the Global Options tab. Since you will be
working in SI units, click the Unit System selection box, and select System
International. Click OK.
4. Select File > New. Click No when prompted to save the existing drawing.
5. If the Create New Drawing dialog box does not open: Press the Esc key. Then,
type filedia at the command prompt and press Enter. Type the value 1 and press
Enter. Then, choose File > New, and do not save changes to the existing drawing.
Note that the filedia variable controls whether some AutoCAD commands appear
as dialog boxes or simply at the command prompt.
6. When the Create New Drawing dialog box opens, make sure that Metric is
selected, and click OK. Select Yes when prompted to set up the project. In the
Project Setup Wizard, title the project Lesson 7, Part 2 - Importing Data from a
Database, and click Next. Click Next again to accept the defaults on the second
screen.
7. In this dialog box, set up the drawing as Schematic, and change the three Annota-
tion Multipliers (Symbol Size, Text Height and Annotation Height) to 25.
9. Click File > Synchronize > Database Connections.

10. Click Add.

Quick Start Lessons
11. Enter the Connection Label Lesson 7, Part 2 for this connection, and click the
Add button.
12. Set the Database Type to Excel 5.0.

13. Click the Ellipsis (…) button next to the Database File field, and browse to select
the LESSON7.XLS file from the \Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson directory.
14. Click the Database Table list box. Notice that the items in the list correspond to
the different worksheet tabs in your spreadsheet file.
15. Select Junction$ from the list and Pressure Junction for the Table Type.
16. Set the Key/Label field to Label. This item designates the field that WaterCAD
matches with its own element labels, so that data will be assigned to the correct
place.
17. Using the Field Links table, you must now match the data types available in
WaterCAD to the data types you will be bringing in from the spreadsheet.
a. In row 1, select X from the WaterCAD column, and X (m) from the Database
column.
b. Set the Unit to m to set the coordinates that are read from the spreadsheet to
meters. If the units in your database were different than the units set up in
WaterCAD, then WaterCAD would automatically make the necessary unit
conversions.

18. Fill in the remaining rows, so that your entries correspond to the table below.
Table 3-18: Junction Database Connection
X X (m) m
Y Y (m) m
Elevation Elevation (m) m
Demand Demand (m) m
19. Click OK when you are finished.

20. In the Database Connection dialog box, click Add, and set up your database
connection for pipe data.
21. Use the same spreadsheet file you used for the junction data, but set the Database
Table and Table Type to Pipes and Pressure Pipe, respectively.
22. The Key/Label Field is Label.
23. Set up the following Pipe Database connection.

Quick Start Lessons
Table 3-19: Pipe Database Connection
+Start Node Start Node
+Stop Node Stop Node
Diameter Diameter mm
Material Material
Hazen-Williams C Roughness
Length Length (m) m
24. Repeat the above procedure to set up connections for Reservoir, Tank, and Valve
connections, using information from the following tables.
Table 3-20: Reservoir Database Connection
X X (m) m
Y Y (m) m
Table 3-21: Tank Database Connection
X X (m) m
Y Y (m) m
Tank Diameter
Tank Diameter m
(m)

Table 3-21: Tank Database Connection (Cont’d)
Base Elevation Base Elev# (m) m
Minimum Elev#
Minimum Elevation m
(m)
Initial HGL Initial Elev# (m) m
Maximum Elev#
Maximum Elevation m
(m)
Table 3-22: PRV Database Connection
X X (m) m
Y Y (m) m
Diameter Diameter (mm) mm
Initial Grade
Initial HGL m
Setting (m)
Initial Valve Status Initial Status

Quick Start Lessons
Note: The Table Type for this connection is PRV.
25. After you finish setting up the database connections, click OK to close the Data-
base Connection Editor.
26. Click the Synchronize In button. When the message box opens, click Yes to
proceed.
27. When prompted to add an element, click Yes to All.
28. A Status Log is generated showing the elements as data is read into the model.
After the import is complete, you should get a green light in this window. If there
were warnings or errors you would get a yellow light or red light, respectively.
You could then scroll through the log to see where any problems might be occur-
ring. Click Close to exit the Status Log and OK to exit the Database Connection
Manager.
29. You should now be able to see the imported network in the drawing pane, but the
symbol and label sizes are very small. Select Tools > Options and click the
Drawing tab.
30. Set all three Annotation Multipliers to 25, and click OK.
31. Now, examine the network that you imported. Notice that it is different in appear-
ance from the same network imported using a shapefile in “Part 1—Importing
Shapefile Data” on page 3-166. The difference stems from the fact that, in a data-
base connection, a pipe’s layout is defined only by the location of its end nodes.

Therefore, pipes appear without bends, making a straight line connection between
nodes. Hydraulically, your model will not be affected, since the pipe lengths are
user-defined and not scaled from the layout.
Also notice that the default scenario, Base, is currently displayed as the current
scenario. Whenever data is brought in through a database or shapefile connection,
it is automatically written into the alternatives referenced by the current scenario.
Similarly, whenever data is exported, the data associated with the current scenario
will be used.
32. Click the GO button, and click GO again, to run the model. Now that you have
calculated data, you can export it back to the database. For this example, you will
only export pressures at the junction nodes.
33. Close the Scenario Editor.
34. Use Microsoft Excel to open LESSON7.XLS in another window.
35. Click the tab for the Junction worksheet, and add a new column heading in cell F1
called Pressure. Save and close the file.
36. In the WaterCAD window, choose File > Synchronize > Database Connections.
Highlight Lesson 7, Part 2, and click the Edit button.
37. Select the junction table from the list, and click Edit again.
38. In Row 5 of the Field Links table, link the WaterCAD Pressure to the Database’s
Pressure. The Unit should be set to kPa.
39. Click OK and OK again to get back to the Database Connection Manager.
40. Click the Synchronize Out button to send the information back to the spread-
sheet.

Quick Start Lessons
41. Finally, if you reopen the LESSON7.XLS file in Microsoft Excel, you will see
that the pressure values have now been added.
3.7.3 Part 3—Converting CAD Drawing Entities
The Polyline to Pipe tool lets you take existing CAD entities and use them to quickly
construct a water distribution network. Although this feature is called Polyline to Pipe,
line and block entities can be converted as well (polylines and lines can be converted
to pipes; blocks can be converted to any available node type).
Building a model based on graphical elements can be an error-prone process. Difficul-

ties can arise due to the fact that a drawing may appear to be correct visually, but may
contain problems that are not readily apparent. For example, what appears to be a
single line in a drawing could in fact be made up of many line segments, or it could be
made up of two lines, one directly on top of another.

The Polyline to Pipe Wizard guides you through the conversion process, letting you
set up options relating to tolerances, node creation, and handling T-intersections. To
help reduce some of the problems that you may encounter during the import process, a
comprehensive drawing review is also performed. During conversion, the network is
analyzed, and potential problems are flagged for review. After performing the conver-
sion, the Drawing Review window lets you navigate to and fix any problems that may
be encountered.
interface.
1. Open WaterCAD and click Tools > Options.

2. In the Global Options tab, make sure that the Unit System is set to System Inter-
national, and click OK.
3. Select File > Import > Polyline to Pipe. When prompted, click Yes to start the
Project Setup Wizard.
1. Start WaterCAD for AutoCAD and open the file LESSON7.DWG in the
\Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson directory.
2. Select Edit > Change Entities to Pipes. The AutoCAD command line prompts
you to select objects. Draw a selection window around all of the objects in the
drawing by clicking the upper left and lower right corners, then right-click.
3. Click Yes when prompted to set up the project.
4. In the wizard, type Lesson 7 - Polyline to Pipe as the project title.

5. Click Next, and Next again to accept the default settings.
6. Make sure that you are set up for a Scaled drawing, with a horizontal scale of
1:5000 and a vertical scale of 1:500.
7. Set the three Annotation Multipliers to 2.8.
8. Click Next.
9. In order to minimize your data input later, create prototypes for common element
characteristics. The most common type of pipe in the model you will be creating
is 150 mm ductile iron with a C value of 130. Make sure these characteristics
coincide with the prototype values, and click OK.
10. Since you have two identical pumps, set up a prototype for them using the data
below. Change the Elevation to 148 m and the Pump Type should be 3 point.
Change the units to l/min. before entering the discharge values.

Quick Start Lessons
11. Click OK when you are finished.

Table 3-23: Pump Data
Discharge (l/
Head (m)
min.)
Shutoff: 70 0
Design: 50 1200
Max. Operating 35 2000
12. Create one more prototype, this time for the PRVs. They both have an elevation of
129 m and an HGL setting of 185.2 m.
13. Click OK, and then Finished. The Polyline to Pipe Wizard opens.
14. Browse to and open the file LESSON7.DXF, located in the Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson
directory.
15. Leave the .DXF unit set to meters, and click Next.

16. Set up the options WaterCAD will use when performing the conversion.
a. Change the Tolerance to 1 m, so that pipe endpoints that come within a meter
of one another will be assumed to be connected.
b. Select Convert Polylines and Lines to pipes, and select Pressure Junction
to be used if no node is found at a polyline endpoint.
c. Click Next.
17. Select the option to join pipes at T-intersections within the specified tolerance, and
click Next.
18. Select Yes when prompted for blocks that you would like to convert to nodes.

Quick Start Lessons
19. Fill in the table by matching the AutoCAD Blocks JUNCTION, PRV, PUMP,
RESERVOIR, and TANK with the corresponding WaterCAD elements (Pressure
Junction, PRV, Pump, Reservoir, and Tank).
20. Click Next.
21. You will be given the option to alter the prototype settings. This option is useful if
you want to import in multiple passes, grouping like data together to make the
data entry process more automated. For instance, you could have chosen to import
all of the 100 mm pipes, then the 150 mm pipes, etc., changing the prototype each
time. For this example, you will leave the prototypes as set in the Project Setup
Wizard. Click Next.
22. Make sure that the layers HMI_NODE and HMI_PIPE are both checked, and
click Finished to perform the conversion.
23. When it is completed, close the statistics window.

24. A Drawing Review dialog box opens with five junctions listed in it. The purpose
of the Drawing Review is to alert you to problems or assumptions made during the
import.
Find any one of these junctions by highlighting it in the list and clicking Go To.
The drawing pane will center on the junction and select it. If you have difficulty
seeing the selected element, increase the zoom factor in the Drawing Review
dialog box.
25. Open the element, and click the Messages tab. There will be a message telling you
that the node was added during the Polyline to Pipe conversion. The junction had
to be added because there was no node at that location in your .DXF drawing, but
there was a polyline endpoint. In the Polyline to Pipe Wizard, you set WaterCAD
to add junctions to endpoints.
Even though you now have your drawing converted to a pipe network, it is still
not ready to be run because you can only bring in element types and network
connectivity using this type of import. Before you could run this model, you
would have to input data for elevations, demands, pipe sizes, etc., either directly
into WaterCAD or through database connections.
The WaterCAD elements are now on layer 0, since that layer was current when you
performed the conversion. If you turn off layers HMI_PIPE and HMI_NODE, only
the actual WaterCAD elements will be visible.

Quick Start Lessons
3.8 Lesson 9: Using Darwin Designer

In this lesson, you use Darwin Designer to optimize the setup of a pipe network.
For more information on Darwin Designer and its underlying genetic-algorithm-based

technology, see:
• “Using Darwin Designer” on page 12-465

• “Darwin Designer Methodology” on page B-753
R-1 Hillview Reservoir

EL 300ft
P-1
P-1
5
J-2 J-15
City Tunnel No. 1
P-2
Bronx
P-1 4
J-3
P-3
J-14
J-4
P-1 3
P-4
City Tunnel No. 2
J-5
J-13
P-1 2
Man hattan
P-5
J-19
J-18 P-18
P-17
J-12
J-6
Queen s
P-6
P-1 1
J-7 J-11
P-
7
J-8
0
P-1
P-
1 9
P-
8
J-9 J-20
P-9
P-
0
P-2
12
J-10
6
P-1
Richmond J-16
Brooklyn
J-17

Lesson 9: Using Darwin Designer
3.8.1 Part 1—Creating the Darwin Designer Optimization
1. Open WaterCAD.
2. Browse to your Haestad/WaterCAD/Lesson directory. Open the file
DesignerSample1.wcd.
3. Open Darwin Designer.
– Click the Darwin Designer button.
– Or, click Analysis > Darwin Designer.
4. If the File Format Update dialog box opens, click Update File Format. This
updates the schema of the file to match the schema of the current version of
WaterCAD.
Darwin Designer opens.

Quick Start Lessons
5. Click New > Design Study.

6. Name the design study Tunnel Expansion Project and click OK.
7. Select Optimization Base as the representative scenario in the drop-down list.

(For more information, see “Scenarios” on page 8-364.)

8. If needed, click the Design Event tab.

9. Click New.
10. Name the design event Required Pressures, and click OK.
The Design Event Editor opens.

11. Set pressure constraints for all junctions.
a. Click the Pressure Constraints tab.
b. Select All Junctions from the Selection Set drop-down list.
c. In the Pressure Constraints Defaults area, set the Minimum Pressure to 110.33
psi (HGL = 255 ft.).
d. In the Pressure Constraints Defaults area, set the Maximum Pressure to 1000
psi. For this example, maximum pressure is not a consideration, so you set it
high so it does not affect the calculations.

Quick Start Lessons
12. Customize junction J-17 to require a minimum pressure of 118.03 psi.

a. In the Pressure Constraints area, scroll so you can see junction J-17.
b. Select the Override Defaults? check box.
c. Type a minimum pressure of 118.03 psi.
13. Click OK after you finish setting up the Design Event Editor.
14. In the Darwin Designer dialog box, click the Design Groups tab.

15. Click Create Multiple Design Groups. This button lets you automatically
create one design group for each pipe in the network or for a particular set
of pipes.
a. In the Selection Sets drop-down list, select Parallel Pipes for Optimization.
This highlights a selection set containing a specific subset of the pipes in your
network. (For more information about selection sets, see “Selection Sets” on
page 5-263.)
b. Click OK.
c. When prompted, click Yes to create a group for each selected pipe.
16. Add a option group for your optimization.

a. Click the Option Groups tab.
b. Click Design Option Groups, in the tree-view.
c. Click New.
d. Name the new table New Pipe Sizes, and click OK.
e. Type the following pipe material, size, roughness coefficient, and cost:

Quick Start Lessons
Table 3-24: New Pipe Parameters
Hazen
Diameter
Material Williams Cost
(in.)
Roughness
Ductile Iron 0 100 0.00
Right-click to
select Global Edit Click a row label
to select the row

17. Create a new optimized design run.

a. In the Designs tree-view, right-click Tunnel Expansion Project and select
New Optimized Design Run.
Or, click the New button and select New Optimized Design Run.
b. Name the design run Optimized Design.
18. Select the design event you want to use, Required Pressures, by clicking the
Active check box.

Quick Start Lessons
19. Click the Design Groups tab.

a. Set all of the design groups to Active.
b. Right-click the column label and choose Global Edit.
c. In the Global Edit dialog box, select the Active check box.
d. Click OK.
e. Right-click the Design Option Group column heading.

f. Select Global Edit.
g. Choose New Pipe Sizes as the option group you want to use and click OK.

20. Click the Options tab.
a. Set the GA Parameters as follows:

Table 3-25: GA Parameters
GA Parameter Value
Maximum Era Number 6
Era Generation Number 150
Population Size 50
Cut Probability 1.7
Splice Probability 60.0
Mutation Probability 1.5
Random Seed 0.4
Penalty Factor 25000000
b. Set the Stopping Criteria as follows:

Quick Start Lessons
Table 3-26: Stopping Criteria
Stopping Criteria Value
Maximum Trials 50000
Non Improvement Generations 200
c. Set the Top Solutions, Solutions to Keep to 3. This sets how many results will
be available as results (see “Part 2—Viewing Results”).
21. Click GO to calculate the optimized design.

While the calculation proceeds, WaterCAD displays the Darwin Designer
Run Progress dialog box.
22. Review the Messages tab for notes pertaining to the calculation.
23. Review the Status tab to see what are the results of your calculation.
– Completed Successfully—If this green bar displays, then there were no errors
encountered by the calculation. If there were errors, you would be notified
and could look on the Messages tab to see what they were.
– Best Fitness—In this case, you were calculating based on cost. So, the best
fitness is the least costly solution that the GA found.
– Cost ($)—The lowest cost found by the calculation displays here.
– Benefit—Measured pressure improvement in the network. This is 0 because
the lesson only considers cost and not pressure benefit.

– Violation—The largest violation of established pressure and flow boundaries,

such as maximum or minimum pressures, displays here. If there were a viola-
tion, you would use the results area Pressure and/or Flow tabs (in the results
pane of the main Darwin Designer window) to look for the actual violations.
– Generations—The maximum value for generations is determined by the
Maximum Era Number and Era Generation Number you set in the Options >
GA Parameters. The actual number of generations that get calculated depend
on the Options > Stopping Criteria you set.
– Trials—The maximum value for trials is determined by what you set in
Options > Stopping Criteria. Note that you can set a number larger than
(Maximum Era Number)*(Era Generation Number)*(Population Size), but
calculations beyond that number (for this example, the value is 45,000) are
less likely to produce significant improvements.
Also, note that the Messages tab might report you exceeded the maximum
number of trials. This is usually because Darwin Designer must complete all
the generations before ending a trial, so it is possible that completing genera-
tions will cause a few excess trials to be calculated.
24. Click Close to close the Darwin Designer Run Progress dialog box.

Quick Start Lessons
3.8.2 Part 2—Viewing Results
After you calculate the optimized design (by clicking the GO button—for more infor-
mation, see “Part 1—Creating the Darwin Designer Optimization” on page 3-188),
results display. You can review results and look for violations of parameters.
Results area
1. Click Hide Results to minimize the results area and

Show Results to restore the results area.
2. From the solutions drop-down list, select the solution you
want to see: Solution 0. Notice that each solution is color
coded; use the color code as a key when viewing graphs.
Solutions are ranked by fitness, with Solution 0 being the best.
3. In the Design Groups tab, if you scroll down, you can see there are six pipes spec-
ified. These are the pipes that Darwin added to the scenario to provide the optimal
solution (note, we are not rehabilitating pipes in this example):

Table 3-27: New Pipes
Diameter
Pipe Cost
(in.)
GA-P-7 96 3033600.00
GA-P-16 120 11008800.00
GA-P-17 108 11388000.00
GA-P-18 72 5304000.00
GA-P-19 72 3182400.00
GA-P-21 60 4646400.00
4. If needed, click Resize to Fit to fit the result columns in the

dialog box.
5. The Rehab Groups and Flow Constraints tabs are empty because this lesson does
not use those.
6. Click the Pressure Constraints tab. This displays the maximum and minimum
pressure constraints you set on the junctions and the actual pressures calculated by
Darwin Designer.

Quick Start Lessons
3.8.3 Part 3—Using Results
After you calculate the optimized design (by clicking the GO button—for more infor-
mation, see “Part 1—Creating the Darwin Designer Optimization” on page 3-188),
results display. You can use the results are to create graphs and reports.
Results area
1. Click the Report button and select Solution Comparison.

There are three solutions to compare (this is set in Options > Stopping
Criteria). Solution 0 clearly provides the least expensive solution.

2. Export the solution to WaterCAD so you can use it.

a. Select Solution 0 in the solutions drop-down
list. Notice that each solution is color-coded.
b. Click Export to Scenario. The Export to Design Scenario dialog box
opens.
If you see this, hover the

cursor over the
exclamation point to read
any error message
c. Select all check boxes to export to the various alternatives.

d. Name the scenarios you want to export, such as Optimized Design - 0. The
name you choose must be unique; there cannot already exist a scenario with
the same name.
e. Click OK.

Quick Start Lessons
3. Click Close to close Darwin Designer.
Select the
scenario you
exported
4. A dialog will appear, informing you that the program is now synchronizing the
changes and time stamp from Darwin Designer with WaterCAD.
5. In WaterCAD, select the scenario you exported from the Scenario drop-down list.
Notice the parallel pipes that have been added to the base network. These are the
pipes that meet the optimized design calculated by Darwin Designer.

Scenario: Optimized Design - 0
R-1 Hillview Reservoir

EL 300ft
P-1
P-1
5
J-2 J-15
City Tunnel No. 1
P-2
Bronx
P-1 4
J-3
P-3
J-14
J-4
P-1 3
P-4
City Tunnel No. 2
J-5
J-13
P-1 2
Man hattan
P-5
J-19
J-18 P-18
P-17
J-12
J-6 GA-P -1 8
GA-P -17
Queen s
P-6
P-1 1
J-7
GA
J-11
-P-
7
GA
P-
-
7
J-8 P-
19
0
P-1
P-
1 9
P-
8
J-9 J-20
P-9
P-
0
P-2
12
GA
J-10
-
P-
21
-1 6
-P
6
GA
P-1
Richmond J-16
Brooklyn
J-17

Quick Start Lessons
3.9 Lesson 10: Darwin Designer Overview

In this lesson, you use Darwin Designer to optimize the setup of a pipe network.
There are three scenarios:
• Existing System representing current system conditions

• Future Condition representing the system expansion layout
• Optimization base representing the scenario for Designer base.
There are two design tasks:
• New pipes to be sized are pipes 54, 68, 70, 72, 74, 76.
• Old pipes need to be rehabilitated by applying possible actions including cleaning
pipe, relining pipe, and leaving the pipe as it is (no action or do thing to a pipe).
The design criteria is:
• Minimum pressure 45 psi at all demand junction

• Maximum pressure 110 psi at all demand junction
• Filling each tank to or above the initial tank level
1. Browse to your Haestad/WaterCAD/Lesson directory. Open

DesignerSample2.wcd.
2. If needed, select Existing System from the Scenario drop-down list. This displays
the current network.
Notice that the Existing scenario comprises two types of pipe:
– In green, there are older pipes, perhaps representing an old downtown section
– In purple, there are newer pipes, perhaps representing newer additions to the
water supply network
3. Click GO to calculate the system pressures and tank levels for the Existing Condi-
tion.
If you want, you can run a simulation or inspect the pressures and tank volumes,
but the purpose for calculating this condition was for a tank level comparison
between the Existing and Future Condition scenarios in a later step.

Lesson 10: Darwin Designer Overview
Add subdivision
and more pipes
here
Newer pipe
section in purple
Older pipe
section in green
4. Select the Future Condition from the Scenario drop-down list. If

needed, click Zoom Extents to view the entire network in the window.

Quick Start Lessons
New subdivision
pipes display in
red
Older pipe
Newer pipe section in green
section in purple
5. Click GO to calculate the system pressures and tank levels for the Future Condi-
tion.
6. In the Scenario: Future Condition dialog box, select an Extended Period simula-
tion.

– Set the start time to 12:00 AM.

– Set the Duration to 24.00 hours.
– Set the Hydraulic Time Step to 1.00 hours.
7. Click GO.
8. Click Close to close the Scenario: Future Condition dialog box.
9. Review the color coding for pressure at junctions.
a. Click Color Coding. The Color Coding dialog box opens.
b. Select Node and set the Attribute to Pressure, if needed.

Quick Start Lessons
Note the color coding for pressure:

- <= 45 psi is red
- <= 70 psi is blue
- <= 100 psi is magenta
- <= 130 psi is green
For this lesson, one objective is to keep the junction pressures above 45psi.
So, when you play the simulation, watch for red junctions which indicate
unacceptably low pressure.
c. Click OK to close the Color Coding dialog box.
10. Run an animation to see what happens in the network over the course of 24 hours.
a. If needed, set the Animation Delay to 0.25 seconds.

b. Click Play to run the animation.
Click Play
c. Notice, at hour 6 there is a low pressure junction and, by hour 15, most of the
junctions are showing a low pressure.
The red junctions

all have pressure
that is too low

Quick Start Lessons
11. Use GeoGrapher to check the levels on the tanks.

a. Click GeoGrapher.
b. Several graphs are pre-built. Double-click ScenariosComparison
Tank 165-existing vs. future. This shows the water levels for tank
165 in the Existing scenario and also the Future Condition scenario.
c. Select the Attribute Calculated Tank Level from the drop-down list, if
needed.
Existing
scenario
Future Condition
scenario: tank empties
d. Notice that by hour 11, Tank 165 is empty and does not refill.
e. From the Elements drop-down list, select Tank 65.

Existing
scenario
Future Condition
scenario: tank empties
f. Notice that by hour 12, Tank 65 is also empty.

g. Close the graphing window.
12. You need to use Darwin Designer and some analysis in WaterCAD to change the
existing pipe network to:
– Keep junction pressures above 45psi
– Keep the two water tanks filled

Quick Start Lessons
3.9.1 Set Up for Darwin Designer
With Darwin Designer, you need to consider two ways of accomplishing a cost-effec-
tive design: create new or parallel pipes and rehabilitate existing pipes. Clearly, the
new subdivision will get new pipes. And, as you can design an appropriate size for
these new pipes, there is no need for parallel pipes and there are no existing pipes on
which to perform rehabilitation.
With that in mind, you would create a parallel pipe option for all existing pipes. This
parallel pipe option should include a variety of sizes so Darwin Designer has flexi-
bility to choose the most efficient size. Additionally, the pipe sizes must include a 0
diameter, which lets Darwin Designer calculate the efficiency of the system with the
pipe absent (without installing the parallel pipe). There are four options in this tutorial
for existing pipe:
• Install parallel pipe

• Clean existing pipe
• Reline existing pipe
• Take no action
1. Select Optimization Base from the Scenario drop-down list.

This is the future network set up for Darwin Designer optimization. Notice that
parallel pipes have been added next to all the existing pipes. All new pipes—
parallel and new ones for the subdivision—are colored red.

2. Open Darwin Designer.

3. If needed, select Optimization Base from the Representative Scenario
drop-down list.
4. Create a new design study, called Design and Rehabilitation.
a. Click the New button and select New Design Study.

b. Name the study and click OK.
5. Create a new design event, called Criteria Set - 1.

Quick Start Lessons
Click New to
Click New to create a new
create a new design event
design study
a. On the Design Event tab, click New.

b. Name the design event and click OK. The Design Event Editor opens.
6. Set up the Design Event Editor.

a. On the Pressure Constraint tab, set:

- Selection Set to All Junctions
- Minimum Pressure to 45 psi
- Maximum Pressure to 100 psi.
b. Click OK to close the Design Event Editor.

8. Click New to create design groups. (Notice that the model includes the pipes in
groups already; if you are comfortable with creating groups, you can just use the
existing groups. Pipes can only belong to one group at a time.) You need to create
design groups for all new or potentially new pipes, which include:
– All pipes labeled in the model with a P (these are parallel pipes)
– All new pipes: 54, 68, 70, 72, 74, 76
Do not include existing pipes in any of these groups, because these need to
be in a rehabilitation group.
9. Click the Rehab groups tab. Create Rehab groups containing pipes grouped as
follows:
– 4, 8, 30, 32, 34 36
– 2, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 48
– 6, 78

Quick Start Lessons
– 38, 40, 42, 66

– 44, 46, 50, 58, 62, 80
– 52, 56, 60, 64
Note that there is no need to include any of the new pipes in rehab groups—in
fact, these should already have been assigned to design groups and be unavailable
for rehab groups.
You might consider grouping pipes based on size or age. To create a Rehab group:
a. Click New.
b. Name the Rehab group and click OK.
c. Use the Element Selector dialog box to choose the pipes you want to include
in the group.
10. Click the Option Groups tab. Create two design option groups and one rehabilita-
tion option group.
Click New to create

a new design option
group
a. In the tree-view, select Design Option Groups.

b. Click New to create a new table.
c. Name the table, and click OK.

d. Enter data into the table. The first table contains a pipe diameter of 0. All
parallel pipes will use this option group. Including a diameter of 0 lets Darwin
Designer consider not adding a parallel pipe if that pipe is not needed for the
optimal solution.
Table 3-28: Design Option Group 1
Hazen
Diameter Unit Cost
Material Williams
(in.) ($/ft.)
Roughness
Aluminum
6 130 12.80
structural
Aluminum 8 130 17.80
Aluminum 10 130 22.50
Aluminum 12 130 29.20
Aluminum 14 130 36.20
Aluminum 16 130 43.60
Aluminum 18 130 51.50
Aluminum 20 130 60.10
Aluminum 24 130 77.00
Aluminum 30 130 105.50
Aluminum 0 130 0.00
e. Create a second design costs table. (You can duplicate the table you just
created and delete the row for 0 diameter.) This table is the same as the first
one except it does not have a pipe diameter of 0 and is used for new pipes.
New pipes must have a minimum diameter because their existence is a
requirement, unlike the parallel pipes.

Quick Start Lessons
Table 3-29: Design Option Group 2
Hazen
Diameter Unit Cost
Material Williams
(in.) ($/ft.)
Roughness
Aluminum
6 130 12.80
structural
Aluminum 8 130 17.80
Aluminum 10 130 22.50
Aluminum 12 130 29.20
Aluminum 14 130 36.20
Aluminum 16 130 43.60
Aluminum 18 130 51.50
Aluminum 20 130 60.10
Aluminum 24 130 77.00
Aluminum 30 130 105.50
11. Create a single rehab option groups table containing three actions: Clean,
Relining, and Do Nothing. A do-nothing action is necessary so Darwin Designer
can consider not rehabilitating some pipes. Each of these actions must reference
three functions, one for each column in the table.

Select three
functions for each
action
12. Select Rehab Option Groups in the tree-view and click New to create a new
rehab table.
a. Name the table and click OK.
b. Type the name of an action you want to create, such as Clean.
c. Click the cell under Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Diameter Function
and click the Ellipsis (…) button to create a new function. The Function
Manager opens.
d. Click New > New Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Diameter Func-
tion.
e. Name the function, Function - 0, and click OK.
f. The Function Editor opens. Enter your diameter data (inside pipe diameter)
into the table. We recommend you included all the diameters of pipe in the
table. (If you do not, Darwin Designer will use interpolation to calculate the
diameters you do not include.) In this case, the function does not change the
diameter of any pipes.

Quick Start Lessons
Table 3-30: Function - 0 Diameter Data
Pre-Rehab Post-Rehab
Diameter (in.) Diameter (in.)
6 6
8 8
10 10
12 12
14 14
16 16
18 18
20 20
g. Click OK to close Function Editor.

13. In Function Manager, click New > Diameter Vs. Unit Cost Function.
a. When prompted, name it Function - 1, and click OK.
b. In Function Editor, enter a data for pipe diameter and unit cost.

Table 3-31: Function -1 Diameter vs. Unit Cost
Diameter (in.) Unit Cost($/ft.)
6 17.00
8 17.00
10 17.00
12 17.00
14 18.20
16 19.80
18 21.60
20 23.50
30 25.50
c. Click OK to close Function Editor.

14. In Function Manager, click New > Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab
Roughness Function.
a. When prompted, name it Function - 2, and click OK.
b. In Function Editor, enter a data for pipe diameter and roughness.
Table 3-32: Function -2 Pre-Rehab Diameter vs. Post-Rehab Roughness
Diameter (in.) Unit Cost($/ft.)
6 130
8 130
10 130
12 130
14 130
16 130
18 130
20 130
c. Click OK to close Function Editor.

Quick Start Lessons
15. Create another Function called Cost Function - Reline. This is the cost for
relining pipes. Use these values:
Table 3-33: Relining Diameter vs. Cost
Diameter (in.) Unit Cost ($/ft.)
6 26.20
8 27.80
10 34.10
12 41.40
14 50.20
16 58.50
18 66.20
20 76.80
24 109.20
30 142.50
16. Create a final function called Do Nothing. This function is required if you need
Darwin Designer to consider not rehabilitating an existing pipe as an option.
Table 3-34: Do Nothing Cost
6 0.00
8 0.00
10 0.00
12 0.00
14 0.00
16 0.00

Table 3-34: Do Nothing Cost
18 0.00
20 0.00
24 0.00
30 0.00
17. Click OK to close Function Manager.

18. For the Action, Clean:
a. In the Diameter Vs. Unit Cost Function cell, select Function 1 from the drop-
down list.
b. In the Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Roughness Function, select Func-
tion 2 from the drop-down list.
19. Type a new Action, called Relining 1.
a. Set the Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Diameter Function to Function -
0.
b. Set the Diameter Vs. Unit Cost Function to Cost Function - Reline.
c. Set the Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Roughness Function to Function
- 2.

Quick Start Lessons
20. Type a new Action called Do Nothing.

a. Set the Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Diameter Function to Function -
0.
b. Set the Diameter Vs. Unit Cost Function to Cost Function - Do Nothing.
c. Set the Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Roughness Function to Function
- 2.
21. Click the Design Type tab to set the genetic algorithm parameters. Set the Objec-
tive Type to Minimize Cost. You are not considering any benefits to increasing
system flow or pressure.

3.9.2 Create the Optimized Design Run
The design run uses your setup and applies it to the network.
1. Right-click the Design and Rehabilitation design run in the tree-view, and select
Add New Optimized Design Run.
2. Name the optimized design run as Design Run -1, and click OK.
3. In the Design Events tab, select the Active check box for the Design Event Name
Criteria Set -1. This enables the selected design event for the current run.
5. Activate all the design groups.
a. Right-click the Active column header.
b. Select Global Edit.
c. In the Global Edit dialog box, select the Active check box, and click OK. This
selects all the Active check boxes for all of the design groups in the tab.

Quick Start Lessons
6. Select the design option group used by your design groups.

a. All groups containing parallel pipes need to use Design Option Group 1, for
that option group contains data for a pipe size of 0. Parallel pipes have the
prefix P.
b. All groups containing new, single pipes need to use Design Option Group 2,
for that option group does not use a 0 pipe size.
7. Click the Rehab Groups tab.

a. Set all the groups as Active. (Right-click the heading of the check box column
and globally edit them.)
b. Set all the groups to use your rehab option group. (Right-click the heading of
the check box column and globally edit them.)
8. Click the Options tab to set the GA parameters for the optimization.
– Under Stopping Criteria, set Maximum Trials to 100000.
– Under Top Solutions, set Solutions to Keep to 5.
3.9.3 Calculate and Verify the Optimal Solution
It is important, after you calculate your solutions, that you look at them and verify
they do what you need.
1. Click GO. The Darwin Designer Run Progress dialog box opens and displays the
progress of the calculation.

2. After the calculation is complete, click Close. (If the calculation did not complete
successfully, you would check the Messages tab.)
In the results area, in the solutions drop-down list you see five solutions numbered
0 through 4. These are the five top solutions you set.
Review the
solutions
Solutions are stored in order of optimization fitness, with Solution 0 providing a

better calculated solution than Solution 1, which has a better calculated solution
that Solution 2, etc.
3. Export the solutions to your model, so you can review tank levels.
Note that the optimization calculations consider your pressure requirements (that
pressure be greater than 45 psi) but not your tank levels.
a. Click Export to Scenario. The Export to Scenario dialog box opens.
b. Select the Use Scenario Name for Alternatives check box. The
default name is the design run name plus an incremental number starting at 1.
Don’t be confused by solutions numbered from 0 to 4 while the corresponding
scenarios are numbered 1 - 5.

Quick Start Lessons
c. Click OK and OK again to clear the message prompt. This exports Solution
0.
d. Select Solution 1 from the solutions drop-down list.
e. Export Solution 1.
f. Export the remaining solutions in turn.
4. Click Close to exit Darwin Designer so you can review the solutions you
exported.
5. In WaterCAD, open Scenario Manager.
6. Select Future Condition from the Scenarios drop-down list.
7. Compute the scenarios you exported in a batch run. This lets you graph those
results and look at what is happening with your tank levels.
a. Click GO Batch Run.
b. Select the Scenarios you want to run.

Select the
Scenarios you
want to run
c. Click Batch and confirm the message boxes.

d. After the batch run finishes, close the Scenario Control Center dialog box.

Quick Start Lessons
8. Open GeoGrapher. You will use GeoGrapher to inspect your tank

levels.
a. Click New, Over Time, and Scenarios Comparison.
b. Click Next.
c. Select the Scenarios you exported and the Future Condition scenario and
move them to the Selected Scenarios window.

d. Click Next.
e. Choose Tank as the Element Type. Select either tank, as you’ll want to look at
them both. Click Next.
f. Set the Primary Y-Axis Attribute to Calculated Tank Level. Click Next.
g. Click Finish.
h. For tank 65, review the graph. Make sure the tank is kept full.
i. For tank 165, review the graph. Make sure the tank is kept full.

Quick Start Lessons
Run 1-1
representing
Scenario 0, fails to
keep the tank full
Note that two scenarios fail to keep the tanks full. The Future Condition
scenario, which is not optimized, and Design Run 1 - 1, which corresponds to
Solution 0, or your least costly and therefore most highly optimized solution.
Since all the other runs do keep the tanks full, and since Solution 0 fails to
keep your tanks full, Solution 1 (Scenario - 1-2) is the best optimal solution
that meets your pressure and tank fill requirements.
9. Close Geographer. Save your changes if prompted.
10. In the Scenario drop-down list, choose Design Run - 1-2, which represents Solu-
tion 1 that Darwin Designer calculated. From looking at the graphing results in
GeoGrapher, you know this solution keeps your tanks full.
11. Inspect your tank pressure by animating the scenario over 24 hours.
Click Play.
Note the color coding for pressure:
– <= 45 psi is red
– <= 70 psi is blue
– <= 100 psi is magenta
– <= 130 psi is green

12. Make sure none of the junctions is red during the animation.
13. Inspect a table of junction pressures.
a. Double-click any junction.
b. Click Report > Graph.The Graph Setup dialog box opens.
c. From the Dependent drop-down list, select Pressure.
d. Click the Elements tab.
e. Click Select.
f. In the Selection Set dialog box, select all available items (junc-
tions), and click OK.
g. In the Graph Setup dialog box, click OK.
h. The Graph dialog box opens and displays pressures for the junctions you
selected. Note that none of the junctions fall below 45 psi.
All the junctions for

this scenario have
greater pressure
than 45 psi

Quick Start Lessons
3.9.4 Conclusion
Darwin Designer computed Solution 0 to be the most optimal solution, meaning the
least costly. But, in GeoGrapher, you were able to identify that Solution 0, or Design
Run - 1-1 failed to keep the tanks full.
Thus, Solution 1, or Design Run - 1-2 became the best solution that kept the tanks full.
You also verified that Solution 1 was able to maintain pressures above 45 psi.
New pipes for

subdivision
Some parallel
pipes are used


Chapter
Starting a WaterCAD 4
Project
At the beginning of a project, you need to set some global settings. In the Global
Options (see “Global Options” on page 4-242) and Project Options (see “Project
Options” on page 4-244) dialog boxes, you can specify the unit system, the friction
formulas used, and whether you want to use Auto Prompting. In the Drawing Options
dialog box (see “Drawing Options” on page 4-246), you can specify settings such as
the drawing scale and the size of the symbols and annotations.
Note: These options can also be viewed or edited by selecting the

Options menu item from the Tools menu.
You can also access the FlexUnit dialog box (see “FlexUnits” on page 4-252) in order
to globally specify the units and number of decimals to be displayed for each type of
data.
4.1 File Management

WaterCAD uses the .WCD extension to store WaterCAD Stand-Alone-specific infor-
mation (including project option settings, color-coding and annotation settings, etc.).
When WaterCAD runs within AutoCAD, two important files are used. The .WCD file
is still used to hold all model data, and a .DWG file contains all of the AutoCAD enti-
ties. This means that even a complete AutoCAD drawing corruption (or loss) will not
endanger your hydraulic model data—in fact, you can even regenerate the AutoCAD
modeling elements from the .WCD file!

File Management
4.1.1 WaterCAD Backup Files
When a .WCD file is overwritten by a save action, a backup file of the .WCD file is
created with a .WCK extension. Note that AutoCAD also generates a backup drawing
file, with a .BAK extension.
4.1.2 WaterCAD Database Store
In addition to the WaterCAD Stand-Alone-specific information contained within the

.WCD file, element and scenario information is contained within the WaterCAD Data-
base store (also referred to as the WaterCAD datastore). This WaterCAD datastore is
an .MDB file—in Stand-Alone you need to save your work to apply changes to the
MDB.
4.1.3 Shapefile/Database Connection Files
If you use the Shapefile or Database Connections Managers to exchange data with
external data sources, the connection files you create and use have the .HSC and .HDC
extension respectively. By default, they are named Wtrc.HSC and Wtrc.HDC, and are
located in your haestad…Wtrc directory. In this case, these connections are shared
between all your projects. You are also given the option to keep these connections
local to your project. In this case, these files are placed in your current project direc-
tory with the same name as your .WCD file but with the .HSC and .HDC file exten-
sions, respectively. For more information, see “Sharing Shapefile Connections
between Projects” on page 15-595 and “Sharing Database Connections between
Projects” on page 15-584.

Starting a WaterCAD Project
4.1.4 Libraries
Libraries are saved in separate files so they can be shared between projects. The paths
are specified in the Engineering Library Manager (for more information, see “Engi-
neering Library Manager” on page 14-564). They have an .HLB extension and are
located by default in your Haestad\Wtrc directory.
4.1.5 Additional Files
Note: It is recommended to use a separate directory for every

WaterCAD project on your computer to facilitate project
management and backup.
WaterCAD creates additional files in the same directory as your .WCD file to save the
calculation results. Since recalculating the scenarios can regenerate these results, these
files do not necessarily need to be included when backing up your important files.
However, if you are unsure, copy all files present in your project directory.
4.1.6 Old File Format Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when opening a WaterCAD v5 or earlier project. It allows
you to specify a new name for the project so that the older version of the file will be
retained. If you choose to keep the existing file name, the new file will overwrite the
existing one.
4.2 Import Command

Note: The current project remains in schematic mode when importing
data. We have made every effort to prevent the loss of data
during these imports. However, all imported data should be
checked for accuracy. WaterCAD projects should be opened in
WaterCAD, without using the Import command. However, once
you save the project in WaterCAD, the project files cannot be
opened in previous versions any longer.
The Import Network command allows you to import data from KYPIPE v1 (see
“Importing KYPIPE Data” on page A-681), v2, or v3, EPANET v1 or v2 (see
“Importing EPANET Files” on page A-681), and Cybernet (see “Importing Data from
Previous WaterCAD/Cybernet Versions” on page A-674). You will then be able to
save this project as a WaterCAD project. The data is imported into an empty project.
Therefore, before the data is imported, you will be prompted to save your current
project if it contains WaterCAD elements.

Multiple Sessions
4.3 Multiple Sessions

WaterCAD does not support multiple sessions. WaterCAD uses a single document
model and support for multiple views has not been implemented. Therefore, do not try
to open more than one session of WaterCAD at the same time or data loss and/or data
corruption could occur.
4.4 Importing a Submodel

Using the Submodel Import feature, you can import another model, or any portion
thereof, into your project. Input data stored in the Alternatives that have a common
name will also be imported. In other words, input data will only be transferred from an
alternative in the submodel to be imported to an alternative with the same name in the
model you are importing to.
For Example, the submodel you want to import contains input data that you would like
to transfer in a Physical Alternative named Larger Pipes. The model you want to
import the submodel into must also have an Alternative named Larger Pipes for this
data to be imported. If there is no Larger Pipes alternative in the project, no input data
will be transferred and you will receive a warning message to this effect in the Status
Log (for more information, see “Status Log” on page 13-561).
Also note that the coordinate data associated with the submodel is retained and this
data dictates the location that the submodel elements will appear in the model you are
importing to. This can cause elements to overlap one another.
Note: If any element labels in the submodel are being used by

elements in the project, you will be prompted to change these
element labels.
User-defined data and logical controls are not transferred during

submodel import and export operations.
To import a submodel:
• Click the File menu and select Import…Submodel.

• In the Import WSM File dialog box, select the submodel file to be imported. Click
the Open button.
• Review the Status Log to ensure that all desired input data has been transferred.

4.5 Exporting a Submodel

You can export a model, or any portion thereof, as a submodel for import into other
projects. Input data is also stored in the .WSM file that is created in the process of
Exporting a Submodel. This input data will only be imported to alternatives with the
same name. For more information about input data transfer, see “Importing a
Submodel” on page 4-240.
To export a submodel:
• In the drawing view, highlight the elements to be exported as a submodel. To

highlight multiple elements, hold down the Shift key while clicking elements.
• Click the File menu and select Export…Submodel.
• In the Create WSM File dialog box, specify the directory to which the file should
be saved, enter a name for the submodel and click the Save button.
• Review the Status Log to ensure that no problems occurred during the export
process (for more information, see “Status Log” on page 13-561).
Note: User-defined data and logical controls are not transferred during
submodel import and export operations.
4.6 Project Management

Project management includes:
• “Project Setup Wizard” on page 4-241

• “Project Summary” on page 4-242
4.6.1 Project Setup Wizard
The Project Setup Wizard can only be accessed at the start of a new project. All of the
options that are edited from the Wizard, however, can be changed individually from
other menus.
The Project Setup Wizard assists you in the creation of a new project by stepping you
through many of the project-wide options, allowing you to set up most of your notes
and defaults before you even create the first pipe. The areas covered by this Wizard
include:
Project Summary—Includes information about the project, such as the project title,
the project engineer, and general comments. For more information, see “Project
Summary” on page 4-242.

Options
Project Options—Include information regarding global options, such as the desired

friction method and coordinate system. For more information, see “Project Options”
on page 4-244.
Drawing Options—Include information regarding the drawing pane, such as the

drawing scale and annotation multiplier. For more information, see “Drawing
Options” on page 4-246.
Prototypes—Enable you to set default values for elements, which are used to
initialize values for any new elements that are added to the project. For more informa-
tion, see “Prototypes” on page 6-322.
4.6.2 Project Summary
The Summary dialog box provides a way to enter a Project Title, the name of the
Project Engineer, and any significant comments (for example, the project revision
history). The Date field defaults to the current day. To change any portion of the date,
click the item to be changed (i.e., month field), then use the up and down arrows on
the keyboard to set the date.
The Project Title and Project Engineer will print in the footer of reports.
4.7 Options
Options include:
• “Global Options” on page 4-242

• “Project Options” on page 4-244
• “Drawing Options” on page 4-246
4.7.1 Global Options
The Global Options dialog box allows you to customize the following options for this
application:
• “Welcome Dialog Box” on page 4-243 (Stand-Alone mode only)

• “Unit System” on page 4-243
• “Enter Key Behavior” on page 4-243
• “Window Color” on page 4-244 (Stand-Alone mode only)
• “Sticky Tools” on page 4-244 (Stand-Alone mode only)
• “Auto Prompting” on page 4-244

Welcome Dialog Box

The Welcome dialog box appears when the program is started, and provides easy
access to common tasks you may want to perform when you first start using the
program. The following options are available:
• “Tutorials” on page 1-42

• Exit Program
You can choose whether to show the Welcome dialog box each time you start the
program by selecting Beginner Welcome or Expert Hide Welcome in the Global
Options dialog box, which can be accessed by selecting Tools > Options. The
Welcome dialog box also provides a check box that you can use to disable it when the
program starts.
Unit System
Note: If the file that you are editing in Stand-Alone mode is already
associated with an AutoCAD drawing, be careful not to change
the unit systems. Otherwise, the .DWG and the .WCD files may
become irreversibly out of sync.
Although individual units can be controlled throughout the program, you may find it
useful to change your entire unit system at once to either the System International (SI)
unit system or the US Customary (English) system.
When you switch to a different unit system, you will be asked to confirm this action. If
you choose YES, all data will be displayed in the default unit for the selected system,
and conversions will be done automatically.
Enter Key Behavior

Enter Key Behavior controls how the Enter key functions during editing:
• CUA Enter Key—With this setting, the Enter key acts as it normally does for
Windows applications. It conforms to Common User Access (CUA) standards.
This means that when you press the Enter key, it is as though you pressed the
default button on the dialog box. CUA Enter Key is the recommended setting.
• Tabbing Enter Key—With this setting, the Enter key behaves the same as the
Tab key for editable fields (not buttons). This means that when you press the Enter
key, the cursor will move to the next field in the dialog box.

Options
Window Color
You can specify the background and foreground colors of the main graphical window
in Stand-Alone mode. The foreground color is the default color that is applied to all
elements symbols, pipes, labels, and annotations when no color coding is defined.
These color settings also apply to the Scenario Comparison window, but do not apply
to the Profile or Graph Plot windows.
Sticky Tools
Sticky Tools are available in Stand-Alone mode. With Sticky Tools disabled, the
drawing pane cursor will return to the Select tool after creating a node or finishing a
pipe run. With Sticky Tools enabled, the tool does not reset to the Select tool, allowing
you to continue dropping new elements into the drawing without re-selecting the tool.
The Sticky Tool Palette can be turned on or off to meet your needs and preferences.
Auto Prompting
Auto Prompting allows you to immediately enter data as elements are added to the
drawing, without interrupting the layout process.
When Auto Prompting is active, the Auto Prompting dialog box will immediately
appear when you add an element to the drawing. From the Auto Prompting dialog
box, you can modify the element’s default label and access the remaining input data
by clicking the associated Edit button. Auto Prompting can also be toggled off in this
dialog box.
4.7.2 Project Options
The Project Options dialog box allows you to set the following essential information
about your project:
• “Friction Method Theory” on page 4-244

• “Liquid Properties” on page 14-567
• “Input Modes” on page 4-245
• “Pipe Length Rounding” on page 4-246
Friction Method Theory

The Friction Method option enables you to select the methodology for determining
flow resistance and friction losses during calculations.
Available methodologies include:

• “Darcy-Weisbach Equation” on page B-729

• “Hazen-Williams Equation” on page B-729
• “Manning’s Equation” on page B-731
If you change the friction method after pipes have been entered into the network, the
program will ask if you want to update the roughness values of those pipes. If you
select Yes, the program will assign all pipes a new roughness that corresponds to the
default roughness of the pipe material.
Liquid
Note: The kinematic viscosity is used in determining the friction

coefficient in the Darcy-Weisbach Friction Method (see “Darcy-
Weisbach Equation” on page B-729).
You can specify the type of liquid transported by the network, the characteristics of
which (kinematic viscosity and specific gravity) are defined in the Liquid Library (for
more information, see “Liquid Properties” on page 14-567).
Input Modes
WaterCAD supports several input modes to adjust data entry to your style or the needs
of a particular project.
• Coordinates—Coordinates can be displayed either in X and Y format or as

Northing and Easting. Whichever coordinate input mode is chosen will be active
everywhere within the program (element editors, FlexTables, etc.; for more infor-
mation, see “FlexTables” on page 7-329).
• Settings—This drop-down list allows you to set whether values on control condi-
tions will be input in terms of hydraulic grade or pressure. Note that regardless of
the mode you choose, the program will always display values in both hydraulic
grade and pressure.
• Tank Levels—This drop-down list allows you to set whether tank operating
ranges will be input in terms of elevations (height above a datum elevation of 0) or
levels (height above the wet well’s base elevation).

Options
Pipe Length Rounding

Pipe length rounding is used to determine the level of precision desired for scaled pipe
lengths. Pipe lengths will automatically be rounded according to the pipe length
rounding value.
Note: This only affects the value as it appears in elemental editors,

FlexTables, and so on. The actual length of the pipe figure in the
drawing pane is not physically adjusted to force the pipe to a
rounded length.
A change to the pipe rounding length is not retroactive.

Therefore, it will not affect existing pipes unless the User
Defined Length is toggled off and then on again in the
appropriate element editor.
For example, consider a pipe with an actual scaled length of 35.8 meters. If the pipe
length rounding value is 1.0 meter, the program will assume the pipe length to be 36.0
meters.
4.7.3 Drawing Options
The Drawing Options dialog box allows you to specify information regarding the
graphical display of elements in the drawing pane, including:
• “Drawing Scale” on page 4-246

• “Annotation Multipliers” on page 4-247
• “Pipe Text” on page 4-248
• “Symbol Visibility” on page 4-248
Drawing Scale
You can set the scale that you want to use as the finished drawing scale for the plan
view output. Drawing scale is determined based upon engineering judgment and the
destination sheet sizes to be used in the final presentation.
You may choose either schematic or scaled mode to define the horizontal and vertical
distance scales.
• Schematic—Pipe lengths are not automatically initialized from their lengths in

the drawing pane, but must be manually entered for each pipe.
• Scaled—Pipe lengths are determined from the lengths of the pipe elements in the
drawing pane.

– HOR—Horizontal scale controls the scale of the plan view.

– VER—Vertical scale controls the default elevation scale (for use in profiles,
for example).
Scaled or schematic mode can be set on a pipe-by-pipe basis. This is useful when
scaled mode is preferred, but an exaggerated scale is needed for layout of detailed
piping arrangements.
Whether the drawing is set in scaled or schematic mode automatically reflects the
setting of the pipe prototype. While in schematic mode, Gravity Pipe Prototypes and
Pressure Pipe Prototypes can be assigned a default length. When the drawing mode is
scaled, pipe lengths do not need to be initialized from the prototype. Switching
between scaled and schematic in either the Project Options or Pipe Prototype dialog
boxes has no effect on existing pipes.
Annotation Multipliers
Annotation multipliers allow you to change the size of symbols, labels and annotation
text relative to the drawing scale. There is not a single annotation size that is going to
work well with all projects and scales, so these values should be adjusted based on
your judgment and the desired look of the finished drawings.
• Symbol Size—The number entered in this field will either increase or decrease
the size of your symbols by the factor indicated. For example, a multiplier of 2
would result in the symbol size being doubled. The program selects a default
symbol height that corresponds to 4.0 ft. (approximately 1.2 m) in actual-world
units, regardless of scale.
• Text Height—The text height multiplier increases or decreases the default size of
the text associated with element labeling by the factor indicated. The program
automatically selects a default text height that displays at approximately 2.5 mm
(0.1 in) high at the user-defined drawing scale. A scale of 1.0 mm = 0.5 m, for
example, results in a text height of approximately 1.25 m. Likewise, a 1 in. = 40
ft. scale equates to a text height of around 4.0 ft.
• Annotation Height—The annotation height multiplier increases or decreases the
default size of the element annotation by the multiplier indicated. The program
automatically selects a default text height that displays at approximately 2.5 mm
(0.1 in) high at the user-defined drawing scale. A scale of 1.0 mm = 0.5 m, for
example, results in a text height (to scale) of approximately 1.25 m. Likewise, a 1
in. = 40 ft. scale equates to a text height of around 4.0 ft.
• Pipe Text—Selecting the Align Text with Pipe box aligns the text with pipes.
In AutoCAD mode, if you change the Symbol Size, Text Height, or Annotation Height
you will be prompted with the Text Positioning dialog box, which allows you to select
one of the following options when applying the scaling operation.

Options
• Maintain current text positions—The current position of all the annotation will
be maintained after the scale is changed.
• Reset text to default positions—The annotation will be repositioned to the
default position calculated by the program.
On the Text Positioning dialog box there is a check box that is labeled Don’t show
this dialog box again. If you check this box, you will not be prompted with this
dialog box until you turn it back on using one of the following commands at the
AutoCAD command line:
• WTRCScaleChangeOptions—if you are using WaterCAD

• STMCScaleChangeOptions—if you are using StormCAD
• SWRCScaleChangeOptions—if you are using SewerCAD
Pipe Text
The Align Text with Pipes toggle lets you specify whether you want the pipe labeling
and annotations to be parallel to the pipe or horizontal.
Symbol Visibility
Symbol visibility allows you to customize the drawing by turning specific layers on or
off. Each drawing layer holds a particular type of graphical element, such as labels and
annotation. To remove the graphical elements of a particular layer from the drawing
view, clear the associated check box:
• Show Labels—The label layer holds the labels for all network elements.
• Show Graphic Annotations—Graphic annotation (see “Graphic Annotation” on
page 13-557) includes lines, borders, and text (in Stand-Alone mode only).
• Show Element Annotations—Element annotation (see “Element Annotation” on
page 13-509) includes any dynamic annotation that is added to the project, such as
through the Annotation Wizard, see “The Annotation Wizard” on page 13-510.
• Show Source Symbols—For a water quality analysis, a symbol may be displayed
next to nodes that are defined as Constituent Sources.
• Show Control Symbols—A symbol may be displayed next to pump, valve, and
pipe elements with one or more controls, as defined in the Controls tab of the
element editors.
• Show Flow Arrows—Arrows indicating the flow direction may be displayed
after calculations have been run.
• Show Spot Elevations—Toggles on and off the display of spot elevations (see
“Spot Elevations” on page 13-551).

Map Scale Factor

A scale factor is used to proportion the size of the imported model into this program’s
editing environment. The choice of this factor depends on the scale of the model being
imported. If you find that the scale that you specified is not correct, you can make
adjustments later. From the Tools > Options menu, select the Drawing tab to change
the Scale, Symbol, and/or Text Multiplier.
4.7.4 Scenario Dataset Wizard
The Scenario Dataset Wizard allows you to convert a WaterCAD Dataset into an
ArcGIS personal geodatabase. This conversion must take place if you want to open,
edit, or calculate the model in ArcCatalog or ArcMap.
WaterCAD uses an open database format to store model data. Running the Scenario
Dataset Wizard converts the data from the WaterCAD format to a geodatabase format,
which is usable by ArcGIS. The converted data can be written to the same database
that WaterCAD uses to store model data, or to another existing database.The wizard
consists of the following steps:
• “Step 1—Specify Source Dataset and Target Geodatabase” on page 4-249

• “Step 2—Specify Element Attributes to be Included” on page 4-250
• “Step 3—Complete Scenario Wizard” on page 4-251
Step 1—Specify Source Dataset and Target Geodatabase

In this step, a WaterCAD dataset is selected and either an existing geodatabase is
chosen as the target for this data. The following controls compose this step of the
wizard:
In this step, a WaterCAD dataset is selected and an existing geodatabase is chosen as

the target for this data. The following controls compose this step of the wizard:
Template—This field allows a Scenario Template to be specified. Scenario templates

store the settings that were used in a previous Scenario Dataset Wizard conversion. If
you would like to customize the settings to be used by the Wizard, leave this field at
the default value (DEFAULT.XML). In step three of the wizard, you will have the
option tStand-Aloneo save your settings as a template, which can then be reused later.
The Ellipsis (…) button next to the text field opens a browse dialog box.
Output—This field allows the target geodatabase to be specified. This is the file that
will be updated with the successful completion of the Scenario Dataset Wizard. To
append the WaterCAD dataset to the new geodatabase, leave this field at the default
value. To select an alternative geodatabase that was created previously, click the
Ellipsis (...) button to open a browse dialog box.

Options
Note: A new geodatabase or WaterCAD database cannot be created by

the Scenario Dataset Wizard. An existing geodatabase or
WaterCAD database must be chosen in this step.
Input—This field allows the source WaterCAD dataset file (.MDB file) to be speci-
fied. The Ellipsis (…) button next to the text field opens a browse dialog box.
Scenarios—This menu lists the Scenarios contained within the WaterCAD dataset.
Each scenario that is selected here will be converted to an ESRI feature dataset in the
target geodatabase that was selected in Step 1. Place a check in the box next to each of
the scenarios you want to publish to ESRI feature dataset format.
Note: Scenarios that have already been published as feature datasets

are not available for selection in the Scenarios list.
Change Settings—This button opens the ArcGIS Spatial Reference Properties dialog
box. See ESRI’s ArcGIS documentation for more information about the Spatial Refer-
ence Properties dialog box.
Step 2—Specify Element Attributes to be Included
Tip: If you would like to change the designation used by a particular

attribute in your GIS data (Column Name), this must be done
outside of the Scenario Dataset Wizard. The Column Name fields
of the Attribute Table are read-only.
This step allows you to choose the element attributes (and their associated units) that
will be included in the target geodatabase that was specified in Step 1. Please note that
only attributes that are selected in this step will be converted to personal geodatabase
format. Therefore, attributes that are not selected for conversion in this step will not be
available for use in ArcCatalog or ArcMap. This step consists of the following
controls:
Element Pane—This pane contains a list of WaterCAD element types. Highlighting

an element displays the currently selected attributes in the Attribute Table.
Feature Class Name—This field specifies the label that will be associated with the
corresponding feature class in the ArcMap and ArcCatalog clients.
Select Attributes—This button opens the Select Attributes dialog box. See “Select
Attributes Dialog Box” on page 4-251 for more information.
Attribute Table—This table lists the attributes that will be included in the feature
class that is currently highlighted in the Element Pane. The table lists the WaterCAD
Attribute, the geodatabase column label, and the unit associated with the attribute in
that row. Only the unit can be modified in this table—clicking the desired unit cell
activates a menu that lists the units available for that attribute type.

Step 3—Complete Scenario Wizard

This step the final settings are specified, including the following:
Selection Set—Clicking this button opens the Selection Set dialog box, allowing you
to select for use only the elements contained within a previously created selection set.
See “Selection Set Options” on page 4-251 for more information.
Linear Unit—This drop-down allows you to select the units of measurement used for
distances and lengths in the model.
Save Settings—Clicking this check box will save the currently specified settings as a
Scenario Template, which can be used in Step 1 of the Scenario Dataset Wizard.
4.7.5 Selection Set Options
This dialog box allows you to select for use by the Scenario Dataset Wizard only the
elements contained within a previously created selection set. The dialog box
comprises the following controls:
• Use Selection Set (Check Box)—Placing a check in this check box activates the
Use Selection Set menu.
• Use Selection Set (Menu)—This menu allows the previously created selection set
to be specified.
4.7.6 Select Attributes Dialog Box
This dialog box consists of two panes and four buttons. The left pane displays a list of
the available attributes and the right pane lists the selected attributes. The following
buttons are used to manipulate the attributes between the two panes.
[>]—Moves the currently selected attribute from the left (available) pane to the right
(selected) pane.
[>>]—Moves all of the attributes from the left (available) pane to the right (selected)
pane.
[<]—Moves the currently selected attribute from the right (selected) pane to the left
(available) pane.
[<<]—Moves all of the attributes from the right (selected) pane to the left (available)
pane.

FlexUnits
4.8 FlexUnits
FlexUnits (the ability to control units, display precision, etc.) are available from
almost anywhere within Haestad Methods’ software, including element dialog boxes,
FlexTables (see “FlexTables” on page 7-329), and the FlexUnits Manager (see “Flex-
Units Manager” on page 4-254).
4.8.1 Field Options
Most dialog boxes provide access to FlexUnits to set options such as unit, rounding,
and scientific notation for any field in the dialog box.
To set the display options for a unitized attribute:
1. Right-click the field, and select Properties from the shortcut menu. The Set Field
Options dialog box will appear.
2. Set the options you want for your units.
3. Click OK to set the options for the field, or Cancel to leave without making
changes.
You will be able to change the following characteristics:
• “Units” on page 4-253

• “Display Precision” on page 4-253
• “Scientific Notation” on page 4-253
• “Minimum and Maximum Allowed Value” on page 4-254
Tip: You can see the results of your changes in the preview at the top
of the dialog box.
Some attributes do not have theoretical minimum or maximum values, and others may
have an acceptable range governed by calculation restrictions or physical impossibili-
ties. For these attributes, minimum and maximum allowable values may not be appli-
cable.

4.8.2 Units
Units are the method of measurement displayed for the attribute. To change units,
click the choice list, then click the desired unit. The list is not limited to either SI or
US customary units, so you can mix unit systems within the same project.
FlexUnits are intelligent—the units actually have meaning. When you change units,
the displayed value is converted to the new unit so the underlying magnitude of the
attribute remains the same.
For example, a length of 100.0 ft. is not converted to a length of 100.0 m or 100.0 in.
It is correctly converted to 30.49 m or 1200.0 in.
4.8.3 Display Precision
The precision setting can be used to control the number of digits displayed after the
decimal point, or the rounding of numbers.
Number of Digits Displayed After Decimal Point

Enter 0 or a positive number to specify the number of digits after the decimal point.
For example, if the display precision is set to 3, a value of 123.456789 displays as

123.457. This works the same regardless of whether scientific notation is active.
Rounding
Note: Display precision is for numeric formatting only and will not
affect calculation accuracy.
Enter a negative number to specify rounding to the nearest power of 10. (-1) rounds to
the nearest 10, (-2) rounds to the nearest 100, and so on.
For example, if the display precision is set to (-3), a value of 1234567.89 displays as
1235000.
4.8.4 Scientific Notation
Note: Scientific Notation is for numeric formatting only and will not
affect calculation accuracy.
Scientific notation displays the number as a real number beginning with an integer or
real value, followed by the letter e and an integer (possibly preceded by a sign). Click
the field to turn scientific notation on or off. A check will appear in the box to indicate
that this setting is turned on.

FlexUnits
4.8.5 Minimum and Maximum Allowed Value
Note: These allowable minimums and maximums are only available for
certain parameters.
Minimum and maximum values are used to control the allowable range for an
attribute, and are used for validation of input. For example, some coefficient values
might typically range between 0.09 and 0.20. A frequent input error is to misplace the
decimal point when entering a value. If you enter a number that is less than the
minimum allowed value, a warning message will be displayed. This helps reduce the
number of input errors.
You may change this number in cases where you find the default limits too restrictive.
4.8.6 FlexUnits Manager
Note: The display units can also be changed from several other areas
in the program, and any changes are project-wide. For example,
if length is changed from units of feet to meters, all dialog boxes
will display length in meters. If you change the units in the dialog
box from meters to yards, the FlexUnits Manager will indicate
that length is in yards.
The FlexUnits Manager allows you to set the parameters for all the units used. The
dialog box consists of the following columns:
• Attribute Type—Parameter measured by the unit.

• Unit—Type of measurement displayed. To change the unit of an attribute type,
click the choice list and click the unit you want. This option also allows you to use
both US Customary and SI units in the same worksheet.
• System—Set the system of units. Click the system column for the desired unit,
and a button will appear. Click the button, and set the unit system to U.S. or SI.
• Display Precision—Rounding of numbers and number of digits displayed after
the decimal point. Enter a negative number for rounding to the nearest power of
10: (-1) rounds to 10, (-2) rounds to 100, (-3) rounds to 1000, and so on. Enter a
number from 0 to 15 to indicate the number of digits after the decimal point. This
feature works the same whether scientific notation is on or off.
• Scientific Notation—Displays numbers in scientific notation. Click the field to
turn scientific notation on or off. If it is turned on, a check mark appears in the
box.

Chapter
Layout and Editing 5

Tools
The layout and editing tools allow you to select elements to perform various graphical
or editing operations, locate particular elements, review the network for potential
problems, label or relabel elements, review your data, or define any new type of data.
5.1 Graphical Editor

Graphical Editor includes:
• “Using the Graphical Editor” on page 5-255

• “Working with Network Elements Within the Graphical Editor” on page 5-256
• “Creating New Elements” on page 5-256
• “Changing the Pipe Layout Tool to Insert a Different Type of Node” on page 5-
257
• “Morphing Elements” on page 5-258
• “Splitting Pipes” on page 5-258
• “Selecting Elements” on page 5-259
• “Editing Elements” on page 5-261
• “Other Tools” on page 5-262
5.1.1 Using the Graphical Editor
One of the most powerful features of the graphical editor, both in Stand-Alone and
AutoCAD modes, is the ability to create (see “Creating New Elements” on page 5-
256), move (see “Moving Elements” on page 5-262), edit (see “Editing Elements” on
page 5-261), and delete (see “Deleting Elements” on page 5-262) network elements
graphically. With these capabilities, working with your model becomes a simple point
and click exercise. The online tutorials and Lesson 1 have step-by-step instructions for
performing common tasks in the graphical editor. For more information, see “Quick
Start Lessons” on page 3-87.

Graphical Editor
5.1.2 Working with Network Elements Within the Graphical

Editor
Note: As you place your mouse over each element, a tooltip is

displayed informing you of the element’s label and annotations.
This feature is useful when the element labels have been turned
off or when the drawing view is zoomed out.
Most network editing tasks can be performed using only your mouse:
• “Creating New Elements” on page 5-256

• “Selecting Elements” on page 5-259
• “Editing Elements” on page 5-261
• “Moving Elements” on page 5-262
• “Deleting Elements” on page 5-262
• “Graphic Annotation” on page 13-557
5.1.3 Creating New Elements
The tool palette contains all of the tools necessary for adding a network Element to the
drawing. These element tools include:
Pipe Layout Tool—Pipes are link elements that connect junction nodes, pumps,
valves, tanks, and reservoirs.
Pressure Junction Tool—Junctions are non-storage nodes where water can leave
the network to satisfy consumer demands or enter the network as an inflow. Junc-
tions are also where chemical constituents can enter the network.
Tank Tool—Tanks are a type of Storage Node. The water surface elevation of a
tank will change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simula-
tion.

Layout and Editing Tools
Reservoir Tool—Reservoirs are a type of storage node. The water surface eleva-
tion of a reservoir does not change as water flows into or out of it during an
extended period simulation.
Pump Tool—Pumps are elements that add head to the system as water passes
through. A Pump is represented as a node.
Valve Tool—Valves are elements that open, throttle, or close to satisfy a condition
you specify. A valve is represented as a node.
Spot Elevation Tool—In addition to the elevations at junction nodes and other
network elements, supplemental spot elevations can be entered throughout the
model without adding unnecessary model nodes.
Although elements can be inserted individually, the most rapid method of network
creation is through the Pipe Layout tool. The Pipe Layout tool enables you to connect
existing nodes with new pipes, but also allows you to create new nodes as you lay out
the pipes.
For example, when the Pipe Layout tool is active, clicking within the drawing pane
will insert a node. Clicking again at another location will insert another node and
connect the two with a pipe. Use the online tutorials to experience it interactively.
5.1.4 Changing the Pipe Layout Tool to Insert a Different Type

of Node
While laying out a network, you may need to change the type of node that the Pipe
Layout tool inserts. This can be done very easily by following the steps outlined
below:
Note: The cursor appearance will change to reflect the type of node to
be inserted.
With the Pipe Layout tool active, right-click in the drawing pane.
• A shortcut menu will appear with a list of available element types.

• Select an element type from the shortcut menu.

Graphical Editor
5.1.5 Morphing Elements
Occasionally, you may find that you need to replace a node with a different type of
node. You can make this change through a process called morphing.
Morphing enables you to change an existing network node type, without having to
delete and re-create the node and all of its connecting links. Information types that are
common between the existing and new elements will be copied into the new element.
To morph an existing element into a different type of element:
• Select the new element type from the Tool Palette.

• In the drawing pane, place the cursor over the old element and click the left mouse
button.
• You will be prompted to verify that you want to morph. Answer Yes to perform
the morph, or answer no and a new element will be added at the specified location.
If you accidentally morph an element, this action can be undone by selecting Edit
> Undo.
5.1.6 Splitting Pipes
You may encounter a situation in which you need to add a new node in the middle of
an existing pipe. For example, you may want to insert a new inlet to capture excessive
surface flow in StormCAD, a new junction to represent additional demand in
WaterCAD, or a new manhole to maintain maximum access hole spacing in
SewerCAD.
You can split existing pipes by inserting a node along the pipe as follows:
From the Tool Palette, select the node type.
• In the drawing pane, place the cursor over the pipe and click.
• You will be prompted to confirm that you wish to split the pipe. If you choose to
split the pipe, the node will be inserted and two new pipes will be created with the
same characteristics as the original pipe (lengths are split proportionally).
• If you choose not to split the pipe, the new element will be placed on top of the
pipe without connecting to anything.
If you accidentally split a pipe, this action can be undone by selecting Edit > Undo.
You can also split an existing pipe with an existing node. To do this, drag the node into
position along the pipe to be split. After the node is placed over the point along the
pipe where you want the split to occur, right-click the node and select Split <Pipe
Label> from the context menu (where <Pipe Label> is the name of the pipe to be
split).

5.1.7 Pipe Disconnect / Reconnect
In certain circumstances, you may wish to disconnect a pipe from a node without
deleting and redrawing the pipe in question. For example, if the model was built from
a database and the Establish By Spatial Data option was used to determine pipe
connectivity, pipes may have been connected to the wrong nodes.
You can disconnect a pipe from an adjacent node and then reconnect it to another
existing node using the right-click context menu, as follows:
1. Right-click the pipe to be disconnected.

2. A context menu will appear. Two reconnect options will be displayed, one for
each of the end nodes of the pipe. Select the node from which you want to discon-
nect the pipe.
3. A broken line will appear, joining the node from which the pipe is being discon-
nected and your mouse cursor. Hover the mouse cursor over the junction to which
you would like to connect the pipe and click the left mouse button. The pipe will
now be connected to this junction.
5.1.8 Selecting Elements
You can select one element or a group of elements from drawing pane on which to
perform various operations such as moving (see “Moving Elements” on page 5-262),
deleting (see “Deleting Elements” on page 5-262), and editing (“Editing Elements” on
page 5-261).
Selecting Elements (Stand-Alone Mode)

• In Stand-Alone model activate the Select tool.
• To select a single element, click the desired element. To select a group of
elements, click the drawing pane and drag the mouse to form a selection
box around the elements you want to select, then click again to choose the other
corner of the selection box. All elements that are fully enclosed within the selec-
tion box will be selected.
To toggle the selected status of one or more elements, you can follow the same
instructions as above while holding down the Shift key. There are also additional ways
to select elements through the Edit menu.
When an element is selected in the Stand-Alone drawing pane, it will be

displayed with at least one grip. A grip is a black box, as shown below, that
indicates the figure’s insertion point. The label of a selected item, or the
number of selected items, will be displayed in the status bar.

Graphical Editor
Selecting Elements (AutoCAD Mode)

Within AutoCAD, the Select tool does not need to be active when making a selection.
Use the standard AutoCAD selection techniques.
AutoCAD also offers a variety of other selection methods that are outlined in the
AutoCAD documentation.
When an element is selected in AutoCAD, it may be displayed as a dashed line, and

the grips may become visible, as shown below. The exact display depends on how the
element was selected and the value of the AutoCAD variable GRIPS.
Other Graphical Selection Functions

Other graphical selection functions include:
• “Single Element Selection Dialog Box” on page 5-260

• “Calibration Group Selection Dialog Box” on page 5-261
• “Select From Drawing Button” on page 5-261
Single Element Selection Dialog Box
Use the Select Element dialog box to select a single element from your model.
• Elements—The Elements drop-down list acts as a filter for the elements

displayed in the available element display pane. Select an element type here to
only display elements of that type, or select <all> if you want all element types to
be displayed.
• Ellipsis Button (…)—Opens the Selection Set dialog box (for more information,
see “Selection Set Dialog Box” on page 5-264).
• Select From Drawing—This button returns you to the drawing pane to allow you
to visually select an element. When an element is clicked in the drawing view, you
are returned to the Select Element dialog box, where the element that was clicked
will be highlighted.

Calibration Group Selection Dialog Box
This dialog box is very similar to the Selection Set dialog box, with one exception:
Once an element has been added to a group, it cannot be included in any other groups.
For more information, see “Selection Set Dialog Box” on page 5-264.
Select From Drawing Button
The Select From Drawing button allows you to graphically select elements. Clicking
this button brings you back to the drawing view to allow you to graphically choose the
elements that you want to deactivate. While in this mode, clicking the right mouse
button opens a menu that allows you to select Done, which will bring you back to the
dialog box in which you initially clicked the Select From Drawing button.
5.1.9 Editing Elements
There are several methods for editing network element data, including Quick Edit (see
“Quick Edit” on page 5-273), FlexTables (see “FlexTables” on page 7-329), and the
Alternative Manager (see “Alternatives Manager” on page 8-347). You can also
import data using Database Connections (see “Shapefile and Database Connections”
on page 15-571).
Perhaps the most common method of changing element data, however, is from an
individual element’s editor dialog box. To edit a single element, use the Select tool.
To edit a single element, double-click the element, and the Editor dialog box will
open. Alternatively, you can right-click the element and select Edit… from the
shortcut menu.
In AutoCAD 2000/2002, the process is slightly different. First, click the Select tool,
then click the element you wish to edit. If you are using AutoCAD 2000/2002, you
can also right-click to activate the shortcut context menu or double-click the element
to be edited.
Right-click context menus can provide easy access to common functions and actions.
In AutoCAD 2000i, as in Stand-Alone, you can also double-click the element to bring
up its editor.

Graphical Editor
Moving Elements
You can change the location of elements easily. The first step is to select the elements
to be moved. Next, click to drag the element and release the mouse button to drop the
element at its new location. In AutoCAD mode, you can accomplish this by dragging
the grips. When a node is moved to a new location, all connected pipes will remain
attached, and pipe lengths will automatically update (unless the pipe has a user-
defined length or you are working in schematic mode).
Tip: For more information regarding moving elements within

AutoCAD, please refer to your Autodesk documentation.
In the same fashion, you can graphically change the location of element labels and
annotation relative to the element.
A node element can also be moved by editing its coordinates in the element’s editor, in
FlexTables, or through database connections.
Deleting Elements
To delete elements, select the elements to be deleted, and press the Delete key. Note
that the integrity of the network is automatically maintained when deletions are
performed. This means that when a node is deleted, any connecting pipes are also
deleted to prevent dangling pipes that would cause the network to be invalid.
There are also several other methods of deleting elements, including selecting Edit >
Delete, or typing ERASE at AutoCAD’s command line.
5.1.10 Other Tools
Although this product is primarily a modeling application, some additional drafting

tools can be helpful for intermediate calculations and drawing annotation. AutoCAD,
of course, provides a tremendous number of drafting tools.
In Stand-Alone mode, drafting and annotation tools allow you to add polylines
(multi-segmented lines), rectangles, and text to the drawing pane.

5.2 Selection Sets

Selection sets are user-defined groups of network elements. They allow you to
predefine a group of network elements that you want to manipulate together. Selection
sets are defined through the Selection Set Manager by selecting Tools > Selection
Sets.
Selection sets includes:
• “Selection Sets Manager” on page 5-263

• “New Selection Set” on page 5-263
• “Selection Set Dialog Box” on page 5-264
• “Duplicate Selection Set” on page 5-264
• “Rename Selection Set” on page 5-264
• “Selection Set Notes” on page 5-264
• “Delete Selection Set” on page 5-264
5.2.1 Selection Sets Manager
The Selection Sets Manager is used to create, edit, and duplicate selection sets. The
following options are available after clicking the Selection Set button:
• Add—Add a new selection set.

• Edit—Edit an existing selection set.
• Duplicate—Copy an existing selection set.
• Delete—Delete an existing selection set.
• Rename—Rename an existing selection set.
• Notes—Add a note regarding the selection set.
5.2.2 New Selection Set
After clicking Add in the Selection Set Manager, a dialog box opens. Enter the name
of your new selection set in the dialog box. Click OK to name the selection set, or
Cancel to exit the dialog box without creating a selection set.

Selection Sets
5.2.3 Selection Set Dialog Box
In this dialog box, you will notice two panes. A listing of all the elements in the
network is displayed in the Available Items pane. To add items to the Selected Items
pane, select the desired elements in the available list and click the [>] button under
Add. To add all the elements to your selection set, click the [>>] button.
Additionally, you can use the Select button to highlight items in the Available Items
pane using a variety of powerful selection techniques, or by graphically selecting
elements from the drawing. The button also lets you invert the current selection set,
thereby canceling items already selected and selecting items that are not already
selected. You can also clear the selected items using the Select button.
The features mentioned above are also available to remove items from the Selected
Items pane.
There is also a Select From Drawing button. Clicking this button brings you back to
the drawing view to allow you to graphically choose the elements that you want to
include in the selection set. While in this mode, clicking the right mouse button brings
you back to the Selection Set dialog box.
5.2.4 Duplicate Selection Set
Click Duplicate to make a copy of the highlighted selection set.
5.2.5 Rename Selection Set
Click Rename to open a dialog box that allows you to change the name of the high-
lighted selection set.
5.2.6 Selection Set Notes
Click Notes to input free form paragraph text that will be associated with the high-
lighted selection set.
5.2.7 Delete Selection Set
Click Delete to delete the highlighted selection set. This only deletes the selection set
and not the actual elements.

5.3 Find Element

This is a powerful feature that allows you to quickly locate any element in the drawing
by its label. It performs a case insensitive search. The Find Element feature is avail-
able from the Edit menu on the main window.
To find an element:
Choose Edit > Find Element.
• Type the label of the element you wish to find, or click the list box to choose from
a sorted list of elements in the system.
• You may wish to choose a Zoom Factor from the list provided. 100% is the default
Zoom Factor. If you wish to magnify the view of the drawing, then choose a Zoom
Factor greater than 100%. To decrease the view of the drawing, choose a Zoom
Factor less than 100%.
• Click OK to select the highlighted element.
5.4 Zooming
Zooming controls how large or small a drawing appears on the screen. Zooming is
helpful when you want to enlarge the display to see the drawing’s details, or to reduce
the display to see an entire drawing. Zooming does not change the actual size of the
drawing, only the size of the current view.
Tip: You can use the Plus key (+) and the Minus key (-) on the
numeric keyboard as a shortcut for zooming in and out
respectively (Stand-Alone mode only). You can also zoom in and
out by holding down the ctrl key and using the mouse wheel.
From the View menu or the toolbars, you can perform the following zoom operations:
Zoom In Enlarge the view of the drawing.
Zoom Out Decrease the view of the drawing.

Zooming
Zoom Window Choose the portion of the drawing to fit in the

window by drawing a selection box around it.
Zoom Extents Bring all elements in the drawing into view.
Zoom Previous Return to the most recent view of the drawing.
Zoom Center Center the location of specific coordinates within

the drawing pane. (For more information, see
“Zoom Center” on page 5-266.)
5.4.1 Zoom Center
The Zoom Center dialog box provides you with a quick way to zoom to any area of
your drawing. This feature is useful if you want to start laying out a network around
certain coordinates, or if you know the coordinates of an existing element that you
would like to locate.
To use Zoom Center:
• Select View > Zoom Center.

• In the Zoom Center dialog box, enter the coordinates to which you would like to
zoom.
• Select a zoom factor if you would like to increase or decrease the magnification.
• Click OK, and the specified coordinates will be located at the center of the
drawing.
5.4.2 Aerial View
The Aerial View is a small navigation window that provides a graphical overview of
your entire drawing. You can toggle the Aerial View window on or off by selecting
View > Aerial View.
A Navigation Rectangle is displayed in the Aerial View window. This Navigation

Rectangle provides a you-are-here indicator showing you current zoom location
respective of the overall drawing. As you pan and zoom around the drawing, the Navi-
gation Rectangle will automatically update to reflect your current location.

You can also use the Aerial View window to navigate around your drawing. To pan,
click the Navigation Rectangle to drag it to a new location. To zoom, click anywhere
in the window to specify the first corner of the Navigation Rectangle, and click again
to specify the second corner.
• In AutoCAD mode, see the AutoCAD online help for a detailed explanation.
• In Stand-Alone mode, with Aerial View window enabled (by selecting the View >
Aerial View), click and drag to draw a rectangular view box in the aerial view.
The area inside this view box is displayed in the main drawing window. Alter-
nately, any zooming or panning action performed directly in the main window
updates the size and location of the view box in the Aerial View window.
The Aerial View window contains the following buttons:
• Zoom Extents—Display the entire drawing in the Aerial View window.

• Zoom In—Decrease the area displayed in the Aerial View window.
• Zoom Out—Increase the area displayed in the Aerial View window.
To resize the view box directly from the Aerial View window, click to define the new
rectangular view box. To change the location of the view box, hover the mouse cursor
over the current view rectangle and click to drag the view box frame to a new location.
5.5 Drawing Review

Drawing review includes:
• “Drawing Review Window” on page 5-267

• “Selection Tolerance” on page 5-269
5.5.1 Drawing Review Window
The Drawing Review window allows you to quickly navigate to and review any group
of elements. This tool is particularly useful for finding potential problems in a
network. These problems may result from data entry errors or data discrepancies in the
source (database, shapefile, or CAD drawing) from which a model was imported.
By default, when the Drawing Review window opens, all elements will appear in the
list. You can work with any subset of elements by choosing one of the following
items:
• Select > Custom—Allows you to choose any set of elements to review using the
Selection Set dialog box (for more information, see “Selection Set Dialog Box”
on page 5-264).

Drawing Review
• Select > All Elements—Automatically selects all available elements.

• Select > Nodes in Close Proximity—Allows you to select all nodes that are
within a user-defined tolerance of another node. The tolerance is defined in the
Nodes in Close Proximity dialog box, which opens when this option is selected.
This tool is useful for finding and correcting connectivity problems. For example,
if two nodes are close to each other they may actually be the same node, and one
of them needs to be deleted.
• Select > Pipe-Split Candidates—Allows you to find nodes that are closer to a
pipe than a user-defined tolerance, but are not connected to the system. The toler-
ance is defined in the Pipe-Split Candidates dialog box, which opens when this
option is selected. This option is useful for finding and correcting connectivity
problems.
• Select > Orphaned Nodes—Allows you to select all orphaned nodes in your
network. A node is an orphan when it is not connected to any pipe.
• Select > Elements with Messages—Allows you to select all the elements that
have warnings or error messages, appearing in the Messages tab (see “Messages
Tab” on page 6-317) of an Element Editor dialog box. This is useful for correcting
data entry errors.
• Select > Pipes Missing Nodes—Allows you to select all pipes that are missing a
terminal node.
• Select > Clear Drawing Review Messages—Allows you to reset Drawing
Review messages for all elements in the list. Drawing Review messages are auto-
matically added during various Import operations such as Polyline to Pipe Import
and Land Development Desktop Import (SewerCAD or StormCAD only). After
you review and fix these problems, you may want to clear the review messages. If
you want to retain some of the drawing review messages, remove those elements
from the list prior to performing this operation.
• Create Selection Set—Allows you to create a new selection set. After selecting
this option, a dialog box will appear allowing you to name the selection set. After
clicking OK in this dialog box, the Selection Set dialog box will appear. (See
“Selection Set Dialog Box” on page 5-264.)
The elements you select will appear in the primary list located along the left side of
the Drawing Review window.
• Go To—To navigate to an element, select the desired element in the list and press
the Go To button.
• Next/Prev—To navigate to the elements sequentially, use the Next or Prev
buttons.
• Zoom—You can control the degree to which the drawing review zooms into the
selected element by choosing a zoom factor from the field labeled Zoom, located
in the lower right corner of the dialog box.

Tip: You can double-click an element in the list to quickly navigate to

that element.
If you know the name of the element to which you wish to

navigate, type the label in the field located above the element list
and click the Go To button.
All menus and toolbars will remain available even when the
Drawing Review window is open. This allows you to navigate to
and fix any problems that you find.
Use the Drawing Review window in conjunction with the QuickView window (see
“Quick Edit” on page 5-273) to review the data for the selected elements.
5.5.2 Selection Tolerance
Some select operations require you to specify a tolerance for defining which nodes
will be selected for the Drawing Review window (for more information, see “Drawing
Review Window” on page 5-267).
• Elements in Close proximity—If the distance between the elements in the

drawing is within the specified tolerance, those elements will be selected for
display in the Drawing Review window.
• Pipe Split Candidates—If the distance between a node and a pipe is within the
specified tolerance, it will be selected for display in the Drawing Review window.
5.6 Relabel Elements

Relabel elements includes:
• “Relabel Elements Dialog Box” on page 5-270

• “Relabel Operations” on page 5-270
• “Elements Selected” on page 5-271

Relabel Elements
5.6.1 Relabel Elements Dialog Box
Element relabeling allows you to modify the labels of a selected set of elements. This
feature is especially useful with a model built from a database that uses numeric IDs to
identify elements, making it difficult to distinguish between the different types of
elements in the system. With element relabeling, you can quickly append a prefix such
as ‘P-’ to all pipes in your system so that it is obvious which labels belong to elements
representing pipes.
The Relabel Elements dialog box contains two sections:
• Relabel Operations—Allows you to select and define the operations you want to
perform. For more information, see “Relabel Operations” on page 5-270.
• Elements Selected—Allows you to select which elements in your project you
want to relabel. For more information, see “Elements Selected” on page 5-271.
5.6.2 Relabel Operations
The element relabeling tool allows you to perform three types of operations on a set of
element labels: Replace, Renumber, and Append. The active relabel operation is
chosen from the list box in the Relabel Operations section of the Relabel Elements
dialog box. The entry fields for entering the information appropriate for the active
relabel operation appear below the Relabel Operations section. The following list
presents a description of the available element relabel operations.
• Replace—This operation allows you to replace all instances of a character or

series of characters in the selected element labels with another piece of text. For
instance, if you selected elements with labels P-1, P-2, P-12, and J-5, you could
replace all the Ps with the word Pipe by entering P in the Find field, Pipe in the
Replace With field, and clicking the Apply button. The resulting labels are Pipe-1,
Pipe-2, Pipe-12, and J-5. You can also use this operation to delete portions of a
label. Suppose you now want to go back to the original labels. You can enter ipe
in the Find field and leave the Replace With field blank to reproduce the labels P-
1, P-2, P-12, and J-5. There is also the option to match the case of the characters
when searching for the characters to replace. This option can be activated by
checking the box next to the Match Case field.
• Renumber—This operation allows you to generate a new label, including suffix,
prefix, and ID number for each selected element. For example, if you had the
labels P-1, P-4, P-10, and Pipe-12, you could use this feature to renumber the
elements in increments of five, starting at five, with a minimum number of two
digits for the ID number field. You could specify a prefix P- and a suffix -Z1 in
the Prefix and Suffix fields, respectively. The prefix and suffix are appended to the
front and back of the automatically generated ID number. The value of the new ID
for the first element to be relabeled, 5, is entered in the Next field. The value by
which the numeric base of each consecutive element is incremented, 5, is entered

in the Increment field. The minimum number of digits in the ID number, 2, is

entered in the Digits field. If the number of digits in the ID number is less then this
value, zeros are placed in front of it. Click the Apply button to produce the
following labels: P-05-Z1, P-10-Z1, P-15-Z1, and P-20-Z1.
• Append—This operation allows you to append a prefix, suffix, or both to the
selected element labels. Suppose that you have selected the labels 5, 10, 15, and
20, and you wish to signify that these elements are actually pipes in Zone 1 of
your system. You can use the append operation to add an appropriate prefix and
suffix, such as P- and -Z1, by specifying these values in the Prefix and Suffix
fields and clicking the Apply button. Performing this operation yields the labels P-
5-Z1, P-10-Z1, P-15-Z1 and P-20-Z1. You can append only a prefix or suffix by
leaving the other entry field empty. However, for the operation to be valid, one of
the entry fields must be filled in.
The selection set of elements on which the relabel operation is to be performed can be
selected in the Elements section of the Relabel Elements dialog box.
5.6.3 Elements Selected
The Elements section contains a pane that lists the elements to be relabeled. You can
select the set of elements that appears in this pane by clicking the Select button. This
accesses the Selection Set dialog box (see “Selection Set Dialog Box” on page 5-264),
where you can pick a set of elements from all the elements currently in the project.
For the Append and Replace operations, the order that the elements appear in the text
pane does not affect the results of the operation. However, for the Renumber opera-
tion, the order in which the elements appear in the text pane determines the order in
which they will be renumbered. The default order in which the elements appear in the
text pane is in the alphanumeric order of the element labels, called Ascending Order.
If you wish to change this order, click the Sort button, and select Network Order to
put the elements in the order they appear in the network, Descending Order to put
them in reverse alphanumeric order, or Ascending Order to put them back in alpha-
numeric order.
5.7 Element Labeling

Element labeling includes:
• “Element Labeling Dialog Box” on page 5-272

• “Moving Element Labels and Annotation” on page 5-273

Element Labeling
5.7.1 Element Labeling Dialog Box
The Element Labeling dialog box is used to specify the automatic numbering format
of new elements as they are added to the network. The following options are available:
• Element—View the type of element to which the label applies.

• Next—Enter the integer you want to use as the starting value for the ID number
portion of the label. The program will generate labels beginning with this number,
and will choose the first available unique label.
• Increment—Enter the integer that will be added to the ID number after each
element is created to yield the number for the next element.
• Prefix—Enter the letters or numbers that will appear in front of the ID number for
the elements in your network.
• Digits—Enter the minimum number of digits that the ID number will have. For
instance, 1, 10, and 100 with a digit setting of two would be 01, 10, and 100.
• Suffix—Enter the letters or numbers that will appear after the ID number for the
elements in your network.
• Preview—View an example of what the label will look like based on the informa-
tion you have entered in the previous fields.
Changes to the element labeling specifications will only affect the numbering of new
elements. Existing elements will not be affected. In order to adjust the numbering of
existing elements, utilize the Relabel Elements option accessible from the Tools menu
(for more information, see “Relabel Elements Dialog Box” on page 5-270).
You can control the angle at which the text flips from one side of the pipe to the other
to read in the opposite direction, when the pipe direction on a plot is nearly vertical.
By default, the text flips direction when the pipe direction is 1.5 degrees, measured
counter-clockwise from the vertical. You may modify this value by inserting a Text-
FlipAngle variable in the HAESTAD.INI file that is located in the program file of
your Haestad directory, and specifying the angle at which the text should flip. The
angle is measured in degrees, counter-clockwise from the vertical. For instance, if you
want the text to flip when the pipe direction is vertical, you should add the following
line to the HAESTAD.INI file:
Note: Pipe labeling can be aligned with the pipes or be displayed

horizontally, depending on the Pipe Text setting specified in the
Drawing Options dialog box (for more information, see “Pipe
Text” on page 4-248).
TextFlipAngle=0.0
Reasonable values typically fall in the range 15.0 deg to -15.0 deg.

5.7.2 Moving Element Labels and Annotation
Note: To select multiple lines of annotation, Shift+ click them.
When multiple lines of annotation are present, you can move all lines as a group by
clicking and holding the left mouse button and dragging the labels to the desired posi-
tion. If you want to move these labels individually, click one of the lines of annotation
to highlight them. You will notice highlighted grips in the middle of each line. Click
this grip, hold down the mouse button, and drag to move a single line of annotation to
the desired location.
5.8 Quick Edit

The Quick Edit window gives you a fast way to edit or view the data associated with
any element in the network without having to open the element dialog box. This
floating window includes input and output information for any element that you have
selected. It also includes a convenient color-coding legend. These tabs are available:
• Input—Contains input data for the selected element.

• Output—Contains output data for the selected element.
• Legend—Displays ranges of the active color-coding.
Note: Use the resize bar at the top of the Quick Edit window to change
the size of the Label, Value, and Unit columns on the Input/
Output tabs. You can highlight an Input/Output attribute by
clicking the label of that attribute, which provides better visual
feedback (e.g., when monitoring =pressures at several nodes).
When the Quick Edit window is open, the data for an entity will immediately be
displayed when you select it (see “Selecting Elements” on page 5-259) within the
graphical editor. Once an element has been selected, click any editable field on the
Input tab to edit the associated value. Edits will be committed when you leave the
Quick Edit window. Changes made through the Quick Edit window can be undone/
redone by accessing the Edit menu.

Quick Edit

Chapter
Hydraulic Element 6
Editors
This section presents a detailed look at the input and output data for each type of
element used in a WaterCAD project and the way it is organized in the graphical user
interface. First, a description of the elements used to model the water distribution
network is provided, including prototypes as a way to initialize new model elements
with default values. Then, the user data extension, which allows you to add your own
attributes to any element, and the Zone Manager, which allows you to group modeling
elements into zones, are described.
Note: A water distribution system model will not be considered valid

for calculation if the number of pipes exceeds the licensed size.
To determine how many pipes you are licensed for, choose the
Help > About WaterCAD menu item. Click the Registration
button to view the size that has been licensed. If the total
number of pipes exceeds the licensed size, the project will not
calculate.
The primary component of a WaterCAD project is the network model. The element
types that are used to form a network models are:
• Pressure Pipes—Pipes are link elements that connect junction nodes, pumps,
valves, tanks, and reservoirs to each other. The only way for water to travel from
one node to another is by following a path through one or more pipes. For more
information, see “Pressure Pipe Editor” on page 6-277.
• Pressure Junctions—Junctions are non-storage nodes where water can leave the
network to satisfy consumer demands, water can enter the network as an inflow,
or chemical constituents can enter the network. For more information, see “Pres-
sure Junction Editor” on page 6-277.
• Tanks—Tanks are a type of Storage Node. The water surface elevation of a tank
will change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation.
Tanks can have either a circular or irregular cross section. For more information,
see “Tank Editor” on page 6-278.

Element Editors
• Reservoirs—A reservoir is a type of storage node. The water surface elevation of

a reservoir does not change as water flows into or out of it during an extended
period simulation, unless an HGL Pattern has been applied to the reservoir. Reser-
voirs can be used to model external water sources such as lakes, streams, and
wells. When an HGL pattern is applied, reservoirs can also be used to represent
tidal activity and connections to other systems where the pressure varies over
time. For more information, see “Reservoir Editor” on page 6-279.
• Valves—A valve is an element that opens, throttles, or closes to satisfy a condi-
tion you specify. It is represented in WaterCAD as a node. For more information,
see “Valve Editor” on page 6-281.
• Pumps—A pump is an element that adds head to the system as water passes
through. It is typically defined by a pump curve and control elevations, which turn
the pump on or off. It is represented in WaterCAD as a node. For more informa-
tion, see “Pump Editor” on page 6-279.
6.1 Element Editors

Element editors includes:
• “Using Element Editors” on page 6-276

• “Pressure Pipe Editor” on page 6-277
• “Pressure Junction Editor” on page 6-277
• “Tank Editor” on page 6-278
• “Reservoir Editor” on page 6-279
• “Pump Editor” on page 6-279
• “Valve Editor” on page 6-281
6.1.1 Using Element Editors
Note: Element data may also be viewed/edited more efficiently through

FlexTables (see “FlexTables” on page 7-329), which display all the
data in customizable tabular format, allowing you to perform
functions such as sorting, filtering, and global editing. The data
may also be quickly reviewed and edited through the Quick Edit
window (see “Quick Edit” on page 5-273).
The Element Editors allow you to edit all input data and view all calculated output
data defining a single network element.

Hydraulic Element Editors
6.1.2 Pressure Pipe Editor
The pressure pipe editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the
following tabs:
• General—General pipe information including dimensions and physical character-

istics data, as well as hydraulic results. For more information, see “Tank General
Tab” on page 6-287.
• Controls—Control data used to specify whether the pipe is open or closed at a
specified simulation time or based on the HGL or pressure at any node in the
system. For more information, see “Controls Tab” on page 6-305.
• Quality—Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis as
specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog box (see “Scenario Editor—Calcula-
tion Tab” on page 8-372). For more information, see “Quality Tab” on page 6-
307.
• Capital Cost—Cost Analysis input/output data used when performing Cost Anal-
ysis calculations. For more information, see “Capital Cost Tab” on page 6-313.
• User Data—Additional data as defined by you. New fields can be added, such as
the pipe installation date. For more information, see “User Data Tab” on page 6-
316.
• Messages—Calculation messages, such as warnings or error messages, and notes
and descriptions that you enter. For more information, see “Messages Tab” on
page 6-317.
6.1.3 Pressure Junction Editor
The pressure junction editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into
the following tabs:
• General—General junction information including geographical data and

hydraulic results. For more information, see “Pressure Junctions General Tab” on
page 6-286.
• Demand—Assignment of demands or inflows to junction elements in order to
simulate water leaving or entering the network. Inflows and demands consist of a
baseline flow rate and an associated Fixed or Extended Period Simulation (EPS)
Pattern. For more information, see “Load” on page 6-300.
• Quality—Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis, as
specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog box. For more information, see “Tank
General Tab” on page 6-287.
• Fire Flow—Contains fire flow input and output data. For more information, see
“Fire Flow Tab” on page 6-311.

Element Editors
the junction installation date. For more information, see “User Data Tab” on
page 6-316.
page 6-317.
6.1.4 Tank Editor
WaterCAD allows you to define tanks with either fixed or variable sections.
Note: For steady-state simulations, a tank is considered to have a

constant water surface elevation, similar to a reservoir.
The tank editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the
following tabs:
• General—General tank information including geographical data and hydraulic

results. For more information, see “Tank General Tab” on page 6-287.
• Demand—Assignment of demands or inflows to tank elements in order to simu-
late water leaving or entering the network. For more information, see “Load” on
page 6-300.
• Section—Data defining the geometric characteristics of the tank and its operating
level range. For more information, see “Tank Section” on page 6-303.
tion Tab” on page 8-372). For more information, see “Quality Tab” on page 6-
307.
the tank installation date. For more information, see “User Data Tab” on page 6-
316.
page 6-317.

6.1.5 Reservoir Editor
The reservoir editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the
following tabs:
• General—General reservoir information including geographical data and

hydraulic results. For more information, see “Reservoirs General Tab” on page 6-
288.
tion Tab” on page 8-372 and “Quality Tab” on page 6-307).
the reservoir installation date or other GIS data. For more information, see “User
Data Tab” on page 6-316.
page 6-317.
6.1.6 Pump Editor
A pump is an element that adds head to the system as water passes through it. This
software can currently be used to model six different pump types (see “Constant
Horsepower Pumps” on page B-725):
• Constant Power
• Design Point (One-Point)
• Standard (Three-Point)
• Standard Extended
• Custom Extended
• Multiple Point

Element Editors
Note: Avoid using constant power or design point pumps except for
preliminary estimates. They are often enticing because they
require less work on behalf of the engineer, but they are much
less accurate than a pump curve based on several
representative points.
It is not necessary to place a check valve on the pipe

immediately downstream of a pump, because the pump
elements in WaterCAD, by default, have built-in check valves
that prevent reverse flow.
The pump editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the
following tabs:
• General—General pump information including geographical data, pump curve

data, initial settings, and hydraulic results. For more information, see “Pump
General Tab” on page 6-289.
• VSP—Variable speed pump settings. For more information, see “VSP (Variable
Speed Pump) Tab” on page 6-317.
• Controls—Data specifying the on/off elevation settings of the pump, as well as
relative speed factor settings in the case of a variable speed pump. For more infor-
mation, see “Controls Tab” on page 6-305.
• Energy—This tab contains the pump efficiency input for use in Energy Cost anal-
ysis. For more information, see “Energy Tab” on page 6-319.
• Quality—Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis as
the pump installation date. For more information, see “User Data Tab” on page 6-
316.
page 6-317.

6.1.7 Valve Editor
A valve is an element that opens, throttles, or closes to satisfy a condition you specify.
This software can model several different types of valves. The behavior of a valve is
determined by the upstream (From Pipe) and downstream (To Pipe) conditions. The
valve types include:
• Pressure Reducer Valve (PRV)—PRVs throttle to prevent the downstream

hydraulic grade from exceeding a set value. If the downstream grade rises above
the set value, the PRV will close. If the head upstream is lower than the valve
setting, the valve will open fully.
• Pressure Sustaining Valve (PSV)—PSVs throttle to prevent the upstream
hydraulic grade from dropping below a set value. If the upstream grade is lower
than the set grade, the valve will close completely.
• Pressure Breaker Valve (PBV)—PBVs are used to force a specified pressure
(head) drop across the valve. These valves do not automatically check flow and
will actually boost the pressure in the direction of reverse flow to achieve a down-
stream grade that is lower than the upstream grade by a set amount.
• Flow Control Valve (FCV)—FCVs are used to limit the maximum flow rate
through the valve from upstream to downstream. FCVs do not limit the minimum
flow rate or negative flow rate (flow from the To Pipe to the From Pipe).
• Throttle Control Valve (TCV)—TCVs are used as controlled minor losses. A
TCV is a valve that has a minor loss associated with it where the minor loss can
change in magnitude according to the controls that are implemented for the valve.
• General Purpose Valve (GPV)—GPVs are used to model situations and devices
where the flow-to-headloss relationship is specified by you rather than using the
standard hydraulic formulas. GPVs can be used to represent reduced pressure
backflow prevention (RPBP) valves, well draw-down behavior, and turbines.
Tip: You can change a valve from one type to another by a process
called morphing. Just click the new valve type button on the
toolbar, and drag the new valve on top of the old one.
If you are using a valve that does not normally check flow, but
you would like it to, set one of the pipes connecting to the valve
with a check valve.
The valve editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the
following tabs:
• General—General valve information including geographical data and hydraulic

results. For more information, see “Valve General Tab” on page 6-296.

Element Editors’ Tabs
• Controls—Data specifying how the valve is controlled, as a function of the time

or the hydraulic condition at any node in the system. For more information, see
“Controls Tab” on page 6-305.
the valve installation date. For more information, see “User Data Tab” on page 6-
316.
page 6-317.
6.2 Element Editors’ Tabs

The element editors can be opened by double-clicking an element or by right-clicking
an element and selecting Edit. Element editors’ tabs include:
• “General Tab” on page 6-283

• “Pressure Junctions General Tab” on page 6-286
• “Tank General Tab” on page 6-287
• “Reservoirs General Tab” on page 6-288
• “Pump General Tab” on page 6-289
• “Valve General Tab” on page 6-296
• “Load” on page 6-300
• “Section Tab” on page 6-302
• “Controls Tab” on page 6-305
• “Quality Tab” on page 6-307
• “Fire Flow Tab” on page 6-311
• “Capital Cost Tab” on page 6-313
• “User Data Tab” on page 6-316
• “Messages Tab” on page 6-317
• “VSP (Variable Speed Pump) Tab” on page 6-317
• “Energy Tab” on page 6-319

6.2.1 General Tab
The General tab includes:
• “Pressure Pipe General Tab” on page 6-283

• “Pipe Section” on page 6-284
• “Minor Loss Elements” on page 6-284
• “Initial Status Section” on page 6-285
• “User-Defined Length Section” on page 6-285
• “Nodes Section” on page 6-285
• “Hydraulic Results Section” on page 6-286
• “Water Quality Section” on page 6-286
Pressure Pipe General Tab

The General tab for pressure pipes is organized into the following groups:
• Pipe—General pipe data. For more information, see “Pipe Section” on page 6-
284.
• Initial Status—Specify a pipes initial condition, open or closed. For more infor-
mation, see “Initial Status Section” on page 6-285.
• User-Defined Length—Specify whether the pipe length is calculated automati-
cally or defined by you. For more information, see “User-Defined Length
Section” on page 6-285.
• Nodes—Define a positive direction for the flow in the pipe. This is used for check
valves or flow results. A reported negative flow indicates that the water is flowing
from the To Node to the From Node. For more information, see “Nodes Section”
on page 6-285.
• Hydraulic Results—Calculated hydraulic data. For more information, see
“Hydraulic Results Section” on page 6-286.
• Water Quality—Results of the water quality computations in the pipe reported
when a Water Quality Analysis has been performed. For more information, see
“Water Quality Section” on page 6-286.

Pipe Section
Tip: By clicking the ellipsis (...) button located next to the Material
you can access the engineering library to create and customize
materials.
By clicking the ellipsis (…) button on the Minor Loss Coefficient

field, you can access the Minor Loss builder and generate
composite minor loss coefficients to be applied to the pressure
pipe (for more information, see “Minor Loss Elements” on page 6-
284).
Set the minor loss coefficient value to 0.0 (default) if there is no

minor loss in the pipe.
In this section you enter in all of the pipe general characteristics:
• Label—Unique name referencing the pipe in reports, error messages, and tables.
The label can be any combination of alphanumeric digits.
• Material—Pipe material, with its associated roughness value, selected from the
Material Library.
• diameter—Inside diameter of the pipe.
• Roughness Coefficient—Pipe roughness coefficient or value associated with the
roughness method selected during the project setup for the selected material. (For
more information, see “Manning’s Equation” on page B-731, “Hazen-Williams
Equation” on page B-729, and “Darcy-Weisbach Equation” on page B-729.) You
can keep the roughness value associated with the selected material, as defined in
the material library, or override the roughness value for that specific pipe.
• Minor Loss Coefficient—Coefficient K used in the minor loss equation. For
more information, see “Minor Losses” on page B-732. This is the equation most
commonly used for determining the headloss in a fitting, valve, meter, or other
localized component.
• Check Valve—When this box is checked, flow can only travel from the From
Node to the To Node in a pressure pipe.
Minor Loss Elements

Pressure pipes can have an unlimited number of minor loss elements associated with
them. This program provides an easy-to-use table for editing these minor losses. The
minor loss table consists of four columns:
• Quantity—The number of minor losses of the same type to be added to the

composite minor loss for the pipe.
• Minor Loss—The type of minor loss element.

• K Each—The headloss coefficient for a single minor loss element of the specified
type.
• K Total—The total minor loss coefficient for the row. It is the Quantity multiplied
by the K Each.
The Minor Loss Elements dialog box also has three command buttons:
• Insert—Insert a row in the table.

• Duplicate—Create a new row in the table with the same values as the selected
row.
• Delete—Delete the selected row of the table.
Initial Status Section
Note: In Steady-State Analysis mode, the Initial Status is used as the

permanent status. However, it can be overruled by the presence
of controls if the Use Controls in Steady-State Analysis check
box in the Calculation Options dialog box (see “Calculation
Options” on page 9-391) is checked. The Calculation Options
dialog box is accessed by clicking the GO button in the main
view, and then clicking the Options button.
The initial status of the pipe can be either Open or Closed. It is possible that this status
will change when calculations are performed, based on the presence of controls for
that pipe.
User-Defined Length Section

If the User-Defined Length box is checked, you can enter a pipe length. Otherwise, the
program will compute a pipe length from node center to node center, accounting for
bends if there are any. Creating user-defined lengths is useful for drawing quick sche-
matics to accelerate your design process.
Nodes Section
This section allows you to identify the calculated flow direction. A reported positive
flow value indicates that the flow is in the direction of the From Node to the To Node.
It is also useful for check valves, which allows flow only in the From Node to the To
Node direction.
The Reverse button allows you to change the direction of a pipe, switching the From
Node and the To Node.

Hydraulic Results Section

This section reports the following hydraulic results:
• Discharge—Calculated total flow in the pipe.

• Velocity—Calculated velocity in the pipe.
• Headloss Gradient—Headloss in the pipe represented as a slope or gradient.
• Pressure Pipe Headloss—Loss of energy in the pipe due to friction and minor
losses.
• Control Status—Open or Closed status of the pipe. Open means that flow occurs
in the pipe and Closed means that there is no flow.
Water Quality Section

This section reports the results of the water quality computations at this location,
assuming that a Water Quality Analysis was performed. The water quality parameter
displayed depends on the type of water quality analysis being performed. This param-
eter is one of the three types:
• Age—Report how long the water has been in the system at this node or link. For
more information, see “Age Analysis” on page 9-389.
• Trace—Report the percentage of water at this node or link that originated at
another chosen node (tank, reservoir, or junction). For more information, see
“Trace Analysis” on page 9-391.
• Constituent—Report the concentration of a given constituent at this node or link.
For more information, see “Constituent Analysis” on page 9-390.
6.2.2 Pressure Junctions General Tab
The General tab for junctions is organized into the following sections:
• General—General information about the junction. For more information, see

“General Section” on page 6-287.
• Calculated Hydraulics—Calculated demand, hydraulic grade and pressure at the
junction. For more information, see “Junction Calculated Hydraulics Section” on
page 6-287.
• Water Quality—Result of the water quality computations at this node reported

General Section
This section allows you to enter general information about the junction, such as:
• Label—Unique alphanumeric name referencing the junction in reports, error

messages, and tables.
• X (Easting)—The location of the junction may be represented by an X-value or
an Easting value, depending on individual preferences.
• Y (Northing)—The location of the junction may be represented by a Y-value or a
Northing value, depending on individual preferences.
• Elevation—Elevation of the junction.
• Zone—Specify the zone the junction belongs to. You may click the ellipsis (…)
button to access the Zone Manager, which allows you to edit or add zones. For
more information, see “Zone Manager” on page 6-328.
• Emitter Coefficient—Discharge coefficient for an emitter (sprinkler or nozzle)
placed at junction. Units are flow units at 1 unit of pressure drop (psi or m). Leave
blank or set to 0 if no emitter is present. For more information, see “Flow Emit-
ters” on page 9-384.
Junction Calculated Hydraulics Section

This section reports the following results:
• Demand (Calculated)—Total Demand leaving (or entering) the pipe network at

the junction at the current time.
• Calculated Hydraulic Grade—Hydraulic Grade at the junction.
• Pressure—Pressure at the junction.
6.2.3 Tank General Tab
The General tab for tanks is organized into the following sections:
• General—General geographic information about the tank. For more information,

see “General Section” on page 6-288.
• Hydraulics—Calculated flow entering/leaving the tank and the calculated
hydraulic grade in the tank. For more information, see “Hydraulics Section” on
page 6-288.

General Section
This section allows you to enter general information about the tank such as:
• Label—Unique name referencing the tank in reports, error messages, and tables.
• X (Easting)—The location of the tank may be represented by an X-value or an
Easting value, depending on individual preferences.
• Y (Northing)—The location of the tank may be represented by a Y-value or a
• Elevation—Ground elevation of the tank.
• Zone—Specify the zone the tank belongs to. You may click the ellipsis (…)
button to access the Zone Manager (see “Zone Manager” on page 6-328), which
allows you to edit or add zones.
Hydraulics Section
This section reports the hydraulic data of the tank:
• Hydraulic Grade—Calculated hydraulic grade in the tank.

• Inflow/Outflow—Flow entering/leaving the tank (the field label changes accord-
ingly).
6.2.4 Reservoirs General Tab
The General tab for reservoirs is organized into the following sections:
• General—General geographic information about the reservoir. For more informa-

tion, see “General Section” on page 6-289.
• Reservoir Calculated Hydraulics—Calculated flow entering or leaving the
reservoir. For more information, see “Reservoir Calculated Hydraulics Section”
on page 6-289.
For more information on the data, see the topic on each section. The water quality
section is identical for all elements; for more information, see “Water Quality Section”
on page 6-286.

General Section
This section allows you to enter general information about the reservoir, such as:
• Label—Unique name referencing the reservoir in reports, error messages, and

tables.
• X (Easting)—The location of the reservoir may be represented by an X-value or
an Easting value, depending on individual preferences.
• Y (Northing)—The location of the reservoir may be represented by a Y-value or a
• Elevation—Elevation of the water surface in the reservoir, which is assumed to
remain constant through time.
• HGL Pattern—Allows you to apply a pattern for changes to the reservoir’s
hydraulic grade line over time for extended period simulations. Click on the
ellipsis (…) button to open the Pattern Manager. From the Pattern Manager (see
“Pattern Manager” on page 9-394), you can create, edit, and import HGL patterns
for the reservoir.
• Zone—Specify the zone in which the reservoir belongs. Click the ellipsis (…)
Reservoir Calculated Hydraulics Section

This section reports the hydraulic data of the reservoir:
• Inflow/Outflow—Flow entering/leaving the reservoir (the field label changes

accordingly).
6.2.5 Pump General Tab
The General tab for pumps is organized into the following groups:
• General—General physical data about the pump. For more information, see
“Pump General Section” on page 6-290.
• Pump Definition—Type of pump curve and related data. For more information,
see “Pump Definition Section” on page 6-290.
• Initial Setting—Initial conditions for a pump describing the pump’s behavior at
the start of the analysis in EPS mode, or its permanent setting in Steady-State
mode. For more information, see “Initial Setting Section” on page 6-291.
• Pipes—Direction the pump is operating (i.e., from upstream to downstream
node). The direction of pumping can be reversed by clicking the Reverse button.
For more information, see “Pipes Section” on page 6-292.

• Operating Point—Values of pump head and discharge, which are computed by

the program to balance with the remaining system heads and flow rates. For more
information, see “Operating Point Section” on page 6-292.
• Water Quality—Result of the water quality computations at this pump reported
6.2.6 Pump General Section
This section allows you to enter general information about the pump such as:
• Label—Unique name referencing the pump in reports, error messages, and tables.
• X (Easting)—The location of the pump may be represented by an X-value or an
• Y (Northing)—The location of the pump may be represented by a Y-value or a
• Elevation—Elevation of the pump.
The pump general section includes:
• “Pump Definition Section” on page 6-290

• “Initial Setting Section” on page 6-291
• “Pipes Section” on page 6-292
• “Operating Point Section” on page 6-292
Pump Definition Section
Note: All defined pump curve points have an associated head and
discharge.
In previous versions of WaterCAD, the Pump element editor

would not close if there was invalid input data present in the
head definition. This validation has been removed, so it is now
possible to enter invalid data in this dialog box. It is a good idea
to review your input data carefully.
The pump definition section displays the pump curve plot for the definition that is
currently assigned to the pump. When a new pump is placed, it is assigned the default
pump definition (unless otherwise specified, i.e., prototypes). A new pump definition
must be assigned. To do this, select a pump from the menu (if a definition has already

been created) or click the Ellipsis (...) button to open the Pump Definition Manager
(See “Pump Definition Manager” on page 6-292). The information required for a
pump depends on the type of pump that is selected. The possible information is as
follows:
• Head Definition—Select one of the six available types of pump curves. For more
information, see “Constant Horsepower Pumps” on page B-725.
• Pump Power—Represents the water horsepower, or horsepower that is actually
transferred from the pump to the water. Depending on the pump’s efficiency, the
actual power consumed (brake horsepower) may vary. This is available only for
constant-power pumps.
• Shutoff—Point at which the pump will have zero discharge. It is typically the
maximum head point on a pump curve.
• Design—Point at which the pump was originally intended to operate. It is typi-
cally the best efficiency point (BEP) of the pump. At discharges above or below
this point, the pump is not operating under optimum conditions.
• Max Operating—Highest discharge for which the pump is actually intended to
run. At discharges above this point, the pump may behave unpredictably, or its
performance may decline rapidly.
• Max Extended—Absolute maximum discharge at which the pump can operate,
adding zero head to the system. This value may be computed by the program, or
entered as a custom extended point.
Initial Setting Section
Note: In Steady-State Analysis mode, the Pump Status is used as the

permanent status. However, it can be overruled by the presence
of controls, if the Use Controls in Steady-State Analysis check
box in the Calculation Options dialog box (see “Calculation
Options” on page 9-391) is checked. The Calculation Options
dialog box is accessed by clicking the GO button in the main
view to display the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor and
then clicking the Options button.
The initial conditions for a pump describe the pump’s behavior at the start of the anal-
ysis. These conditions include:
• Status—One of two available status conditions: On (normal operation), Off (no

flow under any condition).
• Relative Speed Factor—Characteristics of the pump relative to the speed for
which the pump curve was entered, in accordance with the affinity laws. A speed
factor of 1.00 will indicate pump characteristics identical to those of the original
pump curve.

Pipes Section
Note: You can switch the Upstream and Downstream Pipes by clicking
the Reverse button.
This indicates the direction in which the pump is operating (from upstream pipe to
downstream pipe).
Operating Point Section
Note: For a constant power pump, the calculated operating point may
be outside of the range for which the pump is representative of a
real pump. Be very cautious and check all results carefully. For
more information, see “Pump Theory” on page B-723.
The pump’s operating point represents the values for pump head and discharge, which
are computed by the program to balance with the remaining system heads and flow
rates.
• Relative Speed—Characteristics of the pump relative to the speed for which the
pump curve was entered, in accordance with the affinity laws. A speed factor of
1.00 will indicate pump characteristics identical to those of the original pump
curve.
• Control Status—Available pump conditions: On (normal operation), Off (no
flow under any condition).
• Discharge—Discharge produced by the pump at the operating point.
• Pump Head—Head generated by the pump at the operating point. The calculated
parameters are:
– Intake Pump Pressure—Calculated hydraulic grade line at the intake of the
pump.
– Discharge Pump Pressure—Calculated hydraulic grade line at the down-
stream end of the pump.
6.2.7 Pump Definition Manager
The Pump Definition Manager dialog box consists of a pump definition list pane and
six control buttons. The pane lists all of the pump definitions contained within the
currently active scenario. To the right of this section are the following buttons:
• Add—This button creates a new pump definition.

• Edit—This button opens the pump definition editor for the currently highlighted
pump definition.

• Duplicate—This button creates a copy of the currently highlighted pump defini-

tion.
• Delete—This button removes the currently highlighted pump definition. The
delete button is only available when the Pump Definition Manager is accessed
from the Analysis/Pump Definitions menu command.
• Rename—This button allows you to rename the currently highlighted pump defi-
nition.
• Import—This button allows you to import pump definitions from a specially
formatted text file. (See “Importing Pump Definitions” on page 6-295)
6.2.8 Pump Definition Editor
The Definition Editor section is divided into the following tabs:
• Head—This tab consists of input data fields that allow you to define the pump
head curve. The specific fields vary depending on which type of pump is selected
in the Head Definition field. The following fields may be available depending on
the head definition type:
– Head Definition—Select one of the six available types of pump curves.
– Pump Power—This field is only available when the Constant Power Head
Definition type is selected. This value represents the water horsepower, or
horsepower that is actually transferred from the pump to the water. Depending
on the pump’s efficiency, the actual power consumed (brake horsepower) may
vary.
– Shutoff—Point at which the pump will have zero discharge. It is typically the
maximum head point on a pump curve.
– Design—Point at which the pump was originally intended to operate. It is
typically the best efficiency point (BEP) of the pump. At discharges above or
below this point, the pump is not operating under optimum conditions.
– Max Operating—Highest discharge for which the pump is actually intended
to run. At discharges above this point, the pump may behave unpredictably, or
its performance may decline rapidly.
– Max Extended—Absolute maximum discharge at which the pump can
operate, adding zero head to the system. This value may be computed by the
program, or entered as a custom extended point.

Note: In previous versions of WaterCAD, the Pump element editor

would not close if there was invalid input data present in the
head definition. This validation has been removed, so it is now
possible to enter invalid data in this dialog box. It is a good idea
to review your input data carefully.
• Efficiency—This tab allows you to specify the Efficiency Type for the pump that
is being edited. The following choices are available:
Note: Avoid using the Constant Efficiency efficiency type whenever

possible. This efficiency type is much less accurate than the
other types because of the lack of a realistic efficiency curve.
– Constant Efficiency—This efficiency type maintains the efficiency deter-

mined by the input value regardless of changes in discharge. When the
Constant Efficiency type is selected, the input field is as follows:
- Pump Efficiency—The Pump Efficiency value is representative of the
ability of the pump to transfer the mechanical energy generated by the
motor to Water Power.
– Best Efficiency Point—This efficiency type generates a parabolic efficiency

curve using the input value as the best efficiency point. When the Best Effi-
ciency Point type is selected, the input fields are as follows:
- BEP Flow—The flow delivered when the pump is operating at its Best
Efficiency point.
- BEP Efficiency—The efficiency of the pump when it is operating at its
Best Efficiency Point.
– Multiple Efficiency Points—This efficiency type generates an efficiency
curve based upon two or more user-defined efficiency points. These points are
linearly interpolated to form the curve. When the Multiple Efficiency Points
type is selected, the input field is as follows:
- Efficiency Points Table—This table allows you to enter the pump’s effi-
ciency at various discharge rates.
• Motor—This tab allows you to define the pump’s motor efficiency. The tab
contains the following input fields:
– Motor Efficiency—The Motor Efficiency value is representative of the
ability of the motor to transform electrical energy to rotary mechanical energy.

– Variable Speed Drive?—This check box allows you to specify whether or

not the pump is a Variable Speed Pump. Toggling this check box On allows
you to input points on the Speed Efficiency table
– Speed/Efficiency Table—This table allows you to enter speed/efficiency
points for variable speed pumps. This table is activated by toggling the “Vari-
able Speed Drive” check box On.
• Notes—The Notes tab allows the input of text that will be associated with the
highlighted pump definition.
6.2.9 Importing Pump Definitions
You can import pump definitions from a formatted tab-delimited text file. The
accepted format must include at a minimum Head Definition information. The
optional input data include Power, Efficiency, Motor, VSD (Variable Speed Drive),
and Pumps. These are separated into sections in the text file by entering the data under
the following headings:
• [Head]—Enter the pump curve points under this heading. The head definition
type is determined by The number of pump curve points that are included for the
pump. So to import a Design Point pump definition, only add a single pump curve
point; to import a Standard 3-point pump definition, add three pump curve points;
and to import a Custom Extended pump definition, add four pump curve points.
The format for pump curve points under the [Head] heading is as follows:
PumpDefinitionName <press Tab key> Discharge <press Tab key> Head
• [Power]—Enter the pump power rating for Constant Power pump definitions
under this heading. If you are not importing any Constant Power pump defini-
tions, omit this heading completely.
The format for pump power ratings under the [Power] heading is as follows:
PumpDefinitionName <press Tab key> PumpPower
• [Efficiency]—Enter the efficiency rating for pump definitions under this heading.
The Efficiency type is determined by the number of efficiency points assigned to a
pump definition. So to import a Best Efficiency Point type, only add a single effi-
ciency point; to import a Multiple Efficiency Point type, add multiple efficiency
points. Note that by not specifying an efficiency rating, the default value of one-
hundred percent efficiency will be used.
• [Motor]—Enter the motor efficiency under this heading.
The format for Motor Efficiency under the [Motor] heading is as follows:
PumpDefinitionName <press Tab key> MotorEfficiency

• [VSD]—Enter the variable speed drive speed-efficiency points under this

heading. If you are not importing any variable speed drive pump definitions, omit
this heading completely.
The format for speed-efficiency points under the [VSD] heading is as follows:
PumpDefinitionName <press Tab key> Speed <press Tab key> Efficiency
• [Pumps]—Under this heading, you can assign pump definitions to the pumps in
your model.
The format to assign pumps under the [Pumps] heading is as follows:
PumpLabel <press Tab key> PumpDefinitionName
To see an example of a correctly formatted text file for pump definitions, see the
Lesson7.txt file in your Haestad/WaterGEMS/Lesson directory.
6.2.10 Valve General Tab
The General tab for valves is organized into the following sections:
• General—General information about the valve. For more information, see

“General Section” on page 6-297.
• Valve Characteristics—Diameter and minor loss coefficient of the valve. For
more information, see “Valve Characteristics Section” on page 6-297.
• Initial Setting—Behavior of the valve at the start of the analysis. For more infor-
mation, see “Initial Setting Section” on page 6-298.
• Pipes—Direction in which the valve is controlling the flow. You can reverse that
direction by clicking the Reverse button. For more information, see “Pipes
Section” on page 6-299
• Calculated Hydraulics—Calculated hydraulic data upstream, downstream, and
through the valve. For more information, see “Calculated Hydraulics Section” on
page 6-299.
• Water Quality—Result of the water quality computations at the valve reported
• Head-Discharge Points—This section is only displayed for General Purpose
Valves. GPVs require at least two unique points to be entered in this table. For
more information, see “Head-Discharge Points Section” on page 6-299.
Valve General tab includes:
• “General Section” on page 6-297

• “Valve Characteristics Section” on page 6-297

• “Initial Setting Section” on page 6-298

• “Pipes Section” on page 6-299
• “Calculated Hydraulics Section” on page 6-299
• “Head-Discharge Points Section” on page 6-299
General Section
This section allows you to enter general information about the valve such as:
• Label—Unique alphanumeric name referencing the valve in reports, error

messages, and tables.
• X (Easting)—The location of the valve may be represented by an X-value or an
• Y (Northing)—The location of the valve may be represented by a Y-value or a
• Elevation—Elevation of the valve.
Valve Characteristics Section
Note: Minor loss data is not required for Throttle Control Valves (TCVs)
because the minor losses are already accounted for by the
valve’s primary purpose.
To change the type of a valve, use the element morphing feature

of WaterCAD. For more information, see “Morphing Elements” on
page 5-258.
The Valve Characteristics section defines the following parameters:
• Diameter—Inside diameter of the valve. Used to calculate the velocity through

the valve and a corresponding minor loss when a minor loss coefficient is entered.
• Minor Loss Coefficient—Coefficient used to model any minor loss associated
with the valve for the specified valve diameter when the valve is fully open. Click
the ellipsis (…) button to define composite minor losses (for more information,
see “Minor Loss Elements” on page 6-284). The valve is fully open in the
following two cases:
– The valve status is set to Inactive.
– The valve status is set to Active, and the hydraulic conditions are such that the
valve is fully open.

Initial Setting Section

The initial conditions describe the valve’s behavior at the start of the analysis. These
conditions include:
• Valve Status—A valve can have several different status conditions:

– Active (throttling, opening, or closing depending on system pressures and
flows)
– Closed (no flow under any conditions)
– Inactive (wide open, with no regulation)
• Settings/Hydraulic Grade/Pressure—For Pressure Reducing, Pressure

Sustaining and Pressure Breaker Valves, specify either the initial hydraulic grade
or the pressure setting associated with the valve.
Note: You only need to specify either the pressure setting or the
hydraulic grade setting. The other will be automatically
calculated based on the valve’s elevation.
In Steady-State Analysis mode (in WaterCAD), the Initial Status is

used as the permanent status. However, it can be overruled by
the presence of controls, if the Use Controls in Steady-State
Analysis check box in the Calculation Options dialog box is
checked. The Calculation Options dialog box (see “Calculation
Options” on page 9-391) is accessed by clicking the GO button in
the main view to display the Calculation tab of the Scenario
Editor and then clicking the Options button.
• Discharge—For Flow Control Valves, specify the initial discharge to maintain

through the valve.
• Headloss Coefficient—For Throttle Control Valves, specify the initial minor
losses associated with the valve.

Pipes Section
Note: The valve direction, along with the flow direction, affects the
behavior of the valve. For more information, see “Valve Editor” on
page 6-281.
You can switch the Upstream and Downstream Pipes by clicking

the Reverse button.
This section allows you to specify the Upstream Pipe and Downstream Pipe.
Calculated Hydraulics Section
Note: Because a valve is modeled internally as two junction nodes

connected by a controlled link, the hydraulic grades are
referring to the conditions at the two hidden nodes, upstream
and downstream. These conditions also represent the grade at
the adjacent end of each connecting pipe.
This section reports the following calculated hydraulic parameters for a valve:
• Discharge—Calculated flow rate passing through the valve.

• Velocity—Calculated velocity inside the valve, based on the valve diameter.
• Headloss—Calculated headloss through the valve.
• From HGL (or Pressure)—Calculated hydraulic grade or pressure immediately
upstream of the valve.
• To HGL (or Pressure)—Calculated hydraulic grade or pressure immediately
downstream of the valve.
Head-Discharge Points Section

• Headloss—Enter the desired headloss for the corresponding Discharge.
• Discharge—Enter the Discharge rate at which the corresponding headloss is
desired.
• Insert—Click to insert a new Head-Discharge point.
• Delete—Delete an existing Head-Discharge point.

6.2.11 Load
You can define a hydraulic load consisting of multiple demands and inflows for each
junction and tank node in the network. Each individual hydraulic demand or inflow
consists of a baseline flow rate and a pattern that is applied when performing an
Extended Period Simulation (EPS). This software provides a table for editing
hydraulic loads. Each row represents an individual hydraulic demand or inflow.
• Type—Choose the type of load. Demand represents a withdrawal of liquid from

the network system (if the value entered is negative, then the liquid is entering
network). Inflow represents the addition of liquid to the system (negative inflow
represents flow leaving the system).
• Base Flow—Enter the baseline flow rate for the load. This number will always be
positive. If you need to define an inflow, change the load type. The units are
volume per unit time (typically l/s or gpm).
• Pattern—Choose the EPS pattern that will apply to this load. Each load in the
table can have a different EPS pattern. The multipliers defined in the pattern will
be applied against the baseline load.
Note: The EPS Pattern is not considered during Steady State

Simulations (the demand baseline load will be used instead).
It is not necessary to use negative values for the baseline flow

rate to simulate water entering the network. WaterCAD provides
you with the option of explicitly defining an inflow. Inflows are
essentially negative demands.
The Demand dialog box has the following command buttons:
• Insert—Insert a row in the table.

• Duplicate—Create a new row in the table with the same values as the selected
row.
• Delete—Delete the selected row of the table. The selected demand or inflow is
removed from the list.
• Graph—Generate a graph of the total demand over time at this junction.
The Demand tab includes:
• “Importing Demands” on page 6-301

• “Demand Import Dialog Box” on page 6-302

6.2.12 Importing Demands
WaterCAD now lets you import simple or composite demands from an ASCII tab-
delimited text file. Click Analysis > Alternatives, select Demand, and click Add or
Edit to import demands.
Import Demands can be imported to junction and tank elements by accessing the
Demand Alternative and clicking the Import button. Junction and Tank demands can
be imported from the same file. The file to be imported must be in the following
format:
Element <Tab> Label <Tab> Demand Pattern 1 <Tab> Demand Pattern 2, etc.
Press the Tab key once between each column. An unlimited number of demands can
be imported from a single text file by adding additional columns following the same
format. The first row of the text file is used to associate the demand values with
demand patterns. The first column of the first row is ignored. The patterns to be asso-
ciated with the demand values are entered in the subsequent columns. If this row refer-
ences a pattern that is not available in the current project, a new pattern will be created
with the value entered in this column as its label. This pattern will have a demand
multiplier of one for every time step by default.
After the file to be imported is chosen, the Demand Import dialog box is opened (for
more information, see “Demand Import Dialog Box” on page 6-302). This dialog box
allows you to choose the unit type for the demand values in the file to be imported.

Note: Nodes that are present in the model but are not included in the
file being imported will not be modified. Existing demands are
removed without warning from any node that is present in the
file being imported. Each node must have a value entered for
every pattern column in the file. If no demand is associated with
a specific pattern, enter zero as the demand for that pattern.
EXAMPLE: DEMANDS
In this example, J-1 will have a composite demand of 15 and will use the patterns
Residential and Commercial. J-7 will have a demand of 20 and will use the pattern
Commercial. J-8 will have a demand of 15 and use pattern Residential.
Label Residential Commercial
J-1 5 10
J-2 6 11
J-3 7 12
J-4 8 13
J-5 9 14
J-6 10 15
J-7 0 20
J-8 15 0
Demand Import Dialog Box

The dialog box contains a drop-down list, which allows you to specify the unit type to
be associated with the demand values in the file to be imported. This dialog box is
automatically opened after selecting the text file to import.
6.2.13 Section Tab
Tank section data includes the information necessary to describe the storage character-
istics of the tank. They have been factored into the following logical groups:
• Section—The type of cross-section and the basic storage parameters. For more
information, see “Tank Section” on page 6-303.

• Operating Range—The minimum, initial, and maximum operating elevations.

For more information, see “Operating Range Section” on page 6-303.
• Cross Section—Parameters describing the cross-sectional geometry. For more
information, see “Cross Section” on page 6-304.
The Section tab includes:
• “Tank Section” on page 6-303

• “Operating Range Section” on page 6-303
• “Cross Section” on page 6-304
Tank Section
The general information for tank section consists of the following:
• Section—Choose the type of cross section (see “Cross Section” on page 6-304)
for this storage tank. There are two types of cross sections to choose from:
Constant Area and Variable Area.
• Inactive Volume—Enter the inactive volume for this storage tank. This data is
used when performing water quality analysis.
• Total Active Volume—If this storage tank is a Constant Area Tank, the total
active volume will be computed from the other tank data and this field will not be
editable. If this is a Variable Area Tank, then enter the total storage volume for the
tank.
Operating Range Section

This section allows you to set the absolute limits for the water levels in the tank.
Elevations are relative to the same datum as the rest of your system, while levels refer
to heights of water above the tank’s base elevation. The operating range fields prompt
you for the following values:
• Elevations/Levels—Select whether you want to enter the data in terms of abso-

lute elevation, typically based on the sea level, or in terms of levels, which are
relative to an arbitrary base elevation of the tank you specify.
• Maximum—Highest allowable water surface elevation or level. If the tank fills
above this point, it will be automatically shut off from the system.
• Initial—Value used as the water surface elevation or level when performing
steady-state calculations, or as the beginning condition when performing an

• Minimum—Lowest allowable water surface elevation or level. If the tank drains

below this point, it will be automatically shut off from the system.
• Base Elevation—Elevation of the storage tank base used as a reference when
entering water surface elevations in the tank in terms of levels.
Cross Section
There are two basic types of storage tanks:
• “Constant Area” on page 6-304

• “Variable Area” on page 6-304
Constant Area
The cross sectional geometry of the tank is constant between the minimum and
maximum operating elevations. Two parameters are needed to fully describe a
constant area tank section:
• Cross Section—Choose whether the cross section is circular or non-circular.

• Average Area/Diameter—Enter the average area of the non-circular cross-
section, or the diameter of the circular cross-section.
Variable Area
Note: The storage characteristics of the tank can be plotted. Choose

Tank Curve from the Report Button at the bottom of the Tank
dialog box.
The cross-sectional geometry varies between the minimum and maximum operating
elevations.
• Depth/Volume Ratio Table—Enter a series of points describing the storage char-

acteristics of the tank. For example, at 0.1 the total depth (depth ratio = 0.1) the
tank stores 0.028, the total active volume (volume ratio = 0.028). At 0.2, the total
depth that tank stores 0. 014, the total active volume (0.2, 0.014), etc.

6.2.14 Controls Tab
Note: Pipes with check valves cannot have controls.
The Controls dialog box is separated into two windows—one lists the Simple
Controls, the other lists the Rule-Based, or Logical Controls. Controls allow you to
configure the hydraulic model to change the status or settings of a pump, valve, or
pipe at a specific time or when specific junction pressures or tank water levels occur in
the network. Rule-Based Controls can only be set in the Logical Control Manager,
which is accessed by clicking Analysis…Logical Controls. From the Controls tab,
the following Simple Control options are available:
• To add a simple control—Click the Add button. This will open the Control
dialog box (see “Simple Control Dialog Box” on page 6-305)where the specifics
of the control can be edited.
• To edit an existing simple control—Select the description of the control you
wish to edit and click the Edit button.
• To duplicate an existing simple control—Select the description of the control
you wish to duplicate and click the Duplicate button.
• To delete an existing simple control—Select the description of the control you
wish to delete and click the Delete button.
Controls tab includes:
• “Simple Control Dialog Box” on page 6-305

• “Simple Control Preview” on page 6-306
• “Simple Control Type” on page 6-306
• “Control Condition” on page 6-306
• “Node Condition” on page 6-306
• “Time Condition” on page 6-307
Simple Control Dialog Box

Several types of information are required to define a simple control for a pressure
pipe, pump, or valve. This data is grouped into the following sections:
• Preview—Textual description of the control being edited. For more information,

see “Simple Control Preview” on page 6-306.

• Control—Specify the type of control, either Status or Setting. For more informa-
tion, see “Simple Control Type” on page 6-306.
• Control Condition—Specify whether the control is based on a time condition or
a node condition, and specify the control setting. For more information, see
“Control Condition” on page 6-306.
Simple Control Preview

The control preview provides a textual description of the control being edited. The
control preview is continuously updated while you edit a control, providing constant
feedback as to the state of your control.
Simple Control Type
Note: Only status controls are available for pipes. Setting controls are
not appropriate. When pumps are turned on by a control, their
relative speed factor is set to 1.00.
Relative Speed Pump patterns take precedence over any

controls (Simple or Logical) that are associated with the pump.
To activate a closed or inactive valve, use a setting control.

Similarly, to turn a pump on at a relative speed setting other than
1.00, use a setting control.
Simple controls support two types of controls:
• Status—Controls the Open/Closed Status (pipes), inactive/closed (valves), or On/

Off Status (pumps) status.
• Setting—Controls the relative speed factor of a pump and the parameters for a
valve.
Control Condition
A control can be triggered by a specified pressure or hydraulic grade being reached in
any tank or pressure junction located in the project.
Node Condition
A node condition dictates that the control will be triggered when the hydraulic condi-
tion of a specified tank or pressure junction is reached.
The comparison component allows the following:

• Above—Trigger the control (“Controls Tab” on page 6-305) when the junction or
tank’s hydraulic parameter is above the node condition’s hydraulic parameter.
• Below—Trigger the control when the junction or tank’s hydraulic parameter is
below the node condition’s hydraulic parameter.
You can express the conditions at the control node in terms of Pressure or Hydraulic
Grade.
Example: Closed if node J-2 below 10 psi means that the controlled pipe will close
when the pressure at junction J-2 goes below 10 psi.
Time Condition
There are two types of Time Condition: Time From Start and Clock Time. A Time
From Start condition dictates that the control will be triggered when the specified
amount of time has elapsed. A Clock Time condition will trigger the control at the
specified hour.
Examples
Closed at Time From Start 2.00 hr.—At 2.00 hours into the analysis, this link will
be closed.
Set hydraulic grade to 440 ft. at Time From Start 5.50 hr.—At 5.5 hours into the
analysis, the hydraulic grade of this pressure regulating valve will be set to 440 ft.
Open at Clock Time 12:00:00—Pipe will open when the clock reaches 12:00:00.
6.2.15 Quality Tab
The Quality tab of an element allows you to edit the input data related to water quality.
Three types of water quality analyses can be performed, as defined in the Scenario
Editor dialog box (see “Scenario Wizard—Step 3” on page 8-370) accessed by
clicking the GO button in the main WaterCAD window. These are Water Age,
Constituent Concentration and Source Tracing. The basic parts of an element’s water
quality input data vary depending on the element type. Not all of the following input
data sections are available for all elements:
• Water Quality—Displays the active water quality alternative for the current
scenario, as well as initial water quality conditions or component reaction rates,
depending on the type of water quality analysis being performed. For more infor-
mation, see “Water Quality Section” on page 6-309.
• Constituent Source—For nodes only. This section of the dialog box contains
three data fields which are only active when the Constituent Source check box is
checked (for more information, see “Constituent Source Section” on page 6-310):

– Constituent Source—This menu allows you to select the Constituent Source

Type. The available types are as follows:
- Concentration—A Concentration Constituent Source fixes the concen-
tration of any external inflow entering the network at a node, such as flow
from a reservoir or from a negative demand placed at a junction.
- Flow Paced Booster—A Flow Paced Booster Constituent Source adds a
fixed concentration to the flow resulting from the mixing of all inflow to
the node from other points in the network.
- Setpoint Booster—A Setpoint Booster Constituent Source fixes the
concentration of any flow leaving the source node, as long as the concen-
tration resulting from the inflow to the node is below the set point.
- Mass Booster—A Mass Booster Constituent Source adds a fixed mass
flow to the flow entering the node from other points in the network.
– Baseline Concentration—This data field allows you to specify the corre-
sponding constituent concentration at this node over time.
– Pattern—The menu allows you to apply a constituent pattern to the Constit-
uent Source. The Ellipsis (…) button opens the Pattern Manager dialog box
(for more information, see “Pattern Manager” on page 9-394).
Note: A constituent source may be a tank, reservoir, or junction (but

not a pump or valve).
The Water Quality data is only used when performing a Water

Quality analysis, which can only be done in Extended Period
Simulation mode.
When performing a Constituent or Trace Analysis, the

constituent and source trace node are defined in the Constituent
and Age Alternative Editor respectively.
• Tank Mixing Model—For Tanks only. This section allows you to specify the
Tank Mixing Model that will be used by the current tank. The mixing model is
specified on a tank-by-tank basis, and Completely Mixed is the default model.
The following mixing models are available:
– Two Compartment—Under this mixing model, available storage is divided
into two completely mixed compartments. Inflow and outflow is assumed to
take place in the first compartment. The second compartment receives over-
flow from the first, and this overflow is completely mixed. When this mixing
model is selected, the Two Compartment section appears.
– Completely Mixed—The default mixing model. Under this model, all inflow
and outflow is assumed to have been completely mixed.

– FIFO—First In/First Out Plug Flow model. This mixing model assumes that
no water mixing occurs during its residence time in the tank. Water parcels
move through the tank in a segregated fashion where the first parcel to enter is
the first parcel to leave.
– LIFO—Last In/First Out Plug Flow model. This mixing model assumes that
no water mixing occurs during its residence time in the tank. As in the FIFO
mixing model, water parcels are segregated, however in the LIFO mixing
model, the parcels stack up on top of each other, and the last parcel to enter is
the first to leave.
• Two Compartment—For Tanks using the Two Compartment mixing model only.
This section contains two fields, which describe the division of total tank volume
between the two compartments. The field labeled Compartment 1 allows you to
enter the percentage of total tank volume that the first compartment occupies. The
percentage for Compartment 2 is then initialized for you.
The Quality tab includes:
• “Water Quality Section” on page 6-309

• “Constituent Source Section” on page 6-310
• “Invert Elevations Section” on page 6-311
Water Quality Section

The general water quality information consists of several parameters, some of which
vary depending on the type of water quality analysis (Water Age, Constituent Concen-
tration or Source Tracing):
• Alternative—Read-only field showing which water quality alternative is active

for the current scenario.
• Initial Age, Constituent, or Trace—Specify the initial water age, constituent

concentration, or source trace at the current location, depending on which type of
water quality analysis is currently selected in the Scenario Editor dialog box (see
“Scenario Wizard—Step 3” on page 8-370). This does not apply to pipes.

Note: For age and trace analyses, pipe velocity and flow rate are the
only related data needed for computations. Therefore, these
reaction coefficient fields are grayed out or not displayed. For
constituent analyses, however, the bulk and pipe reaction
coefficients are needed to define the reactions that occur within
the pipes (in the water and between the water and pipe wall) and
in the tanks.
The bulk and wall reaction coefficient fields are initialized with
the values defined in the constituent library, but may also be
edited individually. In order to select the constituent being
modeled, and its corresponding parameters, or revert to default
values, use the Constituent Alternative Editor (for more
information, see “Constituent Alternative” on page 8-358).
When performing Constituent analysis, reaction coefficients are needed, as defined

below:
• Bulk Reaction Coefficient—Coefficient defining how rapidly a constituent

grows or decays over time. This applies to Tank and Pipes only.
• Wall Reaction Coefficient—Coefficient defining the rate at which a substance
reacts with the wall of a pipe.
Constituent Source Section

Any node element (i.e., tank, reservoir, or junction) can serve as a source for a chem-
ical constituent.
To turn a node into a constituent source:
• Click the check box in the Constituent Source group title.

• Enter values for:
– Constituent Source—This menu allows you to select the Constituent Source
Type. The available types are as follows:
- Concentration—A Concentration Constituent Source fixes the concen-
tration of any external inflow entering the network at a node, such as flow
from a reservoir or from a negative demand placed at a junction.
- Flow Paced Booster—A Flow Paced Booster Constituent Source adds a
fixed concentration to the flow resulting from the mixing of all inflow to
the node from other points in the network.
- Setpoint Booster—A Setpoint Booster Constituent Source fixes the
concentration of any flow leaving the source node, as long as the concen-
tration resulting from the inflow to the node is below the set point.
- Mass Booster—A Mass Booster Constituent Source adds a fixed mass
flow to the flow entering the node from other points in the network.

– Constituent Baseline Load—Concentration of the constituent to be modeled,

used in conjunction with the constituent pattern to represent the concentration
over time.
• Constituent Pattern—EPS Pattern that will apply to this load. The multipliers
defined in the pattern will be applied against the constituent baseline load.
Note: Any water leaving a constituent source has a concentration in

accordance with the baseline concentration and the chosen
pattern.
The behavior of the source during the course of a water quality calculation varies
depending on the type of element, as follows:
• Junction—The concentration is the source concentration and varies with time

according to the constituent pattern.
• Tank—If a tank is tagged as a source, only the discharge from that tank will have
a source concentration that varies with time according to the source pattern. The
internal concentration of the tank will vary over time according to inflowing
concentrations and hydraulic demands.
• Reservoir—Reservoirs can be considered constant concentration sources whose
initial concentration does not vary with time. If a reservoir is selected as the
source the concentration will vary according to the source type and the selected
source pattern.
Invert Elevations Section
Note: Elevations are defined at the connecting node structure.
The From Node and To Node Invert Elevations of the pressure pipe can be viewed
here.
6.2.16 Fire Flow Tab
Note: Edit the following data exclusively in the Fire Flow Alternative
Editor: whether a fire flow analysis is to be performed at a node,
whether the needed fire flow is to replace or be added to current
demands, whether a minimum pressure is required for the entire
system, and default fire flow input values.
Results of fire flow calculations, which are obtained from

calculations performed separately for an automatic batch run,
are only reported in the Fire Flow tab and in the Fire Flow
Tabular Report (accessed from Report > Tables > Fire Flow

Report or the FlexTable icon). Results reported in the other

Element Editor tabs do not take into account any fire flow,
unless you explicitly entered this fire flow as a demand at a
specific junction.
The Fire Flow tab of the junction editor offers the ability to adjust an individual junc-
tion’s required fire flows and pressures. If these values are not specifically entered for
a given junction, the values will be based on the default fire flow data as entered in the
Fire Flow Alternative Editor (see “Fire Flow Alternative” on page 8-360), accessed by
selecting the Analysis > Alternatives menu item, and clicking the Edit button on the
Fire Flow tab. The Fire Flow Tab is divided into the following sections:
• Fire Flow Input—Minimum required fire flow at the selected junction, and
minimum pressures to be maintained. For more information, see “Fire Flow Input
• Fire Flow Calculation Results—After performing a fire flow analysis, results are
available for the junction node assuming it is part of the fire flow selection set. For
more information, see “Fire Flow Calculation Results Section” on page 6-313.
The Fire Flow tab includes:
• “Fire Flow Input Section” on page 6-312

• “Fire Flow Calculation Results Section” on page 6-313
Fire Flow Input Section

The fire flow input data for a junction are as follows:
• Needed Fire Flow—The flow rate required at the junction to meet fire flow
demands. This value will be added to or replace the junction’s baseline demand,
depending on the default setting for applying fire flows as specified in the Fire
Flow Alternative dialog box (for more information, see “Fire Flow Alternative”
on page 8-360).
• Fire Flow Upper Limit—This input defines the maximum allowable fire flow
that a junction can provide and the maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at
any single withdrawal location. This is a user-specified practical limit that will
prevent the program from computing unrealistically high fire flows at locations
such as primary system mains, which have a large diameter and high service pres-
sures. Remember that a system’s ability to deliver fire flows is ultimately limited
by the size of the hydrant opening and service line, as well as the number of
hydrants available to combat a fire at a specific location.
• Residual Pressure—Minimum residual pressure to occur at the junction node.
The program determines the amount of fire flow available such that the residual
pressure at the junction node does not fall below this target pressure.

• Minimum Zone Pressure—Minimum pressure to occur at all junction nodes

within the Zone you are testing. The model determines the available fire flow such
that the minimum zone pressures do not fall below this target pressure. Each junc-
tion has a zone associated with it, which can be located in the junction’s input
data. If you do not want a junction node to be analyzed as part of another junction
node’s fire flow analysis, move it to another Zone.
• Minimum System Pressure—Minimum pressure allowed at any junction in the
entire system as a result of the fire flow withdrawal. If a node’s pressure anywhere
in the system falls below this constraint while withdrawing fire flow, fire flow will
not be satisfied. A fire flow analysis may be configured to ignore this constraint.
Fire Flow Calculation Results Section

After performing a fire flow analysis, the following calculation results are available
for each junction node in the fire flow selection set:
• Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints—Whether the selected junction node meets the
fire flow constraints.
• Available Fire Flow—Amount of flow available for fire protection while main-
taining all fire flow pressure constraints.
• Calculated Residual Pressure—Calculated pressure at the junction node during
the fire flow withdrawal.
• Calculated Minimum Zone Pressure—Minimum calculated pressure of all
junctions in the same zone as this junction.
• Minimum Zone Junction—Label of the junction corresponding to the minimum
zone pressure.
• Calculated Minimum System Pressure—Minimum calculated pressure of all
junctions in the system.
• Minimum System Junction—Label of the junction corresponding to the
minimum system pressure.
6.2.17 Capital Cost Tab
On this tab, you can specify whether or not the element is to be included in the capital
cost analysis. If the element is selected to appear in the cost analysis then you can
enter the costs associated with the element. This tab is comprised of the following
components:
• Include in Cost Calculation?—A check box that allows you to control whether
or not this element will be included in the cost analysis. If this box is checked, the
element will be included in the cost calculation. For more information, see
“Include In Cost Calculation?” on page 6-314.

• Construction Costs—Contains a table for an element for entering cost items that
can be expressed in terms of a quantity, unit, and unit cost. For more information,
see “Construction Costs” on page 6-315.
• Non-Constructions Costs—Contains a table for entering costs related to the
elements that need to be expressed either as a lump sum or as a percentage of the
construction costs. For more information, see “Non-Construction Costs” on
page 6-314.
The Capital Cost tab includes:
• “Include In Cost Calculation?” on page 6-314

• “Non-Construction Costs” on page 6-314
• “Construction Costs” on page 6-315
• “Construction Costs Table” on page 6-315
• “Advanced Construction Cost Options” on page 6-316
Include In Cost Calculation?

This check box allows you to control whether or not this element will be included in
the cost calculation. If this box is checked, the element will be included in the cost
calculation. If you are modeling a new subdivision, most of the elements in your
model will probably be included in the cost calculation. However, if you are adding
onto an existing system, you may only calculate the cost for a small portion of the total
elements in your system.
The value of this field can be varied by alternative. This can be useful if you want to
compute the costs for different portions of your system separately. For instance, if you
have several phases of construction that you want to cost separately, you could create
one cost alternative that only includes elements in phase one, and another alternative
that only includes elements in phase two. After you perform your cost analysis, you
can then perform cost reports detailing each phase of construction.
Non-Construction Costs
The Non-Construction Costs section of the Capital Cost tab contains a table that
allows you to enter an unlimited number of non-construction cost items for each
element. A non-construction cost item can be specified either as a lump sum value or
as a percentage of the total construction costs for the element. Each non-construction
cost contains the following four components.
• Label—A unique name that identifies the non-construction cost item. The labels
must be different for all non-construction cost items in a table.
• Factor—A numeric value that is used in conjunction with the operation to
compute the cost for a non-construction cost item.

• Operation—The operation that will be applied against the factor to compute the
total cost for the non-construction cost item. The two possible values for this field
are lump sum or percentage of the total construction costs.
• Cost—The cost of the non-construction cost item.
Construction Costs
The Construction Costs section of the Capital Cost tab consists of the following two
components:
• Construction Costs Table—This table allows you to specify an unlimited

number of construction costs for each element. For more information, see
“Construction Costs Table” on page 6-315.
• Advanced Construction Costs Options—This button is only available for
elements such as pipes, inlets, gravity junctions, and manholes that support Unit
Cost Functions. Clicking this button accesses advanced options for the selected
construction cost item. For more information, see “Advanced Construction Cost
Options” on page 6-316.
Construction Costs Table

The construction costs table allows you to specify an unlimited number of construc-
tion cost items for each element. Each construction cost item is composed of four
basic characteristics, which are listed below.
• Label—This is a string that identifies the construction cost item. It must be

unique for every construction cost in the table.
• Quantity—This field holds a numeric value that will be multiplied by the unit
cost to compute the total cost for the construction cost item.
• Unit—The value in this field signifies the unit of the value held in the quantity
field. For pipes, this field can be either a length unit or each. For nodal elements
this field is a user-defined string.
• Unit Cost—This is the cost per unit specified in the unit column. For instance, for
a pipe it could be cost per length. This value is multiplied by the quantity to calcu-
late the total cost for the construction cost item. If a Unit Cost Function is
assigned to a construction cost item then this field will not be editable as the value
will be computed based on the Unit Cost Function.
• Total Cost—This is calculated by multiplying the unit cost by the quantity. The
value in this field is always calculated by the program.

Advanced Construction Cost Options

Construction cost items for pipes and gravity structures (inlets, manholes, and junc-
tion chambers) have a set of advanced options. Under these advanced options, you can
specify a Unit Cost Function to associate with a construction cost item. A Unit Cost
Function describes the relationship between the unit cost for a construction cost item
and the value of an attribute of the element. For instance, the unit cost for a pipe may
be a function of the diameter. If you assign a Unit Cost Function to a construction cost
item then the unit cost for that item is automatically updated as the physical character-
istics of the element change.
For pipes there is an additional advanced option Set Quantity Equal to Pipe Length,
which allows you to set the quantity field for a construction cost item equal to the
length of the pipe.
6.2.18 User Data Tab
The User Data tab allows you to view and edit the customizable user data for each
element. This tab is composed of two sections:
• User Data—Any Date/Time, Number, Text, and Yes/No data defined you. For
more information, see “User Data Section” on page 6-317.
• User Memos—Any memo data fields defined by you. For more information, see
“User Memos Section” on page 6-317.
Note: Default user-defined attributes are provided. These can easily be

deleted or modified.
User Data Extensions are a powerful way to add your own data
to the project. This data will not affect the hydraulic calculations
in any way, but can be used as any other data for operations
such as sorting, annotating, reporting, and importing/exporting.
For information on how to add new fields or edit an existing field format, see “User
Data Extension Dialog Box” on page 6-323.
The User Data tab includes:
• “User Data Section” on page 6-317

• “User Memos Section” on page 6-317

User Data Section

This section contains a list of Date/Time, Number, Text, and Yes/No user data fields,
displayed as single line fields. User data fields are defined in the User Data Extension
dialog box (for more information, see “User Data Extension Dialog Box” on page 6-
323).
User Memos Section

This section contains a list of any memo fields displayed as multiple line scrolling text
panes. User memos are defined in the User Data Extension dialog box (for more infor-
mation, see “User Data Extension Dialog Box” on page 6-323).
6.2.19 Messages Tab
Note: Messages, descriptions, and notes will be printed in any element

report.
All Element Editors have a Messages tab, which contains three parts:
• Message List—Contains information that is generated during the calculation of

the model, such as warnings, errors, and status updates.
• Description—An informative statement that you may enter about the element.
• Notes—Contains notes that you enter, and may include a description of the
element, a summary of your data sources, or any other information of interest.
6.2.20 VSP (Variable Speed Pump) Tab
The Variable Speed Pump tab is split into two sections:
• Variable Speed Pump Type—This section of the dialog box is comprised of a

check box and a menu.
• VSP Check Box—Checking this box On makes the current pump a Variable
Speed Pump and activates the VSP Type drop-down and the VSP Settings section.
• VSP Type Drop-Down—This drop-down allows you to specify the Variable
Speed Pump type. The choices include Pattern Based and Fixed Head.

• Variable Speed Pump Settings—The available input fields in this section vary
depending on the VSP type that is chosen.
• Pattern Based—When the Pattern Based VSP type is selected, this section
consists of a menu and an ellipsis (…) button. The Pump Speed Pattern drop-
down list allows you to select a previously created pattern, and the ellipsis button
opens the Pattern Manager (see “Pattern Manager” on page 9-394), which allows
you to select a previously created pattern or create a new one.
Note: Relative Speed Pump patterns take precedence over any

Use the Pattern Based VSP type when you already know the
Relative Speed Settings for the Variable Speed Pump.
• Fixed Head—When the Fixed Head VSP type is chosen, the pump will increase
or decrease its relative speed factor to maintain the Head specified at a control
node. When this VSP type is selected, this section consists of the following items:
• Control Node—The node that the VSP checks to determine whether to increase,
maintain, or decrease its relative speed factor.
Note: The algorithm may become unstable when a junction is specified

as the control node on the suction side of a pump. For best
results, tanks should be specified as the control node when
maintaining a head on the suction side.
• Target Head—The Head that the VSP will attempt to maintain for the Control
Node.
Note: The control node target head is the constant elevation of the
hydraulic grade line (HGL) that the VSP will attempt to maintain.
The target head at the control node must be within the physical
limitations of the VSP as it has been defined (pump curve and
maximum speed setting). If the target head is greater then the
maximum head the pump can generate at the demanded flow
rate the pump will automatically revert to fixed speed operation
at the maximum relative speed setting, and the target head will
not be maintained. The VSP target head for junction nodes can
be set on the VSP tab of the Pump dialog box, and for tanks on
the Section tab of the Tank dialog box by adjusting the initial
level.
• Maximum Relative Speed Factor—The highest relative speed factor that the
pump can be set at to meet the target head at the control node. If the target head
cannot be met when the pump is set at the maximum relative speed factor, the
maximum will be used.

• Ellipsis Button—Opens the Select Element dialog box.

• Select From Drawing Button—Clicking this button brings you back to the
drawing view to allow you to graphically choose the element that will be the
Control Node. While in this mode, clicking the right mouse button opens a context
menu with a Done option. Clicking this will return you to the VSP tab.
Note: VSPs can also be modeled in parallel to represent VSP pump

stations. For more information on using parallel VSPs, see
“Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series” on page A-686 and “Parallel
VSPs” on page 9-384.
6.2.21 Energy Tab
The Energy Tab is divided into the following sections:
• Pump Efficiency—Allows you to choose the pump’s efficiency type, and plot the
efficiency curve. For more information, see “Pump Efficiency Section” on page 6-
320.
• Efficiency Settings—The input requirements for this section vary depending on
the efficiency type selected in the Pump Efficiency section. For more information,
see “Efficiency Settings Section” on page 6-320.
• Daily Energy Cost Summary Section—After an Energy Cost Analysis has been
performed, this section displays a summary of the general calculated results, such
as energy usage and total daily cost. For more information, see “Daily Energy
Cost Summary Section” on page 6-321.
• Peak Demand Summary—After an Energy Cost Analysis has been performed,
this section displays the calculated results for the peak power usage and the cost
associated with this peak usage. For more information, see “Peak Demand
Summary Section” on page 6-321.
• Efficiency Summary—After an Energy Cost Analysis has been performed, this
section displays the calculated results for wire power coming into the pumps, the
power transferred to the water, and the efficiency of the transfer. For more infor-
mation, see “Efficiency Summary Section” on page 6-322.
The Energy tab includes:
• “Pump Efficiency Section” on page 6-320

• “Efficiency Settings Section” on page 6-320
• “Daily Energy Cost Summary Section” on page 6-321
• “Peak Demand Summary Section” on page 6-321
• “Efficiency Summary Section” on page 6-322

Pump Efficiency Section

This section allows you to specify the Efficiency Type for the pump that is being
edited. The following choices are available:
• Best Efficiency Point—This efficiency type generates a parabolic efficiency

curve using the input value as the best efficiency point.
• Constant Efficiency—This efficiency type maintains the efficiency determined
by the input value regardless of changes in discharge.
Note: Avoid using the Constant Efficiency efficiency type whenever

possible. This efficiency type is much less accurate than the
other types because of the lack of a realistic efficiency curve.
• Multiple Efficiency Points—This efficiency type generates an efficiency curve

based upon two or more user-defined efficiency points. These points are linearly
interpolated to form the curve.
When using the Best Efficiency Point or Multiple Efficiency Points efficiency types,
the Plot button in this section is activated. Clicking this button graphs the efficiency
curve in the Plot window (for more information, see “Plot Window” on page 13-559).
Efficiency Settings Section

The available input fields in this section change depending on which Efficiency Type
is selected.
• When the Best Efficiency Point type is selected, the input fields are as follows:
– BEP Efficiency—The efficiency of the pump when it is operating at its Best
Efficiency Point.
– BEP Flow—The flow delivered when the pump is operating at its Best Effi-
ciency point.
• When the Constant Efficiency type is selected, the input fields are as follows:
– Pump Efficiency—The Pump Efficiency value is representative of the ability
of the pump to transfer the mechanical energy generated by the motor to
Water Power.
• When the Multiple Efficiency Points type is selected, the input fields are as
follows:


– Efficiency Points Table—This table allows you to enter the pump’s effi-
ciency at various discharge rates.
Daily Energy Cost Summary Section
Note: The Energy Cost Results displayed here are not automatically
updated to reflect any input data modifications when a new
Extended Period Simulation is calculated. The Energy Cost
Analysis must be recalculated in the Energy Cost Manager to
update the results.
This section displays the following calculated results after performing an Energy Cost
Analysis:
• Utilization—Percentage of total time during the EPS that the pump was On.
• Daily Energy Usage—Amount of energy used during a 24-hour period.
• Daily Energy Use Cost—The cost of the energy used during a 24-hour period,
determined by the calculated energy usage and the energy pricing pattern.
• Daily Peak Power Cost—The cost associated with the Peak Demand Charge, if
applicable.
• Total Daily Cost—The total cost accumulated during a 24-hour period. This
value is the total of the Daily Energy Use Cost and the Daily Peak Demand Cost
(if a peak demand charge has been applied).
Peak Demand Summary Section
update the results.
This section displays the following calculated results after performing an Energy Cost
Analysis:
• Peak Power—Displays the peak energy usage, as calculated during the extended
period simulation. This result is displayed even if Peak Demand Charges are not
applied.
• Peak Power Cost—Displays the energy cost as calculated during the extended
period simulation. If no Peak Demand Charge has been applied to the associated
Energy Price Definition, this field will display as zero.

Prototypes
Efficiency Summary Section
update the results.
• Water Power—The amount of energy transferred to the water by the pump.

• Wire to Water Efficiency—The ratio of the Water Power to the Wire Power.
• Wire Power—The amount of energy delivered to the pump motor.
6.3 Prototypes
Note: Changes to the prototypes are not retroactive and will not affect
any elements created prior to the change.
If a section of your system has distinctly different

characteristics than the rest of the system, adjust your
prototypes before laying out that section. This will save time
when you edit the properties later.
Prototypes allow you to enter default values for the Element in your network. These
values are used while laying out the network. Prototypes can reduce data entry
requirements dramatically if a group of network elements share common data. For
example, if a section of the network contains all PVC pipes, use the pipe prototype to
set the Material field to PVC. When a new pipe is created, its material attribute will
default to PVC.
6.4 User Data Extensions

Note: The user data does not affect the hydraulic model calculations.
However, their behavior concerning capabilities like editing,
annotating, sorting and database connections is identical to any
of the standard pre-defined attributes.
User Data Extensions are a set of one or more fields that you can define to hold data to
be stored in the model. The User Data Extension feature allows you to add your own
data fields to the project. For instance, you can add a field for keeping track of the date
of installation for an element, or the type of area serviced by a particular element.
User Data Extensions exhibit the same characteristics as the pre-defined data used in
and produced by the model calculations. This means that User Data Extensions can be
imported or exported through database and Shapefile connections (see “Shapefile and
Database Connections” on page 15-571), viewed and edited in FlexTables, included in

tabular reports or element detailed reports, annotated in the drawing (see “Element
Annotation” on page 13-509), color coded (see “Color Coding” on page 13-513), and
reported in the detailed element reports. This data can also be accessed on the User
Data tab of each Element Editor dialog box.
6.4.1 User Data Extension Dialog Box
The User Data Extension dialog box holds a summary of the user data extensions
currently defined in the project. In this dialog box, there is a tab for each type of
element. By clicking a particular tab, you can access the user data extensions currently
defined for that type of element. The software initially contains default user data
extensions, but these can be deleted or edited. Each tab in the User Data Extension
dialog box is composed of a table listing characteristics of the user data extensions
defined for that type of element. In addition, there are a series of buttons that can be
used to add, edit, delete, and share individual user data extensions. The table listing
the user data extensions consists of the following four columns:
• Label—Description that will appear next to the field for the user data extension,
or as the column heading if the data extension is selected to appear in a FlexTable
(for more information, see “FlexTables” on page 7-329).
• Type—Lists the type of data that is valid for the data extension. The available data
types are Date/Time, Number, Text, Memo, and Yes/No.
• Unit/Picture—Contains the unit of each numeric data extension, or the date and
time presentation format for Date/Time data extensions. Both the unit and the date
and time representations are specified when you create the data extension. They
can always be modified by editing the data extension.
• Shared—If an asterisk appears in this column, it indicates that the user data
extension is shared among two or more types of elements. For more information,
see “Existing Fields to Share With Dialog Box” on page 6-327.
The following list describes the four buttons that appear on the right side of the table:
• Add—Adds a new User Data Field. The User Field Specification dialog box (see
“User Field Specification Dialog Box” on page 6-324) will open when you click
this button. Here, you can define the properties of the user data extension that you
are adding.
• Edit—You can edit an existing user data extension by highlighting the data exten-
sion you wish to edit and clicking this button. This will open the User Field Spec-
ification dialog box where you can change the properties for that item.

User Data Extensions
• Delete—You can delete a data extension by highlighting it and clicking this

button. If the data extension you are deleting is shared among multiple types of
elements, it will only be removed from the element type that you are currently
editing. If you remove a user data extension, all the information contained in that
field will be permanently removed.
• Share—You can open the Existing Fields to Share With dialog box by clicking
this button. Here, you pick which of the available attributes defined for other types
of elements you would like to share with the current type of element.
At the bottom of the User Data Extension dialog box is a File button that allows you to
import or save a set of user-defined data extensions. You can save the current configu-
ration of user data extensions for later use by selecting File > Save, and specifying a
file location and name. The file extension for the files holding the user data extension
configurations is .UDX. Select File > Import to merge the data extension configura-
tions defined in these files into the current project. Importing a .UDX file will not
remove any of the other data extensions defined in your project. User data extensions
that have the same name as those already defined in your project will not be imported.
The User Data Extension dialog box includes:
• “User Field Specification Dialog Box” on page 6-324

• “Existing Fields to Share With Dialog Box” on page 6-327
User Field Specification Dialog Box

The properties defining a user data extension can be viewed and edited in the User
Field Specification dialog box, which is composed of two tabs:
• Type—Enter the user data specification. For more information, see “Type Tab” on
page 6-324.
• Notes—Enter any notes related to the User Data Specification. For more informa-
tion, see “Notes Tab” on page 6-327.
Type Tab
The Type tab is composed of two sections:
• Type—Contains fields for entering the label for the user data extension, as well as
the data type. For more information, see “Type Section” on page 6-325.
• Format—Contains fields for defining the specification of the type of user data
extension selected in the Type section. For more information, see “Format

Type Section
The Type section contains fields for entering the label and data type for the user data
extension. The name entered in the Label field corresponds with the User Data Exten-
sion field on the User Data tab of the Element Editor. This label will also be used as
the column heading if the user data extension is added to a FlexTable.
If you want the label to be displayed on multiple rows when it is used as a column
heading, you can use forward slashes to specify the location of line breaks. When the
label is used as a field label in a dialog box, the forward slashes will be converted to
spaces. In FlexTables, there is an option to use abbreviated labels for the column head-
ings. If you want an alternative label to be displayed, you can specify an abbreviated
label after the original label, and separate them by the pipe symbol, |. When the option
to display abbreviated labels is enabled in the FlexTables, this is the text that will be
used as the column heading. For instance, if you specified the label Date/Installed |
Date/Inst. it will be displayed in one of the following three ways, depending on the
location and options selected.
Column heading with

Field Label (Reports/ Column Heading
abbreviated label option
Element Dialog Boxes) (FlexTable)
selected (FlexTable)
Date Installed Date Installed Date Installed
You can select from five different types of data for the user data extension from the
drop-down list in the Type field. An explanation of each is presented in the list below:
• Date/Time—Use this data type when you want the values you are entering to be
in a standard date and time format. This format can be more useful than storing
date information in a simple text field because it allows the dates to be sorted
correctly when they appear in a FlexTable.
• Memo—If a user data extension is defined to be a memo, it will appear as a
scrolling text pane in the User Memos section of the User Data tab in the Element
Editor dialog box.
• Number—Use this data type for fields that contain numeric values. You can
specify a unit for the information in this field. The values contained in this field
will then be automatically converted if you change the unit for this field.
• Text—Use this data type to create a single-line text field.
• Yes/No—Use this data type to display the attribute as a check box to represent
true/false data.

User Data Extensions
Format Section
This section is enabled only if you select Date/Time or Number in the Type section
(see “Type Section” on page 6-325). Here is where you define the properties
governing the type of data selected.
Number Format—If the type of data you selected was numeric, you can select a unit
type (length, volume, intensity, etc.), a unit, a display precision, and whether to use
scientific notation. There are no format options for memo, text, and Yes/No data types.
Date/Time Type Format—If you selected the Date/Time type, you can specify
whether you would like the date or time to appear first in the input field, as well as the
format of the date and time information. The format in which the date and time infor-
mation will be displayed can either be selected from the drop-down lists, or you can
type your own custom format directly into the Date Picture and Time Picture fields. If
one of these fields is left blank, the corresponding information will not be displayed.
The Date/Time data type consists of an input and an output format. The input format
is a fixed format that is determined by the regional settings on your computer. When-
ever you enter information into a Date/Time field, the information must be entered
according to the input format. If it is not entered in the proper input format, the value
will revert to the original value.
The output format is a mask that defines the manner in which the date and time infor-
mation will be displayed. It does not affect the way the date and time information can
be entered into a Date/Time field.
The output format can be edited as follows:
• To specify dates with no leading zeros for single-digit days, years, or months, use
lowercase d, lowercase y, or uppercase M.
• To specify dates with leading zeros for single-digit days, years, or months, use
lowercase dd, lowercase yy, or uppercase MM.
• To specify abbreviations for the day, year, or month, use lowercase ddd, lowercase
yyy, or uppercase MMM.
• To specify the full name of the day, year, or month, use lowercase dddd, lowercase
yyyy, or uppercase MMMM.
If there are characters in the output format that do not map to valid date or time infor-
mation, then the actual value of the character will be displayed. For example, if you
wanted the date to be displayed as June 15, 1998, you would define the format as
MMMM d, yyyy. Since the spaces and comma do not map to any of the date informa-
tion, their actual values are displayed. To include a piece of text that contains a char-
acter that maps to the date or time information, use single quotation marks (’) around
the text.

Notes Tab
This tab contains a text pane for entering notes about the current data extension. The
text entered here is not displayed anywhere in the model, but allows you to keep
records for a particular data extension.
Existing Fields to Share With Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to choose which of the available attributes defined for
other types of elements you want to share with the current type of element. The
following sections are available:
• Available Items—Lists attributes defined for other element types that have not
already been shared with the current type of element. In order to add attributes to
the current element type, highlight them and click the Add button to transfer them
to the Selected Items list.
• Selected Items—The attributes in the Selected Items list will be added to the
current element after you click the OK button.
All the characteristics (such as data type, format, unit, and display precision) for a
particular user data extension are the same for all the elements that share it. This is
useful when the attribute you are adding needs to be the same for all the element types
for which it is defined. For instance, if you have a Date Installed field for every
element, sharing guarantees that the date format is the same for every element and will
appear in a single FlexTable column (for more information, see “FlexTables” on
page 7-329). If, at a later point, you decide the date should be in a different format,
you can change the format for one type of element. That change will filter through to
all the elements that share that attribute.
6.5 Zones
Zones includes:
• “Zone Manager” on page 6-328

• “Zone Dialog Box” on page 6-328

Zones
6.5.1 Zone Manager
Note: A Zone cannot be deleted if it is referenced by any element.
The zone manager allows you to manipulate zones quickly and easily. Zones listed in
the Zone Manager can be associated with each nodal element using the Element
Editors, Prototypes, or FlexTables. This manager includes a list of all of the available
zones and standard manager features, such as:
• Add—Add a new zone to the zone list.

• Edit—Make changes to an existing zone.
• Duplicate—Create a copy of an existing zone.
• Delete—Delete an existing zone.
6.5.2 Zone Dialog Box
Note: Only one zone can reference an element. If you add an element
to a zone, the element is automatically removed from the zone
that it was previously in.
The zone dialog box allows you to name the zone label. When a zone is named, the
junctions are automatically assigned the new name. The zone dialog box contains
pertinent information, including:
• Label—Required name to identify the zone.

• Notes—Optional input describing the zone.
In addition to this information, there are also buttons that enable you to make changes
to the collection of elements in the zone, such as adding elements to the zone.

Chapter
FlexTables 7
FlexTables provide you with a powerful data management tool that can be used to edit
input data and present output data in a quick, efficient manner. Haestad Methods
provides you with default element tables; however, these tables can be customized to
fit your particular needs. You can also create your own tables by combining various
input and output data for different model elements. You can use FlexTables to view all
elements in the network, all elements of a specific type (e.g., all pipes), or any subset
of elements. Additionally, tables can be filtered (see “Filtering Tables” on page 7-
339), globally edited (see “Globally Editing Data” on page 7-337), and sorted (see
“Sorting Tables” on page 7-338) to ease data input and present output data for specific
elements.
FlexTables may also be used to create results reports that can be sent to a printer, a
file, or to the Windows clipboard for copying into your favorite word processing or
spreadsheet software.

Table Manager
7.1 Table Manager

Note: You cannot rename or delete the predefined tables that come
with this software. You can modify the predefined tables.
When you choose to print a table, the table name will be used as
the title for the printed report. You can change the report title by
renaming the table.
The predefined tables may need to be modified to properly

display the desired data in certain situations. For instance, if you
set up a project and choose the Manning’s friction method, the
default Pipe Report will still display a Hazen-Williams C column,
which will contain no data. The proper column must be added by
editing the table.
The Table Manager provides support for creating, opening, and managing tables.
Although the predefined tables provide access to most of the network element infor-
mation, it is sometimes practical to present model results and input data through user-
defined tables. The Table Management button provides the following tools for manip-
ulating user-defined tables:
• OK—Open the selected table.

• Close—Exit the Table Manager dialog box without opening a table.
• Table Management > New—Create a new table using the Create New Table and
Table Setup dialog boxes. For more information, see “Creating New Tables” on
page 7-331.
• Table Management > Edit—Modify the layout of the selected table using the
Table Setup dialog box. For more information, see “Editing Tables” on page 7-
331.
• Table Management > Rename—Rename the selected table. For more informa-
tion, see “Renaming Tables” on page 7-332.
• Table Management > Duplicate—Duplicate the selected table for additional
customization. This is a very useful feature when you need to make changes to a
predefined table. For more information, see “Duplicating Tables” on page 7-331.
• Table Management > Delete—Delete the selected table. For more information,
see “Deleting Tables” on page 7-332.
• Table Management > Reset—Reset a table’s units to the current unit system or
reset a predefined table to factory defaults. For more information, see “Resetting
Tables” on page 7-332.

FlexTables
7.1.1 Creating New Tables
To create a new table, open the Table Manager (see “Table Manager” on page 7-330)
by clicking the Tabular Reports button on the main toolbar, or by choosing Report >
Tables. In the Table Manager dialog box, click the Table Management button and
select New.
• Specify the Table Type (see “Table Type” on page 7-333) to indicate the type of
network elements you want to display in your table.
• Specify either a one- or two-row display for your table.
• Enter the name of your new table in the Enter the description for this table:
field. This name will also be used as the report title when the table is printed.
• Click OK to accept these settings and proceed to the Table Setup dialog box to
define your table.
7.1.2 Editing Tables
The Edit option allows you to modify the list of attributes that will appear in your
table.
7.1.3 Duplicating Tables
The Duplicate option allows you to create a new table based on an existing table.

Table Setup Dialog Box
7.1.4 Deleting Tables
The Delete option allows you to delete any table that you have defined. You cannot
delete the predefined tables.
7.1.5 Renaming Tables
Note: The table name will be used as the title in printed reports. You
cannot rename any of the predefined tables. If you need to
rename a predefined table, duplicate it first and then rename it
(see “Duplicating Tables” on page 7-331).
The Rename option allows you to change the name of any table that you have defined.
You cannot rename any of the predefined tables.
7.1.6 Resetting Tables
• Reset Units to the Current Unit System—This option is only available for
tables that are in Local Units mode (for more information, see “Local versus
Synchronized Units” on page 7-342). Local Units mode allows the table to main-
tain its own local set of column properties, such as units and precision. Use this
option to reset all units in the selected table to the defaults for the current unit
system, which refers to the units used in the current project. You will be prompted
for confirmation before this action is performed.
• Reset to Factory Defaults—You can reset any of the predefined tables to the
factory defaults. This option is not available for tables that you create.
7.2 Table Setup Dialog Box

Note: The number next to the Selected Columns label indicates the
number of columns that will appear in your table.
The Table Setup dialog box allows you to customize any table through the following
options:
• Table Type—Allows you to specify the type of network elements that will appear
in the table. For example, only pipes will appear in a pipe table. For more infor-
mation, see “Table Type” on page 7-333.
• Available Columns—Contains all the attributes that are available for your table
design. These attributes will change based on the Table Type field. For more
information, see “Available Table Columns” on page 7-333.

FlexTables
• Pick Button—You can click this button to access the categorized Quick Attribute
Selector (see “Quick Attribute Selector” on page 2-56) for selecting columns to be
added to the tabular report. The selected column will be highlighted in the Avail-
able Columns list, and it can then be added to the Selected Columns list.
• Selected Columns—Contains attributes that will appear in your table. When you
open the table, the selected attributes will appear as columns in the same order as
in the list. You can drag and drop or use the up and down buttons to change the
order of the attributes in the Selected Columns list. For more information, see
“Selected Table Columns” on page 7-333.
• Allow Duplicate Columns—An advanced feature that allows you to place two or
more identical columns in the same table and set them to different unit systems.
For more information, see “Allow Duplicate Columns” on page 7-335.
• Column Manipulation Buttons—Allows you to select or deselect columns to be
used in the table, as well as to arrange the order in which the columns will appear.
For more information, see “Table Manipulation Buttons” on page 7-334.
7.2.1 Table Type
The Table Type field allows you to specify the types of elements that will appear in the
table. It also provides a filter for the attributes that appear in the Available Columns
list. When you choose a table type, the available list will only contain attributes that
can be used for that table type. For example, only pipe attributes will be available for a
pipe table.
7.2.2 Available Table Columns
The Available Columns list is located on the left side of the Table Setup dialog box.
This list contains all of the attributes that are available for the type of table you are
creating. The attributes displayed in yellow represent non-editable attributes, while
those displayed in white represent editable attributes.
7.2.3 Selected Table Columns
The Selected Columns list is located on the right side of the Table Setup dialog box.
The attributes in this list will appear as columns in the table when it is opened. The
columns will appear in the same order as the attributes in the selected list.
To add columns to the Selected Columns list:
• Select one or more attributes in the Available Columns list.

• Click the Add button [>] or drag and drop the highlighted attributes to the
Selected Columns list.

Table Setup Dialog Box
7.2.4 Table Manipulation Buttons
The Add and Remove buttons are located in the center of the Table Setup dialog box.
[ > ]: Adds the selected items from the Available Columns

list to the Selected Columns list (for more
information, see “Available Table Columns” on
page 7-333 and “Selected Table Columns” on
page 7-333).
[ >> ]: Adds all of the items in the Available Columns list to
the Selected Columns list.
[ < ]: Removes the selected items from the Selected
Columns list.
[ << ]: Removes all items from the Selected Columns list.
Note: You can Ctrl+click or Shift+click to select multiple attributes in

the Available Columns list. Holding down the Shift key produces
group selection, whereas using the Control key will let you
select single elements.
The items displayed in yellow represent non-editable columns

(i.e., columns that contain calculated data), while those in white
represent editable columns (i.e., columns that contain input
data).
To rearrange the order of the attributes in the Selected Columns list:
• Highlight the item to be moved.

• Move it up or down in the list by clicking the up or down button located below the
Selected Columns list, or by dragging it to the desired location.

FlexTables
7.2.5 Allow Duplicate Columns
Set this check box to allow duplicate columns in a table. Allow Duplicate Columns is
an advanced feature that allows you to place two identical columns in the same table
and set them to different unit systems.
7.3 Table Window

Note: Use the Scenario control located at the top of the Table Window
to quickly view the data for different scenarios.
The Table window is where you will perform most of your data input and review. It
has many features to assist you with data entry, data formatting, report customization,
and output generation. To access the Table window, highlight a table in the Table
Manager, and click OK.
The Table window includes:
• “Table Navigation” on page 7-336

• “Table Customization” on page 7-340
Options:
• “Sorting Tables” on page 7-338

• “Filtering Tables” on page 7-339
• “Changing Column Headings” on page 7-341
• “Globally Editing Data” on page 7-337
• “Include Inactive Topology” on page 7-340
• “Local versus Synchronized Units” on page 7-342
• “Mixing Units in a Tabular Report” on page 7-342
• “Abbreviated Labels” on page 7-341
• “Changing Column Display Properties” on page 7-341
Output:
• “File (Export Table to ASCII File)” on page 7-344

• “Table Copy to Clipboard” on page 7-344
• “Table Print” on page 7-344
• “Table Print Preview” on page 7-344

Table Window
7.3.1 Editing Tables
Editing tables includes:
• “Editable Table Columns” on page 7-336

• “Table Navigation” on page 7-336
• “Globally Editing Data” on page 7-337
Editable Table Columns

Editable table columns correspond to input data that you can change. The values in
these columns can be modified either directly or through the Global Edit option. These
columns are displayed with a white background.
Non-editable table columns are displayed with a yellow background, and correspond
to model results calculated by the program and composite values.
Table Navigation
The Table window supports two modes:
• “Table Navigation Mode” on page 7-336

• “Cell Navigation Mode (Edit Mode)” on page 7-336
By pressing the F2 key, you can toggle between them.
Table Navigation Mode
The Arrow keys, Home, End, PgUp, PgDn, and Ctrl+<arrow> keys navigate to
different cells in a table. Table Navigation Mode is the default mode when editing a
table. To edit within a single cell of a table, press the F2 key to switch to Cell Naviga-
tion Mode.
Cell Navigation Mode (Edit Mode)
In Cell Navigation Mode, the Arrow keys, Home, and End keys navigate within a
single cell. When Cell Navigation Mode is active, the word EDIT will appear on the
status pane at the bottom of the window. Cell Navigation Mode will automatically
terminate when you press any key except for Left, Right, Home, End, Delete, or Back-
space.

FlexTables
Globally Editing Data
Note: Global Edit is available only for editable columns. You can use
Global Edit in conjunction with Filtering (see “Filtering Tables” on
page 7-339) to globally edit a subset of elements.
You can globally change the values of any editable column in a table. Right-click the
column that you wish to globally change and choose the Global Edit menu item.
For numeric columns:
• Choose the operation to be performed: Add, Divide, Multiply, Set, or Subtract.

• Enter the value you wish to use.
• Click OK, and the values in the entire column will be updated to reflect this
change.
For non-numeric columns:
• Enter the new value.

• Click OK, and the values in the entire column will be updated to reflect this
change.
7.3.2 Sorting and Filtering Tables
Sorting and filtering tables includes:
• “Sorting Tables” on page 7-338

• “Custom Sort” on page 7-338
• “Filtering Tables” on page 7-339
• “Include Inactive Topology” on page 7-340

Table Window
Sorting Tables
Tables can be sorted based on a single column or multiple columns.
Custom Sort
You can sort elements in the table based on one or more columns, in ascending or
descending order. For example, the following table is given:
Slope (ft./ft.) Depth (ft.) Discharge (cfs)
0.001 1 4.11
0.002 1 5.81
0.003 1 7.12
0.001 2 13.43
0.002 2 19.00
0.003 2 23.27
A custom sort is set up to sort first by Slope, then by Depth, in ascending order. The
resulting table would appear in the following order:
Slope (ft./ft.) Depth (ft.) Discharge (cfs)
0.001 1 4.11
0.001 2 13.43
0.002 1 5.81
0.002 2 19.00
0.003 1 7.12
0.003 2 23.27

FlexTables
Filtering Tables
Filters let you change the table so only rows that match the specified criteria will
appear. To access the filtering operations, use the Options button at the top of the
Table window (in the case of a FlexTable)—for more information, see “Table
Window” on page 7-335—or right-click the column header for the attribute by which
you wish to filter.
• Quick Filter—Set up a simple filter by right-clicking the column header for the
attribute by which you wish to filter.
• Custom Filter—Set up a custom filter based on one or more criteria.
• Reset—Turn off the active filter, causing all available rows in the table to be
displayed.
Note: Another way to select which elements are displayed in the table
is to first select elements, either graphically or using the
Selection Set tool. Then, right-click any of the selected elements
and choose Edit Group from the shortcut menu that appears,
which opens the Table Manager dialog box. Only the selected
elements will appear in any of the tables you open at this point.
When you perform a Quick Filter or a Custom Filter, the Filter dialog box will open
and let you specify your filtering criteria.
Each filter criterion is made up of three items:
• Column—The attribute to filter.

• Operator—The operator to use when comparing the filter value against the data
in the specific column (operators include: =, >, >=, <, <=, < >, Contains, and
Begins With).
Note: The new filtering options “Contains” and “Begins With” allow
more flexibility with regard to filtering tables. These filters are
only available for Column Types that have alphabetic values, for
example Label or Zone. The Contains filter checks for the
specified value anywhere in the words, and the Begins With filter
checks only the first letter for the specified value.
• Value—The comparison value.
Any number of criteria can be added to a filter. Multiple filter criteria are implicitly
joined with a logical AND statement. When multiple filter criteria are defined, only
rows that meet all of the specified criteria will be displayed. A filter will remain active
for the associated table until the filter is reset.

Table Window
The status pane at the bottom of the Table window always shows the number of rows
displayed and the total number of rows available (e.g., 10 of 20 elements displayed).
When a filter is active, this message will be highlighted.
Table filtering allows you to perform global editing (see “Globally Editing Data” on
page 7-337) on any subset of elements. Only the elements that appear in the filtered
table can be edited.
Include Inactive Topology

This table option allows you to include or exclude elements that are Inactive in the
current scenario. By default, Inactive elements are not displayed in the tabular reports.
7.3.3 Table Customization
There are several ways to customize tables to meet a variety of output requirements:
• Changing the Report Title—When you print a table, the table name is used as
the title for the printed report. You can change the title that appears on your
printed report by renaming the table (see “Renaming Tables” on page 7-332),
using the Table Manager.
• Adding/Removing Columns—You can add, remove, and change the order of
columns from the Table Setup dialog box. Use the Table Manager (see “Table
Manager” on page 7-330) to access the Table Setup dialog box.
• Drag/Drop Column Placement—With the Table window open, select the
column that you would like to move by holding down the left mouse button on its
column heading. Drag the column heading to the left or right, and release the
mouse button to drop the column into its new location.
• Resizing Columns—With the Table window open, place your pointer over the
vertical separator line between column headings. Notice that the cursor changes
shape to indicate that you can resize the column. Hold down the left mouse button
and drag the mouse to the left or right to stretch the column to its new size.
Release the mouse button to set the new column width.
• Changing Column Display Properties—With the Table window open, right-
click in the heading area of the column you wish to change and choose the Proper-
ties menu item. The current column properties will be displayed in the Set Field
Options dialog box.
When working in synchronized units, you can change the project units and display
precision, if applicable; these changes apply to the current table only. For more
information, see “Local versus Synchronized Units” on page 7-342.
• Changing Column Headings—With the Table window open, right-click the
column heading that you wish to change and choose Edit Column Label. For more
information, see “Changing Column Headings” on page 7-341.

FlexTables
Table customization includes:
• “Changing Column Headings” on page 7-341

• “Abbreviated Labels” on page 7-341
• “Changing Column Display Properties” on page 7-341
• “Local versus Synchronized Units” on page 7-342
• “Mixing Units in a Tabular Report” on page 7-342
Changing Column Headings

To change the label of any column in the Table window (see “Table Window” on
page 7-335), right-click the column heading that you wish to change and choose Edit
Column Label from the context menu. The backslash character (\) can be used to
insert a line-break wherever you want the title to be split into multiple lines. If you
enter an empty label, the column heading will be restored to the default label.
Abbreviated Labels
Using label abbreviations will allow columns to take up less space. Thus, more data
fits on each page when printing a report. If you wish to define an abbreviated label,
right-click the desired column heading and choose Edit Column Label. In the Label
dialog box, separate the abbreviated label from the default label with the pipe symbol,
|, located above the backslash (\) on most keyboards. For example, to use the abbrevi-
ation L for the Length column, type Length|L in the field provided. When the Use
Label Abbreviations option is turned on, the abbreviated label will appear.
Changing Column Display Properties

You can change the display properties (e.g., units, precision) of any numeric column
in the Table window (for more information, see “Table Window” on page 7-335).
Right-click the label of the column that you wish to change, and select Properties from
the shortcut menu. This action opens the Set Field Options dialog box (see “Field
Options” on page 4-252), where you can change the display properties of the column.

Table Window
Local versus Synchronized Units

Use the Options button at the top of the Table window (see “Table Window” on
page 7-335) to access the Use Local Units menu item. Click the menu item to toggle
between Local Units and Synchronized Units. A check mark will appear next to the
Use Local Units menu item to indicate that Local Units mode is active. Otherwise,
Synchronized Units mode is active.
• Synchronized Units—This is the default mode, which allows the table to stay
synchronized with the active project. If you have one project in US Customary
and one project in SI units, the table will match the units in the project that is
currently open.
• Local Units—Local Units mode allows the table to maintain its own local set of
column properties (units, precision, etc). This feature gives you the ability to build
tables that are always in a fixed unit system, regardless of what unit system the
active project is currently using. This option is useful for printing reports in
different unit systems.
When the Table window is open, the current unit synchronization mode is displayed in
the status pane at the bottom of the window.
Mixing Units in a Tabular Report

This software allows for duplicate columns in a table, thus giving you the ability to
display an attribute in multiple units.
For example, to see two Pipe Length columns in a Table, one in feet and one in
meters:
• Open the Table Manager. For more information, see “Table Manager” on page 7-
330.
• Click the Table Management button, and select New to create a new table.
• Select the Pipe Table Type from the choice list, and enter a name for your new
table. Click OK, and you will be taken to the Table Setup dialog box (see “Table
Setup Dialog Box” on page 7-332) where you can customize your table.
• In the Table Setup dialog box, activate the Allow Duplicate Columns check box
located in the lower left corner of the dialog box.
• Add the Length column to the Selected Columns list.
Note: The Length column will still appear in the Available Columns list,
but will be displayed in a lighter color, indicating that it has
already been selected.
• Add the Length column again.

FlexTables
• Click OK to close the Table Setup dialog box. From the Table Manager, highlight
the table you have just created, and click OK.
• Click the Options button at the top of the window and select the Use Local Units
menu item to turn Local Units on. You will be prompted to verify that you want to
use local units. Click Yes.
• Right-click the first Length column and select Length Properties to set the units
in the column to ft. Then, right-click the second Length column to set the units to
m.
7.3.4 Table Output
Table output includes:
• “File (Export Table to ASCII File)” on page 7-344

• “Table Copy to Clipboard” on page 7-344
• “Table Print” on page 7-344
• “Table Print Preview” on page 7-344

Table Window
File (Export Table to ASCII File)

You may export the data shown in the Table window (see “Table Window” on page 7-
335) to an ASCII text file in either tab- or comma-delimited format.
Table Copy to Clipboard

The Copy button at the top of the Table window (see “Table Window” on page 7-335)
allows you to copy tab-delimited data to the Windows clipboard. Tab-delimited data
can be pasted directly into your favorite spreadsheet program or word processor.
Table Print
The Print button at the top of the Table window (see “Table Window” on page 7-335)
is used to output the table directly to the printer.
Table Print Preview
Note: Using label abbreviations (see “Abbreviated Labels” on page 7-

341) will allow some columns to be narrower, permitting more
data to fit on each page. Use the Options button at the top of the
Table window to access this option.
Printing with landscape orientation will also allow more columns

to fit on a single page. From the Print Preview window, use the
Options > Print Setup menu item to access orientation.
Click the Print Preview button at the top of the Table window (see “Table Window” on
page 7-335) to view the report in the format that will be printed.
If you want to paste your table into word processing software, copy from the print
preview. If you want to paste into spreadsheet software, copy directly from the table.

Chapter
Scenarios/Alternatives 8
The scenario management feature allows you to easily analyze and recall an unlimited
number of What If? calculations for your model. The powerful two-level design,
which uses Scenarios that contain Alternatives, gives you precise control over changes
to the model, while eliminating any need to input or maintain redundant data.
We have worked hard to devise a system that offers the power and flexibility that you
demand, with the ease of use that you have come to expect from us. If you are like
most users, you will want to jump right in without having to spend a lot of time
reading. When you are ready to create your first scenario, you will find that you will
be able to accomplish what you want easily and quickly.
The Scenario Wizard is designed to get you started quickly, while slowly exposing
you to the power behind scenarios and alternatives.
When you are ready to model more complex scenarios, you will appreciate the power
and flexibility provided by the various scenario management features.
If you are a beginning user, try the Scenario Wizard (see “Scenario Wizard” on
page 8-369) and run the Scenario tutorial. For more information, see “Alternatives
Manager” on page 8-347 and “Scenario Management Guide” on page C-783.
8.1 Alternatives
Alternatives are the building blocks behind scenarios (for more information, see
“Scenarios” on page 8-364). They are categorized data sets that create scenarios when
placed together. Alternatives hold the input data in the form of records. A record holds
the data for a particular element in your system. The different types of alternatives are:
• “Alternatives Manager” on page 8-347

• “Alternatives Editor” on page 8-349
• “Physical Alternative” on page 8-350
• “Active Topology Alternative” on page 8-353

Alternatives
• “Demand Alternative” on page 8-354

• “Initial Settings Alternative” on page 8-355
• “Operational Alternative” on page 8-357
• “Age Alternative” on page 8-358
• “Constituent Alternative” on page 8-358
• “Trace Alternative” on page 8-360
• “Fire Flow Alternative” on page 8-360
• “Capital Cost Alternative” on page 8-363
• “User Data Alternative” on page 8-363
• “Energy Cost Alternative” on page 8-363
The exact properties of each alternative are discussed in their respective sections. By
breaking up alternatives into these different types, we give you the ability to mix
different alternatives any way that you want within any given scenario.
Scenarios are composed of alternatives, as well as other calculation options (see

“Calculation Options” on page 9-391), allowing you to compute and compare the
results of various changes to your system. Alternatives can vary independently within
scenarios, and can be shared between scenarios.
There are two kinds of alternatives: Base alternatives and Child alternatives. Base
alternatives contain local data for all elements in your system. Child alternatives
inherit data from base alternatives, or even other child alternatives, and contain data
for one or more elements in your system. The data within an alternative consists of
data inherited from its parent, and the data altered specifically by you (local data).
When you first set up your system, the data that you enter is stored in the various base
alternative types. If you wish to see how your system will behave, for example, by
increasing the diameter of a few select pipes, you can create a child alternative to
accomplish that. You can make another child alternative with even larger diameters,
and another with smaller diameters. There is no limit to the number of alternatives that
you can create.
Scenarios allow you to specify the alternatives you wish to analyze. In combination
with scenarios, you can perform calculations on your system to see what effect each
alternative will have. Once you have determined an alternative that works best for
your system, you can permanently merge changes from the preferred alternative to the
base alternative if you wish.
Remember that all data inherited from the base alternative will be changed when the
base alternative changes. Only local data specific to a child alternative will remain
unchanged.

Scenarios/Alternatives
8.1.1 Alternatives Manager
The Alternatives Manager is the central location for managing the alternatives in your
project. It allows you to edit, create, and manage the various types of alternatives. It
also gives you more advanced capabilities, such as merging alternatives and creating
child alternatives.
The available alternatives of each type are conveniently organized in a list on the left
side of the dialog box. The network element data is grouped into the following types:
• “Active Topology Alternative” on page 8-353

• “Physical Alternative” on page 8-350
• “Demand Alternative” on page 8-354
• “Initial Settings Alternative” on page 8-355
• “Operational Alternative” on page 8-357
• “Age Alternative” on page 8-358
• “Constituent Alternative” on page 8-358
• “Trace Alternative” on page 8-360
• “Fire Flow Alternative” on page 8-360
• “Capital Cost Alternative” on page 8-363
• “Energy Cost Alternative” on page 8-363
• “User Data Alternative” on page 8-363
Note: You will not be allowed to merge or delete an alternative that is

referenced by one or more scenarios. When you attempt to
perform the operation, you will be provided with a list of the
scenarios that reference the alternative.
If you are attempting to merge an alternative that is referenced,

you will need to edit the scenarios that references the child
alternative that you are merging from, and make them reference
the parent alternative that you are merging to. Use the Scenario
Control Center window (see “Scenario Control Center” on page 8-
366) to edit the scenarios, and the Alternatives tab (see
“Alternatives Tab” on page 8-372) to make the scenario point to the
parent alternative.
On the right side of the dialog box are a number of buttons that provide functions for
managing the alternatives. The following list provides a brief description of the func-
tion of each of these buttons.

Alternatives
Add—Create a new base alternative, first prompting for a name, and then opening an
alternatives editor. Base alternatives are initialized with the first data set entered either
in tables or specific element dialog boxes.
Add Child—Create a new child alternative that inherits from the selected alternative.
This allows you to automatically share the majority of the records from a parent alter-
native, while modifying only selected records in the child alternative.
Edit—Open the tabular record editor for the selected alternative. This tabular record
contains all the values that are used by the selected alternative.
Merge—Moves all records from the selected child alternative into its parent alterna-
tive, and then removes the selected alternative. The records in the selected alternative
will replace the corresponding records in the parent. This is helpful when you have
been experimenting with changes in a child alternative, and you want to permanently
apply those changes to the parent alternative. All other alternatives that inherit data
from that parent alternative will reflect these changes.
Rename—Rename an existing alternative. This invokes an in-place editor in the tree

view of the available alternatives. Make the desired changes to the existing name and
press the Enter key.
Duplicate—Create a new alternative filled with records copied from the selected
alternative. Use this if you wish to copy the data from an alternative, but not create a
child. The two alternatives will be independent.
Delete—Remove the selected alternative and its records. Deleting an alternative will
also delete all of the input data associated with that alternative.
Report—Generate a Print Preview of a summary report of the selected alternative, all

alternatives, or the selected alternative and all of its children in that hierarchy.

Merging Child Alternatives

The Alternative Manager’s Merge command allows you to replace the values associ-
ated with a parent alternative’s attributes with those contained within one of its’ child
alternatives. The primary use for this command is to apply changes that have been
made in an “experimental” child alternative to the parent alternative from which it is
derived.
8.1.2 Alternatives Editor
Note: As you make changes to records, the check box will

automatically become checked. If you want to reset a record to
its parent’s values, clear the corresponding check box.
Many columns support Global Editing (see “Globally Editing Data”

on page 7-337), allowing you to change all values in a single
column. Right-click a column header to access the Global Edit
option.
The check box column will be disabled when you edit a base
alternative.
The Alternatives Editor displays all of the records held by a single alternative. These
records contain the values that are active when a scenario referencing this alternative
is active. They allow you to view all of the changes that you have made for a single
alternative. They also allow you to eliminate changes that you no longer need.
There is one editor for each alternative type. Each type of editor works similarly and
allows you to make changes to a different aspect of your system. The first column
contains check boxes, which indicate the records that have been changed in this alter-
native.
If the box is checked, the record on that line has been modified and the data is local, or
specific, to this alternative.
If the box is not checked, it means that the record on that line is inherited from its
higher-level parent alternative. Inherited records are dynamic. If the record is changed
in the parent, the change will be reflected in the child. The records on these rows
reflect the corresponding values in the alternative’s parent.

Alternatives
8.1.3 Physical Alternative
One of the most common uses of a water distribution model is the design of new or
replacement facilities. During design, it is common to try several physical alternatives
in an effort to find the most cost effective solution. For example, when designing a
replacement pipeline, it would be beneficial to try several sizes and pipe materials to
find the most satisfactory combination. Our powerful Alternative Manager allows you
to set up an unlimited number of design alternatives and apply them in different
scenarios.
Each type of network element has a specific set of physical properties that are stored
in a physical properties alternative, as listed below:
• “Physical Alternative Editor for Pipes” on page 8-350

• “Physical Alternative Editor for Pumps” on page 8-351
• “Physical Alternative Editor for Valves” on page 8-351
• “Physical Alternative Editor for GPVs” on page 8-352
• “Physical Alternative Editor for Junctions” on page 8-352
• “Physical Alternative Editor for Reservoirs” on page 8-352
• “Physical Alternative Editor for Tanks” on page 8-353
Physical Alternative Editor for Pipes

The Physical Alternative editor for pipes (see “Pressure Pipe Editor” on page 6-277) is
used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of pipes. The following
columns are available:
• Label—The label is not editable in this dialog box.

• Material—Type of material from which the pipe is constructed (e.g., Ductile
Iron, PVC, Steel).
• Diameter—Internal diameter of the pipe. The nominal diameter of the pipe is
commonly used in water distribution modeling with little practical impact.
• Roughness—A measure of the pipe’s internal roughness, based on the chosen
friction method.
• Minor Loss Coefficient—Appurtenances such as valves, bends, and tees
contribute to local flow disturbances resulting in energy loss. Click the Ellipsis
(...) button to edit the composite minor loss element for the pipe.
• Check Valve—Select this check box to indicate the presence of a check valve.

Physical Alternative Editor for Pumps

The Physical Alternative editor for pumps (see “Pump Editor” on page 6-279) is used
to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of pumps, which consist of
the following:
• Label—The label for the pump. This label is not editable in this dialog box.
• Elevation—Elevation of the pump, typically measured from the Mean Sea Level.
• Pump Definition—The attributes that define the pump’s operating characteris-
tics. Click this field, then click the Ellipsis (...) button to edit the parameters for
the active pump type.
• Variable Speed Pump?—This column contains a check box for each pump in the
model. If the box is checked, the pump is a Variable Speed pump.
• VSP Type—This column is only editable when the Variable Speed Pump? Box is
checked for the pump in question. When the field is activated, it consists of a
menu that allows you to select whether the VSP type is Pattern Based or Fixed
Head, and an Ellipsis (…) button that allows you change the settings for the vari-
able speed pump.
• Efficiency Type—This field consists of a menu that allows you to select whether
the Efficiency type is Best Efficiency Point, Constant Efficiency, or Multiple Effi-
ciency Point, and an Ellipsis (…) button that allows you change the efficiency
settings.
To get set the efficiency type, Click the Ellipsis (...) button next to Pump Defini-
tion on the General tab of the Pump Element Editor, click Add or Edit in the
Pump Definition Manager, and click the Efficiency tab.
Physical Alternative Editor for Valves

The Physical Alternative editor for valves (see “Valve Editor” on page 6-281) used to
create various data sets for the physical characteristics of valves. The following
columns are available for all types of valve:

• Elevation—Elevation of the valve, typically measured from the Mean Sea Level.
• Diameter—The internal diameter of the valve. The nominal diameter of the valve
is commonly used in water distribution modeling with little practical impact.
• Minor Loss Coefficient—The wide-open minor loss coefficient. Click the
Ellipsis (...) button to edit the Minor Loss Library (for more information, see
“Engineering Library Editor” on page 14-565).

Alternatives
Physical Alternative Editor for GPVs

The Physical Alternative editor for GPVs (see “Valve Editor” on page 6-281) is used
to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of General Purpose Valves.
The following columns are available:
• Label—The label for the valve. The Label is not editable in this dialog box.
• Elevation—Elevation of the valve, typically measured from the Mean Sea Level.
• Diameter—The internal diameter of the valve. The nominal diameter of the valve
is commonly used in water distribution modeling with little practical impact.
• Minor Loss Elements—The wide-open minor loss coefficient. Click the Ellipsis
(...) button to edit the Minor Loss Library (for more information, see “Engineering
Library Editor” on page 14-565).
• Headloss Curve—This column contains an Edit button for each GPV in the
model. Clicking this button opens the Curve dialog box, which allows you to input
the Headloss-Discharge points for that particular GPV.
Physical Alternative Editor for Junctions

The Physical Alternative editor for Pressure Junctions (see “Pressure Junction Editor”
on page 6-277) is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of
junctions, which consist of the following:

• Elevation—Elevation of the junction, typically measured from the Mean Sea
Level.
• Zone—Specify the zone the junction belongs to. You may click the Ellipsis (...)
• Emitter Coefficient—Input the emitter coefficient for the corresponding junc-
tion.
Physical Alternative Editor for Reservoirs

The Physical Alternative editor for reservoirs (see “Reservoir Editor” on page 6-279)
is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of reservoirs, which
consist of the following:

• Elevation—Elevation of the reservoir, typically measured from the Mean Sea
Level.

• HGL Pattern—Displays the hydraulic grade line pattern that is currently in effect
(if any—if no pattern is selected, this box will display Fixed). This box consists of
a menu which lists the available patterns, and an Ellipsis (…) button which, when
clicked, opens the Pattern Manager (see “Pattern Manager” on page 9-394) to
allow you to edit or create a pattern.
• Zone—Specify the zone the tank belongs to. You may click the Ellipsis (...)
Physical Alternative Editor for Tanks

The Physical Alternative editor for tanks (see “Tank Editor” on page 6-278) is used to
create various data sets for the physical characteristics of tanks. The following
columns are available:

• Elevation—Ground elevation of the tank.
• Base Elevation—The vertical distance of the tank’s base above a known datum.
Typically, Mean Sea Level is the datum used. The base elevation is the elevation
from which all tank levels are computed.
• Minimum Elevation (or Level)—This is the lowest possible water surface eleva-
tion for the tank. If the tank drains below this level, it will shut off from the
system.
• Maximum Elevation (or Level)—This is the highest possible water surface
elevation for the tank. If the tank fills above this level, it will shut off from the
system.
• Section—The physical parameters that define the tank cross sectional geometry.
There are two (2) types of tank sections, Constant Area and Variable Area. Click
this field, then click the Ellipsis (...) button to edit the parameters for the active
tank section type.
• Zone—Specify the zone the tank belongs to. You may click the Ellipsis (...)
8.1.4 Active Topology Alternative
The Active Topology Alternative lets you temporarily remove areas of the network
from the current analysis. This is useful for comparing the effect of proposed
construction and to gauge the effectiveness of redundancy that may be present in the
system.
The Active Topology dialog box is divided into tabs for each element type:

Alternatives
• Pressure Pipe
• Pressure Junction
• Reservoir
• Tank
• Pump
• Valve
For each tab, the same setup applies—the tables are divided into three columns. The
first column displays whether the data is Base or Inherited, the second column is the
element Label, and the third column allows you to choose whether or not the corre-
sponding element is Active in the current alternative.
To make an element Inactive in the current alternative, clear the check box in the
Active? column that corresponds to that element’s Label.
8.1.5 Demand Alternative
The Demand Alternative allows you to model the response of the pipe network to
different sets of demands, such as the current demand and the demand of your system
ten years from now.
Note: Setting up multiple demand alternatives makes it possible to

easily manage different loading conditions for any network. For
example, an Average Day demand alternative contains the
average demands for each junction in the network, and a Peak
Day demand alternative contains the peak demands for each
junction in the network. The Alternative Manager allows you to
create any number of demand alternatives.
This program allows multiple demands to be attributed to a

single junction.
The demand alternative table includes the following columns:
• Label—Identifying label of the junction element.

• Type—Demand type, Demand or Inflow. Direct editing of this item is disabled if
the junction has multiple demands (see Demand Summary below).
• Base Flow—Hydraulic load attributed to the junction for Steady-State Analysis,
or the hydraulic load before applying the Pattern time step multiplier used for
Extended Period Analysis. If the junction has multiple demands, this field
displays a single calculated Baseline Load, and direct editing of the field is
disabled (see Demand Summary below).

• Pattern—Name of the Pattern (see “Pattern Editor” on page 9-395) that applies
the time-step multiplier to the Baseline Load if the junction has multiple demands.
Direct editing is disabled and the pattern name is shown as Composite.
• Demand Summary—A summary displaying the calculated Baseline Load, the
EPS Pattern applied to the Baseline Load, and the calculated demand Type
(Demand or Inflow) for the junction. Clicking twice on a Demand Summary
opens an editing dialog box for working with multiple demands on a junction.
On the right side of this dialog box, there is also an Import button. Clicking this button
allows you to choose an ASCII tab-delimited text file from which to import demands.
More information on this procedure can be found in the Importing Demands topic (for
more information, see “Importing Demands” on page 6-301).
8.1.6 Initial Settings Alternative
The Initial Settings Alternative contains the data that set the conditions of certain
types of network elements at the beginning of the simulation. For example, a pipe can
start in an open or closed position and a pump can start in an on or off condition.
The following types of network elements have initial settings:
• “Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pipes” on page 8-355

• “Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pumps” on page 8-355
• “Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Tanks” on page 8-356
• “Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pressure Valves” on page 8-356
• “Initial Settings Alternative Editor for FCVs” on page 8-356
• “Initial Settings Alternative Editor for TCVs” on page 8-356
• “Initial Settings Alternative Editor for GPVs” on page 8-357
Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pipes

The Initial Settings Alternative for pipes is used to specify if the pipe status is initially
Open or Closed.
Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pumps

The Pump Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various initial
settings for pumps.
The fields for each record are as follows:

Alternatives
• Status—Indicates whether the pump is initially On or Off.

• Relative Speed Factor—Determines the initial speed of the pump impeller rela-
tive to the speed at which the pump curve is defined.
Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Tanks

The Tank Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various water
surface elevations (hydraulic grades) in your tank at the beginning of the simulation.
Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pressure Valves

The Pressure Valve Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various
initial settings for pressure valves (Pressure Breaker, Pressure Reducer, and Pressure
Sustaining Valves).

• Valve Status—Indicates whether the pressure valve is initially Active, Inactive
(wide-open), or Closed.
• Hydraulic Grade\Pressure—Initial setting for the valve. Depending on the input
mode, the setting is entered and displayed in terms of hydraulic grade or pressure.
Initial Settings Alternative Editor for FCVs

The FCV Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various initial
settings for Flow Control Valves.

• Valve Status—Indicates whether the FCV is initially Active, Inactive, or Closed.
• Discharge—Initial flow setting for the valve.
Initial Settings Alternative Editor for TCVs

The TCV Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various initial
settings for Throttle Control Valves.

• Valve Status—Indicates whether the TCV is initially Active, Inactive, or Closed.
• Headloss Coefficient—Initial headloss coefficient for the valve.

Initial Settings Alternative Editor for GPVs

The GPV Initial Settings Alternative allows you to choose whether the valve will be
initially Active or Closed.
Note: There is no Inactive setting for GPVs. When the valve is active,
the associated headlosses will be applied as determined by the
values entered into the GPV’s Head-Discharge Points Table.
The only available input field for GPVs is as follows:

• Valve Status—Indicates whether the GPV is initially Active or Closed.
8.1.7 Operational Alternative
The Operational Alternative (see “Alternatives” on page 8-345) allows you to specify
controls on pressure pipes, pumps, as well as valves The Controlled field contains a
Boolean (true or false) statement that indicates whether the network element is
controlled. Clicking in this field activates a button that allows you to access the
Controls dialog box (see “Controls Tab” on page 6-305) and edit the controls for this
element.
Note: Logical Controls with identical priorities will be prioritized based

on the order they appear in the Operational Controls alternative.
For more information, see “Active Topology” on page 9-419.
The Operational Controls alternative allows you to create, modify and manage both
logical controls and logical control sets. The following options are available in this
dialog box:
• Add—Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box.
From this window, you can add previously created Logical Controls to the new
control set.
• Edit—Opens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box, which allows you to Edit
the highlighted control set.
• Duplicate—Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor to
allow you to add or remove controls from the control set.
• Delete—Deletes the highlighted control set. You will be prompted to confirm this
action.
• Rename—Allows you to rename the highlighted control set.
Report—Generates a summary of the highlighted control set, listing the ID, Condi-
tions, Actions, and elements for all of the Logical Controls contained within the
control set.

Alternatives
8.1.8 Age Alternative
The Age Alternative is used when performing a water quality analysis for modeling
the age of the water through the pipe network. This alternative allows you to analyze
different scenarios for varying water ages at the network nodes.
8.1.9 Constituent Alternative
The Constituent Alternative contains the water quality data used to model a constit-
uent concentration throughout the network when performing a water quality analysis.
Selecting a constituent from the Constituent scroll-down list provides default values
for table entries. This software provides a user-editable library of constituents for
maintaining these values, which may be accessed by clicking the Ellipsis (...) button
next to the Constituent scroll-down list.
The tabbed tables at the bottom of the dialog box includes different columns
depending on the type of elements populating the table. Columns may include such
values as:
• Label—Identifying label of the element represented by the row.

• Initial Constituent—Concentration of the constituent at the beginning of the
analysis.
• Bulk Reaction—Reaction rate constant used to model reactions of the constituent
within the bulk flow.
• Wall Reaction—Reaction rate constant used to model reactions that occur with
the material along the pipe wall.
• Is Constituent Source?—True or false check to determine whether a node is a
source of the constituent.
• Constituent Source Type – This column contains a menu that allows you to
select the Constituent Source Type, and an Ellipsis (…) button that opens a dialog
box that allows you to specify the baseline concentration and constituent pattern
for the associated Constituent Source. The available Constituent Source Types are
as follows:
– Concentration—A Concentration Constituent Source fixes the concentration
of any external inflow entering the network at a node, such as flow from a
reservoir or from a negative demand placed at a junction. Clicking the Ellipsis
(...) button opens the Concentration dialog box which contains the following
fields:
- Constituent Baseline Load—Load attributed to the element before
applying the Pattern time step multiplier used for an Extended Period
Analysis.

- Constituent Pattern—Name of the Pattern that applies the time step

multiplier to the Baseline Load.
– Flow Paced Booster—A Flow Paced Booster Constituent Source adds a
fixed concentration to the flow resulting from the mixing of all inflow to the
node from other points in the network. Clicking the Ellipsis (...) button opens
the Concentration dialog box which contains the following fields:
Analysis.
- Constituent Pattern—Name of the Pattern (see “Pattern Editor” on
page 9-395) that applies the time step multiplier to the Baseline Load.
– Setpoint Booster—A Setpoint Booster Constituent Source fixes the concen-
tration of any flow leaving the source node, as long as the concentration
resulting from the inflow to the node is below the set point. Clicking the
Ellipsis (...) button opens the Concentration dialog box which contains the
following fields:
Analysis.
– Mass Booster—A Mass Booster Constituent Source adds a fixed mass flow
to the flow entering the node from other points in the network. Clicking the
Ellipsis (...) button opens the Concentration dialog box which contains the
following fields:
Analysis.
• Tank Mixing Model—This section allows you to specify the Tank Mixing Model
that will be used by the current tank. The mixing model is specified on a tank-by-
tank basis, and Completely Mixed is the default model. The following mixing
models are available:
– Two Compartment—Under this mixing model, available storage is divided
into two completely mixed compartments. Inflow and outflow is assumed to
take place in the first compartment. The second compartment receives over-
flow from the first, and this overflow is completely mixed. When this mixing
model is selected, the Two Compartment column becomes available for input.
– Completely Mixed—The default mixing model. Under this model, all inflow
and outflow is assumed to have been completely mixed.

Alternatives
– FIFO—First In/First Out Plug Flow model. This mixing model assumes that
no water mixing occurs during its residence time in the tank. Water parcels
move through the tank in a segregated fashion where the first parcel to enter is
the first parcel to leave.
– LIFO—Last In/First Out Plug Flow model. This mixing model assumes that
no water mixing occurs during its residence time in the tank. As in the FIFO
mixing model, water parcels are segregated, however in the LIFO mixing
model, the parcels stack up on top of each other, and the last parcel to enter is
the first to leave.
• Compartment 1—This column is only available for input when the Two
Compartment Tank Mixing Model is selected. This field allows you to enter the
percentage of total tank volume that the first compartment occupies. The
percentage for Compartment 2 is then initialized for you.
• Constituent Baseline Load—Load attributed to the element before applying the
Pattern time step multiplier used for an Extended Period Analysis.
• Constituent Pattern—Name of the Pattern (see “Pattern Editor” on page 9-395)
that applies the time step multiplier to the Baseline Load.
Depending on the type of highlighted network element in the table, the Use Defaults
button will reset the reaction coefficients for that element to the constituent default
values as specified in the constituent library, or it will reset the initial constituent
concentrations to 0.
8.1.10 Trace Alternative
The Trace Alternative is used when performing a water quality analysis to determine
the percentage of water at each node coming from a specified node. The Trace Alter-
native data includes a Trace Node, which is the node from which all tracing is
computed.
The trace alternative table includes the following columns:
• Label—The identifying label of node elements.

• Initial Trace—A percentage value representing the starting condition at the node.
8.1.11 Fire Flow Alternative
The Fire Flow Alternative contains the input data required to perform a fire flow anal-
ysis. This data includes the set of junction nodes for which fire flow results are
needed, the set of default values for all junctions included in the fire flow set, and a
record for each junction node in the fire flow set.

Default Flow and Pressure Constraints

Each fire flow alternative has a set of default parameters that are applied to each junc-
tion in the fire flow set. When a default value is modified, you will be prompted to
decide if the junction records that have been modified from the default should be
updated to reflect the new default value.
The default constraints are grouped in the Flow Constraints and Pressure Constraints
sections, as follows:
• Needed Fire Flow—Flow rate required at a fire flow junction to satisfy demands.
• Fire Flow Upper Limit—Maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at a with-
drawal location. It will prevent the software from computing unrealistically high
fire flows at locations such as primary system mains, which have large diameters
and high service pressures.
• Apply Fire Flows By—There are two methods for applying fire flow demands.
The fire flow demand can be added to the junction’s baseline demand, or it can
completely replace the junction’s baseline demand. The junction’s baseline
demand is defined by the Demand Alternative (see “Demand Alternative” on
page 8-354) selected for use in the Scenario along with the fire flow alternative.
• Residual Pressure—Minimum residual pressure to occur at the junction node.
The program determines the amount of fire flow available such that the residual
pressure at the junction node does not fall below this target pressure.
• Minimum Zone Pressure—Minimum pressure to occur at all junction nodes
within a zone. The model determines the available fire flow such that the
minimum zone pressures do not fall below this target pressure. Each junction has
a zone associated with it, which can be located in the junction’s input data. If you
do not want a junction node to be analyzed as part of another junction node’s fire
flow analysis, move it to another zone.
• Use Minimum System Pressure Constraint—Toggle indicating whether a
minimum pressure is to be maintained throughout the entire pipe system.
• Minimum System Pressure—Minimum pressure allowed at any junction in the
entire system as a result of the fire flow withdrawal. If the pressure at a node
anywhere in the system falls below this constraint while withdrawing fire flow,
fire flow will not be satisfied.

Alternatives
Selection Set
Set of selected elements where fire flows need to be analyzed. You can choose
between ‘All Junctions’ or a ‘Subset of Junctions’ that you can edit by clicking the
Ellipsis (...) button and accessing the Selection Set editor.
Fire Flow Loads

The table on the fire flow alternative editor displays the fire flow loads for the junc-
tions in this set. The values in this table reflect the default values entered, unless a
change is made. The columns in the table are as follows:
• Label—Label of the junction whose fire flow record is being displayed.

• Specify Local Fire Flow Constraints—Select this check box to allow input
different from the global values. When you select this check box, the fields in that
row turn from yellow (read-only) to white (editable).
• Needed Fire Flow—Flow rate required at the junction to meet fire flow demands.
This value will be added to the junction’s baseline demand, or it will replace the
junction’s baseline demand, depending on the default setting for applying fire
flows.
• Fire Flow Upper Limit—Maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at a with-
drawal location. This value will prevent the software from computing unrealisti-
cally high fire flows at locations such as primary system mains, which have large
diameters and high service pressures. This value will be added to the junction’s
baseline demand, or it will replace the junction’s baseline demand, depending on
the default setting for applying fire flows.
• Residual Pressure, Minimum Zone Pressure, Minimum System Pressure—
Set of pressure constraints for each Fire Flow node. See description for each of
these parameters in the Default Flow and Pressure Constraints section above.
Use Defaults
Note: The Defaults for a fire flow alternative can only be set in the root
alternative. All child alternatives inherit (Inheritance) the Default
values from the root. The set of junction nodes is also inherited
from the root and cannot be altered in the child alternatives.
Click the Use Defaults button to reset the selected row to the default values for the
Fire Flow Alternative. This does not cause the record to inherit from its parent. It only
causes it to reflect the Default values.

8.1.12 Capital Cost Alternative
One of the most common uses of the Capital Cost Manager is to compare the cost
between several different system configurations. The compartmentalization of the
data afforded by the cost alternative makes it easy to develop and subsequently
compare various cost data sets. Developing multiple cost alternatives is an effective
way to evaluate the cost of several different proposed solutions or to separate the costs
associated with several phases of construction.
The cost alternative editor contains a tab for each type of element. Each tab contains
the following fields for editing the cost data associated with an element.
• Label—Identifies the element associated with a particular record.

• Include in Cost Calculation—This field allows you to specify whether or not to
include the element in the cost calculation. If this field is checked, the item will be
included in the cost calculation. For more information, see “Include In Cost
Calculation?” on page 6-314.
• Element Costs—This field is only enabled when the field Include in Cost Calcu-
lation has a check mark. If this field is editable, you can click it to open up a
dialog box where you can edit the construction and non-construction costs associ-
ated with an element. Note that you can Global Edit this field to edit the construc-
tion (see “Construction Costs” on page 6-315) and non-construction costs (see
“Non-Construction Costs” on page 6-314) of all the elements in the alternative.
8.1.13 User Data Alternative
The User Data Alternative allows you to edit the data defined in the User Data Exten-
sion command (see “User Data Extension Dialog Box” on page 6-323) for each of the
network element types. The User Data Alternative editor contains a tab for each type
of network element.
8.1.14 Energy Cost Alternative
The Energy Cost Alternative allows you to specify which tanks and pumps will be
included in the Energy Cost calculations. For pumps, you can also select which energy
pricing pattern will be used, or create a new one.
The energy cost alternative editor contains a tab for each type of element. Each tab
contains the following fields for editing the cost data associated with an element.
• Label—Identifies the element associated with a particular record.

Scenarios
• Include in Energy Calculation—This field allows you to specify whether or not

to include the element in the energy cost calculation. If this field is checked, the
item will be included in the cost calculation.
• Energy Pricing—This field is only available on the Pump tab of the Energy Cost
Alternative editor. This column consists of a menu containing all of the energy
pricing patterns that have been created, and an Ellipsis (...) button that opens the
Energy Pricing Manager.
8.2 Scenarios
A Scenario contains all the input data (in the form of Alternatives), calculation
options, results, and notes associated with a set of calculations. Scenarios let you set
up an unlimited number of “What If?” situations for your model, and then modify,
compute, and review your system under those conditions.
You can create scenarios that reuse or share data in existing alternatives, submit
multiple scenarios for calculation in a batch run (see “Batch Run” on page 8-368),
switch between scenarios, and compare scenario results (see “Scenario Comparison”
on page 13-555)—all with a few mouse clicks. There is no limit to the number of
scenarios that you can create.
There are three types of scenarios:
• Base Scenarios—Contain all of your working data. When you start a new project,
you will begin with a default base scenario. As you enter data and calculate your
model, you are working with this default base scenario and the alternatives it
references.
• Child Scenarios—Inherit data from a base scenario, or other child scenarios.
Child scenarios allow you to freely change data for one or more elements in your
system. Child scenarios can reflect some or all of the values contained in their
parent. This is a very powerful concept, giving you the ability to make changes in
a parent scenario that will trickle down through child scenarios, while also giving
you the ability to override values for some or all of the elements in child
scenarios.
Note: The calculation options are not inherited between scenarios, but
are duplicated when the scenario is first created. The
alternatives and data records, however, are inherited. There is a
permanent, dynamic link from a child back to its parent.
• Manual Fire Flow Scenarios—Manual Fire Flow scenarios can be generated

automatically for any junction or set of junctions in your model. You specify the
junctions that you want to perform the Fire Flow analysis on, input the fire flow
demand at the junctions, and whether this demand should replace or be added to
the other demands at the junctions in question. The program then automatically

creates a scenario for each junction that was included in the manual fire flow list.
These scenarios reflect the changes in the network when the respective fire flow
demands are substituted for/added to the normal demands at that junction. An
additional benefit of manual fire flow scenarios is the ability to run the newly
created scenarios in an extended period simulation, which can help you assess the
effects of changing conditions and controls on the availability of the required fire
flow at the respective junctions. For more information, see “Manual Fire Flow
Scenarios” on page 9-387.
Scenarios include:
• “Scenario Selection” on page 8-365

• “Editing Scenarios” on page 8-365
• “Scenario Control Center” on page 8-366
• “Scenario Wizard” on page 8-369
• “Scenario Editor” on page 8-371
8.2.1 Scenario Selection
You can change the current scenario by using the Scenario drop-down list located on
the Analysis Toolbar (see “Analysis Toolbar” on page 2-81) on the main application
window. When you select a different scenario, your current input data, calculation
options, and calculated results (if available) will reflect the selected scenario and the
alternatives it references.
8.2.2 Editing Scenarios
Once scenarios and alternatives are created, you do not need to take any special steps
to input data into the alternatives referenced by the current scenario. This happens
automatically as you make changes to your data. Changes to your data are always
applied to the alternatives in your active scenario. For example, consider that a pipe
has a 12-in. diameter in the alternative storing data for the Base scenario. Then you
switch to Scenario 2, which references another alternative, and change the pipe diam-
eter to 16-in. The new value will automatically be associated with the alternative in
Scenario 2. If you switch back to the Base scenario, the pipe diameter will revert to
12-in.
You can also enter data directly into an alternative using the Alternatives Editor (for
more information, see “Alternatives Editor” on page 8-349). This editor allows you to
see all of the changes that you have made in a single alternative. If you make an unin-
tended change to the active child scenario and you wish to remove it, go to the tabular
editor for the type of input data you changed, and clear the leading check box on the
records for the elements you wish to restore.

Scenarios
8.2.3 Scenario Control Center
The Scenario Control Center allows you to create, edit, and manage scenarios. There
is one built-in default scenario—the Base scenario. If you wish, you only have to use
this one scenario. However, you can save yourself time by creating additional
scenarios that reference the alternatives needed to perform and recall the results of
each of your calculations. There is no limit to the number of scenarios that you can
create.
Note: When you delete a scenario, you are not losing data records
because scenarios never actually hold calculation data records
(alternatives do). The alternatives and data records referenced
by that scenario will still exist until you explicitly delete them. By
accessing the Alternative Manager, you can delete the
referenced alternatives and data records.
The Scenario Control Center is divided into four sections:
• The three buttons that run across the top of the window:
• Close—Close the Scenario Control Center.
• Help—Open the online help.
The series of five buttons running along the left side of the window:
• Scenario Wizard—Open the Scenario Wizard, which walks you step-by-step

through the creation of a new scenario.
• Scenario Management—Offers a menu of options for creating, editing, and
managing scenarios:
– Make Current—Sets the currently highlighted scenario as the active
scenario, placing a red check on the currently active scenario in the tree view
of the Scenario Control Center. Since edits are performed on the currently
active scenario, this lets you change the active scenario. When you use Make
Current, notice that the scenario in the main window Scenario drop-down list
changes to the currently highlighted one.
– Add—Prompts for a name, then creates a new child, base, or Manual Fire
Flow scenario (for more information, see “Manual Fire Flow Scenarios” on
page 9-387). If you create a child scenario, it will be based on the scenario
that is currently highlighted.
– Edit—Open the Scenario Editor (see “Scenario Editor” on page 8-371) for
the scenario that is currently highlighted.
– Rename—Rename an existing scenario. This invokes an in-place editor in the
tree view of the available scenarios. Make the desired changes to the existing
name and press Enter.

– Delete—Delete the scenario that is currently highlighted.

– Report—Generate a summary report for the scenario that is highlighted,
including alternatives, calculation options, notes, and results.
• Alternatives—Open the Alternatives Manager for creating, editing, and
managing alternatives.
• Batch Run—Open the Batch Run dialog box (see “Batch Run” on page 8-368)
for selecting from among the available scenarios and initiating calculations.
• Scenario Comparison—Open the Annotation Comparison Wizard, which allows
you to create a drawing displaying the differences in input and output variables
between two scenarios.
The pane in the center of the dialog box:
• Scenarios Pane—Available scenarios in a hierarchical tree showing the parent-

child relationships. You can right-click any scenario to perform scenario manage-
ment functions on it. You can double-click parent scenarios to expand or collapse
the child scenarios beneath them.
The pane on the right side of the dialog box, which displays a variety of information
depending on which of the following tabs is selected:
• Alternatives Tab—Alternatives referenced by the highlighted

scenario, showing the type and name for each alternative. An icon
distinguishes whether the alternative belongs to the scenario or is
inherited from its parent scenario. Double-click any alternative to open the Alter-
natives Editor (for more information, see “Alternatives Editor” on page 8-349).
• Summary Tab—Summary of the calculation options for the highlighted scenario,
and any notes you have associated with it.
• Results Tab—Summary of the last calculation performed for the highlighted
scenario.
Scenario Control Center includes:
• “Batch Run” on page 8-368

• “Creating Scenarios to Model What-if Situations?” on page 8-368

Scenarios
Batch Run
Performing a batch run allows you to set up and run calculations for multiple
scenarios at once. This is helpful if you want to queue a large number of calculations,
or manage a group of smaller calculations as a set. The list of selected scenarios for
the batch run will remain with your project until you change it.
To use this dialog box, check the scenarios you want to run and click the Batch
button. Each scenario will be calculated. You can cancel the batch run between any
scenario calculation.
When the batch is completed, the scenario that was current will remain current, even if
it was not one that was calculated. Select a calculated scenario from the main window
drop-down list to see the results throughout the program, or select it from the Scenario
Control Center and click the Results tab to preview the results.
The Batch Run dialog box contains a Select button that displays options you can use
to select all scenarios or clear your selections.
Creating Scenarios to Model What-if Situations?

The scenario management feature was designed to let you model “what-if” situations
by easily switching between different input data sets without having to re-enter data,
and by comparing different output results just as easily.
To create a new scenario:
1. Open the Scenario Control Center dialog box by clicking the Scenario Control
Center button next to the drop-down scenario list in the main application window.
2. Open the Scenario Wizard by clicking its button in the upper left of the Scenario
Control Center dialog box.
3. Complete each step in the Scenario Wizard—Name the new scenario, choose
which scenario to base it on, and choose the alternatives to be included. Click
Next between each step, and click Finish when you are done.
4. Close the Scenario Control Center dialog box. Notice the scenario you have just
created is displayed as the current scenario in the Scenario drop-down list in the
main application window.
5. Proceed to modify your model with the changes you want recorded in the new
scenario.

8.2.4 Scenario Wizard
The Scenario Wizard will guide you step-by-step through the process of creating a
new scenario.
These are the basic steps for creating a new scenario:
• Name—Name the scenario and add some comments if you wish. For more infor-
mation, see “Scenario Wizard—Step 1” on page 8-369.
• Base—Select a scenario on which to base the new scenario. For more informa-
tion, see “Scenario Wizard—Step 2” on page 8-370.
• Calculation—Choose the type of calculation that you would like to perform, as
well as other calculation options.
• Alternatives—Specify the alternative types with which you would like to work.
For more information, see “Scenario Wizard—Step 4” on page 8-370.
• New/Existing—Create and/or select alternatives for your new scenario. For more
information, see “Scenario Wizard—Step 5” on page 8-370.
• Preview—Preview the scenario, and create it when satisfied. For more informa-
tion, see “Scenario Wizard—Step 6” on page 8-371.
Scenario Wizard—Step 1
Here you can enter a unique name and an optional note for the new scenario that you
are creating.
The Name field allows you to input a distinguishing name for this scenario. A default
name is provided, but we recommend that you change it to something more descrip-
tive. If the new scenario will be based on another scenario, you may want a name that
indicates what will be different about the new scenario. For example: Post Develop-
ment.
The next field is optional, and allows you to input free-form text that will be associ-
ated with the new scenario. Use it to make detailed notes about the conditions the
scenario will model.
Click the Next button to proceed to the next step in defining a new scenario.

Scenarios
Click the existing scenario on which you would like to base your new scenario. Your
new child scenario will inherit data from this parent scenario, and will be initialized
with the same calculation settings and options. The Scenario Wizard, designed to
introduce you to scenarios, does not allow you to create new base scenarios.
Existing scenarios in your project are displayed in a tree structure, giving you a
graphic depiction of the parent-child relationships.
Click the Next button to proceed to the next step.
This step of the Scenario Wizard allows you to specify the type of calculation to be
associated with the scenario you are creating.
If you choose Steady State mode, you are also given the option to perform an auto-
mated fire flow analysis.
If you choose Extended Period mode, you are also given the option to perform one of
the Water Quality Analysis (Age, Constituent, or Trace analysis).
Select the check boxes next to the types of alternatives you want to include in the new
scenario. The alternatives for boxes you do not check will be inherited from the speci-
fied parent scenario. You will be free to add or remove alternatives to the scenario
after you create it.
Click the Next button to proceed to the next step in defining a new scenario.
Here you are asked to specify the source for each alternative you have requested in the
previous tab.
• Create New Alternative—If you choose to create a new alternative, it will inherit
from the same type of alternative in the specified or parent scenario. This means it
will initially use all the same input data values. Enter a unique and descriptive
name for the new alternative.
• Use Existing Alternative—If you choose to use an existing alternative, you will
be shown the tree of existing alternatives from which to choose. In this case, you
will not be creating a new alternative for use in the scenario, and instead may
actually be sharing an alternative with another scenario.
Click the Next button to proceed to the next step.

The last step of the Scenario Wizard displays a summary of the scenario you have
defined and are about to create.
In the left pane is a preview of the scenario as it relates to its parent and other
scenarios. In the right pane is a list of the alternatives (see “Alternatives” on page 8-
345) it references, showing their labels and types. An icon indicates whether a given
alternative is local to the new child scenario, or if it is inherited from the specified or
parent scenario.
If you are satisfied, click the Finished button to create the new scenario.
8.2.5 Scenario Editor
The Scenario Editor is the control center for each analysis. It is the place where you
access or change all the information for performing a single calculation (alternatives,
calculation type, calculation options, results, and notes). It is organized by the
following tabs:
• Alternatives—Edit or view the alternatives to be used by this scenario. For more

information, see “Alternatives Tab” on page 8-372.
• Calculation—Specify the type of hydraulic/water quality calculations to be
performed, and click the GO button. For more information, see “Scenario
Editor—Calculation Tab” on page 8-372.
• Results—View the hydraulic/water quality calculation results summary. For more
information, see “Results Tab” on page 8-374.
• Notes—Edit or view notes for this scenario. For more information, see “Notes
Scenario Editor includes:
• “Alternatives Tab” on page 8-372

• “Scenario Editor—Calculation Tab” on page 8-372
• “Notes Tab” on page 8-374
• “Results Tab” on page 8-374

Scenarios
Alternatives Tab
The Alternatives tab, located in the Scenario Editor, allows you to specify the alterna-
tives (see “Alternatives” on page 8-345) that will be used by this scenario. There is
one row for each Alternative Type. You need only concern yourself with the rows that
correspond to the changes you would like to model using this scenario.
To specify the alternatives you would like to work with, click the check box next to
the alternative type. For example, if you would like to see how your system behaves
by changing the shape or size of a few pipes, then click the check box next to the
Physical Properties Alternative row.
If you would like to use an existing alternative that you have already set up, use the
drop-down list to choose the desired alternative. If you would like to create a new
alternative, click the New button. You will be asked to name the new alternative, and
the Alternatives Editor will open.
Note: When this scenario is active, the alternatives that you specify
here will be active. Changes that you make to your model will be
made in these alternatives. When you calculate this scenario,
these are the alternatives that will be used.
This tab will take on a different appearance depending on

whether you are editing a base scenario or child scenario. When
editing a base scenario, the check box column described above
will not be present. You can use the Ellipsis (…) button located
to the right of each drop-down list to access the associated
Alternatives Manager (for more information, see “Alternatives
Manager” on page 8-347).
The Scenario Wizard will walk you through all of the steps required to create a new
scenario. If you are unsure how to specify the alternatives that you would like to work
with, we recommend that you use this wizard.
Scenario Editor—Calculation Tab

This dialog box is the control center for each network analysis. This program is
capable of performing both a Hydraulic Analysis and a Water Quality Analysis. Also,
Extended Period Analysis, which considers time-variable hydraulic demands and
constituent source concentrations, is available. Patterns (see “Pattern Editor” on
page 9-395) are used to define the time-variable aspects of these system loads. Also
contributing to time-variable hydraulic conditions are tank characteristics and controls
(“Simple Control Dialog Box” on page 6-305) associated with Pipes, Pumps, and
Valves.

Note: Calibration is one of the most important steps in developing a

hydraulic and/or water quality model. This program provides an
easy-to-use adjustment feature that lets you tweak the input data
to help you match data observed in the field. In addition, new to
WaterCAD is the Darwin Calibrator, which allows you to calibrate
your model manually or with the assistance of Genetic
Algorithms. For more information, see “GA Optimization and
Calibration” on page 10-421.
Each calculation depends upon a number of parameters that can

optionally be configured using the Calculation Options dialog
box.
This dialog box allows you to specify the following data and calculation modes:
• Steady State/Extended Period Simulation—If you have selected Extended

Period calculation, a set of extended period options become available for editing.
These are Start Time, Duration, and Hydraulic Time Step. For more information,
see “Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation” on page 9-378.
• Analysis Modes—In addition to performing a standard hydraulic analysis, you
are given the option to perform a Water Quality Analysis (in Steady-State mode),
or a Fire Flow analysis (in Extended Period Simulation mode). For more informa-
tion, see “Optional Analysis” on page 9-380.
• Global Demand and Roughness Adjustments—Use this feature to tweak junc-
tion demands and pipe roughnesses without permanently changing the value of
the input data. You can experiment with different adjustment factors until you find
the one that causes your calculation results to most closely correspond with your
observed field data. For more information, see “Global Demand and Roughness
Adjustments” on page 9-381.
• Check Data/Validate—This feature allows you to validate your model against
typical data entry errors, hard-to-detect topology problems, and modeling prob-
lems. When the Validate box is checked, the model validation is automatically run
prior to calculations. It can also be run at any time by clicking the Check Data
button. The process will produce either a dialog box stating “No Problem Found,”
or a status log with a list of messages. For more information, see “Steady-State/
Extended Period Simulation” on page 9-378.“Check Data/Validate” on page 9-
382
• Calculation Options—Use this feature to specify parameters affecting hydraulic
and water quality calculations. For more information, see “Calculation Options”
on page 9-391.

Scenarios
Tip: If the model has not been calculated, or if the input data has
been changed since the last calculation, the word Compute
(displayed in Red) will appear in the status pane in the lower
right corner of the main editing window. This is a signal that the
model needs to be recalculated.
Clicking the GO button will perform the calculations.
Notes Tab
Use this tab as a memo field to input text that will be associated with the item on
which you are working.
Results Tab
The Results tab contains a summary of the last calculation performed using this
scenario. Click the Save button to save the results to an ASCII text file. Click the
Print Preview button to preview the Scenario Results Summary Report.
To open the Results tab for the active scenario: Click the GO button on the toolbar, or
select Analysis > Compute. In the resulting dialog box, click the Results tab.
To open the Results tab for a specific scenario: From the Scenario Control Center (see
“Scenario Control Center” on page 8-366), right-click the scenario that you wish to
edit, and select Edit that appears. In the resulting dialog box, click the Results tab.
Note: Immediately after you run the calculations, the Results tab
displays automatically. You will notice a green, yellow, or red
light in that tab indicating how successful the computations
were.
The light and folder color provides you with the following information:
• Green Light—Calculations were run successfully, without any warning or error

messages being generated.
• Yellow Light—Calculations were run successfully, without error messages being
generated. However, there are one or more warning messages. Warnings are
displayed in the results summary in this tab.
• Red Light—Calculations were not run successfully and error messages were
generated, as shown in the results summary of this tab.
In order to generate a Scenario Summary Report (see “Scenario Summary Report” on

page 13-517), click the Report button. Click the Element Messages button to open up
a table that displays all the messages generated during the run.

Double-click the folders or click the + sign to open them up and display messages
relevant to the folder’s caption. When you click the copy button or save button the
exposed text will be stored.

Scenarios

Chapter
Modeling Capabilities 9
WaterCAD provides unmatched modeling capabilities, allowing you to model and
optimize practically any distribution system aspect, including the following opera-
tions:
• Hydraulic Analysis
– Perform a steady-state analysis for a snapshot view of the system, or perform
an extended-period simulation to see how the system behaves over time.
– Use any common friction method: Hazen-Williams, Darcy-Weisbach, or
Manning’s methods.
– Take advantage of scenario management to see how your system reacts to
different demand and physical conditions, including fire and emergency
usage.
– Control pressure and flow completely by using flexible valve configurations.
You can automatically control pipe, valve, and pump status based on changes
in system pressure (or based on the time of day). Control pumps, pipes, and
valves based on any pressure junction or tank in the distribution system.
– Perform automated fire flow analysis for any set of elements and zones in the
network.
– Calibrate your model manually, or use the Darwin Calibrator (for more infor-
mation, see “GA Optimization and Calibration” on page 10-421).
– Generate capital and energy-cost estimates.
– Compute system head curves.
• Water Quality Analysis

– Track the growth or decay of substances (such as chlorine) as they travel
through the distribution network.
– Determine the age of water anywhere in the network.
– Identify source trends throughout the system.
Modeling capabilities include:

Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation
• “Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation” on page 9-378

• “Optional Analysis” on page 9-380
• “Global Demand and Roughness Adjustments” on page 9-381
• “Check Data/Validate” on page 9-382
• “Calculate Network” on page 9-383
• “Flow Emitters” on page 9-384
• “Fire Flow Analysis” on page 9-385
• “Water Quality Analysis” on page 9-389
• “Calculation Options” on page 9-391
• “Patterns” on page 9-393
• “Logical Controls” on page 9-397
• “Active Topology” on page 9-419
9.1 Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation

WaterCAD gives the choice between performing a steady-state analysis of the system
or performing an extended-period simulation over any time period.
9.1.1 Steady-State Simulation
Steady-state analyses determine the operating behavior of the system at a specific

point in time or under steady-state conditions (flow rates and hydraulic grades remain
constant over time). This type of analysis can be useful for determining pressures and
flow rates under minimum, average, peak, or short term effects on the system due to
fire flows.
For this type of analysis, the network equations are determined and solved with tanks
being treated as fixed grade boundaries. The results that are obtained from this type of
analysis are instantaneous values and may or may not be representative of the values
of the system a few hours, or even a few minutes, later in time.

Modeling Capabilities
9.1.2 Extended Period Simulation
When the variation of the system attributes over time is important, an extended period
simulation is appropriate. This type of analysis allows you to model tanks filling and
draining, regulating valves opening and closing, and pressures and flow rates
changing throughout the system in response to varying demand conditions and auto-
matic control strategies formulated by the Stand-Alone.
While a steady-state model may tell whether the system has the capability to meet a
certain average demand, an extended period simulation indicates whether the system
has the ability to provide acceptable levels of service over a period of minutes, hours,
or days. Extended period simulations (EPSes) can also be used for energy consump-
tion and cost studies, as well as water quality modeling (for more information, see
“Water Quality Theory” on page B-733).
Data requirements for extended period simulations are greater than for steady-state
runs. In addition to the information required by a steady-state model, you also need to
determine water usage patterns (see “Patterns” on page 9-393), more detailed tank
information, and operational rules for pumps and valves (for more information, see
“Pump Theory” on page B-723 and “Valve Theory” on page B-726).
Note: Each of the parameters needed for an extended period analysis

has a default value. You will most likely want to change the
values to suit your particular analysis.
Occasionally the numerical engine will not converge during an

extended period analysis. This is usually due to controls
(typically based on tank elevations) or control valves (typically
pressure regulating valves) toggling between two operational
modes (on/off for pump controls, open/closed for pipe controls,
active/closed for valves). When this occurs, try adjusting the
hydraulic time step to a smaller value. This will minimize the
differences in boundary conditions between time steps, and may
allow for convergence.
The following additional information is required only when performing Extended

Period Simulation, and therefore is not enabled when Steady-State Analysis has been
specified.
• Start Time—The start time format is a standard 24-hour clock. The format is
Hour:Minute:Second AM or PM. (e.g., 12:45:30 PM).
• Duration—The duration can be any positive real number.
• Hydraulic Time Step—Enter the time interval between hydraulic solutions for
this calculation. The hydraulic time step is the maximum amount of time that the
hydraulic conditions of the network are assumed to be constant.

Optional Analysis
9.2 Optional Analysis

Note: Water quality calculations are time variable in nature, and
therefore are only available when the calculation is configured
for extended period analysis. Be sure that the Extended Period
Analysis button in the Hydraulic Analysis portion of the
Calculation dialog box is selected.
Fire Flow calculations are based on a steady-state calculation.

Therefore, if the calculation is configured to perform an
Extended Period Analysis, the Fire Flow Analysis check box is
disabled. Be sure that the Steady State Analysis button in the
Hydraulic Analysis portion of the dialog box is selected.
In addition to performing a standard hydraulic analysis, you are given the option to
perform a water quality analysis or a fire flow analysis:
Tip: Use the Alternatives Manager (see “Alternatives Manager” on

page 8-347) to set up and maintain multiple Fire Flow data sets.
• Water Quality Analysis—This check box configures the calculation to analyze

for water quality. When this box is checked, you need to specify the type of water
quality analysis to perform. This software is capable of performing three types of
water quality analyses:
– Age—Determine how long the water has been in the system. For more infor-
mation, see “Age Analysis” on page 9-389.
– Constituent—Determine the concentration of a constituent at all nodes and
links in the system. For more information, see “Constituent Analysis” on
page 9-390.
– Trace—Determine the percentage of the water at all nodes and links in the
system. The source is designated as a specific node. For more information, see
“Trace Analysis” on page 9-391.
• Fire Flow Analysis—This check box configures WaterCAD to analyze the
system for available fire flow. For more information, see “Fire Flow Analysis” on
page 9-385.

9.3 Global Demand and Roughness

Adjustments
Demand and Roughness Adjustments based on observed data are an important part of
the development of hydraulic and water quality models. It is a powerful feature for
tweaking the two most commonly used parameters during model calibration: junction
demands and pipe roughness.
One of the first steps performed during a calculation is the transformation of the input
data into the required format for the numerical analysis engine. If a factor and operator
are present in the adjustment fields when the GO button is clicked, the factor is used
during this transformation. This does not permanently change the value of the input
data, but allows you to experiment with different adjustment factors until you find the
one that causes your calculation results to most closely correspond with your observed
field data.
The Calibration section contains the following data:
• Demand—Use this adjustment field to temporarily adjust the individual demands

at all junction nodes in the system that have demands for the current scenario. For
example, assume node J-10 has two demands, a 100 gpm fixed pattern demand,
and a 200 gpm residential pattern demand, for a total baseline demand of 300
gpm. If you enter a demand adjustment multiplier of 1.25, the input to the numer-
ical engine will be 125 gpm and 250 gpm respectively, for a total baseline demand
of 375 gpm at node J-10. If you use the Set operator to set the demands to 400, the
demand will be adjusted proportionally to become 133 and 267 gpm, for a total
baseline of 400 gpm. In addition, if a junction has an inflow of 100 gpm (or a
demand of -100 gpm), and the adjustment operation is Set demand to 200 gpm,
then the inflow at that junction will be -200 gpm (equivalent to a demand of 200
gpm).
• Roughness—Use this adjustment field to temporarily adjust the roughness of all
pipes in the distribution network.
• Apply—Click the Apply button to permanently adjust the demands or roughness.
Generally, you will use this button after experimenting with the adjustment factors
on successive calculations, and comparing the calculation results to observed field
data.

Check Data/Validate
9.4 Check Data/Validate

This feature allows you to validate your model against typical data entry errors, hard
to detect topology problems, and modeling problems. When the Validate box is
checked, the model validation is automatically run prior to calculations. It can also be
run at any time by clicking the Check Data button. The process will produce either a
dialog box stating No Problems Found or a status log (see “Status Log” on page 13-
561) with a list of messages.
The validation process will generate two types of messages. A warning message
means that a particular part of the model (i.e., a pipe’s roughness) does not conform to
the expected value, or is not within the expected range of values. This type of warning
is useful but not fatal. Therefore, no corrective action is required to proceed with a
calculation. Warning messages are often generated as a result of a topographical or
data entry error and should be corrected. An error message, on the other hand, is a
fatal error, and the calculation cannot proceed before it is corrected. Typically, error
messages are related to problems in the network topology, such as a pump or valve not
being connected on both its intake and discharge sides.
Note: In earlier versions of the software, it was possible to create a

topological situation that was problematic but was not checked
for in the network topology validation. The situation could be
created by morphing a node element such as a junction, tank, or
reservoir into a pump or valve. This situation is now detected
and corrected automatically, but it is strongly recommended that
you verify the flow direction of the pump or valve in question. If
you have further questions or comments related to this, please
contact Haestad Methods Support.
Warning messages related to the value of a particular attribute

being outside the accepted range can often be corrected by
adjusting the allowable range for that attribute.
The check data algorithm performs the following validations:
• Network Topology—Checks that the network contains at least one boundary

node, one pipe, and one junction. These are the minimum network requirements.
It also checks for fully connected pumps and valves and that every node is reach-
able from a boundary node through open links.
• Element Validation—Checks that every element in the network is valid for the
calculation. For example, this validation ensures that all pipes have a non-zero
length, a non-zero diameter, a roughness value that is within the expected range,
etc. Each type of element has its own checklist. This same validation is performed
when you edit an element in a dialog box. The dialog box will not close until each
item on the checklist is satisfied.

9.5 Calculate Network

Note: The Check Data button performs a quick check of your input
data and displays any errors found. It is recommended to run
this function before the actual run of the calculations. Note,
however, that the data is automatically checked when you
perform the calculations if Validate is On.
The following steps need to be completed before performing hydraulic calculations

for a network.
1. Set the Calculation mode to Steady-State or Extended Period (for more informa-
tion, see “Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation” on page 9-378). If Extended
Period is selected, then specify the starting time, the duration, and the time step to
be used.
2. Optionally, in Extended Period mode, you may perform a Water Quality Analysis.
Set Water Quality On and select one of the three available types of calculations:
Age, Constituent or Trace.
3. Optionally, in Steady-State mode, you may also perform a Fire Flow Analysis by
setting the Fire Flow Analysis toggle. For more information, see “Fire Flow
Analysis” on page 9-385.
4. Optionally, in the Calibration section, you may modify the demand or roughness
values of your entire network for calibration purposes. If a factor and operator are
present in the calibration fields when the GO button is clicked, the factor is used
during this calculation. This does not permanently change the value of the input
data, but allows you to experiment with different calibration factors until you find
the one that causes your calculation results to most closely correspond with your
observed field data. To permanently change the value of the input data, select
Apply.
5. Optionally, click the Options button to verify general algorithm parameters used
to perform Hydraulic and Water Quality calculations.
6. Turn on Validate, or click the Check Data button to ensure that your input data
does not contain errors.
7. Click the GO button to start the calculations.

Flow Emitters
9.6 Flow Emitters

Flow Emitters are devices associated with junctions that model the flow through a
nozzle or orifice. In these situations, the demand (i.e., the flow rate through the
emitter) varies in proportion to the pressure at the junction raised to some power. The
constant of proportionality is termed the discharge coefficient. For nozzles and sprin-
kler heads, the exponent on pressure is 0.5 and the manufacturer usually states the
value of the discharge coefficient as the flow rate in gpm through the device at a 1 psi
pressure drop.
Emitters are used to model flow through sprinkler systems and irrigation networks.
They can also be used to simulate leakage in a pipe connected to the junction (if a
discharge coefficient and pressure exponent for the leaking crack or joint can be esti-
mated) and compute a fire flow at the junction (the flow available at some minimum
residual pressure). In the latter case, one would use a very high value of the discharge
coefficient (e.g., 100 times the maximum flow expected) and modify the junction’s
elevation to include the equivalent head of the pressure target.
When both an emitter and a normal demand are specified for a junction, the demand
that WaterCAD reports in its output results includes both the normal demand and the
flow through the emitter.
9.7 Parallel VSPs

Variable speed pumps (VSPs) can be modeled in parallel. This allows you to model
multiple VSPs operated at the same speed at one pump station. To model this, a VSP
is chosen as a “lead VSP”, which will be the primary pump to deliver the target head.
If the lead VSP cannot deliver the target head while operating at maximum speed, then
the second VSP will be triggered on and the VSP calculation will determine the
common speed for both VSPs. If the target head cannot be delivered while operating
both VSPs at the maximum speed, then another VSP will be triggered on until the
target head is met with all the available VSPs.
All VSPs that are turned on are operated at the same speed. VSPs are to be turned off
if they are not required due to a change in demand. If all standby VSPs are running at
the maximum speed, but still cannot deliver the target head, the VSPs are translated
into fixed speed pumps.
To correctly apply the VSP feature to multiple variable speed pumps in parallel, the
following criteria must be met:
1. Parallel VSPs must be controlled by the same target node;

2. Parallel VSPs must be controlled by the same target head;

3. Parellel VSPs must have the same maximum relative speed factors;
4. Parallel VSPs must be identical, namely the same pump curve.
RELATED TOPICS
• See “Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series” on page 686.
9.8 Fire Flow Analysis

Note: Results of fire flow calculations, which are obtained from
calculations performed separately for an automatic batch run,
are only reported in the Fire Flow tab of the individual element
editors and in the Fire Flow Tabular Report (accessed from the
Report menu or the Tabular Reports button). Results reported in
the other Element Editor tabs do not take into account any fire
flow, unless you explicitly entered the fire flow as a demand at a
specific junction.
One of the goals of a water distribution system is to provide adequate capacity to fight
fires. WaterCAD’ powerful fire flow analysis capabilities can be used to determine if
the system can meet the fire flow demands while maintaining various pressure
constraints. Fire flows can be computed for a single node, a group of selected nodes,
or all nodes in the system. A complete fire flow analysis can comprise hundreds or
thousands of individual flow solutions—one for each junction selected for the fire
flow analysis.
Fire flows are computed at user-specified locations by iteratively assigning demands

and computing system pressures. The program calculates a steady-state analysis for
each node in the Fire Flow Alternative. At each node, it begins by running a Steady-
State analysis to ensure that the fire flow constraints that have been set can be met
without withdrawing Fire Flow from any of the nodes. If the constraints are met in this
initial run, the program then begins iteratively assigning the Needed Fire Flow
demands at each of the nodes, and checking to ensure that the constraints are met. The
program then runs another set of Steady State analyses, this time either adding the
Maximum Fire Flow (as set in the Fire Flow Upper Limit input box of the Fire Flow
Alternative) to whatever normal demands are required at that node, or replacing the
normal demands. In either case, the program checks the residual pressure at that node,
the Minimum Zone Pressure, and, if applicable, the Minimum System Pressure. If the
Fire Flow Upper Limit can be delivered while maintaining the various pressure
constraints, that node will satisfy the Fire Flow constraints. If one or more of the pres-
sure constraints is not met while attempting to withdraw the Fire Flow Upper Limit,
the program will iteratively assign lesser demands until it finds the maximum flow
that can be provided while maintaining the pressure constraints. If a node is not
providing the Fire Flow Upper Limit, it is because the Residual Pressure at that node,
the Minimum Zone Pressure, or the Minimum System Pressure constraints are not met

Fire Flow Analysis
while attempting to withdraw the Fire Flow Upper Limit (or the maximum number of
iterations has been reached). If a node completely fails to meet the Fire Flow
constraints, it is because the network is unable to deliver the Needed Fire Flow while
still meeting the pressure constraints.
After the program has gone through the above process for each node in the Fire Flow
Analysis, it runs a final Steady-State calculation that does not apply Fire Flow
demands to any of the junctions. This provides a baseline of calculated results that can
then be compared to the Fire Flow conditions, which can be determined by viewing
the results presented on the Fire Flow tab (see “Fire Flow Tab” on page 6-311) of the
individual junction editors, or in the Fire Flow Tabular Report (for more information,
see “Tabular Reports” on page 13-517). The baseline pressures are the pressures that
are modeled under the standard steady-state demand conditions in which fire flows are
not exerted.
Tip: All parameters defining a fire flow analysis, such as the residual
pressure or the minimum zone pressure, are explained in detail
in the Fire Flow Alternative (see “Fire Flow Alternative” on page 8-
360)and in the Fire Flow tab (see “Fire Flow Tab” on page 6-311)
topics.
An online Tutorial on Fire Flow can be found by selecting the

Help > Tutorials menu.
To perform a Fire Flow analysis:
• Open the Scenario dialog box. For more information, see “Scenario Editor” on
page 8-371.
• Select the Calculation tab.
• Select Steady-State calculation and turn on the Fire Flow check box.
9.8.1 Fire Flow Results
After performing a fire flow analysis, calculation results are available for each
junction node in the fire flow selection set. These results can be viewed in the
predefined Fire Flow Report (in tabular format), accessed by clicking the
Tabular Reports button, highlighting Fire Flow Report, and clicking OK. Note that
results for the nodes that were not included in the fire flow selection set are reported as
N/A.

9.8.2 Not Getting Fire Flow at a Junction Node
Perform the following checks if you are not getting expected fire flow results:
• Check the Available Fire Flow. If it is lower than the Needed Fire Flow, the fire
flow conditions for that node are not satisfied. Therefore, Satisfies Fire Flow
Constraints is false.
• Check the Calculated Residual Pressure. If it is lower than the Residual Pressure
Constraint, the fire flow condition for that node is not satisfied. Therefore, Satis-
fies Fire Flow Constraints is false.
• Check the Calculated Minimum Zone Pressure. If it is lower than the Minimum
Zone Pressure Constraint, the fire flow condition for that node is not satisfied.
Therefore, Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints is false.
Note: If you are not concerned about the pressure of a node that is
NOT meeting the Minimum Zone Pressure constraint, move this
node to another zone. Now, the node will not be analyzed as part
of the same zone.
• If you checked the box for Minimum System Pressure Constraint in the Fire Flow
Alternative dialog box, check to see if the Calculated Minimum System Pressure
is lower than the set constraint. If it is, Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints is false.
Manual Fire Flow Scenarios

The Manual Fire Flow Scenarios feature will quickly and easily create scenarios in
which user-specified Fire Flow Demands are applied to specified junctions. By
entering a small amount of input data, you can have the program automatically create
a scenario for each individual node. You can then perform a batch run on these
scenarios for further comparison or computational analysis.
To set up a Manual Fire Flow Scenario:
1. Click the Analysis menu, select Scenarios.

2. Highlight the Scenario (see “Scenarios” on page 8-364) from which you want the
new scenarios to inherit their data. Click the Scenario Management button,
select Add…Manual Fire Flow Scenarios. This opens the Manual Fire Flow
Scenarios dialog box.
3. In the Apply Fire Flows By section of the dialog box, choose whether the fire flow
demands will replace or be added to the existing demands by clicking the corre-
sponding button.
4. Click the Select button to choose the junctions for which you want the Fire Flow
scenarios to be created. When you are finished, click OK.

Fire Flow Analysis
5. Enter the fire flow demand for each junction in the Needed Fire Flow column. If
all of the junctions require the same fire flow demand, you can perform a Global
Edit (see “Globally Editing Data” on page 7-337) to change them all at once.
6. Once the above steps have been completed, click OK in the Manual Fire Flow
Scenarios dialog box. The program will automatically create a scenario for each
junction that was selected in Step 4.
Manual Fire Flow Scenarios Dialog Box

The Manual Fire Flow Scenarios dialog box is separated into three areas:
• Apply Fire Flows By—This area provides you with the following two buttons:
– Adding To Baseline Demand—Choosing this option will cause the Manual
Fire Flow Demands to be added to the normal demands at the Manual Fire
Flow Nodes.
– Replacing Baseline Demand—Choosing this option will cause the Manual
Fire Flow Demands to replace the normal demands at the Manual Fire Flow
Nodes.
• Manual Fire Flow Nodes—This section of the dialog box comprised of a two
column table and a Select button.
– Label Column—This column displays the nodes for which a Manual Fire
Flow Scenario will be created.
– Needed Fire Flow Column—This column displays the Needed Fire Flow for
the corresponding nodes.
– Select Button—Opens the Selection Set dialog box (see “Selection Set
Dialog Box” on page 5-264), allowing you to add or remove nodes from the
table.
• Button Section—The four buttons in this section are:
– OK—Closes the dialog box and creates a new scenario for each node that was
selected in the Manual Fire Flow Nodes section.
– Cancel—Closes the dialog box without saving changes.
– Initialize—After at least one normal Fire Flow Analysis has been calculated,
this button will open the Fire Flow dialog box (for more information, see
“Fire Flow Dialog Box” on page 9-389). This dialog box contains a menu
which displays a list of the Scenarios that have been calculated using a Fire
Flow Analysis. The junctions that were included in the initial Fire Flow Anal-
ysis will be entered in the Label column, and the calculated Available Fire
Flows from the scenario chosen in the Fire Flow dialog box will be entered in
the Needed Fire Flow column.
– Help—Opens the online help.

Fire Flow Dialog Box

From within the Manual Fire Flow Scenarios dialog box, click the Initialize button to
open this dialog box. This dialog box contains a menu, which displays a list of the
Scenarios that have been calculated using a Fire Flow Analysis. To choose the
scenario to initialize from, highlight the desired scenario in the drop-down and click
the OK button.
9.9 Water Quality Analysis

Water quality analysis includes:
• “Age Analysis” on page 9-389

• “Constituent Analysis” on page 9-390
• “Trace Analysis” on page 9-391
9.9.1 Age Analysis
An age analysis determines how long the water has been in the system and is more of
a general water quality indicator than a measurement of any specific constituent. To
configure for an age analysis:
Note: Water quality analysis can only be performed for extended

period simulations.
1. Choose Compute from the Analysis menu or click the GO button.

2. Activate the Extended Period button. For more information, see “Steady-State/
Extended Period Simulation” on page 9-378.
3. Check the box labeled Water Quality Analysis.
4. Select the Age button.
5. Assuming you have not already set up an Age alternative for this scenario
(including defining the trace node), go to the Alternatives tab, click the Ellipsis
(...) or New button next to the Age choice list, and add or edit an Age alternative.
To edit an existing alternative (see “Age Alternative” on page 8-358), click the
Edit button. Enter the appropriate data, and click Close. Rename the alternative to
give it a descriptive name. To add a new alternative, click the Add button. Enter a
descriptive name into the New Alternative dialog box, and click OK. Enter the
appropriate data into the Age Alternative Editor, and click Close. Back in the
Alternatives tab, choose the desired alternative from the Age Alternative choice
list.
6. Return to the Calculation tab and click the GO button.

Water Quality Analysis
9.9.2 Constituent Analysis
A constituent is any substance, such as chlorine and fluoride, for which the growth or
decay can be adequately described through the use of a bulk reaction coefficient and a
wall reaction coefficient. A constituent analysis determines the concentration of a
constituent at all nodes and links in the system. Constituent analyses can be used to
determine chlorine residuals throughout the system under present chlorination sched-
ules, or can be used to determine probable behavior of the system under proposed
chlorination schedules. To configure for a constituent analysis:

period simulations.
1. Choose Compute from the Analysis menu or click the GO button.

4. Select the Constituent button.
5. Assuming you have not already set up a Constituent alternative for this scenario
(including the selection of the constituent), go to the Alternatives tab, click the
Ellipsis (...) or New button next to the Constituent scroll-down list, and add or edit
a Constituent alternative (for more information, see “Constituent Alternative” on
page 8-358). To edit an existing alternative, click the Edit button. Enter the appro-
priate data, and click Close. Rename the alternative to give it a descriptive name.
To add a new alternative, click the Add button. Enter a descriptive name into the
New Alternative dialog box, and click OK. Enter the appropriate data into the
Constituent Alternative Editor, and click Close. Specify the Constituent, which is
defined in the Constituent Library and accessed by clicking the Ellipsis (...)
button. Back in the Alternatives tab, choose the desired alternative from the
Constituent Alternative choice list.
6. Return to the Calculation tab, and click the GO button.

9.9.3 Trace Analysis
A trace analysis determines the percentage of the water at all nodes and links in the
system. The source is designated as a specific node in the system and is called the
trace node. In systems with more than one source, it is common to perform multiple
trace analyses using the various trace nodes in successive analyses. The source node
and initial traces are specified in the Trace Alternative dialog box (for more informa-
tion, see “Trace Alternative” on page 8-360). To configure for a trace analysis:

period simulations.
1. Choose Compute from the Analysis menu, or click the GO button.

4. Select the Trace button.
5. Assuming you have not already set up a Trace alternative for this scenario
(including defining the trace node), go to the Alternatives tab, click the Ellipsis
(...) or New button next to the Trace choice list, and add or edit a trace alternative.
Specify the trace node to be used for this analysis and provide the appropriate
data. Back in the Alternatives tab, choose the desired alternative from the Trace
Alternative choice list.
6. Return to the Calculation tab and click the GO button.
9.10 Calculation Options

Calculations depend on a variety of parameters that may be configured by you.
This program provides defaults for each of the calculation options. If you make
changes to the calculation options and decide that you would like to return to the
default settings, use the Reset button on the Calculation Options dialog box.
The dialog box is divided into two groups:
• “Hydraulic Analysis Options” on page 9-392

• “Water Quality Analysis Options” on page 9-392

Calculation Options
9.10.1 Hydraulic Analysis Options
The following hydraulic analysis parameters are available for user configuration:
Note: Logical Controls are not executed during Steady-State Analyses.
The number of trials specifies the maximum number of iterations

to be performed for each time step in an extended period
simulation, not the total number of iterations for the entire
analysis.
In most cases, the default values are adequate for the hydraulic
analysis. Under special circumstances, the accuracy may need
to be adjusted downward. This is necessary when the model
converges, yet there are larger than acceptable discrepancies
between the total inflow and outflow at individual nodes.
• Use Controls In Steady State Analysis—When the box is checked, Simple

Controls will be active during Steady State Analyses.
• Use Linear Interpolation for Multipoint Pumps
• Trials—Unitless number that defines the maximum number of iterations to be
performed for each hydraulic solution. The default value is 40.
• Accuracy—Unitless number that defines the convergence criteria for the iterative
solution of the network hydraulic equations. When the sum of the absolute flow
changes between successive iterations in all links is divided by the sum of the
absolute flows in all links, and is less than the Accuracy, the solution is said to
have converged. The default value is 0.001 and the minimum allowed value for
Accuracy is 1.0e-5.
• Emitter Exponent—Emitters are devices associated with junctions that model
the flow through a nozzle or orifice. In these situations, the demand (i.e., the flow
rate through the emitter) varies in proportion to the pressure at the junction raised
to some power. The constant of proportionality is termed the discharge coefficient.
For nozzles and sprinkler heads the exponent on pressure is 0.5 and the manufac-
turer usually states the value of the discharge coefficient as the flow rate in gpm
through the device at a 1 psi pressure drop.
9.10.2 Water Quality Analysis Options
The following water quality analysis parameters are available for user configuration:
• Age Tolerance—If the difference between two parcels of water is equal to or less
than the value specified in this field, the parcels are considered to be of equal age.

• Constituent Tolerance—If the difference between two parcels of water is equal

to or less than the value specified in this field, the parcels are considered to
possess an equal concentration of the associated constituent.
• Trace Tolerance—If the difference between two parcels of water is equal to or
less than the value specified in this field, the parcels are considered to be within
the same percentile.
• Set Quality Time Step—Check this box if you want to manually set the water
quality time step. By default, this box is not checked and the water quality time
step is computed internally by the numerical engine.
• Quality Time Step—Time interval used to track water quality changes
throughout the network. By default, this value is computed by the numerical
engine and is equivalent to the smallest travel time through any pipe in the system.
9.11 Patterns
The extended period analysis is actually a series of Steady State analyses run against
time-variable loads such as sewer inflows, demands, or chemical constituents.
Patterns allow you to apply automatic time-variable changes within the system. The
most common application of patterns is for residential or industrial loads. Diurnal
curves are patterns that relate to the changes in loads over the course of the day,
reflecting times when people are using more or less water than average. Most patterns
are based on a multiplication factor versus time relationship, whereby a multiplication
factor of one represents the base value (which is often the average value).
Using a representative diurnal curve for a residence as illustrated below, we see that
there is a peak in the diurnal curve in the morning as people take showers and prepare
breakfast, another slight peak around noon, and a third peak in the evening as people
arrive home from work and prepare dinner. Throughout the night, the pattern reflects
the relative inactivity of the system, with very low flows compared to the average.
Figure 9-1: Typical Diurnal Curve

Patterns
Note: This curve is conceptual and should not be construed as

representative of any particular network.
There are two basic forms for representing a pattern: stepwise and continuous. A step-
wise pattern is one that assumes a constant level of usage over a period of time, and
then jumps instantaneously to another level where it remains steady until the next
jump. A continuous pattern is one for which several points in the pattern are known
and sections in between are transitional, resulting in a smoother pattern. For the
continuous pattern in the figure above, the multiplication factor and slope at the start
time and end times are the same. This is a continuity that is recommended for patterns
that repeat.
Because of the finite time steps used for calculations, this software converts contin-
uous patterns into stepwise patterns for use by the algorithms. In other words for a
time step a multiplier is interpolated from the pattern curve. That multiplier is then
used for the duration of the time step, until a new multiplier is selected for the next
time step.
Patterns provide a convenient way to define the time variable aspects of system loads.
Patterns include:
• “Pattern Manager” on page 9-394

• “Pattern Editor” on page 9-395
• “Importing Patterns” on page 9-396
9.11.1 Pattern Manager
Patterns provide an effective means of applying time-variable system demands to the

distribution model. The Pattern Manager is split into two windows: The left window
displays the 4 types of patterns:
• Hydraulic—This type of pattern can be applied to Junctions or Tanks. Use this

pattern type to describe demand or inflow patterns over time.
• Constituent—This type of pattern can be applied to Reservoirs, Tanks, or Junc-
tions. Use this pattern type to describe changes in Constituent Baseline Loads
over time.
• Reservoir—This type of pattern can be applied to Reservoirs. Use this pattern
type to describe changes in HGL over time, such as that caused by tidal activity or
when the reservoir represents a connection to another system where the pressure
changes over time.
• Pump—This type of pattern can be applied to Pumps. Use this pattern type to
describe changes in the pump’s Relative Speed Factor.

The right window displays all of the patterns for the selected (highlighted) type. The
Pattern Manager allows you to do the following:
Note: In this program, an individual demand node can support multiple

demands. Furthermore, each demand can be assigned any
hydraulic pattern. This powerful functionality makes it possible
to model any type of extended period simulation.
• Add—Click the Add button. This action opens the Pattern Editor (see “Pattern
Editor” on page 9-395) where the specifics of the pattern can be entered.
• Edit—Select the label of the pattern you wish to edit, and click the Edit button.
The Fixed pattern cannot be edited.
• Duplicate—Select the label of the pattern you wish to duplicate, and press the
Duplicate button. The Fixed pattern cannot be duplicated.
• Delete—Select the label of the pattern you wish to delete, and click the Delete
button. The Fixed pattern cannot be deleted.
• Import—Allows you to import a pattern from a text file. For more information,
see “Importing Patterns” on page 9-396.
9.11.2 Pattern Editor
A pattern is a series of time step values, each having an associated multiplier value.
During an extended period analysis, each time step of the simulation uses the multi-
plier from the pattern corresponding to that time. If the duration of the simulation is
longer than the pattern, the pattern is repeated. The selected multiplier is applied to
any baseline load that is associated with the pattern.
Defining Patterns
• Label—A required name to uniquely identify the pattern. This name appears in
the choice list when applying patterns to hydraulic demands or constituent source
loads.
• Start Time—The first time step in the pattern. The start time format is a standard
24-hour clock. The format is Hour:Minute:Second AM or PM (e.g., 12:45:30
PM).
• Starting Multiplier—The multiplier value of the first time step point in your
pattern. Any real number can be used for this multiplier (it does not have to be
1.0).

Patterns
Time Step Points

• Time From Start—The amount of time from the Start Time of the pattern to the
time step point being defined.
• Multiplier—The multiplier value associated with the time step point.
Format
Note: Patterns must begin and end with the same multiplier value. This
is because patterns will be repeated if the duration of the
Extended Period Analysis is longer than the pattern duration. In
other words, the last point in the pattern is really the start point
of the pattern’s next cycle.
An Extended Period Analysis is actually a series of Steady State

analyses for which the boundary conditions of the current time
step are calculated from the conditions at the previous time
step. This software will automatically convert a continuous
pattern format to a stepwise format so that the demands and
source concentrations remain constant during a time step.
An individual node can support multiple hydraulic demands.

Furthermore, each load can be assigned any hydraulic demand
pattern. This powerful functionality makes it easy to combine
two or more types of demand patterns (such as residential and
institutional) at a single loading node.
• Stepwise—The multiplier values are considered to be the average value for the
interval between the specified time and the next time. Patterns using this format
will have a staircase appearance. Multipliers are set at the specified time and held
constant until the next point in the pattern.
Tip: Use the Report button to view or print a graph or detailed report
of your pattern.
• Continuous—The multipliers are considered to be the instantaneous values at a

particular time. Patterns using this format will have a curvilinear appearance.
Multipliers are set at the specified time, and are linearly increased or decreased to
the next point in the pattern.
9.11.3 Importing Patterns
New in WaterCAD is the ability to import Hydraulic, Constituent, Reservoir, and

Pump pattern information from an ASCII tab delimited text file. The file to be
imported must be in the following format:

Hour, <Tab>, Multiplier (Pattern 1), <Tab>, Multiplier (Pattern 2), <Tab>,
Multiplier (Pattern 3), etc.
Note: The time steps do not need to be in chronological order in the

text file to be imported. WaterCAD will organize the time steps
properly during the import process.
The lowest numbered (earliest) time step will be inserted at hour

zero in the newly created pattern. The other time steps will be
inserted at the appropriate increment starting from the zero
based start time.
The pattern’s starting multiplier and ending multiplier must be

identical.
Press the Tab key once between each column. An unlimited number of patterns (of a
single type) can be imported from a single text file by adding additional columns,
following the same format. The first row of the text file is used exclusively for
labeling purposes. The first column of the first row is ignored. The value contained in
the second column of the first row will be used as the pattern label for the first pattern,
the value contained in the third column of the first row will be used as the pattern label
for the second pattern, and so on.
- Pat1 Pat2
0 1.1 1.2
4 1.2 1.3
8 1.3 1.4
12 1.4 1.5
16 1.3 1.4
20 1.2 1.3
24 1.1 1.2
9.12 Logical Controls

Logical controls give you a way to specify controls for virtually any element based on
almost any property of the system. Logical controls are included in a scenario when
they are specified in the Operational Alternative. The controls become part of an
Operational Alternative when you specify the name of a Logical Control Set to use in
a given Operational Alternative.

Logical Controls
Logical Control sets are created in the Operation Alternative Editor by clicking the
ellipsis (...) next to Logical Control Sets or in the Logical Controls under the Analysis
menu. A Logical Control Set is made up of one or more logical control statements
(called Controls) of the form: If (condition) then (action) else (action). The actions
and conditions are defined under the Conditions or Actions tab under logical control.
Therefore in order to use a logical control, the steps are:
1. Define the conditions and actions (e.g. HGL>120 ft is a condition; Pump-7=On is

an action),
2. Combine conditions and actions to create control (statements) (e.g. If HGL>120
then Pump-7 = off, else Pump-7 =on is a control),
3. Assign Controls to a Control Set (one of more controls makes up a Control set),
4. Specify that a Control Set is to be used in an Operational Alternative (One control
set per operational alternative),
5. Include that Operational Alternative that contains the controls in a Scenario.
Logical, or rule-based controls allow far more flexibility and control over the behavior
of your network elements than is possible with simple controls. This is accomplished
by allowing you to specify one or more conditions and then link these to one or more
Actions by using logical IF, AND, THEN, OR, and ELSE statements.
Note: Logical Controls are not executed during Steady State analyses.
Logical controls consist of any combination of simple conditions and simple actions.
Controls are defined as:
IF: Condition 1 AND condition 2 OR condition 3 AND

condition 4, etc., where condition X is a a condition
clause
THEN: Action 1 AND action 2, etc. where action X is an
action clause
ELSE (Optional): Action 3 AND action 4, etc. where action X is an
action clause
Priority (Optional): Priority where priority is a priority value (1 to 5, 5
being the highest priority)
In addition to the high level of flexibility provided by allowing multiple conditions

and actions, the functionality of Logical controls is also enhanced by the range of
Condition types that are available. You can activate the stated actions based on
element demands, element hydraulic grade or pressure, system demand, clock time,
time from start, tank level, or time to fill or drain a tank.

You can also create composite conditions and actions. You can cause actions to be
performed when multiple conditions are met simultaneously, or when one or the other
conditions are met. You can also activate multiple actions when a single condition is
met.
For more information, see “Creating a New Logical Control” on page 9-399.
9.12.1 Creating a New Logical Control
When defining a logical control, you have the option to share

conditions and/or actions. In other words, more than one control
can reference the same condition or action. Keep in mind that
when you change an underlying condition or action, it will affect
all controls that reference that condition or action.
Logical controls greatly increase the amount of control you have over the behavior of
the elements in the model.
Tip: Use the optional ELSE field to cause actions to be performed

when the conditions in the control are not being met. For
example, if you are creating a control that states, “If the level in
Tank 1 is less than 5 ft., Then turn Pump 1 On,” use an ELSE
action to turn the pump off if the tank level is above 5 ft.
To create a new Logical Control:
1. Open the Logical Controls Manager window. For more information, see “Logical
Control Manager” on page 9-401 This manager is accessed by clicking the Anal-
ysis drop-down list and selecting Logical Controls.
2. In the Logical Controls Manager window, click the Control Management button,
and select New. This will open the Logical Controls editor window. For more
information, see “Logical Control Dialog Boxes” on page 9-405.
3. Now we must define the conditions that will trigger the control, and the actions
that will be performed when the control is triggered. To add a condition to the
control, click the New button. This opens the New Logical Condition dialog box.
For more information, see “New Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-406.
4. In the New Logical Condition window, you can specify whether the condition will
be Simple (single condition) or Composite (multiple conditions). Then, define the
condition type: element demand, element hydraulic grade, element pressure,
system demand, clock time, or time from start. The input data requirements
change depending on the condition type that is chosen. Click OK when you are
finished. This will return you to the Logical Controls editor. For more informa-
tion, see “New Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-406.

Logical Controls
5. Now that the condition has been set, it needs to be linked to an action. To add an
action, click the New button to open the New Logical Action dialog box. For more
information, see “New Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-413.
6. In the New Logical Action dialog box, you can specify whether the action will be
Simple (single action) or Composite (multiple actions). Then, define the element
you want the action to apply to. The input data requirements change depending on
the action type that is chosen. Click OK when you are finished. This will return
you to the Logical Controls editor.
EXAMPLE:
To create a logical control in which a pump (PMP-1) is turned on when the level
in a tank (T-1) falls below a specified value (5 ft.) or when the system demands
exceed a certain level (5000 gpm):
• Conditions—Because this control needs to be triggered by multiple condi-

tions, a Composite Condition is chosen. In this instance, the operator OR is
chosen to link the conditions, because the pump should be turned on if either
condition is true.
IF condition—{T-1 Level < 5 ft.}
OR condition—{System Demand > 5000 gpm}
• Actions—Because this control has a single desired outcome if one of the
conditions is met, a simple action is chosen. The first action in a logical
control is always linked to the conditions by a logical THEN statement. In this
instance, an ELSE action will also be used, to keep the pump off if neither of
the conditions is true.
THEN action—{PMP-1 Status = On}
ELSE action—{PMP-1 Status = Off}
The finished logical control looks like this:
IF {T-1 Level < 5 ft.} OR {System Demand > 5000 gpm} THEN {PMP-1 Status
= On} ELSE {PMP-1 Status = Off}
This example illustrates the power of using logical controls. To achieve the same
functionality using simple controls, you would need to create four separate
controls—one to turn the pump on if the tank level is below the specified value,
one to turn the pump off if the tank level is above a specified value, one to turn the
pump on if the system demand is greater than the specified value, and one to turn
the pump off if the system demand is less than the specified value.

9.12.2 Logical Controls Operation
Logical controls are applied after the initial hydraulic state of the network has been
computed (i.e., after time zero). The controls are evaluated over the course of a
hydraulic simulation as follows:
Relative Speed Pump patterns take precedence over any

1. The rules are evaluated at a sub-hydraulic time step equal to 1/10 of the normal
hydraulic time step (e.g., if hydraulics are updated every hour, then rules are eval-
uated every 6 minutes).
2. Over this sub-hydraulic time step, clock time and water levels in storage tanks are
updated, based on the last set of pipe flows computed.
3. If a rule’s conditions are satisfied, then its actions are added to a list. If an action
conflicts with one for the same element already on the list, then the action from
the rule with the higher priority stays on the list and the other is removed. If the
priorities are the same then the original action stays on the list.
4. If the action list is not empty, then those actions are taken. If this causes the status
or settings of one or more elements to change, then a new hydraulic solution is
computed.
5. The action list is cleared and the next sub-hydraulic time step is checked.
9.12.3 Logical Control Manager
The Logical Control Manager is the main work center for logical controls. The
Logical Control Manager manages all logical controls, logical conditions, and logical
actions in the system. The Logical Control Manager allows you to define controls
using advanced IF, AND, and OR condition logic, which can trigger any number of
THEN or optional ELSE actions.
Note: Hovering the mouse cursor over a control in the list will open a
tooltip which displays the conditions and actions that make up
that control.
The Logical Control Manager dialog box consists of the following three tabs:
• Controls Tab—Lets you manage all logical controls defined in the system. For
more information, see “Controls Tab” on page 9-402.

Logical Controls
• Conditions Tab—Lets you define the condition that must be met prior to taking
an action. For more information, see “Conditions Tab” on page 9-403.
• Actions Tab—Lets you define what should be done to an element in the system in
response to an associated control condition. For more information, see “Actions
Controls Tab
The Controls tab allows you to manage all logical controls defined in the system.
Logical controls are made up of an IF condition, a THEN action, and an optional
ELSE action. Controls have a non-editable application-provided ID (e.g., LC01) and
an optional priority for resolving potential conflicts between logical controls. The
Controls tab is divided into sections:
that control.
• The pane in the center of the dialog box is the Controls List. This list displays a
list of all Logical Controls defined in the system.
• Located above the Controls List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
– New—Opens the Logical Control dialog box, which allows you to create a
new logical control. For more information, see “Logical Control Dialog
Boxes” on page 9-405.
– Edit—Opens the Logical Control dialog box, which allows you to edit the
highlighted control. For more information, see “Logical Control Dialog
Boxes” on page 9-405.
– Delete—Deletes the highlighted control. You will be prompted to confirm this
action.
– Find—Opens the Find Control dialog box, which allows you to find a partic-
ular control based on a variety of criteria. For more information, see “Find
Logical Control Dialog Box” on page 9-416.
– Report—Generates a summary of the highlighted control, listing the ID,
conditions, actions, and elements incorporated into the control.
• Located along the left of the Controls List are two command buttons:
– Control Management—Offers a menu of options for creating, editing, and
managing Logical Controls. Provides the same functionality as the toolbar, as
described above.
– Control Sets—Opens the Logical Control Sets Alternative dialog box, which
lists the various control sets you have created. In addition to listing the control
sets by name, the number of controls in each set is also displayed. The
following options are available in this dialog box:

- Add—Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set Editor
dialog box. From this window, you can add previously created logical
controls to the new control set. For more information, see “Logical
Controls Set Editor” on page 9-419.
- Edit—Opens the Logical Control Set Editor dialog box, which allows
you to edit the highlighted control set. For more information, see “Logical
Controls Set Editor” on page 9-419.
- Duplicate—Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set
Editor to allow you to add or remove controls from the control set. For
more information, see “Logical Controls Set Editor” on page 9-419.
- Delete—Deletes the highlighted control set. You will be prompted to
confirm this action.
- Rename—Allows you to rename the highlighted control set.
- Report—Generates a summary of the highlighted control set, listing the
ID, conditions, actions, and elements for all of the logical controls
contained within the control set.
– Located below the Controls List is a Summary pane that provides a descrip-
tion of the highlighted control.
Conditions Tab
Conditions allow you to define the condition that must be met prior to taking an
action. The Conditions tab provides a list of all conditions defined in the system.
There are two types of conditions: simple conditions and composite conditions. The
Conditions tab is divided into sections:
that control.
• The pane in the middle of the dialog box is the Conditions List. The Conditions
List displays a list of all logical conditions defined in the system. The list contains
four columns: ID (the application defined id, e.g., C01 for simple, CC01 for
composite), Type (simple or composite), description, and references (logical
control references).
• Located above the Conditions List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
– New—Opens the New Logical Condition dialog box, which allows you to
create a new logical condition. For more information, see “New Logical
Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-406.

Logical Controls
– Edit—Depending on whether a simple or composite condition is highlighted,

this button opens the Simple Logical Condition or Composite Logical Condi-
tion dialog box, which allows you to edit the highlighted condition. For more
information, see “Simple Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-407 and
“Composite Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-411.
– Delete—Deletes the highlighted condition. You will be prompted to confirm
this action.
– Find—Opens the Find Logical Condition dialog box, which allows you to
find a particular action based on a variety of criteria. For more information,
see “Find Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-417.
– Report—Generates a summary of the highlighted condition.
• Located below the Conditions List is a Summary pane that provides a description
of the highlighted condition.
Actions Tab
Actions allow you to define what should be done to an element in the system in
response to an associated control condition. The Actions tab provides a list of all
actions defined in the system. There are two types of actions: simple actions and
composite actions. Actions have an application-provided non-editable ID (e.g., A01
for simple, AA01 for composite). The Actions tab is divided into sections:
• The Actions List displays a list of all logical actions defined in the system. The list
contains four columns: ID (the application defined ID, e.g., A01 for simple, AA01
for composite), Type (simple or composite), description, and references (logical
control references).
• Located above the Conditions List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
- New—Opens the New Logical Action dialog box, which allows you to
create a new logical action. For more information, see “New Logical
Action Dialog Box” on page 9-413.
- Edit—Depending on whether a simple or composite action is highlighted,
this button opens the Simple Logical Action or Composite Logical Action
dialog box, which allows you to edit the highlighted action. For more
information, see “Simple Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-407
and “Composite Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-411.
- Delete—Deletes the highlighted action. You will be prompted to confirm
this action.
- Find—Opens the Find Logical Action dialog box, which allows you to
find a particular action based on a variety of criteria. For more informa-
tion, see “Find Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-417.
- Report—Generates a summary of the highlighted action.

• Located below the Actions List is a Summary pane that provides a description of
the highlighted action.
9.12.4 Logical Control Dialog Boxes
This dialog box allows you to edit or create a logical control consisting of an IF condi-
tion, a THEN action, and an optional ELSE action. The Logical Control dialog box is
split into sections:
• Control Logic—This area of the dialog box is where you specify the conditions
and actions to create a logical control. It consists of a drop-down list and three
buttons for each of the three components of a logical control:
– IF Condition—The drop-down list allows you to create a new condition
(<NEW>), find an existing condition (<FIND>), or choose from a list of
conditions that have already been created.
– THEN Action—The drop-down list allows you to create a new action
(<NEW>), find an existing action (<FIND>), or choose from a list of actions
that have already been created.
– ELSE Action (optional)—The ELSE action is used when the conditions for
the control are not met. To specify an ELSE action, click the check box to
activate the drop-down list. The menu allows you to create a new action
(<NEW>), find an existing action (<FIND>), or choose from a list of actions
that have already been created.
In addition, there are three buttons next to each menu:
– New—Opens the New Logical Condition dialog box or the New Logical
Action dialog box.
– Properties—Opens the corresponding editor for the control component that is
selected in the drop-down list. Depending on the highlighted control, this
button will open the Simple Logical Condition editor (see “Simple Logical
Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-407), Composite Logical Condition editor
(see “Composite Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-411), Simple
Logical Action editor (see “Simple Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-
413), or the Composite Logical Action editor (see “Composite Logical Action
Dialog Box” on page 9-415).
– Find—Opens the Find Condition or Find Action dialog box. For more infor-
mation, see “Find Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-417 and “Find
Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-417.
• Priority—This area of the dialog box is optional. To set a priority for the control
being created, click the check box to activate the priority drop-down list. You can
set a priority of 1-5, 5 being the highest priority. If multiple controls meet a certain
condition and they have conflicting actions, the control with the highest priority
will be used.

Logical Controls
Note: At calculation time, the priority is used to determine the logical

control to apply when multiple controls require that conflicting
actions be taken. Logical controls with identical priorities will be
prioritized based on the order they appear in the Logical Control
Set alternative. A rule without a priority value always has a lower
priority than one with a value. For two rules with the same
priority value, the rule that appears first is given the higher
priority.
Relative speed pump patterns take precedence over any

controls (simple or logical) that are associated with the pump.
Hovering the mouse cursor over a control in the list will open a
that control.
When creating a new condition or action for a new control, the

condition and action input fields will be initialized with the data
used in the last condition or action that was created.
Once created, the Logical Control will be assigned an

application generated ID (e.g., LC04).
• Description—This area of the dialog box is preset with a default description.

There is an option to change the default description. To do so, click the check box
to activate the description field, and enter your description in the text box.
• Summary—This area of the dialog box displays a verbose description of the
control.
9.12.5 Condition Dialog Boxes
Condition dialog boxes include:
• “New Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-406

• “Simple Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-407
• “Composite Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-411
New Logical Condition Dialog Box

The New Logical Condition dialog box allows you to define the type of condition to
be created. The two buttons at the top of the dialog box are used to specify whether the
condition to be created is a simple condition or a composite condition.

Note: When defining a logical control, you have the option to share
The appearance of this dialog box will change depending on which condition type is
selected.
• “Simple Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-407

• “Composite Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-411
Simple Logical Condition Dialog Box

The Simple Logical Condition dialog box is split into three areas:
• “Simple Condition” on page 9-407

• “Description” on page 9-410
• “Summary” on page 9-411
Simple Condition
The input fields for a simple condition change depending on the condition type that is
selected in the condition Type field. The Simple Condition Types and the corre-
sponding input data are as follows:
Element—This will create a condition based on specified attributes at a selected

element. The fields available when this condition type is selected are as follows:
• Element—The Element field allows you to specify which element the condition
will be based upon, and provides three methods of choosing this element. The
drop-down list displays elements that have been used in other logical controls, the
Ellipsis (…) button, which opens the Single Element Selection dialog box (see
“Single Element Selection Dialog Box” on page 5-260), and the Select From
Drawing button, which allows you to select the element using the graphical
Drawing view.
Attribute—This field displays the available attributes for the element type currently
specified in the Element field.
• Pressure Junctions—The following attributes are available for use when a Junc-
tion is chosen in the Element field:
– Demand—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified
demand at the corresponding junction (e.g., If J-1 has a demand…).

Logical Controls
– Hydraulic Grade—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a

specified hydraulic grade at the corresponding junction (e.g., If J-1 has a
hydraulic grade of…).
– Pressure—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified
pressure at the corresponding junction (e.g., If J-1 has a pressure of…).
• Pumps—The following attributes are available for use when a Pump is chosen in
the Element field:
– Discharge—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified
rate of discharge at the corresponding pump (e.g., If PMP-1 has a discharge
of…).
– Setting—This attribute is used to create a condition based on the Relative
Speed Factor of the corresponding pump (e.g., If PMP-1 has a relative speed
factor of 1.5…).
– Status—This attribute is used to create a condition based on the status (On or
Off) of the corresponding pump (e.g., If PMP-1 is On…).
Note: Relative Speed Pump patterns take precedence over any

• Tanks—The following attributes are available for use when a Tank is chosen in
the Element field:
demand at the corresponding tank. For tanks, this demand can represent an
inflow or outflow (e.g., If T-1 has a demand…).
specified hydraulic grade at the corresponding tank (e.g., If T-1 has a
pressure at the corresponding tank (e.g., If T-1 has a pressure of…).
– Level—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified water
level at the corresponding tank (e.g., If the water in T-1 is at a level of…).
– Time to Drain—This attribute is to create a condition based on the amount of
time required for the tank to drain (e.g., If T-1 drains in X hours…).
– Time to Fill—This attribute is to create a condition based on the amount of
time required for the tank to fill (e.g., If T-1 fills in X hours…).
• Reservoirs—The following attributes are available for use when a Reservoir is

chosen in the Element field:
demand at the corresponding reservoir. For reservoirs, this demand can repre-
sent an inflow or outflow (e.g., If R-1 has a demand…).


specified hydraulic grade at the corresponding reservoir (e.g., If R-1 has a
pressure at the corresponding reservoir (e.g., If R-1 has a pressure of…).
• Pipes—The following attributes are available for use when a Pipe is chosen in the
Element field:
rate of discharge at the corresponding pipe (e.g., If P-1 has a discharge of…).
– Status—This attribute is used to create a condition based on the status (Open
or Closed) of the corresponding pipe (e.g., If P-1 is Open…).
• Valves—The following attributes are available for use when a valve is chosen in
the Element field:
rate of discharge at the corresponding valve (e.g., If PRV-1 has a discharge
of…).
Note: The Setting attribute is not available when a GPV is selected in

the Element field.
• Setting—This attribute is used to create a condition based on the setting of the

corresponding valve. The type of setting will change depending on the type of
valve that is chosen. The valves and their associated setting types are as follows:
– PRV—Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a
condition based on a specified pressure at the PRV (e.g., If PRV-1 has a pres-
sure of…).
– PSV—Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a
condition based on a specified pressure at the PRV (e.g., If PSV-1 has a pres-
sure of…).
– PBV—Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a
condition based on a specified pressure at the PRV (e.g., If PBV-1 has a pres-
sure of…).
– FCV—Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a
condition based on a specified rate of discharge at the PRV (e.g., If FCV-1 has
a discharge of…).
– TCV—Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a
condition based on a specified headloss coefficient at the PRV (e.g., If TCV-1
has a headloss of…).
• Status—This attribute is used to create a condition based on the status (Closed or

Inactive) of the corresponding valve (e.g., If PRV-1 is Inactive…).

Logical Controls
System Demand—This will create a condition based on the demands for the entire
system. The fields available when this condition type is selected are:
• Operator—This field allows you to specify the relationship between the Attribute
and the target value for that attribute. The choices include Greater Than (>),
Greater Than Or Equal To (>=), Less Than (<), Less Than Or Equal To (<=),
Equal To (=), or Not Equal To (<>).
• System Demand—This field lets you set a system-wide demand.
Clock Time—This will create a condition based on the clock time during an extended
period simulation. If the extended period simulation is for a period longer than 24
hours, this condition will be triggered every day at the specified time.
Time From Start—This will create a condition based on the amount of time that has
passed since the beginning of an extended period simulation. The following fields are
available when this condition type is selected:
Target Value—This field’s label will change depending on the attribute that is
chosen. The value entered here is used in conjunction with the operator that is chosen
to determine if the condition has been met.
Description
This area of the dialog box is preset with a default description. There is an option to
change the default description. To do so, click the check box to activate the description
field, and enter your description in the text box. Additionally, the description field
supports the following expandable masks:
%# ID
%e Element

%a Attribute
%o Operator
%v Value
%u Unit
Note: Click the description list box to select one of the predefined
masks.
Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the addi-
tional benefit of automatically updating the corresponding information when changes
are made to the various condition components.
Summary
This area of the dialog box displays an automatically updated preview of the expanded
description.
Composite Logical Condition Dialog Box

The Composite Logical Condition dialog box is divided into three areas:
• Composite Condition—The Composite Condition area of the dialog box is

comprised of a two column table and two buttons. The buttons are as follows:
– Insert—Adds a new row to the Condition list
– Delete—Deletes the highlighted row from the Condition list
The table contains two columns, as follows:
– Operator—This column allows you to choose the way in which the related
Condition logic will be evaluated. The available choices are If, And, and Or.

Logical Controls
Note: The first condition in the list will use the If operator. Any
additional conditions will allow you to choose between AND and
OR.
Any combination of AND and OR clauses can be used in a rule.

When mixing AND and OR clauses, the OR operator has higher
precedence than AND. Therefore, “IF A or B and C” is equivalent
to “IF (A or B) and C”. If the interpretation was meant to be IF A
or (B and C), this can be expressed using two Logical Controls:
Logical Control 1: “IF A THEN...” and Logical Control 2: “IF B
AND C THEN...”
– Condition—The drop-down list allows you to create a new condition

(<NEW>), find an existing condition (<FIND>), or choose a condition that
was already created beforehand. Choosing New will open the Simple Logical
Condition dialog box (see “Simple Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-
407), and choosing Find will open the Find Logical Condition dialog box (for
more information, see “Find Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-417).

to activate the description field, and enter your description in the text box. Addi-
tionally, the description field supports the following expandable masks:
%# ID
%v Value
are made to the various condition components.
masks.
• Summary—This area of the dialog box displays an automatically updated

preview of the expanded description.
9.12.6 Action Dialog Boxes
Action dialog boxes include:
• “New Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-413

• “Simple Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-413
• “Composite Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-415

New Logical Action Dialog Box

The New Logical Action dialog box allows you to define the type of action to be
created. The two buttons at the top of the dialog box are used to specify whether the
action to be created is a simple action or a composite action.
Note: When defining a logical control, you have the option to share
The appearance of this dialog box will change depending on which action type is
selected.
• “Simple Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-413

• “Composite Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-415
Simple Logical Action Dialog Box

The Simple Logical Action dialog box is divided into sections:
• Simple Action—This area of the dialog box displays the following fields:
– Element—The Element field allows you to specify which element the action
will be based upon and provides three methods of choosing this element. The
drop-down list displays elements that have been used in other logical controls,
the Ellipsis (…) button, which opens the Single Element Selection dialog box
(see “Single Element Selection Dialog Box” on page 5-260), and the Select
From Drawing button (see “Select From Drawing Button” on page 5-261),
which allows you to select the element using the graphical Drawing view.
– Attribute—This field displays the available attributes for the element type
specified in the Element field. Not all attributes are available for all element
types. The available attributes include:
- Status – This attribute is used to change the status of a pipe, pump, or
valve when the related conditions are met. The available choices are
dependant on the element type.
- Setting—This attribute is used to change the settings of a pump or valve
when the related conditions are met. The setting type varies depending on
the type of element.

Logical Controls
Note: Pipes can only utilize the Status Attribute, Pumps and all Valves
except for the GPV can utilize either the Status or Setting
Attribute. GPVs can only use the Status Attribute.
For all valves except for the GPV, there is no explicit Active
status with which to base a control upon—the status choices are
Inactive or Closed. After a control sets a valve to Inactive or
Closed, to reactivate the valve another control must be created
with a Setting attribute. This is because a valve cannot be set to
Active, but must have specific input data to work with.
For GPVs, there is no Inactive setting. GPVs can only be set to

Active or Closed. If the GPV is not closed, the valve will always
produce the headlosses associated with it through the Head-
Discharge Points table.
– Operator—The operator for logical actions is always EQUAL TO (=).

– Attribute Value—This field’s label will change depending on the attribute
that is chosen. Depending on the element type and the attribute that was
chosen, the input field may also change to a drop-down list, which contains
the possible settings for that element. Not all settings are available for all
element types.
Note: Pipes can be set to Open or Closed, Pumps can be set to On, Off,
or have their relative speed factors increase or decrease. GPVs
can be set to Active or Closed. All other valves can be set to
Inactive, Closed, or have their respective settings changed,
depending on the Valve type.

%# ID
%e Element
%a Attribute
%o Operator
%v Value (and Unit, if applicable)
are made to the various control components.

masks.

Composite Logical Action Dialog Box

The composite Logical Action dialog box is separated into three areas:
• Composite Action—The Composite Action area of the dialog box is comprised

of a single column table and two buttons. The Table contains a list of the Actions
to be used. Each row is a drop-down list that allows you to create a new action
(<NEW>), find an existing action (<FIND>), or choose an action that was already
created beforehand. Selecting <NEW> will open the Simple Action dialog box
(see “Simple Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-413), and selecting <FIND>
will open the Find Action dialog box (for more information, see “Find Logical
Action Dialog Box” on page 9-417).
– Insert—Adds a new row to the Action list
– Delete—Deletes the highlighted row from the Action list.

%# ID
%v Value
are made to the various control components.
masks.
Composite logical actions consist of multiple simple logical

actions. These actions are linked with an AND statement.


Logical Controls
9.12.7 Finding Controls and Control Components
Finding controls and control components includes:
• “Find Logical Control Dialog Box” on page 9-416

• “Find Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-417
• “Find Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-417
Find Logical Control Dialog Box

Located throughout the Logical Controls interface are Find tools. Find tools allow you
to locate a control, condition, or action. The find dialog box presents a list of all avail-
able elements and some filtering options to refine the list. Select the desired item in
the list and click OK to make a selection. The Find Logical Control dialog box is
separated into sections:
• Filter Controls By—This area of the dialog box contains four combo boxes that
allow you to filter the list of Logical Controls that is displayed in the Controls area
of the dialog box.
– Condition—This drop-down list allows you to display only the logical
controls that reference the condition that is chosen here. In addition, you have
two additional choices: <any>, which is the default setting and applies no
Condition filters, and <Find>, which opens the Find Condition dialog box.
For more information, see “Find Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-
417.
– Condition Element—This drop-down lists the elements that are referenced in
all of the Conditions in the current project. Choosing an element in this dialog
box will cause only the controls that contain a condition that references the
selected element to appear in the Controls area of the dialog box. Choosing
<any>, the default setting, will apply no condition element filters.
– Action—Allows you to display only the logical controls that reference the
action that is chosen here. In addition, you have two additional choices:
<any>, which is the default setting and applies no action filters, and <Find>,
which opens the Find Action dialog box. For more information, see “Find
Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-417.
– Action Element—This drop-down lists the elements that are referenced by
Actions in the current project. Choosing an element in this dialog box will
cause only the controls that contain an action that references the selected
element to appear in the Controls area of the dialog box. Choosing <any>, the
default setting, will apply no action element filters.
• Controls—This area of the dialog box displays all of the logical controls that
match the current filter logic in the current project.

Find Logical Condition Dialog Box
Note: Located throughout the logical controls interface are Find tools.
Find tools let you locate a control, condition, or action. The find
dialog box presents a list of all available elements and some
filtering options to refine the list. Select the desired item in the
list and press OK to make a selection. The Find Logical
Condition dialog box is separated into two areas:
• Filter Controls By—This area of the dialog box contains two combo boxes,
which allow you to filter the list of conditions that is displayed in the Conditions
area of the dialog box.
– Type—This drop-down list allows you to filter by Simple Conditions,
Composite Conditions, or no Type filter (<any>).
– Element—This drop-down lists the elements that are referenced in all of the
Conditions in the current project. Choosing an element in this dialog box will
cause only the conditions that reference the selected element to appear in the
Conditions area of the dialog box. Choosing <any>, the default setting, will
apply no condition element filters. Choosing <System> will cause only the
system type conditions to be displayed.
• Conditions—This area of the dialog box displays all of the logical conditions that
match the current filter logic in the current project.
Find Logical Action Dialog Box
Note: Located throughout the logical controls interface are Find tools.
Find tools let you locate a control, condition, or action. The find
dialog box presents a list of all available elements and some
filtering options to refine the list. Select the desired item in the
list and press OK to make a selection.
The Find Logical Action dialog box is separated into sections:
• Filter Controls By—This area of the dialog box contains two drop-down lists
that allow you to filter the list of actions that is displayed in the Actions area of the
dialog box.

Logical Controls
– Type—This drop-down list allows you to filter by Simple Actions, Composite

Actions, or no Type filter (<any>).
– Element—This drop-down lists the elements that are referenced in all of the
Actions in the current project. Choosing an element in this dialog box will
cause only the actions that reference the selected element to appear in the
Actions area of the dialog box. Choosing <any>, the default setting, will apply
no action element filters.
• Actions—This area of the dialog box displays all of the logical actions that match
the current filter logic in the current project.
9.12.8 Logical Control Sets
Logical control sets include:
• “Logical Control Sets Alternative” on page 9-418

• “Logical Controls Set Editor” on page 9-419
Logical Control Sets Alternative

The Logical Control Sets dialog box allows you to create, modify and manage logical
control sets. Logical control sets are a way to organize your logical controls, and also
provide the means to use different logical controls in different scenarios. The
following options are available in this dialog box:
• Add—Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box.
From this window, you can add previously created logical controls to the new
control set.
• Edit—Opens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box, which allows you to edit
the highlighted control set.
• Duplicate—Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor to
allow you to add or remove controls from the control set.
• Delete—Deletes the highlighted control set. You will be prompted to confirm this
action.
• Rename—Allows you to rename the highlighted control set.
• Report—Generates a summary of the highlighted control set, listing the ID,
conditions, actions, and elements for all of the logical controls contained within
the control set.

Logical Controls Set Editor
Note: Priority is based upon the order that the controls appear in this
dialog box. The first control in the control set has the highest
priority, and so on. Any control with a set priority will overrule
any control with no set priority.
Hovering the mouse cursor over a control in the list will open a
that control.
The Logical Control Set Editor is divided into two panes. The left pane, labeled Avail-
able Items, contains a list of all of the logical controls that have been created in the
current project. To add controls to the Selected Items pane on the right, highlight the
desired controls and click the [>] button under Add. To add all of the controls to your
Logical Control set, click the [>>] button under Add. To remove a control from the
Selected Items pane, highlight it and click the [<] button under Remove. To remove all
controls from the Selected Items pane, click the [<<] button under Remove.
The Find button above each pane opens the Find Logical Control dialog box.
9.13 Active Topology

The WaterCAD Active Topology feature lets you create alternatives in which selected
elements are removed from the drawing view. While these elements are in the inactive
state, they are not evaluated in network calculations. This ability allows you to easily
create before and after scenarios for proposed construction projects and test the redun-
dancy of existing networks.
While elements are inactive, they are not included in any hydraulic equations. Inactive
elements are also not evaluated when generating contour plots, and are not available
for inclusion while generating profiles. Inactive elements do not appear in the main
drawing pane, in the Aerial View window, or in either of the plan view types. When
generating project inventory reports, element details reports, or element results
reports, inactive elements are not included.
Inactive elements will not appear in the corresponding tabular reports, unless the
Include Inactive Topology option (see “Include Inactive Topology” on page 7-340) is
turned on. The default setting does not include inactive elements. Inactive elements
are still available for inclusion in selection sets.
Any changes made to the Active Topology are applied to the active topology alterna-
tive (see “Active Topology Alternative” on page 8-353) associated with the current
scenario, and an unlimited number of active topology alternatives can be created.

Active Topology
9.13.1 Active Topology Selection Dialog Box
The Active Topology Selection dialog box allows you to cause specified network
elements to become inactive, thereby temporarily removing the inactive elements
from the drawing view and any calculations. The name of the dialog box displays the
name of the scenario for which the changes will take effect, and is split into two
sections: the Inactive Elements pane and the Button section.
• Inactive Elements Pane—This pane displays a list of the elements, which are
inactive for the current scenario. Elements in this list are not visible in the drawing
view and are not included in calculations.
• Button Section—The button section of the dialog box consists of three buttons
which allow you to choose which elements are included in the Inactive Elements
pane.
– Select From Drawing—Clicking this button brings you back to the drawing
view to allow you to graphically choose the elements that you want to deacti-
vate. While in this mode, right-clicking opens a menu with the following
options:
- Done—Select Done when you are finished selecting elements to bring
you back to the Active Topology Selection dialog box.
- Add—This option is the default mode when you click the Select From
Drawing button. Clicking elements while in this mode selects (high-
lights) elements. Selected elements will be added to the Inactive Elements
list.
- Remove—While in this mode, clicking elements deselects them.
Elements that are not selected will not be added to the Inactive Elements
list.
Note: Selecting a node element to become Inactive will also select all
adjacent pipes to become Inactive. This is because all pipes
must end at a node.
In AutoCAD mode, you cannot use the right-click context menu

command Repeat to re-open the Active Topology Selection
dialog box.
- Select Custom—Clicking this button opens a Selection Set-type dialog

box. Elements in the left pane are active, and elements in the right pane
are inactive. All of the normal selection set functionality is available,
including filtering and element-type sorting.
- Clear Selection—Removes all elements from the inactive elements pane,
thereby causing all elements to become active in the current scenario.

Chapter
GA Optimization and 10
Calibration
The WaterCAD Darwin Calibrator provides a history of your calibration attempts, lets
you use a manual approach to calibration, supports multiple field data sets, brings the
speed and efficiency of genetic algorithms to calibrating your water system, and
presents several calibration candidates for you to consider, rather than just one solu-
tion. Darwin Calibrator lets you set up a series of Base Calibrations, which can have
numerous Child Calibrations that inherit settings from their parent Base Calibrations.
Note: Inheritance is not persistent. If you change the Base Calibration,

the change does not ripple down to the Child Calibrations.
Use Base and Child Calibrations to establish a history of your calibration trials to help
you derive a list of optimized solutions for your water system.
To use calibration manager, click Analysis > Darwin Calibrator.
1. Enter field data. Click the Field Data button to view, add, edit, and delete sets of
field data that you use to calibrate your water model.
2. Create groups that define what attributes of your model you want to adjust. Click
Groups.
3. Choose the options that define how you are evaluating your model. Click
Options.
4. Right-click in the calibrations area to add a Base Calibration, or click New Base
Calibration.
10.1 Darwin Calibrator

Darwin Calibrator lets you adjust your model to better match the actual behavior of
your water distribution system. This feature lets you make manual adjustments on the
model as well as adjustments using genetic algorithm optimization. Before you can
run the Darwin Calibrator, you must set up your calibration parameters.
The Darwin Calibrator dialog box has three distinct components:

Darwin Calibrator
• The Calibrations area, which contains the list of base and child calibrations you
have tried.
• The Calibration Groups area, which contains tabs containing the groups you set
up, including Roughness, Demand, Status, and Field data tabs.
• The Calibration Solutions area, which contains the solutions calculated by your
Manual or Optimized calibrations.
Darwin Calibrator includes:
• “New Calibration” on page 10-422

• “Optimized Calibration” on page 10-423
• “Manual Calibration” on page 10-425
• “Calibrations” on page 10-426
• “Calibration Solutions” on page 10-426
• “Calibration Export to Scenario Dialog Box” on page 10-427
• “GA-Optimized Calibration Tips” on page 10-428
• “Calibration Results Statistics” on page 10-429
10.1.1 New Calibration
To start a new calibration trial, click the New or New Base buttons. If a Base Calibra-
tion already exists, you can also choose to add a new Child Calibration.
Base/Child Calibration: Base and child calibrations record a history of the

calibrations you try. The base and child relationship
work to help you remember the workflow or route
you have used to test your calibrations.
Optimized Calibration: Use a GA (Genetic Algorithm) optimized calibration
if you want WaterCAD to efficiently process and
evaluate numerous trial calibrations of your water
system. You can set the optimized calibration to
deliver several solutions for you to review.
Manual Calibration: Use a Manual Calibration if you want to test fitness
by adjusting roughness, demand, or status manually.
If you have specific solutions in mind, Manual
Calibration might let you quickly narrow-down or
refine the number and measure of adjustments before
you use the genetic algorithm.
Label: Enter a label for the calibration you are setting up.

GA Optimization and Calibration
OK/Cancel: Click OK to add the new calibration or Cancel to

exit without adding the new Calibration.
10.1.2 Optimized Calibration
Genetic-Algorithm Optimized Calibration provides the following tabs:
• “Roughness/Demand” on page 10-423

• “Status” on page 10-423
• “Field Data” on page 10-423
• “Options” on page 10-424
• “Notes” on page 10-424
Roughness/Demand
The Roughness, Demand, and Status tabs display the groups you added when setting
up your Calibration Adjustment Groups (for more information, see “Calibration
Adjustment Groups Dialog Box” on page 10-438). If a tab is empty, then you did not
create a group for the condition represented by that tab.
Group: Displays the name of the group.

Operation: From, the drop-down list, select the operation you
want the calibration to perform.
Note: Try to choose an increment that gives the least number of

possible alternatives. You may need to decrease the range
between your upper and lower limits to do this.
Min/Max/Increment: Enter the minimum and maximum values that you

want the genetic algorithm to use as boundaries when
calculating fitness solutions. Set the increment as the
intervals at which you want the GA to test.
Status
Use the Status tab to see the initial status of the elements listed, whether pipes are
open or closed.
Field Data
The Field Data tab displays all the field data sets you have entered for the calibration.
Select the check box next to the name of the field data sets you want to use for the
calibration trial. Field data sets that have unchecked boxes next to them will not be
used to test fitness when you click Go or Compute.

Darwin Calibrator
Options
Use the Options tab to refine how WaterCAD applies the genetic algorithm (GA) to
your optimized calibration trials.
Note: Larger values for maximum trials and non-improvement

generations will make the optimization run longer. You may want
to start with fairly low numbers and then gradually increase the
numbers in subsequent runs as you want to ensure better
solutions. If a run seems to be taking long time, you may click
the Stop button to stop the optimization.
Reset: Click Reset to restore the software default values for

the Darwin Calibration Options.
Advanced: Click Advanced to access more Optimized
Calibration options (see “GA Parameters Advanced
Options” on page 10-442).
Fitness Tolerance: Set the precision with which you want the optimized
calibration to calculate fitness. As with many of these
settings, you should determine a tolerance that
balances accuracy and speed for your water models.
Fitness Tolerance works in conjunction with Non-
Improvement Generations.
Maximum Trials: Set the maximum number of calibration trials you
want the Optimized Calibration to process before
stopping.
Non-Improve Generations: Set the number of maximum number of non-
improvement generations you want the GA to
process without calculating an improved fitness. If
the Optimized Calibration makes this number of
calculations without finding an improvement in
fitness that is better than the defined Fitness
Tolerance, the calibration will stop. Non-
Improvement Generations works in conjunction with
Fitness Tolerance.
Solutions to Keep: Set the number of fitness solutions that you want to
keep. Rather than presenting you with only one
solution, WaterCAD presents you with a
customizable number of solutions, so you can review
them manually.
Notes
Type any notes that you want associated with the calibration.

10.1.3 Manual Calibration
Manual Calibration provides the following tabs:
• “Roughness/Demand” on page 10-425

• “Field Data” on page 10-425
Roughness/Demand
The Roughness and Demand tabs display the groups you added when setting up your
Calibration Adjustment Groups (Calibration Adjustment Groups dialog box). If a tab
is empty, then you did not create a group for the condition represented by that tab.
Group: Displays the name of the group.

Operation: From, the drop-down list, select the operation you
want the calibration to perform.
Value: Enter the value you want to use with the operation
you select for the Group.
Status
Use the Status tab to see the initial status of the elements listed, whether pipes are
open or closed, and whether the pipe’s status has been changed during the manual cali-
bration.
Field Data
The Field Data tab displays all the field data sets you have entered for the calibration.
Select the check box next to the name of the field data sets you want to use for the
calibration trial. Field data sets that have unchecked boxes next to them will not be
used to test fitness when you click Go or Compute.
Notes
Type any notes that you want associated with the calibration.

Darwin Calibrator
10.1.4 Calibrations
Note: After you make changes to a calibration, you need to click Go or

right-click and select Compute to recalculate the fitness.
If you change any calibration options, the fitness values will be

different and should not be directly compared to calibration runs
that used different options.
The calibrations data window shows all the base and child calibrations you have tried.
The Name of the calibration displays along with the fitness calculated for that calibra-
tion. 0 is an ideal, perfect fitness and lower numbers indicate fitnesses that rank better
than higher numbers.
10.1.5 Calibration Solutions
Note: A green square displays next to solutions created with the

current Calibration Options. You can compare the results for
solutions marked with green squares. If you change the
Calibration Options, previously calculated solutions display with
a gray square. Solutions with a gray square cannot be directly
compared to solutions with a green square.
The solutions data window shows solutions for the optimized or manual calibration
you select in the Calibrations data window.
• Solution Drop-down List—For manual optimizations, this drop-down list

contains one solution based on your Calibration. For Darwin Calibrations, the
solution drop-down list displays the most favorable number of solutions, based on
fitness, for the selected calibration. The number of solutions that display here
depends on what you set in the Solutions to Keep field of the Options tab (for
more information, see “Optimized Calibration” on page 10-423). Select the solu-
tion you want to see from the drop-down list and it displays in the data window.
Note: Any settings you made in the solution tree-view remain when
you switch solutions, which better enables you to compare
solutions.
Roughness/Demand/Status: Expand the tree-view to display the adjustments for

any roughness or demand groups, or the status of any
pipes you set up in your Adjustment Groups (for
more information, see “Calibration Adjustment
Groups Dialog Box” on page 10-438). Original
values and values adjusted by the manual or
optimized calibration are displayed.

HGL/Flow Observations: Expand the tree-view to display the simulated HGL/

flow against the observations you recorded in your
field data, and the difference between the observed
and simulated values.
Export to Scenario: Click the Export to Scenario button to export the
currently selected Calibration to the water flow
model. This opens the Export Calibration to Scenario
dialog box (for more information, see “Calibration
Export to Scenario Dialog Box” on page 10-427).
Copy to Clipboard: Click the Copy to Clipboard button to copy the
contents of the Solutions data window to the
clipboard. From the Windows Clipboard, you can
paste the solution data into other Windows programs,
like a word processor or text editor.
Report: Click the Report button to display a print preview of
the solutions data window.
Plot: Click Plot button to see a graph of your observed
data sets versus the HGL correlation between the
Simulated and Observed HGL.
10.1.6 Calibration Export to Scenario Dialog Box
Use the Calibration Export to Scenario dialog box to apply the results of your Opti-
mized Calibration or Manual Calibration to your water model.
OK/Cancel: Click OK to export your calibration or Cancel to

close the dialog box without exporting your
calibration.
Export Check Boxes: Select those check boxes next to those items you
want to export. Clear any check boxes you do not
want to export.
Export Scenario: When you Export to Scenario, the calibration can be
applied to your model by selecting it from the
Scenario drop-down list. You can rename the
scenario by typing over the default name.
Export Alternatives: Choose which items to export to your Alternatives.
You can rename Alternatives by typing over the
default name.

Darwin Calibrator
10.1.7 GA-Optimized Calibration Tips
Darwin Calibrator employs a powerful competent genetic algorithm search method

based on the principles of natural evolution and biological reproduction. This kind of
search algorithm is well suited to optimization of problems of a non-convex and
multiple local-optimal solution nature. Calibration of a hydraulic model falls into this
problem category and, as a result, a GA-optimization based search tool, such as
Darwin Calibrator, is a sound choice for hydraulic model calibration.
Despite all the good features of GA there are, however, some issues to consider:
• A solution is fitter only in relation to other known solutions and, consequently, a

GA has no test for true optimality. As a GA only knows the best solution relative
to others, a GA has no precise rule for when to stop. This means that heuristic
methods must be used to determine whether to stop a GA run. In Darwin Cali-
brator you can set a GA run to stop either by:
– Clicking Stop
– Setting a maximum number of trial solutions
– Setting a maximum number of non-improvement generations, whereby if the
fitness of the best solution does not improve by more than a specified toler-
ance in a set number of generations, then the GA stops
• A GA is a non-deterministic method that relies to a certain extent on its initial

random population (starting locations in the solution space). Thus, each GA run
performed may produce different solutions. (If you keep all GA parameters and
fitness settings the same, the method is deterministic and will produce identical
solutions every time.) Given the fact that a GA has no true test for optimality, after
stopping a GA and producing a particular result, there is always the possibility
that if you run the GA again you may find a better solution. In fact, it is good prac-
tice to run a GA a number of times, each time modifying something about the GA
run (e.g., GA parameters, fitness weightings, or adjustment group settings), in
order to produce another set of potentially better results. At a minimum, the
random number seed should be changed for each individual run so that the GA
search initiates differently and therefore concludes differently.
• The GA calculates fitness of each trial solution according to the defined objectives
for the optimization problem. GA only uses objective means to decide what
constitutes a fit solution, and what constitutes a less fit solution. The GA has no
way of subjectively assessing a solution other than the methods (weightings) built
into the definition of the fitness calculation. The best solution found by a GA
shouldn’t be blindly accepted as being correct. To any single optimization
problem there are likely to be many solutions that closely match the required
objectives. Due to the fact that the GA has no concept of what constitutes a fit
solution, other than its performance against the defined objectives, the GA may
produce solutions that are impractical. That is, the GA cannot think for the engi-
neer, it can only search the combination of choices that are presented to it. If the

engineer doesn’t provide the GA with high quality data and enough or sufficiently
flexible options to consider, then the GA may not be able to find a satisfactory
solution. Conversely if the GA is presented with too many possibilities to try (e.g.,
in Darwin Calibrator, if you define an excessively large adjustment group ranges
combined with a small adjustment increments and a large number of adjustment
groups), then the efficiency of the GA search is reduced, and the likelihood that
the GA will find the correct answer is also greatly reduced. GA is a highly sophis-
ticated search technique, but despite all of its great features, GA still must be used
with a degree of engineering judgment and skill. Only then can the engineer
expect the GA to find solutions that are not only fit, but are practical and likely to
represent the real life situation as accurately as possible.
• Uncertainty in field observations should be assessed before these observations are
used in an optimization. It is not uncommon for errors in measurement of head
loss to be on the same order of magnitude or larger that the actual head loss
(Walski, 2000). Such values should not be used in calibration because the calibra-
tion algorithm will dutifully try to match the field observations even if they are
erroneous. To ensure that head loss is adequate to exceed measurement error, it is
helpful to collect data when velocities in pipes are appreciable. In some systems
sized for fire protection, demands (and velocities and head losses) are so low most
of the time that head loss measurements are meaningless other that to check pres-
sure gage elevations. Another problem that occurs when calibrating a model is
that some of the parameters determined are fixed and knowable at the time the
data were taken (roughness, valve status), while others are merely a random
observation from a stochastic process (water use). If a C-factor is determined as
90, then that value will be true in the not to distant future. If water use during a
pressure observation is determined to be 100 gpm (6.3 l/s), is that value the
demand that should be used in modeling, given that it is only one observation
from a distribution? The actual water determined from calibration may not be the
best value to use for representing the current year status of the system. You need
to decide if the water use observed during calibration is the water use that should
be used as a basis for future modeling.
10.1.8 Calibration Results Statistics
After a Calibration has been calculated, a dialog box displays a summary of the Cali-
bration Statistics. The information displayed includes the Fitness Rating, the number
of Generations, and number of trials. It also reports the status of the calibration calcu-
lations.
10.2 Field Data Sets

Field data sets includes:
• “Field Data Set Dialog Box” on page 10-430

Field Data Sets
• “Field Data Sets Dialog Box” on page 10-432

• “New Field Data Set” on page 10-433
• “Field Data Observation Dialog Box” on page 10-433
• “Entering Fire Flow Test Results” on page 10-434
• “Select Element” on page 10-435
• “Field Data Import” on page 10-435
10.2.1 Field Data Set Dialog Box
Use the Field Data Set dialog box to define the field data you have collected. This
dialog box comprises three tabs:
• “Observations” on page 10-430

• “Demand Adjustments” on page 10-431
Observations
Date: Set the date of the observations and field tests.
Note: The time is important because it is used within any patterns or

diurnal curves you are using to track your water demand. The
time entered in your field data set is used to determine demand
multipliers (from hydraulic patterns), which are used to calculate
the junction demands that will be simulated in (GA) Optimized
Calibration.
Time: Set the time of the observations and field tests.
Note: You must enter a time. You cannot leave the Observations tab or
click OK until you set a time.
Time from Start: Displays the time difference from the time you set for
the field data set to the time defined as the start of the
scenario.
Observations: Click Insert to add observed data. Click Delete to
remove the selected row of observed data.

Note: Valve and pump flows are used as calibration targets, not
boundary conditions. Valve and pump flows are calculated by
using the valve setting and pump speed, which are used as
boundary conditions if observed. Tanks levels are also used as
boundary conditions.
Element Type: From the drop-down list, select the type of element
for which you want to enter data.
Note: Using the two buttons next to the Element drop-down list, you
can use the Select Element dialog box or select your element
directly from your drawing.
Element: Select the element for which you want to enter

observed data.
Attribute: Select the attribute for which you have observed
data. Different attributes are available for each
element, including: Hydraulic Grade, Pressure,
Discharge, and Status. Enter the observed value for
the attribute.
Value: Select a value from the drop-down list or type in a
value.
Import: This allows you to Import field data from a tab-
delimited ASCII text file. For more information, see
“Field Data Import” on page 10-435.
Demand Adjustments
Note: The Demand Adjustments all relate to the particular field data set
you are editing. Demand multiplier adjustments and additional
junction demands (e.g., fire flow tests) are in addition to, not in
lieu of, junction demands already calculated from pattern
multipliers.
Use the Demand Adjustments tab to adjust demand for the element. Select the element
for which you want to add an additional demand, such as flow from a hydrant, and
enter the value of that demand.
• Override Scenario Demand Alternative—Check this box to override the

displayed Demand Alternative and to use the Demand Multiplier. Clear this check
box if you do not want to use the Demand Multiplier.
• Demand Alternative—Displays the Demand Alternative associated with the
selected set of observations.
• Demand Multiplier—Set a demand multiplier that is applied to your water
model. For example, if you have knowledge that your demand is higher or lower
by a specific percentage, you can set that value here.

Field Data Sets
• Junction—Select the Junction to which you want to apply Demand Adjustments.

You can select a junction from a drop-down list, Select Element dialog box, or by
clicking the junction to select it from the drawing.
• Additional Demand—Set the additional demand at the selected junction.
Notes
Use the Notes tab to enter any comments you want saved with the adjustments.
10.2.2 Field Data Sets Dialog Box
Note: Field data taken at times of peak usage, in high-flow pipes, and/
or where there is significant head loss, will be more useful when
calibrating your model than data taken in low-usage, low-flow
areas, where there is little head loss.
The Field Data Sets dialog box lets you enter a variety of test data against which you
will calibrate your water model. WaterCAD lets you use more than one field data set
in your calculations.
Note: When entering fire flow test results, consider: Entering Fire Flow
Test Results. For more information, see “Entering Fire Flow Test
Results” on page 10-434.
Representative Scenario: Select the Scenario you want to use for the
calibration. For more information, see “Scenarios”
on page 8-364.
Note: Since Field Data Sets are linked to specific scenarios, a scenario
that is referenced by a field data set cannot be deleted unless all
field data sets that reference it are deleted beforehand.
Field Data Set: Displays the field data sets.
Note: The time is important because it is used within any patterns or

diurnal curves you are using to track your water demand.
The time entered in your field data set is used to determine demand multipliers (from
hydraulic patterns), which are used to calculate the junction demands that will be
simulated in (GA) Optimized Calibration.
(The demand at a junction during a GA Calibration run is the product of its baseline
demands and the demand factors at the time specified for the field data set.)

Pump settings and control settings, etc., are also determined from the time setting you
specify. Demand multiplier adjustments and additional junction demands (e.g., fire
flow tests) are in addition to, not in lieu of, junction demands already calculated from
pattern multipliers.
Also, a steady state run in WaterCAD will run with only junction baseline demands
applied, whereas an Optimized Calibration run based on a steady state scenario that
uses pattern multipliers for the specified time.
Date/Time: Displays the date and time that was entered for the
field data set. The date field is purely a label that can
be used to record when field measurements were
taken.
Add: Click Add to add a new field data set.
Edit: Click Edit to modify the selected field data set.
Duplicate: Click Duplicate to copy the selected field data set.
This can save you some time in entering new field
data as a new set, but make sure all entered data is
correct.
Delete: Click Delete to delete the selected field data set.
Rename: Click Rename to rename the selected field data set.
10.2.3 New Field Data Set
Enter the name of the field data set, or use the default name, and click OK.
10.2.4 Field Data Observation Dialog Box
Note: Using the two buttons next to the Element drop-down list, you
can use the Select Element dialog box or select your element
directly from your drawing.
The Observation dialog box lets you select elements in your model and enter observed
data regarding those elements, such as observed pressures, discharges, statuses, or
hydraulic grade.
Element: Select the element for which you want to enter

observed data.

Field Data Sets
Attribute: Select the attribute for which you have observed

data. Different attributes are available for each
element, including: Hydraulic Grade, Pressure,
Discharge, and Status. Enter the observed value for
the attribute.
10.2.5 Entering Fire Flow Test Results
When entering fire flows, there are two issues to consider:
• How to enter the fire flows.

• How to adjust demands at other nodes during fire flow test.
To enter a fire flow test:
1. In Darwin Calibrator, select Field Data > Add.

2. Name that Data Set (something like Fire flow at J-129).
3. Enter the observations as you would for any other condition (for more informa-
tion, see “Field Data Set Dialog Box” on page 10-430).
4. To enter the fire flow, select the Demand Adjustments tab.
5. Enter the Junction label where the fire flow occurred.
6. Enter and the additional fire flow as Additional Demand.
7. The additional flow is added to the normal demand at that node.
There are several ways to adjust the flows at the non-fire flow node. Only use one of
them:
• If you want to use your EPS demand patterns, specify the correct time for the fire
flow test and the demand will be adjusted with the multipliers.
• If you don’t have EPS demand patterns or don’t want to use them, set the first
flow time to the some time when the demand multiplier is one (or any time, if
there are no demand patterns). Then you have two ways to adjust background
demands.
• You can specify a Demand Multiplier to use.

Note: Do not pick a demand alternative with fire flows because the fire
flows will be counted twice.
• Or, you can specify some alternative demand other than the one corresponding to
the Representative Scenario.
• You can let the Darwin Calibrator identify the demand multiplier. To do that, use a
time corresponding to a multiplier of 1, don’t override the Scenario Demand
Alternative from the Representative Scenario, and let the Demand Multiplier be
one. In this way, the Calibrator will pick the demand multiplier.
10.2.6 Select Element
Use the Select Element dialog box to select an element from your model.
• Elements—Use the Elements drop-down list to display all elements of one type,
from which you can select the element you want. From the drop-down list, select
<all> if you want WaterCAD to display all element types.
• Select From Drawing—Click Select From Drawing if you want to select the
element by clicking on it in your model.
10.2.7 Field Data Import
You can import Field Data from a tab-delimited ASCII text file. The text file to be
imported must be in the following format: Element Type, Element Label, Attribute
Value.
Press the Tab key once between each column. One attribute and value can be entered
per line, so to import multiple attributes and values for a single element, multiple lines
must be entered. There is no limit to the number of individual Field Data input items
that can be imported from a single text file, although all items contained in the text file
will be imported to the same Field Data Set. Imported data is appended to any input
data that has already been entered. In other words, importing field data information
will not overwrite existing input data, even when data for a particular element is
already present.
The types of data and the corresponding values that can be imported for each element
type are as follows:

Field Data Sets
* Whether this value represents Hydraulic Grade or Pressure is determined by the Global Project
Option Input Mode (see “Input Modes” on page 4-245).
EXAMPLE:
Pressure
J-1 Hydraulic Grade 65.3
Junction
Pressure Pipe P-1 Status Open
Pressure Pipe P-1 Discharge 100

Hydraulic Grade
Pump PMP-1 125
Out
Hydraulic Grade
Pump PMP-1 37
In
Pump PMP-1 Status On
Tank T-1 Level 12
To import field data from a tab-delimited text file in the format shown above, click
the Analysis menu and select Darwin Calibrator. Click the Field Data button, and
then click the Add button in the Field Data Sets window. Name the new field data
set and then click the Import button on the Observations tab of the Field Data Set
dialog box.
10.3 Adjustment Groups

Adjustment groups are available from the Groups button. They include:
• “New Adjustment Group Dialog Box” on page 10-437

• “Rename Adjustment Group Dialog Box” on page 10-437
• “Calibration Groups” on page 10-438
• “Calibration Adjustment Groups Dialog Box” on page 10-438
• “Selection Set Dialog Box” on page 10-439
10.3.1 New Adjustment Group Dialog Box
Type the name of your Adjustment Group, or accept the default name, and click OK.
10.3.2 Rename Adjustment Group Dialog Box
Type the name of your Adjustment Group, and click OK.

Adjustment Groups
10.3.3 Calibration Groups
The calibration groups data window displays a series of tabs that let you adjust the
conditions for the calibration trial. The tabs and options that are available depend on
whether you selected Manual or Optimized Calibration.
10.3.4 Calibration Adjustment Groups Dialog Box
Note: Generally, you should not use one element per group but to do a
pipe-by-pipe calibration, or something similar, you must create a
group for each pipe.
Adjustment groups are used in the calibration process. You can create Adjustment
Groups for Roughness, Demand, and Status. Select the kind of group you want to
create and click Add to add elements to it. Or, select an existing group and Edit,
Delete, or Rename it.
Note: Adjustment Groups are a key component of the calibration. You

must be careful to group similar elements and not dissimilar
ones. You can adjust the properties for a group as a whole but
not for individual members of the group.
A good practice is to decide on your Adjustment Groups first

and then collect the Field Data to support the number or groups,
rather than letting available data determine how many
Adjustment Groups you have.
Roughness: Click Roughness to view any existing Roughness

Adjustment Groups and to add, edit, delete, or rename
such groups. Each roughness group should comprise
elements that have similar attributes, such as pipes in a
location of a similar material and age.
Demand: Click Demand to view any existing Demand Adjustment
Groups and to add, edit, delete, or rename such groups.
Adding Demand Calibration Adjustment Groups
introduces more unknowns into a calibration problem. If
available, you should enter more accurate demand data
into your WaterCAD model, rather than adding Demand
Adjustment Groups. Consider creating Demand Groups
based on usage patterns.

Status: Click Status to view any existing Status Adjustment

Groups and to add, edit, delete, or rename such groups.
Status indicates whether a pipe is open or closed. If you
set up Status groups, GA-optimized calibration will test
each pipe in each group for open and closed status. We
recommend that Status Groups comprise at most only a
few pipes, or one pipe.
Label: Displays the names of the adjustment groups you have
created.
Elements: Lists the number of elements in the groups you have
created.
10.3.5 Selection Set Dialog Box
The Selection Set dialog box lets you add or edit items in your Roughness, Demand,
or Status group. The Selection Set dialog box comprises two data windows: Available
Items and Selected Items. The items listed are those that appear in your water model.
Select: Click the Select button to select items by Filter,

Element, Selection Set, or by clicking the items you
want from your drawing. After selecting the items
you want from the drawing, right-click and select
Done.
Filter: Filter lets you select members of your group by
similar properties (for more information, see
“Filtering Tables” on page 7-339).
Element: Element lets you select members of your group that
are like elements, for example, pressure pipes.
Selection Set: Selection Set lets you choose pre-defined selection
sets to include in the group (for more information,
see “Selection Sets” on page 5-263).
From Drawing: From Drawing lets you select the elements you want
in your group by clicking them in the drawing. Right-
click and select Done after you finish selecting
elements by clicking.
Select/Invert Selection: Use Invert Selection to de-select all highlighted items
and select all items that are not currently selected.
Select/Clear Selection: Use Clear Selection to de-select all highlighted
items.

Calibration Options
Add: To include items in your group, click, ctrl-click, or

shift-click them and use the single-arrow Add button
to move the selected files to the Selected Items data
window. Instead, you can move all items by clicking
the double-arrow Add button.
Remove: To remove items from your group, click, Ctrl+click,
or Shift+click them and use the single-arrow Remove
button to move the selected files to the Available
Items data window. Instead, you can move all items
by clicking the double-arrow Remove button.
OK/Cancel: Click OK to accept the items you have included in
your group or click Cancel to exit the Selection Set
dialog box without making any changes or additions
to the group. A Selection Set must have at least one
Selected Item when you click OK.
10.4 Calibration Options

Note: If you change the Calibration Options, any fitness values you get
are not comparable to fitness values obtained using different
Calibration Options settings.
Use the Calibration Options dialog box to set up how the calibrations are evaluated.
The options you specify are applied to every calibration trial.
Fitness Type: Select the Fitness Type you want to use from the
drop-down list. In general, regardless of the fitness
type you select, a lower fitness indicates better
calibration. Fitness Types include: Minimize
Difference Squares, Minimize Difference Absolute
Values, and Minimize Maximum Difference. For
more information, see “Calibration Options
Formulae” on page 10-444.
Minimize Difference Squares: Uses a calibration designed to minimize the sum of
squares of the discrepancy between the observed data
and the model simulated values. (Model simulated
values include hydraulic grades and pipe discharges.)
This calibration favors solutions that minimize the
overall sum of the squares of discrepancies between
observed and simulated data.

Min. Diff. Absolute Values: Uses a calibration designed to minimize the sum of
absolute discrepancy between the observed data and
the model simulated values. This calibration favors
solutions that minimize the overall sum of
discrepancies between observed and simulated data.
Note: The Minimize Maximum Difference Fitness Type is more

sensitive to the accuracy of your data than other Fitness Types.
Minimize Max. Difference: Uses a calibration designed to minimize the

maximum of all the discrepancies between the
observed data and the model simulated values. This
calibration favors solutions that minimize the worst
single discrepancy between observed and simulated
data.
Note: You can give higher importance to Head or Flow by setting a

smaller number for its Per Fitness Point Value.
Head/Flow per Fitness Point: Head and Flow per Fitness Type provide a way for
you to weigh the importance of head and flow in your
calibration. Set these values such that the head and
flow have unit equivalence.
Flow Weight Type: Select the type of weight used: None, Linear, Square,
Square Root, and Log. The weighting type you use
can provide a greater or lesser fitness penalty.
In general, measurements with larger flow carry more weight in the optimization cali-
brations than those with less flow. You can exaggerate or reduce the effect larger
measurements have on your calibration by selecting different weight types. For
example, using no weighting (None) provides no penalty for measurements with
lesser flow versus those with greater flow. Using log and square root reduces the
fitness penalty for measurements with lesser flow, and using linear or square increases
the fitness penalty for measurements with less flow.
OK/Cancel: Click OK to accept the changes you made and apply

them to all future calibrations. Click Cancel to close
the dialog box without making or saving any
changes.
the Calibration Options.
Calibration Options includes:
• “GA Parameters Advanced Options” on page 10-442

• “Calibration Options Formulae” on page 10-444

Calibration Options
10.4.1 GA Parameters Advanced Options
The GA Parameters Advanced Options let you customize how the genetic algorithm
(GA) performs. Since genetic-algorithm optimization is a randomly guided search
algorithm, different parameter values may yield a slightly different set of solutions,
which can used for a sensitivity study of your model calibration.
Note: All values must be positive, not negative. Recommended values

are based on maximizing speed and efficiency.

the options.
Maximum Era Number: Lets you controls the number of outer loops the
genetic algorithm (GA) uses. Each outer loop runs
over the number of generations with the same
population size. A large value for maximum era
number will make the optimization run longer than a
smaller number would. You might want to start with
a low number and increase the number in subsequent
runs.
The allowable range for values is greater than or
equal to 1. If you use 0 or less, the Optimized The
GAuses values based on what is set for Maximum
Trials and Non-Improvement Generations (for more
information, see “Optimized Calibration” on
page 10-423 and “Stopping Criteria” on page 12-
497).
Era Generation Number: Sets the number of generations of each inner loop the
GA uses.
The allowable range for values is greater than or
equal to 1. If you use 0 or less, the Optimized The
GA uses values based on what is set for Maximum
Trials and Non-improvement Generations (for more
information, see “Optimized Calibration” on
page 10-423 and “Stopping Criteria” on page 12-
497).
Population Size: Sets the number of GA solutions in each generation.
Increasing Population Size results in a longer time
for each generation and more solutions to be
evaluated.
The allowable range for values is from 50 to 500. We
recommend you use a range of 50 to 150.

Cut Probability: Sets the probability that a GA solution will be split

into two pieces. Setting this value closer to 100%
increases the number of cuts made and reduces the
average string (chromosome) length. Increasing Cut
Probability causes solutions to vary more widely
from one generation to the next, whereas decreasing
this results in more marginal changes.
The allowable range for values is between 0% and
100%, not inclusive. We recommend you use a value
less than 10%.
Note: Setting the Splice probability closer to 100% increases the

demand on system RAM. If you are getting out-of-memory errors
when using GA Optimization, try reducing the Splice Probability
closer to 0% and try increasing the Cut Probability away from
0%.
Splice Probability: Sets the probability that two GA solutions will be

joined together. A Splice Probability set close to
100% results in long solution strings, which
increases the mixing of alleles (genes) and improves
the variety of solutions.
100%, not inclusive. We recommend you use a range
from 50% to 90%.
Mutation Probability: Sets the probability that a GA solution is randomly
altered. A value closer to 100% causes the solutions
to contain more randomization than values closer to
0%.
100%, not inclusive. We recommend you use a value
less than 10%.
Random Seed: Lets you set the random number generator to a new
point. Changing this value and leaving all other
parameters as-is will yield a different solution set.
The allowable range for values is from 0 to 1,
inclusive.
Penalty Factor: In Darwin Designer, use a penalty factor to help find
the solution. A high penalty factor causes the GA to
focus on feasible solutions, which do not violate
boundaries of pressure and flow. A low penalty
factor (50,000 or so) permits the GA to consider
solutions that are on the boundary between feasible
and infeasible solutions, possibly violating pressure

Calibration Options
or flow boundaries by a small amount. Because the

optimal solution often resides in the boundary
between feasible and infeasible solutions, a high
penalty factor causes the GA to find a feasible
solution quickly but is less likely to find the optimal
solution.
From a practical standpoint, you might consider
starting with a high penalty factor and working
towards a lower penalty factor as you pursue an
optimal solution.
(For more information, see “Local Options Tab” on
page 12-497.)
10.4.2 Calibration Options Formulae
The following formulae are used for Minimize Difference Squares, Minimize Differ-
ence Absolute Values, and Minimize Maximum Difference.
2 2
NH
⎛ Hsim nh − Hobs nh ⎞ NF
⎛ Fsim nf − Fobs nf ⎞
∑ w ⎜
nh ⎜
Hpnt
⎟
⎟ + ∑ wnf ⎜⎜
Fpnt
⎟⎟
np =1 ⎝ ⎠ nf =1 ⎝ ⎠
NH + NF
Figure 10-1: Minimize Difference Squares:
NH
Hsimnh − Hobs nh NF Fsimnf − Fobs nf
∑ wnh
np =1 Hpnt
+ ∑ wnf
nf =1 Fpnt
NH + NF
Figure 10-2: Minimize Difference Absolute Values
⎧⎪ NH Hsim nh − Hobs nh NF Fsim nf − Fobs nf ⎫⎪

max ⎨max wnh , max wnf ⎬
⎪⎩ nh =1 Hpnt nf =1 Fpnt ⎪⎭
Figure 10-3: Minimize Maximum Difference
where Wnh and Wnf represent a normalized weighting factor for observed hydraulic
grades and flows respectively. They are given as:

Hobs nh
Wnh =
∑ Hobs nh
Fobs nf
Wnf =
∑ Fobs nf
The weighting factors may also take many other forms, such as no weight (equal to 1),
linear, square, square root and log functions. Other variables include:
• Hobsnh designates the nh-th observed hydraulic grade.

• Hsimnh is the nh-th model simulated hydraulic grade.
• Fobsnf is the observed flow.
• Fsimnf is the model simulated flow.
• Hpnt notes the hydraulic head per fitness point.
• Fpnt is the flow per fitness point.
• NH is the number of observed hydraulic grades.
• NF is the number of observed pipe discharges.

Calibration Options

Chapter
Cost Estimating 11
The Capital Cost Manager lets you calculate a planning level estimate of the capital
costs associated with an entire system or any portion of a system. This makes it easy to
compare the costs associated with various scenarios and help ensure that the most
cost-effective design is chosen.
The costs associated with a particular element are broken down into two categories:
construction costs (see “Construction Costs” on page 6-315) and non-construction
costs (see “Non-Construction Costs” on page 6-314). The total cost for each element
is the sum of the total construction and non-construction costs. The total cost for a
scenario is computed by summing the total cost for every element selected to be
included in the cost analysis, and then applying any global cost adjustments that you
have defined.
Each construction cost item is expressed as a combination of a quantity, unit, and unit
cost. The total cost associated with a single construction cost item is the quantity
multiplied by the unit cost. The unit cost for each construction cost item can either be
entered directly by you, or if the element is a pipe or gravity structure (e.g., inlet,
manhole, junction, junction chamber) it can be calculated based on a Unit Cost Func-
tion (for more information, see “Unit Cost Functions” on page 11-457). A Unit Cost
Function is a way to relate a property of the element, such as the diameter of a pipe, to
the unit cost. This makes it easy to assign a Unit Cost Function to an element. The cost
of the element is then automatically updated when you modify the physical character-
istics of the system.
The other type of cost is non-construction. Non-construction cost items are specified
either as a lump sum or as a percentage of the total construction costs. This type of
cost can be useful when trying to explicitly account for items like omissions and
contingencies.

Capital Cost Manager
Tip: You do not need to have a hydraulically valid network to perform

a cost analysis. You can quickly calculate the cost associated
with a system at any time through the Capital Cost Manager.
In addition to specifying the costs for each element in the system, you can also make
adjustments on a system level to the total cost of all the elements included in the cost
analysis. This makes it easy to account automatically for contingencies and adjust-
ments on a scenario level.
11.1 Capital Cost Manager

The Capital Cost Manager allows you to quickly compute and compare the costs asso-
ciated with your different scenarios. (for more information, see “Scenarios” on
page 8-364). This dialog box provides you with a convenient place to view, edit, and
calculate project level cost data. This dialog box is divided into three sections that are
described below:
• Button Section—This column of buttons provides access to the key pieces of data
involved in a cost analysis. For more information, see “Capital Cost Manager—
Button Section” on page 11-449.
• Center Pane—This pane displays an explorer view of the cost information for
various scenarios. For more information, see “Capital Cost Manager—Center
Pane” on page 11-450.
• Right Pane—This pane displays the contents of the item selected in the center
pane. For more information, see “Capital Cost Manager—Left Pane” on page 11-
450.
Capital Cost Manager includes:
• “Capital Cost Manager—Button Section” on page 11-449

• “Capital Cost Manager—Center Pane” on page 11-450
• “Capital Cost Manager—Left Pane” on page 11-450
• “System Cost Adjustments Table” on page 11-450
• “Active Cost Scenarios” on page 11-451

Cost Estimating
11.1.1 Capital Cost Manager—Button Section
On the left side of the Capital Cost Manager is a column of buttons that provide access
to the key pieces of data involved in a cost analysis. Each of these buttons is described
as follows:
• Unit Cost Functions—Opens the Unit Cost Function Manager, which is the place
to add new or edit existing functions describing the relationship between a model
attribute and the unit price for the element. For pipes, this might be a table of data
relating the pipe material to the cost per unit length. For more information, see
“Unit Cost Functions” on page 11-457.
• Cost Alternatives—Opens the Capital Cost Alternatives Manager where you can
quickly create different cost alternatives. For example, you may wish to compare
the cost associated with different cost functions, or to separately calculate the cost
of different phases of construction. For more information, see “Capital Cost Alter-
natives Manager” on page 11-457.
• Cost Adjustments—Opens the System Cost Adjustments Table for the selected
scenario. This is the location where you enter adjustments that you wish to make
on a scenario level. For more information, see “System Cost Adjustments Table”
on page 11-450.
• Active Scenarios—Opens the Active Cost Scenarios dialog box where you can
select which scenarios will appear in the Capital Cost Manager. For more infor-
mation, see “Active Cost Scenarios” on page 11-451.
• Cost Reports—Opens a menu that provides access to one of the predefined cost
reports detailing the costs associated with a particular scenario. The reports that
can be opened through this button include: “Project Detailed Cost Report” on
page 11-463, “Project Element Summary Cost Report” on page 11-463, “Project
Summary Cost Report” on page 11-463, “Pipe Costs Report” on page 11-464, and
“Cost Warnings Report” on page 11-464.

Capital Cost Manager
11.1.2 Capital Cost Manager—Center Pane
When you open the Capital Cost Manager (see “Capital Cost Manager” on page 11-
448), this pane will contain an explorer view of all the scenarios in the file. The total
cost of each scenario is displayed to the right of the scenario label. If cost data was
specified for a scenario, you will see a small ‘+’ symbol to the left of the folder icon.
You can click this symbol to get an expanded view of the costs associated with a
scenario.
In the first level of the expanded view, you will see the subtotal for each type of
element included in the cost analysis, as well as the total cost adjustments made to the
scenario. If you expand any of these items, you will get a view of the costs of each
individual element. If you expand the view, one more level you will be able to see the
construction and non-construction costs associated with an element. The contents of
any component that is selected will be displayed in the table on the pane to the right of
this one.
Just above the right side of this pane is a row of three buttons, which access the
following functionality:
• Properties—Opens the System Cost Adjustments Table for the currently

selected scenario. For more information, see “System Cost Adjustments
Table” on page 11-450.
• Graph—Opens a pie chart of the items comprising the total cost of the
scenario.
• Report—Opens a tabular report on any component selected in this pane.
11.1.3 Capital Cost Manager—Left Pane
This pane on the right side of the Capital Cost Manager (see “Capital Cost Manager”
on page 11-448) is used to display an expanded view of the contents of the item
selected in the center pane.
11.1.4 System Cost Adjustments Table
The System Cost Adjustments Table allows you to make adjustments to the total cost
calculated for all the elements included in the cost analysis. This may include items
such as omissions and contingencies that might be represented as a percentage of the
total construction costs, or land acquisition costs that are represented as a lump sum.
Each cost adjustment consists of the following items:
• Label—A unique name that identifies each cost adjustment.

Cost Estimating
• Operation—The mathematical operation that should be used with the factor to

compute the cost adjustment.
• Factor—A numeric value that is used with the operation and the total scenario
cost to compute the cost adjustment.
The types of operations that are supported are described below:
• % of Construction—Computes the cost of the adjustment as a percentage of the

total construction costs for the scenario. For example, if the total construction cost
for a scenario is $100000 and the numeric value in the factor field is 10, the cost
adjustment is $10000.
• % of Total Cost—Computes the cost of the adjustment as a percentage of the
total construction and non-construction costs for a scenario. For example, if the
total cost for all the elements in a scenario is $200000 and the numeric value of
the factor is 15, the cost adjustment is $30000.
• Add—Adds the numeric value that you set to the other costs computed for a
scenario.
• Lump Sum—The numeric value specified is a lump sum that is added to the other
costs for the scenario.
• Multiply—Multiplies the numeric value in the factor field by the total construc-
tion and non-construction costs for a scenario.
• Subtract—Subtracts the numeric value in the factor field from the other costs
computed for the scenario.
11.1.5 Active Cost Scenarios
The active scenarios dialog box allows you to select, which scenarios you would like
to appear in the Capital Cost Manager. If there is check in the box to the left of the
scenario name then that scenario will appear in the Capital Cost Manager.
11.2 Energy Cost Manager

Energy Cost Manager includes:
• “Energy Cost Analysis” on page 11-452

• “Energy Cost Manager” on page 11-452
• “Energy Pricing Manager” on page 11-455
• “Energy Pricing Editor” on page 11-456

Energy Cost Manager
11.2.1 Energy Cost Analysis
The WaterCAD Energy Cost Analysis feature lets you estimate the cost of operating
pumps during an extended period simulation (EPS).
This cost analysis not only calculates the cost of the energy being used by the pump, it
also adjusts the reported daily cost based on the effects of storage within the network.
To illustrate this, let’s say you have a tank in the network that has an initial level of 10
ft., and during the course of the extended period simulation this level falls to 5 ft.
Realistically, this translates to an energy loss because at some point the pump will
have to expend energy to fill the tank back up to its original level. Conversely, if the
water level in the tank at the end of the simulation is greater than the initial level, the
cost associated with the additional energy expenditure will be subtracted from the
final daily cost.
The effect of this additional consideration in the cost analysis is that the estimate
provided by WaterCAD will be much more realistic than an estimate based solely on
the cost of running the pump. For instance, if you ran an extended period simulation in
which the tank was able to meet the demands of the network for a 24-hour period
without requiring additional water, and ran a cost analysis without accounting for
storage gains/losses for this 24-hour period, the program would calculate that the daily
energy cost for this network is zero—the pumps did not run, so no energy was
consumed. This is obviously incorrect, as energy will be required to fill the tank again
to recoup the losses of the previous day.
11.2.2 Energy Cost Manager
The Energy Cost Manager is separated into three sections:
• Button Section—This section contains three buttons:

– Prices—Opens the Energy Pricing Manager (for more information, see
“Energy Pricing Manager” on page 11-455).
– Close—Exits the Energy Cost Manager.
– Help—Opens the online help.
• Analysis Control Pane—This section of the dialog box consists of a menu which
allows you to select the scenario to be calculated, a GO button which begins the
calculation, and a pane that allows you to control what results will be displayed in
the Detailed Results Pane. Highlighting one of the calculation components will
cause the detailed results of the cost calculation to be displayed in the Detailed
Results Pane. This section also displays a breakdown of the calculated costs asso-
ciated with the various components of the energy cost analysis.

Cost Estimating
• Detailed Results Pane—This section of the dialog box is comprised of three tabs
and a tabular report pane. This pane displays the detailed results associated with
the currently highlighted item in the Analysis Control pane. The available tabs
change depending on which row is selected in the Analysis Control Pane.
When the green folder representing the scenario to be calculated is highlighted, the
following tabs are available:
• Pump—Displays a three column table listing all of the pumps in the current
scenario. The three columns are Label, Include In Cost Calculation?, and Energy
Pricing. To exclude pumps from the analysis, clear the check box in the Include In
Cost Calculation? column for the corresponding pumps. The Energy Pricing
column allows you to choose which energy pricing definition is to be used when
calculating the corresponding pump, or to create a new one. Click the Ellipsis (...)
button to open the Energy Pricing Manager (for more information, see “Energy
Pricing Manager” on page 11-455).
• Summary—Displays a summary of the calculated results for the cost analysis.
• Tank—Displays a two column table listing all of the tanks in the current scenario.
The two columns are Label and Include in Cost Calculation?. To exclude tanks
from the analysis, clear the check box in the Include In Cost Calculation? column
for the corresponding tanks.
Click GO to compute the energy costs. Costs are calculated for the elements in your
model.

Energy Cost Manager
Click GO to calculate
energy costs and
populate the left pane
In the left pane, from the
calculated costs, highlight
the element about which
you want information
From the calculated costs, when you highlight Pump Usage, a Results tab is available.
• Results—The Results tab consists of a menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and
the results pane. The drop-down list allows you to choose whether the Daily
Energy Usage or the Total Energy Usage results are displayed. The Copy button
copies the results table to the clipboard, and the Report button generates a report
containing the calculated results that are displayed in the results pane and opens
the Print Preview dialog box (for more information, see “Print Preview Window”
on page 13-559).
From the calculated costs, when you highlight Time Detail, the following tabs are
available:

Cost Estimating
the results pane. The drop-down list for this tab has only a single option, Time
Details. The Copy button copies the results table to the clipboard, and the Report
button generates a report containing the calculated results that are displayed in the
results pane and opens the Print Preview dialog box (for more information, see
“Print Preview Window” on page 13-559).
• Graph—The Graph tab consists of a menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and
the plot pane. The drop-down list for this tab allows you to choose which attribute
is to be graphed. The Copy button copies the plot to the clipboard, and the Report
button opens the Print Preview dialog box containing the graph as displayed in the
plot pane. To change the graph options, right-click in the graph display pane and
select Options.
From the calculated costs, when you highlight Storage, only a Results tab is available:
the results pane. The drop-down list allows you to choose whether the Daily or the
Storage results are displayed. The Copy button copies the results table to the clip-
board, and the Report button generates a report containing the calculated results
that are displayed in the results pane and opens the Print Preview dialog box (for
more information, see “Print Preview Window” on page 13-559).
From the calculated costs, when you highlight Peak Demands, only a Results tab is
available:
the results pane. The drop-down list allows you to choose whether the Peak
Demand Daily Summary or the Peak Demand results are displayed. The Copy
button copies the results table to the clipboard, and the Report button generates a
report containing the calculated results that are displayed in the results pane and
opens the Print Preview dialog box (for more information, see “Print Preview
Window” on page 13-559).
11.2.3 Energy Pricing Manager
The Energy Pricing Manager allows you to create, edit, and manage the electricity
cost definitions that are used for the energy cost calculations. The following options
are available in this dialog box:
• Add—Prompts for a name, then opens the Energy Pricing Editor (for more infor-
mation, see “Energy Pricing Editor” on page 11-456).
• Edit—Opens the Energy Pricing Editor for the currently highlighted definition.
• Duplicate—Prompts for a name, then opens the Energy Pricing Editor, which is
pre-set with the input data from the currently highlighted definition.

Energy Cost Manager
• Delete—Verifies the action, then deletes the highlighted definition.

• Rename—Allows you to rename the currently highlighted definition.
11.2.4 Energy Pricing Editor
The Energy Price Editor allows you to create the cost definitions that will be used in
the Energy Cost Analysis. The three tabs that make up the Energy Pricing Editor are:
• Energy Pricing—This tab is divided into two sections. The upper section
contains a required input box:
– Start Time—A value between 0 and 24 that specifies the first time step point
in the definition.
• The lower part of the dialog box is comprised of a two column table and three
buttons. The columns in the table are as follows:
– Time From Start—The time at which the value entered into the corre-
sponding Energy Price field will take effect.
– Energy Price—The Energy Price at the time specified in the corresponding
Time From Start field.
The buttons to the right of the table include:
• Insert—Creates a new row in the definition table.

• Duplicate—Duplicates the highlighted row in the definition table.
• Delete—Deletes the highlighted row in the definition table. You will be prompted
to confirm this action.
In addition, in the upper right-hand side of the dialog box, there is a Plot button.
• Plot—Creates a price-vs.-time graph for the current pricing definition.

• Peak Demand Charge—This tab consists of the following fields:
• Include Peak Demand Charge?—This check box activates and deactivates the
input fields. When the box is checked, a Peak Demand Charge will be applied as
determined by the Peak Demand Charge and Billing Period input fields.
• Peak Demand Charge—The charge applied per kW at the time of greatest power
usage.
• Billing Period—The Billing Period is the length of time over which the peak
demand is considered. An equivalent daily cost is found by dividing the peak cost
by this period of time.
• Notes—Allows you to enter descriptive text concerning the pricing definition
being created.

Cost Estimating
11.3 Capital Cost Alternatives Manager

The Capital Cost Alternatives Manager lets you edit, create, and manage your capital
cost alternatives. It also gives you more advanced capabilities, such as merging alter-
natives and creating child alternatives.
On the right side of the dialog box are a number of buttons that provide functions for
managing the alternatives. These buttons are identical to the buttons found in the
Alternatives Manager (for more information, see “Alternatives Manager” on page 8-
347).
11.4 Unit Cost Functions

A Unit Cost Function is a description of the relationship between an element attribute
and the unit cost for that element. For example, it might describe the relationship
between pipe diameter and the cost-per-unit-length, or it could relate the depth of a
gravity structure to the unit cost for that structure. You can specify the relationship
between the unit cost and the value of the attribute as either tabular data or as a
formula.
Tabular Unit Cost Function—Relates attribute values to unit costs as a series of data
points. This is the only way to enter unit cost data for non-numeric attributes, such as
material. If the attribute for which you are supplying the cost data is numeric, then
values between the data points that you enter will be linearly interpolated. If the unit
cost is requested for an attribute value that falls outside of the range of data that you
supplied in the table, the model will assume that the unit cost is equal to the unit cost
at the most extreme point closest to the value that was requested. For example, if the
following points had been entered (8 in, 30$/ft.) and (12 in, 40$/ft.) and the unit cost
was requested for a 16-in. diameter pipe, the value returned would be 40$/ft. The
warnings report available from the cost manager will list the elements and construc-
tion cost items for which this is true. For more information, see “Tabular Unit Cost
Function” on page 11-459.
Note: For certain values, such as when x is less than c, and b is not an
integer, this equation will be invalid. Under these conditions, the
unit cost returned by the function will be zero.
Formula Unit Cost Function—Represents the unit cost as a function of the selected
numeric attribute of the following form: (for more information, see “Formula Unit
Cost Function” on page 11-460)
b
Cost = d + a ( x – c )

Unit Cost Functions
Linear cost of the pipe (local currency/m,

Where: Cost =
local currency/ft.)
Selected attribute (unit depends on the
x =
type of attribute)
Parameters you specify (units depend on
a, b, c, d =
local currency and the type of attribute)
Unit Cost Functions includes:
• “Unit Cost Functions Manager” on page 11-458

• “New Unit Cost Functions Dialog Box” on page 11-458
• “Unit Cost Function Notes” on page 11-459
• “Tabular Unit Cost Function” on page 11-459
• “Formula Unit Cost Function” on page 11-460
11.4.1 Unit Cost Functions Manager
You can add, delete, and edit the Unit Cost Functions (see “Unit Cost Functions” on
page 11-457) for your project through this manager. You will be able to assign the cost
functions defined here to one or more of the elements of the appropriate type in your
system. For example, if you define a cost function for pipes, you will be able to select
this cost function from the choice list on the Cost tab of the Pipe Element Editor.
Use the Save command to save the Unit Cost Functions listed in the Unit Cost Func-
tions Manager. You can then import them into another project using the Import
command. The Save and Import commands are accessed from the File button in this
dialog box.
11.4.2 New Unit Cost Functions Dialog Box
When you add a new Unit Cost Function, you will be prompted with this dialog box
containing two fields, Unit Cost Function Type and Unit Cost Function Attribute. This
is the information that is needed to initialize the new Unit Cost Function that you are
about to create.
The Unit Cost Function Type field allows you to select whether you would like to
enter your cost function data in tabular or formula format. We recommend that you
quickly familiarize yourself with both formats to see which is most convenient for
you. If you wish to base your unit cost on an attribute that is not numeric, such as
material, you must choose a tabular format.

Cost Estimating
The Unit Cost Function Attribute field is for selecting the attribute for which your unit
costs are functions. For example, the unit cost of a pipe might be based upon its diam-
eter or its material. Attributes that are not numeric can only be selected if the Unit
Cost Function type is tabular.
11.4.3 Unit Cost Function Notes
In this section, you can enter optional notes related to the Unit Cost Function.
11.4.4 Tabular Unit Cost Function
This tab contains the data for Unit Cost Functions defined with tabular data. The infor-
mation is defined in the following fields:
• General—Contains general information identifying the Unit Cost Function. For

more information, see “General Section” on page 11-459.
• Attribute Value Range—Displays the range of the selected attribute in the
current scenario. This information can be useful for specifying cost data for the
entire range of values in the model. For more information, see “Attribute Value
Range Section” on page 11-460.
• Unit Cost Data—Specifies the tabular data relating unit cost to the value of the
selected attribute. For more information, see “Attribute Value Range Section” on
page 11-460.
Note: If the attribute you have selected to define the Unit Cost
Function is outside the defined range for some elements in your
network, the unit cost used will be the cost of the minimum or
maximum value of the attribute you defined in the table.
In order to help you enter and visualize the function, use one of the following buttons
at the bottom of the dialog box:
• Plot—Plots the tabular data relating cost to the value of the selected attribute.
• Initialize Range—Initializes the minimum and maximum values in the Attribute
Value Range section, based on all the elements present in your project for the
current scenario.
General Section
This section contains general information identifying the Unit Cost Function, as
follows:
• Label—Unique name that identifies your Unit Cost Function.

Unit Cost Functions
• Element Type—Displays the type of element to which the function applies,

which is always pressure pipe in WaterCAD, but could also be gravity pipe, junc-
tion, inlet, manhole, or junction chamber in SewerCAD or StormCAD.
• Attribute Label—Element attribute that controls the unit cost, such as pipe diam-
eter. This attribute is selected when you add a new function in the Unit Cost Func-
tion Manager.
Attribute Value Range Section

This section displays the minimum and maximum values for the attribute that controls
the unit cost in your current network. Click the Initialize Range button to have these
values calculated.
Unit Cost Data Table

This allows you to define the Unit Cost Function in a tabular format, preferably
defining the costs associated with the entire range of values present in your network.
To display the current range of values in your model, initialize the Attribute Value
Range section by clicking the Initialize Range button.
11.4.5 Formula Unit Cost Function
The data defining formula-based Unit Cost Functions is grouped as follows:
• General—General information identifying the Unit Cost Function. For more

information, see “General Section” on page 11-461.
• Valid Cost Data Range—The range for which the function is valid for the
attribute used to define the Unit Cost Function. For more information, see “Valid
Cost Data Range Section” on page 11-461.
• Coefficients—Coefficients defining the formula relating the unit cost to the
attribute value. For more information, see “Coefficients Section” on page 11-461.
Note: If the function is invalid for any interval within the Valid Cost
Data Range, it is set to 0.0 in that interval. Click the Plot button to
see if there are any problems with the function.
If the attribute you have selected to define the Unit Cost

Function is outside the Valid Cost Data Range for any element in
the network, the formula will still be applied to calculate that
element unit cost. However, an error message for that element
will be reported when computing the cost for the system.
In order to help you enter and visualize the function, use one of the following buttons
at the bottom of the dialog box:

Cost Estimating
• Plot—A graph of the Unit Cost Function.

• Initialize Range—The minimum and maximum values of the attribute used to
define the Unit Cost Function based on all the elements in your project.
General Section
This section contains general information identifying the Unit Cost Function, as
follows:
• Label—Unique name that identifies your Unit Cost Function.

• Element Type—Displays the type of element to which the function applies,
which is always pressure pipe in WaterCAD, but could also be gravity pipe, junc-
tion, inlet, manhole, or junction chamber in SewerCAD or StormCAD.
• Attribute Label—Element attribute that controls the unit cost, such as pipe diam-
eter. This attribute is selected when you add a new function in the Unit Cost Func-
tion Manager.
• Local Unit—Unit of the attribute that controls the unit cost. This unit is used for
defining the formula coefficients.
Valid Cost Data Range Section

This section specifies the range of values for which the function is valid for the
attribute used to define the Unit Cost Function. Clicking the Initialize Range button
accesses the two values based on the range of values present in your current network.
Coefficients Section
In this section, you can enter the coefficients defining the Unit Cost Function. The x-
parameter, which represents the value of the attribute on which the Unit Cost Function
is based, is expressed by the unit specified in the Local Unit field on this tab.
11.5 Cost Reports

In addition to the standard reporting capabilities, the cost analysis feature provides a
number of specialized reports for presenting results. These reports include:
• Element Detailed Cost Report—Presents a detailed view of all the cost informa-
tion entered for a single element. For more information, see “Element Detailed
Cost Report” on page 11-462.
• Project Detailed Cost Report—Provides a detailed view of calculated cost data
for every element included in the cost analysis. For more information, see “Project
Detailed Cost Report” on page 11-463.

Cost Reports
• Project Element Summary Cost Report—Returns a summary of the costs for

every element included in the cost report. For more information, see “Project
Element Summary Cost Report” on page 11-463.
• Project Summary Cost Report—Provides an overview of all the costs in the
system. For more information, see “Project Summary Cost Report” on page 11-
463.
• Pipe Costs Report—Provides an overview of the costs associated with the pipes
in the project, grouping them by material and section size. For more information,
see “Pipe Costs Report” on page 11-464.
• Cost Warnings Report—Provides a list of warnings for a particular Cost
Scenario. For more information, see “Cost Warnings Report” on page 11-464.
Each of these tabular reports can be sent directly to the printer, or copied and pasted
into a spreadsheet program for further refinement.
11.5.1 Element Detailed Cost Report
This tabular report contains a detailed view of all the cost information entered for a
single element. It includes an itemized list of all the construction and non-construction
costs for an element, as well as the subtotals and total cost of the element. This report
is only available for elements that have been selected for inclusion in the cost calcula-
tion.
For more information, see “Tabular Report Window” on page 13-519.
To access the field Element Detailed Cost Report:
Stand-Alone: Double-click the element for which you wish to see

the report, or right-click the element and select Edit
from the drop-down menu. In the dialog box that
appears, click the Report button and select Cost
Report.
AutoCAD 2000/2002: Pick the Select tool and click the element you wish to
edit, or select the element and choose Edit from the
drop-down menu. In the dialog box that appears,
click the Report button and select Cost Report.
AutoCAD 2000i: Double-click the element for which you wish to see
the report, or right-click the element and select Edit
from the drop-down menu. In the dialog box that
appears, click the Report button and select Cost
Report.

Cost Estimating
11.5.2 Project Detailed Cost Report
This tabular report contains a detailed view of all the cost information entered for
every element included in the cost analysis. It includes an itemized list of all the
construction and non-construction costs for each element, as well as the cost adjust-
ments made to the total cost of the project. This report is only available after the costs
have been computed for the scenario.
11.5.3 Project Element Summary Cost Report
This tabular report provides a summary view of all the cost information entered for
each element selected for inclusion in the cost analysis. It contains an overview of the
costs assigned to each element, and an itemized list of the cost adjustments. This
report is only available after the costs have been computed for the scenario.
11.5.4 Project Summary Cost Report
This tabular report provides a summary view of all the cost information entered for the
elements selected for inclusion in the cost analysis. This report contains an overview
of the costs assigned to each element type and an itemized list of the cost adjustments.
This report is only available after the costs have been computed for the scenario.

Cost Reports
11.5.5 Pipe Costs Report
This printed report provides a summary of the cost of all the pipes included in the cost
analysis. The pipes are grouped by material and section size. The total length of pipe
for each size and material are reported along with the total cost associated with that
group of pipes.
11.5.6 Cost Warnings Report
This report provides a list of all the cost warnings for the selected scenario. You will
receive warnings when you have assigned a Unit Cost Function to a particular element
but the attribute value for that element lies outside of the valid range of data you set
for the Unit Cost Function. You need to check these elements and make sure that the
cost data supplied to these elements is applicable.

Chapter
Using Darwin Designer 12

Darwin Designer lets you design new pipe layouts or pipe rehabilitation for existing
pipes. A genetic-algorithm based approach lets you avoid a manual trial and error
approach to finding the most efficient design. Solutions and costs calculated using
Darwin Designer can be exported back to any scenario.
To open Darwin Designer:
1. Start WaterCAD.
2. Click the Darwin Designer button.
3. Or, click Analysis > Darwin Designer.
4. If the Schema Augmentation dialog box opens, click Augment Schema. (For
more information, see “Schema Augmentation” on page 12-506.)
5. The Darwin Designer dialog box opens. Begin by creating a new design study.
(For more information, see “Lesson 9: Using Darwin Designer” on page 3-187
and “Darwin Designer Methodology” on page B-753.)
12.1 Overview: How to Use Darwin Designer

Design studies comprise:
• Design events
– Flows (demand adjustments—see “Demand Adjustments Tab” on page 12-
485)
– Constraints (pressure and flow—see “Pressure Constraints Tab” on page 12-
487 and “Flow Constraints Tab” on page 12-489)
– Boundary conditions (see “Boundary Conditions Tab” on page 12-490)
• Design group specifications (see “Local Design Groups Tab” on page 12-494)
• Rehab group specifications (see “Local Rehab Groups Tab” on page 12-496)

Design Study
• Cost data (see “Option Groups Tab” on page 12-474)

• Design study options (type of optimization—see “Demand Adjustments Tab” on
page 12-485)
A Design Run is created by picking which of the following are to be used for a given
run:
• Design events
• Design groups
• Rehab groups
• Run specific options
The particular events and groups are specified by making them active. You may create
many design runs within a design study.
12.2 Design Study

A design study is a top-level grouping of the pipe design and rehabilitation you want
to do for one complete design project. A design study should be used to represent a
real project unit, such as a system expansion, main replacement, system augmentation,
etc. For a different or unrelated projects—such as a main replacement project and a
project to design a new service area—you should use different, new design studies.
To start using Darwin Designer, you must first create a design study. All Darwin
Designer data exists within design studies. A design study comprises the following
elements:
1. A description of the events that serve as the basis for design

2. A set of pipes being sized or rehabilitated
3. Constraints you must meet, which are defined in a design event
4. A range of design sizes or rehabilitation options (as part of option groups)
5. Cost data on for use in the optimization (as part of option groups)
6. Genetic algorithm options
7. A number of design runs of to test the design (see “Design Run” on page 12-492)
8. The results of design runs (see “Results Pane” on page 12-498)
It is readily apparent that one or more of these items will be different between
different design studies, hence the ability to create as many design studies as you need.

Using Darwin Designer
You can create more than one design study. Each design study can comprise one or
more design runs. Each design run is manual or GA optimized. (For more information,
see “Design Run” on page 12-492.)
In the design study, create the groups of pipes for design and rehabilitation, define the
design/rehab options (costs and sizes etc), and define constraints and parameters for
your designs. These items get used in the design runs and the computations that
produce your design results.
Right-click the design study in the tree-view to access some options.
Add New Design Study: You can add more than one design study. Design
studies are not related.
Add New Design Run: You can add manual and optimized design
runs to each design study. Optimized design
runs uses a genetic algorithm whereas the
manual design lets you apply specific solution
alternatives for trial-and-error calculations.
Darwin Designer does not run a design study; it uses
a design run. There can be multiple design runs in a
design study.
Duplicate: Click Duplicate to create a copy of the
selected design study. This can be an efficient
way to create a new design study that has
many of the attributes of an existing study.

Design Study
Rename: Click Rename to change the name of the

selected design study.
Delete: Click Delete to delete the selected design
study.
Close Button: Click Close to exit Darwin Designer.
Help Button: Click Help to open the context-sensitive online help.
For more information, see “Using the Online Help”
on page 2-72.
12.2.1 Design Events Tab
Note: A design event represents a single time step hydraulic analysis

that will be analyzed by Darwin Designer.
The way that you decide to use an event or a constraint is to

make it active by selecting a check box under a design run. You
must have at least one active design event and one active
design or rehab group to make up a design run.
In producing a system design, the design must typically achieve some objective or
objectives. Generally, a design must supply some specified demands, while concur-
rently meeting specified performance criteria, subject to specific boundary conditions,
such as tank levels, or emergency conditions.
Design events are used to define the requirements of your designs. Design events
include information about the demand conditions a design must satisfy, the perfor-
mance requirements or constraints a design must meet (in the form of pressure and
flow constraints), and also the boundary conditions under which the design must
achieve the previous two goals.
In order to create a design using Darwin Designer you need at least one design event,
however, in many cases you will use more than that.

Buttons used
by the tabs
New: Click New to add a new design event. For

more information, see “Adding a Design
Event” on page 12-471.
Edit: Click Edit to modify an existing design
event. For more information, see “Design
Event Editor” on page 12-484.
Duplicate: Click Duplicate to create a copy of the
selected design event. This can be an efficient
way to create a new design event that has
many of the attributes of an existing set.
Rename: Click Rename to change the name of an
existing design event. When the dialog box
opens, type the new name and click OK or
click Cancel to exit without renaming anything.
Delete: Click Delete to permanently remove the
selected design event.
Representative Scenario: From the drop-down list, select the scenario you
want Darwin Designer to use for the design and
calculations. The list displays those scenarios defined
in your WaterCAD file (for more information, see
“Scenarios” on page 8-364).
This scenario is the starting point for Darwin
Designer calculations.

Design Study
Note: You can drag the vertical column dividers in the headings to
change the column widths.
Design Event Name: The Design Event Name column lists the designs you
have created. Click the column heading to rank these
in ascending or descending alphabetical order.
Notes: The Notes field displays any notes that are in the
Design Event Editor’s Note tab (see “Design Event
Editor” on page 12-484).
Representative Scenarios
The representative scenario is the scenario upon which Darwin Designer will base its
designs. The representative scenario must, therefore, contain any and all data that will
be considered for design purposes. The types of data that this includes is:
• Topological data, such as the locations of existing and possible new facilities.
Note that, for pipes that do not currently exist (Designer will be used to size
them), we recommended you model them as open pipes with small diameters
(e.g., 0.01 inches or 0.01 mm). It is also good practice to adopt some kind of
obvious naming convention, such as FP-1, FP-2 (Future Pipe) or GA-P-1, GA-P-
2, etc. It is also possible to consider the inclusion/exclusion of other facilities
using topological data. For more information, see “Advanced Darwin Designer
Tips” on page A-703.
• Physical data, such as pipe diameters, lengths, tank diameters, elevations, etc.
• Initial Settings data, such as tank levels, control valve statuses, etc.
• Demand data, such as loading patterns, nodal demands, fire flows (as nodal
demands).
Note: The representative scenario must either be a steady state or EPS

scenario. Water Quality and/or Fire Flow options are ignored.
After you choose an appropriate representative scenario, it is possible within Darwin

Designer to set up multiple design events (see “Design Events Tab” on page 12-493)
that specify differences over and above the representative scenario. Specifically, it is
possible to specify additional demands (see “Demand Adjustments Tab” on page 12-
485), a completely different demand alternative (by overriding), and also different
boundary conditions. In this way, you can set up a suite of design events that capture
the design requirements of the project. As an example, the representative scenario
might reference peak hour demands. In this case, you could set up a design event that
uses the representative scenario unchanged to ensure the design meets peak hour
flows, and then you could add in additional design events that specify fire flows (addi-
tional demands) or emergency conditions, such as pipe breaks (boundary conditions).

Adding a Design Event

The first component of a design study is the design event that is being analyzed. It is in
the design event that you describe the flows that must be delivered and the constraints
that must be met. To add a new design event:
1. Select the Representative Scenario on which you want to base your design.
2. Click New.
3. Type the name of the design group you are creating and click OK.
4. The Design Event Editor opens. Enter your data to define the design event. For
more information, see “Design Event Editor” on page 12-484.
12.2.2 Design Groups Tab
For an overview of design groups, see “Design and Rehab Groups Overview” on
page 12-473.
New Design Group: Click New to add a new design option group.
For more information, see “Adding a New
Group” on page 12-472.
Edit Design Group: Click Edit to modify an existing design
option group. For more information, see
“Editing a Group” on page 12-472.
Rename Design Group: Click Rename to change the name of an
existing design option group. When the
dialog box opens, type the new name and
click OK or click Cancel to exit without renaming
anything.
Delete Design Group: Click Delete to permanently remove the
selected design option group. Note that the
elements in that group are unaffected.
New Multiple Design Groups: Click this button to create several design
groups at once, from all the elements or
selection sets (see “Selection Sets” on page 5-
263). This can be an efficient way to quickly create
several one-pipe design groups, rather than creating
the groups one at a time.

Design Study
Design Group Name: The Design Group Name column lists the design
groups. Click the column heading to rank these in
ascending or descending alphabetical order.
Pipe Count: Pipe Count tells you how many pipes in the group.
To change this value, edit the group. (For more
information, see “Editing a Group” on page 12-472.)
Adding a New Group

Pipes can only exist in one group. For example, the same pipe cannot be in multiple
design groups nor in a design and a rehab group.
To add a new design or rehabilitation group:
1. Click New.
2. Type the name of the design group you are creating and click OK.
3. In the Element Selector dialog box, click those pipes you want to include in your
group.
– Use the drop-down list to filter the elements from which you can select.
– Shift+click and ctrl+click to select ranges and more than one pipe.
4. After you have selected the elements, click OK to create the group. Or, click
Cancel to exit the dialog box without creating a new group.
Editing a Group
To edit a design or rehabilitation group:
1. Click Edit.
2. In the Element Selector dialog box, click those pipes and/or junctions you
want to include in your group.
– Use the drop-down list to filter the elements from which you can select: pipes,
junctions, or both.
– Shift+click and ctrl+click to select ranges and more than one pipe.
3. After you have selected the elements, click OK to apply your changes to the
group. Or, click Cancel to exit the dialog box without making any changes.

Design and Rehab Groups Overview

Darwin Designer determines the size or rehab action for pipes. It is unlikely, however,
that a large pipeline will change diameter every block along its route. Plus, if fewer
pipes being sized, optimization will happen faster than if a larger number of pipes
were sized. Therefore, Darwin Designer uses the idea of a pipe group or rehab group
to group pipes that will attract the same design decision. At the end of a run, all of the
pipes in the same design group are given the same diameter, and all of the pipes in the
same rehab group receive the same rehab action. This is both logical and more effi-
cient from a computational standpoint.
For a pipe to be considered a candidate for design or rehab, it must be placed in a

group. This is done on the Design Groups or Rehab Groups tab when the Design
Study is highlighted. (When the Design Run is highlighted, you choose which groups
are to be considered during that run.)
You must insert at least one pipe in each design group (see “Editing a Group” on
page 12-472). There is no absolute rule for deciding which pipes belong in a given
group. Usually it is the set of pipes that will be laid with the same diameter and at the
same time, but it can also be smaller groups than that, and in the case of smaller design
problems or academic exercises, it may be only 1 pipe per group, which is easily expe-
dited with the Create Multiple Design Groups selection (see “New Multiple Design
Groups” on page 12-471). The down side of adding every pipe to its own group,
however, is that this can be computationally inefficient and potentially leads to a pipe-
line that is say 12 in. for one block, 8 in. for the next, 6 in. the next, etc., which may be
a theoretically least-cost design but is not a solution that is likely to be installed. Ulti-
mately the choice comes down to a trade-off between number of pipe groups (and size
of the optimization problem) versus constructability of the design through the poten-
tial for different pipe sizes adopted for each group.
For more information, see “Advanced Darwin Designer Tips” on page A-703.
12.2.3 Rehab Groups Tab
For an overview of rehab groups, see “Design and Rehab Groups Overview” on
page 12-473.
New Rehabilitation Group: Click New to add a new rehabilitation group.

For more information, see “Adding a New
Group” on page 12-472.
Edit Rehabilitation Group: Click Edit to modify an existing
rehabilitation group. For more information,
see “Editing a Group” on page 12-472.

Design Study
Rename Rehabilitation Group: Click Rename to change the name of an

existing rehabilitation group. When the
dialog box opens, type the new name and
click OK or click Cancel to exit without renaming
anything.
Delete Rehabilitation Group: Click Delete to permanently remove the
selected rehabilitation group. Note that the
elements in that group are unaffected.
Rehabilitation Group Name: The Rehabilitation Group Name column lists the
rehabilitation groups. Click the column heading to
rank these in ascending or descending alphabetical
order.
Pipe Count: Pipe Count tells you how many pipes in the group.
To change this value, edit the group. (For more
information, see “Editing a Group” on page 12-472.)
12.2.4 Option Groups Tab
Note: The option groups table is dimmed until you click the table in the
tree-view, to select it.
To see the option groups, click the + sign next to Design Option
Groups and Rehab Option Groups. If there is no + sign, there is
no table and you must create a table by clicking the New button.
Option groups are used by Darwin Designer to determine the hydraulic effect of and
calculate the capital cost of the solutions it generates. Option groups come in two
types: Design Option Groups (new pipes) and Rehab Option Groups (rehabilitation
actions). Design options (new pipe sizes and associated roughness, material type and
unit cost) are defined by adding design option groups. Rehab Options (rehab actions
and associated post action functions) are defined by adding rehab option groups. Each
option group contains a set of options that the Darwin Designer can select from in
order to create its hydraulic solutions. Design Option Groups are used where you are
designing a new system or part of a system and brand new pipes need to be installed.
Rehab Option Groups are used when you are examining the effect of rehabilitating
(cleaning, lining etc) existing pipes.

Use this tree-view with the

Option Groups tab
Design Option Groups: Select this item in the tree-view to create and edit
new pipe option groups. For more information, see
“Adding and Editing Design Option Groups” on
page 12-475.
Rehab Option Groups: Select this item in the tree-view to create and edit
rehabilitation option groups. For more information,
see “Adding and Editing Rehabilitation Option
Groups” on page 12-478.
Adding and Editing Design Option Groups
Note: The order of pipe diameters is not important, but it makes easier
viewing if you enter pipe diameters in increasing size.
Design Option Groups are used to define a selection of pipes that can be used in your
design. You may choose to use as much or as little detail as you wish. For example, for
a rough cut design, you may simply wish to use nominal diameters and estimated unit
rates, but for a detailed design you may wish to use internal pipe diameters and even
distinguish between different materials. The new pipe option group is set up to allow
you to adopt either approach.
In setting up option groups, you can set up as many groups as needed to describe the
different cost situations in your project. For example, you may decide that you have
three different cost types that need to be considered: Residential, Greenfields and
Commercial. In this case, you can set up three different option groups to reflect the
different in-ground costs for each of the three different cost types. For example,

Design Study
Greenfields would be cheaper than Residential, where the additional costs of breaking
the road and resurfacing need to be included. Not all groups need to include the same
pipe sizes either, so you may choose to use different option groups as a way of limiting
certain pipe groups to being able to attain only certain sizes. For example, there is not
much point allowing a transmission main to be sized as a 6-in. pipe, where a consumer
connection pipe might be acceptable as a 6-in. pipe.
Darwin Designer has the ability to not only size new pipes from a range of possible
available pipe sizes, but it can also determine whether a particular pipe needs to be
constructed at all. To get Designer to determine whether a pipe needs to be constructed
at all, simply add a zero diameter option to the pipe option group. The zero diameter
option should also attract a cost of zero (in this case, roughness is redundant). The
zero size option can be used to size parallel pipes and it can also be used to determine
the optimal design layout, whereby more pipes are being sized than are necessary to
service all demands.
For pipes that are essential for service and that must be sized, define and use a pipe-
option group that contains no zero diameter option.
For more information, see “Lesson 10: Darwin Designer Overview” on page 3-205.
To define an option group for design options (new pipe sizing), first select the Design
Option Groups tree-view item.
You can right-click

in the tree-view,
as well as using
the buttons

New Design Option Group: Right-click the Design Option Groups tree-
view item and select Add New Design
Option Group or click the New button to add
a new design option group. Enter the name of the
table and click OK to create a new blank table, or
click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating
a new table.
Duplicate Design Option Group:Right-click a table name in the tree-view and
select Duplicate or click the Duplicate
button to make a copy of the selected design
option group. This can be an efficient way to create a
new table that shares many values with an existing
table.
Rename Design Option Group: Right-click a table name in the tree-view and
select Rename or click the Rename button to
enter a new name for the selected design
option group.
Delete Design Option Group: Right-click a table name in the tree-view and
select Delete or click the Delete button.
Add/Delete Design Options: Click the Insert and Delete buttons to
add or remove selected rows from the
pipe table.
Material: Click on a table cell and select
the pipe material from the
drop-down list or click the Ellipsis button to open the
Material Manager. (For more information, see
“Material Editor” on page 12-478.)
You can type the first letter of the material to select it
and use the arrow.
Diameter: Type a diameter for the pipe.
Roughness: Type the roughness value for the pipe (figure shows
Hazen-Williams value).
Unit Cost: Type the unit cost value for the pipe.

Design Study
Material Editor
Use the Material Editor to add or edit pipe material. Type the name of the pipe mate-
rial and enter a roughness value for the material. Click OK to apply your changes or
Cancel to close the dialog box without making changes.
Adding and Editing Rehabilitation Option Groups

1. Rehab option groups define the selection of rehab actions that can be used in the
design.
2. As much or as little detail as user wishes.
3. As many groups as needed for different cost types.
4. Not all groups need include the same rehab options.
Rehab Option Groups are used to define the selection of rehab actions that can be used
in the design. You may choose to use as much or as little detail as you want. You can
set up as many groups as you need for different cost types, and not all groups need to
include the same rehabilitation options.
In setting up option groups, you can set up as many groups as needed to describe the
different cost situations in your project
To define a rehabilitation option group:
1. Right-click the Rehab Option Groups tree-view item.

2. Select New Rehabilitation Option Group.
3. Name the table and click OK.
4. Type the name of for an Action you want to add.
5. Select the three functions that describe the pre- and post-rehabilitation conditions.
You must select one of each type of function for a rehabilitation action; none of
the functions are optional.
a. Click the arrow to select an existing function from the
drop-down list.
b. Click the Ellipsis (…) button to create a new function (see “Function Editor”
on page 12-483).
6. As needed, click Insert or Delete to add and remove rows.
7. Create as many rehabilitation actions as needed.

You can right-click

in the tree-view,
as well as using
the buttons
New Rehab Option Group: Right-click the Rehab Option Groups tree-
view item and select New Rehabilitation
Option Group or click the New button to add
a new option group. Enter the name of the table and
click OK to create a new blank table, or click Cancel
to close the dialog box without creating a new table.
Duplicate Rehab Option Group: Right-click a table name in the tree-view and
select Duplicate or click the Duplicate
button to make a copy of the selected option
group. This can be an efficient way to create a new
table that shares many values with an existing table.
Rename Rehab Option Group: Right-click a table name in the tree-view and
select Rename or click the Rename button to
enter a new name for the selected option
group.
Delete Rehab Option Group: Right-click a table name in the tree-view and
select Delete or click the Delete button.
Add/Delete Table Rows: Click the Insert and Delete buttons to
add or remove selected rows from the
table.
Action: Type the name of the rehabilitation action you are
creating.

Design Study
Note: Select from the list to use an existing rehabilitation function.

Click the Ellipses (…) button to open Function Manager to create
a new function (see “Function Manager” on page 12-481).
Pre versus Post Diameter: Select or create the function you want to use for the
rehabilitation action you are creating. This function
describes the pre- and post-rehabilitation pipe
diameters.
You must create at least one function for pre-
rehabilitation diameter versus post-rehabilitation
diameter.
Note: Ideally, you want to include in all functions you create each of
the pipe sizes that are present in your rehabilitation groups. This
ensures that Darwin Designer does not need to extrapolate or
interpolate values for unspecified pipe diameters, possibly
resulting in undesirable cost, roughness, or post-rehabilitation
diameters.
Pre-Rehab Diameter vs. Cost: Select or create the function you want to use for the
describes the cost of the action per length for pipe of
a given pre-rehabilitation diameter.
You must create at least one function for diameter
versus cost.
Diameter versus Roughness: Select or create the function you want to use for the
describes the pre-rehabilitation diameter versus the
post-rehabilitation pipe roughness.
You must create at least one function for diameter
versus roughness.

Function Manager
Use the Function Manager to create a rehabilitation function. To create a rehabilitation

function, from a rehab table in the Option Groups tab:
Create one
function for each
of these column
headings
1. Click in a cell, other than an Action cell, in the Rehab Option Group grid.
2. Click the Ellipses (…) button. The Function Manager opens.
In the Rehab Option Group grid, in addition to the Action column,
there are three columns: pre- versus post-rehab diameters, pre-rehab diameter
versus unit costs, and pre-rehab diameter versus post-rehab roughness. At a
minimum, you must create one cost function for each of these columns.

Design Study
New: Click New to add a rehab cost function.
Edit: Click Edit to change the definition of an

existing function.
Duplicate: Click Duplicate to make a copy of the
selected function. This can be an efficient
way to create a new function that shares many
values with an existing function.
Rename: Click Rename to change the name of an
existing function. When the dialog box opens,
type the new name and click OK or click
Cancel to exit without renaming anything.
Delete: Click Delete to permanently remove the
selected function.

Function Editor
To create or edit a function:
Note: Ideally, you want to include in all functions you create each of
the pipe sizes that are present in your rehabilitation groups. This
ensures that Darwin Designer does not need to extrapolate or
interpolate values for unspecified pipe diameters, possibly
resulting in undesirable cost, roughness, or post-rehabilitation
diameters.
1. Click New and select one of the types of functions to create. Name the
new function and click OK.
2. Or, select a function and click Edit.
The Function Editor opens.
3. Click Insert to add a new row or Delete to remove a selected row.
4. Add data to the table that describes the relationship you want. For
example, enter a pre-rehabilitation and post-rehabilitation diameter for the pipe.
New Option Group

Enter the name you want to use for the option group. Click OK to apply the name to a
new table or Cancel to close the dialog box without creating a new table.
12.2.5 Design Type Tab
The Design Type tab lets you design and weight benefits so the genetic algorithm
knows better what your design priorities are.
For more information, see “Darwin Designer Methodology” on page B-753.
Design Objectives: Set the Objective Type. This is the overall priority of
the design. For each design type except Minimize
Budget, you need to enter an Available Budget.

Design Event Editor
• Minimize Cost sets price as your primary

concern and the genetic algorithm will consider
costs most heavily.
• Maximize Benefit sets the performance of the
system as the highest priority. The system
performance is measured by the pressures at
specified junctions using pressure benefits.
• Multi-Objective Trade-off lets the genetic
algorithm consider where the best compromise
lies between cost and pressure benefit.
Benefit Type: Select a Dimensionless or Unitized benefit for
Maximized Benefit or Multi-Objective Trade-off.
If you are looking for a specific pressure
improvement from your system, consider using
unitized benefit. Unitized benefit considers the
average pressure increase for selected junctions.
If pressure improvement is not a primary concern,
consider using dimensionless benefit. Dimensionless
benefit considers the ratio of pressure improvement
to minimum pressure for selected junctions.
Pressure Benefit: Set the Pressure Benefit Coefficient and the
Pressure Benefit Exponent. These increase the
weighted value of pressure in your network. The
Pressure Benefit Exponent has a larger effect on the
weighted value than the same number for the
coefficient.
12.2.6 Notes Tab
Use the Notes tab to type comments about your project and read things like log entries
and dates.
12.3 Design Event Editor

Note: A design event represents a single time step hydraulic analysis
that will be analyzed by Darwin Designer.
Use the Design Event Editor to create or edit design events used as parameters for
your designs or rehabilitation of systems. For more information, see “Design Study”
on page 12-466.

The Design Event Editor comprises these tabs:
• “Demand Adjustments Tab” on page 12-485

• “Pressure Constraints Tab” on page 12-487
• “Flow Constraints Tab” on page 12-489
• “Boundary Conditions Tab” on page 12-490
• “Notes Tab” on page 12-492
12.3.1 Demand Adjustments Tab
The sizing of pipes in designer is driven by demands. By default, the demands used
will be those associated with the representative scenario. However, you may want to
use different demands, such as fire flows or peaks. There are several different ways to
modify or overwrite the demands in the representative scenario.

Design Event Editor
• Override Scenario Demand Alternative—This option lets you select a new

demand alternative to use in lieu of the demand alternative referenced by the
representative scenario. In this way, you can set up all of your different demand
cases in WaterCAD before starting Darwin Designer, and then reference them by
selecting Override Scenario Demand Alternative and selecting the appropriate
demand alternative. Using this option eliminates the need for the following
options, but does not preclude their use.
• Adjust demands with a fixed multiplier—In some cases, the demands for the
representative scenario might be for an average day and you would like to adjust
them for a peak hour. To do so, enter a demand multiplier to adjust it. Note that the
multiplier you should enter is the value needed to adjust the demands at the speci-
fied time to the desired value. Assuming that the time from start was already 7
hours, which equated to 7 a.m. in a particular model, and you want to adjust
demands up to the 9 p.m. peak, rather than enter the 9 p.m. peak multiplier, you
should enter the ratio of the 7 a.m. multiplier and the 9 p.m. multiplier. For
example, if the 7 a.m. multiplier is 1.3 and the 9 p.m. multiplier is 1.6, then 1.23
should be used as the demand multiplier. This is illustrated as follows:
1.3 x 1.23 = 1.6
Thus it is true to say that the demand for any single junction is calculated by:
Qc = Qb * DMt * DM
Where: Qc = calculated flow

Qb = base flow
DMt = demand multiplier at time t (Time from start) determined for
demand patterns
DM = specified demand multiplier (default is 1.0)
• Additional Demands—Fire flows or other special cases can be achieved by adding

demand adjustments to individual junctions: by selecting the junction and speci-
fying the additional demand. If necessary, demands can also be subtracted by
specifying a negative number. Be sure to enter demands in the correct flow units.
Design Time: Scenario start time plus time from start. This is the
clock time that the Time From Start value represents.
Scenario Start Time: The time at which the scenario is set to begin. This is
the clock time for the start of the hydraulic
simulation defined as part of the representative
scenario calculation properties.
Time from Start: Only adjustable when the representative scenario is
set for EPS, the time from start specifies the time to
use as the basis of design. That is, for a model with a
scenario start time of 12:00:00AM, a time from start

value of 7 equates to 7:00:00AM. The result is that

Darwin Designer will, for the current design event,
simulate demands as the base demands multiplied by
their respective pattern multipliers at 7:00:00AM. In
short, the demands at 7 a.m. are used.
It is easy to see that you can set up multiple design
events that consider demands at different times in the
day, simply by adjusting the Time From Start value.
Override Scenario Dmnd Alt. Select this check box to override the displayed
Demand Alternative and to use the Demand
Multiplier. Clear this check box if you do not want to
use the Demand Multiplier.
Demand Alternative: Displays the Demand Alternative associated with the
selected set of observations.
Demand Multiplier: Set a demand multiplier that is applied to your water
model at that time from start. For example, if you
have knowledge that your demand is higher or lower
by a specific percentage, you can set that value here.
Insert/Delete: Click Insert or Delete to add or remove
a row in the Demand Adjustments
table.
Junction: Select a junction at which to set a demand
adjustment.
To access the drop-down and other selection buttons,
click in the Junction cell. Click the drop-down list to
select a junction from the list, click the Ellipses
button.
Demand Adjustments: Type the demand adjustment that you want applied to
the selected junction.
OK/Cancel/Help Buttons: Click OK to accept and apply the changes you made.
Or, click Cancel to exit the current function without
making or applying changes. Click Help to display
the help topic that describes the feature you are
using.
12.3.2 Pressure Constraints Tab
Use this tab to define pressure constraints for all junctions or a set of junctions.

Design Event Editor
Selection Set: From the drop-down list, select the junctions to

which you want to apply the constraints. To select
junctions, click the Ellipsis (…) button and use the
Element Selector (see “Element Selector” on
page 12-501).
Minimum Pressure: Set a minimum pressure that you require for the
selected set of junctions. Violations of this boundary
are displayed when you calculate your network.
Maximum Pressure: Set a maximum pressure that you require for the
selected set of junctions. This value cannot be lower
than the minimum pressure you set. You can set this
to an unusually high value if you are unconcerned
with maximum pressure. Violations of this boundary
are displayed when you calculate your network.
Consider Pressure Benefit: If you set the Design Parameters Design Type to
Minimize Cost (for more information, see “Design
Objectives” on page 12-483), then pressure benefit is
not considered in the solution, but the benefit is
computed.
This check box is available to Maximize Benefit and
Multi-Objective Trade-off design parameters.
Select this check box if you want the genetic
algorithm to consider the benefits provided your
design by higher system pressures.
Pressure Constraints Table: For more information, see “Pressure Constraints
Table” on page 12-488.
OK/Cancel/Help: Click OK to accept and apply the changes you made.
using.
Pressure Constraints Table
Note: Click a column heading to sort the column in ascending or

descending order, or right-click the column heading and select
Sort.
Junction: Displays the list of junctions for which you have set
up pressure constraints.
Override Defaults: Select this check box if you want to override the
default maximum and/or minimum pressure
constraints, or you wish to override whether to use
the selected junction in pressure benefit calculations.

After you select this check box, click in the field you
want to change and type the new value for the
constraint, or click the Consider Pressure Benefit
check box.
Minimum/Maximum Pressure: Displays the pressure minimum and maximum that
are set.
Consider Pressure Benefit: If you set the Design Parameters Design Type to
Minimize Cost (for more information, see “Design
Objectives” on page 12-483), then pressure benefit is
not considered in the solution, but the benefit is
computed.
This check box is available to Maximize Benefit and
Multi-Objective Trade-off design parameters.
Select this check box if you want the genetic
algorithm to consider the benefits provided your
design by higher system pressures.
If you check Consider Pressure Benefit but your

Design Type option is set to Minimize Cost, then
benefit is computed and the benefit value will show
up at run time as well as in report.
12.3.3 Flow Constraints Tab
Use this tab to define flow boundary conditions for a junction or set of junctions.
Selection Set: From the drop-down list, select the pipes to which
you want to apply the constraints. To select pipes,
click the Ellipsis button and use the Element
Selector.
Minimum Velocity: Set a minimum velocity that you require for the
selected set of pipes. Violations of this boundary are
displayed when you calculate your network.
Maximum Velocity: Set a maximum velocity that you require for the
selected set of pipes. You can set this to an unusually
high value if needed. Violations of this boundary are
displayed when you calculate your network.
Flow Constraints Table: For more information, see “Flow Constraints Table”
on page 12-490.

Design Event Editor

using.
Flow Constraints Table
Note: Click a column heading to sort the column in ascending or

descending order, or right-click the column heading and select
Sort.
Pipe: Displays the list of pipes for which you have set up
flow constraints.
Override Defaults: Select this check box if you want to override the
default maximum and/or minimum flow (velocity)
constraints for selected pipes. After you select this
check box, click in the field you want to change and
type the new value for the constraint.
Minimum/Maximum Velocity: Displays the velocity minimum and maximum that
are set.
12.3.4 Boundary Conditions Tab
Note: Boundary conditions are used if specified for both steady state
and EPS models.
Boundary conditions can be used to override initial settings

from the design representative scenario. For example, if you
want to simulate a pipe break, you can set the status of a pipe to
closed. Similarly, valve settings can be applied, tank levels and
so on.
Use the boundary conditions tab to set up certain pre-rehabilitation, pre-design bound-
aries for tanks, pumps, pipes, and valves.
Element Type: From the list of elements, select the kind of element
for which you want to set a boundary condition:
pump, tank, pipe, or valve.
Selection Set: The Selection Set drop-down list reflects your
selection of an element type. Click the Ellipsis (…)
button to choose the particular element you want, or
to select multiple or all elements of a particular type.
After you select a series of elements, you can set the
boundary conditions for the selected elements.

Load from Model: After you choose a selection, use Load from Model
to load settings and conditions for your elements at a
time from start that you specify. For example, if your
peak time is 6 pm, you can load the settings for your
elements from the model at that time. For more
information, see “Load Boundary Conditions Dialog
Box” on page 12-491.
Status: Pipe and pump status have two values: open and
closed or on and off. Valves can be closed, active or
inactive, except for GPVs which can be closed or
active only.
Speed: Pumps have a relative speed setting that you can
define.
Level: Tanks have a level setting that you can define.
Flow Setting: Flow-control valves have a flow setting you can
define.
Pressure Setting: PBVs, PSVs, and PRVs have pressure settings that
you can define.
Coefficient: TCVs have a coefficient that you can define.
using.
Load Boundary Conditions Dialog Box
Note: When calculating an EPS model to get boundary conditions,

Darwin Designer uses the sizes, demands, etc., that are present
in the representative scenario. If the representative scenario
includes lots of unsized pipes, then you will need to override the
appropriate boundary conditions (such as, a tank in a new part
of the model).
Time from Start : Specify the time in the EPS that should be used to
source element boundary conditions from. E.g., for a
model where time 7 = 7 a.m., this setting defines
boundary conditions for elements to the states that
exist at 7am in your model.

Design Run
Since your model may not yet have the design

improvements included (the reason you are using
Darwin Designer), boundary conditions may need to
be adjusted to set up conditions to the correct levels
of conservatism for your design. E.g., the assumed
level for a new tank might only be 75% full at peak
hour.
Perform calculation: Specify whether to calculate the hydraulic model to
determine boundary conditions. This option is
available so you can save time by not recalculating
the model unnecessarily.
12.3.5 Notes Tab
and dates. Notes you enter here also display in the Design Events tab, Notes column,
of the Darwin Designer main dialog box.
12.4 Design Run

Note: The way that you decide to use an event or a constraint is to
make it active by checking a box. You must have at least one
active design event and one active design or rehab group to
make up a design run.
As part of any design study, you will want to make numerous design runs. A design
run is a single, complete solution of the problem consisting of the design events,
groups, and other options plus the results of the design run.
To create a design run, right-click the design study that the run is to be part of. Then,
• Add a new optimized design run

or
• Add a new manual design run.
or
• Select an existing design and duplicate it.
Each time you want to run an optimization, you can create a new run or edit an
existing run.

Design runs can either be GA optimized or manual runs. A GA optimized design run
uses genetic-algorithm optimization to optimize the selected objective (e.g., minimize
cost) for your design. A manual design run lets you make a single selection of pipe
sizes and/or rehabilitation actions in order to evaluate the specified design against the
same criterion as a GA optimized design. The difference between the two kinds of run
is that a manual run executes a single solution evaluation only, using the pipe sizes and
rehabilitation options that you selected.
Click the design run to

see the tabs
12.4.1 Design Events Tab
The Design Events tab displays a list of the events you have set up. (For more infor-
mation, see “Design Events Tab” on page 12-468.) Select the check boxes to set as
Active those criteria that you want to be used in the calculation of your design run.
Your design run must have at least one active design event in order to be calculated
without error.
Event Name: Lists the design event.

Active: Select the check boxes for those design events that
you want to be considered in the current design run.
You can use the arrow keys to navigate from row to
row and press the spacebar to select and deselect a
check box.

Design Run
12.4.2 Local Design Groups Tab
Note: You must have at least one active design or rehab group set to a
valid design or rehab option group.
Local means pertaining to the specific design run and not

global.
Design Group: Tells you the names of the design groups.

Active: Select the check boxes for those design groups that
you want to be considered in the current design run.
check box.
Design Option Group: For each design group, you must select the design
option group (set of possible pipe sizes) you want to
use. for more information, see “Option Groups Tab”
on page 12-474.
row and type the first letter of a design group name to
select that design group.
Manual Selection: Lets you force the use of a specific pipe size for the
group. This column is only available for manual
design and rehabilitation runs, not for optimized
ones. For more information, see “Manual Design
Runs” on page 12-494.
Manual Design Runs

Manual selections are used to force Darwin Designer to use specific designs in calcu-
lating costs of a network. For example, you might use an manual design to test some
hand calculations you have made or to reproduce an optimized design to which you
want to force manual overrides.
• For example, you could create a manual design run in which you force the groups
of pipes to specific sizes.
• You might create a rehabilitation design that forces groups to use specific actions.

Set the groups to use

specific pipe sizes
The difference between a manual design run and an optimized design run is the
Manual Selection column in the Design Groups and Rehab Groups tab for the run.
After you select a table to use for a group, you then must set that group to use a
specific pipe size or specific rehabilitation action.

Design Run
Set the groups to use

specific rehab actions
12.4.3 Local Rehab Groups Tab
Note: You must have at least one active design or rehab group set to a
valid design or rehab option group.
Rehabilitation Group Name: Tells you the names of the rehabilitation groups.
Active: Select the check boxes for those rehabilitation groups
that you want to be considered in the current design
run.
check box.
Rehab Option Group: For each rehabilitation group, you must select the
option group you want to use. For more information,
see “Option Groups Tab” on page 12-474.
row and type the first letter of a design group name to
select that design group.

Manual Selection: Lets you force a particular action for the selected
group. For more information, see “Manual Design
Runs” on page 12-494.
12.4.4 Local Options Tab
Note: Use these settings to fine-tune the way the GA finds results. If
adjusting a particular GA control gives you better results,
pursue the approach to maximize your design.
Local options relate to optimized design runs only and therefore

are not available for manual design runs.
The Options tab lets you define the parameters for the genetic algorithm.
• “GA Parameters Advanced Options” on page 10-442

• “Stopping Criteria” on page 12-497
• “Top Solutions” on page 12-498
Stopping Criteria
Maximum Trials: Set the maximum number of calibration trials you
want the GA to process before stopping.
Non-Improvement Generations: Set the number of maximum number of non-
improvement generations you want the GA to
process without calculating an improved fitness. If
the GA makes this number of calculations without

Computing the Design Run
finding an improvement that is better than the

defined Fitness Tolerance, the GA will stop. Non-
Improvement Generations works in conjunction with
Fitness Tolerance.
Top Solutions
Solutions to Keep: Select the number of solutions you want to keep.
12.4.5 Notes Tab
and dates.
12.5 Computing the Design Run

After you set up your design run (see “Design Run” on page 12-492), click the
GO button to compute the results of your design.
12.6 Results Pane

After you have computed your design run (see “Computing the Design Run” on
page 12-498), the results area becomes available for you. Use the results area to
review and use your results.

Note: In all results panes, you can sort columns by right-clicking and
selecting Sort or by clicking on the column headers. This is
especially useful for quickly indentifying which junctions and/or
pipes have violations. Also, sorting is preserved in reports, so if
you sort something it will be sorted the same way in the report
view.
Show/Hide Results: Click Show Results or Hide Results to display or

hide the results area.
Solution: Use the drop-down list to select the solution you
want to see or report on.
Export to Scenario: Click Export to Scenario to export your
results as an alternative to your WaterCAD or
WaterGEMS scenario. Export creates a new
scenario and lets you export the following data to
alternatives:
• Physical Alternative data: diameter, roughness,
and material.
• Active Topology Alternative: If the pipe
diameter is 0, the pipe is made inactive in the
active topology alternative.
• Capital Cost Alternative: capital costs and unit
length costs for pipes.
In WaterCAD or WaterGEMS, to see the changes
brought about by your export, choose the scenario
from the Scenarios drop-down list or review cost
information. For more information, see “Scenario
Selection” on page 8-365 and “Active Cost
Scenarios” on page 11-451.)
Copy to Clipboard: Click Copy to Clipboard to copy the results
from the currently-displayed (active) tab to
the Windows clipboard. From the clipboard,
you can paste (Ctrl+V) this data into other software,
such as Microsoft Excel, for example.
Report: Click Report to present your data in Report
Viewer. For more information, see “Report
Viewer” on page 12-502.
Plot: This displays a graph of your results. For
more information, see “Graph Dialog Box”
on page 12-503.
Resize to Fit: Click Resize to Fit to fit all result columns in the
report-area display.

Results Pane
Tabs: • “Design Groups Tab” on page 12-500

• “Rehab Groups Tab” on page 12-500
• “Pressure Constraints Tab” on page 12-501
• “Flow Constraints Tab” on page 12-501
Fitness: Fitness is the overall score given a solution by
Darwin Designer. For Minimize Cost solutions, a
lower fitness is best. Otherwise, higher fitness
indicates the best solution. For more information, see
“Competent Genetic Algorithms” on page B-762.
Total Benefit: This only has a value for Maximize Benefit and
Multi-Objective Trade-off calculations. This is a
score of the calculated benefits, with a higher value
indicating more benefit in terms of improved
network pressure.
Total Cost: Total Cost displays the sum of rehabilitation and
design costs.
12.6.1 Design Groups Tab
The Design Groups tab in the results area displays:
• Design group name (see “Design Groups Tab” on page 12-471)

• Pipe label
• Pipe material
• Pipe roughness
• Pipe inside diameter
• Cost of each pipe
12.6.2 Rehab Groups Tab
The Rehab Groups tab in the results area displays:
• Rehabilitation group name (see “Rehab Groups Tab” on page 12-473)

• Pipe label
• Rehabilitation action taken
• Cost of rehabilitation for each pipe

12.6.3 Pressure Constraints Tab
The Pressure Constraints tab in the results area displays information about junction
pressures:
• Design event set name (see “Design Event Editor” on page 12-484)
• Junction label
• Simulated pressure at the junction
• Required minimum pressure at the junction
• Required maximum pressure at the junction
• Any calculated pressures that fall below the minimum or above the maximum (as
a negative number if below the minimum, as a positive one if above the
maximum)
12.6.4 Flow Constraints Tab
The Flow Constraints tab in the results area displays information about junction pres-
sures:
• Design event name (see “Design Event Editor” on page 12-484)

• Junction label
• Simulated velocity at the junction
• Required minimum velocity at the pipe
• Required maximum velocity at the pipe
• Any calculated velocities that fall below the minimum or above the maximum (as
a negative number if below the minimum, as a positive one if above the
maximum)
12.7 Element Selector

The Element Selector dialog box lets you choose the elements for which you want to
optimize rehabilitation or design.

Report Viewer
Note: To use selection sets in Darwin Designer, you must first set them
up in WaterGEMS or WaterCAD. For more information, see
“Selection Sets” on page 5-263.
If you are creating new pipes in WaterGEMS or WaterCAD

specifically for use in Darwin Designer, you should use a naming
convention that stands out and lets you more easily select them.
Selection Set: If you have a selection set defined that you want to
use, select it from the drop-down list.
Elements: Click, shift+click, and/or ctrl+click elements you
want to include in your design group. Whatever
elements are highlighted when you press OK will
become part of the group.
12.8 Report Viewer

Report Viewer lets you view, print, and search reports you create about your optimiza-
tion.
Print: Lets you print your report to an installed printer.

Find: Lets you search for text in your report. Report
Viewer highlights the text as it finds it.
Single/Multiple Page: Lets you display one of your report pages or several
pages at once.
Zoom: Lets you magnify or reduce the display of your report
for better viewing.

Previous/Next Page: Lets you page through your report. You can also use
the Page Up/Down keys on your keyboard.
Forward/Backward: Lets you navigate between pages you have just
viewed.
12.9 Graph Dialog Box

You can create two graphs from your Darwin Designer calculations:
• Pareto Optimal Plot—Shows Benefit versus Cost for your calculations, provided
you have used Maximum Benefit or Multi-Objective Trade-off Design Parameters
(see “Design Type Tab” on page 12-483 and “About Pareto Optimal Plots” on
page 12-504).
• Pipe Size Usage Plot—Shows the total length of pipe of a certain diameter used
by the solution.
To create a graph of your solution, with the Design Run highlighted, and
after calculating the network, in the results area, click the Plot button and
choose the kind of plot you want.
The graph dialog box has three buttons:
• Edit—Lets you edit your graphing parameters, axes, etc.

• Copy to Clipboard—Copies the current graph as a raster (bitmap) image to the
clipboard.
• Print Preview—Shows you how the graph will print to your default printer.

Graph Dialog Box
12.9.1 About Pareto Optimal Plots
When there is more than one objective in a design, it is seldom possible to say that one
solution is clearly the best because it may be better than another with regard to one
objective measure but worse on another. (Although, there are many solutions that are
clearly inferior. That is there are other solutions that are better than an inferior with
regard to all objectives.)
However, there will be a small set of solutions for which no solution can give a better
value of one objective without having a worse value for another objective. This set of
solutions is referred to as non-inferior or Pareto optimal (after Pareto, an Italian econ-
omist).
For example, one solution may cost $5 million and have a pressure benefit of 2 (high
is good), while another may cost $6 million and have a pressure benefit of 2.2. Neither
is clearly superior but neither is clearly inferior; they are both non-inferior to one
another.
When working with multiple objectives, there is not likely to be a single solution that
is superior for all objectives. Therefore, when multiple objectives are involved, you
must chose between a number of non-inferior solutions.
Darwin eliminates the thousands of inferior solutions and provides two ways to
compare non-inferior solutions:
1. Solution comparison table

2. Pareto optimal plot.

12.9.2 Export Design to Scenario Dialog Box
Note: If you export a Designer solution to the scenario manager, the

extra demand adjustments (see “Demand Adjustments Tab” on
page 12-485) and boundary (initial) conditions (see “Boundary
Conditions Tab” on page 12-490) aren’t exported (only physical
properties, active topology, and capital cost alternatives can be
exported). Given this, to recreate simulation runs that are
equivalent to each Design Event (see “Design Events Tab” on
page 12-493), it is necessary for you to build a corresponding
demand and initial alternative that reflects the additional
demand adjustments (if any) and any boundary conditions (if
any).
Use Export to Scenario to pass your results and optimized network back for use in
WaterCAD. (For more information, see “Scenario Selection” on page 8-365 and
“Active Cost Scenarios” on page 11-451.)
1. Click Export to Scenario.

2. The Export Design to Scenario dialog box opens. Select the check boxes
for those items you want to export.
3. By default, WaterCAD uses the name of the design run as the name for the
scenario and alternatives you export. If you want, you can manually type a
different name for these.
4. If you want to rename the scenarios and alternatives using the same name but to
something other than the design run name, select the Use Scenario Name for
Alternatives check box and type in the Export to Scenario Name field; the text
boxes for the alternatives will match what you type.
5. Click OK to export the scenarios and any alternatives you chose. Click OK when
prompted to accept a confirmation message about the export.
6. To see what you have exported:
a. Close Darwin Designer.
b. Use the Scenario drop-down list to select the scenario you exported.
c. Use the Scenario Manager button to review the alternatives you

exported.

Schema Augmentation
12.10 Schema Augmentation

The Schema Augmentation dialog box opens if the WaterCAD file does not contain
the Darwin Designer schema.
A schema is the series of tables and table cells that contain your data. A schema
change typically means a table or table cells have been added, usually by an update to
the software.
When you use Schema Augmentation, WaterCAD adds any missing tables to the
schema of the file you are using. Updating a schema should not damage your data but
we do recommend you create a backup. Select the Create backup: *.bak check box
to create a backup of your existing database. It will be saved in its current directory
but will have .BAK appended to the filename.
To restore the backup, delete or move your current .MDB file and then rename your
backup file by deleting the .BAK extension, so the extension becomes only .MDB.
Existing database
Backup file

12.11 Set Field Options

Right-click any units in any dialog box and select the properties to use the Set Field
Options dialog box. This lets you set the units, precision, and format for the data:
Scientific: Scientific numbers use the form, 1.111 E+111.

Fixed Point: Fixed point numbers use the form 111.111.
General: General format uses the most compact of either
fixed-point or scientific notation
Number: Numbers use the form 1,111,111.111, where number
separators are used.
12.12 Verification Summary

If you try to calculate a network using invalid Darwin Designer settings, the Designer
Data Verification Summary displays. This dialog box means that there are some
invalid settings in your run that prevent Darwin Designer from calculating your solu-
tion.
Here are some things to consider:
• Do your groups reference elements that are inactive in your Representative

Scenario? Check the scenario you are using. For more information, see “Design
Events Tab” on page 12-468. Make sure your scenario uses only active pipes.
• Does your design run have an Active Design Event? It should. For more informa-
tion, see “Design Events Tab” on page 12-493.
• Do you have active design groups that are assigned to valid design option tables?
You need at least one active design group that corresponds to a design option
table. For more information, see “Local Design Groups Tab” on page 12-494.
• Is it possible that elements have been deleted from the model from another client
application? If so, close down Darwin Designer and re-open it. Darwin Designer
will then update itself based on the latest GEMS model, deleting any references to
deleted elements.

Verification Summary

Chapter
Presenting your 13
Results
This section covers the various methods that are provided for viewing, annotating,
graphing, and reporting your data. It also presents the tools available for generating
contours, generating profiles, and color coding elements based on any attribute.
13.1 Element Annotation

Element annotations allow you to display detailed information such as pipe lengths or
node ground elevations, as well as calculated values such as velocity, in your drawing.
You can add one or more annotations for any type of element in the system. Annota-
tions update automatically. For example, annotations will display newly calculated
values and will be refreshed as you change scenarios.
Note: The annotations and their format are defined by using the
Annotation Wizard (for more information, see “The Annotation
Wizard” on page 13-510). In Stand-Alone mode, the annotation
format can also be easily modified in the Attribute Annotation
dialog box, (see “Annotation Wizard—Specify Annotation” on
page 13-511) which opens when you double-click the handle of
the annotation text in the drawing, or if you right-click the
annotation and select Edit <Attribute> from the shortcut menu.
Pipe annotations can be aligned with the pipes or displayed

horizontally, depending on the Pipe Text alignment setting
specified in the Drawing Options dialog box.
You can flip the text from one side of the pipe to the other (reading in the opposite
direction) to maintain readability when the pipe direction on a plot is nearly vertical.
By default, the text flips direction when the pipe direction is 1.5 degrees measured
counter-clockwise from the vertical. You can modify this value by inserting a TextFli-
pAngle variable in the HAESTAD.INI file, located in the Haestad directory. The angle
is measured in degrees, counter-clockwise from the vertical.
For instance, if you want the text to flip when the pipe direction is vertical, you should
add the following line to the HAESTAD.INI file:

Element Annotation
TextFlipAngle=0.0
Reasonable values fall in the range from 15.0 degrees to -15.0 degrees. The TextFli-
pAngle is only applicable to annotations on the plan view.
Element annotation includes:
• “Attribute Annotation Dialog Box” on page 13-510

• “The Annotation Wizard” on page 13-510
13.1.1 Attribute Annotation Dialog Box
To access the Attribute Annotation dialog box, right-click the annotation and select
<Attribute Name> Annotation. Alternatively, in the main view in Stand-Alone mode,
double-click the handle of the annotation text to display the corresponding Attribute
Annotation dialog box. Here you can easily modify the format of that attribute annota-
tion without going through the Annotation Wizard (see “The Annotation Wizard” on
page 13-510) again. The replaceable parameters %v and %u represent the attribute’s
value and unit respectively.
13.1.2 The Annotation Wizard
You can use the Annotation Wizard to add annotations to the drawing, as well as to
remove or modify existing annotations in the drawing. You can annotate all elements
or any subset of elements.
The wizard is divided into three steps:
• Select Elements—Select the types of elements to annotate. For more information,

see “Annotation Wizard—Select Elements” on page 13-511.
• Specify Annotations—Specify the set of elements to annotate, the attributes you
would like to annotate, and the format of your notations. For more information,
see “Annotation Wizard—Specify Annotation” on page 13-511.
• Summary—Summary of the selected annotation settings. For more information,
see “Annotation Wizard—Summary” on page 13-512.

Presenting your Results
Annotation Wizard—Select Elements
Tip: If you decide to turn off the annotations for a particular element
type, your annotation settings will be retained, allowing you to
easily toggle annotation back on.
This step allows you to specify the types of elements you wish to annotate by
checking the appropriate boxes. You may annotate more than one type of element at a
time by checking all the desired element types. If you have already annotated your
drawing, you can remove annotations for a particular type of element by clearing the
corresponding check box.
Annotation Wizard—Specify Annotation

The next steps allows you to specify the subset of elements and the attributes you wish
to annotate for each element type. For each element type, you will be presented with a
table where you can specify the attributes you wish to annotate, and the mask for each
attribute.
• Specify the Set of Elements—Choose All Elements from the choice list for anno-
tation to be applied to all elements in the network, or choose a selection set. Click
the Ellipsis (...) button to access the Selection Set Manager to edit or add selection
sets.
• Attributes—Select from a list of all available attributes for the current element
type including calculated values. Click this field, and choose the attributes you
wish to annotate by selecting from the list that appears. Clicking the sideways
triangle button will open the categorized Quick Attribute Selector (for more infor-
mation, see “Quick Attribute Selector” on page 2-56).
• Mask—Customize the way the annotation is displayed. The replaceable parame-
ters %v and %u represent the attribute’s value and unit respectively. By default,
the mask is set up as follows: <attribute name>: %v %u.
Tip: When annotating, for example, pipe diameters, the default mask
is Diameter: %v %u. The default annotation for a 150 millimeter
pipe would be Diameter: 150 mm. By changing the mask to %v
%u, the resulting annotation would be 150 mm.
• Initial Placement (Available for profile annotations only)—Specify how the

annotation will be offset relative to the label of the element it is referring to. If the
<default> is selected, then the annotation will be placed under the label. To
specify a custom offset select Offset… and click the Ellipsis (...) button to bring
up the Offset dialog box. In this dialog box you can specify the x and y offsets.
Click OK when completed.

Element Annotation
Initial Placement Dialog Box
Use the Initial Placement dialog box to set how the annotation will be offset relative to
the label of the element it is referring to. Set the x and y offsets and click OK when
you are done. This feature lets you customize your drawing annotations to more
closely match accepted specifications.
Annotation Wizard—Summary
Tip: You can turn annotation visibility on or off by editing the

Drawing Options. Your annotation settings will be retained. If the
Drawing Options are set so that element annotations will not be
displayed, clicking the Finished button in the Annotation Wizard
will automatically turn annotations on.
In Stand-Alone mode, you can double-click an annotation

element in the drawing to edit the associated mask.
The Annotation Text Height can be adjusted from the Drawing

tab of the Options dialog box, accessed by selecting Tools >
Options.
The last step of annotating your drawing is reviewing the choices you have made. If
you would like to make changes at this time, click the Back button to return to
previous windows in the wizard. When you are satisfied, click the Finished button to
apply the annotations to the drawing.

13.2 Color Coding

Color Coding allows you to assign colors to elements in the drawing based on a
variety of input and output attributes. For any attribute, you can supply a color scheme
or have the application generate one for you. For example, you can supply a color
scheme to display all pipes sizes between 2 in. and 8 in. in green, those between 10 in.
and 24 in. in blue, and those between 27 in. and 48 in. in red.
13.2.1 Color Coding Dialog Box
At the top of the Color Coding dialog box are two tabs, Link and Node. You can set up
color coding for both links and nodes, or just one of the two. The following fields are
available:
Note: Color coding legends can be added to any location in the

drawing by clicking the Legend button on the Tool
Palette.
Color coding will automatically update as input or results

change. For example, after performing a calculation, colors will
update to reflect the newly calculated values.
If the results for the selected attribute are not available, or if all
values for that attribute are the same, automatic range
initialization will not be performed. You can enter your own
custom range in this case.
A schematic can have any number of color assignments.
• Attribute—Select the attribute by which you would like to color code, or select
<None> to turn color coding off. By clicking the sideways triangle button, you
can access the categorized Quick Attribute Selector (for more information, see
“Quick Attribute Selector” on page 2-56).
• Selection Set—Choose All Elements from the list to apply color coding to be
applied to all elements in the network, or choose a selection set to apply color
coding to a subset. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to access the Selection Set
Manager to edit or add selection sets.
• Calculate Range—Automatically determine the minimum and maximum for the
specified attribute and selection set.
• Minimum/Maximum—Displays the calculated minimum and maximum values
for the specified attribute in the selection set.

Reports
• Initialize—Automatically calculate a default color coding range for the specified

attribute, based on the values in your project.
• Ramp—Automatically generate a gradient range between two colors that you
specify. Pick the color for the first and last values in the list and the program will
select colors for the other values. For instance, picking red as the first color and
blue as the last color will produce varying shades of purple for the other values.
Tip: The Quick View window can be used to display a summary of the
active link or node color coding parameters.
Use the Initialize and/or the Insert buttons to define your color coding map. Then click
OK to apply the specified colors to the appropriate elements.
13.3 Reports
Reports includes:
• “Predefined Reports” on page 13-515

• “Element Details Report” on page 13-515
• “Element Results Report” on page 13-516
• “Tabular Reports” on page 13-517
• “Scenario Summary Report” on page 13-517
• “Project Inventory Report” on page 13-517
• “Calculation Results Table” on page 13-517
• “Plan View Report” on page 13-518
• “Calculation/Problem Summary Report” on page 13-518
• “Contour Plan View” on page 13-519
• “Totalizing Flow Meters” on page 13-519
• “Tabular Report Window” on page 13-519
• “System Head Curve Dialog Box” on page 13-520

13.3.1 Predefined Reports
This application provides several predefined reports that can be used in your projects.
This feature makes report generation a simple point-and-click exercise. Select the
elements for which you want a report and send them to your printer.
Note: Detailed reports can be copied to the Windows clipboard in RTF

format for use in your favorite word processing program.
The following types of Predefined Reports are available:
• “Element Details Report” on page 13-515

• “Element Results Report” on page 13-516
• “Tabular Reports” on page 13-517
• “Scenario Summary Report” on page 13-517
• “Project Inventory Report” on page 13-517
• “Plan View Report” on page 13-518
13.3.2 Element Details Report
The Detailed Reports dialog box allows you to print detailed reports for all elements
or any subset of elements in the system.
In Stand-Alone mode, from the Detailed Reports dialog box, select multiple elements
to be printed by Shift+clicking or Control+clicking. Holding down the Shift key will
provide group selection. Alternatively, use the Select button to open the Selection Set
dialog box (for more information, see “Selection Sets” on page 5-263). This provides
more powerful selection functions. When you are satisfied, click the Print button to
output the selected reports.

Reports
Note: You can graphically select elements that you would like to print
before opening the Detailed Reports dialog box. This is done by
holding down the Shift key and selecting elements, or by
dragging a window around the area of interest. The selected
elements will be highlighted in the list of elements to print when
you open the dialog box.
You can print a detailed report for a single element without using
the Detailed Reports dialog box. Open the element editor for the
desired element and click the Report button.
In AutoCAD mode, to activate the Detailed Reports dialog box, select Report >
Element Details. The cursor will change to a pick box, signaling you to choose the
elements for which you would like to view reports. Select elements as you normally
would in AutoCAD. Press the Enter key, and the dialog box will appear. While all of
the elements in the project are listed, the ones you have selected are highlighted. You
can use the Select button to further edit this list. Click the Print button to output the
selected reports when you are satisfied.
13.3.3 Element Results Report
Note: You can graphically select elements that you would like to print
before opening the Element Results dialog box. This is done by
holding down the Shift key and selecting multiple elements, or
by dragging a window around the area of interest. The selected
elements will be highlighted in the list of elements to print when
you open the dialog box.
When working with large systems, the preview option can

require a great deal of system resources. You can reduce
resource requirements by selecting a small subset of elements
with which to work. The print option has lower system resource
requirements than the preview option.
The Element Results dialog box allows you to print or preview a single report
containing the results for any number of elements in the system.
From the Element Results dialog box, you can select elements to be printed by
Shift+clicking or Ctrl+clicking. Holding down the Shift key will provide group selec-
tion behavior. Alternatively, use the Select button to open the Selection Set dialog box
(for more information, see “Selection Sets” on page 5-263). This provides more
powerful selection functions. When you are satisfied, click the Preview button to view
the selected reports, or click the Print button to print the selected reports.

13.3.4 Tabular Reports
Note: The predefined tables may need to be modified in certain

situations to have them properly display the desired data. For
instance, if you set up a project and choose the Manning’s
friction method, the default Pipe Report will still display a Hazen-
Williams C column, which will contain no data. The proper
column must be added by Editing the table.
All tabular data in this program can be copied to the Windows

Clipboard by right-clicking the desired table and selecting Copy
from the shortcut menu. You can then paste this data into your
favorite spreadsheet or word processor to generate custom
reports and graphs.
Using the powerful FlexTables feature (see “FlexTables” on page 7-329), you can
very quickly generate a tabular report containing any attribute and any network
element.
13.3.5 Scenario Summary Report
The Scenario Summary provides a detailed report of the active scenario (see
“Scenarios” on page 8-364), including alternatives (see “Alternatives” on page 8-
345), and a brief summary of the calculation options.
13.3.6 Project Inventory Report
The Project Inventory report provides a detailed report that includes a summary of the
active scenario (see “Scenarios” on page 8-364), a network inventory, and a detailed
pipe inventory (grouped by pipe section).
13.3.7 Calculation Results Table
The calculation results for each element in a network can be viewed in a table format.
This table is predefined and you cannot change it. It displays the set of the most
commonly desired output attributes for the type of element for each reporting time
step in the hydraulic analysis. The contents of the table can be copied to the Windows
clipboard to transfer the data to another application such as a spreadsheet or word
processing document.

Reports
Tip: You can change the reporting time step increment on the
Analysis Toolbar (for more information, see “Analysis Toolbar” on
page 2-81).
To copy the data to the Windows clipboard, right-click the table and select Copy from
the context menu.
13.3.8 Plan View Report
Generate reports for the plan view of the network, for either the current drawing
display (Current View) or the entire drawing extents (Full View).
13.3.9 Calculation/Problem Summary Report
After running hydraulic calculations, the Results tab of the Scenario Editor is
displayed. This tab contains a summary of the calculation results. To view any prob-
lems or warnings encountered during the simulation, click the Element Messages
button.
Tip: Tip:Holding the mouse cursor over a message in the Element

Calculation Message Browser report will open up a shortcut
message box that displays further information on the message.
The report consists of a series of folders that represent different stages of the calcula-
tion process. Double-click a folder or click the + sign to view information related to
the folder’s caption. The color of the folder will indicate if any problems occurred
during that portion of the analysis.
The colors indicate the following:
• Green Light—Calculations were run successfully, without any warning or error

messages being generated.
• Yellow Light—Calculations were run successfully, without error messages being
generated. However, there are one or more warning messages. Warnings are
displayed in the results summary in this tab.
• Red Light—Calculations were not run successfully and error messages were
generated, as shown in the results summary of this tab.
This report can be previewed before being printed or copied to the clipboard by
clicking the Printer button on the Results tab. It can also be exported to a text file by
clicking the Save button on the Results tab. Only the exposed text will be exported,
copied or printed.

13.3.10 Contour Plan View
A preview of the Contour Plan View Report, showing all contours as displayed in the
Contour Plot window, can be obtained by clicking the Print Preview button in the
Contour Plot window (for more information, see “Contour Plot” on page 13-549).
13.3.11 Totalizing Flow Meters
The Totalizing Flow Meter allows you to track the total and net flows passing through
any element. The dialog box is divided into two sections:
• Times—The Times section allows you to specify the time period for which the
meter will calculate flows. This section consists of two menus:
– Start—The time when the meter begins calculating flow passing through the
corresponding element.
– Stop—The time when the meter stops calculating flow passing through the
corresponding element.
• Volumes—The Volumes section displays the results of the meter calculations in

the following four result fields:
– Net Volume—The value reported in this field is the Negative Volume
subtracted from the Positive Volume.
– Positive Volume—The amount of flow passing through the meter from the
element upstream (From Node) to the element downstream (To Node).
– Negative Volume—The amount of flow passing through the meter from the
element downstream (To Node) to the element upstream (From Node).
– Total Volume—The total amount of flow passing through the meter in either
direction.
13.3.12 Tabular Report Window
This window is used to display data in a tabular format. At the top of the window are
five buttons that provide the following functionality:
• File—Export the data in the report to either a comma or tab delimited text file.
• Copy—Copy the data in the report to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into
another program such as a spreadsheet or word processor.
• Print Preview—Open a print preview of the report, from which the report can be
sent directly to the printer.

Graphs
• Close—Close the report.

• Help—Access the online help for this report.
13.3.13 System Head Curve Dialog Box
The System Head Curve dialog box contains the following three input fields:
• Pump—The Pump field allows you to specify which pump the system head curve
will be based upon, and provides three methods of choosing this pump. The menu,
which lists all of the pumps in the network, the Ellipsis (...) button which opens
the Single Element Selection dialog box (see “Single Element Selection Dialog
Box” on page 5-260), and the Select From Drawing button, which allows you to
select the element using the graphical Drawing view.
• Maximum Flow—This field is automatically supplied with the Maximum Oper-
ating Discharge value for the selected pump.
• # of Intervals—This field determines the number of Head/Discharge points that
will be used to create the system head curve. The higher the number of intervals
used, the smoother the curve will be.
• Validate—If this box is checked when you click the OK button, the pump curve
input data will be checked to ensure that it is valid. If a problem is found, a dialog
box will appear that provides details about the cause of the error. If the box is
unchecked when the OK button is clicked, the input data is not checked, and if
errors are present the operation will fail. You will then be prompted to check the
input data carefully using the Validate option.
13.4 Graphs
Graphs includes:
• “Pump Curve” on page 13-521

• “Tank Storage Curve” on page 13-521
• “Junction Demand Graph” on page 13-521
• “Pattern Graph and Report” on page 13-521
• “Plotting a Variable versus Time” on page 13-521

13.4.1 Pump Curve
To generate a pump curve, open the Pump Editor for the pump of interest, click the
Report button, and choose the Pump Curve menu item.
13.4.2 Tank Storage Curve
To generate a plot of the tank storage volume versus the elevation, open the Tank
Editor for the tank of interest, click the Report button, and choose the Tank Curve
menu item.
13.4.3 Junction Demand Graph
To generate a graph of the total demand at a junction over time, open the Junction
Editor for the junction of interest, select the Demand tab and click the Graph button.
13.4.4 Pattern Graph and Report
You can generate a graph or a full report of a pattern that represents the multiplier
variable of the pattern over time. To do so, open the appropriate Pattern Manager
dialog box and access the pattern for which you would like to generate output. From
the Pattern Editor dialog box (see “Pattern Editor” on page 9-395), click the Report
button, and select Graph or Detailed Report.
13.4.5 Plotting a Variable versus Time
Plotting a variable versus time includes:
• “Graph Setup” on page 13-522

• “Available Scenarios” on page 13-522
• “Graph Window” on page 13-522

Graphs
Graph Setup
Note: The Graph Setup option is only available for Extended Period
Analysis (for more information, see “Steady-State/Extended Period
Simulation” on page 9-378).
When the Plot Window is open, click the Options button to graph
other dependent variables or to change the graph options.
Clicking Options > Graph Setup opens the Graph Setup dialog
box. Clicking Options > Graph Options opens the Graph Options
dialog box (for more information, see “Graph Options” on page 13-
560).
The Graph Setup dialog box allows you to graph calculated results for any element in
the system. The dialog box is divided into three tabs:
• Graph Setup—This tab contains the dependent menu. This menu lists the
attributes that can be graphed for the current element type. The attribute range is
automatically initialized by the program depending on the calculated values for
the elements that are being graphed.
• Elements—This dialog box consists of a pane that lists the elements available for
graphing and a Select button. Click the check boxes next to each of the elements
that you want to graph. The Select button opens the Selection Set dialog box,
which allows you to choose the elements that will be displayed in the graph.
• Scenarios—Select and compare various scenario computations (for more infor-
mation, see “Available Scenarios” on page 13-522).
Available Scenarios
Note: The only scenarios that will be available to graph are scenarios
for which an Extended Period Simulation have been calculated.
This feature allows you to select which scenarios you wish to view and compare on
the current graph. Place a check mark by the scenarios you wish to display.
Graph Window
The Graph window is divided into two tabs: Graph and Data. The Graph tab displays a
plot of the selected dependent variable vs. time. The Data tab will display the data
under the Graph tab in a tabular format.
The following functions will either be formed on the plot or the tabular data,
depending on which tab is selected.
• Copy—Copies the graph/data onto the Windows Clipboard for use in other appli-
cations. For more information, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.

• Print—Outputs the contents of the Graph/Data tab to the printer. For more infor-
mation, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.
• Options/Graph Options—Allows you to customize the plot by changing the
graph’s axes, fonts, titles, etc. This is only available when the Graph tab is
selected. For more information, see “Graph Options” on page 13-560.
• Options/Graph Setup—Allows you to rebuild the graph with different data and
parameters. For more information, see “Graph Setup” on page 13-522.
• Close—Close the Graph window. For more information, see “Other Toolbar
• Help—Provides access to help for the Graph window. For more information, see
“Using the Online Help” on page 2-72.
13.5 Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher

GeoGrapher includes:
• “GeoGrapher Graph Manager” on page 13-523

• “GeoGrapher Manager” on page 13-524
13.5.1 GeoGrapher Graph Manager
GeoGrapher allows you to create, edit, and store custom graphs. The available graph
types in the first step of the Graph Creator Wizard are as follows:
When the Over Time Graph button is selected, there are four graph types to choose
from:
• Elements Comparison (Over time)—This graph type compares a primary and

secondary attribute for any number of elements over multiple time-steps in a line
graph format.
• Element-Scenario Comparison (Over time)—This graph type compares a
single attribute for any number of element-scenario pairs over multiple time-steps
in a line graph format.
• Scenarios Comparison (Over time)—This graph type compares a single
attribute for any element during multiple scenarios over multiple time-steps in a
line graph format.
• Single Element (Over time)—This graph type displays a single attribute for any
element across multiple time-steps in a line graph format.
When the Single Time Step button is selected, there are 3 graph types to choose from:

Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher
• Attribute Comparison (Single time-step)—This graph type compares a primary

and secondary attribute for any number of elements during a single time step in a
bar graph format.
• Element Analysis (Single time-step)—This graph type compares a primary and
secondary attribute for any number of elements during a single time step in a
scatter graph format.
• Scenarios Comparison (Single time-step)—This graph type compares a single
attribute for any number of elements during multiple scenarios across multiple
time-steps in a bar graph format.
13.5.2 GeoGrapher Manager
The GeoGrapher Manager dialog box provides the following commands:
• New—Creates a new graph of the highlighted type.

• Open—Opens the previously created graph that is currently highlighted.
• Rename—Renames the previously created graph that is currently highlighted.
• Duplicate—Makes a copy of the previously created graph that is currently high-
lighted.
• Delete—Deletes the previously created graph that is currently highlighted.
13.5.3 GeoGrapher Wizard
The GeoGrapher Wizard assists you in the creation of graphs by stepping you through
the most commonly used setup options. Depending on the type of graph that is being
created, the specific steps of the wizard will vary.
• Attribute Comparison (Single time-step)—This graph type compares a primary

and secondary attribute for any number of elements during a single time step in a
bar graph format.
– Step 1—Select the Desired Graph Type: This step allows you to change the
type of graph being created from the default settings associated with the graph
type that was chosen in the Graph Manager. Click Next to retain the default
settings.
– Step 2—Select Elements to Graph: This step allows you to specify the
element(s) that will be displayed in the graph. The [>] and [<] buttons add and
remove (respectively) the highlighted element from the corresponding pane.
The [>>] and [<<] buttons add and remove (respectively) all elements from
the corresponding pane.

Note: Multiple element types may be included in the same graph.

However, only attributes that all of the elements have in common
will be available in the next step.
– Step 3—Select Attributes to Graph: This step allows you to specify the
primary and secondary attributes that will displayed for the selected
element(s).
– Step 4—Completing the Add Graph Wizard: This step allows you to enter a
name for the graph. This is the label that will be displayed in the graph
manager dialog box. The dialog box also prompts you to choose the format to
be used in the graph, with the following choices:
- Apply Selected Graph Type’s User Default format—Choosing this

option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the user default
setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1. A user default can be
saved by clicking the Save as User’s Default format button in the
GeoGrapher Display Window (“GeoGrapher Display Window” on
page 13-529).
- Apply Selected Graph Type’s Factory Default format—Choosing this
option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the factory default
setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1.
• Element Analysis (Single time-step)—This graph type compares a primary and

secondary attribute for any number of elements during a single time step in a
scatter graph format.
settings.

– Step 3—Select Attributes to Graph: This step allows you to specify the x-axis
and y-axis attributes that will displayed for the selected element(s).


page 13-529).
• Elements Comparison (Over time)—This graph type compares a primary and

secondary attribute for any number of elements over multiple time-steps in a line
graph format.
settings.

– Step 3—Select Attribute to Graph: This step allows you to specify the
attribute that will displayed for the selected element(s).

page 13-529).

• Element-Scenario Comparison (Over time)—This graph type compares a

single attribute for any number of element-scenario pairs over multiple time-steps
in a line graph format.
settings.

– Step 3—Select Scenarios to Graph: This step allows you to specify the
scenario(s) that will displayed for the selected element(s).

page 13-529).
• Scenarios Comparison (Over time)—This graph type compares a single

attribute for any element during multiple scenarios over multiple time-steps in a
line graph format.
settings.
scenario(s) that will displayed for the selected element.

– Step 3—Select an Element to Graph: This step allows you to select the
element that will be displayed in the graph.

page 13-529).
• Scenarios Comparison (Single time-step)—This graph type compares a single

attribute for any number of elements during multiple scenarios across multiple
time-steps in a bar graph format.
settings.
scenario(s) that will displayed for the selected element(s).



page 13-529).
• Single Element (Over time)—This graph type displays a single attribute for any
element across multiple time-steps in a line graph format.
settings.
– Step 2—Select an Element to Graph: This step allows you to select the
element that will be displayed in the graph.

page 13-529).
13.5.4 GeoGrapher Display Window
The graph display window allows you to view graphs and change graph settings as
desired.
The following time step controls are available in this dialog box:

Above the graph display are the time step and animation controls. These include
VCR-style controls to move through the time steps or to animate the graph view and
the Increment combo box which controls how many time steps are skipped when the
Forward or Reverse buttons are clicked. This increment also controls which time steps
are displayed during animation.
By clicking the down arrow next to the Play button, you can access the following
Animation Options:
Clicking the Animation Options button provides the following functions:
• Animation Delay—Opens a dialog box that allows you to set the delay between
animated frames.
• Animate All Windows—If this option is selected, every window capable of being
animated will then animate when the play button is clicked. If the option is not
If you right-click with the mouse over the drawing pane, a context menu appears,
offering the following options:
• Copy Image—This command copies the currently displayed graph to the clip-
board, to be pasted into a compatible graphics application.
• Copy Format—This command stores the settings used by the current graph to be
re-used in another graph. To re-use a copied format, right-click and choose Paste
Format.
• Paste Format—This command applies to the current graph settings that were
previously copied from another graph. To copy settings from another graph, right-
click and choose Copy Format.
• Graph Setup—This command opens the GeoGrapher Graph Setup dialog box
(see “GeoGrapher Graph Setup” on page 13-532).
• Graph Options—This command opens the GeoGrapher Options dialog box (see
“GeoGrapher Options” on page 13-533
Depending on the type of graph, the following drop-down menus may be available:
• Scenarios—Allows you to select the current scenario for the graph.

• Attribute—Allows you to select the attribute being graphed.
• Elements—Allows you to select which element is being graphed.
The main graph display pane has the following tabs:
• Graph—This tab displays the current graph.

• Data—This tab displays a tabular view of the data upon which the graph is based.
• Notes—This tab shows any user-defined notes associated with the graph.
Note: The display units for the various attributes cannot be manually
changed through GeoGrapher. Instead, GeoGrapher will
automatically use the unit that is assigned to a given attribute in
WaterGEMS Modeler. To change the unit that is used, first
change it in WaterGEMS Modeler (see“FlexUnits” on page 4-252),
then open GeoGrapher and create your graph.
The following buttons are found along the top of the graph display dialog box:
Save—Saves the current graph.
Save as User’s Default format—Saves the graph settings as the user

default template for use in other graphs. To use the user default
template, select the Apply Selected Graph Type’s User Default
format option in the Completing the Add Graph Wizard step when
creating a new graph.
Export—Exports the current graph image or data.
Print—Prints the current graph.
Print Preview—Displays a preview of the graph as it will be printed.
Activate/Deactivate Zoom—This toggle button enables you to

magnify any area of the graph by click-dragging a selection box around
it.
Zoom Extents—Displays graph at the default (fully zoomed out)

magnification and view.
Graph Setup—Opens a dialog box that allows you to change graph

settings.
Graph Options—Opens the Graph Options dialog box.

13.5.5 GeoGrapher Print Preview
The GeoGrapher Print Preview window allows you to modify the print settings and
preview the graph before it is printed. The following controls are available in this
dialog box:
• Printer (drop-down menu)—This menu allows you to select the printer to which
the settings and commands issued in this dialog box will be applied.
• Setup (button)—Opens the printer’s settings and print options dialog box.
• Print (button)—Prints the current view that is displayed in the Preview pane
using the printer selected in the Printer menu.
• Portrait (button)—Orients the page to a long-vertical alignment.
• Landscape (button)—Orients the page to a long-horizontal alignment.
• Margins (up/down increment controls)—These four increment controls change
the margin spacing along the edges of the page.
• Reset Margins (button)—Resets the margins to the default settings.
• View Margins (check box)—Makes the margin lines visible in the Preview pane.
• Detail (slider bar)—This slider increases the detail of the preview in the Preview
pane as it is moved to the left, and decreases the amount of detail as the indicator
is moved to the right.
• Preview Pane—This pane displays the current page view as it will be printed.
Changes made using the other controls in this dialog box are immediately updated
in this pane.
13.5.6 GeoGrapher Graph Setup
The GeoGrapher Graph Setup dialog box allows you to change various graph settings.
The specific settings that are available for modification in this dialog box vary
depending on the graph type. The possible variables that can be changed here include:
• Elements
• X-Axis Variable
• Y-Axis Variable
• Element Attribute
• Scenario

13.5.7 GeoGrapher Options
The GeoGrapher Options dialog box is divided into two main tabs:
• “Chart Tab” on page 13-533

• “Series Tab” on page 13-544
Chart Tab
The Chart tab allows you to define overall Chart display parameters. This tab is
further subdivided into the following second-level sub-tabs:
• Series—This tab contains a pane that displays the series that are associated with
the current graph. The check box next to each list item determines whether or not
the corresponding series is visible in the graph display. The Up and Down arrow
buttons move the highlighted series up or down one line in the list. The five addi-
tional buttons on this tab are as follows:
– Add—Adds a new series to the current graph.
– Delete—Removes the currently highlighted series.
Note: Only user-defined series can be deleted from the graph display.
The default factory-defined series cannot be deleted.
– Title—Allows you to rename the currently highlighted series.
Note: Series titles are automatically generated by GeoGrapher when

you create a graph. Changing the value of the title will cause the
title to be user-defined. To have GeoGrapher once again
automatically assign a title for you, enter %auto as the value for
the title.
– Clone—Creates a duplicate of the currently highlighted series.

– Change—Allows you to edit the currently highlighted series.
• Axis—The Axis sub-tab is further subdivided into six third-level sub-tabs.

Regardless of the tab that is active, the Axis sub-tab contains a pane on the left of
the dialog box that allows you to select the axis that any modifications will be
applied to. The Visible check box enables/disables visibility for all axes at once.
The Behind check box controls if axes will be displayed in front of or behind the
series display. The third-level sub-tabs for the Axis tab are as follows:
– Scales—This sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Automatic (Check Box)—This check box determines whether the
Maximum and Minimum axis values may be manually set.

- Visible (Check Box)—Determines the visibility of the scales within the

chart display.
- Inverted (Check Box)—When Inverted is True, Axis Minimum and
Maximum scales will be swapped. Axis labels and series points will be
displayed accordingly.
- Auto, Maximum (Check Box)—When this box is checked, the
maximum axis value is automatically determined and the maximum
Change button is disabled.
- Auto, Minimum (Check Box)—When this box is checked, the minimum
axis value is automatically determined and the minimum Change button
is disabled.
- Logarithmic (Check Box)—Determines if the current axis uses loga-
rithmic scale.
- Change, Minimum (Button)—Allows input of a user-defined axis value.
This button is only enabled when the maximum Auto check box is not
checked.
- Change, Maximum (Button)—Allows input of a user-defined axis
value. This button is only enabled when the minimum Auto check box is
not checked.
- Change, Increment (Button)—This button allows you to edit the Axis
Increment. The Axis Increment is the minimum step between axis labels.
It must be a positive number or DateTime value. GeoGrapher will use this
value as the starting axis labels step.
- Log Base (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the logarithmic
base value when the Logarithmic check box is checked.
• Title—The Title sub-tab is further subdivided into six third-level sub-tabs.

Regardless of the tab that is active, the Title sub-tab contains a menu that allows
you to select the title type that any modifications will be applied to. These sub-
tabs are then further subdivided into fourth-level sub-tabs, as described below:
– Style—This sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Title (Text Box)—Allows entry of an alphanumeric title.
- Angle (Up/Down Increment Control)—Allows the display angle of the
title to be specified.
- Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the font size of the
Title text.
- Visible (Check Box)—Enables/Disables visibility of the title.
– Text—This sub-tab contains the following controls:

- Font (Button)—Specifies the font to be used in the title.

- Outline (Button)—Enables/Disables the display of an outline containing

the title text.
- Inter-char Spacing (Up/Down Increment Control)—Defines the size
of the space between characters.
- Color (Button)—Determines the color of the title shadow.
- Horiz. Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the horizontal
size of the title shadow.
- Vert. Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the vertical size
of the title shadow.
• Labels—The Labels sub-tab is further subdivided into the following fourth-level

sub-tabs:
- Visible (Check Box)—Determines label visibility in the chart display.
- Multi-Line (Check Box)—When checked, spaces in point Labels or in
Axis DateTimeFormat/ValueFormat are used to break the label into more
than one line of text.
- Round First (Check Box)—This property controls if Axis labels will be
automatically rounded to the nearest magnitude.
- Label On Axis (Check Box)—This property controls whether or not
Labels just at Axis Minimum and Maximum positions will be shown.
- Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the size of the
displayed labels.
- Angle (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the display angle of
the corresponding labels.
- Min. Separation % (Up/Down Increment Control)—This property
specifies the percent amount of minimum distance between Axis Labels.
- Auto (Button)—Chooses the label style automatically.
- Value (Button)—Axis labeling is based on axis Minimum and Maximum
properties.
- Text (Button)—Label using series label strings.
- None (Button)—No label.
- Mark (Button)—Label using SeriesMarks style.
– Format—This sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Exponential (Check Box)—Shows/hides the number of mantissa in
superscript font.

- Values Format (List Box)—Determines the value display format.

- Default Alignment (Check Box)—Enables/Disables default label align-
ment.

- Font (Button)—Specifies the font to be used.
- Outline (Button)—Enables/Disables the display of an outline.
- Inter-char Spacing (Up/Down Increment Control)—Defines the
amount of space between characters.
- Color (Button)—Determines the color of the text shadow.
size of the text shadow.
of the text shadow.
– Ticks—This sub-tab contains the following controls:

- Axis (Button)—The Axis property determines the kind of pen used to
draw the Axis major lines.
- Grid (Button)—Defines the pen used to draw Chart Grid Lines.
- Centered (Check Box)—Places Axis Grid lines between (not at) label
positions.
- Ticks (Button)—The Ticks property determines the kind of Pen used to
draw Axis marks along the Axis line.
- Len, Ticks (Up/Down Increment Control)—This property defines the
length of Axis Ticks.
- Len, Inner (Up/Down Increment Control)—This property defines the
length in pixels of Axis ticks drawn inside Chart boundaries.
- At Labels Only (Check Box)—This property sets the Axis Ticks to be
drawn only to coincide at Labels.
– Minor—This sub-tab contains the following controls:

– Ticks (Button)—The Ticks property determines the kind of Pen used to draw
Axis marks along the Axis line.
– Length (Up/Down Increment Control)—This property defines the length of
Axis Ticks.
– Grid (Button)—Defines the pen used to draw Chart Grid Lines.
– Count (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the number of minor
ticks.

• Position—This sub-tab contains the following controls:

– Position % (Up/Down Increment Control)—Position of Axis as a
percentage of the Chart Height (horizontal Axis) or Chart Width (vertical
Axis).
– Start % (Up/Down Increment Control)—Start of Axis as percentage of
width (horizontal Axis) and height (vertical Axis) of the Chart rectangle.
Original Axis scale will be fitted to new Axis height/width.
– End % (Up/Down Increment Control)—End of Axis as percentage of
width.
• Titles—The Title sub-tab is further subdivided into six third-level sub-tabs.
Regardless of the tab that is active, the Title sub-tab contains a menu that allows
you to select the title type that any modifications will be applied to. The Titles
sub-tab is further subdivided into the following third-level sub-tabs:
- Visible (Check Box)—Determines title visibility.
- Adjust Frame (Check Box)—The Adjust Frame property controls if
Chart Title and Foot frames will be resized to full Chart dimensions or to
the title text width.
- Left Alignment (Button)—Aligns the title to the left side of the chart.
- Center Alignment (Button)—Aligns the title to the center of the chart.
- Right Alignment (Button)—Aligns the title to the right side of the chart.
- Text Pane—Allows entry of the title text.
– Position—This sub-tab contains the following controls:

- Custom (Check Box)—Checking the Custom check box activates the
Left and Top controls to allow you to specify the placement of the Title on
the graph plot.
- Left (Up/Down Increment Control)—Defines left position in pixels.
- Top (Up/Down Increment Control)—Defines top position in pixels.

- Color (Button)—If the Transparent check box is unchecked, this button
specifies the frame fill color.
- Frame (Button)—If the Transparent check box is unchecked, this button
specifies the frame settings.
- Pattern (Button)—If the Transparent check box is unchecked, this
button specifies the frame fill pattern settings.

- Bevel (Menu)—If the Transparent check box is unchecked, this menu

specifies the frame bevel effect settings.
- Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—If the Transparent check box is
unchecked, this control changes the size of the frame bevel effect.
- Round Frame (Check Box)—If the Transparent check box is unchecked,
this check box enables/disables rounding of the frame shape.
- Transparent (Check Box)—This check box enables/disables frame visi-
bility.

- Outline (Button)—Enables/disables the display of an outline.
of the text shadow.
– Gradient—This sub-tab contains the following controls:

- Visible (Check Box)—Enables/disables the three-dimensional graph
display. When this box is checked, the other gradient controls are acti-
vated.
- Direction (Menu)—The Direction property specifies the direction in
which the gradient fill will be applied.
- Swap (Button)—Switches the colors specified by the Start and End
buttons.
- Start (Button)—This button specifies the first of the two required colors
that will be used to generate the gradient fill.
- Middle (Button)—This button specifies an optional third color that will
be used to generate the gradient fill.
- End (Button)—This button specifies the second of the two required
colors that will be used to generate the gradient fill.
- No Middle (Check Box)—This check box enables/disables the Middle
button. When the No Middle box is unchecked, a two-base-color gradient
will be generated; when it is checked, a three-base-color gradient is gener-
ated.

– Shadow—This sub-tab contains the following controls:

- Color (Button)—This button allows you to choose the color of the
shadow.
- Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—This button allows you to adjust
the size of the shadow.
• Legend—The Legend sub-tab is further subdivided into the following third-level

sub-tabs:
- Visible (Check Box)—Turns legend visibility on and off.
- Inverted (Check Box)
- Check Boxes (Check Box)—Activates/deactivates check boxes associ-
ated with each series in the Legend. When these boxes are unchecked in
the legend, the associated series are invisible.
- Font Series Color (Check Box)—When this option is checked, the text
associated with each series in the Legend is the same color as the color
used to represent the series display.
- Legend Style (Menu)—Specifies the Legend style that is used. Choices
include:
- Text Style (Menu)—Specifies the content that will be displayed in the
Legend.
- Vert. Spacing (Up/Down Increment Control)—This control determines
the amount of space between each series line in the Legend.
- Dividing Lines (Button)—Determines the presence of and display style
of lines dividing each series line in the Legend.
– Position—This sub-tab contains the following controls:

- Left (Button)—Places the Legend in the left side of the chart.
- Right (Button)—Places the Legend in the right side of the chart.
- Top (Button)—Places the Legend at the top of the chart.
- Bottom (Button)—Places the Legend at the bottom of the chart.
- Resize Chart (Check Box)—The Resize Chart control indicates if
Legend will automatically reduce the Chart rectangle to prevent overlap
between Legend and Chart rectangles.
- Margin (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the amount of
space between the graph image and the Legend.

- Position Offset % (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the

vertical placement of the Legend. Lower values place the Legend higher
up in the display.
- Custom (Check Box)—This check box activates the Left and Top
buttons to allow user-defined placement of the Legend.
- Left (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the horizontal place-
ment of the Legend.
- Top (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the vertical placement
of the Legend.
– Symbols—This sub-tab contains the following controls:

- Width (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the width of the
symbols used to represent the series displayed in the Legend.
- Width Units (Menu)—Allows you to choose the units that the value in
the Width control represent.
- Position (Menu)—Determines the left/right placement of the Legend
symbols in relation to the text contained within the Legend.
- Continuous (Check Box)—When this box is checked, the series symbols
will appear as a continuous line.
- Color (Button)—Determines the background color of the Legend pane.
- Frame (Button)—This button allows you to define the Legend Frame
settings.
- Pattern (Button)—Determines the background pattern of the Legend
pane.
- Bevel (Menu)—Specifies the Legend frame bevel settings.
- Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—Specifies the size of the Legend
bevel frame.
- Round Frame (Check Box)—This check box enables/disables rounding
of the Legend frame shape.
- Transparent (Check Box)—This check box controls the visibility of the
Legend frame.



of the text shadow.

vated.
buttons.
button. When the Middle button is disabled, a two-base-color gradient
will be generated; when it is enabled, a three-base-color gradient is gener-
ated.

shadow.
• Panel—The Panel sub-tab is further subdivided into the following third-level sub-
tabs:
– Background—This sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Color (Button)—This button lets you specify the chart background color.
- Browse (Button)—This button allows you to browse the hard drive for
background images.
- Inside (Check Box)—Restrict the background image to display inside the
chart rectangle only.

- Transparent (Check Box)—Enables/disables the visibility of the back-

ground image.
- Stretch (Button)—Sizes the background image to fit within the graph
dialog box.
- Tile (Button)—Repeats the background image to fill the graph dialog
box.
- Center (Button)—Centers the background image within the graph dialog
box.
– Borders—This sub-tab contains the following controls:

- Bevel Inner None (Button)—Disables display of bevel effect around the
inside of the chart frame.
- Bevel Inner Lowered (Button)—Enables display of a lowered bevel
effect around the inside of the chart frame.
- Bevel Inner Raised (Button)—Enables display of a raised bevel effect
around the inside of the chart frame.
- Bevel Outer None (Button)—Disables display of bevel effect around the
outside of the chart frame.
- Bevel Outer Lowered (Button)—Enables display of a lowered bevel
effect around the outside of the chart frame.
- Bevel Outer Raised (Button)—Enables display of a raised bevel effect
around the outside of the chart frame.
- Border (Check Box)—Enables/disables a border around the inside of the
chart frame.
- Bevel Inner Width (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the
width of the inner bevel effect.
- Bevel Outer Width (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the
width of the outer bevel effect.

vated.
buttons.


ated.
• Walls—This sub-tab contains the following controls, which are identical for each
of the Wall third-level sub-tabs (Left, Right, Bottom, Back):
– Color (Button)—Determines the presence of and settings for the wall color.
– Border (Button)—Determines the presence of and settings for the wall
border.
– Pattern (Button)—Determines the presence of and settings for the wall
pattern.
– Gradient (Button)—Determines the presence of and settings for the wall
gradient.
– Visible (Check Box)—Enables/disables visibility of the wall.
– Dark 3D (Check Box)—Enables/disables 3D surface shading of the wall.
This check box is active only when a Size greater than o has been specified in
the Size control.
– Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the depth of the wall in
3D graphs.
– Transparent (Check Box)—Enables/disables visibility of the wall.
Note: Only the Back settings are used in 2D graphs.
• 3D—This sub-tab contains the following controls:

– 3 Dimensions (Check Box)—Enables/disables 3-dimensional display of the
chart.
– 3D% (Up/Down Increment Control)—Specifies the degree of the 3D effect.
– Orthogonal (Check Box)—Enables/disables the 2D Canvas and disables/
enables the Full 3D Canvas allowing Elevation and Rotation displacement of
the Chart.
– Angle (Up/Down Increment Control)—Specifies the display angle of the
3D orthogonal graph.
– Zoom Text (Check Box)—Enables/disables the zooming of text when using
the Zoom control.

– Zoom (Slider)—Zooms in/out in the graph display.

– Rotation (Slider)—Horizontally rotates the graph three dimensionally. This
control is disabled when an Orthogonal display is chosen.
– Elevation (Slider)—Vertically rotates the graph three dimensionally. This
control is disabled when an Orthogonal display is chosen.
– Horiz. Offset (Slider)—Determines the horizontal placement of the graph
image within the chart.
– Vert. Offset (Slider)—Determines the vertical placement of the graph image
within the chart.
– Perspective (Slider)—Use this property with Orthogonal unchecked to
modify the 3D perspective of the Chart. Larger values add more depth
perspective. This control is disabled when an Orthogonal display is chosen.
Series Tab
The Series tab contains parameters dependant on the series type concerned. The list
box at the top of the Series tab shows which series you are editing. This tab is further
subdivided into the following second-level sub-tabs:
• Format—This sub-tab contains the following controls:

- Border (Button) Determines whether the series indicator will display a
border.
- Color (Button)—Determines the color of the series indicator.
- Pattern (Button)—Determines the presence of and settings for the series
indicator pattern.
- Dark 3D (Check Box)—Enables/disables shading of 3D surfaces.
- Color Each (Check Box)—Assigns a different color to each series indi-
cator.
- Height 3D (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the width of
the 3D effect when a 3D graph is chosen.
- Stack (Menu)—Determines stacking characteristics of series.
- Stairs (Check Box)—When checked, 2 Lines between each pair of points
are drawn, thus giving a stairs appearance.
- Inverted (Check Box)—Inverts the direction of the stair effect.
- Outline (Button)—Draws an outline around the series indicator.
• Point—This sub-tab contains the following controls:
– Visible (Check Box)—Enables/disables visibility of series points.
– 3D (Check Box)—Enables/disables 3D representation of series points.

– Dark 3D (Check Box)—Enables/disables shading of 3D point surfaces.

– Style (Menu)—Determines the symbol used to represent series points.
– Width (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the width of the series
point symbol in pixels.
– Height (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the height of the series
point symbol in pixels.
– Pattern (Button)—Determines the presence of and settings for the point
pattern.
– Default (Check Box)—Enables/disables use of the default pattern.
– Border (Button)—Determines the presence of and settings for the border
enclosing the point symbol.
• Marks—The Marks sub-tab is further subdivided into the following third-level

sub-tabs:
- Visible (Check Box)—Enables/disables display of marks, or series point
labels, in the graph.
- Clipped (Check Box)—Allows/disallows display of marks outside of the
inner graph border.
- Multi line (Check Box)—Enables/disables multiple lines within each
mark.
- All Series Visible (Check Box)—Enables/disables display of all series
marks.
- Style (Menu)—Determines the information that is displayed in the
marks.
- Draw every (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the interval of
the marks that are displayed. Selecting “2” would display marks for every
other series point, selecting “3” would display every third, etc.
- Angle (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the display angle of
the mark.
- Color (Button)—Determines the color of the line that connects the series
point and the mark.
- Length (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the length of the
line that connects the series point and the mark.

- Color (Button)—Determines the background color of the marks.
- Frame (Button)—Enables/disables display of a frame around each mark.

- Pattern (Button)—Determines the presence of and settings for the marks

background pattern.
- Bevel (Menu)—Determines the type of the bevel effect.
- Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the size of the bevel
effect.
- Round Frame (Check Box)—Rounds the frame corners.
- Transparent (Check Box)—Enables/disables mark background transpar-
ency.

of the text shadow.

vated.
buttons.
ated.


shadow.
13.6 Contours
Contours includes:
• “Contour Map Manager” on page 13-547

• “Contour Plot” on page 13-549
• “Contour Smoothing” on page 13-549
• “Enhanced Pressure Contours” on page 13-550
• “Contour Labeling” on page 13-550
• “Spot Elevations” on page 13-551
13.6.1 Contour Map Manager
The Contour Map Manager contains the information required to generate contours for
a calculated network, organized as follows:
• Contour—Choice list used to select the attribute that is to be contoured. Clicking

the sideways triangle button will open the categorized Quick Attribute Selector
(for more information, see “Quick Attribute Selector” on page 2-56).
• Selection Set—Contours can be generated using all elements in the network or a
subset of elements, defined in the Selection Set Manager (for more information,
see “Selection Sets Manager” on page 5-263). Click the Ellipsis (...) button to
access the Selection Set Manager.

Contours
Note: In addition to using selection sets. You can also add nodes to a
special zone that will ensure that they are excluded from the
contouring point set. Cybernet 2 users might recall that Zone
number 99 was reserved for this purpose. You should create a
zone named Do not contour. You can then add the nodes that
you do not want to be included in the contour set. You can
change the name of the contour exclusion zone by editing the
file, HAESTAD.INI, and setting the variable,
ExcludeFromContouringTag, equal to any string label. The
exclusion label is not case-sensitive.
If you want to exclude some spot elevations from the contouring

point set, set their Description field to Do not contour (or
whatever value is set in the HAESTAD.INI
ExcludeFromContouringTag variable).
• Minimum—Lowest value to be included in the contour map. It may be desirable

to use a minimum that is above the absolute minimum value in the system to avoid
creating excessive lines near a pump or other high-differential portions of the
system.
• Maximum—Highest value for which contours will be generated.
• Increment—Step by which the contours increase. The contours created will be
evenly divisible by the increment, and are not directly related to the minimum and
maximum values. For example, a contour set with 10 minimum, 20 maximum,
and an increment of 3 would result in the following set: [ 12, 15, 18 ] not [ 10, 13,
16, 19 ].
• Index Increment—Value for which contours will be highlighted and labeled. The
index increment should be an even multiple of the standard increment.
• Initialize—This button, located to the right of the Contour section, will initialize
the Minimum, Maximum, Increment, and Index Increment values based on the
actual values observed for the elements in the selection set.
• Ramp—Automatically generate a gradient range between two colors that you
specify. Pick the color for the first and last values in the list and the program will
select colors for the other values. For instance, picking red as the first color and
blue as the last color will produce varying shades of purple for the other values.
• Color by Range—Contours are colored based on attribute ranges. Use the
Initialize button to create five evenly spaced ranges and associated colors.

Tip: Initialization can be accomplished by clicking the Initialize

button. This program will then automatically generate values for
the minimum, maximum, and so on, to create an evenly spaced
contour set. These values may or may not be the desired range
for your purposes, but should at least give you a better concept
of the range of values with which you are dealing.
• Color by Index—The standard contours and index contours have separately

controlled colors so you can make the index contours more apparent.
13.6.2 Contour Plot
Note: Contour line index labels can be manually repositioned in this

view before sending the plot to the printer. The Contour Plot
Status pane displays the Z coordinate at the mouse cursor.
The Contour Plot window displays the results of a contour map specification as accu-
rate, straight-line contours.
View the changes in the mapped attribute over time by using WaterCAD’ new anima-
tion feature. Click the Play button to automatically advance through the time step
increments selected in the Increment bar.
Tip: Although the straight-line contours generated by this program

are accurate, smooth contours are often more desirable for
presentation purposes. You can smooth the contours by clicking
Options, and selecting Smooth Contours.
The plot can be printed or exported as a .DXF file using the File button at the top of
the window. In AutoCAD mode, you can export the contours directly to your
AutoCAD drawing by clicking File > Export to AutoCAD.
13.6.3 Contour Smoothing
The Contour Smoothing option displays the results of a contour map specification as
smooth, curved contours.
The plot can be printed or exported as a .DXF file using the command buttons at the
top of the window.

Contours
Note: Contour line index labels can be manually repositioned in this

view before sending the plot to the printer. The Contour Plot
Status Pane displays the Z coordinate at the mouse cursor.
13.6.4 Enhanced Pressure Contours
Normal contouring routines only include model nodes, such as junctions, tanks and
reservoirs. When spot elevations are added to the drawing, however, you can create
more detailed elevation contours and enhanced pressure contours.
These enhanced contours include not only the model nodes, but also the interpolated
and calculated results for the spot elevations. Enhanced pressure contours can help the
Stand-Alone to understand the behavior of the system even in areas that have not been
included directly in the model.
13.6.5 Contour Labeling
You can apply contour labels after the contour plot has been exported to the AutoCAD
drawing. The labeling commands are accessed from the Tools menu. The following
options are available:
• End—Allows you to apply labels to one end, both ends, or any number of
selected insertion points. After selecting this labeling option, AutoCAD will
prompt you to Select Contour to label. After selecting the contour to label,
AutoCAD prompts for an Insertion point. Click in the drawing view to place
labels at specified points along the contour. When prompted for an Insertion point,
clicking the Enter key once will prompt you to select point nearest the contour
endpoint. Doing so will apply a label to the end of the contour closest to the area
where you clicked. Clicking the Enter key twice when prompted for an Insertion
point will apply labels to both ends of the contour.
• Interior—This option applies labels to the interior of a contour line. You will be
prompted to select the contour to be labeled, then to select the points along the
contour line where you want the label to be placed. Any number of labels can be
placed inside the contour in this way. Clicking the label grip and dragging will
move the label along the contour line.
• Group End—Choosing this option opens the Elevation Increment dialog box.
The value entered in this dialog box determines which of the contours selected
will be labeled. If you enter 2, only contours representing a value that is a multiple
of 2 will be labeled, and so on. After clicking OK in this dialog box, you will be
prompted to select the Start point for a line. Contours intersected by the line drawn
thusly will have a label applied to both ends, as modified by the Elevation Incre-
ment that was selected.

• Group Interior—Choosing this option opens the Elevation Increment dialog box.
The value entered in this dialog box determines which of the contours selected
will be labeled. If you enter 2, only contours representing a value that is a multiple
of 2 will be labeled, and so on. After clicking OK in this dialog box, you will be
prompted to select the Start point for a line.
• Change Settings—Allows you to change the Style, Display Precision, and Font
Height of the contour labels.
• Delete Label—Prompts to select the contour from which labels will be deleted,
then prompts to select the labels to be removed.
• Delete All Labels—Prompts to select which contours the labels will be removed
from, then removes all labels for the specified contours.
13.6.6 Spot Elevations
In addition to the elevations at junction nodes and other network elements, supple-
mental spot elevations can be entered throughout the model without adding unneces-
sary model nodes.
Note: These spot elevations have no effect on the network model, but
can better define the terrain surface throughout the drawing. The
result is that elevation contours and enhanced pressure
contours can be generated with more detail. This gives the
Stand-Alone a better prediction of the system’s behavior, even in
areas where the model has been skeletonized.
Because spot elevations are not included in the actual piping network, there is very
little information in the spot elevation editor. The data consists of the following:
• Spot Elevation Input Data—General characteristics defined by you. For more

information, see “Spot Elevation Input Data” on page 13-551.
• Spot Elevation Calculated Results—Values calculated from the model results.
For more information, see “Spot Elevation Calculated Results” on page 13-552.
Spot Elevation Input Data

Spot Elevations have user-defined characteristics, including:
• Label—Unique name by which a spot elevation element will be referenced in

reports, error messages, and tables.
• X-Coordinate (Easting)—The location may be presented as an X-value or
defined as an Easting value, depending on individual preferences.
• Y-Coordinate (Northing)—The location may be presented as a Y-value or
defined as a Northing value, depending on individual preferences.

Profile
• Elevation—Elevation of the spot elevation.

• Description—Optional notes describing the spot elevation.
Spot Elevation Calculated Results

Because spot elevations are not directly tied to the hydraulic network model, there are
only a few values that are calculated from the model results:
Note: These values are obtained by interpolating between three

adjacent model nodes. The enhanced hydraulic grade is
determined from this interpolation, and the enhanced pressure
is then computed as a function of the interpolated hydraulic
grade and the elevation.
For spot elevations that are outside the model bounds, there
may not be three adjacent model nodes. If this is the case, the
enhanced hydraulic grade will be determined to be zero, which
may result in negative pressures. This does not necessarily
demonstrate that there are poor conditions in the system. It
indicates that the spot elevations may cover a wider area than
the model itself.
• Enhanced Hydraulic Grade—Interpolated hydraulic grade at this location.

• Enhanced Pressure—Pressure based on the interpolated hydraulic grade.
13.7 Profile
A profile is a graph that plots a particular attribute across a distance, such as ground
elevation along a section of piping. As well as these side or sectional views of the
ground elevation, profiles can be used to show other characteristics, such as hydraulic
grade, pressure, and constituent concentration.
Although profiles in general are not limited to a specific alignment, piping network
models are usually concerned with a specific profile alignment type called a network
walk (for more information, see “Walk” on page 13-554).
13.7.1 Profile Setup
Setting up a profile is a matter of selecting the walk and the attribute on which the
profile is to be based. The Profile Setup dialog box includes:
• Attribute—Parameter to be plotted on the vertical axis of the profile.

• Elements—List of elements that define the walk (see “Walk” on page 13-554) to
be profiled.

In addition, the network walk can be manipulated by using some of the associated
options:
• Select From Drawing—Return to the drawing in a protected mode to select and

deselect elements for inclusion in the walk.
Note: In AutoCAD mode, you cannot use the right-click context menu
command Repeat to re-open the Profile Setup dialog box.
• Reverse—Reverse the order of the walk. The first node in the list becomes the
last, and the last node becomes the first.
• Remove All—Remove all elements from the current walk.
• Remove All Previous—Remove all elements that appear before the selected
element in the list. If the selected element is a pipe, the associated node will not be
removed.
• Remove All Following—Remove all elements that appear after the selected
element in the list. If the selected element is a pipe, the associated node will not be
removed.
When everything is set up to your satisfaction, click the Profile button to generate the
graph.
13.7.2 Profile Plot
The Profile Plot window displays the results of an analysis in a profile format. The
plot can be copied to the Windows clipboard or printed out directly. By selecting the
Options > Graph Options menu button, you can also adjust the titles, axes, colors,
and other characteristics of the graph.
Note: For an extended period simulation, the extents of the axes are
determined based on the minimum and maximum attribute
values for the entire time step, not just the current time step.
This is done so that stepping through the time steps gives a
more accurate portrayal of the system behavior without
rescaling.
There is also a time toolbar on the Profile Plot window that allows you to follow the
profile through extended period simulation results (for more information, see “Steady-
State/Extended Period Simulation” on page 9-378).

Profile
13.7.3 Export Profiles (in AutoCAD Mode)
Profiles can be exported to the AutoCAD drawing using the File menu on the Profile
Plot dialog box (for more information, see “Profile Plot” on page 13-553). Profiles
will be exported to an insertion point below the current drawing extents.
13.7.4 Walk
A walk is a collection of nodes and pipes that follows a specific path through the
network. It can include any type of Network Element, but cannot include annotations
or spot elevations.
Note: A walk is a non-branching path through the network, and can

only be extended at either end. Pipes cannot be added along the
midsection of the walk. Likewise, elements in the midsection of
the walk cannot be deselected without first deselecting all of the
elements between one end and the undesired element.
A walk cannot double back on itself, so once a pipe has been selected it cannot be
included elsewhere in the walk.
13.7.5 Walk Selection
After clicking the Select From Drawing button to define a walk, you will be returned
to the drawing editor. If there are already elements in the current walk, they will be
displayed in a highlighted mode. Otherwise, you need to begin a new walk by clicking
any pipe. The pipe and its end nodes will then be highlighted. Continue clicking pipes
to add them to the walk, or click highlighted end pipes to remove them from the
current walk.
Once you have selected a walk, press the Escape button on your keyboard, or right-
click with the mouse and select Done.

13.8 Scenario Comparison

Note: The active topology that is displayed is based on the current
scenario. Any elements that are inactive in the current scenario
will not be displayed, even if the elements are active in other
scenario.
The data calculated in different scenarios (see “Scenarios” on page 8-364) can be
compared through the use of the Scenario Comparison window. This allows you to
create an annotated drawing to display the differences in the values for any two
scenarios.
13.8.1 Annotation Comparison Wizard
The Annotation Comparison Wizard is used to create a drawing that contains text
elements displaying the differences between specific attributes of two scenarios (for
more information, see “Scenarios” on page 8-364). The Annotation Comparison
Wizard is identical to the Annotation Wizard (see “The Annotation Wizard” on
page 13-510) except it has one additional step. This step involves selecting the two
scenarios you wish to compare.
• Scenario 1—Choose the baseline scenario.

• Scenario 2—Choose the scenario you wish to compare to Scenario 1.
Note: The active topology that is displayed is based on the current

scenario. Any elements that are inactive in the current scenario
will not be displayed, even if the elements are active in other
scenario.
The value in Scenario 1 is subtracted from the value of Scenario 2, and the difference
is displayed. Therefore, if any specified attribute’s value is greater in Scenario 2 than
it is in Scenario 1, the difference is displayed as a positive number. If the value is
smaller in Scenario 2 than in Scenario 1, it is displayed as a negative number.
Tip: For applications that support extended period simulations, you

can choose the same scenario for Scenario 1 and Scenario 2 to
annotate the differences between two time steps of that
scenario.
For example, suppose your model contains two scenarios. One is named 2002 Condi-
tions, and the other is named 2010 Conditions. To create a drawing that displays the
difference in velocity in a pipe between the 2002 scenario and the 2010 scenario, you
would use the Annotation Comparison Wizard. You could choose the 2002 scenario as

Scenario Comparison
Scenario 1, and the 2010 scenario as Scenario 2. You would then complete the rest of
the steps in the wizard. The drawing produced would show positive values where the
velocity increased under 2010 conditions and negative values where the velocity
decreased under 2010 conditions.
13.8.2 Scenario Comparison Window
The Scenario Comparison window allows you to view, print, export, and modify
scenario comparison annotations (for more information, see “Element Annotation” on
page 13-509).
Along the top of the window is a row of buttons that perform the various functions
listed below:
• File > Export To DXF—Exports the drawing in the standard .DXF file format.
For more information, see “Advanced DXF Import Techniques” on page 16-606.
• File > Export To AutoCAD (available only in AutoCAD mode)—Export the
drawing to the current AutoCAD drawing.
• Zoom Tools—Provides standard zoom capabilities for navigating within the
drawing.
• Options > Annotation Manager—Opens the Annotation Comparison Wizard to
add, delete, or modify the scenario comparison annotations. For more informa-
tion, see “Annotation Comparison Wizard” on page 13-555.
• Options > Annotation Height Multiplier—Modifies the text height for the
scenario comparison annotations.
• Options > Find Element—Allows you to locate an element by its label.
• Print Preview—Opens the Print Preview window to view how the printed pages
will look.
• Close—Closes the Scenario Comparison window.
• Help—Get quick access to this help topic.
Several user interface elements are available to let you modify the scenarios that are
being compared, and to control when the scenario comparison annotations are
updated. These interface elements are described in more detail below.
• Scenario 1—This row of controls is similar to the Analysis Toolbar on the main
window. This field allows you to choose, from the list of available scenarios, the
one that will be the baseline in the comparison.
• Scenario 2—This row of controls is identical to those described above in
Scenario 1, but instead of defining the baseline for the comparison, the scenario
you pick here will be compared to the baseline.

• Update—Click this button to refresh the scenario comparison annotations. This

button is used when Auto Update (described below) is off, and you have changed
either Scenario 1 or Scenario 2.
• Auto Update—A check in this box indicates that Auto Update is on, and that the
scenario comparison annotations will be refreshed whenever Scenario 1 or
Scenario 2 is changed. With Auto Update off, you can select the desired combina-
tion of Scenario 1 and Scenario 2, then click the Update button. With Auto
Update on, the annotations will refresh automatically to every scenario or time
step change.
13.9 Graphic Annotation

Note: To turn off Graphic Annotation, clear the corresponding check
box in the Symbol Visibility section (see “Symbol Visibility” on
page 4-248) of the Drawing Options tab in the Global Options
dialog box.
In Stand-Alone mode, several Graphic Annotation tools are provided for enhancing
the appearance of your drawing. Graphic annotations can be manipulated like any
other element in the Graphical Editor. You can add, move, and delete them just as you
would with any network elements.
To add graphic annotation to your drawing, use Tools > Layout > Graphic Annota-
tion, or use the tool palette located along the left side of the main window. The avail-
able tools are:
Tip: The program will calculate the area of a closed polyline. Right-
click the polyline for which you wish to determine the area and
select Enclosed Area.
To open or close a polyline, right-click the polyline and select

Close. A check will appear next to the menu item to indicate that
the polyline is closed.
To add bends or vertices to a polyline, right-click the polyline at

the location you would like to add a bend and select Bend > Add
Bend.
To remove bends or vertices from a polyline, select the polyline,

right-click the bend you would like to remove, and select Bend >
Remove Bend.
• Line Tool—Add polylines or polygons such as drawing roads or catchment

outlines.

Preview Windows
• Border Tool—Add rectangles to your drawing for creating borders such as prop-
erty lines.
• Text Tool—Add text to your drawing for adding explanatory notes, titles, or
labels for non-network elements.
13.9.1 Legend
Legends are used to display the ranges of the active link and node color coding. The
legend tool adds a color coding legend to the drawing. This legend is automatically
updated as the color coding is modified.
Tip: You can double-click a color coding legend in the drawing to edit
the associated color coding parameters.
Editing of the legend figure is not required. In Stand-Alone mode, multiple legends
may be placed in the drawing to assist you when printing specified regions within the
drawing.
13.9.2 Scale Dialog Box
Access the scale dialog box by right-clicking on a color coding legend and selecting
the Scale Legend option.
The dialog box consists of a single numeric entry field. The value entered here is a
multiplier that is applied to the default legend size. The default legend size is deter-
mined automatically based on the scale of the drawing and the text height multiplier.
Therefore, a value of 2 entered in the Scale field will result in a Legend twice as big as
the default size; a value of 3 results in a legend three times as big as the default, and so
on.
13.10 Preview Windows

Preview windows includes:
• “Plot Window” on page 13-559

• “Print Preview Window” on page 13-559
• “Graph Options” on page 13-560

13.10.1 Plot Window
The Plot window provides the following functionality:
• Copy—Copies the plot onto the Windows Clipboard for use in other applications.
For more information, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.
• Print—Outputs the contents of the Plot window to the printer. For more informa-
tion, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.
• Options > Graph Options—Allows you to customize the plot by changing the
graph’s axes, fonts, titles, etc. For more information, see “Graph Options” on
page 13-560.
• Close—Close the Plot window. For more information, see “Other Toolbar
• Help—Provides access to help for the Plot window. For more information, see
“Using the Online Help” on page 2-72.
13.10.2 Print Preview Window
This window provides you with a preview of what will be printed. The window
contains the following buttons:
• Pg Up/Pg Dn—Navigate between pages of the report. For more information, see
“Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.
• Copy—Copy the reports to the Windows Clipboard. For more information, see
“Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.
• Print—Output the report to the printer. For more information, see “Other Toolbar
• Options—For more information, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.
– Print Setup—Change printer options, such as portrait or landscape page
layout.
– Fit to Page—The Fit to Page check box will not appear if the Print Preview
window does not contain a drawing, or if the drawing is in schematic mode.
When checked, the drawing will be scaled to fit within a single page. When
not checked, the drawing will be output using the drawing scale.
• Close—Close the Print Preview window. For more information, see “Other
Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.
• Help—Provides access to help for the Print Preview window. For more informa-
tion, see “Using the Online Help” on page 2-72.

Preview Windows
13.10.3 Graph Options
These features allow you to customize the way a graph or pie chart looks. The dialog
box is divided into several tabs:
• “Titles” on page 13-560

• “Axis (for Graphs Only)” on page 13-560
• “Grid (for Graphs Only)” on page 13-560
• “Display (for Pie Charts Only)” on page 13-561
• “Legend” on page 13-561
Titles
• Titles—There are three sets of titles for a graph: Graph title, X-Axis title and Y-
Axis title. Each title set contains two levels: title and subtitle. A pie chart has a
title and a subtitle.
• Title Font—This feature allows you to select and change the text font type for
specific items on the graph or pie chart. Use the selection list to choose the item
for which to change the font, then click the Ellipsis (...) button to select the
desired font type from the list of available fonts currently installed on your PC.
Axis (for Graphs Only)

• Automatic Scaling—By default, the program uses the Automatic Scaling options
for setting the X and Y-axis minimum, maximum, and increment values. To
customize an axis, turn the check mark off and enter the desired values for the
minimum, maximum, and increment. If desired, you can customize a single axis
while leaving the other in the Automatic Scaling mode.
• Log Scale—Place a check mark in this box to use a log scale for this axis. You can
use a log scale for one or both axes.
Grid (for Graphs Only)
Note: You can specify to use grid lines for one or both axes.
• X-Axis—Place a check mark in this box to view grid lines corresponding to the
X-Axis labels.
• Y-Axis—Place a check mark in this box to view grid lines corresponding to the Y-
Axis labels.
• Line Color—Use this selection list to define the color to use for both axes grid
lines.
• Line Style—Use this selection list to define the line type (solid, dashed, etc) to
use for both axes grid lines.

• Fill Color—Use this selection list to define the color to use for background fill
within the plotting boundaries of the graph.
• Save as Default—Place a check mark in this box to save the current grid settings
as the default for subsequent graphs.
Display (for Pie Charts Only)

• Data Labels—Allows you to annotate pie charts with percentages, labels, or both.
• Percentages—Indicates how many decimals are to be displayed for the
percentage figures.
• Legend Location—Allows you to place the legend (if any) on the left, right, top,
or bottom of the pie chart.
• Chart View—Allows you to generate a 3D-view pie chart.
Legend
• Show Legend—A check mark designates that the legend will be included on the
graph or pie chart. Turn the check mark off if you do not wish to show the legend.
• Series—Each series represents a different curve on the graph or a slice on the pie
chart. If the graph contains only one curve, or the pie chart contains only one slice,
then it is designated as Series 1. Scroll through the list and select the desired curve
or slice (series number). Then, use one of the options below to customize it:
– Label—Name for the selected curve (series).
– Line Color—Color for the selected curve (series).
– Line Style (for graphs only)—Style for the selected curve (series).
– Line Width (for graphs only)—Width for the selected curve (series).
– Symbol (for graphs only)—Data point symbol to use for the selected curve
(series).
• Save as Default—Place a check mark in this box to save the current legend
settings as the default for subsequent graphs.
13.11 Status Log

Several commands generate a status log showing the results of that command. For
instance, a status log is displayed when you calculate a scenario using the GO button.
The status information is displayed at the top of the dialog box. The dialog box
contains the following buttons:
• Save—Export the status log results as an ASCII file.

• Print or Print Preview—Print or preview the status log results.

Status Log
• Close—Close the status log dialog box after design calculations.

• Help—Access context-sensitive online help.

Chapter
Engineering Libraries 14
The Haestad Methods’ Engineering Libraries and Library Managers are powerful and
flexible facilities for managing specifications of common materials, objects, or
components that are shared across projects. Some examples of objects that are speci-
fied through engineering libraries include pipe materials, pipe sections (in StormCAD
and SewerCAD), and sanitary loads (in SewerCAD only). You can modify engi-
neering libraries and the objects they contain by using the Tools > Engineering
Libraries option, or by clicking the Ellipsis (...) buttons available next to the fields in
dialog boxes that make use of library objects.
The data for each engineering library is stored in a tabular ASCII file with the exten-
sion .HLB.
Tip: We strongly recommend that you only edit these files using the
built-in facilities available by selecting Tools > Engineering
Libraries. If absolutely necessary, these library files may be
edited or repaired using any ASCII editor.
The standard set of engineering libraries shipped with your Haestad Methods product
resides in the product’s program directory. By default, each project you create will use
the objects in these default libraries. In special circumstances, you may wish to create
custom libraries to use with one or more projects. You can do this by copying a stan-
dard library or by creating a new library and setting the path in the Engineering
Library Manager to the path for the custom library.
When you change the properties for an object in an engineering library, those changes
will affect all projects that use that library object. At the time a project is loaded, all of
its engineering library objects are synchronized to the current library. Objects are
synchronized based on their label. If the label is the same, then the object’s values will
be made the same. If any library referenced in a Library Manager path cannot be
found at the location specified, then the standard library in the program directory will
be used. Once a project is created, it is not necessary to have access to the engineering
library in order for that project to be edited or analyzed.

Engineering Library Manager
14.1 Engineering Library Manager

The Engineering Library Manager dialog box consists of a table of two columns and
three buttons. In the table section, there is one row for each kind of engineering library
used in your project. You cannot create library types other than the types found in the
set of standard libraries shipped with the product. The columns in the table are as
follows:
• Library—This column lists the kind of object stored in the referenced library.
• Path—This column lists the path to the library to be used for objects of a certain
kind within the current project. By default, the path will reference the standard
library shipped with your Haestad Methods product. To browse for other libraries
of the same type that you may have already created, select the library, and click
the Browse column.
The buttons will perform their respective actions for the row that is currently high-
lighted. These buttons are as follows:
Note: Most users do not need to create custom libraries or edit the
library paths. You only need to change path values if you wish to
create and use custom libraries.
• Browse—Click this button if you wish to search your computer or network and
locate other engineering libraries. To reference a library in the path field, the
library must already exist. To create it you may copy a standard library using
Windows File Manager or Explorer, or click New as described below.
• Edit—Click this button if you wish to add, delete, or edit the objects within a
specific kind of engineering library.
• New—Click this button if you wish to create a new library.
14.2 WaterCAD Engineering Library Modules

WaterCAD makes use of the following library modules:
• “Material Properties” on page 14-565

• “Minor Loss Properties” on page 14-566
• “Liquid Properties” on page 14-567
• “Constituent Properties” on page 14-568

Engineering Libraries
14.2.1 Engineering Library Editor
The engineering library editor is where you add, delete, or edit the objects within a
specific kind of engineering library. To access the engineering library editor, select the
appropriate library and click Edit. The Engineering Library Editor dialog box consists
of a table with two columns:
• Label—This column contains a textual description of the object. In general,

objects are considered to be the same if their labels are the same. For example,
when a project is loaded, the engineering library objects are synchronized to the
current library based on label.
• Available in—This column contains a check box indicating whether the library
object on the given row is enabled for use by this application. If an object is
enabled, it will appear in choice lists as a candidate for use in the project. If an
object is disabled, it will remain in the library and be editable, but it will not be
offered as a candidate for any operations in the program. If a disabled object has
already been used in a project, then it will remain in use. Disabling it will not
affect the existing project in any way.
The following command buttons appear on the Engineering Library dialog box:
• Insert—Insert a new, unlabeled object into the current library. You must then
click the Edit button to edit the label and add the appropriate values before the
library will be valid. Library objects will be sorted by label in ascending alphabet-
ical order the next time you open the Engineering Library Editor dialog box.
• Duplicate—Create a copy of the currently highlighted library object.
• Delete—Delete the object represented by the highlighted row. Note that this
command always deletes objects from the library, but never deletes an object from
your current project if it is in use. To change the library object that is currently in
use by a project, proceed to the dialog box containing the field where the library
object is referenced and select a different library object.
• Edit—Access the object properties editor.
• Usage—Use this button to specify specific uses for the material. (This only
applies to the material engineering library.)
Material Properties
A customizable library of materials is provided. Materials provide the pipe or channel
with a default value for the roughness coefficient used in the friction equations. There-
fore, a material must be defined with the following properties:
• Label—Name of the material as it will appear in material selection lists.

WaterCAD Engineering Library Modules
• Culvert Inlet Material Type—Limits the type of culvert inlets that are available
when the material is used as the culvert material (used in CulvertMaster). The
inclusion of this property allows the sharing of libraries among Haestad Methods’
products.
• Manning’s Coefficient—Default value for Manning’s n. This is a number gener-
ally between 0.009 and 0.300. For more information, see “Manning’s Equation”
on page B-731.
• Roughness Height—Default value for absolute roughness height. This will be
used in conjunction with the Darcy-Weisbach friction equation. The roughness
height has units of length, typically mm or ft. For more information, see “Darcy-
Weisbach Equation” on page B-729.
• Kutter’s n Coefficient (StormCAD and SewerCAD)—Default value for
Kutter’s formula. This is a unitless number generally between 0.009 and 0.300.
• C Coefficient—Default value for Hazen William’s C. This is a unitless number
generally between 60 and 150. For more information, see “Hazen-Williams Equa-
tion” on page B-729.
The check boxes next to each item specify whether the friction method will be avail-
able for the material. For example, some materials, such as asphalt, only have
Manning’s n values defined.
Usage
This dialog box only applies to the Material Library. Usage is what specifies the type
of section or pipe that will be available for each material. Use the following
commands to select which sections you would like to be available for each material:
[ > ]: Adds the selected items from the Available Items list
to the Selected Items list.
[ >> ]: Adds all of the items in the Available Items list to the
Selected Items list.
[ < ]: Removes the selected items from the Selected Items
list.
[ << ]: Removes all items from the Selected Items list.
Minor Loss Properties

An editable library of minor losses is provided. Minor losses are used on pressure
pipes and valves to model headlosses due to pipe fittings or obstructions to the flow. A
minor loss is defined with the following properties:
• Label—Name of the minor loss as it will appear in choice lists.

• Type—General type of fitting or loss element. This field is used to limit the
number of minor loss elements available in choice lists. For example, the minor
loss choice list on the valve dialog box only includes minor losses of type valve.
You cannot add or delete types.
• K Coefficient—Headloss coefficient for the minor loss. This unitless number
represents the ratio of the headloss across the minor loss element to the velocity
head of the flow through the element.
Liquid Properties
An editable library of liquids is provided. All hydraulic or hydrologic networks trans-
port a particular liquid. Liquids are defined with the following properties:
Note: Certain friction methods (i.e., Manning’s, Hazen William’s) were

developed experimentally, and are only applicable to water at
room temperature (20°C/68°F). WaterCAD will prompt you to
confirm any choice you make that is inconsistent with the
chosen friction method, but it will not prevent you from using
the liquid properties you chose.
Use Tools > Options to specify the liquid to be modeled in the

Project Options dialog box.
• Liquid Label—Name of the liquid as it will appear in choice lists.

• Kinematic Viscosity—Ratio of the liquid’s dynamic, or absolute, viscosity to its
mass density. This is a common parameter in fluid mechanics. The units of kine-
matic viscosity are length squared per unit time (typically m2/sec. or ft.2/sec.).
• Specific Gravity—Ratio of the specific weight of the liquid to the specific weight
of water at 4°C (39°F). Specific gravity is a unitless number.
• Temperature—Reference temperature for the liquid. This is required because the
two parameters listed above are generally a function of the temperature, however
this has no effect on the calculations. The default temperature for new liquids is
room temperature (20°C/68°F).

Constituent Properties
An editable library of constituents is provided. Constituents are used in water quality
analyses where the tracking of the growth or decay of a constituent is desired. The
Constituent dialog box contains the following two tabs:
Note: The constituent library shipped by Haestad Methods includes a

single constituent labeled Constituent. The values for this
constituent do not correspond to anything in particular. It is not
intended that you use this constituent for an actual analysis, but
it was provided as a starting point for the library.
A negative value for the reaction rate constant indicates

constituent decay, and a positive value indicates constituent
growth.
• General Tab—This tab allows you to input general constituent properties, such as
the name of the constituent, diffusivity, and concentration. For more information,
see “General Tab” on page 14-568.
• Reaction Rates Tab—This tab allows you to input the reaction order and reaction
rate for Bulk and Wall reactions. For more information, see “Reaction Rates Tab”
on page 14-569.
General Tab
Constituents are defined with the following general properties:
• Label—Name of the constituent as it will appear in choice lists.

• Diffusivity—Molecular diffusivity of the constituent. This value is only used
when pipe wall reactions are considered in the water quality analysis. Diffusivity
has units of length squared per unit time (typically m2/s or ft.2/s).
• Unlimited Concentration—Check this box if the constituent does not have a
limiting concentration or potential. If this box is checked, the Concentration Limit
field will not be available for editing. If it is not checked, the Concentration Limit
field is applicable. This box will typically be checked, but certain constituents,
such as trihalomethanes (THMs), have a limiting concentration or formation
potential that needs to be modeled.
• Concentration Limit—Limiting concentration or potential for the constituent.
When a concentration limit is given, reaction rates will be proportional to the
difference of the current concentration and the concentration limit. Concentration
limit has units of mass per unit volume (typically mg/l or lbs./million gal.)

Reaction Rates Tab
The water quality module of WaterCAD can track the growth or decay of a substance
by reaction as it travels through a distribution system. In order to do this it needs to
know the rate at which the substance reacts and how this rate might depend on
substance concentration. Reactions can occur both within the bulk flow and with
material along the pipe wall. Bulk fluid reactions can also occur within tanks.
WaterCAD allows a modeler to use different reaction rates for the two zones of reac-
tion. This tab allows you to input the reaction order and reaction rate for Bulk and
Wall reactions. This tab is divided into two sections:
• Bulk Reaction Section—Bulk flow reactions are reactions that occur in the main
flow stream of a pipe or in a storage tank, unaffected by any processes that might
involve the pipe wall. The following input fields are available in this section:
– Order—This value is used to set the order of reactions occurring in the bulk
fluid. WaterCAD is capable of modeling nth order reactions.
– Bulk Reaction Rate—Default bulk reaction rate coefficient assigned to all
pipes. Use a positive number for growth, a negative number for decay, or 0 if
no bulk reaction occurs.
• Wall Reaction Section—Wall reactions are reactions that occur with material on
or near the pipe wall. The rate of this reaction can be considered to be dependent
on the concentration in the bulk flow. The following components comprise this
section:
– Order—This value is used to set the order of reactions occurring at the pipe
wall. The value can be 0 or 1.
– Roughness Correlated—This check box will make all pipe wall reaction
coefficients dependent on pipe roughness.
– Wall Reaction Rate—This input field is active when the Roughness Corre-
lated check box is clear. This value indicates the wall reaction rate coefficient
assigned to all pipes. Use a positive number for growth, a negative number for
decay, or 0 if no wall reaction occurs. The units used by this field will change
depending on the Order that is specified.
– Correlation Factor—This input field is active when the Roughness Corre-

lated Box is checked. The Correlation Factor is a unitless value that represents
the factor correlating wall reaction coefficient to pipe roughness.


Chapter
Shapefile and 15
Database Connections
Haestad Methods’ GIS/Database Connection feature provides the modeler with the
ability to dynamically exchange data with a variety of applications. You can establish
a connection between your hydraulic model and relational and non-relational database
management systems (RDBMS and DBMS), spreadsheets, and ESRI shapefiles. The
term external file is used to generically refer to any one of these types of files. Where
information pertains to a specific type of external file, that type will be used.
The GIS/Database Connection system is extremely powerful. It can be used to update

hundreds or thousands of database records with a few clicks of the mouse. This
section provides detailed information on the structure and behavior of the system so
that it can be used more effectively.
The purpose of the GIS/Database Connection system is to provide you with a safe and
convenient means of exchanging data with external files. This system has several
advantages over providing an open file format for direct manipulation by the end user.
Generality—Open file formats have a specific form that must be adhered to. This
restrictiveness is problematic for both the developer and the end user. Developers are
now under additional constraints when modifying the software. They must be cogni-
zant of the fact that users may depend on this format, and are therefore less free to
modify it. The end user, on the other hand, has no control over this format, and is at
the mercy of the developer. A new version may change the format completely, and all
of your existing data must be converted. In addition, the file format is rarely conve-
nient for an end user since it is typically chosen for efficient processing by the
program. The GIS/Database Connection system allows you to exchange data between
the model and any arbitrarily defined external files. This flexibility allows you to set
up a database or spreadsheet, and it frees the developer to use a file format that is most
efficient for the program.
Data Protection—Open file formats can typically be modified by anyone, often

without the knowledge of the modeler. By providing an interface to exchange data, the
model is protected from inadvertent changes. The modeler is in complete control of
when and how the model or external files are updated.

Type Coercion—Quite often the external files do not store the data using the format
expected by the hydraulic model. For example, a database may store the length of a
pipe using single precision floating point numbers, whereas the model works with
double precision floating point numbers. When exchanging data between the model
and the external file using the GIS/Database Connection system, the data is coerced
from one type to the other automatically.
Unit Conversion—The quantities used in hydraulic models almost always have some
unit associated with them. For example, pipe lengths are typically expressed in meters
or feet. General purpose database and spreadsheet applications do not support the
concept of unitized numbers. A pipe length, for example, is represented as 100.0. Is
that 100.0 meters or 100.0 feet? The GIS/Database Connection interface allows you to
specify the database unit so the numbers can be converted from the model unit to the
database unit and vice versa.
Virtually all model inputs and calculated results can be exchanged through the GIS/
Database Connection system. The system not only supports the update of existing
model elements and external file records, but also the creation and deletion of these
elements and records. For example, by performing a Sync In operation (explained in
detail below), an entire hydraulic model can be built from data stored in a spreadsheet.
Likewise, an empty spreadsheet can be completely populated with data from an
existing hydraulic model by performing a Sync Out operation. The spreadsheet can be
kept synchronized with the hydraulic model over the course of a project as new
elements are added or deleted, and the input and output data is modified.
The GIS/Database Connection system has a three-tiered architecture:
• Connections
• Table or Shapefile Links
• Field Links
The first tier is the Connection. Connections are organized and managed by Connec-
tion Managers. There are two types of Connection Managers: a Database Connection
Manager (see “Database Connection Manager” on page 15-574) and a Shapefile
Connection Manager (see “Shapefile Connection Manager” on page 15-586). As the
names imply, the first manages connections to databases and spreadsheets, and the
second manages connections to ESRI shapefiles. The Connection Managers are
similar, and provide an interface for adding, editing, deleting, duplicating, and
synchronizing Connections.
To exchange data between the model and external files, a Connection must be created
and then synchronized. The two synchronization operations that can be performed on
a Connection are Sync In and Sync Out. Sync In synchronizes the model to the data
contained in external files. In this case, the model acts as a consumer of the data, and
external files act as the data provider. Sync Out synchronizes external files to the data
contained in the model. Thus, for Sync Out, the model is the data provider and

Shapefile and Database Connections
external files are the consumers. Exactly what data is exchanged during synchroniza-
tion depends on how the Connection is defined. Intuitively, a Connection must specify
which files are to be connected to the model, and what data in each file is to be
exchanged.
The second tier is the Table or Shapefile Link. A Database Connection uses these links
to gather and store information. Each Connection can contain one or more Table or
Shapefile Links. Each of these links specifies the type of external file with which to
exchange data (implied with shapefile links), the name of the file, and, if the file
contains multiple tables, which table within the file is of interest.
The third tier of the system is the Field Link. Each Table or Shapefile Link uses one or
more Field Links to specify exactly what data in the external file is going to be
exchanged. A Field Link defines the fundamental mapping between a field in an
external file and a field in the model. For example, a field link may be used to map the
GRND_FT field of an external database file to the Ground Elevation attribute of the
model.
In summary, a Connection defines a link between the model and external files. Table
or Shapefile Links and Field Links are used to specify files, tables, and fields to be
linked. Once a Connection is created, it can be synchronized in or out. The synchroni-
zation action will update models (“in” direction) or the external files (“out” direction).
The rest of this section provides details on the dialog boxes and windows used to
interact with the GIS/Database Connection system. Although Database Connections
and Shapefile Connections are similar in concept, there are differences in the inter-
faces and options. Therefore, they will be discussed in separate sections.
15.1 Database Connections

Database connections includes:
• “Database Connection Manager” on page 15-574

• “Standard Database Import/Export” on page 15-575
• “Database Connection Editor” on page 15-577
• “ODBC” on page 15-581
• “Sharing Database Connections between Projects” on page 15-584
• “Database Connection Example” on page 15-585

15.1.1 Database Connection Manager
This manager, accessed by selecting File > Synchronize > Database Connections,
helps you track and work with database connections. On the left side of this dialog box
is a list of the current Database Connections.
There are several options available in the Database Connection Manager, including:
• Add—Creates a new database connection using the Database Connection Editor.

For more information, see “Shapefile Connection Editor” on page 15-587.
• Edit—Changes the configuration of the currently selected connection. This will
open the Database Connection Editor, where you can rename the connection,
change the associated database files, and perform other changes to the connection
configuration.
• Duplicate—Creates a connection identical to the selected one. This feature is
very helpful when defining two or more connections with many similar attributes.
• Delete—Removes the selected connection from the list.
• Synchronize In—Updates the network attributes from the databases defined in
the selected connection.
• Synchronize Out—Updates all databases in the connection from the current
status of the model.
• Reset—Returns the highlighted standard database import or export connection to
default settings. For more information, see “Standard Database Import/Export” on
page 15-575.
Tip: If you do not want your input values overwritten upon

synchronizing out, duplicate the connection. Then, edit one
connection such that it includes only the values you want to
synchronize in, and one that includes only the values you want
to synchronize out.
When synchronizing out, be sure that the model element labels

are of the same data type as the database column to which you
are mapping. Otherwise, synchronizing out to the database will
yield erroneous results. For example, if you were to synchronize
in from a database where your pipe identifier was numeric, then
any changes or additions to the pipes in the model should also

use a numeric-labeling scheme. To assure the consistency in

type in this case, select Element Labeling from the Tools menu
and remove the appropriate element prefixes before any
changes are made to the model.
When synchronizing in, output fields such as hydraulic grade line or computed pipe
flow will not be updated. If an attempt is made to update an output field during a
Synchronize In operation, a Read Only Warning will be issued in the status log, indi-
cating which attribute could not be updated.
When synchronizing out, all mapped information will be overwritten in the database
files, including input and output conditions.
15.1.2 Standard Database Import/Export
The Database Connection Manager (see “Database Connection Manager” on page 15-
574) is initialized with four standard database connections for importing and
exporting model data using simple File menu commands. These standard connections
are as follows:
• [Project Export - SI]—Used for the File > Export > Database command when the
global unit system is set to System International.
• [Project Export - US]—Used for the File > Export > Database command when the
global unit system is set to US Customary.
• [Project Import - SI]—Used for the File > Import > Database command when the
global unit system is set to System International.
• [Project Import - US]—Used for the File > Import > Database command when the
global unit system is set to US Customary.
The purpose of the standard database connections is to provide a powerful yet easy-to-
use method of exposing the model data to external applications using a standard data-
base format, Microsoft Access database (.MDB). This method is powerful because it
provides you with all the flexibility and functionality of a user-defined database
connection, such as unit conversion and type coercion. It is easy to use because it is
predefined with all of the standard model data, and requires nothing more than a file
name to execute.
The standard database connections are almost identical to user-defined database

connections with the following exceptions:
• Standard connections cannot be deleted.

• The label of a standard database connection cannot be changed.

• The target database for a standard database connection is determined at the time it
is synchronized. During a Synchronize In operation, you will be prompted to
choose an existing Microsoft Access Database (.MDB). During a Synchronize
Out, you will be prompted for the name of a new Access database. If an existing
filename is chosen, a warning will indicate that the existing file will be over-
written.
• The field names of the external database tables are editable from within the Table
Link Editor (for more information, see “Database Table Link Editor” on page 15-
579).
• The Database Type on the Table Link Editor cannot be changed.
• Standard connections can be reset to their factory default values. To do this, select
a standard connection from the list in the Database Connection Manager, and click
the Reset button.
By default, the standard database connections include a table link for each element
type, and field links for all the attributes related to that element type, with some minor
exceptions. The default units for the specified unit system (SI or US) are used for unit-
ized attributes. The Key Label field is designated as the key field for each of the table
links, and it is created as an index for the table during database creation. No duplicates
are allowed.
As noted above, the field links external field names can be edited directly within the
Table Link Editor. It is valid to have more than one internal attribute mapped to a
single external field name. Although this is not the case for the standard connections
in their factory default state, you can create this condition. Under this condition, the
following behaviors will be observed:
• Import (Synchronize In)—All of the attributes will be populated with the value
of the database field if it is a valid value for the specified attributes.
• Export (Synchronize Out)—The database field will be populated with the last
non-blank attribute value.

Note: If an existing filename is chosen during export, the existing

database file will be overwritten. Therefore, any custom tables,
queries, or forms present in that database will be lost.
Model data that are typically a collection of data (e.g., SewerCAD

unit sanitary loads, StormCAD watershed areas and rational C
coefficients, and WaterCAD junction demands) cannot be written
to a single record, and are therefore not exported to the
database. However, if these collections only contain a single
item, that single item will be transferred to and from the
database during export and import.
By default, the Standard Database Export creates Microsoft Office 2000 Access files.
These files cannot be read with Office 97. If you want to use Office 97, you need to
use a text editor to edit the HAESTAD.INI file located in your HAESTAD directory,
and replace the line:
ConnectionDatabaseFormat=0
with:
ConnectionDatabaseFormat=3
Basically, a value of 3 results in the program creating an Office 97 Access file,

whereas a value of 0 will have the program generate an Office 2000 Access file.
15.1.3 Database Connection Editor
The Database Connection Editor is used for defining the group of table links to be
included in the connection. The Database Connection Editor has tabs for Database
Connection (see “Database Connection Tab” on page 15-578) and Synchronization
Options (see “Synchronization Options Tab” on page 15-579).
There are three standard operation buttons at the bottom of the dialog box:
• OK—Accepts the current condition of the connection, including any changes that
have been made.
• Cancel—Closes the Database Connection Editor without saving any changes.
• Help—Opens the context-sensitive help system.

Database Connection Tab

The Database Connection tab of the Database Connection Editor (see “Database
Connection Editor” on page 15-577) provides an interface for the standard attributes
of a connection. It contains the following:
• Connection Label—A required unique alphanumeric identification for the

connection. This is the label that appears in the list on the Database Connection
Manager dialog box (for more information, see “Database Connection Manager”
on page 15-574).
• Table Links—Provide basic information about each table link, such as the refer-
enced database file, the specific table within the database, and the type of table
that is referenced. A table link can be highlighted from the list, at which point the
following commands can be performed using the buttons on the right side of the
dialog box (for more information, see “Database Table Link Editor” on page 15-
579):
– Add—Adds a new table link. If there are no table links currently defined for
this connection, this will be the only button available.
– Edit—Changes the characteristics of the selected table link, such as the refer-
enced file or table, or the mapping of the table’s field links.
– Duplicate—Duplicates the selected table. This command is very helpful
when defining two or more table links with similar attributes.
– Delete—Deletes the selected table link from the connection.

Synchronization Options Tab

The Synchronization Options tab of the Database Connection Editor (see “Database
Connection Editor” on page 15-577) provides an interface for some of the behaviors
of the connection. These options cannot be accessed until the Table Links are defined,
and are as follows:
Note: In order to be successfully created from the database, pipe

elements must have a Start and Stop node associated with them.
This association can be established by mapping the ‘+ Start
Node’ and ‘+ Stop Node’ attributes in the pipe table link, or by
the ‘+ In Link’ or ‘+ Out Link’ of a node table link. Mapping both
the pipe table and node table attributes may result in the reading
of redundant data causing the connection to fail.
By default, elements created from a database are located at

coordinate (0,0). This behavior can be overridden by mapping
the X and Y or Northing and Easting attributes of the node
elements.
• Add objects to destination if present in source—If this option is selected, when

performing a Synchronize Out for example, elements that are present in the model
but are not found in the database file will be created in the database. If this is not
checked, only the elements that are present in both the model and the database
will be updated.
• Prompt before adding object—If this is checked, you will get a dialog box noti-
fying you of each unmapped element in the source, and asking if you would like
to create a new element in the destination. If this is not checked, the additional
elements will be automatically created in the database.
• Remove objects from destination if missing from source—If this is checked
when synchronizing out, elements that are present in the database but not in the
model will be deleted from the database. If this is not checked, the unmapped
elements will be ignored.
• Prompt before remove—When this box is checked a dialog box will appear noti-
fying you of each unmapped element in the destination and asking if you would
like to remove that element. If the box is not checked, the additional elements will
be automatically removed from the database.
Database Table Link Editor

The Table Link Editor is a tool for defining or modifying a table link. This dialog box
is separated into two groups, one dealing with the file and table information, and the
other dealing with the field links (attribute mapping).
The general table link information includes:

• Database Type—Type of database to which the link will be made. There are
many types of external files that can be linked into the model. Among these are
Btrieve, Dbase, Excel, FoxPro, Jet (.MDB files, such as Access), Lotus, and
Paradox, as well as Oracle, Sybase, SQL Server, or any other Open Database
Connectivity (ODBC) compliant database.
• Database File—File referenced by the table link. To browse directories and
specify a file path, click the Ellipsis (...) button.
• Database Table—Once the external file has been selected, it will be scanned for
tables (or worksheets), which will then be available for selection from this field.
Only one table can be linked for each table link, but table links can be easily
duplicated and edited from the Database Connection Editor (for more informa-
tion, see “Database Connection Editor” on page 15-577).
• Table Type—Defines the type of data that can be mapped for this particular table
link. For example, a Pipe type of table link means that the available model
attributes to be mapped are items such as material, roughness coefficient, flow
rate, and velocity.
• Key\Label Field—Key by which the entire database-model mapping is defined.
The model references each element by a unique alphanumeric label, and the data-
base must contain the same labels in one of the columns. If the key field for you
data type is numeric, you will want to be sure that your model labels include
numbers only. Make sure that there are no duplicate element labels/keys within
the data source.
The Field Links group is a manager for the attribute mapping. The tabular list in this
group has three field columns:
• Model—Each item in this column is an attribute in the model that is being

mapped to the database. The list of available attributes depends on the type of the
table.
Note: Clicking the button in the Field Links cell will open the
Quick Attribute Selector (for more information, see “Quick
Attribute Selector” on page 2-56). This will allow you select
attributes from organized categories to more easily find needed
attributes.
• Database—Each item in this column is a heading from the database table, which
correlates to the item in the model being mapped.
• Unit—This column defines the units of the values in the database. During a
synchronization operation, the values will automatically be converted to the
appropriate units to maintain the desired unit systems in both the model and the
database. No conversion on your part is required.

In addition to the standard table operations of Insert, Duplicate, and Delete, the Field
Links Manager offers the following additional operation:
• Select—Opens the Select Field Links dialog box (see “Select Field Links” on
page 15-581) for an efficient method of selecting the fields of interest from the
available model fields.
Select Field Links

The Select Field Links dialog box provides an easy-to-use interface for populating the
Field Links group of the Table Link Editor (see “Database Table Link Editor” on
page 15-579) or Shapefile Link Editor (see “Import Shapefile Link Editor” on
page 15-591).
The dialog box contains two lists:
• Available Items—Model attributes that are available for mapping in the current
Table or Shapefile Link.
• Selected Items—Model attributes that have been selected for mapping.
The following buttons are provided to move items from one list to the other:
Note: The Select Field Links dialog box provides functions similar to
the Table Setup dialog box. For more information on topics such
as selecting multiple attributes, see “Selected Table Columns” on
page 7-333).
• [>]—Moves the selected item or items from the Available Items list to the
Selected Items list.
• [>>]—Moves all items from the Available Items list to the Selected Items list.
• [<]—Moves the selected item or items from the Selected Items list to the Avail-
able Items list.
• [<<]—Moves all items from the Items Selected list to the Available Items list.
15.1.4 ODBC
ODBC, which stands for Open Database Connectivity, is a standard programming

interface developed by Microsoft for accessing data in relational and non-relational
database management systems (DBMS). Using ODBC, applications such as Haestad
Methods’ engineering software can access data stored in many different PC, minicom-
puter, and mainframe DBMS, even though each uses a different storage format and
programming interface.
The ODBC architecture conceptually consists of three parts:

• The application program—The Haestad Methods product.

• The Data Source Administrator Program—Embedded in Microsoft Windows.
• The low-level drivers for accessing specific databases—Supplied by your data-
base vendor.
Although most computers with Windows will have ODBC present, the exact data-
bases you can interface via ODBC will depend on the databases and drivers installed
on your computer.
ODBC is powerful because it is generic and can access many database systems,
including mainframe, GIS, and legacy systems. However, because ODBC must be
general, it is slower, more complex, and more difficult to use than working directly
with a database. When you have the option to work directly with a database, you will
usually find it faster and easier than going through ODBC.
For specific information about ODBC in your environment, see your database
vendor’s documentation. For general information on ODBC, see the online help for
the ODBC Data Source Administrator Program. To find the Administrator Program,
go to the Control Panel of your computer and double-click the ODBC icon. Choose
the Help button on the dialog box that appears, and go to the Contents tab.
ODBC Database Type

The first field of the database connection Table Link Editor (see “Database Table Link
Editor” on page 15-579) is the Database Type. The list box displays the external data-
bases and versions supported by the Database Connection feature. One of the Data-
base Types you can select is ODBC. This does not refer to a specific database or
version. It is actually a link to the ODBC Data Source Administrator Program running
on your computer. This link will provide an interface between the Haestad Methods’
Database Connection and a specific DBMS and source database file.
ODBC Database File

If you have selected ODBC as the Database Type, when you click the Ellipsis (...)
button next to the Database File field the ODBC Data Source Administrator Program
will take over and offer a list of the ODBC data sources installed on your computer.
Depending on how your computer is configured, you may see database systems or
actual database files from which to choose.

Note: You will also see database systems such as Microsoft Jet or
Excel that are supported directly via choices in the Database
Type list. In general, the Database Connection feature will work
faster by choosing these database systems directly rather than
going through ODBC.
If you are unable to successfully synchronize to the data source

using the default form of the ODBC string, it is possible that you
may need to add some parameters to the string that are specific
to your environment. See your database vendor’s ODBC
documentation for details.
If you choose a data source from the Administrator Program, upon returning to the
Table Link Editor (see “Database Table Link Editor” on page 15-579) you will see an
ODBC connect string in the Database File field, rather than a file path. This connect
string is a series of key = value pairs, separated by semicolons. It specifies the data-
base location, security parameters, and access options needed by the particular ODBC
driver you are using. In general, you should not edit this string in any way as you
could introduce an error that would prevent the ODBC driver from accessing the data
source you have selected.
Synchronizing Via ODBC

Once you have successfully created and entered the data for a database connection
that uses ODBC, the Synchronize In and Synchronize Out operations perform as they
do for any other database format. However, ODBC databases are accessed with
slightly different internal mechanisms, and thus may generate different error condi-
tions. If synchronization fails to complete, see the status log for error messages. Note
the project or database object the program was processing when the error occurred.
See to your database vendor’s documentation for detailed information on any errors
reported.
Using ODBC to access SQL Server databases will result in an error #3197 if the
synchronization attempts to delete a database record. To avoid this error, clear
Remove Objects on the Synchronization Options tab of the Database Connection
Editor (for more information, see “Database Connection Editor” on page 15-577).
ODBC Database Tables and Fields

There are many complexities in successfully accessing ODBC databases. You will
know if there are problems on your machine because the Database Table or other data-
base-related fields will not have any entries in the associated drop-down lists.
If this happens, confirm that ODBC is installed and operating correctly on your
computer. Double-check that the ODBC data source you are trying to reference actu-
ally exists and is accessible by other programs in your environment. Check the
HAESTAD.LOG file for error messages pertaining to ODBC. If none of these steps
helps you correct the problem, please call Haestad Methods’ Technical Support.

Given the diversity of ODBC database drivers and the difficulty of reproducing your
networked computing environment, we cannot guarantee that the Database Connec-
tion feature will function with all ODBC databases. However, we will try to determine
the source of your problem and offer a fix or workaround if possible.
If you edit the connect string manually, you will need to re-enter the dependent fields
such as Database Table and Field Links.
15.1.5 Sharing Database Connections between Projects
When WaterCAD works with database connections, it is using a file with an .HDC
extension, which stores the information regarding database files, table links, and field
mapping.
When you open a WaterCAD project file (.WCD), WaterCAD first looks for a file in
the same directory and with the same filename but with the .HDC extension. If it finds
this file, it uses the database connectivity information contained therein. If it does not
find this file, then it defaults to a file in the installed WaterCAD directory called
Wtrc.HDC.
Sharing Database Connections between Projects

If you are working on a local drive and you have several project files, all of which
reference common Connection information, let your project files automatically default
to the Wtrc.HDC file. Any connectivity changes that you work on in one project will
be automatically reflected when you open any other project.
If there are several people working on different projects on different computers, but
they still wish to have common connectivity information, the appropriate .HDC file
can be copied (and renamed if necessary) to the individual local drives.
Preventing Database Connectivity Sharing between Projects

There are times when shared connectivity can be more cumbersome than helpful, such
as when there are many projects, each with different database connectivity. At these
times, it is more useful to have the connectivity associated with one specific project
rather than with all projects. To do this, copy the Wtrc.HDC file from the installed
WaterCAD directory to the same location as your project file, and rename it to the
same name as your .WCD file.
For example, if your WaterCAD project file is PROJECT1.WCD, rename Wtrc.HDC

to PROJECT1.HDC. The connections in PROJECT1.WCD can then be modified
without the effects being reflected in any other projects.

15.1.6 Database Connection Example
To connect your model to an external file, take the following steps:
From the File menu, select Synchronize > Database Connections to open the Data-
base Connection Manager. Click Add.
• In the Database Connection Editor (see “Database Connection Editor” on

page 15-577), type a label for your Connection.
• Click Add to create a new table link. This will take you to the Table Link Editor
(for more information, see “Database Table Link Editor” on page 15-579).
• Select the type of file to which you would like to link, and then click the Ellipsis
(...) button to browse for and select your database file.
• Choose the table to which you would like to link, and the type of table.
• Choose the Key\Label field to define the column in the database that contains the
labels of the elements to be synchronized.
• Define as many field links as you want by selecting the model attribute and the
associated database column and unit.
• Click OK to exit the Table Link Editor.
• Click OK again to exit the Database Connection Editor.
• You should be back at the Database Connection Manager. You can leave this
dialog box and return to the model, or you can choose to Synchronize In to the
model from the database, or Synchronize Out to the database from the model.
Click OK to save changes and exit back to the model. Click Cancel exit back to
the model without saving changes.
15.2 Shapefile Connections

Shapefile connections includes:
• “Shapefile Connection Manager” on page 15-586

• “Shapefile Connection Editor” on page 15-587
• “Shapefile Link Wizard” on page 15-588

Shapefile Connections
15.2.1 Shapefile Connection Manager
Note: For a general discussion of Shapefile Connections, see

“Shapefile and Database Connections” on page 15-571.
This manager is identical to the Database Connection Manager (see “Database

Connection Manager” on page 15-574), except that it helps you to track and work
with shapefile connections rather than database connections. Only a brief description
of each dialog box control is presented here. For more information, see “Database
Connection Manager” on page 15-574.
• Add—Creates a new shapefile connection. This will open the Shapefile Connec-
tion Wizard (for more information, see “Shapefile Connection Wizard” on
page 15-586).
• Edit—Changes the configuration of the currently selected connection. This will
open the Shapefile Connection Editor (for more information, see “Shapefile
Connection Editor” on page 15-587).
• Duplicate—Duplicates the selected connection.
• Delete—Deletes the selected connection from the list.
• Synchronize In—Updates the network attributes from the shapefiles linked to the
selected connection.
• Synchronize Out—Updates all shapefiles within the connection from the current
status of the model.
Shapefile Connection Wizard

The Shapefile Connection Wizard provides an easy-to-use interface for defining a new
Shapefile Connection. It is similar to the Shapefile Import Wizard (see “Import Shape-
file Wizard” on page 15-589), but has a few additional steps. The major steps in the
wizard are as follows:
• Label—Enters an alphanumeric label to uniquely identify the Shapefile Connec-

tion. For more information, see “Shapefile Connection Label” on page 15-587.
• Select Element Types—Chooses the types of network elements you wish to
connect to shapefiles.
• Shapefile Synchronization Options—Specifies the spatial data unit, and config-
ures other options.
• Import Shapefile Link Editor—Chooses the shapefile to which you want to
connect and specifies the details of the link.
• Synchronize Now—Choose whether you want to synchronize the Shapefile
Connection when finished with the wizard. You can choose to synchronize in
either direction. For more information, see “Synchronize Now?” on page 15-587.

Shapefile Connection Label

The Shapefile Connection Label window allows you to enter a unique alphanumeric
label for your Shapefile Connection. This window is presented in the Import and
Export Shapefile Connection Wizards (see “Import Shapefile Wizard” on page 15-589
and “Export Shapefile Wizard” on page 15-593), as well as the Shapefile Connection
Wizard (see “Shapefile Connection Wizard” on page 15-586).
Synchronize Now?
The last step in the Shapefile Connection Wizard (see “Shapefile Connection Wizard”
on page 15-586), the Synchronize Now? Window, allows you to specify whether you
wish to synchronize the Shapefile Connection immediately after editing it in the
wizard. The following options are available:
• Synchronize Shapefile Connection—Check this box if you wish to synchronize

the connection immediately upon clicking the Finished button. By default this
check box is selected; if you clear it, you will return to the Shapefile Connection
Manager (see “Shapefile Connection Manager” on page 15-586) after clicking the
Finished button.
• In—Select this button if you wish to synchronize the connection in to the model.
This will update the model data from the shapefiles linked to the connection.
• Out—Select this button if you wish to synchronize the connection out to the
shapefiles linked to the connection. This will update the shapefiles from the
model.
15.2.2 Shapefile Connection Editor
The Shapefile Connection Editor is similar to the Database Connection Editor (for
more information, see “Database Connection Editor” on page 15-577). It offers the
tabs for Shapefile Connection and Synchronization Options.
To use the Shapefile Connection Editor, do the following:
• Select Synchronize > Shapefile Connections from the File menu.

• If you do not currently have any shapefile connections defined, you will be
prompted to indicate if you wish to create one now. If you answer Yes, you will be
automatically taken to the Shapefile Connection Wizard (for more information,
see “Shapefile Connection Wizard” on page 15-586).
• If there are connections already defined, or if you answer No to the prompt to
create one now, you will be taken to the Shapefile Connection Manager (for more
information, see “Shapefile Connection Manager” on page 15-586). Select Edit to
open the Shapefile Connection Editor.

Shapefile Connection
The Shapefile Connection tab of the Shapefile Connection Editor is similar to the
Database Connection tab of the Database Connection Editor (for more information,
see “Database Connection Editor” on page 15-577). It contains the following:
• Connection Label—A unique alphanumeric identification for the connection.

This is the label that appears in the list on the Shapefile Connection Manager
dialog box (for more information, see “Shapefile Connection Manager” on
page 15-586).
• Table Links—List that provides basic information about each Shapefile link,
such as the referenced Shapefile, the feature type of the shapefile, and the type of
element that is referenced. As with the other managers, a shapefile link can be
highlighted from the list, at which point the following commands can be
performed using the buttons on the right side of the dialog box:
– Add—Defines a new shapefile link. If there are no table links currently
defined for this connection, this will be the only button available. Clicking
this button invokes the Shapefile Link Wizard (for more information, see
“Shapefile Link Wizard” on page 15-588).
– Edit—Changes the characteristics of the selected shapefile link, such as the
referenced file or the mapping of the shapefile’s field links. Clicking this
button also invokes the Shapefile Link Wizard.
– Duplicate—Creates an identical shapefile link to the selected one. This is
very helpful when defining two or more shapefile links with similar attributes.
– Delete—Removes the selected shapefile link from the connection.
15.2.3 Shapefile Link Wizard
The Shapefile Link Wizard is used when adding new Shapefile Links to a Shapefile
Connection, or when editing the existing links of a Shapefile Connection. The first
step of the wizard is bypassed when editing an existing link. The basic steps of the
wizard are as follows:
• Select Element Type—Similar to the Select Element Types window for

importing shapefiles, except that buttons are used rather than check boxes. This is
because a Shapefile Connection represents a single element type. For more infor-
mation, see “Select Element Types” on page 15-590.

• Import Shapefile—Choose the shapefile to which you would like to connect, and
the Key/Label field to specify the column in the shapefile that contains the
matching element labels in the network. Define as many field links as necessary.
For each link, specify the model attribute, the associated shapefile column, and
the Unit in which the shapefile attribute is stored. For more information, see
“Import Shapefile Link Editor” on page 15-591.
• Shapefile Link Summary—Quick review of the details specified in the wizard.
For more information, see “Shapefile Link Summary” on page 15-589.
As with all wizards, you can move forward or backward through the process to make
changes. Click the Finished button when you are done making changes to the Shape-
file Link.
Shapefile Link Summary

The Shapefile Link Summary window provides an opportunity to review the details of
the Shapefile Link before completing the editing process. The following information
is provided in the summary window:
• Type—Type of element represented by this Shapefile Link.

• Shapefile—Full path and file name of the shapefile referenced by this Shapefile
Link.
• Key/Label Field—Shapefile field used to map shapefile records to their corre-
sponding network elements in the model.
• Attributes Mapped—Number of Field Links mapped in this Shapefile Link.
15.2.4 Import Shapefile Wizard
The Import Shapefile Wizard will guide you step-by-step through the process of
importing ESRI shapefiles (for more information, see “Shapefile Format” on page 15-
596). These are the basic steps for importing shapefiles:
• Select Element Types—Select the type of network elements you wish to import.
For more information, see “Select Element Types” on page 15-590.
• Shapefile Synchronization Options—Specify the spatial data unit and configure
other options. For more information, see “Shapefile Synchronization Options” on
page 15-590.

• Import Shapefile—Browse to and select the shapefiles you would like to import,
and select the Key/Label field to specify the column in the shapefile that contains
the matching element labels in the network. Define as many field links as neces-
sary. For each link, specify the network attribute, the associated shapefile column,
and the Unit in which the shapefile attribute is stored. For more information, see
“Import Shapefile Link Editor” on page 15-591.
• Create Shapefile Connection—Select whether you want to establish a Shapefile
Connection. The Shapefile Connection allows you to update the shapefile with
values from your model, or to update your model from the shapefile. For more
information, see “Create Shapefile Connection” on page 15-592.
While using the wizard, you can move forward or backward through the process to
make changes by clicking the Next and Back buttons. Click the Finished button when
you are done making changes to import shapefiles.
Select Element Types

The Select Element Types window is used for selecting the types of network elements
that are of interest when importing and exporting shapefiles, or when creating a
Shapefile Connection. The window contains a list of network element types with a
check box preceding each type.
To select an element type for Shapefile Import, Export, or Connection, put a check
mark in the corresponding box.
Shapefile Synchronization Options

Several options are available to customize the shapefile synchronization process. The
Shapefile Synchronization Options are available for editing in the Import Shapefile
Wizard or through the Shapefile Connection Editor.
The first group of options is only available when editing a Shapefile Connection.
These options are exactly the same as their counterparts in Database Synchronization
Options (see “Synchronization Options Tab” on page 15-579), and are as follows:
• Prompt before adding object

• Prompt before removing object
Unlike the Database Synchronization Options, the Shapefile Synchronization Options

do not allow for optionally adding or removing elements. When synchronized, shape-
files and the model will contain exactly the same number of records for the specified
element type. For example, suppose a shapefile contains a record for the junction
labeled J-1. When this shapefile is synchronized into the model, the model will auto-
matically add a junction labeled J-1 if none currently exists. Likewise, if J-1 is
removed from the model and then synchronized out to the shapefile, the record for J-1
will automatically be removed from the shapefile. You have no control over this.

The rest of the options are available during the Shapefile Import Wizard or through the
Shapefile Connection Editor.
Shapefile Unit—Choose a unit from the available list. This is the unit of the spatial
data in the shapefile. For example, if the X and Y coordinates of the shapefile repre-
sent feet, choose feet from the list. If they represent meters, select meters. This unit
must be the same for every shapefile in the Shapefile Connection. If you wish to
import shapefiles that have different spatial data units, create a separate connection for
each unit.
When Missing Connectivity Data
As noted in the Table Link Editor (see “Database Table Link Editor” on page 15-579),
to create a pipe from an external file it is necessary for a pipe to have a start node and
stop node associated with it. Typically, these connectivity associations are created by
synchronizing the + Start Node and + Stop Node attributes of the pipe. Since a shape-
file contains spatial data, it is also possible to establish these associations based on the
location of nodes relative to the end points of the pipe. The following options allow
you to customize this behavior:
• Establish By Spatial Data—Check this box to configure the synchronization so

that any missing connectivity data (start node, stop node, or both) for a pipe will
be established from the spatial data if possible.
• Tolerance—This value represents the distance to be searched when trying to
locate nodes for establishing connectivity for a pipe. All nodes within the toler-
ance of a pipe’s end point will be collected, and the closest node will be selected
for connection.
• Create Nodes if None Found—Check this box if you would like nodes to be
created during the synchronization when no nodes are found within the specified
tolerance of a pipe’s end point. If this box is not checked, and no nodes are found
within the tolerance, the pipe will not be created because it has insufficient
connectivity data.
Import Shapefile Link Editor

The Import Shapefile Link Editor is similar to the Database Table Link Editor. For
more information on the following Shapefile Link parameters, see “Database Table
Link Editor” on page 15-579):
• Shapefile—Location of the file that is being referenced by the shapefile link. This
is identical to the Database File parameter of the Table Link Editor.
• Key/Label Field—Key by which the entire shapefile/model mapping is defined.
• Field Links—Identical to the Field Links group of the Database Table Link
Editor.

Create Shapefile Connection

The Create Shapefile Connection window provides an opportunity during a shapefile
import or export to specify that a persistent connection containing the Shapefile Links
and Synchronization Options be created. This connection can be used at a later time to
synchronize the model and the shapefiles. The Create Shapefile Connection window
has the following parameters:
• Add Shapefile Connection—Check this box if you wish to add a persistent

Shapefile Connection to the Shapefile Connection Manager. By default, this box
is checked.
• Label—Specify an alphanumeric label for the connection. This field is only edit-
able when the Add Shapefile Connection box is checked.
Shapefile Import Example

Follow these steps to import one or more shapefiles into a new or existing model:
From the File menu, select Import > Shapefile to access the Import Shapefile Wizard
(for more information, see “Import Shapefile Wizard” on page 15-589).
• Choose the element types that you wish to import by selecting one or more of the
check boxes in the list, and then click the Next button.
• Configure the options for this import. First, select the unit for the spatial data of
the shapefile. Then, if appropriate for your situation, click the Establish by
Spatial Data check box in the When Missing Connectivity Data group, and
enter a value in the Tolerance field. For more information, see “Shapefile
Synchronization Options” on page 15-590. Click the Next button to proceed to the
Shapefile Link Editors.
• You will be presented with an Import Shapefile Link Editor (see “Import Shape-
file Link Editor” on page 15-591) for each element type you choose to import.
Perform the following steps for each Import Shapefile Link Editor:
– Enter the name of the shapefile you wish to import for the specified element
type. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to interactively browse for and select your
shapefile.

– Choose the Key/Label field to define the column in the shapefile that maps to
the element labels in the model.
– Define as many field links as necessary by selecting the model attribute and
the associated shapefile column and unit. Use the Select button for making the
selection process more efficient. Click the Next button.
• Click the Add Shapefile Connection check box if you wish to create a persistent
link between the shapefiles you are importing and the model. If you choose to
create a Shapefile Connection, enter an alphanumeric label to identify the connec-
tion. Click the Finished button to import the shapefiles.
15.2.5 Export Shapefile Wizard
This program has the capability of exporting network elements in the ESRI shapefile
format (for more information, see “Shapefile Format” on page 15-596). The ESRI
shapefile is actually three files that together define the spatial and non-spatial
attributes of a map feature. In the case of Haestad Methods hydraulic models, map
features are network elements (e.g., pipes, junctions). Exporting shapefiles creates
brand new files. If you are exporting a shapefile to a directory that already contains a
shapefile of the same name, the existing shapefile will be completely overwritten. If
you wish to update the shapefile rather than overwriting it, use the Shapefile Connec-
tion feature.
The major components of the Wizard are as follows:
• Select Element Types—Choose the type of network elements you wish to export.
Each type of network element will have its own shapefile associated with it. This
component is identical to the Import Wizard’s Select Element Types component.
For more information, see “Select Element Types” on page 15-590.
• Export Shapefile Link Editor—Enter a name for each shapefile you wish to
create. Each shapefile name must be no more than eight characters in length, and
should not be duplicated. Define as many field links as necessary. For each link,
specify the network attribute. The shapefile variable will default to a preset value,
which can be edited. For more information, see “Export Shapefile Link Editor” on
page 15-594.

Note: The Label attribute is automatically exported to the shapefile

and should not be specified explicitly as one of the defined field
links.
• Create Shapefile Connection—Choose whether you want to establish a Shape-

file Connection for this shapefile. The Shapefile Connection allows you to update
the shapefile with values from your model, or to update your model from the
shapefile. This component is identical to the Import Wizard’s Create Shapefile
Connection component. For more information, see “Create Shapefile Connection”
on page 15-592.
While using the Wizard, you can move forward or backward through the process by
clicking the Next and Back buttons. When you are finished defining it, click the
Finished button to create the shapefile.
Export Shapefile Link Editor

The Export Shapefile Link Editor is similar to the Database Table Link Editor (see
“Database Table Link Editor” on page 15-579), with the following differences:
• Shapefile—The name and location for the file that is being exported. The shape-
file name is limited to eight characters.
The Field Links group is used to specify the attributes and shapefile column headings
that you wish to export, as follows:
Note: The spatial data in the shapefiles being created will be in the
current display unit for map coordinates. For example, if the X
and Y or Northing and Easting values in the model are displayed
in meters at the time of the export, then the spatial data in the
shapefiles created will also be in meters.
The values for the exported attributes will be in the current

display units for that attribute. For example, if a junction
elevation attribute is displayed in feet at the time of the export,
the shapefile will contain that value in feet.
• Model—Each item in this column is an attribute in the model that is being

exported to the shapefile. The list of available attributes depends on the type of
table.
• Shapefile—Each item in this column is a column heading in the shapefile being
created, which correlates to the item in the model being mapped. By default, the
headings are set to an all-capitals abbreviation of the attribute name, with spaces
and periods replaced by the underscore character. The column heading can be
changed, but must be less than ten characters long and cannot contain periods.

Shapefile Export Example

Follow these steps to export one or more shapefiles from the model:
From the File menu, select Export > Shapefile to access the Export Shapefile Wizard
(for more information, see “Export Shapefile Wizard” on page 15-593).
• Select the element types that you wish to export by selecting one or more of the
check boxes in the list, then click the Next button.
• You will be presented with an Export Shapefile Link Editor (see “Export Shape-
file Link Editor” on page 15-594) for each element type you choose to export.
Perform the following steps for each Export Shapefile Link Editor:
– Enter the name of the shapefile you wish to create for the specified element
type. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to interactively browse for a directory in
which to store the shapefile.
– Define as many field links as necessary by selecting the model attribute and
providing a name for the associated shapefile column. Use the Select button
for making the selection process more efficient. Click the Next button to
continue.
– Click the Add Shapefile Connection check box if you wish to create a persis-
tent link between the shapefiles you are exporting and the model. If you
choose to create a Shapefile Connection, enter an alphanumeric label to iden-
tify the connection. Click the Finished button to export shapefiles.
15.2.6 Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects
When WaterCAD works with shapefile connections, it is using a file with an .HSC
extension, which stores the information regarding the shapefiles and field mapping for
each element type.
When you open a WaterCAD project file (.WCD), WaterCAD first looks for a file in
the same directory and with the same filename but with the .HSC extension. If it finds
this file, it uses the shapefile connectivity information contained therein. If it does not
find this file, it defaults to a file in the installed WaterCAD directory called Wtrc.HSC.

Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects

If you are working on a local drive, and you have several project files that all reference
common Connection information, let your project files automatically default to the
Wtrc.HSC file. Any connectivity changes that you work on in one project will be
automatically reflected when you open any other project.
If there are several people working on different projects on different computers, but
they still wish to have common connectivity information, the appropriate .HSC file
can be copied (and renamed if necessary) to the individual local drives.
Preventing Shapefile Connectivity Sharing between Projects

There are times when shared connectivity can be more cumbersome than helpful such
as when there are many projects, each with different database connectivity. At these
times, it is more useful to have the connectivity associated with one specific project,
rather than with all projects. To do this, copy the Wtrc.HSC file from the installed
WaterCAD directory to the same location as your project file, and rename it to the
same name as your .WCD file.
For example, if your WaterCAD project file is PROJECT1.WCD, rename Wtrc.HSC

to PROJECT1.HSC. The connections in PROJECT1.WCD can then be modified
without the effects being reflected in any other projects.
15.2.7 Shapefile Format
An ESRI shapefile actually consists of three separate files that combine to define the
spatial and non-spatial attributes of a map feature. The three required files are as
follows:
• Main File—A binary file with an extension of .SHP. It contains the spatial
attributes associated with the map features. For example, a polyline record
contains a series of points, and a point record contains X and Y coordinates.
• Index File—A binary file with an extension of .SHX. It contains the byte position
of each record in the main file.
• Database File—A dBase III file with an extension of .DBF. It contains the non-
spatial data associated with the map features.
All three files must have the same file name with the exception of the extension, and
be located in the same directory.
15.2.8 Shapefile Connection Example
Follow these steps to connect one or more shapefiles to the model:

• From the File menu, select Synchronize > Shapefile Connections.

• If you do not have any connections currently defined, you will be asked if you
want to create a new one now. Select Yes. If you already have one or more
connections defined, you will go to the Shapefile Connection Manager (for more
information, see “Shapefile Connection Manager” on page 15-586). Click Add to
access the Shapefile Connection Wizard (for more information, see “Shapefile
Connection Wizard” on page 15-586).
• Provide an alphanumeric label to uniquely identify this new connection. Click the
Next button.
• Choose the element types that you wish to import by clicking one or more of the
check boxes in the list, and click the Next button.
• Configure the options for this connection. First select the unit for the spatial data
of the shapefile. Then, if appropriate for your situation, click the Establish by
Spatial Data check box in the When Missing Connectivity Data group, and enter
a value in the Tolerance field. For more information, see “Shapefile Synchroniza-
tion Options” on page 15-590. Click the Next button to proceed to the Shapefile
Link Editors.
• You will be presented with an Import Shapefile Link Editor (see “Import Shape-
file Link Editor” on page 15-591) for each element type you chose to import.
Perform the following steps for each Import Shapefile Link Editor:
– Enter the name of the shapefile to which you wish to connect for the specified
element type. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to interactively browse for and
select your shapefile.
– Choose the Key/Label field to define the column in the shapefile that maps to
the element labels in the model.
– Define as many field links as you want by selecting the model attribute and
the associated shapefile column and unit if appropriate. Use the Select button
for making the selection process more efficient. Click the Next button.
• Check the Synchronize Shapefile Connection box if you wish to synchronize the
connection immediately upon clicking the Finished button.
• If the Synchronize Shapefile Connection box is checked, choose whether you
want to Synchronize In to the model from a shapefile, or Synchronize Out to the
shapefile from the model.
• Click the Finished button to synchronize the connection if the Synchronize
Shapefile Connection box is checked, or to return to the Shapefile Connection
Manager.


Chapter
Exchanging Data with 16

CAD Software
Exchanging data with CAD software includes:
• “AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion” on page 16-599

• “Importing and Exporting DXF Files” on page 16-604
16.1 AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion

Tip: The Polyline to Pipe conversion cannot be undone. Be sure to
save your project before you begin.
You can import entities into an existing project. Polylines will

automatically be connected to nodes within the specified
Tolerance. You can add nodes to your project prior to
performing the import.
This feature allows you to quickly construct a network based on the entities contained
in an AutoCAD drawing. Although this feature is called Polyline to Pipe, Line and
Block entities can be converted as well. Polylines and Lines can be converted to pipes
and Blocks can be converted to any available node type.
Building a model based on graphical elements can be an error-prone process. This is

due to the fact that a drawing can appear to be correct visually, but may contain prob-
lems that are not readily apparent. For example, what appears to be a single line in a
drawing could in fact be made up of many line segments, or it could be made up of
two lines, one directly on top of another.

AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion
Tip: Stand-Alone mode—You should take some time to clean up your

AutoCAD drawing prior to performing the conversion. Look for
entities that should not be converted, such as leader lines, and
move them to their own layer. Turn off layers that you do not
wish to convert. Do a quick review of your drawing and correct
any potential conversion problems that you may find.
After performing the conversion, we recommend that you use

the converted file as a DXF Background (for more information,
see “Import a DXF File from AutoCAD or MicroStation” on page 16-
605). This will greatly enhance your review process. If you
change the entities in your background drawing to a gray color
from within AutoCAD, it will make it easier to distinguish
between foreground elements and background entities.
AutoCAD mode—You can interactively convert individual

entities to pipes by using the Layout Tool.
To help alleviate some of the problems that you may encounter during the import
process, a comprehensive drawing review is also performed. During the conversion
process, the network is analyzed and potential problems are flagged for review. After
performing the conversion, the Drawing Review window (see “Drawing Review
Window” on page 5-267) will allow you to navigate to and fix any problems that are
encountered.
16.1.1 Converting Your Drawing in Multiple Passes
Depending on how your drawing layers are set up, you may be able to save yourself a
considerable amount of data entry time by converting your drawing in multiple passes.
For example, if your 12-inch pipes are located on a 12InchPipes layer, 18-inch pipes
are on a 18InchPipes layer, etc., you can import layers one at a time. Just set up your
prototypes prior to importing that layer.
To assist you in this process, your conversion settings will be retained between
imports. Therefore, on subsequent passes you will need to revise your prototypes and
specify the next layer to be imported.
This same technique can be used when importing blocks.
16.1.2 Polyline to Pipe Wizard
The Polyline to Pipe Wizard will guide you step-by-step through the process of
converting your entities to elements.

Exchanging Data with CAD Software
• Step 1—The import behavior depends on the mode in which you are working:
Stand-Alone—Specify the .DXF file that you would like to import. For more
information, see “Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 1 (Stand-Alone Mode Only)” on
page 16-601.
AutoCAD—This step is skipped. You will be asked to select the entities to
convert before accessing the Wizard.
• Step 2—Specify the polyline to pipe conversion options. For more information,
see “Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 2” on page 16-602.
• Step 3—Specify how T-intersections are to be handled. For more information, see
“Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 3” on page 16-602.
• Step 4—Specify how blocks should be converted (for .DXF files that contain
blocks). For more information, see “Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 4 (for .DXF
Files with Blocks)” on page 16-603.
• Step 5—Configure prototypes. For more information, see “Polyline to Pipe
Wizard—Step 5” on page 16-603.
• Step 6—Specify the layers to be imported. For more information, see “Polyline to
Pipe Wizard—Step 6” on page 16-604.
Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 1 (Stand-Alone Mode Only)

This step allows you to specify the .DXF file to be imported.
Note: If you are running in AutoCAD mode, this step will be skipped.
AutoCAD-mode users will be asked to select the entities to be
converted before accessing the Polyline to Pipe wizard.
• DXF Filename—Specify the name of the .DXF file you would like to import. Use
the Browse button to select the file interactively.
• DXF Unit—Specify the .DXF conversion unit (the unit that your .DXF file is in).
For example, if your drawing is in SI units, specify meters (m). If your drawing is
in architectural units, specify inches (in).

AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion
Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 2
Note: If the conversion does not yield the desired results, you can
repeat the conversion process using different settings. Be sure
to save your project before performing the conversion.
This step allows you to specify the following Polyline to Pipe conversion options:
• Connectivity tolerance—Polylines whose endpoints fall within the specified

tolerance will be connected to the same node. A default tolerance is supplied
based on the current scale. This is generally a good starting point, but you may
wish to increase or decrease this default tolerance depending on your particular
drawing. If you complete the conversion process and find that the tolerance was
not correct (pipes that should be connected were not, or vise versa), you may wish
to repeat the conversion process using a new tolerance.
• Specifying which entities to convert—You can optionally convert Polylines,
Lines, or both. You generally want to convert both Polylines and Lines. However,
if your drawing is set up so that Polylines are always used to represent pipes and
Lines are used for annotation purposes, you may wish to convert only Polylines.
• Handling missing nodes at polyline endpoints—A pipe can only be created if
there is a node at both endpoints. If a node cannot be found at a polyline endpoint,
a node must be added. Otherwise, the pipe cannot be converted. This option
allows you to specify whether a node is created, and, if so, the default type of
element to create.
In general, you will want to create a default node at polyline endpoints. However, if
your network already contains nodes at polyline endpoints, or if your drawing
contains blocks at polyline endpoints that are to be converted to nodes, you may wish
to specify that the polyline not be converted. Polylines that cannot be converted,
because one or both end nodes are missing, will be flagged for review at the end of the
conversion process.
Note: The tolerance that you specify in Step 2 (see “Polyline to Pipe
Wizard—Step 2” on page 16-602) will also be used for T-
intersection processing.
This step allows you to specify how T-intersections (pipe split candidates) should be
handled.
Nodes that fall within the specified tolerance of a pipe are referred to as pipe-split
candidates. There are two ways to handle these:

• Join the pipes at the intersection—The pipe-split candidate will be used to split
the intersecting pipe.
• Do not join the intersecting pipes—Pipe-split candidates will be flagged for
later review using the Drawing Review window.
Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 4 (for .DXF Files with Blocks)
Note: When you select an AutoCAD block, the preview pane will
display the graphical representation of that block. This step will
be skipped if there are no AutoCAD Blocks in your drawing.
If your AutoCAD drawing contains blocks, this step will appear, allowing you to
convert AutoCAD blocks, if desired.
If you would like to convert blocks to nodes, activate the Yes toggle. A table with two
columns will appear, allowing you to map the AutoCAD blocks you would like to
convert to any of the available node element types. The AutoCAD block column
provides you with a list of available blocks to convert. The Element column provides
you with a list of available node element types.
For each AutoCAD block you would like to convert, specify the type of node element
you would like to create.

Before performing the conversion, you may wish to configure your prototypes with
default data. During the conversion process, elements will be created using the speci-
fied defaults.
Click a button to configure the defaults for the associated element.

Importing and Exporting DXF Files
Note: It is recommended that you process your drawing prior to

performing the import. If your drawing contains layers that you
do not wish to import, turn them off from within AutoCAD and
elements on those layers will be ignored during the import
process.
Specify the layers that contain the entities you would like to convert. Use the Preview
Drawing button to preview the elements on the selected layers. This step can be used
in conjunction with the Prototype step to allow you to convert your drawing in
multiple passes (for more information, see “Converting Your Drawing in Multiple
Passes” on page 16-600).
Polyline Conversion Problem Dialog Box

This feature is present in Stand-Alone mode only. This dialog box displays the reason
that a polyline was not converted after running the Polyline to Pipe Wizard.
Drawing Preview
Use the Preview Drawing button to view the elements in the .DFX file that will be
converted.
Next to the Preview Drawing button is a check box labeled Only include elements that
will be converted.
Turn the toggle on to preview the entities that will be converted. The entities to be
converted are based on the settings you specified in the Polyline to Pipe Wizard (see
“Polyline to Pipe Wizard” on page 16-600), such as type of line entities, blocks, and
layers to be converted.
Turn the toggle off to preview all entities.
16.2 Importing and Exporting DXF Files

Importing and exporting DXF files includes:
• “Import a DXF File from AutoCAD or MicroStation” on page 16-605

• “Exporting a DXF file” on page 16-605
• “Redefining WaterCAD Blocks in AutoCAD” on page 16-605
• “Advanced DXF Import Techniques” on page 16-606

16.2.1 Import a DXF File from AutoCAD or MicroStation
To import background graphics in Stand-Alone mode from another drafting program,

you must first export a .DXF file from your CAD program. This step is usually as
simple as selecting an item from a menu in that program, such as File > Export > as
DXF, or similar command. Once the .DXF file has been created, it can be imported
into this program as follows:
1. Select the File > Import > DXF Background command to access the Import
DXF File dialog box.
2. Select the .DXF file you wish to import, and click the Open button.
16.2.2 Exporting a DXF file
Note: You will be able to redefine all elements, except pipes, as blocks
in AutoCAD. Pipes will be exported as polylines, so you will be
able to set their line weight in AutoCAD.
A project can be saved in a format for use by AutoCAD, and many other common
CAD-based applications. When you use the Export command, a window appears so
that you can enter the file name, drive, and directory of the .DXF file you are saving.
A status bar appears at the bottom of the screen as the file is being exported.
To export the drawing plan view, select File > Export > DXF file.
16.2.3 Redefining WaterCAD Blocks in AutoCAD
When exporting a DXF file from WaterCAD in Stand-Alone mode, pipes will be
exported as Polyline entities, allowing you to change the line weights in AutoCAD.
Miscellaneous elements (flow arrows, control symbols, etc), nodes, pumps, and valves
will be exported as Block entities (named HMI_CKV, HMI_CSRC, HMI_FARW,
HMI_PS, JUNCTION, TANK, RESERVOIR, PUMP, PRV, PBV, PSV, FCV and
TCV) allowing you to redefine them in AutoCAD.
If you would like to change the appearance of these blocks in your AutoCAD drawing,
you can redefine them as follows:
To begin, start AutoCAD and create thirteen separate drawing files named
HMI_CKV.DWG, HMI_CSRC.DWG, HMI_FARW.DWG, HMI_PS.DWG, JUNC-
TION.DWG, TANK.DWG, RESERVOIR.DWG, PUMP.DWG, PRV.DWG,
PBV.DWG, PSV.DWG, FCV.DWG and TCV.DWG. Save these drawings in your
AutoCAD directory.

Importing and Exporting DXF Files
Open the existing drawing that contains the network blocks.
1. At the AutoCAD Command: prompt, type INSERT and press enter.

2. At the Block Name: prompt, type JUNCTION=C: JUNCTION.DWG and press
enter.
3. At this point, the block has been redefined and you can cancel this command.
4. Repeat these steps for the other named blocks.
5. Refer to your AutoCAD documentation for more information on Redefining
Blocks.
16.2.4 Advanced DXF Import Techniques
Note: Refer to your AutoCAD documentation for more information on

Importing .DXF files.
To import the network .DXF file into an existing AutoCAD drawing file, you will
have to perform a couple of preliminary steps:
1. In your existing drawing, at the AutoCAD Command: prompt, type (regapp

Wtrc) and press Enter. This will register the program application ID. Be sure to
include the parenthesis.
2. Define blocks named HMI_CKV, HMI_CSRC, HMI_FARW, HMI_PS, JUNC-
TION, TANK, RESERVOIR, PUMP, PRV, PBV, PSV, FCV and TCV.
Tip: To save time, you can perform the above steps in a new
AutoCAD drawing file and save it with the name WaterCAD.DWG.
Now, instead of performing the above steps, insert this new
drawing into your existing drawing file immediately before
importing a network .DXF file.
You are now ready to import a .DXF file into your existing AutoCAD drawing.

Chapter
Additional Features for 17

AutoCAD
Note: AutoCAD R14 is not supported in WaterCAD.
WaterCAD features optional support for AutoCAD integration. You can determine if
you have purchased AutoCAD functionality for your WaterCAD by using the Help >
About menu option. Click the Registration button to view the feature options that
have been purchased with your application license. If AutoCAD support is enabled,
then you will be able to run your WaterCAD application in both AutoCAD and Stand-
Alone mode.
The AutoCAD functionality has been implemented in a way that is the same as the
Stand-Alone base product. Once you become familiar with the Stand-Alone mode,
you will not have any difficulty using the product in AutoCAD mode.
In AutoCAD mode, you will have access to the full range of functionality available in
the AutoCAD design and drafting environment. The standard environment is extended
and enhanced by an AutoCAD ObjectARX WaterCAD client layer that lets you
create, view, and edit the native WaterCAD network model while in AutoCAD.
Some of the advantages of working in AutoCAD mode include:
• Lay out network pipes and structures in fully-scaled mode in the same design and
drafting environment that you use to develop your engineering plans. You will
have access to any other third party applications that you currently use, along with
any custom LISP, ARX, or VBA applications that you have developed.
• Use native AutoCAD insertion snaps to precisely position WaterCAD elements
with respect to other entities in the AutoCAD drawing.
• Use native AutoCAD commands such as ERASE, MOVE, and ROTATE on
WaterCAD model entities with automatic update and synchronization with the
model database.
• Output contours to your AutoCAD drawing, and interactively label them.
• Control destination layers for model elements and associated label text and anno-
tation, giving you control over styles, line types, and visibility of model elements.
Additional features of the AutoCAD version includes:

AutoCAD Environment
• “AutoCAD Environment” on page 17-608

• “AutoCAD Project Files” on page 17-610
• “WaterCAD Element Properties” on page 17-611
• “Working with Elements” on page 17-612
• “Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands” on page 17-614
• “Undo/Redo” on page 17-617
• “Converting Native AutoCAD Entities to WaterCAD Elements” on page 17-618
• “Special Considerations” on page 17-619
17.1 AutoCAD Environment

The AutoCAD environment includes:
• “AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout” on page 17-608

• “Toolbars” on page 17-609
• “Drawing Setup” on page 17-609
• “Symbol Visibility” on page 17-609
• “Rebuild Figure Labels” on page 17-610
17.1.1 AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout
In AutoCAD mode, Haestad Methods’ products provide a set of extended options and
functionality beyond those available in Stand-Alone mode (for more information, see
“Stand-Alone and AutoCAD Mode” on page 2-48). This additional functionality
provides enhanced control over general application settings and options and extends
the command set, giving you control over the display of model elements within
AutoCAD.
Key differences between AutoCAD and Stand-Alone mode include:
• Element editing functionality has been extended by adding the Scale Elements
and Rotate Labels commands, accessible under the Edit > Modify Elements menu,
and the Change Widths command under the Edit > Pipes menu.
• You can control the appearance and destination of all model elements using the
Element Properties command (see “Element Properties” on page 17-612) under
the Tools menu. For example, you can assign a specific layer for all outlets, as
well as assign the label and annotation text style to be applied.

Additional Features for AutoCAD
17.1.2 Toolbars
In AutoCAD mode, the following toolbars are available:
• Command Tools—Enables the Command Toolbar for quick access to the main
commands, including computations, tables, graphic reports, Quick View, and
direct access to the Haestad Methods Web Site.
• Layout Tools—Enables the Layout Toolbar for access to the Tool Palette.
• Analysis Toolbar—Enables the Analysis Toolbar to control the current scenario
and provide quick access to the Scenario Manager (see “Scenario Control Center”
on page 8-366), the Active Topology Selection dialog box (see “Active Topology
Selection Dialog Box” on page 9-420), the Darwin Calibrator (see “Darwin Cali-
brator” on page 10-421), and the Capital and Energy Cost Managers (see “Capital
Cost Manager” on page 11-448 and “Energy Cost Manager” on page 11-452), as
well as time and animation controls.
17.1.3 Drawing Setup
When working in the AutoCAD mode, you may work with Haestad Methods’ prod-
ucts in many different AutoCAD scales and settings. However, Haestad Methods’
product elements can only be created and edited in model space.
17.1.4 Symbol Visibility
Note: In AutoCAD, it is possible to delete element label text using the

ERASE command. You should not use ERASE to control
visibility of labels. If you desire to control the visibility of a
selected group of element labels, you should move them to
another layer that can be frozen or turned off.
For more information on restoring labels that have been erased

using the native AutoCAD command, see “Rebuild Figure Labels”
on page 17-610.
In AutoCAD mode, you can control display of element labels using the check box in
the Drawing Options dialog box.
The following commands allow you to customize the drawing by turning the visibility
of flow arrows and labels on or off:
• To turn on the element labels, type: WTRCLABELSON

• To turn them off, type: WTRCLABELSOFF

AutoCAD Project Files
17.1.5 Rebuild Figure Labels
When running WaterCAD in the AutoCAD mode, it is possible to delete associated

element label text entities. Element labels which have been erased can be selectively
undeleted using the command WTRCREBUILDLABELS.
17.2 AutoCAD Project Files

When using WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode, there are two files that fundamentally
define a WaterCAD model project:
• Drawing File (.DWG)—The AutoCAD drawing file contains the custom entities
that define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that
serves as the model background.
• Model File (.WCD)—The native WaterCAD model database file that contains all
the element properties, along with other important model data. WaterCAD .WCD
files can be loaded and run using the Stand-Alone mode. These files may be
copied and sent to other WaterCAD users who are interested in running your
project. This is the most important file for the WaterCAD model.
The two files will have the same base name. It is important to understand that
archiving the drawing file is not sufficient to reproduce the model. You must also
preserve the associated .WCD file.
Since the .WCD file can be run and modified separately from the .DWG file using
Stand-Alone mode, it is quite possible for the two files to get out of sync. Should you
ever modify the model in Stand-Alone mode and then later load the AutoCAD .DWG
file, the WaterCAD program will compare file dates, and automatically use the built-in
AutoCAD synchronization routine.
17.2.1 Drawing Synchronization
Whenever you open a WaterCAD-based drawing file in AutoCAD, the WaterCAD

model server will start. The first thing that the application will do is load the associ-
ated WaterCAD database (.WCD) file. If the time stamps of the drawing and database
file are different, WaterCAD will automatically check synchronization. This protects
against corruption that might otherwise occur from separately editing the WaterCAD
database file in Stand-Alone mode, or editing proxy elements at an AutoCAD station
where the WaterCAD application is not loaded.
The synchronization check will occur in two stages:

• First, WaterCAD will compare the drawing model elements with those in the
server model. Any differences will be listed. WaterCAD enforces network topo-
logical consistency between the server and the drawing state. If model elements
have been deleted or added in the .WCD file during a Stand-Alone session, or if
proxy elements have been deleted, WaterCAD will force the drawing to be consis-
tent with the native database by restoring or removing any missing or excess
drawing custom entities.
• After network topology has been synchronized, WaterCAD will compare other
model and drawing states such as location, labels, and flow directions. Again, any
differences between the drawing client and server data will be listed, and a
message box will open to give you a chance to indicate which state, drawing, or
model server should be adopted during the second stage of synchronization.
You can run the Synchronization check at any time using the command WTRC-
SYNCSERVER.
17.2.2 Saving the Drawing as Drawing*.dwg
Note: If this situation inadvertently occurs (save on quit for example),

restart AutoCAD, use the Open command to open the
Drawing*.dwg file from its saved location, and use the Save As
command to save the drawing and model data to a different
name.
AutoCAD uses Drawing*.dwg as its default drawing name. Saving your drawing as
the default AutoCAD drawing name (for instance Drawing1.dwg) should be avoided,
as it makes overwriting model data very likely. When you first start AutoCAD, the
new empty drawing is titled Drawing*.dwg, regardless of whether one exists in the
default directory. Since Haestad Methods’ modeling products create model databases
associated with the AutoCAD drawing, the use of Drawing*.dwg as the saved name
puts you at risk of causing synchronization problems between the AutoCAD drawing
and the Haestad Methods modeling files.
17.3 WaterCAD Element Properties

WaterCAD element properties includes:
• “Element Properties” on page 17-612

• “Select Layer” on page 17-612
• “Select Text Style” on page 17-612

Working with Elements
17.3.1 Element Properties
When working in the AutoCAD mode, this feature will display a tabbed dialog box
with tables containing different model element types and their associated properties,
along with the properties of the element’s layer, label, and annotation. To modify an
attribute, double-click each associated grid cell. Setting changes made in this dialog
box will be used for any newly created elements. Property changes will be performed
on all elements of the given type. If the Apply to Existing Object check box is
selected, modifications made in this dialog box are performed on a global basis. To
restrict global changes to a certain layer for a particular element type, use the
*current* option setting for the attribute of interest.
17.3.2 Select Layer
When running in AutoCAD mode, this dialog box appears when you double-click the
layer name (*current* by default) in the Layer column of the Element Properties
dialog box. To access this, select Tools > Element Properties. It displays a list of the
available layers and their properties from the current AutoCAD drawing. Click the
appropriate field to select a layer. The *current* option will use whatever layer is set
to current in your AutoCAD drawing.
17.3.3 Select Text Style
When running in AutoCAD mode, this dialog box appears when you double-click the
text style name (*current* by default) in the Text Style column of the Labels and
Annotation tabs of the Element Properties dialog box. This is accessed by selecting
Tools > Element Properties. It displays a list of the available text styles and their prop-
erties from the current AutoCAD drawing. Click the appropriate field to select a text
style. The *current* option will use whatever text style is set to current in your
AutoCAD drawing.
17.4 Working with Elements

Working with elements includes:
• “Edit Element” on page 17-613

• “Deleting Elements” on page 17-613
• “Modifying Elements” on page 17-613

17.4.1 Edit Element
In AutoCAD mode, this menu selection will open an element editor for any specific
element. Select Edit > Edit Element, then select an element. This command is also
available by choosing the Select tool, then clicking an element in the drawing pane. In
addition, double-clicking an element will open the element editor for that element.
Note: Double-clicking an element when other elements are selected

will open the AutoCAD Properties dialog box rather than the
element editor.
The Edit Element command works with the current selection to allow you to generate
filtered reports. For more information on working with selections, see “Selecting
Elements (AutoCAD Mode)” on page 5-260.
17.4.2 Deleting Elements
In AutoCAD mode, this command removes all elements in the current selection. For
more information on working with selections, see “Selecting Elements (AutoCAD
Mode)” on page 5-260.
17.4.3 Modifying Elements
In AutoCAD mode, these commands are selected from the Edit menu. They are used
for scaling and rotating model entities.
Scale Elements
In AutoCAD mode, this menu selection resizes an element based upon a scale factor.
After choosing this command, select an element or group of elements, and enter the
scale factor to be applied.
Rotate Labels
In AutoCAD mode, this menu selection rotates the figure label. After choosing this
command, select an element or group of elements, and enter the desired rotation in
degrees.
Modify Pipes
Pipes (see “Pressure Pipe Editor” on page 6-277) may follow a non-linear alignment,
since in pressure systems minor losses can be safely lumped with friction losses
without significantly affecting model accuracy. WaterCAD uses the following special-
ized commands for editing pipes in AutoCAD:

Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands
• Insert Bend—Use this command to add a bend to a pipe. In AutoCAD, you will
be prompted to select a pipe to bend. Select the pipe and the location you want the
bend to appear. The pipe alignment will automatically conform to this location.
• Remove Bend—Use this command to remove a specific bend from a pipe. In
AutoCAD, you will be prompted to select a pipe and the specific bend to remove.
• Remove All Bends—Use this command to completely straighten a pipe that
contains bends. In AutoCAD, you will be prompted to select a pipe, and all bends
will disappear.
• Change Widths—Use this command to change pipe widths. After choosing this
command, select a pipe or group of pipes and enter the desired width. Note that
the width entered is equivalent to the AutoCAD polyline width.
Change Pipe Widths

In AutoCAD mode, this menu option is used to change the thickness of the pipe width.
You are first prompted to select pipes, and is then prompted to enter a new pipe width
to be assigned to the pipe figures.
Edit Elements
In AutoCAD mode, this menu command is used to open a spreadsheet FlexTable
editor or a selection of one or more network figures. You are prompted to select
figures on which to build a table.
17.5 Working with Elements Using AutoCAD

Commands
Working with elements using AutoCAD commands includes:
• “WaterCAD Custom AutoCAD Entities” on page 17-615

• “AutoCAD Commands” on page 17-615
• “Explode Elements” on page 17-616
• “Moving Elements” on page 17-616
• “Moving Element Labels” on page 17-616
• “Snap Menu” on page 17-617

17.5.1 WaterCAD Custom AutoCAD Entities
The primary AutoCAD-based WaterCAD element entities—pipes, tanks, reservoirs,

pumps and valves—are all implemented using ObjectARX custom objects. Thus, they
are vested with a specialized model awareness that ensures that any editing actions
you perform will result in an appropriate update of the model database.
This means that you can perform standard AutoCAD commands (see “AutoCAD
Commands” on page 17-615) as you normally would, and the model database will be
updated automatically to reflect these changes.
It also means that the model will enforce the integrity of the network topological state.
Therefore, if you delete a nodal element such as a junction, its connecting pipes will
also be deleted since their connecting nodes topologically define model pipes.
Using ObjectARX enables the implementation of highly specialized editing actions

that are not available with standard AutoCAD entities. Two examples of this special-
ized behavior are element morphs (see “Morphing Elements” on page 5-258) and pipe
splits (see “Splitting Pipes” on page 5-258). Again, these modifications will trigger an
automatic update of the model network topology and associated element properties.
Using ObjectARX technology ensures the database will be adjusted and maintained
during Undo and Redo transactions.
A custom model element has certain native text entities associated with it for
displaying label and annotated property values. These associated label and annotation
entities may be edited separately from the model element itself. However, most
drawing edits made directly to a model element will be applied in the appropriate
fashion against its associated label and annotation entities. Thus, if you drag an
element to a new location, the annotation and label locations will update as well.
17.5.2 AutoCAD Commands
When running in AutoCAD mode, Haestad Methods’ products make use of all the
advantages that AutoCAD has, such as plotting capabilities and snap features. Addi-
tionally, AutoCAD commands can be used as you would with any design project. For
example, Haestad Methods’ elements and annotation can be manipulated using
common AutoCAD commands.

Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands
17.5.3 Explode Elements
In AutoCAD mode, running the AutoCAD Explode command will transform all
Haestad Methods custom entities into equivalent AutoCAD native entities. When a
Haestad Methods custom entity is exploded, all associated database information is
lost. Be certain to save the exploded drawing under a separate filename.
Use Explode to render a drawing for finalizing exhibits and publishing maps of the
model network. You can also deliver exploded drawings to clients or other individuals
who do not own a Haestad Methods Product license, since a fully exploded drawing
will not be comprised of any ObjectARX proxy objects. For more information, see
“Working with Proxies” on page 17-619.
17.5.4 Moving Elements
When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror,
and Array can be used to move elements. For more information, see “Selecting
Elements (AutoCAD Mode)” on page 5-260.
To move a node, execute the AutoCAD command by either typing it at the command
prompt or selecting it. Follow the AutoCAD prompts, and the node and its associated
label will move together. The connecting pipes will shrink or stretch depending on the
new location of the node.
17.5.5 Moving Element Labels
When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror,
and Array can be used to move element text labels. For more information, see
“Selecting Elements (Stand-Alone Mode)” on page 5-259.
To move an element text label separately from the element, click the element label you
wish to move. The grips will appear for the label. Execute the AutoCAD command
either by typing it at the command prompt, by selecting it from the tool palette, or by
selecting it from the right-click menu. Follow the AutoCAD prompt, and the label will
be moved without the element.

17.5.6 Snap Menu
When using AutoCAD mode, the Snap menu is a standard AutoCAD menu that
provides options for picking an exact location of an object. See the Autodesk
AutoCAD documentation for more information.
17.6 Undo/Redo
Note: If you use the native AutoCAD undo, you are limited to a single
redo level. The WaterCAD undo/redo is faster than the native
AutoCAD undo/redo. If you are rolling back WaterCAD model
edits, it is recommended that you use the menu-based
WaterCAD undo/redo.
If you undo using the AutoCAD undo/redo and you restore

WaterCAD elements that have been previously deleted,
morphed, or split, some model state attributes such as
diameters or elevations may be lost, even though the locational
and topological state is fully consistent. This will only happen in
situations where the WaterCAD command history has been
deleted. In such cases, you will be warned to check your data
carefully.
In AutoCAD mode, you have two types of undo/redo available to you. From the Edit
menu, you have access to WaterCAD undo and redo. Alternatively, you can perform
the native AutoCAD undo and redo by typing at the AutoCAD command line. The
implementations of the two different operation types are quite distinct.
The menu-based undo and redo commands operate exclusively on WaterCAD

elements by invoking the commands directly on the model server. The main advantage
of using the specialized command is that you will have unlimited undo and redo
levels. This is an important difference, since in layout or editing it is quite useful to be
able to safely undo and redo an arbitrary number of transactions.
Whenever you use a native AutoCAD undo, the server model will be notified when
any WaterCAD entities are affected by the operation. WaterCAD will then synchro-
nize the model to the drawing state. Wherever possible, the model will seek to map the
undo/redo onto the model server’s managed command history. If the drawing’s state is
not consistent with any pending undo or redo transactions held by the server,
WaterCAD will delete the command history. In this case, the model will synchronize
the drawing and server models.

Converting Native AutoCAD Entities to WaterCAD Elements
17.7 Converting Native AutoCAD Entities to

WaterCAD Elements
WaterCAD features powerful tools dedicated to assisting you in building WaterCAD
models from existing AutoCAD drawing information. In addition to the standard GIS
shapefile conversion options, there are two specific commands available in the
AutoCAD platform that will be especially useful to the AutoCAD modeler:
• “Layout Pipe Using Entity” on page 17-618

• “Change AutoCAD Entities to Pipes” on page 17-618
17.7.1 Layout Pipe Using Entity
Note: This command is extremely useful for constructing pipes that

follow a curved alignment. In these cases, use an arc as the
defining template entity for the pipe creation.
In addition to the standard options available under the Pipe layout command (accessed
by clicking the button in the WaterCAD Tools toolbar, or by selecting the Tools >
Layout > Pipe menu option), you may elect to use an existing AutoCAD line, polyline,
or arc as a template to define an equivalent WaterCAD pipe or series of pipes.
While you are in the Pipe Layout command, you may invoke the Entity conversion
option by using the Entity keyword, or by selecting Entity from the right-mouse
button context menu. Once selected, you will be prompted to choose an entity to use
as a basis for a new pipe, and conditionally specify the type of nodal WaterCAD
element to use at each end of the pipe.
17.7.2 Change AutoCAD Entities to Pipes
Note: This is an automated batch process that requires some care and
attention with respect to the selection set that is going to be
used as a basis for generating actual WaterCAD model elements.
For instance, it may be desirable to select like-sized pipe
elements during each pass. This way, you can use the
prototyping capabilities to their greatest advantage. A little time
spent in planning and strategizing a series of individual
conversion steps will go a long way toward preventing
confusion, which could necessitate later re-conversions.
When running WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode, this special AutoCAD command

allows you to use a selection of AutoCAD entities—arcs, lines, polylines, and
blocks—as a defining template set for the creation of equivalent WaterCAD elements.
This command performs the element generation in batch fashion. You are prompted

for the selection of entities to convert, and the selection is followed by the Polyline to
Pipe Conversion Wizard that leads you through a sequence of steps defining the basis
of the batch conversion. For more information, see “AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe
Conversion” on page 16-599.
17.8 Special Considerations

Special considerations include:
• “Import WaterCAD” on page 17-619

• “Working with Proxies” on page 17-619
17.8.1 Import WaterCAD
When running WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode, this command imports a selected

WaterCAD data (.WCD) file for use in the current drawing. The new project file will
now correspond to the drawing name, such as, CurrentDrawingName.WCD. When-
ever you save changes to the network model through WaterCAD, the associated
.WCD data file is updated and can be loaded into WaterCAD 4.0 or higher.
17.8.2 Working with Proxies
If you open a WaterCAD drawing file on an AutoCAD workstation that does not have
the WaterCAD application installed, you will get an AutoCAD Proxy Information
message box. This is because the executable logic for managing the AutoCAD entities
is not available, and the WaterCAD modeling elements are not associated with the
WaterCAD native database.
WaterCAD proxy objects can be moved and erased. However, doing so will put the
drawing state out of sync with the model database if the drawing is saved with its orig-
inal name. If this happens, and you later reload the drawing on an AutoCAD station
that is running a WaterCAD application, the application will automatically load and
will attempt to reconcile any differences it finds by automatically loading its Database
Synchronization routine. (for more information, see “Drawing Synchronization” on
page 17-610).

Special Considerations

Chapter
Automated 18
Skeletonization
Skeletonization is the process of selecting only the parts of the hydraulic network that
have a significant impact on the behavior of the system for inclusion in a water distri-
bution model. For example, including each individual service connection, valve, and
every one of the numerous other elements that make up the actual network would be a
huge undertaking for larger systems. The portions of the network that are not modeled
are not ignored; rather, the effects of these elements are accounted for within the parts
of the system that are included in the model.
A fully realized water distribution model can be an enormously complex network

consisting of thousands of discrete elements, and not all of these elements are neces-
sary for every application of the model. When elements that are extraneous to the
desired purpose are present, the efficiency, usability, and focus of the model can be
substantially effected, and calculation and display refresh times can be seriously
impaired. In addition to the logistics of creating and maintaining a model that employs
little or no skeletonization, a high level of detail might be unnecessary when incorpo-
rating all of these elements in the model has no significant effect on the accuracy of
the results that are generated.
Different levels of skeletonization are appropriate depending on the intended use of

the model. For an energy cost analysis, a higher degree of skeletonization is preferable
and for fire flow and water quality analysis, minimal skeletonization is called for. This
means that multiple models are required for different applications. Because of this
necessity, various automated skeletonization techniques have been developed to assist
with the skeletonization process.
Automated Skeletonization includes:
• A generic skeletonization example—For an example of skeletonization, see

“Skeletonization Example” on page 18-622.
• What automated skeletonizers generally do—For a discussion of common,
generic approaches to automated skeletonization, see “Common Automated Skel-
etonization Techniques” on page 18-623.

Skeletonization Example
• How Skelebrator approaches skeletonization—For a discussion of the features

and advantages of Haestad Methods’ Skelebrator, see “Skeletonization Using
Skelebrator” on page 18-626.
• Using the Skelebrator software—For reference information on using the Skele-
brator software to perform skeletonizations of networks, see “Using the Skele-
brator Software” on page 18-633.
18.1 Skeletonization Example

The following series of diagrams illustrate various levels of skeletonization that can
be applied. The diagram below shows a network subdivision before any skeletoniza-
tion has been performed.
As you can see, there is a junction at each service tap and a pipe and node at each
house for a total of 48 junctions and 47 pipes within this subdivision.
To perform a low level of skeletonization, the nodes at each house could be removed
along with the connecting pipes that tie in to the service line. The demands at each
house would be moved to the corresponding service tap. The resulting network would
now look like this:
There are now 19 junctions and 18 pipes in the subdivision. The demands that were
assigned to the junctions that were removed are moved to the nearest upstream junc-
tion. The only information that has been lost is the data at the service connections that
were removed.

Automated Skeletonization
A further level of skeletonization is possible if you remove the service taps and model
only the ends and intersections of the main pipes. In this case, re-allocating the
demands is a bit more complex. The most accurate approximation can be obtained by
associating the demands with the junction that is closest to the original demand junc-
tion (as determined by following the service pipe). In the following diagram, these
service areas are marked with a dotted line.
To fully skeletonize this subdivision, the pipes and junctions that serve the subdivision
can be removed, and the demands can be assigned to the point where the branch
connects to the rest of the network, as shown in the following diagram:
As can be seen by this example, numerous levels of skeletonization can be applied;

determining the extent of the skeletonization depends on the purpose of the model. At
each progressive level of skeletonization, more elements are removed, thus the
amount of available information is decreased. Deciding whether this information is
necessary to the intended use of the model dictates the point at which the model is
optimally skeletonized.
18.2 Common Automated Skeletonization

Techniques
The following are descriptions of the skeletonization techniques that have been
employed to achieve a level of automation of the skeletonization process. Generally, a
combination of these techniques proves to be more effective than any one on its own.
Common techniques include:
• “Generic—Data Scrubbing” on page 18-624

Common Automated Skeletonization Techniques
• “Generic—Branch Trimming” on page 18-624

• “Generic—Series Pipe Removal” on page 18-625
18.2.1 Generic—Data Scrubbing
Data scrubbing is the simplest, and generally the first, step of the skeletonization
process. In fact, some automated skeletonizers rely entirely on this reduction tech-
nique. (Data scrubbing is called Smart Pipe Removal in Skelebrator.) Data scrubbing
consists of removing all pipes that meet user-specified criteria, such as diameter,
roughness, or other attributes. Criteria combinations can also be applied, such as:
Remove all 2-inch pipes that are less than 200 feet in length.
This step of skeletonization is especially useful when the model has been created from
GIS data, since GIS maps generally contain much more information than is necessary
for the hydraulic model. Examples of elements that are commonly included in GIS
maps, but not necessarily in the distribution model, are service connections and isola-
tion valves. Removing these elements generally has a negligible impact on the accu-
racy of the model, depending on the application for which the model is being used.
The primary drawback of this type of skeletonization is that there is generally no

network awareness involved. No consideration of the hydraulic effects of a pipe’s
removal is taken into account, so there is a large potential for errors to be made by
inadvertent pipe removal or by causing network disconnections. (Haestad Methods
Skelebrator does account for hydraulic effect.)
18.2.2 Generic—Branch Trimming
Branch trimming—referred to as Branch Collapsing in Skelebrator—is the process of

removing short dead-end links and their corresponding junctions. Since pipes and
junctions are removed by this process, you specify the criteria for both types of
element. An important element of this skeletonization type is the reallocation of
demands that are associated with junctions that are removed. The demand associated
with a dead-end junction is assigned to the junction at the beginning of the branch.
Branch trimming is a recursive process; as dead-end pipes and junctions are removed,
other junctions and pipes can become the new dead-ends—if they meet the trimming
criteria, these elements may also be removed. You specify whether this process
continues until all applicable branches have been trimmed or if the process should
stop after a specified number of trimming levels.
Branch trimming is an effective skeletonization technique; dead-end junctions with no

loading have no effect on the model, and dead end junctions that do have demands are
accounted for at the point through which this flow would pass anyway (without skele-
tonization), so the hydraulic behavior of the network as a whole is unaffected.

The only situation that presents a drawback to this type of skeletonization is the
obvious one; information and results cannot be obtained from non-existent elements.
During water quality or fire flow analysis, information on these trimmed elements
may be desired but unavailable. Again, having multiple models utilizing various
levels of skeletonization is the solution to this potential drawback.
18.2.3 Generic—Series Pipe Removal
Series pipe removal, also known as intermediate node removal or pipe merging, is the
next skeletonization technique. It works by removing nodes that have only two adja-
cent pipes and merging these pipes into a single one. As with Branch trimming, any
demands associated with the junctions being removed must be reallocated to nearby
nodes, and generally a number of strategies for this allocation can be specified.
An evenly-distributed strategy simply divides the demand equally between the two
end nodes of the newly merged pipe. A distance-weighted technique divides the
demands between the two end nodes based on their proximity to the node being
removed. These strategies can be somewhat limiting, and maintaining an acceptable
level of network hydraulic precision while removing nodes and merging pipes is made
more difficult with this restrictive range of choices.
Other criteria are also used to set the allowable tolerances for relative differences in
the attributes of adjacent pipes and nodes. For example, an important consideration is
the elevation difference between nodes along a pipe-merge candidate. If the junctions
mark critical elevation information, this elevation (and by extension, pressure) data
would be lost if this node attribute is not accounted for when the pipes are merged.
Another set of criteria would include pipe attributes. This information is needed to
prevent pipes that are too different (as defined by the tolerance settings) hydraulically
from being merged. It is important to compare certain pipe attributes before merging
them to ensure that the hydraulic behavior will approximate the conditions before the
merge. However, requiring that pipes have exactly matching criteria limits the number
of elements that could potentially be removed, thus reducing the level of skeletoniza-
tion that is possible.
In other words, although it is desirable for potential pipe merge candidates to have
similar hydraulic attributes, substantial skeletonization is difficult to achieve if there
are even very slight variances between the hydraulic attributes of the pipes, since an
exact match is required. This process is, however, very good at merging pipes whose
adjacent nodes have no demand and that have exactly the same attributes. Removing
these zero-demand junctions and merging the corresponding pipes has no effect on the
model’s hydraulics, except for loss of pressure information at the removed junctions.
Series pipe removal is called Series Pipe Merging in Skelebrator.

Skeletonization Using Skelebrator
18.3 Skeletonization Using Skelebrator

Skeletonization Using Skelebrator discusses the advantages and approach to skeleton-
ization of Haestad Methods’ Skelebrator process.
Skelebrator includes:
• “Generic—Data Scrubbing” on page 18-624

• “Skelebrator—Branch Collapsing” on page 18-627
• “Skelebrator—Series Pipe Merging” on page 18-628
• “Skelebrator—Parallel Pipe Merging” on page 18-630
• “Skelebrator—Other Skelebrator Features” on page 18-631
• “Skelebrator—Conclusion” on page 18-632
18.3.1 Skelebrator—Smart Pipe Removal
The first step that Skelebrator performs is Smart Pipe Removal, which is an improved
version of the data scrubbing technique described in “Generic—Data Scrubbing” on
page 18-624. The main drawback of standard data scrubbing procedures is that they
have no awareness of the effects that removing elements from the model will have on
the calculated hydraulics. This can easily cause network disconnections and lead to a
decrease in the accuracy of the simulated network behavior.
Skelebrator eliminates the possibility of inadvertent network disconnections caused

by the data scrubbing technique. This is accomplished by utilizing a sophisticated
network-walking algorithm. This algorithm marks pipes as safe to be removed if the
removal of the pipe so marked would not invalidate, or disconnect, the network. For a
pipe to be removed, it must:
• Meet the user-specified removal criteria

• Be marked safe for removal
• Not be marked as non-removable
• Not be connected to a non-removable junction (to prevent orphaning)
This added intelligence protects the model’s integrity by eliminating the possibility of
inadvertently introducing catastrophic errors during the model reduction process.
This innovation is not available in other automated skeletonization applications; a

likely result of performing skeletonization without this intelligent safety net is the
invalidation of the network caused by the removal of elements that are critical to the
performance and accuracy of the model. At the very least, verifying that no important

elements have been removed during this skeletonization step and re-creating any
elements that have been erroneously removed can be a lengthy and error-prone
process. These considerations are addressed automatically and transparently by the
Skelebrator’s advanced network traversal algorithm.
18.3.2 Skelebrator—Branch Collapsing
Branch Collapsing is a fundamental skeletonization technique; the improvements over

the branch trimming that was described in “Generic—Branch Trimming” on page 18-
624 that Skelebrator brings to the table are primarily a matter of flexibility, efficiency,
and usability. The branch trimming method utilized by other automated skeletoniza-
tion applications allows a limited range of removal criteria; in some cases, just eleva-
tion and length. Workarounds are required if another removal criteria is desired,
resulting in more steps to obtain the desired results.
Conversely, Skelebrator innately provides a wide range of removal criteria, increasing

the scope of this skeletonization step and eliminating the need for inefficient manual
workarounds.
The following diagrams illustrate the results of Branch Collapsing.
Figure 18-1: Before Branch Collapsing
Figure 18-2: After One Branch Collapsing Iteration

Figure 18-3: After Two Branch Collapsing Iterations (Branch is

Completely Removed)
18.3.3 Skelebrator—Series Pipe Merging
Tip: If you want to combine only pipes with the same hydraulic
characteristics (i.e., diameter and roughness) then, to a series
pipe removal operation add a pipe tolerance of 0.0 and a
roughness tolerance of 0.0. Also make sure to deselect the Use
Equivalent Pipes option.
The Skelebrator Series Pipe Merging technique overcomes the basic drawbacks to
series pipe removal that were mentioned previously (see “Generic—Series Pipe
Removal” on page 18-625) in two ways:
First, the demand reallocation strategies normally available for this step are not
comprehensive enough, limiting you to choosing from an even demand distribution or
a distance-weighted one. This limitation can hinder your ability to maintain an accept-
able level of hydraulic parity.
To overcome this limitation, Skelebrator provides a greater range of demand realloca-

tion strategies, including: Equally Distributed, Proportional to Existing Load (at the
ends of the new pipe), Proportional to Dominant Criteria, and User Defined Ratio.
Evenly Distributed divides the demand equally between the two end nodes of the
newly merged pipe. The Proportional to Existing Load divides demand based on the
amount of demand already associated with the end nodes. The Proportional to Domi-
nant Criteria strategy can supply the distance-weighted option, and allows other pipe
attributes to be weighting factors as well (for example, roughness or diameter). The
User-Defined Ratio option assigns the specified proportion of demand to the upstream
junction and the remainder of the demand to the downstream one. These additional
choices allow the proper simulation of a wider range of hydraulic behaviors.
Second, and more importantly, this technique is effective because it lets you specify
tolerances that determine if the pipes to be merged are similar enough that combining
them into a single pipe will not significantly impact the hydraulic behavior of the
network. This increases the number of potential merge candidates over requiring exact
matches, thereby increasing the scope of skeletonization but affecting hydraulics,
since differences in hydraulic properties are ignored.

J1 J2 J3
P1 P2
Length: 250 ft. Length: 350 ft.
Diameter: 8 in. Diameter: 8 in.
Roughness: 120 Roughness: 120
Figure 18-4: Before Series Pipe Merging (Exact Match Pipes)
J1 J3
P1
Length: 600 ft.
Diameter: 8 in.
Roughness: 120
Figure 18-5: After Series Pipe Merging (Exact Match Pipes)
To counter the hydraulic effects of merging pipes with different hydraulic attributes, a
unique hydraulic equivalency feature has been developed. This feature works by
determining the combination of pipe attributes that will most closely mimic the
hydraulic behavior of the pipes to be merged, and applying these attributes to the
newly merged pipe. By generating an equivalent pipe from two non-identical pipes,
the number of possible removal candidates (and thus, the potential level of skeleton-
ization) is greatly increased.
This hydraulic equivalency feature is integral to the application of a high degree of

effective skeletonization, the goal of which is the removal of as many elements as
possible without significantly impacting the accuracy of the model. Only Skelebrator
implements this concept of hydraulic equivalency, breaking the barrier that is raised
by other skeletonizers that only allow exactly matched pipes to be merged by this
process.

J1 J2 J3
P1 P2
Figure 18-6: Before Series Pipe Merging (Different Diameters)
J1 J3
P1

OR
Figure 18-7: After Series Pipe Merging (Using Skelebrator’s Hydraulic

Equivalency feature)
18.3.4 Skelebrator—Parallel Pipe Merging
Parallel Pipe Merging is the process of combining pipes that share the same two end
nodes into a single hydraulically equivalent pipe. This skeletonization strategy relies
on the hydraulic equivalency feature described in “Skelebrator—Series Pipe Merging”
on page 18-628.
To merge parallel pipes, you specify which of the two pipes is the “dominant” one.
The length of the dominant pipe becomes the length of the merged pipe, as does either
the diameter or the roughness value of the dominant pipe. You specify which of the
two attributes to retain (diameter or roughness) and the program determines what the
value of the other attribute should be in order to maintain hydraulic equivalence.
For example, the dominant pipe has a diameter of 10 inches and a C factor of 120; one
of these values is retained. The pipe that will be removed has a diameter of 6 inches
and a C factor of 120. If the 10-inch diameter value is retained, the program performs
hydraulic equivalence calculations to determine what the roughness of the new pipe
should be in order to account for the additional carrying capacity of the parallel pipe
that is being removed.

Because this skeletonization method removes only pipes and accounts for the effect of
the pipes that are removed, the network hydraulics remain intact while increasing the
overall potential for a higher level of skeletonization.
Figure 18-8: Before Parallel Pipe Merging
Figure 18-9: After Parallel Pipe Merging
18.3.5 Skelebrator—Other Skelebrator Features
Skelebrator offers numerous other features that improve the flexibility and ease-of-use
of the skeletonization process.
The Skeletonization Preview option allows you to preview the effects that a given
skeletonization step, or method, will have on the model. This important tool can assist
the modeler in finding potential problems with the reduced model before a single
element is removed from it.
Before skeletonization is begun or between steps, you can use Skelebrator’s protected
element feature to manually mark any junctions or pipes as non-removable. Any pipes
marked in this way will always be preserved by the Skelebrator, even if the elements
meet the removal criteria of the skeletonization process in question. This option
provides the modeler with an additional level of control as well as improving the flex-
ibility of the process.

The ability of the Skelebrator to preserve network integrity by not removing elements
that would cause the network to be invalidated is an important timesaving feature that
can prevent this common error from happening. There may be circumstances,
however, when you do not want or need this additional check, so this option can be
switched off.
For the utmost control over the skeletonization process, you can perform a manual
skeletonization. This feature allows you to step through each individual removal
candidate. The element can then be removed or marked to be excluded from the skele-
tonization. You can save this process and choices you made and reuse them in an auto-
matic skeletonization of the same model.
18.3.6 Skelebrator—Conclusion
With the overwhelming amount of data now available to the water distribution
modeler, some degree of skeletonization is appropriate for practically every model,
although the extent of the skeletonization varies widely depending on the intended
purpose of the model. In light of this, it has become desirable to maintain multiple
models of the same system, each for use in different types of analysis and design.
A model that has been minimally skeletonized serves as a water quality and fire flow
analysis model, while energy cost estimating is performed using a model with a higher
degree of skeletonization.
Creating a number of reduced models with varying levels of skeletonization can be a

lengthy and tedious process, which is where the automated techniques described
above demonstrate their value. To ensure that the skeletonization process produces a
reduced model with the minimum number of elements that is necessary for the
intended application while simultaneously maintaining an accurate simulation of
network behavior, the automated skeletonization routine must be flexible enough to
accommodate a wide variety of conditions.
Skelebrator provides an unmatched level of flexibility, providing numerous demand

reallocation and element removal strategies. It alone amongst automated skeletonizers
maximizes the potential level of skeletonization by introducing the concept of
Hydraulic Equivalence, eliminating the limitation posed by exact attribute matching
requirements. Another distinction is the advanced network walking algorithm
employed by Skelebrator, which ensures that your model remains connected and
valid, thereby greatly reducing the possibility for inadvertent element removal errors.
These features, and others such as the Skeletonization Preview (see “Skeletonization
Preview” on page 18-637) and Manual Skeletonization (see “Manual Skeletonization”
on page 18-639), greatly expedite and simplify the process of generating multiple,
special-purpose water distribution models, each skeletonized to the optimal level for
their intended purpose.

18.4 Using the Skelebrator Software

Skelebrator is available for use with a number of products. Skelebrator has slightly
different behavior and features in some environments. It is available for:
• WaterCAD v6 or higher (Stand Alone and AutoCAD)

• WaterGEMS Modeler
• WaterGEMS (ArcCatalog and ArcMap)
This section describes using the Skelebrator software.
When using Skelebrator, please note:
• We strongly recommended that you first make a copy of your model as a safe
guard before proceeding with Skelebration. In ArcGIS (ArcCatalog or ArcMap),
there is no ability to undo your changes after they have been made.
• We strongly recommended that you eliminate all scenarios other than the one to
be skeletonized from a model prior to skeletonization.
• For information on the reasons for these recommendations, see “Important Skele-
brator Information” on page 18-653.
Note: Skelebrator reduces a WaterGEMS model and applies its

changes to the model’s WaterGEMS datastore, which is
contained within an .MDB file. Skelebrator cannot view or make
changes to a standard GIS geodatabase.
To use Skelebrator with a GIS geodatabase, you must first use

ModelBuilder to create a WaterGEMS datastore from the GIS
data.
To use Skelebrator with a CAD drawing, you must first perform a

Polyline-to-Pipe conversion to create a WaterGEMS datastore
from the CAD file.
Using Skelebrator includes:
• “Skeletonizer Manager” on page 18-634

• “Manual Skeletonization” on page 18-639
• “Smart Pipe Removal Operations” on page 18-642
• “Branch Collapsing Operations” on page 18-644
• “Series Pipe Merging Operations” on page 18-644
• “Parallel Pipe Merging Operations” on page 18-648
• “Add New Operation Dialog Box” on page 18-650

Using the Skelebrator Software
• “Rename Operation Dialog Box” on page 18-650

• “Skelebrator Progress Summary” on page 18-650
• “Conditions and Tolerances” on page 18-650
18.4.1 Skeletonizer Manager
Use Skelebrator’s skeletonization manager to define how you are going to skeletonize
your network. The basic unit in Skelebrator is an operation. An operation defines and
encapsulates the settings required to be defined in order to perform some reduction
process on your hydraulic network. Skelebrator provides these types of operation that
may be used to reduce the size of your mode:
• Smart Pipe Removal (See “Skelebrator—Smart Pipe Removal” on page 18-626)

• Branch Collapsing (See “Skelebrator—Branch Collapsing” on page 18-627)
• Series Pipe Merging (See “Skelebrator—Series Pipe Merging” on page 18-628)
• Parallel Pipe Merging (See “Skelebrator—Parallel Pipe Merging” on page 18-
630)
To use Skeletonizer Manager:
1. Click the skeletonization technique you want to use: Smart Pipe Removal, Branch
Collapsing, Series Pipe Merging, Parallel Pipe Merging.
2. Click New.
3. Type the name you want to use for the operation you are creating, or keep the
default name.
4. Click OK. The respective operation editor will be displayed.
5. Choose your settings and conditions.
6. Click OK.
New—Click New to add a skeletonization operation. This adds an operation

for the option that is currently selected: Smart Pipe Removal, Branch
Collapsing, Series Pipe Merging, or Parallel Pipe Merging. Skelebrator
performs a single operation at a time. An operation consists of the strategy to use
(Smart Pipe Removal, Branch Collapsing, etc.) and the settings and conditions
specific to that operation. One operation might be branch trim pipes < 6-in. diameter.
Edit—Click Edit (or double-click an operation) to edit the currently selected opera-
tion. If there is no operation listed, you must first Add one by selecting New.
Rename—Click Rename to rename the currently-selected operation.

Duplicate—Click Duplicate to create a copy of the currently-selected operation. You

can rename and edit the copy as needed.
Delete—Click Delete to remove the currently selected operations from the list.
Go—To run automatic skeletonization and apply your skeletonization opera-

tions to your model, click Go. The run is executed using the selected (high-
lighted) operations. You can select more than one operation.
Manual—Click Manual to manually run the skeletonization operation.

Manual skeletonization lets you conduct skeletonizations in a concise and
controlled manner, whilst viewing the pipes that will be removed and gives
you the opportunity to protect some of those pipes on a real-time basis. For more
information, see “Manual Skeletonization” on page 18-639.
Note: The preview feature is not available when running WaterGEMS

from ArcCatalog or ArcMap.
Preview—To preview the results of your skeletonization, click Preview. For

more information, see “Skeletonization Preview” on page 18-637.
Export—Select Export to export the current Skelebrator setup. All your defined
Skelebrator operations, batch run settings, and protected element settings will be
saved to an .SKE file of your choice. (An .SKE file is a file in XML, eXtensible
Markup Language, format that contains all of the settings related to your skelebra-
tion.) We strongly recommended that you do not manually modify the contents of any
.SKE file.
Import—Select Import to import a previously exported Skelebrator setup (*.SKE

file).
Note: Protected Element Settings are saved as references to the

originally skeletonized model. Using the Skelebrator protected
element settings with a different model is likely to result in
different (and unintended) elements being protected from
skeletonization. If you wish to re-run previously-saved
skeletonizations on the original model, be sure to save your
Skelebrator setup with the original model or in a place with a
name that make it obvious that the export file belongs to that
particular model. If you are not using the protected element
feature, then this caution does not apply.
For more information, see “Important Skelebrator Information” on

page 18-653.
Protected Pipes—Click the Protected Pipes button to specify that certain pipes in
your model are protected from being removed as part of the skeletonization process.
Under all circumstances, pipes listed as protected will not be removed by Skelebrator.
For more information, see “Protected Pipes and Protected Junctions” on page 18-641.

Protected Junctions—Click the Protected Junctions button to specify that certain

junctions in your model are protected from being removed as part of the skeletoniza-
tion process. Under all circumstances, junctions listed as protected will not be
removed by Skelebrator. For more information, see “Protected Pipes and Protected
Junctions” on page 18-641.
Note: Pumps, tanks, valves and reservoirs are automatically protected

from skeletonization and will never be skeletonized by
Skelebrator. The only exception to this is during Series Pipe
Merging you may select to treat TCV (Throttle Control Valves) as
junctions by selecting the Allow Removal of TCVs option. In that
situation TCVs may be removed from your model.
Batch Run—Whereas automatic runs only selected skeletonization operations of the

same type, Batch Run lets you choose which of all your defined skeletonization oper-
ations to run and in what order to run them. Use Batch Run if you want to run skele-
tonization operations for more than one option, e.g., a combination of Smart Pipe
Removal, Branch Collapsing, Series Pipe Merging, or Parallel Pipe Merging opera-
tions and where the order of applied operations is important. For more information,
see “Batch Run” on page 18-640.

Skeletonization Preview
Skeletonization preview lets you review the affects of a skeletonization on your model
without actually making any changes to or deletions from your model. To use the
preview feature:
1. Create a skeletonization operation and select it.
2. Click the Preview button.

3. The network displays in the preview window.

File: File lets you export your network to AutoCAD .DXF

format. For more information, see “Advanced DXF
Import Techniques” on page 16-606.
Pan/Zoom Tools: Use the Pan and Zoom buttons to change your view of
the network. For example, you might want to magnify a
section of the network by zooming in.
Options: Use the Options button to find an element or change how
your network displays. The preview feature uses three
colors to display a preview of your network. Using three
different colors lets you distinguish:
• Unchanged Elements
• Modified Elements
• Deleted Elements
You can use colors and change the size of affected
elements to better see and understand how
skeletonization affects your network.

Click the Ellipsis

button to choose
a color from the
color palette
Print Preview: Use Print Preview to review how your network will print.
For more information, see “Print Preview Window” on
page 13-559.
Close: Click Close to exit the preview window.
18.4.2 Manual Skeletonization
If you click the Manual Skeletonization button, the Manual Skeletonization Review
dialog box opens. The manual skeletonization review dialog box lists the proposed
skeletonization actions for the particular skeletonization process selected. The
contents of the action list window (to the left of the buttons) will vary depending on
the type of operation being run. For Smart Pipe Removal and Branch Collapsing each
Skelebrator action will have one pipe associated with it whereas Series and Parallel
Pipe Merging will have two pipes associated with each action. For Smart Pipe
Removal, when network integrity is enforced, the contents of the action list are
updated, after every executed action, to reflect only valid actions, after each action is
performed.
Go To1—Select an element in the element window and click Go To to jump to the

element in WaterGEMS. WaterGEMS displays the element at the level of zoom you
selected in the Zoom drop-down list.
Next1—Click Next to preview the next element in the Manual Skeletonization

Review dialog box.
Previous1—Click Previous to preview the previous element to the one you have
selected in the Manual Skeletonization Review dialog box.
1. Not available when using Skelebrator from ArcCatalog or ArcMap.

Protect—Click Protect to protect the selected element. Protected elements cannot be

deleted from the network by skeletonization. In a Series or Parallel Pipe Merging
operation, protecting one pipe in an action will mean that the action will not be able to
be executed. The remaining un-protected pipe will not be skeletonized during this
skeletonization level; however, it is not precluded from subsequent skeletonization
levels unless it also is protected.
Execute—Click Execute to run Skelebrator only for the selected Skelebrator action.
In the case of Smart Pipe Removal and Branch Collapsing the associated pipe will be
removed from the model, and associated loads redistributed as specified. Additionally,
for branch collapsing, one junction will be removed. For Series Pipe Merging two
pipes and one junction will be removed, associated loads redistributed as specified and
an equivalent pipe added as a replacement, if the option is selected. Otherwise, the
properties of the dominant pipe will be used to create a new pipe. For Parallel Pipe
Merging, one pipe will be removed and the remaining pipe will be updated to the
hydraulic equivalent, if you selected hydraulic equivalency.
Auto Next?1—Select this check box if you wish for Skelebrator to immediately
advance to the next pipe element in the action list. This is the equivalent of clicking
Execute then clicking Next immediately afterwards.
Close—Click Close to exit the Manual Skeletonization Review dialog box. Any
remaining actions listed will not be executed.
Zoom1—Select a Zoom at which you want to display elements you preview using Go
To, Previous, and Next.
Batch Run
Note: The batch run manager does not become available until at least
one Skelebrator operation is added.
All operations selected into the lower window of the batch run
manager dialog box will be executed during a batch run. There is
no need to select (highlight) the operations before running them.
Conversely, selecting only some operations in this window does
not mean only those operations will be run.
If you click the Batch Run button, the Batch Run Manager opens. Use the Batch Run
Manager to select the skeletonization strategies you want to use and the order in which
you want to run them.
Operations appearing in the top window are the operations you have defined and
which are available for use in a batch run. Any operations in this window may be
selected for a batch run. The same operation can be selected multiple times.

Click Add to add a selected operations to the lower window. Any operations in the
lower window are selected as part of the batch run. Use the Remove, Move Up, and
Move Down buttons to manage the makeup and order of the operations in the batch
run list.
Note: When using Skelebrator from ArcCatalog or ArcMap, only

automatic skeletonization is an option and only a GO button is
available (with no drop-down selection menu).
Click GO > Run Batch to commence an automatic skeletonization using the opera-
tions you have defined in your batch run.
Click GO > Preview to preview the results of the operations you have defined in your
batch run.
Protected Pipes and Protected Junctions
Note: Simply by its presence in the left hand side removable elements
window an element is not guaranteed to be skeletonized. In
order to be skeletonized the element must meet all other
conditional, tolerance and topological criteria, be active in the
current topological alternative and have no external references
such as calibration observed data, simple control references,
logical control references, VSP control node references, or WQ
(Water Quality) Trace Node references. Only then will the
element be skeletonized.
The Protected Elements Manager provides a way of making certain elements in your
model immune to skeletonization. Use this feature to mark important elements in your
model as not skeletonizable. Note that only pipes and junctions may be protected from
skeletonization since all other node elements (valves, pumps, tanks and reservoirs) are
already immune to skeletonization. (TCVs are the noted exception to this rule and
may be treated as junctions, if selected, during Series Pipe Merging.)
Elements displayed in the left hand side window are potential skeletonization candi-
dates and elements displayed in the right hand side window are immune to skeleton-
ization.
Junctions/Base Demand—If you choose to set up protection for junctions, the Junc-
tions and Base Demand column headings are displayed. Clicking these column head-
ings lets you sort the list of elements.
Pipes/Diameter—If you choose to set up protection for pipes, the Pipes and Diameter
column headings display. Clicking these column headings lets you sort the list of
elements.

Tip: Right-click anywhere in either the removable elements window

or non-removable elements window in order to customize the
units and precision of the displayed values.
You can use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to select multiple
elements at once. Double-clicking an element will move it to the
opposite list.
Use the following buttons:
>—to protect the selected elements. If you subsequently click OK, that element
cannot be removed by Skelebrator.
>>—to protect all of the elements.
<—to unprotect the selected elements. If you subsequently click OK, that element is
available for removal by Skelebrator.
<<—to unprotect all of the elements.
OK—Click OK to apply your changes.
Cancel—Click Cancel to exit Protected Elements Manager without saving any

changes.
18.4.3 Smart Pipe Removal Operations
Note: We recommend that Smart Pipe Removal be performed with

conditions defined. At the very least, a limiting condition placed
on pipe diameter should be used. Smart Pipe Removal is
designed to allow removal of small diameter pipes (including
those that form parts of loops) and thus it is recommended that
smart pipe removal be used with a condition that limits the
scope to only remove small diameter pipes.
When you add or edit a removal operation, the Smart Pipe Removal Operation Editor
dialog box opens. Removal operations have two sets of parameters, Settings and
Conditions.
1. Click the Settings tab to edit settings.

– Preserve Network Integrity—Select Preserve Network Integrity if you
want Skelebrator to ensure the topological integrity of your network will not
be broken by a removal operation. All non-junction node elements (valves,
tanks, pumps and reservoirs) will remain connected to the network, and the
network will not be disconnected by Skelebrator. Total system demand will be
preserved. Any junctions marked as non-removable will also remain
connected to the network.

– Remove Orphaned Nodes—Select Remove Orphaned Nodes if you want

Skelebrator to find and automatically remove any nodes left disconnected
from the network after removal operations. (Orphaned or disconnected nodes
are solitary nodes no longer connected to any pipes. By virtue of the nature of
pipe removal, junctions can be left disconnected.) Note that Skelebrator does
not remove any orphaned nodes that were orphaned prior to skeletonization.
This option is not available if the preserve network integrity is not selected. If
you leave this option unchecked, your model will contain junctions not physi-
cally connected to the hydraulic network, which will result in warning
messages when you run your model.
– Loop Retaining Sensitivity—Adjust the loop retaining sensitivity in order to
control how sensitive the pipe removal algorithm is to retaining loops in your
model. The lower the setting is, and in the absence of any other limiting
conditions, the higher number of loops will be retained in your model (i.e.,
loops are less likely to be broken). Conversely, a higher setting will favor
retaining less loops in your model. Use this setting in tandem with Skele-
brator’s preview feature to get a feel for the effect of the various settings. This
option is only available if you have selected the Preserve Network Integrity
option.
2. Click Conditions to edit or create pipe conditions. You can add more than one
condition.
3. Click Add to add pipe conditions. You can add more than one condition.
4. Or, select an existing condition and click Edit to modify a selected condition.
The condition editor lets you define pipe conditions that determine which pipes are
included in the Smart pipe Removal process. It is acceptable to define an operation
that has no conditions (the default). In this case no pipes will be excluded from the
skeletonization based on any of their physical attributes alone.

18.4.4 Branch Collapsing Operations
When you add or edit a Branch Collapsing operation, the Branch Collapsing Opera-
tion Editor dialog box opens. Branch Collapsing operations have two sets of parame-
ters, Settings and Conditions.

– Maximum Number of Trimming Levels—Set the maximum number of
trimming levels you want to allow. In Branch Collapsing, a single trimming
level run to completion would trim every valid branch in the model back by
one pipe link. Two trimming levels would trim every valid branch back two
pipe links and so on.
– Load Distribution Strategy—Select what you want to do with the hydraulic
load on the sections you trim. The choices are Don’t Move Load, which
means that the demands are no longer included in the model, or Move Load,
which means transfer the demands to the upstream node.
2. Click Conditions to edit or create conditions.

3. Click Add to add conditions. You can add pipe and/or junction conditions. You
can add more than one condition.
4. Or, select an existing condition and click Edit to modify a selected condition. You
can add and edit Junction and Pipe Conditions.
The condition editor lets you set select parameters that determine which pipes are
included in the skeletonizing process. In Branch Collapsing, the junctions referred
to (in junction conditions) are the two end junctions of the pipe being trimmed.
Tolerances can also be defined for junctions. Tolerances work by limiting the
pipes skeletonized only to the ones that have the specified attribute within the
specified tolerance. For example, in Branch Collapsing a tolerance on junction
elevation of 3 feet would limit skeletonization to pipes that had both end junctions
with an elevation within three feet of each other.
18.4.5 Series Pipe Merging Operations
Note: In WaterGEMS Modeler, you can assign prefixes and/or suffixes

to pipes and junctions created during Series Pipe Merging
operations by using the Element Labeling feature.
For instance, to assign a prefix of “sk” to all pipes that are

merged using the Series Pipe Merging operation, open the
Element Labeling dialog box and enter “sk” before the “P-” in
the Prefix field of the Pressure Pipe row. Any pipes merged

during the Series Pipe Merging will now be labeled “skP-1”,”

skP-2”, etc. Remember to reinstate the original prefixes/suffixes
after skeletonization has been performed. For more information
about Element Labeling, see “Element Labeling” on page 5-271.
When you add or edit a Series Pipe Merging operation, the Series Pipe Merging Oper-
ation Editor dialog box opens. Operations have two sets of parameters, Settings and
Conditions.

– Maximum Number of Removal Levels—Select the number of levels of
pipes that get removed per iteration of the Series Pipe Merging operation. The
maximum number of removal levels is 50. This is because in the absence of
any other limiting factors (conditions, protected elements, non-removable
nodes, etc.) one series pipe removal iteration will effectively halve the number
of pipes. A second iteration will again halve the number of pipes, and so on.
Therefore, 50 is the practical limit for removal levels.
– Dominant Pipe Criteria—Select the criteria by which Skelebrator deter-
mines the dominant pipe. The dominant pipe is the pipe whose properties are
retained as appropriate. For example, when merging a 6-in. pipe and 8-in.
pipe, if diameter is selected as the dominant pipe criteria then the larger diam-
eter pipe (e.g., 8-in.) will provide the properties for the new pipe. That is, the
8-in. pipe’s diameter, roughness, bulk reaction rate etc will be used for the
new pipe.
– Use Equivalent Pipes—Select Use Equivalent Pipe if you want Skelebrator
to adjust the merged pipe properties as such to attain equivalent hydraulics as
the two merged pipes.
– Equivalent Pipe Method—Select whether you wish to modify the dominant
pipe roughness or the dominant pipe diameter for the equivalent pipe calcula-
tions.
- Modify Diameter
- Modify Roughness
If modify diameter is selected, the new pipe’s roughness is kept constant and
the diameter adjusted such that the head loss through the pipe remains
constant. Conversely if modify roughness is selected, the new pipe’s diameter
is kept constant and the roughness adjusted such that the head loss through the
pipe remains constant.

Note: When using Darcy-Weisbach for the friction method, Modify

Diameter is the only available selection since calculated
equivalent roughnesses can be invalid (negative) in some
circumstances.
– Load Distribution Strategy—Select how you want the load distributed from
junctions that are removed.
- Equally Distributed puts 50% of the load on the starting and ending
junctions of the post-skeletonized pipe.
Note: For the length attribute, load assignment is inversely

proportional, such that the closest junction gets the majority of
the demand.
- Proportional to Dominant Criteria assigns loads proportional to the

attribute used to select the dominant pipe. For example, if diameter is the
dominant attribute and one pipe is 6-in., while the other is 8-in. (14-in.
total length), 8/14 of the load will go to the upstream node, while 6/14
will go to the downstream node.
- Proportional to Existing Load maintains the pre-skeletonization load
proportions.
- User-Defined Ratio lets you specify the percentage of the load applied to
the upstream node in the post-skeletonized pipe.
Note: If either of the uncommon nodes of the two pipes being merged
are not junction nodes, then the selected load distribution
strategy is ignored and all load is moved to the junction node. If
both uncommon nodes are not junctions, then skeletonization is
only carried out if the common junction node has zero demand.
– Upstream Node Demand Proportion—Set a user-defined load distribution

percentage. Set the percentage of the node demand that you want applied to
the upstream node adjacent to the removed sections. This parameter is only
available if you select User Defined in the Load Distribution Strategy drop-
down list. Upstream in this context relates to the physical topology of the pipe
and its nodes and may not correspond to the direction of flow in either the pre-
skeletonized or post-skeletonized pipe.

Note: The resulting pipe from a Series Pipe Merging operation is

routed in the same direction as the dominant pipe. Therefore,
upstream and downstream nodes relate to the topological
direction of the dominant pipe. If check valves are present, then
the resulting pipe is routed in direction the direction of the pipe
that contains the check valve. If check valves are present in both
pipes and those pipes oppose each other then skeletonization is
not performed.
– Apply Minor Losses—Select Apply Minor Losses if you wish for Skele-
brator to preserve any minor losses attached to the pipes in your network. For
Series Pipe Merging the minor losses for the original pipes are summed and
added to the resulting pipe. If this option is not selected then the minor loss of
the resulting pipe will be set to zero.
Tip: To combine only pipes with the same hydraulic characteristics

(i.e., diameter and roughness), create a Series Pipe Removal
Operation and click the Conditions tab. Then, add a pipe
tolerance condition of 0.0 and a roughness tolerance condition
of 0.0. Also, make sure to deselect the Use Equivalent Pipes
check box.
– Allow Removal of TCVs—Activate this option by checking the box to allow

Skelebrator to remove TCVs during the Series Pipe Merging operation.
2. Click Conditions to edit or create conditions.
a. Click Add to add conditions. You can add pipe and/or junction conditions.
You can add more than one condition.
b. Or, select an existing condition and click Edit to modify a selected condition.
You can add and edit Junction and Pipe Conditions.
Note: In the case where not all nodes connected to the two pipes are
junctions, tolerances are only evaluated based upon the junction
type nodes. For example, if a tolerance of 5gpm was defined this
would not invalidate the merging of two pipes that had one
uncommon node that was a pump, for example. The tolerance
condition would be evaluated based only upon the two junction
type nodes.
The Pipe Condition Editor lets you set select parameters that determine which
pipes are included in the skeletonizing process. Tolerances can also be speci-
fied for both pipe and junction conditions.
In the context of series pipe merging, pipe tolerances are calculated between
the specified attribute of the two pipes to be merged. For example, a tolerance
on diameter of 2-in. means that only pipes within a range of 2-in. diameter of
each other will be merged (i.e., a 6-in. and an 8-in. pipe would be merged, an
8-in. and a 12-in. pipe would not).

In the context of series pipe merging, junction tolerances are calculated on all
present junctions. If all three nodes are junctions, then all three junctions will
be used to evaluate the tolerance. For example, a tolerance of 10 ft. on eleva-
tion would mean that the two pipes would not be merged unless all of the
three junctions had an elevation within 10 ft. of each other.
18.4.6 Parallel Pipe Merging Operations
Note: In WaterGEMS Modeler, you can assign prefixes and/or suffixes

to pipes and junctions created during Parallel Pipe Merging
operations by using the Element Labeling feature.
For instance, to assign a prefix of “sk” to all pipes that are

merged using the Parallel Pipe Merging operation, open the
Element Labeling dialog box and enter “sk” before the “P-” in
the Prefix field of the Pressure Pipe row. Any pipes merged
during the Parallel Pipe Merging will now be labeled “skP-1”,”
skP-2”, etc. For more information about Element Labeling, see
“Element Labeling” on page 5-271.
When you add or edit a Parallel Pipe Merging operation, the Parallel Pipe Merging
Operation Editor dialog box opens. Operations have two sets of parameters, Settings
and Conditions.
1. Click Settings to edit or create settings.

2. Click Add to add a new pipe condition.
3. Or, select a condition and click Edit to change its parameters.
The condition editor lets you set select parameters that determine which pipes are
included in the skeletonization process.
Maximum Number of Removal Levels—Set the maximum number of removal

levels you want to allow. In the context of Parallel Pipe Merging a single removal
level will merge two parallel pipes. Consider a case where there exists 4 pipes in
parallel. It would take 3 removal levels to merge all 4 pipes into a single pipe. In the
first removal level, two pipes are merged leaving three pipes. In the second level
another two pipes are merged leaving only two pipes. The last two pipes are merged
into a single pipe in the third removal level. Unless you have a large degree of parallel
pipes in your model, one or two levels of Parallel Pipe Merging will generally be all
that is necessary to merge the majority of parallel pipes in your system.

Dominant Pipe Criteria—Select the criteria by which Skelebrator determines the

dominant pipe. The dominant pipe is the pipe whose properties are retained as appro-
priate. For example, when merging a 6-in. pipe and 8-in. pipe, if diameter is selected
as the dominant pipe criteria then the larger diameter pipe (e.g., 8-in.) will provide the
properties for the new pipe. That is, the 8-in. pipe’s diameter, roughness, bulk reaction
rate, etc., will be used for the new pipe.
Use Equivalent Pipes—Select Use Equivalent Pipe if you want Skelebrator to adjust
remaining pipes to accommodate the removal of other pipes in series.
Equivalent Pipe Method—Select whether you wish to modify the dominant pipe
roughness or the dominant pipe diameter for the equivalent pipe calculations.
• Modify Diameter
• Modify Roughness
If modify diameter is selected, the new pipe’s roughness is kept constant and the diam-
eter adjusted such that the head loss through the pipe remains constant. Conversely, if
modify roughness is selected, the new pipe’s diameter is kept constant and the rough-
ness adjusted such that the head loss through the pipe remains constant.
Note: When using Darcy-Weisbach for the friction method, Modify

Diameter is the only available selection since calculated
equivalent roughnesses can be invalid (negative) in some
circumstances.
Minor Loss Strategy—If your network models minor losses, select what you want
Skelebrator to do with them.
• Use Ignore Minor Losses if you want to ignore any minor losses in parallel pipes.
Resulting merged pipes will have a minor loss of 0.
• Use Skip Pipe if Minor Loss > Max to protect from skeletonization any pipes
that have a higher minor loss than a value you set for the Maximum Minor Loss.
• Use 50/50 Split to apply 50% of the sum of the minor losses from the parallel
pipes to the replacement pipe that Skeletonizer uses.
Maximum Minor Loss—If you select Skip Pipe if Minor Loss > Max from the Minor
Loss Strategy drop-down list, any pipes with a minor loss value greater than the value
you set will not be removed by Skelebrator.

18.4.7 Add New Operation Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when the New button is clicked in the Skeletonization
Manager. The text field allows you to enter a identifying label for the newly created
operation.
18.4.8 Rename Operation Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when the Rename button is clicked in the Skeletonization
Manager. The text field allows you to change the identifying label for the highlighted
operation.
18.4.9 Skelebrator Progress Summary
This dialog box appears following the successful completion of an automatic skele-
tonization operation. The text pane provides information concerning the operation that
was performed, including the model name, date, the length of time the operation took
to run, and the number of elements that were deleted.
18.4.10 Conditions and Tolerances
Conditions and Tolerances are used in Skelebrator to define the scope of Skelebrator
operations. They consists of an attribute (e.g., diameter), an operator (e.g., less than)
and a unitized value (e.g., 6 inches). These values together define the effect of the
condition. The examples just listed when combined into a condition would reduce the
scope of an operation to only skeletonizing pipes with a diameter less than 6 inches.
A condition is able to be assessed based on a single element type, regardless of

topology. It is possible to assess whether pipes meet the specified condition of diam-
eter less than 6 inches without knowing the pipes’ location in the hydraulic model.
Tolerances, however, are different. They are assessed based on the ensuing topology,
and thus, the meaning of a tolerance varies depending on Skelebrator operation type.
Additionally, the tolerance operator is not available when it doesn’t make sense. For
example, it does not make sense to define a pipe tolerance for Smart Pipe Removal
since only a single pipe is being considered at a time. An example of a valid tolerance
is for Branch Collapsing where a junction tolerance can be specified between the two
end junctions of the pipe.
Conditions and tolerances are cumulative. That is with every additional condition, the
number of pipes able to be skeletonized will be reduced. Setting conflicting conditions
such as diameter < 6-in. and diameter > 8-in. will result in no pipes being able to be
skeletonized since conditions are joined with the logical AND operator. It is not
possible to specify OR conditions or tolerances.

It is possible to specify no conditions for a particular operation. In that case all pipes
are valid for skeletonization based on their physical attributes.
However, conditions and tolerances are not the only elements that determine whether
a pipe will be skeletonized. For a pipe to be skeletonized it has to meet all of the
following criteria:
• Be valid in terms of the network topology with respect to the particular skeleton-
ization operation. That is, during Branch Reduction the pipe has to be part of a
branch. Any pipes whose topology dictates they are not part of a branch will not
be skeletonized.
• Must not be an element that is inactive as part of a topological alternative. All
inactive topological elements are immune to skeletonization.
• Must not be referenced by a logical control, simple control, or calibration
observed data set.
• Must not be connected to a VSP control node or the trace node for WQ analysis.
• Must not be a user-protected element.
• Must meet all user defined conditional and tolerance criteria.
Conditions and tolerances includes:
• “Pipe Conditions and Tolerances” on page 18-651

• “Junction Conditions and Tolerances” on page 18-652
• “Add New Operation Dialog Box” on page 18-650
• “Rename Operation Dialog Box” on page 18-650
• “Skelebrator Progress Summary” on page 18-650
• “Important Skelebrator Information” on page 18-653
Pipe Conditions and Tolerances

Click Add to add conditions. You can add more than one condition. The Pipe Condi-
tion Editor opens. This lets you set select parameters that determine which pipes are
included in the skeletonization process.
Attribute—Select the Attribute that you want to use to determine which pipes to skel-
etonize. These include:
• Diameter
• Length
• Roughness
• Minor Loss Coefficient

• Check Valve
• Bulk Reaction Rate
• Wall Reaction Rate
Operator—Select an operator that defines the relationship between the attribute you
select and the value you select for that attribute. For example, if you select an attribute
of Diameter, an operator of Less Than, and a value of 6 in., then any pipes with less
than a 6-in. diameter are valid for skeletonization. Depending on operation type,
Tolerance may also be an option for operator. When using a tolerance, a tolerance (as
opposed to a condition) is defined. For example, in the context of Series Pipe Merging
where two pipes are being merged, a tolerance of 2-in. diameter means that those
pipes will only be merged if their diameters are within 2-in. of each other.
Value—The label, units, and appropriate value range depend on the attribute you
select.
Junction Conditions and Tolerances

The Junction Condition Editor lets you set selective parameters that determine which
junctions are included in the Branch Collapsing process.
Attribute—Select the Attribute that you want to use to determine which junctions to
trim. These include:
• Base Demand
• Emitter Coefficient
• Elevation
Operator—Select an operator that defines the relationship between the attribute you
select and the value you select for that attribute. For example, if you select an attribute
of Base Demand, an operator of Less Than, and a value of 50 gpm, any pipes with end
nodes with a base demand less than 50 gpm are valid for skeletonization.
Value—The label, units, and appropriate value range depend on the attribute you
select.
Junction tolerances are only evaluated against junctions. For example, if two series
pipes are to be merged, but their common node is a pump, any defined junction toler-
ance is evaluated based on the two end nodes only.
Where only one junction exists, as may be the case when allowing skeletonization of
TCVs, tolerance conditions are not evaluated and do not limit the scope of the skele-
tonization.

18.5 Important Skelebrator Information

Consider the following before using Skelebrator:
• “Backing Up Your Model” on page 18-653

• “Skeletonization and Scenarios” on page 18-653
• “Importing/Exporting Skelebrator Settings” on page 18-655
• “Skeletonization and Active Topology” on page 18-656
18.5.1 Backing Up Your Model
Note: We strongly recommended that you first make a copy of your

model as a safe guard before proceeding with Skelebration.
In ArcGIS (ArcCatalog or ArcMap), there is no ability to undo your changes after they
have been made. Skelebrator makes transactions against the GEMS database without
the ability to rollback those changes. From within WaterCAD v6 (Stand Alone or
AutoCAD), and WaterGEMS Modeler, changes can be undone on a global level by
not saving the model after skeletonizing. However, any changes made prior to skele-
bration will also be lost if this method of avoiding committing skeletonization changes
is used.
Making a copy of your model up front will ensure that you can always get back to
your original model if problems occur.
18.5.2 Skeletonization and Scenarios
Note: Before you use Skelebrator, we strongly recommended that you

eliminate from your model all scenarios other than the one to be
skeletonized.
Skelebrator is designed to skeletonize a single scenario at a time. Specifically, skele-

brator modifies information in the set of alternatives (topological, demand, physical
etc.) that are referred to by the currently selected scenario. It follows that any other
scenarios that refer to these alternatives in some way can also potentially be modified
by skeletonization, but most likely in an undesirable and inconsistent way, since skel-
etonization only works on the data in the alternatives referenced by the currently
active scenario.
For example, a second scenario that references all the same alternatives as the scenario
being skeletonized except for, say, the demand alternative, will itself be seemingly
skeletonized (its topological and physical alternatives etc are modified) except that the
values of demands in its local demand records have no way of being factored into the

Important Skelebrator Information
skeletonization process. Due to this, demands may actually be lost since pipes that
were deleted (e.g., dead ends) did not have their local demands relocated upstream.
Relocated demands will represent the result of merging the demands in the parent
alternative, and not those of the child alternative where local records are present.
Due to the behavior of skeletonization with respect to scenarios and alternatives, and
to save possible confusion after skeletonization, it is very strongly recommended that
you eliminate all other scenarios (other than the one to be skeletonized) from the
model prior to skeletonization. Some exceptions, however, exist to this recommenda-
tion and may provide some additional flexibility to those users who have a strong
desire to skeletonize multiple scenarios. In general, it is strongly recommended that
multiple scenario skeletonization be avoided.
A multiple scenario model can be successfully skeletonized only if all of the following
conditions are met:
• All scenarios all belong to the same parent-child hierarchy

• The scenario being selected for skeletonization must contain only parent (base)
alternatives
• All elements that reference local records in any child alternative are protected
from skeletonization
As a simple example, consider a model with two scenarios, Base and Fire Flow. The
Base scenario references a set of parent (base) alternatives, and the Fire Flow scenario
references all the same alternatives, except for the demand alternative, where it refer-
ences a child alternative of the Base scenario demand alternative, with local records at
junctions A-90 and A-100 which are to model the additional flow at the fire flow junc-
tions. This model meets all of the above 3 conditions and thus skeletonization of this
model can be conducted successfully for all scenarios in the model, but only if all of
the following skeletonization rules are adhered to:
• The Base scenario is always selected for skeletonization

• The elements associated with local demand records (i.e., junctions A-90 and A-
100 in our example) are protected from skeletonization using the Skelebrator
element protection feature
The reason the base scenario (a) must be selected for skeletonization is so that only
parent (base) alternatives are modified by skeletonization. This is so that changes
made to alternatives propagate down the parent-child hierarchy. If skeletonization was
to occur on a scenario that referenced child alternatives, then the changes made to the
scenario will not propagate back up the parent-child hierarchy, and would result in
incorrect results.

The reason for the element protections (b) is to limit the scope of skeletonization to
the data common to both scenarios. That is, any model elements that possess any local
records in any referenced child alternative, are excluded from the skeletonization
since the differences in properties between the child and parent alternatives cannot be
resolved in a skeletonization process that acts for all intents and purposes on a single
scenario. This idiom can be extended to other alternative types besides the demand
alternative.
18.5.3 Importing/Exporting Skelebrator Settings
Note: We strongly recommended that you review protected element

settings when importing an .SKE file that was created using a
different model.
Skeletonization settings can be saved and restored by using Skelebrator’s import/

export feature. This feature allows all skeletonization settings to be retained and
reused later on the same computer, or on different computers as required.
In addition to saving skelebrator operations and batch run settings, protected element
information is saved. Ideally, this information should be stored only with the model
that it pertains to, because it only makes sense for that model, but that limitation
would prevent skelebrator settings to be shared between different projects or users.
The caveat of allowing protected element information to be saved in a file that is sepa-
rate to the original model, and thus be able to be shared between users, is that the situ-
ation is created whereby importing an .SKE file that was created with another model
can result in meaningless protected element information being imported, in the
context of the new model.
However, your protected element information will probably be valid if you import a
skelebrator .SKE file that was created using the same original model, or a model that
is closely related to the original. The reason for this is that protected element informa-
tion is stored in an .SKE file by recording the element’s GEMS IDs from the GEMS
database. For the same or closely related models, the same pipes and junctions will
still have the same GEMS IDs and, so will remain correctly protected.
Protected element behavior for imported files is not guaranteed because a potential
problem arises when elements that were deleted from the model were previously
marked as protected and where the following three things have happened in order:
1. Modeling elements (pipes, junctions) have been deleted from the model.
2. The model database is compacted (thus making available the IDs of deleted
elements for new ones).
3. New elements (pipes, junctions) have been added to the model after compaction,
potentially using IDs of elements that have been deleted earlier.

From the above steps, it is possible that the IDs of new pipe or junction elements are
the same as previously protected and deleted elements, thereby causing the new
elements to be protected from skeletonization when they should not necessarily be
protected.
Even though the above protected-element behavior is conservative by nature, it is

recommended that you review protected element information after importing an .SKE
file to make sure that it is correct for your intended skeletonization purposes.
18.5.4 Skeletonization and Active Topology
Skeletonization occurs on only active topology, but considers all topology. That is,
any inactive topology of a model is unable to be skeletonized, but is not outright
ignored for skeletonization purposes. This fact can be used to perform spatial skele-
tonization. For example, if you only wish to skeletonize a portion of your model, you
can temporarily deactivate the topology you wish to be immune to skeletonization,
remembering of course, to reactivate it after you have completed the skeletonization
process. Any points where inactive topology ties in to the active topology will not be
compromised. To better explain this, consider two series pipes that are not merged by
series pipe removal. Under most circumstances two series pipes that meet the
following conditions will be skeletonized:
• Meet topological criteria (e.g., that the two pipes are in series and have a common
node that is legal to remove, i.e., not a tank, reservoir, valve or pump)
• Meet all conditional and tolerance based criteria
• Are not protected from skeletonization
• Have a common node that is not protected from skeletonization
• Have no simple control or logical control references
• Have no calibration references including to the junctions they are routed between
• Are routed between nodes that are free of references from variable speed pumps
(VSPs)
• Are routed between nodes that are free from Water Quality (WQ) trace analysis
references
• Are routed between nodes that represent at least one junction, if the common node
is a loaded junction (so the load can be distributed)
• Do not have opposing check valves

The two series pipes still may not be skeletonized if any inactive topology could be
affected by the execution of the skeletonization action. For example, if the two series
pipes have an additional, but inactive pipe connected to their common node, and if the
series pipe removal action was allowed to proceed, the common node would be
removed from the model, and the inactive topology would become invalid. This is
prevented from occurring in Skelebrator.


Chapter
WaterSafe 19
WaterSafe is an extension of the WaterCAD water quality simulation capability. It
allows you to run multiple constituent, trace, and age analyses, and it also incorporates
previously unavailable statistical results. Enhanced reporting and graphing capabili-
ties improve your ability to compare, examine and predict the effects of various water
quality scenarios.
19.1 WaterSafe Manager

The WaterSafe Manager provides a central location to store and manage your Water-
Safe analysis projects. It is divided into two panes—the left pane allows you to select
the analysis type, while the right pane displays all of the projects of the highlighted
type. For instance, highlighting Trace Analysis in the left pane will cause all of the
previously created Trace Analysis projects to be displayed in the right pane.
Above the right pane are eight command buttons, as follows:
New—This command creates a new analysis project of the currently high-

lighted type.
Edit—This command opens the Analysis Project Editor for the currently high-
lighted analysis project.
Rename—This command allows you to rename the currently highlighted

analysis project.
Duplicate—This command creates a copy of the currently highlighted anal-

ysis project.
Delete—This command removes the currently highlighted analysis project.
Go—This command calculates the currently highlighted analysis project.
Graph—This command opens the WaterSafe graph manager.

Trace Analysis Project Editor
Report—This command opens the WaterSafe report manager.
19.2 Trace Analysis Project Editor

The trace analysis editor allows you to create trace analysis projects. First, a scenario
is chosen from the Select Scenario menu. The scenario that is selected will specify the
active topology, physical, demand, initial settings, and operational alternatives that
will be used while calculating the analysis project. The dialog box contains the
following controls:
Scenario—The scenario chosen in the Scenario menu dictates the active topology,
physical, demand, initial settings, and operational alternatives that will be used while
calculating the analysis project.
Start Time—The Start Time specifies the beginning of the time period that the anal-
ysis project will simulate. Any time-based controls that are applied in the scenario’s
operational alternative will be affected by the start time chosen here.
Duration—The Start Time specifies the length of the time period that the analysis
project will simulate.
Hydraulic Time Step—Enter the time interval between hydraulic solutions for this
calculation. The hydraulic time step is the maximum amount of time that the hydraulic
conditions of the network are assumed to be constant.
Trace Node—The Trace Node pane lists the nodes that will be included in the trace
analysis project. To add elements to the list pane (and thus, to the analysis project)
click the Insert button. After at least one element has been added to the list pane, you
can remove elements from the list pane by highlighting them and clicking the Delete
button.
19.2.1 Select Trace Nodes Dialog Box
The Select Trace Nodes dialog box allows you to select the trace nodes that will be
included in the trace analysis project. The dialog box is divided into two panes:
The Type menu allows you to filter the elements that are available in the left pane. The
left pane contains the nodes that are available for inclusion in the analysis project, as
modified by the Type menu. By default, the Water Sources option is selected here,
which enables display of all source nodes. Selecting Junction, for instance, causes the
left pane to display only junction nodes; selecting Tanks displays only tanks in the left
pane, and so on.

WaterSafe
The right pane contains the nodes that have been selected for inclusion in the analysis
project.
Elements can be moved between the panes using the following buttons:
[>]—This button moves the highlighted element from the left pane to the right pane.
[>>]—This button moves all of the elements in the left pane to the right pane.
[<]—This button moves the highlighted element from the right pane to the left pane.
[<<]—This button moves all of the elements in the right pane to the left pane.
Additionally, single elements can be moved from one pane to the other by simply
double-clicking them.
19.3 Constituent Analysis Project Editor

The constituent analysis editor allows you to create constituent analysis projects. First,
a scenario is chosen from the Select Scenario menu. The scenario that is selected will
specify the active topology, physical, demand, initial settings, and operational alterna-
tives that will be used while calculating the analysis project. The dialog box contains
the following controls:

Age Analysis Project Editor
Constituent Alternative—The Constituent Alternative pane lists the alternatives that

will be included in the constituent analysis project. To add alternatives to the list pane
(and thus, to the analysis project) click the Insert button. After at least one alternative
has been added to the list pane, you can remove alternatives from the list pane by
highlighting them and clicking the Delete button.
19.3.1 Select Constituent Alternatives Dialog Box
The Select Constituent Alternatives dialog box allows you to select the constituent
alternatives that will be included in the constituent analysis project. The dialog box is
divided into two panes:
The left pane contains the alternatives that are available for inclusion in the analysis
project.
The right pane contains the alternatives that have been selected for inclusion in the
analysis project.
Alternatives can be moved between the panes using the following buttons:
[>]—This button moves the highlighted alternative from the left pane to the right
pane.
[>>]—This button moves all of the alternatives in the left pane to the right pane.
[<]—This button moves the highlighted alternative from the right pane to the left
pane.
[<<]—This button moves all of the alternatives in the right pane to the left pane.
Additionally, single alternatives can be moved from one pane to the other by simply
19.4 Age Analysis Project Editor

The age analysis editor allows you to create age analysis projects. First, a scenario is
chosen from the Select Scenario menu. The scenario that is selected will specify the
active topology, physical, demand, initial settings, and operational alternatives that
will be used while calculating the analysis project. The dialog box contains the
following controls:

WaterSafe
Age Alternative—The Age Alternative pane lists the alternatives that will be
included in the age analysis project. To add alternatives to the list pane (and thus, to
the analysis project) click the Insert button. After at least one alternative has been
added to the list pane, you can remove alternatives from the list pane by highlighting
them and clicking the Delete button.
19.4.1 Select Age Alternative Dialog Box
The Select Age Alternatives dialog box allows you to select the age alternatives that
will be included in the age analysis project. The dialog box is divided into two panes:
The left pane contains the alternatives that are available for inclusion in the analysis
project.
The right pane contains the alternatives that have been selected for inclusion in the
analysis project.
Alternatives can be moved between the panes using the following buttons:
[>]—This button moves the highlighted alternative from the left pane to the right
pane.
[>>]—This button moves all of the alternatives in the left pane to the right pane.
[<]—This button moves the highlighted alternative from the right pane to the left
pane.
[<<]—This button moves all of the alternatives in the right pane to the left pane.
Additionally, single alternatives can be moved from one pane to the other by simply

Graphing
19.5 Graphing
Graphing includes:
• “Graph Setup” on page 19-664

• “Graph Display” on page 19-665
• “Statistics Report” on page 19-668
• “WaterSafe Manager” on page 19-659
19.5.1 Graph Setup
The graph setup dialog boxes for each analysis project type allow you to specify the
elements that will be graphed.
Trace Analysis Graph Setup

The Trace Analysis graph setup dialog box consists of a drop-down list that lets you
select the element type and two panes that allow you to select the elements to be
graphed.
The left pane contains all of the available elements of the type specified in the
Element Type drop-down list.
The right pane contains all of the elements that have been selected for inclusion in the
graph.
Constituent Analysis Graph Setup

The Constituent Analysis graph setup dialog box consists of a drop-down list that lets
you select the element type and two panes that allow you to select the elements to be
graphed.

WaterSafe
graph.
Age Analysis Graph Setup

The Age Analysis graph setup dialog box consists of a drop-down list that lets you
select the element type and two panes that allow you to select the elements to be
graphed.
graph.
19.5.2 Graph Display
The graph display window allows you to view graphs and change graph settings as
desired.
The following time step controls are available in this dialog box:
Above the graph display are the time step and animation controls. These include
VCR-style controls to move through the time steps or to animate the graph view and
the Increment combo box which controls how many time steps are skipped when the
Forward or Reverse buttons are clicked. This increment also controls which time steps
are displayed during animation.

Graphing
By clicking the down arrow next to the Play button, you can access the following
Animation Options:
• Animation Delay—Opens a dialog box that allows you to set the delay between
animated frames.
• Animate All Windows—If this option is selected, every window capable of being
animated will then animate when the play button is clicked. If the option is not
If you right-click with the mouse over the drawing pane, a context menu appears,
offering the following options:
Format.
• Graph Setup—This command opens the GeoGrapher Graph Setup dialog box
(see “GeoGrapher Graph Setup” on page 13-532).
“GeoGrapher Options” on page 13-533.
The main graph display pane has the following tabs:
• Graph—This tab displays the current graph.

• Data—This tab displays a tabular view of the data upon which the graph is based.
Note: The display units for the various attributes cannot be manually
changed through the graph display dialog box. Instead, the
graph will automatically use the unit that is assigned to a given
attribute in the WaterCAD project. To change the unit that is
used, first change it in the project (see“FlexUnits” on page 4-252),
then open WaterSafe and create your graph.
The following buttons are found along the top of the graph display dialog box:

WaterSafe
Export—Exports the current graph image or data.
Print—Prints the current graph.
Print Preview—Displays a preview of the graph as it will be printed.
Activate/Deactivate Zoom—This toggle button enables you to

magnify any area of the graph by click-dragging a selection box around
it.
Zoom Extents—Displays graph at the default (fully zoomed out)

magnification and view.
Refresh—Updates current graph display to reflect current changes.
Graph Setup—Opens a dialog box that allows you to change graph

settings.
Graph Options—Opens the Graph Options dialog box.
Add Pie/Bar Graph—Adds a Pie or Bar graph to the graph display.
Bar and Pie Graphs

You can display bar and pie graphs in conjunction with the main graph view by
clicking the Add Pie/Bar Graph button. A dialog box containing the pie or bar graph
will appear attached (docked) to the left side of the main graph dialog box. The
following options are available when the right mouse button is clicked over the bar/pie
graph dialog box:
Format.

Statistics Report
“GeoGrapher Options” on page 13-533).
• Print Preview—This command opens the print preview dialog box for the graph
display (see “Table Print Preview Dialog Box” on page 19-670).
• 3D—Toggles 3 dimensional perspective on/off.
• Marks Visible—Toggles labels detailing graph values on/off.
19.5.3 Graph Print Preview Dialog Box
This dialog box displays a print preview of the current pie or bar chart. The dialog box
contains two radio buttons that allow you to select the page orientation, as follows:
• Portrait—When this button is selected, the chart will be printed in portrait orien-
tation (page will be taller than it is wide).
• Landscape—When this button is selected, the chart will be printed in landscape
orientation (page will be wider than it is tall).
Clicking the Print button sends the currently displayed printer to the default printer.
The Preview Chart dialog box is accessible by right-clicking on the bar/pie chart and
selecting Print Preview.
19.6 Statistics Report

The Statistics Report dialog box consists of the following items:
Export—This button exports the currently displayed table as a comma-delimited text

file.
Copy—This button copies the currently displayed table to the Windows clipboard.
Print—This button prints the currently displayed table.
Preview—This button opens the “Table Print Preview Dialog Box” on page 19-670,
allowing you to display a print preview of the currently displayed table.
Color Coding—Color Coding allows you to automatically create user-defined

attributes for the statistical results contained in the table. In WaterCAD, color coding
can then be applied to the model based on the new user defined attributes. Clicking
this button opens the “Color Coding Dialog Box” on page 19-670.

WaterSafe
Report Variable—This menu changes depending on the type of analysis project that
is being viewed.
• Trace Node—This drop-down list appears on the statistical reports for trace anal-
ysis projects. The options included in the list are the trace nodes that were selected
in the trace analysis project editor.
• Alternative—This drop-down list appears on the statistical reports for constituent
and age analysis projects. The options included in the list are the alternatives that
were selected in the constituent or age analysis project editor.
Start Time—This menu, in conjunction with the Finish Time drop-down list, allows
you to select the time frame that is presented in the report. Select the hour at which
you want the report to begin.
Finish Time—This menu, in conjunction with the Start Time drop-down list, allows
you to select the time frame that is presented in the report. Select the hour at which
you want the report to end.
Tip: The table can be sorted by any of the column attributes. Click
the column heading once to sort ascending and twice to sort
descending.
Columns and rows can be manually resized. Hover the mouse

cursor over the break between the row or column headings. The
mouse cursor will change to a double-headed arrow. Click and
hold the mouse button and a line will appear, displaying the new
position of the row or column break. Drag this line to the desired
position of the new break.
Tabular Report—This table is the main body of the report dialog box. The various
statistical results are displayed here in tabular format.
• Node Tab—This table displays statistical results for all of the nodes contained in
the scenario that was chosen during the analysis project setup.
• Links Tab—This table displays statistical results for all of the pipes contained in
the scenario that was chosen during the analysis project setup.

Statistics Report
19.6.1 Color Coding Dialog Box
The Color Coding dialog box allows you to create user defined attributes in your
WaterCAD model based on the statistical analysis attributes displayed in the table.
You can then color-code by these user defined attributes in WaterCAD.
The dialog box consists of a check box for each of the statistical attributes in the
report; Average, Variance, Deviation, Minimum, Maximum, Min. Record Time, and
Max Record Time. There is also an All check box which selects all of the attributes.
Place a check in the corresponding box of each of the attributes for which you want a
user-defined attribute to be created, then click the OK button.
19.6.2 Table Print Preview Dialog Box
The Print Preview dialog box displays the tabular report as it will appear when
printed. The following controls are available in this dialog box:
Print—This button prints the report as it appears in the preview pane.
Zoom—This button allows you to set the zoom level of the preview pane.
Preview Pane Layout Buttons—This button allows you to control the number of pages
that are simultaneously displayed in the preview pane. The following choices are
available:
• One Page
• Two Pages
• Three Pages
• Four Pages
• Six Pages
Close—Closes the print preview dialog box.
Page—This control allows you to select the page that is currently displayed in the
preview pane.
19.6.3 Statistical Report Attributes
The following attributes are calculated and displayed in the statistical report:
• Average

WaterSafe
– Trace Analysis—The average flow percentage contributed to a node by a

trace source node over a period of time between the user-selected Start Time
and Finish Time.
– Constituent Analysis—The average concentration at a node for the simulated
constituent over a period of time between the user-selected Start Time and
Finish Time.
• Maximum
– Trace Analysis—the maximum flow percentage contributed to a node by a
and Finish Time.
– Constituent Analysis—The maximum concentration at a node for the simu-
lated constituent over a period of time between the user-selected Start Time
and Finish Time.
• Max Record Time

– Trace Analysis—The hour during the specified time frame when the
Maximum flow percentage occurs.
– Constituent Analysis—The hour during the specified time frame when the
Maximum concentration occurs.
• Minimum
– Trace Analysis—The minimum flow percentage contributed to a node by a
and Finish Time.
– Constituent Analysis—The minimum concentration at a node for the simu-
lated constituent over a period of time between the user-selected Start Time
and Finish Time.
• Min. Record Time

– Trace Analysis—The hour during the specified time frame when the
Minimum flow percentage occurs.
– Constituent Analysis—The hour during the specified time frame when the
Minimum concentration occurs.

Statistics Report
19.6.4 Graph Unit Selection Dialog Box
The Unit Selection dialog box allows you to set the parameters for all the units used.
The dialog box consists of the following controls:

click the choice list and click the unit you want. This option allows you to use
both US Customary and SI units.
box.
19.6.5 Table Unit Selection Dialog Box
The Unit Selection dialog box allows you to set the parameters for all the units used.
The dialog box consists of the following controls:
• Value—Displays the value of the currently highlighted cell.

click the choice list and click the unit you want. This option allows you to use
both US Customary and SI units.
box.

Appendix
Frequently Asked A
Questions
A.1 Overview: “How Do I”

“How Do I” tips are available in the following categories:
• “Import/Export Tips” on page A-674

• “Modeling Tips” on page A-683
• “Display Tips” on page A-699
• “Editing Tips” on page A-701
Extensive, up-to-date tips are available at your fingertips by clicking the

Globe button. This will take you to the ClientCare area of Haestad Methods’
web site, where you will be able to look up Frequently Asked Questions
(FAQs), modeling tips, and other useful information in our Knowledge Base and do a
search on any keywords. This area of the website is only available if you are partici-
pating in the ClientCare program.
If the information you need is not available in this section, click the Search tab at the
top of the Help window for an index. To make your work easier, WaterCAD and the
Help system are designed to be used together. If you have a high-resolution display
monitor, you will probably find it helpful to size the frames of both the program and
the Help windows so that they fit side by side. Then, while using the program, you can
use the right mouse button or the Help button in any dialog box to update the Help
window with context-sensitive Help.
WaterCAD User's Guide A-673

Import/Export Tips
A.2 Import/Export Tips

Note: You can import data from virtually any model using our intuitive
and powerful Database Connections and Shapefile Connections
(see “Shapefile Connections” on page 15-585) feature.
The following tips will be covered in this section:
• “Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD/Cybernet Versions” on page A-674

• “Transitioning from Cybernet v2” on page A-675
• “Importing EPANET Files” on page A-681
• “Importing KYPIPE Data” on page A-681
• “Importing Spot Elevations” on page A-682
• “Exporting Spot Elevations” on page A-682
A.2.1 Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD/Cybernet

Versions
You can import data from the following versions:
• Cybernet v1 Drawing
• Cybernet v2 drawing
• WaterCAD/Cybernet v3 and v4 Files
Cybernet v1 Drawing
No support is available for importing a Cybernet v1 drawing directly into WaterCAD.
If you want to import a Cybernet v1 drawing, load it into Cybernet v2 (for DOS) and
re-save the data as a Cybernet v2 drawing. The data can then be imported into
WaterCAD following the procedure described below.
If you are running WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode, open the drawing that contains the
Cybernet v2 data. The import Wizard of WaterCAD will automatically begin
importing the data.
Cybernet v2 drawing
If you are running WaterCAD in Stand-Alone mode, you must first convert the
Cybernet v2 drawing into a special C2W file format that can then be imported into
WaterCAD. This is accomplished by using one of the C2W utilities inside any of the
following AutoCAD versions: AutoCAD 12, 13 DOS, 13 Windows, 14, 2000, or
2002. Consult the C2W utilities help for specifics on its use.
A-674 WaterCAD User's Guide

Frequently Asked Questions
Note: Because the color coding legend is comprised of native entities,

the built-in conversion is unable to automatically remove these
elements. In WaterCAD v3.0 and up in AutoCAD mode, color
coding legends are block inserts. If your Cybernet v2 drawing
contains legends, you must manually edit these out of the
drawing.
When using the C2W utility in AutoCAD 12 or 13, there are certain limitations to the
amount of data imported:
• Only Cybernet v2 base data is imported. No change records in Cybernet scenarios

are supported.
• Cybernet multi-point pump curves are not supported. The C2W utility converts
the pump to a standard three-point curve pump. This may not be the optimum
solution for the multi-point curve. Validate the points chosen, and consider manu-
ally entering the multi-point data.
• Cybernet demand patterns are not imported. However, junction node demand type
data is imported. Use the Pattern Manager to enter the Cybernet Extended Period
Simulation GDF curves.
WaterCAD/Cybernet v3 and v4 Files

Open the WaterCAD v3 or v4 file, or import the .WCD file as you normally would in
WaterCAD/Cybernet v3. The .WCD file will be automatically converted to the
WaterCAD format. Once you save this file in WaterCAD, it can no longer be opened
in WaterCAD/Cybernet v3/ v4.
A.2.2 Transitioning from Cybernet v2
This section is intended to offer you some insight about the tools in this version of
WaterCAD that are different from Cybernet v2 methods.
We have seen the questions that arise in technical support. We designed WaterCAD
v3, v4, and v5 specifically to help you avoid many of these problems, while offering
even more flexibility and a much friendlier interface.

Import/Export Tips
Working with the Graphical Editor

One of the first differences between WaterCAD and previous versions of WaterCAD
is the interface, aside from just the difference of WaterCAD being a Windows applica-
tion. For more information, see “AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout” on page 17-608.
WaterCAD actually has two interfaces, one for AutoCAD (called WaterCAD
AutoCAD mode), and our own CAD-style Stand-Alone interface (called WaterCAD
Stand-Alone Mode). For more information, see “Stand-Alone and AutoCAD Mode”
on page 2-48.
This offers an amazing amount of flexibility, especially since both interfaces can be
used with the exact same hydraulic model. Organizations now have the flexibility to
allow AutoCAD users and non-AutoCAD users to work with the same model, without
struggling through any type of intermediate conversion. Even the style of the two
interfaces is similar with identical toolbars and menus.
Where is the Modeling Control Center (MCC)?
The Modeling Control Center in Cybernet v2 served two purposes: tabular reporting
and scenario management (including calculation). In WaterCAD, these same purposes
are served by two separate objects, which are each better than anything that has come
before: FlexTables and Scenario Management.
Report Tables (FlexTables)

In Cybernet v2, you were provided with a tabular view of the network that was a bit
inflexible and tedious at times. WaterCAD FlexTables provide tabular reporting tools
that are so powerful and flexible that you can perform your typical tasks in less time
than it used to take you just to enter the MCC.
With features like sorting, filtering, and global editing, you can review and adjust your
data in a fraction of the time it used to take, and with none of the hassle. Even the vari-
ables and sequences that are presented in tabular form are totally customizable to fit
your needs.
For more information, see “FlexTables” on page 7-329.

Links to Graphical Information Systems (GIS) and Databases

One of the most exciting developments of the software industry in the 1990s has been
the push for data reuse. Constantly improving database capabilities, published file
formats (such as the shapefile format), and even tools as simple as the Windows clip-
board are all contributing to a level of data sharing that has never been seen before.
WaterCAD is right there on the leading edge.
With WaterCAD database connectivity, your hydraulic model can easily be linked to
virtually any major database, spreadsheet, or GIS product currently in use today.
Shapefile wizards and flexible database linking tools make the process simple and
straightforward, without anchoring you to a specific database layout or units system.
For more information, see “Shapefile and Database Connections” on page 15-571.
Scenario Management
Cybernet v2 had two levels of definition: the base data as entered in the AutoCAD
interface or through the Edit menu in the MCC, and scenario changes as entered
through the Setup Analysis menu. Although this was far better than any competing
scenario management, it was very limited and certainly not oriented toward data-
reuse.
WaterCAD has a whole new outlook on scenarios, stemming from the basic principle
that every system has unknowns. If there is only one unknown, such as junction
demand, for example, the options are quite simple. With the addition of more
unknowns, the options quickly become difficult to manage. How can a modeler keep
track of so many unknowns? Through alternatives and inheritance.
Alternatives are collections of very specific data, such as junction demands, or pump
and valve operational settings. A scenario references a certain combination of these
alternatives, similar to a slot machine rolling different symbols in and out of each
position. Rather than several similar scenarios each holding onto individually adjusted
data, they can instead each reference some of the same alternatives (just as several slot
machine combinations can show the same symbol). This not only allows for far more
flexibility, it also greatly reduces the amount of data that is handled. This greatly
reduces the chance of that data being mishandled.
Inheritance is another attribute of WaterCAD scenario management that adds a level

of functionality that has never existed before. In Cybernet v2, each scenario essen-
tially inherited data from the base model, unless a specific change was made. As
mentioned above, this is fine for individual changes, but it falls apart for subsequent
changes. Consider, for example, a system that is to have pipes replaced in phases.
Phase I changes inherit from the base model, but then what happens for Phase II?
Repeat all of the changes from Phase I, and add the changes for Phase II? And then
again for Phase III? It is too easy to overlook a change and make simple typographical
errors.

Import/Export Tips
In WaterCAD, there is no limit to the extent of inheritance that could exist. To follow
the example given above, Phase II inherits its data from Phase I, and then has what-
ever changes are specific to Phase II rehabilitation. Likewise, Phase III inherits from
Phase II, and so on. Best of all, if something changes in Phase I, that change is inher-
ited through the hierarchy such that all of the children (Phase II, Phase III, etc.) reflect
the new data.
There is a scenario tutorial for the Stand-Alone editor, and there is a scenario Wizard
to help you through your first few scenario creations. Once you have seen what alter-
natives and inheritance can do for your model, you will be glad that you spent a few
minutes becoming familiar with them.
For more information, see “Scenarios/Alternatives” on page 8-345.
Using the Scenario Control Center

Scenario functionality is extended even further by the presence of comparative tools,
such as graphing. Scenario results can be directly compared graphically, plotting all of
the scenarios on the same axes. This means that determining the effects of things such
as system expansion, future demand increases, and pipe deterioration can all be seen
within seconds of running the models.
Combined with batch runs, which is running several scenarios in sequence, scenario
management has reached a level that most modelers have only dreamed of until now.
For more information, see “Scenario Control Center” on page 8-366.
Demand Alternatives
With the new scenario management, demand loading also has all new flexibility.
Rather than being limited to Avg. Day, Max Day, Peak Hr., User 1 and User 2, there
are an unlimited number of demand alternatives available in WaterCAD. You can still
have global demand and global roughness factors for your WaterCAD model, so you
can make minor adjustments during calibration without having to generate new alter-
natives.
For more information, see “Demand Alternative” on page 8-354.

Composite Demands
As well as having an unlimited number of demand alternatives, there is also no limit to
the number of different demand types you can have. Cybernet v2 was limited to five
demand types (1, 2, 3, 4, and Fixed), but WaterCAD allows as many different types
necessary. Also, they can have alpha-numeric labels, such as Residential, Commer-
cial, and Industry XYZ. This enables you to model service connections with much
more detail, because you can specify diurnal demand patterns for any number of
special individual customers.
In addition to demands, WaterCAD also provides inflow, or flows that are introduced
into the system.
Perhaps the best improvement for demands, however, is the ability to attribute more
than one type of demand to a given junction node. An unlimited number of different
customer types can all contribute to the total demand at a single junction, so there is no
need to estimate an equivalent demand type or add another demand type to a fake
junction immediately adjacent to another node.
For more information, see “Load” on page 6-300.
Control Valves
Cybernet v2 provided you with three types of controlling valves: Pressure Reducing
Valves (PRVs), Pressure Sustaining Valves (PSVs), and Flow Control Valves (FCVs).
WaterCAD also provides them, plus two additional types: Pressure Breaker Valves
(PBVs) that create a constant headloss across the valve, and Throttle Control Valves
(TCVs) that allow you to adjust minor loss coefficients based on system pressures,
HGLs, or time.
Cybernet v2 also allowed a valve setting of Maintain Always for PRVs and FCVs.
These settings were primarily used to simulate a pump for preliminary design work.
Through numerous support calls and dozens of inaccurate models, however, we found
that this feature was often misused, resulting in frustration. These Maintain Always
settings are no longer supported in WaterCAD. Instead, we offer a wider variety of
pump options to encourage modelers to make better educated guesses and better
preliminary design decisions.
For more information, see “Valve Theory” on page B-726.

Import/Export Tips
Pumps and Pump Curves

Cybernet v2 pumps can be categorized as one of three types: constant horsepower,
three-point, and multi-point (up to eleven points).
In WaterCAD, three-point pump curves are still fully supported, as are multi-point
pump curves. In fact, there is no limit to the number of points you can enter to approx-
imate the pump’s exponential curve.
Although we continue to discourage the use of constant horsepower pumps (for many
of the same reasons we discouraged the use of Maintain Always setting for valves),
this type of pump is still available in WaterCAD. However, do not use one unless you
have actually looked at a constant horsepower curve. It only resembles the shape of a
typical pump curve over a very short range near the best efficiency point, and diverges
from this curve rapidly as the curve becomes asymptotic to both the head and
discharge axes.
If you are performing a preliminary design or if you have another purpose that
requires you to estimate pump characteristics based on insufficient data, consider
using a one-point pump curve. This allows you to enter the design point and approxi-
mate a curve based on a typical pump curve. Of course, nothing beats having actual
pump test data so you can generate a truly accurate representation of your pump, and,
subsequently, an accurate representation of the remainder of your system.
For more information, see “Pump Editor” on page 6-279.
In Summary
There are many more features and enhancements in WaterCAD, and they appear in
every dialog box and button. The following are two very important points that we
would like to emphasize as you prepare to use WaterCAD for the first time:
• Tutorials are available in the Stand-Alone editor for a deeper introduction to

nearly every topic, and there is context-sensitive online help available from
anywhere in the program by pressing the F1 key, or by clicking a Help button.
• Don’t be afraid to explore. Some of the neatest features can be easy to overlook.
Remember, whenever you see an Ellipsis (…) button it means that a special
feature is available. Play with the model, and most importantly, start to enjoy
modeling again.

A.2.3 Importing EPANET Files
Note: In EPANET, pumps and valves are modeled as links. In this

program, they are graphically modeled as node elements.
Hence, during an import, each EPANET valve and pump link is
replaced by two pipes and one pump or valve element. This will
not affect the behavior of these elements in your system.
In EPANET, tanks can have an optional inactive volume

parameter. If this parameter is omitted from the input file or a
zero is entered for this parameter, the EPANET numerical engine
will compute an inactive volume based on the tank’s diameter
and the minimum level. To mimic this behavior, this software will
calculate the inactive volume and display it in the tank data upon
import of the file. When using this software, it is important to
remember that zero inactive volume means zero inactive
volume, and not some internally computed value.
Select File > Import > Network and choose EPANet (inp). Then, from the File Open
dialog box, select the file you would like to import. During the import procedure, you
will be prompted for a map scale factor (for more information, see “Map Scale Factor”
on page 4-249). You may also be asked to specify the Unit of Concentration (for more
information, see “Concentration Units Import” on page A-681).
Concentration Units Import

Select the unit of concentration that the data contained in the [QUALITY] section of
the EPANET file is in.
A.2.4 Importing KYPIPE Data
This program supports the import of KYPIPE 1.0, 2.0 and 3.0 data sets. If the data set
does not include geometry data, all nodes will be assigned a coordinate of (0,0). This
has no effect on the hydraulic state of the model. Pipe lengths will not be computed
based on the coordinates of the end nodes, but will be taken directly from the KYPIPE
data set.
This program only supports the import of the pipes and nodes of a KYPIPE model.
You must insert pumps, valves, and tanks into the current project.

Import/Export Tips
A.2.5 Importing Spot Elevations
A series of spot elevations can be imported from an ASCII text file, which might be
generated from a survey data recorder or another software program. These ASCII files
can contain a combination of the information that is required for spot elevations, such
as the label, coordinates, and elevation. The fields in the text file are usually separated
by either blank spaces or commas.
A.2.6 Exporting Spot Elevations
All of the spot elevations in the current project can be exported to an ASCII text file,
from which they can be brought into a spreadsheet, word processor, or other program.
These ASCII files can contain a combination of the information that is required for
spot elevations, such as the label, coordinates, and elevation. The fields in the text file
are usually separated by either blank spaces or commas.
A.2.7 Importing Database and Shapefile Data Created with

WaterCAD v3
As a result of overwhelming user feedback, as well as through a review of common

technical support questions, Haestad Methods has decided to make a fundamental
change in the way pump/valve connectivity is modeled. These elements are now
handled as nodes, whereas they were previously represented as links in database and
GIS connections prior to release of WaterCAD. Unfortunately, this change will affect
existing users who have built database connections using WaterCAD version 3.5 and
earlier. However, a survey of our customers has shown that nodes are the natural and
preferred way to represent a pump or valve in a database. The change is driven by the
desire to improve and enhance the mapping of these elements onto GIS and enterprise
data. Haestad Methods has invested significant effort to separate the model represen-
tation of pumps and valves from your view of these elements.
Specific changes are as follows:
• Pumps and valves used to be represented in the model as links, and had To and
From Node attributes. Now pumps and valves are represented as nodes, and have
To and From Pipe attributes.
• Pumps and valves exported to the Links Table will not be restored to the model. If
you try to import a Link Table with pumps and valves, they will be created as new
pipes of zero length and at coordinates of (0,0).
• The import of pump and valve tables will work as expected, with the exception of
the items listed above.

A.2.8 Additional Considerations When Working with Large

Model Files
WaterCAD is designed to utilize up to 500 megabytes of RAM, even if your machine

has more memory available. The reason for this is that we found during testing that
increasing this amount prevented WaterCAD from running under certain machine
configurations. With the 500 MB setting, WaterCAD ran under all tested system
configurations while still allowing sufficient memory to run the vast majority of
models.
If you encounter a Non-Continuable Protection Violation or Out of Memory error

while working with a large model, you may be hitting the 500 MB limit. To increase
this limit:
1. Browse to your Wtrc folder and find the Wtrcsys.exe file.

2. Rename it to Wtrgsys_backup.exe.
3. Find the v10.exe file and rename it to Wtrcsys.exe.
4. Start WaterCAD.
5. If WaterCAD starts successfully, your machine configuration is compatible with
the higher memory setting. WaterCAD will now utilize up to 1000 MB of RAM.
Note: If WaterCAD does not start successfully, your computer

configuration is not able to utilize the higher memory setting.
Contact Haestad Methods ClientCare Support for assistance.
If, after performing the above operation you continue to receive Non-Continuable
Protection Violation or Out of Memory errors, please contact Haestad Methods
ClientCare Support for assistance.
A.3 Modeling Tips

The paragraph presents some FAQs related to modeling water distribution networks
with WaterCAD. Also, please keep in mind that Haestad Methods offers workshops in
North America and abroad throughout the year. These workshops cover these
modeling topics in depths and many more in a very effective manner. The following
modeling tips are presented:
• “Modeling a Hydropneumatic Tank” on page A-684

• “Modeling a Pumped Groundwater Well” on page A-684
• “Modeling Parallel Pipes” on page A-685
• “Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series” on page A-686
• “Modeling Hydraulically Close Tanks” on page A-687

Modeling Tips
• “Modeling Fire Hydrants” on page A-688

• “Modeling a Connection to an Existing Water Main” on page A-688
• “Top Feed/Bottom Gravity Discharge Tank” on page A-690
A.3.1 Modeling a Hydropneumatic Tank
Hydropneumatic tanks can be modeled using a regular tank element and converting
the tank pressures into equivalent water surface elevations. Based on the elevation
differences, the tank’s cross-sectional area can then be determined.
For example, consider a hydropneumatic tank that operates between 50 psig and 60
psig. The tank’s storage volume is approximately 50 cubic feet.
The tank base elevation is chosen to be equal to the ground elevation, and the pres-
sures are converted into feet of water (1 psi = 2.31 feet). It is apparent that the tank
operates between levels of 115.5 feet and 138.6 feet. The difference between the levels
is 23.1 feet, which brings us to a needed cross-section of 2.16 square feet.
A.3.2 Modeling a Pumped Groundwater Well
A groundwater well is modeled using a combination of a reservoir and a pump. Set the
hydraulic grade line of the reservoir at the static groundwater elevation. The hydraulic
grade line can be entered on the reservoir tab of the reservoir editor dialog box, or
under the Reservoir Surface Elevation column heading in the Reservoir Report.
Pump curve data can be entered on the Pump Tab of the Pump Editor. The following
example will demonstrate how to adjust the manufacturer’s pump curve to account for
drawdown at higher pumping rates. Drawdown occurs when the well is not able to
recharge quickly enough to maintain the static groundwater elevation at high pumping
rates.
Figure A-1: Pump Curve Accounting for Drawdown

EXAMPLE:
The pump manufacturer provides the following data in a pump catalog:
Head (ft.) Discharge (gpm)
1260 0
1180 8300
1030 12400
Based on field conditions and test results, the following drawdown data is known:
Drawdown (ft.) Discharge (gpm)
40 8300
72 12400
To account for the drawdown, the pump curves should be offset by the difference
between the static and pumped groundwater elevations. Subtract the drawdown
amount from the pump head, and use these new values for your pump curve head data.
The following adjusted pump curve data is based on the drawdown and the manufac-
turers pump data.
Head (ft.) Discharge (gpm)
1260 0
1140 8300
958 12400
A.3.3 Modeling Parallel Pipes
With some water distribution models, parallel pipes are not allowed. This forces you
to create an equivalent pipe with the same characteristics.
With this program, however, you can create parallel pipes by drawing the pipes with
the same end nodes. To avoid having pipes drawn exactly on top of one another, it is
recommended that the pipes have at least one vertex, or bend, inserted into them.

Modeling Tips
Figure A-2: Pipe Bends
A.3.4 Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series
Note: With pumps in series, it is actually more desirable to use a

composite pump than to use multiple pumps in the network.
When pumps shut off, it is easier to control one pump. Several
pumps in series can even cause disconnections by checking if
upstream grades are greater than the downstream grade plus
the pump heads.
Parallel pumps can be modeled by inserting a pump on different pipes that have the
same From and To Nodes. Pumps in series (one pump discharges directly into another
pump’s intake) can be modeled by having the pumps located on the same pipe. The
following figure illustrates this concept:
Figure A-3: Pumps in Parallel and Series
If the pumps are identical, the system may also be modeled as a single, composite
pump that has a characteristic curve equivalent to the two individual pumps. For
pumps in parallel, the discharge is multiplied by the number of pumps, and used
against the same head value. Two pumps in series result in an effective pump with
twice the head at the same discharge.
For example, two pumps that can individually operate at 150 gpm at a head of 80 feet
connected in parallel will have a combined discharge of 2•150 = 300 gpm at 80 feet.
The same two pumps in series would pump 150 gpm at 2•80 = 160 feet of head. This
is illustrated as follows:

Figure A-4: Pumps Curves of Pumps in Series and Parallel
Parallel VSPs
Variable speed pumps can also be modeled in parallel. If you use the Fixed Head
pump type, both parallel VSPs must be set to the same target node. The program will
attempt to meet the fixed head requirements you set using only one of the pumps. If
the fixed head cannot be met with only one of the pumps, the second pump will be
turned on, and the relative speed settings of the pumps will be adjusted to compensate.
A.3.5 Modeling Hydraulically Close Tanks
If tanks are hydraulically close, as in the case of several tanks adjacent to each other, it
is better to model these tanks as one composite tank with the equivalent total surface
area of the individual tanks.
This process can help to avoid fluctuation that may occur in cases where the tanks are
modeled individually. This fluctuation is caused by small differences in flow rates to
or from the adjacent tanks, which offset the water surface elevations enough over time
to become a significant fluctuation. This results in inaccurate hydraulic grades.

Modeling Tips
A.3.6 Modeling Fire Hydrants
Fire Hydrant flow can be modeled by using a short, small diameter pipe with large
Minor Loss, in accordance with the hydrant’s manufacturer. Alternatively, hydrants
can be modeled using Flow Emitters. For more information, see “Estimating Hydrant
Discharge Using Flow Emitters” on page A-691.
A.3.7 Modeling a Connection to an Existing Water Main
If you are unable to model an existing system back to the source, but would still like to
model a connection to this system, a reservoir and a pump with a three-point pump
curve may be used instead. This is shown below:
Figure A-5: Approximating a Connection to a Water Main with a Pump

and a Reservoir
The reservoir simulates the supply of water from the system. The Elevation of the
reservoir should be equal to the elevation at the connection point.
The pump and the pump curve will simulate the pressure drops and the available flow
from the existing water system. The points for the pump curve are generated using a
mathematical formula (given below), and data from a fire flow test. The pipe should
be smooth, short and wide. For example, a Roughness of 140, length of 1 foot, and
diameter of 48 inches are appropriate numbers.
Please note that it is ALWAYS best to model the entire system back to the source. This
method is only an approximation, and may not represent the water system under all
flow conditions.
Qr = Qf * [(Hr/Hf)^.54]
Flow available at the desired fire flow residual

Where: Qr =
pressure
Qf = Flow during test
Pressure drop to desired residual pressure (Static
Hr =
Pressure minus Chosen Design Pressure)
Pressure drop during fire flow test (Static Pressure
Hf =
minus Residual Pressure)

EXAMPLE: DETERMINING THE THREE-POINT PUMP CURVE
1. The first point is generated by measuring the static pressure at the hydrant
when the flow (Q) is equal to zero.
Q = 0 gpm
H = 90psi or 207.9 feet of head (90 * 2.31)
(2.31 is the conversion factor used to convert psi to feet of head).
2. The engineer chooses a pressure for the second point, and the flow is calcu-
lated using the Formula below. The value for Q should lie somewhere
between the data collected from the test.
Q=?
H = 55 psi or 127.05 feet (55 * 2.31) (chosen value)
Formula:
Qr = Qf * (Hr/Hf)^.54
Qr = 800 * [((90 - 55) / (90 - 22))^.54]
Qr = 800 * [(35 / 68)^.54]
Qr = 800 * [.514^.54]
Qr = 800 * .69
Qr = 558
Therefore,
Q = 558 gpm
3. The third point is generated by measuring the flow (Q) at the residual pressure
of the hydrant.
Q = 800 gpm
H = 22 psi or 50.82 ft. of head (22 * 2.31)
Pump curve values for this example:
Discharge
Head (ft.)
(gpm)
207.9 0
127.05 558
50.82 800

Modeling Tips
A.3.8 Top Feed/Bottom Gravity Discharge Tank
A tank element in WaterCAD is modeled as a bottom feed tank. Some tanks, however,
are fed from the top, which is different hydraulically and should be modeled as such.
Figure A-6: Top Feed/Bottom Gravity Tank
To model a top feed tank, start by placing a pressure sustaining valve (PSV) at the end
of the tank inlet pipe. Set the elevation of the PSV to the elevation of the inlet to the
tank. The pressure setting of the PSV should be set to zero to simulate the pressure at
the outfall of the pipe.
Next, connect the downstream end of the PSV to the tank with a short, smooth, large
diameter pipe. The pipe must have these properties so that the headloss through it will
be minimal.
The tank attributes can be entered normally using the actual diameter and water eleva-
tions.
The outlet of the tank can then proceed to the distribution system.
Figure A-7: Example Layout

A.3.9 Estimating Hydrant Discharge Using Flow Emitters
Another way to model the discharge from a hydrant is to use flow emitters. A flow
emitter relates the discharge to pressure immediately upstream of the emitter using:
Q = KP n
Where: Q = flow through hydrant (gpm, l/s)

K = overall emitter coefficient (gpm/psin, l/s/mn)
P = pressure upstream of hydrant (psi, m)
n = pressure exponent (0.5 for hydrant outlets)
The pressure exponent, n, is a variable that can be set in the Hydraulic Analysis
Options section of the Calculation Options dialog box (for more information, see
“Hydraulic Analysis Options” on page 9-392). The default value is 0.5, which should
be used when using flow emitters to model hydrant outlets.
You should be able to model a hydrant as a flow emitter and enter the appropriate
value for K. Not all of the energy available immediately upstream of the hydrant is
lost, however. Instead, some of the energy is converted into increased velocity head,
especially for the smaller (2.5 in, 63 mm) hydrant outlet.
In order to accurately model a hydrant, the model must be given an overall K value,
which includes head loss through a hydrant and conversion of pressure head to
velocity head. AWWA Standards C502 and C503 govern the allowable pressure drop
through a hydrant. For example, the standards state that the 2.5 in. outlet must have a
pressure drop less than 2.0 psi (1.46 m) when passing 500 gpm (31.5 l/s).
The energy equation can be written between a pressure gauge immediately upstream
of the hydrant and the hydrant outlet:
1
K= 1
⎛ 1 1 1 1 ⎞ 2
⎜ ⎟
⎜ 2 gC c 2 ( D 4 − D 4 ) + k 2 ⎟
⎝ F F O P ⎠

Modeling Tips
Where: v = velocity (ft./sec., m/s)

unit conversion factor (2.31 for pressure in psi,
CF =
1 for pressure in m)
unit conversion factor (2.44 for flow in gpm,
cF = diameter in inches, 0.0785 for flow in l/s,
diameter in mm)
g = gravitation acceleration (ft./sec.2, m/s2)

k = pressure drop coefficient for hydrant
K = overall emitter coefficient
The difference between K and k is that K includes the terms for conversion of velocity
head to pressure head. k is known, but K is the value needed for modeling.
A typical hydrant lateral in North America is 6 in. (150 mm) and typical outlet sizes
are 2.5 in. (63 mm) and 4.5 in. (115 mm). Values for k vary from minimum values,
which can be back calculated from AWWA standards, to much higher values actually
delivered by hydrants. Values for K for a range of k values for 6 in. (150 mm) pipes
are given below.
Table A-1: Emitter K Values for Hydrants
Outlet k k K K
Nominal (in.) gpm, psi l/s, m gpm, psi l/s, m
2.5 250-600 18-45 150-180 11-14
2-2.5 350-700 26-52 167-185 13-15
4.5 447-720 33-54 380-510 30-40
The coefficients given are based on a 5 ft. (1.5 m) burial depth and a 5.5 in. (140 mm)
hydrant barrel. A range of values is given because each manufacturer has a different
configuration for hydrant barrels and valving. The lowest value is the minimum
AWWA standard.

A.3.10 Modeling Variable Speed Pumps
With WaterCAD, it is possible to model the behavior of variable speed pumps (VSP),
whether they are controlled by variable frequency drives, hydraulic couplings or some
other variable speed drive. Workarounds that were previously used, such as pumping
through a pressure-reducing valve, are no longer needed.
The parameter that is used to adjust pump speeds is the relative speed. The relative
speed is the ratio of the pump’s actual speed to some reference speed. The reference
speed generally used is the full speed of the motor. For example, if the pump speed is
1558 rpm while the motor is a 1750-rpm motor, the relative speed is 0.89. This rela-
tive speed is used with the pump affinity laws to adjust the pump head characteristic
curve to model the pump.
If only a steady state run is being made and the pump relative speed is known, the
speed of the variable speed pump can be set in the General tab of the pump dialog box.
However, if the conditions that control the pump are not known at the start or an EPS
run is being made, then variable speed behavior must be described in more detail.
Modeling variable speed pumps includes:
• “Types of Variable Speed Pumps” on page A-693

• “Pattern Based” on page A-694
• “Fixed Head” on page A-694
• “Controls with Fixed Head Operation” on page A-695
Types of Variable Speed Pumps

The behavior of the VSP is set under the VSP tab within the pump dialog box. There
are two ways to control a variable speed pump. One is to provide a Pattern (see
“Pattern Manager” on page 9-394) of pump relative speeds. This is best used for cases
where you are trying to model some past event where the pump speeds are known
exactly or where the pump is not being controlled by some target head. This would be
the case where human operators set speed based on a combination of time of day,
weather and other factors.
The second type of control is Fixed Head control, where the pump speed is adjusted to
maintain a head somewhere in the system. For water distribution pumping into a pres-
sure zone with no storage, this is usually some pressure sensor on the downstream side
of the pump. For wastewater pumping, the pump may be operated to maintain a
constant wet well level on the suction side (i.e., flow matching).
To indicate that a pump is behaving as a VSP, first check the box next to Variable
Speed Pump? at the top of the VSP tab. This will change the remaining boxes on the
tab from gray to white.

Modeling Tips
Pattern Based
If you want to provide the actual pump relative speeds, Pattern Based should be
selected from the VSP Type menu. The default pattern is Fixed, which corresponds to
constant speed performance at a speed from the General tab.
Usually, you will want to specify a series of pump relative speeds. To do this, click the
Ellipsis (…) button next to Pump Speed Pattern. This will open the Pattern Manager
dialog box (for more information, see “Pattern Manager” on page 9-394). Click the
Add button, and the Pattern Editor dialog box will appear (for more information, see
“Pattern Editor” on page 9-395). From this dialog box, you can assign a label (name)
to the new Pattern and complete the series of multipliers (i.e., relative speeds) versus
time. Clicking OK twice will return you to the VSP tab.
A difficulty in using Pattern Based speeds is that the pattern that would work well for
one scenario may not work well for other scenarios. For example, tanks will run dry or
fill and shut off for a slightly different scenario than the one for which the pattern was
created.
Fixed Head
Fixed head control is achieved by selecting Fixed Head from the VSP Type? menu.
Once Fixed Head is selected, you must describe how the control is implemented.
You must identify a node that controls the pump. This is the node where some type of
pressure or water level sensor is located. This can be done by:
• Using the menu and picking the node from the list
• Clicking the Ellipsis (…) button and using the Select Element dialog box (for
more information, see “Single Element Selection Dialog Box” on page 5-260)
• Clicking the Select From Drawing button (see “Select From Drawing Button” on
page 5-261) and picking the node from the drawing
In selecting the control node, you must choose a node that is actually controlled by the
VSP. For example, the selected node must be in the same pressure zone (i.e., one that
is not separated from the pump by another pump or PRV) and should not have a tank
directly between the node and the pump.
You must then select the head to be maintained at that node. If the node selected for
control is a tank, then the Target Head is set as the initial head in the tank. If a junction
node is selected, the head must be a feasible head. If a physically infeasible head is
given, the problem may not be solved or some unrealistic flow may be forced to meet
this head (e.g., backward flow through pump).

You also have the option of setting the maximum relative speed of the pump, which
would usually correspond to the rated speed of the motor. The default value for this is
1.0. You can have the model ignore this limit by placing a large value in the field for
maximum speed.
Controls with Fixed Head Operation
Note: There should only be a single VSP serving a given pressure

zone. If more than one VSP tries to use the same node as a
control node, then the model will issue an error message and
not solve. If you try to use two different nodes that are very close
hydraulically, an error will also result.
When the relative pump speed reaches maximum speed (usually 1.0), the model treats
the pump essentially as a constant speed pump. In the case of pumps controlled by a
junction node, when the conditions warrant, the pump will once again behave as a
VSP.
However, for pumps controlled by tanks, the pump will run at a maximum speed for
the remainder of the EPS run, once they reach maximum speed. To get the pump to
switch back to variable speed operation, you need to insert a control statement that
switches the pump back to variable speed. Consider the example below:
PMP-1 tries to maintain 280 ft. discharge at node T-1 on the discharge side of the
pump, but pump (PMP-1) switches to full speed when the flow is so great that it
cannot maintain 280 ft. In that case, the water level drops below 280 ft. As demand
decreases, the level increases until it reaches 280 ft., at which time variable speed
operation begins again. To make this occur in the model, you must use a logical
control (see “Logical Controls” on page 9-397) to restore variable speed operation:
IF (HGL T-1 >= 280 ft) THEN (PMP-1 = ON)
A.3.11 Creating Scenarios to Model “What If?” Situations
The scenario management feature was designed to let you model “What If?” situations
by easily switching between different input data sets without having to re-enter data.
Comparing different output results is just as simple.
To create a new scenario:
1. Open the Scenario Control Center dialog box by clicking the Scenario
Control Center button next to the drop-down scenario list in the main
application window.
2. Click the Scenario Wizard button in the upper left of the Scenario Control Center
dialog box.

Modeling Tips
3. Complete each step in the Scenario Wizard—Name the new scenario, choose
which scenario to base it on, and choose the alternatives to be included. Click
Next between each step, and click Finish when you are done.
4. Close the Scenario Control Center dialog box. Notice the scenario you have just
created is displayed as the current scenario in the Scenario choice list in the main
application window.
5. Proceed to modify your model with the changes you want recorded in the new
scenario.
A.3.12 How Do I Access the Haestad Methods Knowledge

Base?
You can access of hundreds of commonly asked questions at our online Knowledge
Base.
The quickest way to access the Knowledge Base is to click the Globe Icon in
the product toolbars. This will automatically log you on to our website. Simply
click the Knowledge Base icon next to the Haestad product of interest.
If the computer you are using does not have internet access, you can log on to Knowl-
edge Base at an alternate computer by going to http://www.haestad.com and entering
the ClientCare portion of the website. You can then log on with the Product ID located
in the back of the user’s manual or your PID number.
A.3.13 Darwin Calibrator Troubleshooting Tips
If you’ve found your way to this section, then you are probably looking for an answer
to a problem that you cannot find elsewhere. Please refer to the list below if you are
having problems running Darwin Calibrator (you keep getting unsatisfactory solu-
tions) or if you receive this message while running a calibration: The calibration
engine was unsuccessful. See the help system for troubleshooting tips.
If you are receiving the engine unsuccessful message, try the following:
• Take note of the error message that is provided along with the calibration engine
was unsuccessful message. It may provide a clue as to why your calibration didn’t
run and save you from having to go any further through this list!
• Ensure that the scenario model upon which the calibration is based will run prop-
erly in WaterCAD. Select Analysis > Compute, select the steady state button, and
click GO. If the run obtains either a yellow or green light, then the hydraulic
model runs and this is not the problem.

• Ensure that all your roughness and demand group settings are valid and reason-
able. For example, ensure that roughness adjustments and/or demand adjustments
are not such that your hydraulic model might have difficulty converging. For
example, make sure that you are not allowing demands to be set too high or pipes
too rough, causing excessive amounts of head loss.
• If you have a large number of pipes assigned to status groups, review the need to
include all of those pipes as status decisions and try to minimize the number of
pipes in status groups.
Note: Virtual memory settings should only be adjusted by advanced

users or system administrators.
• You may be experiencing low system memory. When running Darwin Calibrator,
be sure to close any other unused applications and if adjusting advanced GA
parameters ensure that you are using a cut probability of more than a few percent,
and a splice probability of less than 90 percent. If your system doesn’t have much
RAM (<128Mb), you may also wish to increase the amount of allocated virtual
memory that your system is using. Windows 98/ME users should let Windows
manage virtual memory, however, Windows NT4/2000/XP users may wish to
increase the size of their system paging file. Please see your Microsoft Windows
documentation for information on virtual memory settings specific to your oper-
ating system.
If you are having problems getting reasonable calibration solutions, try the following:
• Ensure that the Time field for each of your field data measurement sets corre-
sponds to the time of day that your measurements were taken. The reason being
that the time entered in your field data set is used to determine demand multipliers
(from hydraulic patterns), which are in turn used to calculate the junction
demands that will be simulated within the GA calibration engine. (The demand at
a junction during a GA calibration run is the product of its baseline demands and
the demand factors at the time specified for the field data set.) Pump settings and
control settings, etc., are also determined from the time setting you specify.
Demand multiplier adjustments and additional junction demands (e.g., fire flow
tests) are in addition to, not in lieu of, junction demands already calculated from
pattern multipliers. Also note that a steady state run in WaterCAD will run with
only junction baseline demands applied, whereas a GA calibration run based on a
steady state scenario will still use pattern multipliers for the specified time.
• Modifying the status of a link can have significant effects on hydraulic results and
your chances of finding good calibration solutions. If you are using a number of
status group adjustments, you should review why you need those adjustment
groups. It may be better to experiment with these kinds of adjustments manually,
or get somebody to find out whether that valve really is closed and remove the
status decision from the GA calibration. In general, try to keep status adjustment
decisions to a minimum.

Modeling Tips
• Make sure that your adjustment groupings are logical. For example, junctions are
grouped by similar pattern or demands for demand groups and pipes are grouped
by similar size, age and location for roughness groups.
• Ensure that you do not have too many adjustment groups or the allowable ranges
and increments for those groups do not allow too many choices for each group.
For example, a roughness group allowed to vary between a Hazen-Williams C of
80 and a Hazen-Williams C of 130, with an increment of 0.1 equates to 500
different possible roughness settings for one group. This is far too high! Try to
choose lower and upper bounds, and an increment that will give you no more than
10-12 possible values. If need be, you can start off with course settings (say 80 to
130 with an increment of 5) initially, and gradually refine the allowable range and
increment to refine your calibration solutions. This applies to both roughness
adjustment groups and also to demand adjustment groups.
• Make sure that you have sufficient and quality field data and that it has been
entered correctly. In general, it is a good idea to have as many (or more) field data
measurements as adjustment groups for the calibration, or else your calibration
problem is under-specified. This means that there is likely to be multiple calibra-
tion solutions that produce the same or very similar hydraulic results (e.g., solu-
tions that exhibit compensating errors). In theory, there is only one correct
solution, however, due to limits observed for many practical model calibrations,
the more quality field data you can provide, the better chance you have of finding
a solution that is close to the real situation. When assessing the number of field
observations that you have, consider that each individual observation should
contribute unique and accurate information to the calibration. For example, pres-
sure measurements made at two junctions in different parts of the distribution
system are likely to be more valuable than two measurements made at locations
close to each other in the distribution system. In fact, the two measurements taken
at points close together may only be as good as one measurement. That is, both
measurements say the same thing about the system. Simply, the field data you
collect and enter into Darwin Calibrator should be data that represents times when
your system is experiencing high demand, even if it is only the result of such
activities as fire flow tests. The reason for this is that during times of normal
demands, the head loss across the system is usually on the same order of magni-
tude as the error in measuring head loss. Therefore, small errors in measurement
can lead to huge errors in roughness coefficient or demand.
• Make sure that you haven’t entered field data observations that are made impos-
sible to achieve by any observed boundary conditions, such as an observed grade
out for a PRV set to a different grade.

Note: Tank levels, pump speed settings, and valve settings are all used
by the calibration engine as boundary conditions and as such
these field data entries will not appear in the calibration report
summary. That is, these quantities are set as fixed in the
calibration simulations and the calibration does not try to match
these data. All other quantities are used as observed quantities
that the calibration engine tries to match by adjusting
parameters defined in your adjustment groups.
• Make sure you are using the correct boundary conditions. If you have entered
observations for tank levels etc., ensure that you have not made any errors in
entering the data.
• If after following the tips in this check list you are still experiencing problems, or
just to learn more about the GA or Darwin Calibrator itself, see “Darwin Cali-
brator Methodology” on page B-748.
A.4 Display Tips

The following display tips will be discussed in this section:
• “How Do I Change Units in a Column?” on page A-699

• “How Do I Control Element and Label Sizing?” on page A-700
• “How Do I Color Code Elements?” on page A-700
• “How Do I Remove Color Coding from Pre-v3.5 AutoCAD Labels?” on page A-
701
• “How Do I Reuse Deleted Element Labels?” on page A-701
A.4.1 How Do I Change Units in a Column?
Note: The change of units affects only the data in the Table. It DOES
NOT change the units within your network design.
In a Table, you may change the units of all the data within any column. To change the
units:
• Select Use Local Units from the Options menu in the Tabular Report dialog box.
• Right-click the column heading, or any data item within a column.
• Select Properties from the shortcut menu.
• Change the units and select OK. All data items in that column will change to the
selected units.

Display Tips
A.4.2 How Do I Control Element and Label Sizing?
To change the size of element symbols and labels:
• Select Tools > Options, and select the Drawing tab.

• In the Annotation Multipliers group, change the Symbol Size Multiplier to
modify the element size, and the Text Height Multiplier to modify the label size.
Smaller numbers will make the element symbols and text decrease in size.
These changes will affect all symbols and text, including color coding legends, but
will not have any effect on pipe lengths.
A.4.3 How Do I Color Code Elements?
To color code elements:
• Select Tools > Color Coding, or click the Color Coding (rainbow) button on the
toolbar.
• In the Color Coding dialog box, select the attribute you would like to color code.
• Click the Initialize button to automatically build a range of colors. You may
decide to modify these default ranges. Alternatively, pick a color for the first and
last values in the list and click the Ramp button. This will automatically generate
a gradient range based on a combination of the specified colors.
• Click OK to color code the drawing.
All link or node elements and their labels will be colored based on the specified
ranges. You can also use the Initialize button to quickly set up and modify Color
Coding Options. A Color Coding Legend may be inserted into the drawing by using
the Legend tool (see “Legend” on page 13-558) located on the Tool Palette.

A.4.4 How Do I Remove Color Coding from Pre-v3.5 AutoCAD

Labels?
Due to popular request, Haestad Methods has implemented the separation of elements
and their labels. This gives you much more control over the placement and formatting
of the labels, in addition to resolving the problem of color coding labels with
elements. However, if you open an old drawing (version 3.1 or earlier) with existing
color coding on the labels, this color coding will not dynamically update.
The solution to this problem is to move the labels to a different layer, and assign a
neutral color to them. To do this, select Tools > Element Properties, and choose the
Labels tab. Assign a new layer to the labels for all the elements, and check Apply to
Existing Objects.
A.4.5 How Do I Reuse Deleted Element Labels?
To make the program reuse the label for a deleted element:
1. Select Tools > Element Labeling.

2. Enter the ID number for the deleted element in the Next field for the appropriate
type of element.
3. Click OK.
4. Add a new element to the drawing.
A.5 Editing Tips

The following tips will be discussed in this section:
• “Mouse Tips” on page A-701

• “Laying out a Pipe as a Multi-segmented Polyline” on page A-702
• “Changing a Pipe into a Multi-segmented Polyline” on page A-703
A.5.1 Mouse Tips
The right mouse button (Mouse Buttons) can be used to:
• Select units and precision for displaying data.

• Get context-sensitive Help for dialog boxes and data entry fields.
• Open a pop-up Context Menu of command options for an element.

Editing Tips
The mouse wheel can be used in a few different ways:
• Click and hold the mouse wheel while moving to pan the drawing view.
• Scroll the drawing view horizontally by rolling the mouse wheel.
• Hold down the Ctrl button while scrolling with the mouse wheel to zoom in and
out in the drawing view.
A.5.2 Laying out a Pipe as a Multi-segmented Polyline
When laying out pipes using the Pipe Layout tool, this program will allow you to draw
pipes with multiple bends by using the Control key on your keyboard.
To draw a pipe with bends:
1. Click the Pipe Layout tool to begin laying out your network.
2. Move the mouse to the desired location, and click to insert the first element.
3. The layout tool will rubber-band, indicating that a pipe will be inserted when the
next element is added.
In Stand-Alone mode:
1. At this point, hold down the Control key. The cursor appearance will change to a
Crosshair to indicate that pipe bends will be added.
2. While holding the Control key down, click to insert any number of pipe bends.
3. When you are through adding pipe bends, release the Control key.
4. The appearance of the cursor will change to reflect the next element to be added.
5. Click with the mouse to terminate the pipe and add the next element.
In AutoCAD mode:
1. Select Bend from the right-click menu.

2. Draw the pipe as you would draw a polyline.
3. Right-click and select the end node of the pipe.

A.5.3 Changing a Pipe into a Multi-segmented Polyline
Tip: In Stand-Alone mode, you can remove vertices by selecting the

pipe. Right-click the vertex you wish to remove, and select Bend
> Remove Bend. In AutoCAD mode, you can remove vertices by
selecting Edit > Modify Pipes > Remove Bends. Select the pipe
and the location of the bend that you would like removed.
In Stand-Alone mode, to make a straight pipe into a multi-segmented polyline:
1. Right-click the pipe to which you would like to add a vertex.

2. From the context menu, select the Bend > Add Bend menu item.
3. A vertex will be added to the pipe. Click and drag the vertex to move it.
In AutoCAD Mode:
Note: There is no limit on the number of vertices that a pipe may have.
1. Select Edit from the Main Menu.

2. Select Modify Pipe.
3. Select Insert Bend.
4. Click the location in the pipe where you want the bend.
5. Use the AutoCAD Move command to move the bend in the pipe.
A.6 Advanced Darwin Designer Tips

1. How do I consider fire flows in my design?
You may consider fire flows by one of two methods:
a. Use the demand adjustments feature in the required design event to add addi-
tional demand to the specific junctions at which fires are to be fought.
b. In WaterCAD, create a child demand alternative of the demand alternative
referenced by the representative scenario, and then add the fire flows as fixed
pattern flows to the appropriate junctions. Next, in Darwin Designer, set up a
design event and select the Override Scenario Demand Alternative check
box, and select the new child demand alternative you created.
Of the two methods, the second one is preferred, since, after you have exported
your design from Darwin Designer to a new scenario, you will most likely want to
verify the performance of the design directly within WaterCAD. If you have used
method one to add fire flows, then you will have to add those fire flows to your
current (or new) demand alternative in order to simulate the design against the

Advanced Darwin Designer Tips
same demands as in your design event. If you had used method two, however,
then you would not need to create any additional demand alternatives, since you
had already done that.
2. How do I consider emergency conditions and facility outages?
Emergency conditions, such as pipe breaks and facility outages, can be handled in
Darwin Designer by using the boundary-conditions feature of a design event to
close pipes that would normally be open. For example, you may want to consider
the effect of a water treatment plant being out of service. This can be achieved by
adding any connecting pipes to the design-event boundary conditions and setting
their status to closed.
3. Designer only sizes or rehabilitates pipes. How can I consider the inclusion of
new facilities?
Selection of new facilities may be achieved by using various modeling tech-
niques, an example of which follows.
Selecting the location of a new tank:
a. You can select the location of a new tank modeling the new proposed tank in
the representative scenario. Given a specific tank location you will need to
enter the tank elevation, diameter, and other size information as if it existed—
but, connect the tank to the system with a short small diameter pipe. Give the
new pipe an obvious label such as New Tank Connector.
The pipe that connects the tank to the system should have a length of 1 and a
diameter of 0.01.
b. Create a new Design group and label it as New Tank Connector, or some-
thing similar, and add the connecting pipe to the new group.
c. In Darwin Designer, create a new pipe option group, label it New Tank, or
something similar, and add the following data:
Diameter Cost
0 0
X Cost of Tank
Where, X is some large diameter sufficient for the expected flows to and from
the tank.
d. In your local design run group, enable the new pipe group by clicking Active
and select the New Tank option group.
Darwin Designer can now connect the tank to the system and incur the cost
specified in the above table, or it will construct a 0 diameter pipe (no pipe)
and the tank will not be included in the system. Note that it is up to you to

make sure that sufficient demand cases are investigated to verify the tank’s
design and that tank operation is independently verified through an EPS simu-
lation.
Using similar logic Designer could be used to consider the inclusion exclu-
sion of pump stations, valves, water treatment facilities, reservoirs and so on.
4. Designer keeps coming up with strange results. What am I doing wrong?

There are a number of things that could be causing you get strange or unexpected
results with Darwin Designer. Before calling technical support, please take the
time to review this list to see if any of these things may apply to you.
a. Make sure you are using the correct design data. Make sure you are using
the correct representative design scenario and that scenario includes all pipes
to be sized by Darwin Designer.
b. Make sure that the representative design scenario runs successfully
within WaterCAD. If it does not, then Designer will not be able to function
correctly.
c. Make sure that the correct demands are present. For EPS representative
scenarios, make sure your patterns are correct and that you are using the
correct time from start value in your design events.
d. Make sure that you have applied the correct and necessary boundary
conditions. For example, if you are designing for a 7 a.m. peak-flow condi-
tion, make sure that you have boundary conditions specified for all necessary
tank levels, pump operation, etc. For designs that include a significant amount
of new infrastructure or completely new designs, tank levels have to be
assumed tank levels.
e. Make sure that the range of pipe sizes and rehab actions you are using
are reasonable. For example, make sure that you are allowing Darwin
Designer a sufficient range of pipe diameters to come up with a reasonable
design. While Darwin Designer does perform an initial feasibility check (it
uses the largest pipe sizes and checks minimum pressures), too few pipe
choices may artificially restrict the flexibility of the optimization. Conversely,
too many choices may affect the convergence of the optimization on to a good
solution. It doesn’t make sense, for example, to allow a rising main from a
pump station to be 6 in. or 8 in.
f. Make sure that you have a reasonable number of design and/or rehab
groups. As an extreme example, consider that every pipe to be design was in
the same group. Then the only possible solution that the optimization can
arrive at is to construct all of the pipes the same size. While it may still be
possible to find a feasible solution, only having a single design group will
restrict the flexibility of the optimization and the ability of Darwin Designer
to find cheaper solutions. Conversely, too many design groups will hinder the

convergence of the optimization and result in sub-optimal solutions. A good

number of design groups will depend on the actual model and design situa-
tion, but would lie somewhere between 10 and 100.
g. Make sure you have sufficient and reasonable design constraints in place.
The genetic algorithm optimization engine in Darwin Designer is very
powerful. If the objective of the optimization is to minimize cost, the optimi-
zation engine will do everything in its power to minimize cost including
unwanted things that may not have been disallowed by the designer. The
worst case scenario is a design with no constraints. If the design does not have
any performance requirements, then the cheapest design is no design at all.
The optimization algorithm only knows the problem that is defined for it, and
to that end if you wish to get meaningful designs from Darwin Designer, you
need to constrain your designs appropriately. The idea is to set up design
constraints that corner the optimization algorithm into a region of the solution
space (region of all possible solutions) that makes the most practical sense.
Design constraints can be applied in Darwin Designer by pressures (max. and
min.) and also pipe velocities (max. and min.). An example of an impractical
situation in a hydraulic model might be a 1 MG tank that is draining at far too
high a rate. In order to save costs on constructing pipes to a more distant
source, the optimization algorithm may over-use a closer water source.
Another example of a design constraint—other than the pressure and flow
constraints—is the number of design events (and hence demand/operational
cases) that the design must meet. The optimal solution to a single demand
case does not fully reflect the real system operating scenarios. If a single load
condition is used along with a zero-diameter as one of possible sizes in a
option group, it will most likely result in a branched network design. Thus, it
is necessary for reliability reasons to design systems for multiple demand
conditions.
It is up to the engineer to recognize any impracticality of an optimized design
and set up the necessary design constraints to prevent that type of design from
being feasible, thus removing that design possibility from the grasp of the
optimization algorithm.
5. How do I include a special cost, such as the cost of a highway crossing or

interconnection in my design?
To do this you need to do three things:
a. Group together the pipes that will attract the special cost. These pipes can be
each in their own groups or all in one group, but they should be grouped such
that they are separate from pipes that won’t attract the special cost.
b. Create a option group (new pipe or rehabilitation option group) that includes
the special cost premiums.
c. Assign the special option groups to the associated design groups locally, for
the design run you wish to use with the special costs.

6. Designer keeps coming up with pipe sizes that change up or down in size. I
wouldn’t construct such a design; what can I do?
Darwin Designer applies a competent genetic algorithm to optimize the design. It
does not require or have any domain-specific knowledge about the water system,
which ensures it is a generic tool, but also causes some side-effect for some design
cases—like giving up-or-down pipe sizes. In particular, the solutions are evalu-
ated by comparing the fitness values of solutions. Darwin Designer will assume a
pipeline with pipe sizes that go up and down (to meet required pressures as closely
as possible) is better than one that has a constant size that exceeds the pressures at
some locations, since there is no specific penalty assigned to the fitness of a solu-
tion that has pipes that change up and down in size. It is, therefore, up to you to
control the eventual design and this can be done by different means, as follows:
a. The first means is simply to make manual adjustments to a design after
Darwin Designer has finished, in order to clean up the design and make it a
practical design. Cleaning up a design may technically move you away from
the cheapest design, but an inexpensive design that won’t be constructed is of
little use. You may find that not much cleaning up is necessary. Quick edits to
diameters or rehab actions like can be performed effectively in Darwin
Designer by using a manual design run.
b. Another thing to consider when analyzing a Darwin Designer design is
whether the chosen pipe sizes are a function of the lengths of pipe in your
model.
To better illustrate this concept, consider a run of four pipes in series, each
with different lengths. For these four pipes, the controlling pressure is the
downstream-most junction, and all intermediate junctions are well above the
required pressure. Now, after Darwin Designer finishes designing the run of
pipe, it selects the first pipe as a 16 in., the second as 12 in., the third as 16 in.
and the fourth as 12 in. It is unlikely that this design would be constructed as-
is, but if the pipes themselves represented sufficient length of pipe, then it
may be practical to construct a portion of the pipeline as 16 in. and a portion
as 12 in. If this is the case, then you need to look at the model to determine
why Darwin Designer is changing the third pipe back up to 16 in. It may be
that since the downstream-most junction is the only controlling node, that
Darwin Designer is merely trying to achieve the right head-loss in the total
pipe length, by choosing the length of pipe that should be 16 in. and the length
that should be 12 in. Of course, it is still constrained by the individual pipe
lengths in the model, but if they are different, the optimization algorithm will
use this fact to its advantage. In this case, it may very well be that Designer is
saying construct a total of 1500 ft. of 16-in. and 1000 ft. of 12-in. pipe, and

not necessarily 850 feet of 16-in., 600 feet of 12-in., 650 feet of 16-in., and
400 feet of 12-in. pipe in sections. Use engineering judgment when analyzing
the results.
c. Another means of achieving more constructible designs from Darwin
Designer is to group in the same group pipes that would be constructed the
same size. For example, a rising main would most likely be constructed a
single size, and it would thus make sense to include all the model pipes that
make up the rising main in the same design group. What you don’t want to do
by grouping pipes is artificially design the system even before you have had a
chance to optimize it.
7. When sizing new pipes, Darwin Designer can choose a zero-size, which
means, do not construct that pipe. Is it possible to do a similar thing for reha-
bilitation actions?
It is possible to do the same thing for rehabilitation actions. To create a rehabilita-
tion action that represents a Do Nothing option, simply follow these steps:
a. Create a pre-rehab diameter versus post-rehab diameter function that defines
at least two diameters that cover the domain of diameters in your model. For
example, mi.n pipe size through max. pipe size and make the pre-rehab diam-
eter the same as the post-rehab diameter. This function will define that the
diameter of any single pipe remains the same before and after the rehab
action.
b. Create a diameter versus unit cost function that defines at least two diameters
that cover the domain of diameters in your model. E.g., min. pipe size through
max. pipe size and make the cost for each diameter zero. This function will
thus define that the cost for the rehab action, regardless of pipe size is zero.
c. Create a pre-rehab diameter versus post-rehab roughness function that defines
at least two diameters that cover the domain of diameters in your model. E.g.,
min. pipe size through max. pipe size and make the post-rehab roughness, the
roughness of the current pipes to which the Do Nothing option will be an
option. This function will thus define that the resulting roughness stays the
same as the original values.
Create a Do Nothing rehab action that references each of the above functions. If
selected by Designer, the Do Nothing action will leave the same diameter, cost
nothing, and leave the same roughness: in effect, doing nothing.
8. Do I have to change the parameters or can I simply use the defaults?
In most circumstances it is not necessary to change the parameters in order to run
Darwin Designer, however, you may wish to modify certain values as follows:
a. Random Seed—The Darwin Designer optimization algorithm depends on the
generation of pseudo-random numbers through a random number generator.
The reason the numbers are pseudo-random is that they are generated by a
mathematical formula, and hence the resulting series of numbers is not actu-
ally random at all. In order to make the random numbers different the random

number algorithm is initialized with what is known as a seed. For a different

seed value, a different series of pseudo-random numbers will be produced.
When no parameters in the Designer optimization problem change (i.e., no
changes at all, including hydraulic model changes, constraint changes, etc.),
running Darwin Designer twice will result in exactly the same result. Darwin
Designer results are therefore repeatable in this way. One way of ensuring a
different result (or at least a different progression to the same result) is by
changing the random number seed. Doing this will result in different optimi-
zation results for different runs. By the nature of genetic algorithm optimiza-
tion, you should not just accept the result of a single optimization run, but run
several runs and make sure that all runs produce similar results. An easy way
to run multiple runs and achieve different results is to change the random
number seed.
b. Penalty Factor—Penalty factor is a weighting that is used in the determination
of the fitness value for an hydraulic solution. In particular the penalty factor is
used to discourage the survival of designs that fail the design constraints. A
higher value for penalty factor will put designs that fail the design constraints
in greater disfavor, where as a lower value for penalty factor will place
designs that fail the design constraints in less disfavor. A reasonable default
for penalty factor has already been selected for you. However, if you find that
Darwin Designer keeps settling on designs that contain constraint violation,
then you may wish to increase the penalty factor value.
c. Probabilities, Era Numbers, and Population Size—Good defaults have already
been selected for you for these values, but instead of changing the random
number seed when conducting multiple optimization runs of the same design,
you may want to change these values. Good ranges for the values are there-
fore listed below for your convenience.
Note: The upper limit values for population size, maximum era
number, and era generation number are problem-dependent. For
larger design models, you should use greater values than for
smaller models.
Population Size : 40 to 200

Cut Probability : 0.5 to 2.5%
Splice Probability: 50 to 80%
Mutation Probability: 0.5 to 2%
Maximum Era Number: 4 to 10
Era Generation Number: 50 to 200
9. Is there a way to select design and rehab group pipes from the model
drawing?

You cannot select pipes directly from the drawing in this first release of Darwin
Designer. For this reason, we recommend you identify pipe groups and create
appropriately-named selection sets before starting Darwin Designer. When you
have defined the necessary selection sets, they can be used directly within Darwin
Designer. Selection sets can also be used to define pressure and flow constraints,
and to select boundary condition elements.
10. Darwin Designer cannot find a feasible solution. How do I work out what is
going wrong?
It is very likely that in using Darwin Designer, you will encounter situations
where Darwin Designer cannot find a feasible solution. This happens even to
those experienced in genetic-algorithm optimization and is due to the fact that the
determination of which designs are feasible and which aren’t is assessed by a
computer subject to the information you tell it. That is, the rules are applied, with
no exceptions.
For example, if you want a minimum of 20 psi across the board, Darwin Designer
will determine as infeasible any solution that does not have 20 psi at every junc-
tion. If you have a couple of junctions that are part of the detail of a tank inlet
valving, for example, then maybe you don’t really require 20 psi at those junc-
tions. Perhaps what you really mean is that you want 20 psi at all service junc-
tions. In that case, you’ll find where an engineer would have said the design is
feasible (because the design only fails the 20 psi requirement at non-service junc-
tions), but Darwin Designer is unable to make that determination, since it was told
20 psi was required at all junctions. The process by which you can get around
these kinds of issues is simply to identify them, correct them, and then re-run the
optimization. For the case of the 20 psi junction example, the fix might be to
create a selection set (in WaterCAD) of the junctions that are service junctions,
and only use those junctions as pressure constraint junctions. (The selection set
can be selected from within Darwin Designer.)
Along these same lines, you may also want to consider if any of the following
things might be causing trouble, before calling technical support:
a. Check for constraint violations in the results. Check both pressure and flow
constraints for the presence of constraint violations. If any violations exist,
you will need to determine why the junctions and/or pipes at which the viola-
tions occur are problematic. Maybe a minimum pressure constraint is simply
impossible to meet due to the junction elevation, etc. Other things to check for
are the applicability of blanket minimum and maximum pressures and veloci-
ties to modeling elements in detail models of pump stations, and the like. If
you find anything, then you need either to change the model, or modify/
remove the offending constraint and run the optimization again.
b. Make sure you have sufficient design options for a feasible design. That is,
make sure that you have a sufficient range of pipe sizes and/or rehabilitation
actions available to Darwin Designer to find a valid design.

c. Make sure that you haven’t specified competing design events. While it may
be possible to meet one design event or another separately, it may be impos-
sible to meet two together if they compete with each other. For example, one
design event might specify that a minimum pressure is required, and as such
the corresponding pipe taking the flow to that location needs to be large,
however, in the next design event with similar demands, a minimum velocity
constraint means the pipe has to be sized smaller. It may be impossible to
meet both design events with the single pipe size. To test this, build runs up by
performing initially with only one design event, then adding more in. If all of
a sudden after adding in a design event no more feasible solutions can be
found, then you can try to work out what in the most recently added design
event is causing the problem.
d. For multi-objective and maximum benefit optimizations, make sure you have
sufficient budget specified. It may just be that you have not given Darwin
Designer sufficient budget to allow a feasible design to be found. Try
increasing the budget.
For more information, see “Designer keeps coming up with strange results. What am I
doing wrong?” on page A-705.


Appendix
WaterCAD Theory B
WaterCAD is a state-of-the-art software tool primarily for use in the modeling and
analysis of water distribution systems. However, the methodology is applicable to any
fluid system with the following characteristics:
• Steady or gradually-varying turbulent flow

• Incompressible, Newtonian, single phase fluids
• Full, closed conduits (pressure systems)
Examples of systems with these characteristics include potable water systems, sewage
forcemains, fire protection systems, well pumps, and raw water pumping.
The WaterCAD algorithms are anticipated to grow and evolve to keep pace with the
state of the practice in water distribution and water quality modeling. Because the
mathematical solution methods are being continually extended, this manual deals
primarily with the fundamental principles underlying these algorithms, and focuses
less on the details of the implementation of the algorithms.
B.1 Acknowledgements
WaterCAD was designed, developed and programmed by Haestad Methods’ staff of
Software Engineers and Civil Engineers. This program is intended to represent the
latest technology in Windows-based Water Distribution Analysis and Design.
WaterCAD numerical computations are based on research conducted by the U.S.

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Drinking Water Research Division, Risk
Reduction Engineering Laboratory, its employees and consultants. As a result,
WaterCAD will generate results consistent with the EPA computer program EPANET
2.
WaterCAD User's Guide B-713

Pressure Network Hydraulics
B.2 Pressure Network Hydraulics

Pressure network hydraulics includes:
• “Network Hydraulics Theory” on page B-714

• “The Energy Equation” on page B-716
• “Hydraulic and Energy Grades” on page B-716
• “Conservation of Mass and Energy” on page B-717
• “The Gradient Algorithm” on page B-719
• “Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm” on page B-719
• “The Linear System Equation Solver” on page B-722
• “Pump Theory” on page B-723
• “Valve Theory” on page B-726
B.2.1 Network Hydraulics Theory
In practice, pipe networks consist not only of pipes, but of miscellaneous fittings,
services, storage tanks and reservoirs, meters, regulating valves, pumps, and elec-
tronic and mechanical controls. For modeling purposes, these system elements are
organized into the following categories:
• Pipes—Transport water from one location (or node) to another.

• Junctions/Nodes—Specific points, or nodes, in the system at which an event of
interest is occurring. This includes points where pipes intersect, where there are
major demands on the system such as a large industry, a cluster of houses, or a fire
hydrant, or critical points in the system where pressures are important for analysis
purposes.
• Reservoirs and Tanks—Boundary nodes with a known hydraulic grade that
define the initial hydraulic grades for any computational cycle. They form the
baseline hydraulic constraints used to determine the condition of all other nodes
during system operation. Boundary nodes are elements such as tanks, reservoirs,
and pressure sources.
• Pumps—Represented as nodes. Their purpose is to provide energy to the system
and raise the water pressure.
• Valves—Mechanical devices used to stop or control the flow through a pipe, or to
control the pressure in the pipe upstream or downstream of the valve. They result
in a loss of energy in the system.
B-714 WaterCAD User's Guide

WaterCAD Theory
An event or condition at one point in the system can affect all other parts of the
system. While this complicates the approach that the engineer must take to find a solu-
tion, there are some governing principles that drive the behavior of the network,
including the Conservation of Mass and Energy Principle (see “Conservation of Mass
and Energy” on page B-717), and the Energy Principle (see “The Energy Principle” on
page B-715).
The two modes of analysis are Steady-State Network Hydraulics and Extended Period
Simulation (for more information, see “Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation” on
page 9-378). This program solves for the distributions of flows and hydraulic grades
using the Gradient Algorithm.
The Energy Principle

The first law of thermodynamics states that for any given system, the change in energy
is equal to the difference between the heat transferred to the system and the work done
by the system on its surroundings during a given time interval.
The energy referred to in this principle represents the total energy of the system minus
the sum of the potential, kinetic, and internal (molecular) forms of energy, such as
electrical and chemical energy. The internal energy changes are commonly disre-
garded in water distribution analysis because of their relatively small magnitude.
In hydraulic applications, energy is often represented as energy per unit weight,

resulting in units of length. Using these length equivalents gives engineers a better feel
for the resulting behavior of the system. When using these length equivalents, the state
of the system is expressed in terms of head. The energy at any point within a hydraulic
system is often represented in three parts:
Pressure Head: p/γ
Elevation Head: z
Velocity Head: V2/2g
Where: p = Pressure (N/m2, lb./ft.2)
γ = Specific weight (N/m3, lb./ft.3)

z = Elevation (m, ft.)
V = Velocity (m/s, ft./sec.)
g = Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s2, ft./sec.2)

These quantities can be used to express the headloss or head gain between two loca-
tions using the energy equation (for more information, see “The Energy Equation” on
page B-716).
B.2.2 The Energy Equation
In addition to pressure head, elevation head, and velocity head, there may also be head
added to the system, by a pump for instance, and head removed from the system due
to friction. These changes in head are referred to as head gains and headlosses, respec-
tively. Balancing the energy across two points in the system, you then obtain the
energy equation:
p1 V2 p V 2
+ z1 + 1 + h p = 2 + z 2 + 2 + hL
γ 2g γ 2g
Where: p = Pressure (N/m2, lb./ft.2)
g = Specific weight (N/m3, lb./ft.3)

z = Elevation at the centroid (m, ft.)

hp = Head gain from a pump (m, ft.)
hL = Combined headloss (m, ft.)
The components of the energy equation can be combined to express two useful quanti-
ties, which are the hydraulic grade and the energy grade.
B.2.3 Hydraulic and Energy Grades
Hydraulic and energy grades includes:
• “Hydraulic Grade” on page B-717

• “Energy Grade” on page B-717

WaterCAD Theory
Figure B-1: EGL and HGL
Hydraulic Grade
The hydraulic grade is the sum of the pressure head (p/g) and elevation head (z). The
hydraulic head represents the height to which a water column would rise in a piezom-
eter. The plot of the hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the hydraulic
grade line, or HGL.
Energy Grade
The energy grade is the sum of the hydraulic grade and the velocity head (V2/2g).
This is the height to which a column of water would rise in a pitot tube. The plot of the
hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the energy grade line, or EGL. At a
lake or reservoir, where the velocity is essentially zero, the EGL is equal to the HGL,
as can be seen in the following figure.
B.2.4 Conservation of Mass and Energy
Conservation of mass and energy includes:
• “Conservation of Mass” on page B-717

• “Conservation of Energy” on page B-718
Conservation of Mass
At any node in a system containing incompressible fluid, the total volumetric or mass
flows in must equal the flows out, less the change in storage. Separating these into
flows from connecting pipes, demands, and storage, you obtain:
∑ QIN ∆t = ∑ Q OUT ∆t + ∆VS

Where: QIN = Total flow into the node (m3/s, cfs)

QOUT = Total demand at the node (m3/s, cfs)
∆VS = Change in storage volume (m3, ft.3)
∆t = Change in time (s)
Conservation of Energy
The conservation of energy principle states that the headlosses through the system
must balance at each point. For pressure networks, this means that the total headloss
between any two nodes in the system must be the same regardless of what path is
taken between the two points. The headloss must be sign consistent with the assumed
flow direction (i.e., gain head when proceeding opposite the flow direction and lose
head when proceeding in the flow direction).
Figure B-2: Conservation of Energy
The same basic principle can be applied to any path between two points. As shown in
the figure above, the combined headloss around a loop must equal zero in order to
achieve the same hydraulic grade (see “Hydraulic and Energy Grades” on page B-
716) as at the beginning.

WaterCAD Theory
B.2.5 The Gradient Algorithm
The gradient algorithm for the solution of pipe networks is formulated upon the full
set of system equations that model both heads and flows. Since both continuity and
energy are balanced and solved with each iteration, the method is theoretically guaran-
teed to deliver the same level of accuracy observed and expected in other well-known
algorithms such as the Simultaneous Path Adjustment Method (Fowler) and the
Linear Theory Method (Wood).
In addition, there are a number of other advantages that this method has over other
algorithms for the solution of pipe network systems:
• The method can directly solve both looped and partly branched networks. This
gives it a computational advantage over some loop-based algorithms, such as
Simultaneous Path, which require the reformulation of the network into equiva-
lent looped networks or pseudo-loops.
• Using the method avoids the post-computation step of loop and path definition,
which adds significantly to the overhead of system computation.
• The method is numerically stable when the system becomes disconnected by
check valves, pressure regulating valves, or modeler’s error. The loop and path
methods fail in these situations.
• The structure of the generated system of equations allows the use of extremely
fast and reliable sparse matrix solvers.
The derivation of the Gradient Algorithm starts with two matrices and ends as a
working system of equations.
B.2.6 Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm
Given a network defined by N unknown head nodes, P links of unknown flow, and B
boundary or fixed head nodes, the network topology can be expressed in two inci-
dence matrices:
A12 = A21T (P x N) Unknown head nodes incidence matrix
and
A10 = A01T (P x B) Fixed head nodes incidence matrix
The following convention is used to assign matrix values:

A12(i,j) = 1, 0, or -1 (PxN) Unknown head nodes incidence matrix
Assigned nodal demands are given by:
qT = [q1, q2,…, qN] (1 x N) Nodal demand vector
Assigned boundary nodal heads are given by:
HfT = [Hf1, Hf2,…, HfB ] (1 x B) Fixed nodal head vector
The headloss or gain transform is expressed in the matrix:
(1 x P) Non-linear laws expressing headlosses in

FT(Q) = [f1, f2…, fp ]
links
fi = fi (Qi )
These matrix elements that define known or iterative network state can be used to
compute the final steady-state network represented by the matrix quantities for
unknown flow and unknown nodal head.
Unknown link flow quantities are defined by:
QT = [Q1,Q2…, Qp ] (1 x P) Unknown link flow rate vector
Unknown nodal heads are defined by:
HT = [H1, H2 …, HN ] (1 x N) Unknown nodal head vector
These topologic and quantity matrices can be formulated into the generalized matrix
expression using the laws of energy and mass conservation:
A 12H + F(Q) = − A 10H f
A 12 Q = q

WaterCAD Theory
A second diagonal matrix that implements the vectorized head change coefficients is
introduced. It is generalized for Hazen-Williams friction losses in this case:
⎡R Q n1 −1 ⎤
⎢ 1 1 ⎥
⎢ n2 −1 ⎥
R2 Q2
⎢ ⎥
A 11 =⎢ ... ⎥
⎢ ... ⎥
⎢ n −1
⎥
⎢⎣ R P QP P ⎥⎦
This yields the full expression of the network response in matrix form:
⎡ A 11 A 12 ⎤ ⎡Q⎤ ⎡− A 10H f ⎤
⎢ ⎥ =
⎣ A 21 0 ⎦ ⎢⎣H ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ q
⎥
⎦
To solve the system of non-linear equations, the Newton-Raphson iterative scheme

can be obtained by differentiating both sides of the equation with respect to Q and H
to get:
⎡NA 11 A 12 ⎤ ⎡dQ⎤ ⎡− dE⎤

⎢ ⎥ =
⎣ A 21 0 ⎦ ⎢⎣ dH⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ dq ⎥⎦
with
⎡n1 ⎤
⎢ ⎥
n2
N= ⎢ ⎥
⎢ ... ⎥
⎢ ⎥
⎣ nP ⎦
The final recursive form of the Newton-Raphson algorithm can now be derived after
matrix inversion and various algebraic manipulations and substitutions (not presented
here). The working system of equations for each solution iteration, k, is given by:
−1
{ −1
}
H k +1 = −(A 21 N −1 A 11 A12 ) −1 A 21 N −1 (Q k + A11 A10 H f ) + (q − A 21Q k )
−1
Q k +1 = (1 − N −1 )Q k − N −1 A 11 (A12 H k +1 + A10 H f )
The solution for each unknown nodal head for each time iteration is computationally
intensive. This high-speed solution utilizes a highly optimized sparse matrix solver
(see “The Linear System Equation Solver” on page B-722) that is specifically tailored
to the structure of this matrix system of equations.
Sources:

Todini, E. and S. Pilati, “A gradient Algorithm for the Analysis of Pipe Networks,”
Computer Applications in Water Supply, Vol. 1—Systems Analysis and Simulation,
ed. By Bryan Callback and Chin-Hour Or, Research Studies Press LTD, Watchword,
Hertfordshire, England.
B.2.7 The Linear System Equation Solver
The Conjugate Gradient method (see “The Gradient Algorithm” on page B-719) is
one method that, in theory, converges to an exact solution in a limited number of steps.
The Gradient working equation can be expressed for the pressure network system of
equations as:
Ax = b
where:
x = Hk + 1
{ −1
}
b = − A 21 N −1 (Q k + A 11 A 10 H f ) + (q − A 21Q k )
The structure of the system matrix A at the point of solution is:
A = A 21(NA 11 ) −1 A 12 = A 21DA 12
and it can be seen that the nature of the topological matrix components yield a total
working matrix A that is:
• Symmetric
• Positive definite
• Stieltjes type
Because of the symmetry, the number of non-zero elements to be retained in the

matrix equals the number of nodes plus the number of links. This results in a low
density, highly sparse matrix form. It follows that an iterative solution scheme would
be preferred over direct matrix inversion, in order to avoid matrix fill-in, which serves
to increase the computational effort.
Because the system is symmetric and positive definite, a Cholesky factorization can
be performed to give:
A = LLT
where L is lower triangular with positive diagonal elements. Making the Cholesky
factorization allows the system to be solved in two steps:

WaterCAD Theory
y = L−1b
x = (LT ) −1 y
The use of this approach over more general sparse matrix solvers that implement
traditional Gaussian elimination methods without consideration to matrix symmetry is
preferred, since performance gains are considerable. The algorithm utilized in this
software solves the system of equations using a variant of Cholesky’s method which
has been optimized to reduce fill-in of the factorization matrix, thus minimizing
storage and reducing overall computational effort.
B.2.8 Pump Theory
Pumps are an integral part of many pressure systems. Pumps add energy, or head
gains, to the flow to counteract headlosses and hydraulic grade differences within the
system.
A pump is defined by its characteristic curve, which relates the pump head, or the
head added to the system, to the flow rate. This curve is indicative of the ability of the
pump to add head at different flow rates. To model behavior of the pump system, addi-
tional information is needed to ascertain the actual point at which the pump will be
operating.
The system operating point is based on the point at which the pump curve crosses the
system curve representing the static lift and headlosses due to friction and minor
losses (for more information, see “Minor Losses” on page B-732). When these curves
are superimposed, the operating point can easily be found. This is shown in the figure
below.
Figure B-3: System Operating Point

As water surface elevations and demands throughout the system change, the static
head (Hs) and headlosses (HL) vary. This changes the location of the system curve,
while the pump characteristic curve remains constant. These shifts in the system curve
result in a shifting operating point over time.
Variable Speed Pumps

A pump’s characteristic curve is fixed for a given motor speed and impeller diameter,
but can be determined for any speed and any diameter by applying the affinity laws.
For variable speed pumps, these affinity laws are presented as:
Q1 n
= 1
Q2 n2
and
2
h1 ⎛ n1 ⎞
=⎜ ⎟
h 2 ⎜⎝ n 2 ⎟⎠
Where: Q = Pump flow rate (m3/s, cfs)

h = Pump head (m, ft.)
n = Pump speed (rpm)
Figure B-4: Effect of Relative Speed on Pump Curve

WaterCAD Theory
Constant Horsepower Pumps

During preliminary studies, the exact characteristics of the constant horsepower pump
may not be known. In these cases, the assumption is often made that the pump is
adding energy to the water at a constant rate. Based on power-head-flow rate relation-
ships for pumps, the operating point of the pump can then be determined. Although
this assumption is useful for some applications, a constant horsepower pump should
only be used for preliminary studies.
Note: It is not necessary to place a check valve on the pipe

immediately downstream of a pump because pumps have built
in check valves that prevent reverse flow.
This software currently models six different types of pumps:
Tip: Whenever possible, avoid using constant power or design point

pumps. They are often enticing because they require less work
on behalf of the engineer, but they are much less accurate than a
pump curve based on several representative points.
• Constant Power—These pumps may be useful for preliminary designs and esti-
mating pump size, but should not be used for any analysis for which more accu-
rate results are desired.
• Design Point (One-Point)—A pump can be defined by a single design point (Hd
@ Qd). From this point, the curve’s interception with the head and discharge axes
is computed as Ho = 1.33•Hd and Qo = 2.00•Qd. This type of pump is useful for
preliminary designs, but should not be used for final analysis.
• Standard (Three-Point)—This pump curve is defined by three points—the
shutoff head (pump head at zero discharge), the design point (as with the single-
point pump), and the maximum operating point (the highest discharge at which
the pump performs predictably).
• Standard Extended—The same as the standard three-point pump, but with an
extended point at the zero pump head point. This is automatically calculated by
the program.
• Custom Extended—The custom extended pump is similar to the standard
extended pump, but allows you to enter the discharge at zero pump head.
• Multiple Point—This option allows you to define a custom rating curve for a
pump. The pump curve is defined by entering points for discharge rates at various
heads. Since the general pump equation, shown below, is used to simulate the
pump during the network computations, the user-defined pump curve points are
used to solve for coefficients in the general pump equation:
Y = A − (B × Q C )

Where: Y = Head (m, ft.)
Q = Discharge (m3/s, cfs)

A,B,C = Pump curve coefficients
The Levenberg-Marquardt Method is used to solve for A, B and C based on the given
multiple-point rating curve.
B.2.9 Valve Theory
There are several types of valves that may be present in a pressurized system. These
valves have different behaviors and different responsibilities, but all valves are used
for automatically controlling parts of the system. They can be opened, closed, or throt-
tled to achieve the desired result.
• “Check Valves (CVs)” on page B-726

• “Flow Control Valves (FCVs)” on page B-726
• “Pressure Reducing Valves (PRVs)” on page B-726
• “Pressure Sustaining Valves (PSVs)” on page B-727
• “Pressure Breaker Valves (PBVs)” on page B-727
• “Throttle Control Valves (TCVs)” on page B-727
• “General Purpose Valves (GPVs)” on page B-727
Check Valves (CVs)

Check valves are used to maintain flow in only one direction by closing when the flow
begins to reverse. When the flow is in the specified direction of the check valve, it is
considered to be fully open. Check valves are added to the network on a pipe element.
Flow Control Valves (FCVs)

FCVs are used to limit the maximum flow rate through the valve from upstream to
downstream. FCVs do not limit the minimum flow rate or negative flow rate (flow
from the To Pipe to the From Pipe). These valves are commonly found in areas where
a water district has contracted with another district or a private developer to limit the
maximum demand to a value that will not adversely affect the provider’s system.
Pressure Reducing Valves (PRVs)

Pressure reducing valves are often used for separate pressure zones in water distribu-
tion networks. These valves prevent the pressure downstream from exceeding a speci-
fied level in order to avoid pressures that could have damaging effects on the system.

WaterCAD Theory
Pressure Sustaining Valves (PSVs)

Pressure sustaining valves maintain a specified pressure upstream from the valve.
Similar to the other regulating valves, these are often used to ensure that pressures in
the system (upstream, in this case) will not drop to unacceptable levels.
Pressure Breaker Valves (PBVs)

Pressure breaker valves create a specified headloss across the valve, and are often
used to model components that cannot be easily modeled using standard minor loss
elements.
Throttle Control Valves (TCVs)

Throttle control valves simulate minor loss elements whose headloss characteristics
change over time.
General Purpose Valves (GPVs)

GPVs are used to model situations and devices where you specify the flow-to-head-
loss relationship, rather than using standard hydraulic formulas. GPVs can be used to
represent reduced pressure backflow prevention valves, well draw-down behavior,
and turbines.
B.3 Friction and Minor Losses

Friction and minor losses includes:
• “Friction Loss Methods” on page B-727

• “Minor Losses” on page B-732
B.3.1 Friction Loss Methods
Friction loss methods include:
• “Chezy’s Equation” on page B-728

• “Colebrook-White Equation” on page B-728
• “Hazen-Williams Equation” on page B-729
• “Darcy-Weisbach Equation” on page B-729
• “Manning’s Equation” on page B-731

Friction and Minor Losses
Chezy’s Equation
Chezy’s equation is rarely used directly, but it is the basis for several other methods,
including Manning’s equation. Chezy’s equation is:
Q =C⋅ A ⋅ R⋅S
Where: Q = Discharge in the section (m3/s, cfs)
C = Chezy’s roughness coefficient (m1/2/s, ft.1/2/sec.)
A = Flow area (m2, ft.2)

R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft.)
S = Friction slope (m/m, ft./ft.)
Colebrook-White Equation
The Colebrook-White equation is used to iteratively calculate for the Darcy-Weisbach
friction factor:
Free Surface:
⏐ k ⎞⎟
= −2 log ⎯
1 2.51 ⎟⎟
⎯
⎯ +
f ⎯
®12.0 R Re f ⎟⎟⎠
Full Flow (Closed Conduit):
⏐ k ⎞⎟
= −2 log ⎯
1 2.51 ⎟⎟
⎯
⎯ +
f ⎯
®3.7 D Re f ⎟⎟⎠
Where: f = Friction factor (unitless)

k = Darcy-Weisbach roughness height (m, ft.)
Re = Reynolds Number (unitless)
D = Pipe diameter (m, ft.)

WaterCAD Theory
Hazen-Williams Equation
The Hazen-Williams Formula is frequently used in the analysis of pressure pipe
systems (such as water distribution networks and sewer force mains). The formula is
as follows:
Q = k ⋅ C ⋅ A ⋅ R0.63 ⋅ S0.54
Where: Q = Discharge in the section (m3/s, cfs)

C = Hazen-Williams roughness coefficient (unitless)

k = Constant (0.85 for SI units, 1.32 for US units).
Darcy-Weisbach Equation
Because of non-empirical origins, the Darcy-Weisbach equation is viewed by many
engineers as the most accurate method for modeling friction losses. It most commonly
takes the following form:
L V2
hL = f ⋅
D 2g
Where: hL = Headloss (m, ft.)
f = Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (unitless)

L = Pipe length (m, ft.)
V = Flow velocity (m/s, ft./sec.)
For section geometries that are not circular, this equation is adapted by relating a
circular section’s full-flow hydraulic radius to its diameter:
D = 4R

Where: R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft.)

D = Diameter (m, ft.)
This can then be rearranged to the form:
R⋅S
Q = A ⋅ 8g ⋅
f
Where: Q = Discharge (m3/s, cfs)

f = Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (unitless)
The Swamee and Jain equation can then be used to calculate the friction factor. For
more information, see “Swamee and Jain Equation” on page B-730.
Swamee and Jain Equation
Note: The Kinematic Viscosity is used in determining the friction

coefficient in the Darcy-Weisbach Friction Method. The default
units are initially set by Haestad Methods.
1.325
f =
©⏐ ⎞⎟⎤
2
™ln ⎯
ε + 5. 74 ⎟⎥
™⎯ ⎯ 3.7 D Re0.9 ⎟⎠⎥⎦
⎛ ®
Where: f = Friction factor (unitless)

ε = Roughness height (m, ft.)
Re = Reynolds Number (unitless)
The friction factor is dependent on the Reynolds number of the flow, which is depen-
dent on the flow velocity, which is dependent on the discharge. As you can see, this
process requires the iterative selection of a friction factor until the calculated
discharge agrees with the chosen friction factor.

WaterCAD Theory
Manning’s Equation
Note: Manning’s roughness coefficients are the same as the

roughness coefficients used in Kutter’s equation.
Manning’s equation, which is based on Chezy’s equation, is one of the most popular
methods in use today for free surface flow. For Manning’s equation, the roughness
coefficient in Chezy’s equation is calculated as:
R1/ 6
C=k⋅
n
Where: C = Chezy’s roughness coefficient (m1/2/s, ft.1/2/sec.)

n = Manning’s roughness (s/m1/3)
k = Constant (1.00 m1/3/m1/3, 1.49 ft.1/3/ft.1/3)
Substituting this roughness into Chezy’s equation, you obtain the well-known
Manning’s equation:
k
Q= ⋅ A ⋅ R2 / 3 ⋅ S1/ 2
n
Where: Q = Discharge (m3/s, cfs)
k = Constant (1.00 m1/3/s, 1.49 ft.1/3/sec.)

n = Manning’s roughness (unitless)


B.3.2 Minor Losses
Minor losses in pressure pipes are caused by localized areas of increased turbulence
that create a drop in the energy and hydraulic grades at that point in the system. The
magnitude of these losses is dependent primarily upon the shape of the fitting, which
directly affects the flow lines in the pipe.
Figure B-5: Flow Lines at Entrance
The equation most commonly used for determining the loss in a fitting, valve, meter,
or other localized component is:
V2
hm = K
2g
Where: hm = Loss due to the minor loss element (m, ft.)
K = Loss coefficient for the specific fitting

g = Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s2, ft./sec. 2)
Typical values for fitting loss coefficients are included in the Fittings Table. For more
information, see “Fitting Loss Coefficients” on page B-747.
Generally speaking, more gradual transitions create smoother flow lines and smaller
headlosses. For example, the figure below shows the effects of entrance configuration
on typical pipe entrance flow lines.

WaterCAD Theory
B.4 Water Quality Theory

The governing equations for WaterCAD water quality solver are based on the princi-
ples of conservation of mass coupled with reaction kinetics. The following
phenomena are represented (Rossman et al., 1993; Rossman and Boulos, 1996):
• “Advective Transport in Pipes” on page B-733

• “Mixing at Pipe Junctions” on page B-734
• “Mixing in Storage Facilities” on page B-734
• “Bulk Flow Reactions” on page B-735
• “Pipe Wall Reactions” on page B-738
• “System of Equations” on page B-739
• “Lagrangian Transport Algorithm” on page B-739
• “References” on page B-741
B.4.1 Advective Transport in Pipes
A dissolved substance will travel down the length of a pipe with the same average
velocity as the carrier fluid while at the same time reacting (either growing or
decaying) at some given rate. Longitudinal dispersion is usually not an important
transport mechanism under most operating conditions. This means there is no inter-
mixing of mass between adjacent parcels of water traveling down a pipe.
Advective transport within a pipe is represented by the following equation:
∂C i ∂C i
-------- = – u i -------- + r ( C i )
∂t ∂x
Where: Ci = Concentration (mass/volume) in pipe i
ui = Flow velocity (length/time) in pipe i
Rate of reaction (mass/volume/time) as a function

r =
of concentration

Water Quality Theory
B.4.2 Mixing at Pipe Junctions
At junctions receiving inflow from two or more pipes, the mixing of fluid is taken to
be complete and instantaneous. Thus the concentration of a substance in water leaving
the junction is the flow-weighted sum of the concentrations from the inflow pipes.
For a specific node k one can write:
Ci x = 0 =
∑ jε I k Q j C j x = L + Q k, ext C k, ext
j
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
∑ jε I k Qj + Qk, ext
Where: I = Link with flow leaving node k
Ik = Set of links with flow into k
Lj = Length of link j
Qj = Flow (volume/time) in link j
External source flow entering the network at node

Qk,ext =
k
Concentration of the external flow entering at
Ck,ext =
node k
Ci|x=0 = The concentration at the start of link i.
Ci|x=L = The concentration at the end of link i.
B.4.3 Mixing in Storage Facilities
It is convenient to assume that the contents of storage facilities (tanks and reservoirs)
are completely mixed. This is a reasonable assumption for many tanks operating under
fill-and-draw conditions, providing that sufficient momentum flux is imparted to the
inflow (Rossman and Grayman, 1999). Under completely mixed conditions the
concentration throughout the tank is a blend of the current contents and that of any
entering water. At the same time, the internal concentration could be changing due to
reactions.
The following equation expresses these phenomena:

WaterCAD Theory
∂( V s C s )
-------------------
∂t
- = ∑ i ε I s Q i C i x = L – ∑ j ε O s Q j Cs + r ( Cs )
i
Where: Vs = Volume in storage at time t
Cs = Concentration within the storage facility
Is = Set of links providing flow into the facility
Os = Set of links withdrawing flow from the facility
B.4.4 Bulk Flow Reactions
While a substance moves down a pipe or resides in storage, it can undergo reaction
with constituents in the water column. The rate of reaction can generally be described
as a power function of concentration:
n
r = kC
Where: k = Reaction constant

n = Reaction order
When a limiting concentration exists on the ultimate growth or loss of a substance, the
rate expression becomes:
For n > 0, Kb > 0:
(n – 1)
R = K b ( C L – C )C
For n > 0, Kb < 0:
(n – 1)
R = K b ( C – C L )C
Where: CL = Limiting concentration

Simple 1st-Order Decay

(CL = 0, Kb < 0, n = 1)
R = Kb C
The decay of many substances, such as chlorine, can be modeled adequately as a

simple first-order reaction.
First-Order Saturation Growth

(CL > 0, Kb > 0, n = 1)
R = Kb ( CL – C )
This model can be applied to the growth of disinfection by-products, such as trihalom-
ethanes, where the ultimate formation of by-product (CL) is limited by the amount of
reactive precursor present.
Two-Component, 2nd-Order Decay

(CL > 0|CL < 0, Kb < 0, n = 2)
R = Kb C ( CL – C )
This model assumes that substance A reacts with substance B in some unknown ratio
to produce a product P. The rate of disappearance of A is proportional to the product of
A and B remaining. CL can be either positive or negative, depending on whether either
component A or B is in excess, respectively. Clark (1998) has had success in applying
this model to chlorine decay data that did not conform to the simple first-order model.
Michaelis-Menton Decay Kinetics

(CL > 0, Kb < 0, n < 0)
Note: These expressions apply only for values of Kb and CL used with
Michaelis-Menton kinetics.
Kb C
R = ----------------
-
CL – C

WaterCAD Theory
As a special case, when a negative reaction order n is specified, WaterCAD will utilize
the Michaelis-Menton rate equation, shown above for a decay reaction. (For growth
reactions the denominator becomes CL + C.) This rate equation is often used to
describe enzyme-catalyzed reactions and microbial growth. It produces first-order
behavior at low concentrations and zero-order behavior at higher concentrations. Note
that for decay reactions, CL must be set higher than the initial concentration present.
Koechling (1998) has applied Michaelis-Menton kinetics to model chlorine decay in a

number of different waters and found that both Kb and CL could be related to the
water’s organic content and its ultraviolet absorbance as follows:
1.365 ( 100UVA )
K b = – 0.32 UVA --------------------------
DOC
C L = 4.98UVA – 1.91DOC
Where: UVA = Ultraviolet absorbance at 254 nm (1/cm)

DOC = Dissolved organic carbon concentration (mg/L)
Zero-Order Growth
(CL = 0, Kb = 1, n = 0)
R = 1.0
This special case can be used to model water age, where with each unit of time the
concentration (i.e., age) increases by one unit.
The relationship between the bulk rate constant seen at one temperature (T1) to that at
another temperature (T2) is often expressed using a van’t Hoff-Arrehnius equation of
the form:
( T2 – T1 )
K b2 = K b1 θ
Where: θ = Constant
In one investigation for chlorine, q was estimated to be 1.1 when T1 was 20 deg. C
(Koechling, 1998).

B.4.5 Pipe Wall Reactions
While flowing through pipes, dissolved substances can be transported to the pipe wall
and react with material such as corrosion products or biofilm that are on or close to the
wall. The amount of wall area available for reaction and the rate of mass transfer
between the bulk fluid and the wall will also influence the overall rate of this reaction.
The surface area per unit volume, which for a pipe equals 2 divided by the radius,
determines the former factor. The latter factor can be represented by a mass transfer
coefficient whose value depends on the molecular diffusivity of the reactive species
and on the Reynolds number of the flow (Rossman et. al, 1994).
For first-order kinetics, the rate of a pipe wall reaction can be expressed as:
2k w k f C
r = -------------------------
R ( kw + kf )
Where: kw = Wall reaction rate constant (length/time)
kf = Mass transfer coefficient (length/time)
R = Pipe radius
For zero-order kinetics, the reaction rate cannot be any higher than the rate of mass
transfer, so:
r = MIN ( k w, k C ) ( 2 ⁄ R )
f
Where: kw = Mass/area/time
Mass transfer coefficients are usually expressed in terms of a dimensionless Sherwood

number (Sh):
D
k f = Sh ----
d
Molecular diffusivity of the species being

Where: D =
transported (length 2 / time)
d = Pipe diameter
In fully developed laminar flow, the average Sherwood number along the length of a
pipe can be expressed as:

WaterCAD Theory
0.0668 ( d ⁄ L )ReSc
Sh = 3.65 + --------------------------------------------------------------------
2⁄ 3
1 + 0.04 [ ( d ⁄ L )ReSc ]
Where: Re = Reynolds number

Schmidt number (kinematic viscosity of water
Sc = divided by the diffusivity of the chemical)
(Edwards et. al, 1976).
For turbulent flow the empirical correlation of Notter and Sleicher (1971) can be used:
0.88 1⁄ 3
Sh = 0.0149Re Sc
B.4.6 System of Equations
When applied to a network as a whole, Equations 1-3 represent a coupled set of differ-
ential/algebraic equations with time-varying coefficients that must be solved for Ci in
each pipe i and Cs in each storage facility s. This solution is subject to the following
set of externally imposed conditions:
• Initial conditions that specify Ci for all x in each pipe i and Cs in each storage
facility s at time 0
• Boundary conditions that specify values for Ck,ext and Qk,ext for all time t at
each node k which has external mass inputs
• Hydraulic conditions which specify the volume Vs in each storage facility s and
the flow Qi in each link i at all times t
B.4.7 Lagrangian Transport Algorithm
WaterCAD water quality simulator uses a Lagrangian time-based approach to track

the fate of discrete parcels of water as they move along pipes and mix together at junc-
tions between fixed-length time steps (Liou and Kroon, 1987). These water quality
time steps are typically much shorter than the hydraulic time step (e.g., minutes rather

than hours) to accommodate the short times of travel that can occur within pipes. As
time progresses, the size of the most upstream segment in a pipe increases as water
enters the pipe while an equal loss in size of the most downstream segment occurs as
water leaves the link. The size of the segments in between these remains unchanged.
The following steps occur at the end of each such time step:
1. The water quality in each segment is updated to reflect any reaction that may have
occurred over the time step.
2. The water from the leading segments of pipes with flow into each junction is
blended together to compute a new water quality value at the junction. The
volume contributed from each segment equals the product of its pipe’s flow rate
and the time step. If this volume exceeds that of the segment, then the segment is
destroyed and the next one in line behind it begins to contribute its volume.
3. Contributions from outside sources are added to the quality values at the junc-
tions. The quality in storage tanks is updated depending on the method used to
model mixing in the tank (see “Figure B-6: Behavior of Segments in the
Lagrangian Solution Method”on page B-741).
4. New segments are created in pipes with flow out of each junction, reservoir, and
tank. The segment volume equals the product of the pipe flow and the time step.
The segment’s water quality equals the new quality value computed for the node.
To cut down on the number of segments, this step is only carried out if the new
node quality differs by a user-specified tolerance from that of the last segment in
the outflow pipe. If the difference in quality is below the tolerance, then the size of
the current last segment in the outflow pipe is increased by the volume flowing
into the pipe over the time step.
This process is then repeated for the next water-quality time step. At the start of the
next hydraulic time step, the order of segments in any links that experience a flow
reversal is switched. Initially each pipe in the network consists of a single segment
whose quality equals the initial quality assigned to the upstream node.

WaterCAD Theory
2 Time t
3 2 1 2 1
2 Time t + ∆t
3 2 3 2 1
Figure B-6: Behavior of Segments in the Lagrangian Solution Method
B.4.8 References
Bhave, P.R., Analysis of Flow in Water Distribution Networks, Technomic Publishing,

Lancaster, PA, 1991.
Clark, R.M., “Chlorine demand and Trihalomethane formation kinetics: a second-

order model,” Journal of Environmental Engineering, Vol. 124, No. 1, pp. 16-24,
1998.
Dunlop, E.J., WADI Users Manual, Local Government Computer Services Board,
Dublin, Ireland, 1991.
George, A. & Liu, J. W-H., Computer Solution of Large Sparse Positive Definite
Systems, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1981.

Hamam, Y.M., & Brameller, A., “Hybrid method for the solution of piping networks,”
Proc. IEE, Vol. 113, No. 11, pp. 1607-1612, 1971.
Koechling, M.T., Assessment and Modeling of Chlorine Reactions with Natural

Organic Matter: Impact of Source Water Quality and Reaction Conditions, Ph.D.
Thesis, Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering, University of Cincin-
nati, Cincinnati, Ohio, 1998.
Liou, C.P. and Kroon, J.R., “Modeling the propagation of waterborne substances in
distribution networks,” J. AWWA, 79(11), 54-58, 1987.
Notter, R.H. and Sleicher, C.A., “The eddy diffusivity in the turbulent boundary layer
near a wall,” Chem. Eng. Sci., Vol. 26, pp. 161-171, 1971.
Osiadacz, A.J., Simulation and Analysis of Gas Networks, E. & F.N. Spon, London,
1987.
Rossman, L.A., Boulos, P.F., and Altman, T., “Discrete volume-element method for
network water-quality models,” Journal of Water Resource Planning and Manage-
ment, Vol. 119, No. 5, 505-517, 1993.
Rossman, L.A., Clark, R.M., and Grayman, W.M., “Modeling chlorine residuals in
drinking-water distribution systems,” Journal of Environmental Engineering, Vol.
120, No. 4, 803-820, 1994.
Rossman, L.A. and Boulos, P.F., “Numerical methods for modeling water quality in
distribution systems: A comparison,” Journal of Water Resource Planning and
Management, Vol. 122, No. 2, 137-146, 1996.
Rossman, L.A. and Grayman, W.M., “Scale-model studies of mixing in drinking water
storage tanks,” Journal of Environmental Engineering, Vol. 125, No. 8, pp. 755-761,
1999.
Salgado, R., Todini, E., & O’Connell, P.E., “Extending the gradient method to include
pressure regulating valves in pipe networks,” Proc. Inter. Symposium on Computer
Modeling of Water Distribution Systems, University of Kentucky, May 12-13, 1988.
Todini, E. & Pilati, S., “A gradient method for the analysis of pipe networks,” 1987.
International Conference on Computer Applications for Water Supply and Distribu-

tion, Leicester Polytechnic, UK, September 8-10.

WaterCAD Theory
B.5 Engineer’s Reference

This section provides you with tables of commonly used roughness values and fitting
loss coefficients.
Roughness Values:
• “Roughness Values—Manning’s Equation” on page B-743

• “Roughness Values—Darcy-Weisbach Equation (Colebrook-White)” on page B-
744
• “Roughness Values—Hazen-Williams Equation” on page B-745
• “Typical Roughness Values for Pressure Pipes” on page B-746
Coefficients:
• “Fitting Loss Coefficients” on page B-747
B.5.1 Roughness Values—Manning’s Equation
Commonly used roughness values for different materials are:
Table B-1: Manning’s Coefficient (n) for Closed Metal Conduits

Flowing Partly Full
Channel Type and Description Minimum Normal Maximum
a. Brass, smooth 0.009 0.010 0.013
b. Steel
1. Lockbar and welded 0.010 0.012 0.014
2. Riveted and spiral 0.013 0.016 0.017
c. Cast iron
1. Coated 0.010 0.013 0.014
2. Uncoated 0.011 0.014 0.016
d. Wrought iron
1. Black 0.012 0.014 0.015

Engineer’s Reference
Table B-1: Manning’s Coefficient (n) for Closed Metal Conduits

Flowing Partly Full (Cont’d)
Channel Type and Description Minimum Normal Maximum
2. Galvanized 0.013 0.016 0.017
e. Corrugated metal
1. Subdrain 0.017 0.019 0.021
2. Storm drain 0.021 0.024 0.030
B.5.2 Roughness Values—Darcy-Weisbach Equation

(Colebrook-White)
Table B-2: Darcy-Weisbach Roughness Heights e for Closed

Conduits
Pipe Material ε (mm) ε (ft.)
Glass, drawn brass, copper (new) 0.0015 0.000005
Seamless commercial steel (new) 0.004 0.000013
Commercial steel (enamel coated) 0.0048 0.000016
Commercial steel (new) 0.045 0.00015
Wrought iron (new) 0.045 0.00015
Asphalted cast iron (new) 0.12 0.0004
Galvanized iron 0.15 0.0005
Cast iron (new) 0.26 0.00085
Concrete (steel forms, smooth) 0.18 0.0006
Concrete (good joints, average) 0.36 0.0012
Concrete (rough, visible, form marks) 0.60 0.002
Riveted steel (new) 0.9 ~ 9.0 0.003 - 0.03
Corrugated metal 45 0.15

WaterCAD Theory
B.5.3 Roughness Values—Hazen-Williams Equation
Table B-3: Hazen-Williams Roughness

Coefficients (C)
Pipe Material C
Asbestos Cement 140
Brass 130-140
Brick sewer 100
Cast-iron
New, unlined 130
10 yr. Old 107-113
20 yr. Old 89-100
30 yr. Old 75-90
40 yr. Old 64-83
Concrete or concrete lined
Steel forms 140
Wooden forms 120
Centrifugally spun 135
Copper 130-140
Galvanized iron 120
Glass 140
Lead 130-140
Plastic 140-150
Steel
Coal-tar enamel, lined 145-150
New unlined 140-150

Engineer’s Reference
Table B-3: Hazen-Williams Roughness

Coefficients (C) (Cont’d)
Pipe Material C
Riveted 110
Tin 130
Vitrified clay (good condition) 110-140
Wood stave (average condition) 120
B.5.4 Typical Roughness Values for Pressure Pipes
Typical pipe roughness values are shown below. These values may vary depending on
the manufacturer, workmanship, age, and many other factors.
Table B-4: Comparative Pipe Roughness Values
Manning’s Hazen-
Darcy-Weisbach
Material Coefficient Williams
Roughness Height
n C
k (mm) k (0.001 ft.)
Asbestos cement 0.011 140 0.0015 0.005
Brass 0.011 135 0.0015 0.005
Brick 0.015 100 0.6 2
Cast-iron, new 0.012 130 0.26 0.85
Concrete:
Steel forms 0.011 140 0.18 0.6
Wooden forms 0.015 120 0.6 2
Centrifugally spun 0.013 135 0.36 1.2
Copper 0.011 135 0.0015 0.005
Corrugated metal 0.022 — 45 150
Galvanized iron 0.016 120 0.15 0.5
Glass 0.011 140 0.0015 0.005
Lead 0.011 135 0.0015 0.005

WaterCAD Theory
Table B-4: Comparative Pipe Roughness Values (Cont’d)
Manning’s Hazen-
Darcy-Weisbach
Material Coefficient Williams
Roughness Height
n C
Plastic 0.009 150 0.0015 0.005
Steel
Coal-tar enamel 0.010 148 0.0048 0.016
New unlined 0.011 145 0.045 0.15
Riveted 0.019 110 0.9 3
Wood stave 0.012 120 0.18 0.6
B.5.5 Fitting Loss Coefficients
For similar fittings, the K-value is highly dependent on things such as bend radius and
contraction ratios.
Table B-5: Typical Fitting K Coefficients
Fitting K Value Fitting K Value
Pipe Entrance 90° Smooth Bend
Bellmouth 0.03-0.05 Bend Radius / D = 4 0.16-0.18
Rounded 0.12-0.25 Bend Radius / D = 2 0.19-0.25
Sharp-Edged 0.50 Bend Radius / D = 1 0.35-0.40
Projecting 0.80 Mitered Bend
Contraction—Sudden θ = 15° 0.05
D2/D1 = 0.80 0.18 θ = 30° 0.10
D2/D1 = 0.50 0.37 θ = 45° 0.20
D2/D1 = 0.20 0.49 θ = 60° 0.35
Contraction—Conical θ = 90° 0.80
D2/D1 = 0.80 0.05 Tee
D2/D1 = 0.50 0.07 Line Flow 0.30-0.40

Genetic Algorithms Methodology
Table B-5: Typical Fitting K Coefficients (Cont’d)
Fitting K Value Fitting K Value
D2/D1 = 0.20 0.08 Branch Flow 0.75-1.80
Expansion—Sudden Cross
D2/D1 = 0.80 0.16 Line Flow 0.50
D2/D1 = 0.50 0.57 Branch Flow 0.75
D2/D1 = 0.20 0.92 45° Wye
Expansion—Conical Line Flow 0.30
D2/D1 = 0.80 0.03 Branch Flow 0.50
D2/D1 = 0.50 0.08
D2/D1 = 0.20 0.13
B.6 Genetic Algorithms Methodology

Genetic algorithms methodology includes:
• “Darwin Calibrator Methodology” on page B-748

• “Darwin Designer Methodology” on page B-753
B.6.1 Darwin Calibrator Methodology
Computer models have become an essential tool for the management of water distri-
bution systems around the world. There are numerous purposes for using a computer
model to simulate the flow conditions within a system. A model can be employed to:
• Ensure adequate quantity and quality service of the potable water resource to the
community
• Evaluate planning and design alternatives
• Assess system performance
• Verify operating strategies for better management of the water infrastructure
system
• Perform vulnerability studies to assess risks that may be presented and affect the
water supply

WaterCAD Theory
For these purposes, a model is constructed in which data describing network elements
of pipes, junctions, valves, pumps, tanks, and reservoirs are assembled in a systematic
manner to predict pipe flow and junction hydraulic grade lines (HGL) or pressures
within a water distribution system.
Computer models are significant investments for water companies. To ensure a good
investment return and correct use of the models, the model must be capable of
correctly simulating flow conditions encountered at the site. This is achieved by cali-
brating the models. A calibration involves the process of adjusting model characteris-
tics and parameters so that the model’s predicted flows and pressures match actual
observed field data to some desirable or acceptable level. This is described in more
detail in Walski, Chase and Savic (2001).
Calibration of a water distribution model is a complicated task. There are many uncer-
tain parameters that need to be adjusted to reduce the discrepancy between the model
predictions and field observations of junction HGL and pipe discharges. Pipe rough-
ness coefficients are often considered for calibration. However, there are many other
parameters that are uncertain and affect junction HGL and pipe flow rate. To minimize
errors in model parameters and eliminate the compensation error of calibration param-
eters (Walski 2001), you should consider calibrating all the model parameters, such as
junction demand, operation status of pipes and valves, and pipe roughness coeffi-
cients.
Calibrating water distribution network models relies upon field measurement data,
such as junction pressures, pipe flows, water levels in storage facilities, valve settings,
pump operating status (on/off), and pump speeds. Among all the possible field obser-
vation data, junction HGL and pipe flows are most often used to evaluate the good-
ness-of-fit of the model calibration. Other parameters, such as tank levels, valve
settings, and pump operating status/speed are used as boundary conditions that are
recorded when collecting a set of calibration observations of junction pressures and
pipe flow rates.
Field observation data are measured and collected at different times of the day and at
various locations on site, which may correspond to various demand loadings and
boundary conditions. In order for the model simulation results to more closely repre-
sent observed data, simulation results must use the same demand loading and
boundary conditions as observed data. Thus, the calibration process must be
conducted under multiple demand loading and operating boundary conditions.
Traditional calibration of a water distribution model is based on a trial-and-error

procedure, by which an engineer or modeler first estimates the values of model param-
eters, runs the model to obtain a predicted pressure and flow, and finally compares the
simulated values to the observed data. If the predicted data does not compare closely
with the observed data, the engineer returns to the model, makes some adjustments to

the model parameters, and calculates it again to produce a new set of simulation
results. This may have to be repeated many times to make sure that the model
produces a calibrated prediction of the water distribution network in the real world.
The traditional calibration technique is, among other things, quite time consuming.
In addition, a typical network representation of a water network may include hundreds

or thousands of links and nodes. Ideally, during the water distribution model calibra-
tion process, the roughness coefficient is adjusted for each link and demand is
adjusted for each node. However, only a small percentage of representative sample
measurements can be made available for the use of model calibration, due to the
limited financial and labor requirements for data collection. Therefore, it is of utmost
importance to have a comprehensive methodology and efficient tool that can assist the
engineer in achieving a highly accurate model under practical conditions, including
various model parameters such as pipe roughness, junction demand, and link status,
and also multiple demand and boundary conditions.
Calibration Formulation
An optimized calibrator is formulated and developed for facilitating the calibration
process of a water distribution model. The parameters are obtained by minimizing the
discrepancy between the model-predicted and the field-observed values of junction
pressures (hydraulic grades) and pipe flows for given boundary conditions. The opti-
mized calibration is then defined as a nonlinear optimization problem with three
different calibration objectives.
Calibration Objectives
The goodness-of-fit of model calibration is evaluated by the discrepancy between the
model simulated and field measured junction HGL and pipe flow. The goodness-of-fit
score is calculated by using a user-specified fitness-point-per-hydraulic head for junc-
tions and fitness-point-per-flow for pipes. This allows a modeler to flexibly weight the
evaluation of both pipe flow and junction hydraulic head.
Objective Type One: Minimize the Sum of Difference Squares
2 2
NH
⎛ Hsimnh − Hobsnh ⎞ NF
⎛ Fsimnf − Fobsnf ⎞
∑ w ⎜
nh ⎜
Hpnt
⎟
⎟ + ∑ wnf ⎜⎜
Fpnt
⎟⎟
minimize np =1 ⎝ ⎠ nf =1 ⎝ ⎠
NH + NF
Objective Type Two: Minimize the Sum of Absolute Differences
NH
Hsimnh − Hobsnh NF Fsimnf − Fobsnf
∑ wnh
np =1 Hpnt
+ ∑ wnf
nf =1 Fpnt
minimize
NH + NF

WaterCAD Theory
Objective Type Three: Minimize the Maximum Absolute Difference
⎧ NH Hsimnh − Hobsnh NF Fsimnf − Fobsnf ⎫

minimize max ⎨max wnh , max wnf ⎬
⎩ nh=1 Hpnt nf =1 Fpnt ⎭
Where: Hobsnh designates the nh-th observed hydraulic grade.
Hsimnh is the nh-th model simulated hydraulic grade. Hlossnh
is the head loss at observation data point nh, Fobsnf is the
observed flow, Fsimnf is model simulated flow, Hpnt notes the
hydraulic head per fitness point, while Fpnt is the flow per
fitness point. NH is the number of observed hydraulic grades
and NF is the number of observed pipe discharges, Wnh and
Wnf represent a normalized weighting factor for observed
hydraulic grades and flows respectively. They are given as:
Wnh = f(Hlossnh /Σ Hlossnh )
Wnf = f(Fobsnf /Σ Fobsnf )
Where: f( ) is a function which can be linear, square, square root, log,

or constant. An optimized calibration can be conducted by
selecting one of three objectives above and the weighting
factors between head and flow. The model parameters are
calculated by using a genetic algorithm while minimizing the
selected objective function and satisfying the calibration
constraints.
Calibration Constraints
Optimized calibration is conducted by satisfying two type constraints, the hydraulic
system constraints and calibration parameter bound constraints. The system
constraints are a set of implicit equations that ensure the conservation of flow conti-
nuity at nodes and energy for the loops within a water distribution system. Each trial
solution generated by the GA is analyzed using WaterCAD hydraulic network solver.
The calibration bound constraints are used to set the minimum and maximum limits
for the pipe roughness coefficients and junction demand multiplier. They are given as
follows.
RFmini ≤ RFi ≤ RFmaxi i = 1,2,3,..., nPipeGroup
DMmini ≤ DM i ≤ DMmaxi i = 1,2,3,..., nDemandGroup

Where: RFmini is the minimum roughness coefficient or multiplier

for roughness group i; RFmaxi is the maximum roughness
coefficient or multiplier for roughness group i; and RFi is the
roughness coefficient or multiplier for roughness group i,
DMmini is the minimum junction demand multiplier for
demand group i; DMmaxi is the maximum demand multiplier
for demand group i; and DMi is the demand multiplier for
demand group i.
Pipes that have the same physical and hydraulic characteristics are allowed to be
grouped as one calibration link, and one new roughness coefficient or one roughness
coefficient multiplier is assigned to all the pipes in the same group. Junctions that have
the same demand patterns and within a same topological area can also be aggregated
as one calibration junction, to which a same demand multiplier is calculated and
assigned. Calibration parameters are bounded by prescribed upper and lower limits
and adjusted with a user-prescribed incremental value. For example, a Hazen-Will-
iams C value for a pipe or a group of pipes will be computed within a range of 40 to
140, and by an increment of 5. Demand multipliers may range from 0.8 to 1.2 by 0.1.
Parameter aggregation is useful at reducing the calibration dimension, however
caution needs to be exercised when grouping pipes and junctions, as this may affect
the accuracy of the model calibration.
Genetic Algorithm Optimized Calibration

A genetic algorithm (GA) is a robust search paradigm based on the principles of
natural evolution and biological reproduction (Goldberg, 1989). For optimizing cali-
bration of a water distribution model, a genetic algorithm program first generates a
population of trial solutions of the model parameters. A hydraulic solver then simu-
lates each trial solution. The resulting hydraulic simulation predicts the HGL (junction
pressures) and pipe flows at a predetermined number of nodes (or data points) in the
network. This information is then passed back to the associated calibration module.
The calibration module evaluates how closely the model simulation is to the observed
data, the calibration evaluation computes a goodness-of-fit value, which is the
discrepancy between the observed data and the model predicted pipe flows and junc-
tion pressures or HGL, for each solution. This goodness-of-fit value is then assigned
as the fitness for that solution in the genetic algorithm.
One generation produced by the genetic algorithm is then complete. The fitness
measure is taken into account when performing the next generation of the genetic
algorithm operations. To find the optimal calibration solutions, fitter solutions will be
selected by mimicking Darwin’s natural selection principal of survival of the fittest.
The selected solutions are used to reproduce a next generation of calibration solutions
by performing genetic operations. Over many generations, the solutions evolve, and
the optimal or near optimal solutions ultimately emerge. There are numerous varia-
tions of genetic algorithms over last decade. Many successful applications of GA to
solving model calibration have been carried out for optimized calibration of water

WaterCAD Theory
resource systems (Wang 1992; Wu 1994; Babovic etc. 1994; Wu and Larsen 1996).
More recently, a competent genetic algorithm (also called fast messy GA), which has
been demonstrated the most efficient GA for the optimization of a water distribution
system (Wu & Simpson 2001), has been used for the optimized calibration. A brief
overview is given in the following section.
B.6.2 Darwin Designer Methodology
Darwin Designer uses a genetic algorithm (GA) generic search paradigm to help
hydraulic engineers efficiently plan and design a water distribution system.
The optimization model can be established to include the combination and aggrega-
tion of sizing new pipes and rehabilitating old pipes, multiple demand loading condi-
tions, and various boundary system conditions. This will enable a modeler to optimize
either an entire water system or a portion of the system with the minimum cost and
maximum benefit. The cost effective design and/or rehabilitation solution is deter-
mined by the least cost, the maximum benefit, or the trade-off between the cost and
benefit. You can select any one of three optimization models to best suit your project
needs.
Model Level 1: Least Cost Optimization

The least cost design and rehabilitation is defined as a single objective optimization;
the optimal solution is determined by the minimum cost of a water distribution design
and rehabilitation that satisfies prescribed hydraulic criteria such as:
• Minimum required junction pressure

• Maximum allowable junction pressure
• Maximum allowable pipe flow velocity requirement
• Minimum required pipe flow velocity
Model Level 2: Maximum Benefit Optimization

The benefit optimization model is developed to determine the maximum pressure
benefit design/rehabilitation solution for a water distribution system. A competent
genetic algorithm is employed to search for the optimal solution by maximizing the
design benefit while meeting the hydraulic criteria and the available budget.
Model Level 3: Cost-Benefit Trade-off Optimization

The cost-benefit trade-off model is formulated to determine the design of optimal
trade-off between the cost and benefit, subject to the funding available for a design
and/or rehabilitation. You can customize the benefit functions and specify the
maximum affordable budget. The model produces a set of non-inferior (non-domi-
nant) solutions that represent the Pareto optimal for different cost and benefit levels.

Both model level 1 and 2 are single-objective optimization while level 3 is the multi-
objective optimization. A modeler is able to select optimization model for a study. The
optimization framework including both the cost and benefit functions is given in the
following sections.:
• “Design Variables” on page B-754

• “Cost Objective Functions” on page B-755
• “New Pipe Cost” on page B-755
• “Rehabilitation Pipe Cost” on page B-755
• “Break Repairing Cost” on page B-756
Design Variables
Two types of design variables are used for the optimal design and rehabilitation of
water distribution systems. They are pipe sizes (d) and design actions (e).
Pipe Size: Pipe diameter is treated as a design variable for a new

pipe to be sized. A new pipe can be the pipe added to
a subdivision, a replacement, or a pipe that is parallel
to existing pipes. A modeler can aggregate a number
of pipes as one design link. Pipes within one pipe
group are sized to the same diameter. Pipe diameter
can be selected from a set of discrete and
commercially available pipe sizes, given as:
0 ⎧ 0 ⎫
∀i, ∀d i ∈ D = ⎨ d m, m = 1, …, DC ⎬
⎩ ⎭
Design Action: Design action is introduced as a design variable for
optimizing the rehabilitation alternatives (e.g.
cleaning, relining, replacement, parallel pipe, etc.)
for existing pipes. A modeler can define a set of
possible actions that can be applied to a group of
pipes. The pipes within one pipe group will have the
same rehabilitation action, given as:
0 ⎧ 0 ⎫
∀k, ∀e k ∈ E = ⎨ e m, m = 1, …, EC ⎬
⎩ ⎭

WaterCAD Theory
Cost Objective Functions
Total cost of a network design and rehabilitation is the sum of the new pipe cost (Cnew
), rehabilitation pipe cost (Crehab ) and pipe break repairing cost (Crepair ). Thus the
total cost is given as:
Ctotal = Cnew + Crehab + Crepair
New Pipe Cost
The cost of a new design pipe is defined as a function of pipe length. Let the total
number of design pipes be DP, and let ck(dk) be the cost per unit length of the k-th
pipe diameter selected from a set of available pipe diameter D0 of DC choices. The
new pipe cost is given as:
DP
C cnew = ∑ Ck ( dk )Lk
k=1
Where: Lk = Length of the kth pipe
Rehabilitation Pipe Cost
The cost of a rehabilitation pipe is associated with the pipe diameter and the rehabili-
tation action. Let ck(ek, dk) be cost per unit length of a pipe for the kth rehabilitation
action ek chosen from a set of possible action E0 of EC choices for the existing pipe of
diameter dk. The cost of rehabilitation pipes is formulated as:
RP
C rehab = ∑ ck (dk,ek)Lk
k=1
Where: Lk = Length of the kth pipe

RP = Number of rehabilitation pipes
For the pipes that are grouped into one design link, the same pipe size or rehabilitation
action will be applied to the pipes.

Break Repairing Cost
Pipe renovation or rehabilitation will effectively improve the pipe structure condition,
and consequently reduce the pipe break repair cost. For the rehabilitation pipes that
the action of doing-nothing (leaving a pipe as it is) is assigned to, a cost of repairing
pipe break is incurred to account for the potential cost in a planning horizon (such as
10 years). Assuming bj(t) the number of breaks per mile at year t for pipe j, Cbj the
repair cost per break of pipe j. The total cost of pipe repair over a period of ny years is
given as:
RB ny
b j tCb j
C break = ∑ ∑ -----------------
(1 + r)
-
t
j=0 t=0
Number of doing-nothing pipes that may have

Where: RB =
breaks
r = Interest rate
Benefit Functions
The benefits of a design and rehabilitation result from hydraulic performance
improvement (hydraulic benefit), excess hydraulic capacity (capacity benefit), and
pipe rehabilitation improvement (rehabilitation benefit). The hydraulic benefit is
measured by using a surrogate of the junction pressures. The hydraulic capacity
benefit is modeled by the excess flow through the emitters at user-selected junctions,
while the rehabilitation benefit is defined as the pipe roughness improvement. There-
fore, the overall benefit is noted as:
BTotal = HYbenefit + CPbenefit + RHbenefit
Pressure Benefits
The benefit of the hydraulic performance is measured by using junction pressure (P)
improvements. The pressure improvement is proposed as a ratio of pressure difference
between the actual pressure and a user-defined reference pressure. The benefit is
normalized by the junction demand (JQ). The factors are also introduced to enable a
modeler to convert and customize the hydraulic benefit function.
ND ⎧ RJ b
ref ⎫
⎪ ⎛ JQ i, k ⎞ ( P i, k – P i, k ) ⎪
HYbenefit = ⎨a
⎪
∑
⎝ JQtotal ∑
⎜ ----------------------⎟ ---------------------------------
k⎠ ref
P i, k
- ⎬
⎪
k = 1⎩ i = 1 ⎭

WaterCAD Theory
RJ
JQtotal k = ∑ JQi, k
i=1
Factors that allow an optimization modeler to

Where: a and b = weight, convert, and customize pressure
improvement to hydraulic benefit
JQi,k = Demand at junction i for demand alternative k
JQtotalk = Total junction demand for demand alternative k
Post-rehabilitation pressure at junction i for

Pi,k =
demand alternative k
reference junction pressure defined by a user to
Pref =
evaluate the pressure improvement
Rehabilitation Benefit
Rehabilitation improves water supply by increasing the pipe capacity and improving
the pipe roughness. To maximize the value of every dollar spent on rehabilitation, a
rehabilitation action should favor the actual improvement of the pipe smoothness.
Thus the rehabilitation benefit is quantified by the roughness improvement ratio and
normalized by the rehabilitated pipe length.
RP new old
( Ci – C i )L i
RHbenefit = e ∑ ------------------------------------------
old
C i L total
-
i=1
RP
L = ∑ Li
i=1

The factor that allows a modeler to weight the

Where: e = rehabilitation benefit by using the roughness
improvement
Cnew = Post-rehabilitation roughness coefficient
Cold = Pre-rehabilitation roughness coefficient
Li = Length of the design pipe
Unitized Benefit Functions
The benefit from a design and rehabilitation can also be quantified by using the unit-
ized average flow and pressure increase across the entire system. The benefit func-
tions can be simply given as follows.
Average Pressure Increase: With the unitized benefit function, you can evaluate
the average flow and pressure enhancement for your
investment. It is worth being aware of the value of
the dollars spent on your design and/or rehabilitation.
JN
∑ Pj – Pmin
j=1
Pavg = -------------------------------------
JN
Design Constraints: Each design trial solution is analyzed by a number of
hydraulic simulation runs corresponding to the
multiple demand conditions. The system responses,
such as junction pressures, flow velocities, and
hydraulic gradients, will be checked against the
design criteria you set.
Pipe Size Constraint: A list of available pipe sizes (and costs) is specified
and used as a commonly shared data by all the pipe
groups. For each group, you specify the minimum
and maximum diameters, which narrows the scope of
the optimization problem. Pipe size is selected from a
list of commercially available pipe diameters within
the range of the minimum and maximum limit, such
as:
min max
Di ≤d i ≤D i , ∀i

WaterCAD Theory
A set of pipe diameters can also be introduced to

exclude the unfavorable pipe sizes to a pipe group.
This set can be noted as:
d i ∉ D i = {d i, 1 , d i, 2 , …, d i, n}
Junction Pressure Constraint: Junction pressure is often required to maintain

greater than a minimum pressure level, to ensure
adequate water service, and less than a maximum
pressure level, to reduce water leakage in a system.
Thus junction pressure constraints are given as:
min max
H i, j ≤H i, j ≤H i, j , ∀t, i = 1, …, NJ ; j = 1, …, NDM
Hydraulic head at junction i for demand loading

Where: Hi,j =
case j
Number of junctions in system (excluding fixed
NJ =
grade junctions)
Minimum required hydraulic pressures at junction
Hmin =
i for demand loading case j
Maximum allowable hydraulic pressures at
Hmax =
junction i for demand loading case j
NDM = Number of demand loading cases
Pipe Flow Constraint: A design and rehabilitation solution is also

constrained by a set of pipe flow criteria that are
often given as a maximum allowable flow velocity
and a maximum allowable hydraulic gradient or
slope, given as:
max
V i, j ≤H i, j , ∀t, i = 1, …, NP ; j = 1, …, NDM
max
HG i, j ≤HG i, j , ∀t, i = 1, …, NP ; j = 1, …, NDM
Where: Vi,j = Flow velocity of pipe i for demand loading case j

Vmax = Maximum allowable flow velocity

NP = Number of constraint pipes in system
Hydraulic gradient (slope) of pipe i for demand
HGi,j =
loading case j
HGmax = Maximum allowable hydraulic gradient
In many system improvement designs, a feasible

design solution must ensure the storage tank to be
refilled to a certain water level so that a stable
periodical supply can be established. To meet a tank
refilling criteria, pipe flow velocity must be greater
than the minimum required velocity, given as:
min
V i, j ≥ V i, j , ∀t, i = 1, …, NP ; j = 1, …, NDM
Budget Constraint: Water utilities are often constrained by a budget for a

new subdivision design and/or the rehabilitation of
an existing water system. When the optimization is
conducted to maximize the value or benefit of the
design, the optimal solution will be constrained by
the available funding.
max
C total ≤Fund
Multi Objective Genetic Algorithm Optimized Design

Genetic algorithms have been widely applied to solving single-objective optimization
problems in water resources system analysis (Bavic et al. 1994; Wu and Simpson
1996, 1997a, 1997b and 2001; Wu et al. 2000 and 2001). In recent years, multi-objec-
tive genetic algorithms have been found to be more effective than traditional optimiza-
tion techniques at solving multi-objective optimization problems. A wide range of
multi-objective optimization problems have been successfully solved by using evolu-
tionary algorithms.
There is no need to modify or simplify the system hydraulics and design criteria to fit
multi-objective GA. Single-objective optimization is used to identify the optimal or
near-optimal solutions according to the sole objective function. As soon as a solution
is found better than the current-best solution, it is accepted. Multi-objective optimiza-
tion is to locate the non-inferior (or non-dominated) solutions in solution space. Solu-
tion A is called non-inferior to solution B if and only if solution A is no worse than
solution B in all the objectives. It is also said that solution A dominates solution B or
that solution A is a non-dominated solution. A global non-dominated solution is

WaterCAD Theory
defined as the solution that is no worse than any other feasible solutions in all the
objectives. There exist multiple global non-dominated solutions. The task of a multi-
objective optimization is to search for all the global non-dominated or non-inferior
solutions also known as the Pareto-optimal set or Pareto-optimal front.
Conventionally, a multi-objective optimization problem was transformed into a

single-objective optimization problem by using two approaches including weighted
sum of objectives and e-constraint method (Cohon, 1978). Weighted sum approach
applies a set of weighting factors to all the objectives and sums up the weighted objec-
tives to construct a composite single objective. It is expected that the optimization of a
composite objective is equivalent to the optimization of the original multiple objec-
tives, but the optimal solution depends on the chosen weights and it can only search
for a single optimal solution rather than Pareto-optimal solutions in one run. The
constraint method chooses one of the objective functions and treats the other objective
functions as constraints. Each of the constraints is limited to a prescribed value. It
transforms a multi-objective optimization problem into a single-objective optimiza-
tion. The optimal solution resulted by the constraint method, however, depends on the
pre-defined constraint limits. Pareto-optimal solutions can be obtained by performing
multiple runs of the single-objective optimization problem using different weighting
factors or constraint limits. The more combinations of weighting factors or constraint
limits, the more optimization runs are required, the greater the computational cost. In
contrast, multi-objective genetic algorithm concurrently optimizes all the objective
functions in one run without any fix-up on objective functions. It provides an effective
method for handling multi-objective optimization.
The goal of single-objective optimization is to search for an optimal solution. Multi-

objective optimization has two goals during the search process. One goal is to find a
set of Pareto-optimal solutions as close as possible to Pareto-optimal front. The
second goal is to maintain a set of Pareto-optimal solutions as diverse as possible.
Searching for Pareto-optimal solutions is certainly the primary task for multi-objec-
tive optimization. A solution of single-objective optimization problem is evaluated by
the objective value, which directly contributes to the fitness of the corresponding
genotype solution. However, the fitness of a solution for multi-objective optimization
problem is determined by the solution dominance that can be defined as the number of
solutions dominated among the current population of solutions. The stronger the
dominance, the greater the fitness is assigned to a solution. While identifying Pareto-
optimal solutions is important, maintaining the diversity of Pareto-optimal solutions is
also essential. Dealing with multi-objective optimization, such as minimizing cost and
maximizing benefit for a water distribution system, it is anticipated that optimal trade-
off solutions are found and uniformly distributed for the entire range of cost budget.
This is normally achieved by using a method of fitness sharing or solution clustering.
To effectively solve the problem of cost-benefit trade-off optimal design, as formu-

lated in the early section, fast messy genetic algorithm (Goldberg et al. 1993) has been
extended to handle the multi-objective functions. The multi-objective fast messy GA
has been integrated with WaterCAD hydraulic network solver. The integrated

approach (Wu et al. 2002) provides a powerful design optimization tool to assist
hydraulic engineers to practically and efficiently design a water distribution system. It
offers capability of three levels of optimization design analysis, including minimum
cost design, maximum benefit design and cost-benefit trade-off design optimization.
B.6.3 Competent Genetic Algorithms
The working mechanics of a genetic algorithm are derived from a simple assumption
(Holland 1975) that the best solution will be found in the solution region that contains
a relatively high proportion of good solutions. A set of strings that represent the good
solutions attains certain similarities in bit values. For example, 3-bit binary strings
001, 111, 101 and 011 have a common similarity template of **1, where asterisk (*)
denotes a don’t-care symbol that takes a value of either 1 or 0. The four strings repre-
sent four good solutions and contribute to the fitness values of 10, 12, 11, and 11 to a
fitness function of:
x⁄ 3
f ( x 1, x 2, x 3 ) = x 1 + x 2 + 10
Where, x1, x2 and x3 directly takes a bit value as an integer from left to right. In
general, a short similarity template that contributes an above-average fitness is called
a building block. Building blocks are often contained in short strings that represent
partial solutions to a specific problem. Thus, searching for good solutions uncovers
and juxtaposes the good short strings, which essentially designate a good solution
region, and finally leads a search to the best solution.
Goldberg et al. (1989) developed the messy genetic algorithm as one of the competent
genetic algorithm paradigms by focusing on improving GA’s capability of identifying
and exchanging building blocks. The first-generation of the messy GA explicitly
initializes all the short strings of a desired length k, where k is referred as to the order
of a building block defined by a short string. For a binary string representation, all the
combinations of order-k building blocks requires a number of initial short strings of
length k for an l-bit problem:
k l
n = 2 ⎛ --⎞
⎝ k⎠
For example, the initial population size of short strings, by completely enumerating
the building blocks of order 4 for a 40-bit problem, is more than one million. This
made the application of the first-generation messy GA to a large-scale optimization
problem impossible. This bottleneck has been overcome by introducing a building
block filter procedure (Goldberg et al. 1993) into the messy GA. The filter procedure
speeds up the search process and is called a fast messy GA.

WaterCAD Theory
The fast messy GA emulates the powerful genetic-evolutionary process in two nested
loops, an outer loop and an inner loop. Each cycle of the outer loop, denoted as an era,
invokes an initialization phase and an inner loop that consists of a building block
filtering phase and a juxtapositional phase. Like a simple genetic algorithm, the messy
GA initialization creates a population of random individuals. The population size has
to be large enough to ensure the presence of all possible building blocks. Then a
building block filtering procedure is applied to select better-fit short strings and reduce
the string length. It works like a filter so that bad genes not belonging to building
blocks are deleted, so that the population contains a high proportion of short strings of
good genes. The filtering procedure continues until the overall string length is reduced
to a desired length k. Finally, a juxtapositional phase follows to produce new strings.
During this phase, the processed building blocks are combined and exchanged to form
offspring by applying the selection and reproduction operators. The juxtapositional
phase terminates when the maximum number of generations is reached, and the cycle
of one era iteration completes. The length of short strings that contains desired
building blocks is often specified as the same as an era, starting with one to a
maximum number of era. Because of this, preferred short strings increase in length
over outer iterations. In another words, a messy GA evolves solutions from short
strings starting from length one to a maximum desired length. This enables the messy
GA to mimic the natural and biological evolution process that a simple or one cell
organism evolves into a more sophisticated and intelligent organism. Goldberg et al.
(1989, 1993) has given the detail analysis and computation procedure of the messy
GA.
B.6.4 References
Babovic V., Wu Z. Y. & Larsen L. C., “Calibrating Hydrodynamic Models by Means

of Simulated Evolution,” in Proceeding of Hydroinformatics, Delft, Netherlands,
pp193-200, 1994.
Cohon, J.L., Multi-objective Programming and Planning. Academic Press, New York,
1978.
Goldberg, D.E., Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning.

Addison Wesley, Reading, MA, 1989.
Goldberg, D. E., Korb, B., & Deb, K., “Messy genetic algorithms: Motivation, anal-
ysis, and first results,” Complex Systems, 3, 493-530, 1989.
Goldberg, D. E., Deb, K., Kargupta, H., & Harik G., “Rapid, Accurate Optimization of
Difficult Problems Using Fast Messy Genetic Algorithms,” IlliGAL Report No.
93004, Illinois Genetic Algorithms Laboratory, University of Illinios at Urbana-
Champaign, Urbana, IL 61801, 1993.
Walski, T.M., “Model Calibration Data: The Good, The Bad and The Useless,” J.
AWWA, 92(1), p. 94, 2000.

Walski, T. M., “Understanding the adjustments for water distribution system model
calibration,” Journal of Indian Water Works Association, April-June, 2001, pp151-
157, 2001.
Walski, T.M., Chase, D.V. and Savic, D.A., Water Distribution Modeling, Haestad
Press, Waterbury, CT, 2001.
Wang Q.J., “The Genetic Algorithm and its Application to Conceptual Rainfall-
Runoff Models,” Water Resources Research, Vol.27, No.9, pp2467-2482, 1991.
Wu Z.Y., “Automatic Model Calibration by Simulating Evolution,” M.Sc. Thesis,

H.H. 191, International Institute for Infrastructure, Hydraulic and Environmental
Engineering, Delft, Netherlands, 1994.
Wu, Z. Y., Boulos, P.F., Orr, C.H., and Ro, J.J., “An Efficient Genetic Algorithms
Approach to an Intelligent Decision Support System for Water Distribution
Networks,” in Proceedings of the Hydroinformatics 2000 Conference, Iowa, IW, July
26-29, 2000.
Wu, Z. Y., Boulos P. F., Orr C.-H. and Ro J. J., “Rehabilitation of water distribution
system using genetic algorithm,” Journal of AWWA, Vol. 93, No. 11, pp74-85, 2001.
Wu Z.Y. & Larsen C.L., “Verification of hydrological and hydrodynamic models cali-
brated by genetic algorithms,” Proc. of the 2nd International Conference on Water
Resources & Environmental Research, Vol. 2, Kyoto, Japan, pp175-182, 1996.
Wu, Z. Y. and Simpson A. R., “An Efficient Genetic Algorithm Paradigm for Discrete
Optimization of Pipeline Networks,” International Congress on Modeling and Simula-
tion, Hobart, Tasmania, Australia, 8-11 December, 1997b.
Wu, Z. Y. and Simpson A. R., “Competent Genetic Algorithm Optimization of Water

Distribution Systems,” Journal of Computing in Civil Engineering, ASCE, Vol 15,
No. 2, pp89-101, 2001.
Wu, Z. Y. and Simpson A. R., “Messy Genetic Algorithm for Optimal Design of Water
Distribution Systems,” Research Report, No. 140, Department of Civil & Environ-
mental Engineering, University of Adelaide, South Australia., 1996
Wu, Z. Y and Simpson A. R., “Optimal Rehabilitation of Water Distribution Systems

Using a Messy Genetic Algorithm,” AWWA 17th Federal Convention Water in the
Balance, Melbourne, Australia, 16-21 March 1997a.
Wu, Z. Y, Walski, T., Mankowski, R., Cook, J. Tryby, M. and Herrin G., “Optimal
Capacity of Water Distribution Systems,” in Proceeding of 1st Annual Environmental
and Water Resources Systems Analysis (EWRSA) Symposium, Roanoke, VA, May 19-
22, 2002.

WaterCAD Theory
B.7 Energy Cost Theory

The concept behind energy usage for a water distribution system is simple: pumps are
used within a system to add energy, counteracting the energy losses that occur due to
pipe friction and other losses. The cost of operating these pumps, however, can be one
of the largest expenses that a utility incurs during normal operations. An accurate
understanding of these energies and the costs associated with them is the key to devel-
oping better, more efficient, and more economical pumping strategies.
Energy cost theory includes:
• “Pump Powers, Efficiencies, and Energy” on page B-765

• “Water Power” on page B-765
• “Brake Power and Pump Efficiency” on page B-766
• “Motor Power and Motor Efficiency” on page B-766
• “Energy” on page B-767
• “Cost” on page B-768
• “Storage Considerations” on page B-768
• “Daily Cost Equivalents” on page B-769
B.7.1 Pump Powers, Efficiencies, and Energy
Power is the rate at which energy can be transferred, and there are several different
powers that are associated with the pumping process. In order for power to be trans-
ferred to the water, it needs to go through several steps: from the electrical wires into
the pump motor, from the motor into the pump, and finally from the pump to the water
itself. Each transfer results in energy losses.
B.7.2 Water Power
Water power is the power associated with the water itself, and is a function of the fluid
characteristics, the gain in head, and the rate of discharge.
PW = ρ · g · ∆H · Q

Energy Cost Theory
Where: PW = Water power

ρ = Fluid density
g = Gravitational acceleration
∆H = Change in head
Q = Discharge rate
B.7.3 Brake Power and Pump Efficiency
Brake power is the power at the pump itself, and is related to the water power by:
PW = PB · ep
Where: PW = Water power

PB = Brake power
ep = Pump efficiency
In other words, the pump efficiency represents the ability of the pump to transfer
power from the pump itself to the water. The pump efficiency varies over the oper-
ating range of the pump, so it is important to model pump efficiency as closely as
possible to ensure an accurate representation of your system.
B.7.4 Motor Power and Motor Efficiency
Motor power is the power that the pump’s motor receives from the electrical utility,
and is related to the pump brake power by:
PB = PM · em
Where: PB = Brake power

PM = Motor power
em = Motor efficiency
In other words, the motor efficiency represents that ability of the motor to transfer
power from the electrical lines to the pump itself. For most pumps, the motor effi-
ciency can be considered to be constant over the whole operating range of the pump.

WaterCAD Theory
Note: In the case of variable speed pumps, the efficiency of the

variable speed drive needs to be accounted for. This efficiency
varies with pump speed among other things. You are
encouraged to correct the motor efficiency to include the
variable speed drive efficiency. For variable speed pumps, there
is a drive mechanism between the motor and the pump itself.
There are also energy losses associated with this drive, which
may be significant in some cases.
For example, if a motor has an efficiency of 90% (0.90) and the variable speed drive
has an efficiency of 85% (0.85) at the speeds being used, then the motor efficiency
should be entered as 76.5% (0.765).
Note: The variable-speed data is merely presented as an example and

should not be construed as representative of any particular
pump.
You are encouraged to find the drive efficiency data for the specific drive that is being
used. See “Table B-6: Variable Speed Drive Efficiency”on page B-767 for some
typical data for variable speed drive efficiency, found in the report, “Operations and
Training Manual on Energy Efficiency in Water and Wastewater Treatment Plants,”
TREEO Center, University of Florida, 1986.
Table B-6: Variable Speed Drive Efficiency
Percent of Full Variable Eddy Current Hydraulic

Speed Frequency Drive Coupling Coupling
100 83 85 83
90 82 78 75
70 81 59 56
50 76 43 33
These corrections should not be made to alternatives with constant speed pumps. If
you are performing an analysis to compare constant and variable speed pump, you
should set up two alternatives: one for the constant speed pump and a second for the
variable speed pump.
B.7.5 Energy
Energy is a representation of the ability to do work, and is related to power by:
E=P·t

Energy Cost Theory
Where: E = Energy (kW-hours)

P = Power (kW)
t = Time (hours)
Although water energy and pump energy could be calculated, the motor energy is the
primary consideration for water distribution systems because this is the energy that the
utility is billed for.
B.7.6 Cost
There are several different methods that an electrical provider may use to bill for their
energy.
Energy Usage Cost

Energy usage costs are simple: there is a cost associated with a unit of energy. This
price may vary for different times of day, different days of the week, different seasons,
etc., but the basic concept is still the same.
Peak Usage Cost

Some energy providers also charge customers based on peak usage (sometimes also
called a ratchet charge). This charge is actually based on power rather than energy,
with the cost being based on the highest instantaneous power that the customer used
during the billing cycle.
B.7.7 Storage Considerations
Tank storage can have a considerable effect on the estimated energy costs for a
system. As tanks fill or drain, they also act as an energy (and therefore cost) storage
element. If a tank is full when a simulation begins and empty when it ends, there is an
energy deficit—at some point the pumps will need to operate again in order to
replenish the tank. Likewise, if a tank begins empty and fills over the course of a
simulation, that represents an energy credit when the total daily cost is calculated.

WaterCAD Theory
B.7.8 Daily Cost Equivalents
Different scenarios may have different analysis durations, so a direct comparison of

costs would not be equitable. To normalize all analyses to a common reference, costs
are also converted as daily equivalents.
For energy costs and storage costs, the total computed cost is adjusted according to the
ratio of a single day to the analysis duration. For peak usage cost, a daily cost is
computed by dividing the peak usage cost by the number of days in a billing cycle.
B.8 Variable Speed Pump Theory

The variable speed pump (VSP) model within WaterCAD lets you model the perfor-
mance of pumps equipped with variable frequency drives. Variable frequency drives
continually adjust the pump drive shaft rotational speed in order to maintain pressure
and flow requirements in a network while improving energy efficiency and other oper-
ating characteristics as summarized by Lingireddy and Wood (1998);
• Minimization of excess pressures and energy usage,

• Leakage control through more precise pressure regulation,
• Flexible pump scheduling, improving off peak energy utilization,
• Control of tank drain and fill cycles,
• Improved system performance during emergency water usage events such as fires
and main breaks,
• Reduction of transients produced when pumps start and stop,
• Simplification of flow control procedures.
WaterCAD variable speed pumping feature will allow designers to make better deci-
sions by empowering them to fully evaluate the advantages and disadvantages associ-
ated with VSPs for their unique application.
Within WaterCAD there are two different ways to model VSPs depending on the data
available to describe pump operations. The relative speed factor is a unitless number
that quantifies the rotational speed of the pump drive shaft. 1) If the relative speed
factor (or for EPS simulations a series of factors) is known, a pattern based VSP can
be used. 2) If the relative speed factor is unknown, it can be estimated using the VSP
with WaterCAD new Automatic Parameter Estimation eXtension (APEX).

Variable Speed Pump Theory
• Pattern Based VSPs—The variable speed pumping model lets you adjust pump
performance using the relative speed factor. A single relative speed setting or a
pattern of time varying relative speed factors can be applied to the pump. This is
especially useful when modeling the operation of existing VSPs in your system.
The Affinity Laws are used to adjust pump performance according to the relative
speed factor setting. For more information, see “Pump Theory” on page B-723.
• VSPs with APEX—APEX can be used in conjunction with the VSP model to
estimate an unknown relative speed setting sufficient to maintain an operating
objective. APEX uses an explicit algorithm to solve for unknown parameters
directly (Boulos and Wood, 1990). This technique has proven to be powerful,
robust, and computationally efficient for estimation of network parameters and
has been improved to allow use for steady state and extended period simulations.
To use APEX for estimating relative speed factors, the control node and control
level setting for the pump must be selected and the pump curve and operating
range for the pump must be defined. The following paragraphs provide guidelines
for performing these tasks.
• Control Node Location—The location of the control node is an important
consideration that affects pump operating efficiency, pressure maintenance perfor-
mance, and, in rare instances, the stability of the parameter estimation calculation.
The algorithm has been designed to allow multiple VSPs to operate within one
pressure zone of a network; however, the pump and control node pairs should be
decoupled from one another. In other words, a control node should be located such
that only the pump it controls influences it. If the pressure zone of the model
contains a tank or reservoir (hydraulic boundary conditions), consider making the
boundary condition the control node as opposed to selecting a pressure junction
near the boundary. This will eliminate the possibility of specifying a set of
hydraulic conditions that are impossible to maintain, and thus reduce the possi-
bility of computational failure.
• Setting the Target Head—The control node target head is the constant elevation
of the hydraulic grade line (HGL) that the VSP will attempt to maintain. The
target head at the control node must be within the physical limitations of the VSP
as it has been defined (pump curve and maximum speed setting). If the target head
is greater then the maximum head, the pump can generate at the demanded flow
rate the pump will automatically revert to fixed speed operation at the maximum
relative speed setting, and the target head will not be maintained.
Tip: Navigating to the target head settings—The VSP target head for
junction nodes can be set on the VSP tab of the Pump dialog
box, and for tanks on the Section tab of the Tank dialog box by
adjusting the initial level.
• Setting the Maximum Relative Speed Factor—For flexible operation, a vari-

able speed drive and pump should be configured such that it can efficiently
operate over a range of speeds to satisfy the pressure and flow requirements it will
be subject to. The value selected for the maximum relative speed factor depends

WaterCAD Theory
on the normal operating range of the drive motor. To set the proper maximum
value, you must determine the drive motor’s normal operating speed and
maximum operating speed (the maximum speed at which the drive motor
normally operates, not the speed at which the drive catastrophically fails). The
relative speed factor is defined as the quotient of the current operating speed and
the normal operating speed. Thus the maximum relative speed factor is the
maximum operating speed of the drive divided by the normal operating speed. For
example, a maximum relative speed factor of 2.0 means that the maximum speed
is two times the normal operating speed, and a maximum relative speed factor of
1.0 means that the maximum operating speed is equal to the normal operating
speed.
• Defining the Pump Curve—In order to determine the relative speed factor using
APEX, the pump curve must be smooth and continuously differentiable; thus a
one point or three point power function curve definition must be used. For best
results, the curve should be defined for the normal operating speed of the pump
(corresponding to a relative speed factor equal to 1.0, regardless of the maximum
speed setting).
Variable speed pump theory includes:
• “VSP Interactions with Simple and Logical Controls” on page B-771

• “Performing Advanced Analyses” on page B-772
B.8.1 VSP Interactions with Simple and Logical Controls
The VSP model and APEX have been designed to fully integrate with the simple and
rule based control framework within WaterCAD. You must keep in mind that the defi-
nition of controls requires that the state (On, Off, Fixed Speed Override) and speed
setting of a VSP be properly managed during the simulation. Therefore, the interac-
tions between VSPs and controls can be rather complex. We have tried to the extent
possible to simplify these interactions while maintaining the power and flexibility to
model real world behaviors. The paragraphs that follow describe guidelines for
defining simple and logical controls with VSPs.
• Pattern based VSPs—The pattern of relative speed factors specified for a VSP
takes precedence over all simple and logical control commands. Therefore, the
use of controls with pattern based VSPs is not recommended. Rather, the pattern
of relative speed factors should be defined such that control objectives are implic-
itly met.
• VSPs with APEX—A VSP can be switched into any one of three different states.
When the VSP is On, the APEX will estimate the relative speed sufficient to
maintain a constant pressure head at the control node. When the VSP is Off, the
relative speed factor and flow through the pump are set to zero, and the pressure

Variable Speed Pump Theory
head at the control node is a function of the prevailing network boundary and
demand conditions. When the control state of a VSP is Fixed Speed Override, the
pump will operate at the maximum speed setting and the target head will no
longer be maintained. The Temporarily Closed state for a VSP indicates that the
check valve (CV) within the pump has closed in response to prevailing hydraulic
conditions, and that the target head cannot be maintained. The VSP control node
can be specified at any junction node or tank in a network model. As described
below, however, the behavior of simple and logical controls depends on the type
of control node selected.
• Junction Nodes—When the VSP control node type selected is a junction node,
the VSP will behave according to some automatic behaviors in addition to the
controls defined for the pump. If the head at the control node is above the target
head, the pump state will automatically switch to Off. If the head at the control
node is less then the target head, the pump state will automatically switch to On.
The VSP will automatically switch into and out of the Fixed Speed Override and
Temporarily Closed states in order to maintain the fixed head at the control node
and prevent reverse flow through the pump. Additional controls can be added to
model more complex use cases.
• Tanks—When the VSP control node is a tank, you must manage the state of the
pump through control definitions, allowing for flexible modeling of the complex
control behaviors that may be desired for tanks. If a VSP has a state of On, the
pump will maintain the current level of the tank. For example, at the beginning of
a simulation if a VSP has status of on, it will maintain the initial level of the tank.
As the simulation progresses and the pump happens to turn off, temporarily close,
or go into fixed speed override, the level in the tank will be determined in
response to the hydraulic conditions prevailing in the network. When the VSP
turns on again, it will maintain the current level of the tank, not the initial level.
Thus control statements must be written that dictate what state the pump should
switch to depending on the level in the tank. A pump station with a VSP and a
fixed-speed pump operating in a coordinated fashion can be used to model tank
drain and fill operations.
B.8.2 Performing Advanced Analyses
The VSP model is fully integrated with the energy cost manager for easy estimation of
pump operating costs. When comparing the energy efficiency of fixed speed and vari-
able speed pumps, however, it is important to bear in mind that the pumps are not
maintaining the same pressures in the network. The performance of the pumps should
be compared in such a way that takes this difference into account; otherwise the

WaterCAD Theory
comparison is of little value. For example, consider a comparison between a VSP and
a fixed-speed pump is prepared, but the target head at the control node is greater than
the head maintained there by the fixed speed pump. The VSP energy efficiency
numbers will be disappointing because the VSP is maintaining higher pressures.
The concept of a minimum acceptable head (or pressure) can be useful when evalu-
ating the performance of fixed speed and variable speed pumps. Both pumps should
be sized and operated such that the pressure is equal to, or greater than, the minimum
acceptable head. In this way, the heads maintained by the respective pumps can be
used to define equivalency between the respective designs. When the comparison is
thoughtfully designed and conducted, it is likely that the energy efficiency improve-
ments possible with VSPs will come to light more clearly.
B.8.3 References
Lingireddy, S. and D.J. Wood, “Improved Operation of Water Distribution Systems

Using Variable Speed Pumps,” Journal of Energy Engineering, ASCE, 124(3) 90-103,
1998.
Boulos, P. F. and D. J. Wood, “Explicit Calculation of Pipe-Network Parameters,”

Journal of Hydraulic Engineering, ASCE, 116(11) 1329-1344, 1987.
B.9 Hydraulic Equivalency Theory

This section outlines the rules that Skelebrator uses for creating equivalent pipes from
parallel or series pipes.
These equations can be solved for equivalent diameter or roughness (C, n or k). With
the Darcy-Weisbach equation, the equations are solved only for D because there are
situations where the roughness can be negative. Both solutions are presented. In
general, there will be one pipe that is the dominant pipe, and the properties of that pipe
will be used when a decision must be made. There will be some default rule for
picking the dominant pipe, but you will be able to override it.
You will not use equivalent lengths because you want to preserve the system geom-
etry. For pipes in series, you will add the lengths of the two pipes while for pipes in
parallel. You will use the length of the dominant pipe, as follows:
Lr = L1 + L 2
B.9.1 Principles
The equations derived below are based on the following principles. The equations
below are for two pipes, but can be extended to n pipes.

Hydraulic Equivalency Theory
For pipes in series:
Qr = Q1 + Q2
where Q = flow, r refers to the resulting pipe, and 1 and 2 refer to the pipes being
removed.
hr = h1 + h2
For pipes in parallel:
Qr = Q1 + Q2
and
hr = h1 + h2
As long as the units are consistent, then any appropriate units can be used. For
example, if the diameters are in feet, then the resulting diameter will be in feet.
B.9.2 Hazen-Williams Equation
KL Q 1.85
h = ------------- ⎛ ----⎞
4.87 ⎝ C⎠
D
K depends on the units but cancels out in equivalent pipe calculations.
Series Pipes
For series pipes, the length is based sum of the lengths.
Solved for C:
0.54
Lr
-------------
2.63
Dr
C r = ---------------------------------------------------
⎛ Li ⎞ 0.54
⎜
⎝
∑ ----------------------------⎟
4.87 1.85
Di Ci ⎠
Solved for D:

WaterCAD Theory
0.205
Lr
---------------
0.38
Cr
D r = --------------------------------------------------------
⎛ Li ⎞ 0.205
⎜
⎝
∑------------------------------⎟
4.87 1.85
Di Ci ⎠
Parallel Pipes
Solved for C:
0.54 2.63
Lr Ci Di
C r = -------------
Dr
2.63 ∑ ------------------
Li
0.54
-
Solved for D:
⎛ L 0.54 2.63 0.38

r C i D i ⎞⎟
D r = ⎜ ------------ ∑ -------------------
⎜ C 0.54 ⎟
⎝ r Li ⎠
B.9.3 Manning’s Equation
2
KL ( n Q )
h = -----------------------
5.33
D
Series Pipes
Solved for n:
2.66 2 0.5
Dr ⎛ Li n ⎞
n r = ------------- ⎜ ∑ i ⎟
------------
-
0.5 ⎜ 5.33⎟
Lr ⎝ Di ⎠
Solved for D:

⎛ ⎞ 0.188
⎜ ⎟
⎜ L n2 ⎟
r r
D r = ⎜ ---------------------⎟
⎜ 2⎟
⎜ Li n ⎟
∑ r
⎜ -------------⎟
⎝ D 5.33⎠
i
Parallel Pipes
Solved for n:
2.66
Dr
-------------
0.5
Lr
n r = --------------------
2.66
Di
∑ -------------
Li n
0.5
Solved for D:
⎛ 2.66 0.376
0.5 D i ⎞⎟
Dr = ⎜ Lr n ∑ -------------
⎜ 0.5 ⎟
⎝ L i n⎠
B.9.4 Darcy-Weisbach Equation
2
h = KLfQ
-----------------
5
D
It is the roughness, k—not f—that is a property of the pipe. While f behaves well, the
roughness can take on negative values in the parallel pipe case. Therefore, only solu-
tions for D will be developed.

WaterCAD Theory
The other problem with the Darcy-Weisbach equation is that D and f are not uniquely
related and depend on the Reynolds number, which is a function of velocity. So the
question that must be first answered is, Which value of f should be used in the equa-
tions? This is especially tricky when the individual pipes have different value of k.
First, a velocity of 1 m/s will be used as a reference velocity to calculate Reynolds
number for the individual pipes. Second, an iterative solution must be used to solve
for D. That is:
1. Pick a D and k based on the dominant pipe.

2. Calculate f for the resultant pipe using Swamee-Jain formula.
3. Use that f for fr in the equations below.
4. Check if Dr is close enough to D used to calculate f.
5. Repeat until convergence.
The Swamee-Jain equation is
1.325
f = --------------------------------------------------
-
⎛ k ⎞ 2
5.74
ln ⎜ ------------ + -------------⎟
⎝ 3.7D Re 0.9⎠
where
Re = VD
--------
ν
ν must be selected so that the units cancel. Typical values are 1.00e-6 m2/s or 1.088e-
5 ft.2/sec.
Series Pipes
⎛ ⎞ 0.2
⎜ ⎟
⎜ Lr ff ⎟
D r = ⎜ ----------------⎟
⎜ L i f i⎟
⎝ Di ⎠
∑
⎜ --------- 5⎟

Parallel Pipes
⎛ ⎛ 2.5 ⎞ 2 ⎞ 0.2
Di
D r = Lr f r ⎜
⎜
∑ --------------------⎟ ⎟
⎜ ⎜ 0.5⎟ ⎟
⎝ ⎝ ( Li f i ) ⎠ ⎠
Check Valves
Most pipes will not have check valves and the resulting valves will not. For series
pipes, if any pipe has a check valve, then the resulting pipe will have a check valve.
For parallel pipes, if both pipes have check valves, then the resulting pipe will have a
check valve.
The degenerative case is when one of the parallel pipes has a check valve. This should
not happen in terms of good engineering. If it does, the parallel pipes should not be
combined and a warning message should be issued.
Minor Losses
For pipes in series, the minor loss coefficients should be added. The differences in
diameter between the original pipe and the resulting pipe should be negligible. You
should be given the option to ignore minor losses in series pipes.
For pipes in parallel, you should be given the option to ignore minor losses, not skele-
tonize pipes with significant minor losses (e.g., if total Km > 100) or account for them
as a change in diameter.
One possible short heuristic for handling minor losses in parallel pipes is to realize
that you are splitting the minor loss over two pipes. If the pipes are roughly the same
length, roughness, and diameter, then the minor loss coefficient will be cut approxi-
mately in half. I worked through the math for coming up with an equivalent minor loss
coefficient and it’s a mess. Using half the minor loss coefficient isn’t exactly correct,
but it pretty much accounts for things.
Numerical Check
To check the equations, I’ll run through examples of each. I will solve for head loss in
each pipe individually and then combine to see how the head loss in the equivalent
pipe compares for series pipes and for parallel, I’ll see how the flow compares. I’ll
stick with the SI units (i.e., flow in m3/s, D, L and h in m).
Series
Use Q = 1 m3/s, and solve for head loss. Pipe 1 is the dominant pipe.

WaterCAD Theory
Table B-7: Comparison between the Sum of the Headlosses from the
Two Pipes and the Headloss from the Equivalent Pipe
Resulting,
Resulting,
Pipe 1 Pipe 2 solve for
solve for D
C,n
Length 100 80 180 180
0.75k,
Diameter 1 0.75 0.88
0.855n
C 100 120 100 71
k 0.002 0.0015 0.002 X
n 0.013 0.012 0.013 0.0197
h (Hazen) 0.21 0.49 0.72 0.72
h (Manning) 0.17 0.55 0.72 0.72
h (Darcy) 0.20 0.58 0.77 X
Parallel
Use head loss = 1 m and solve for Q.
Table B-8: Comparison between the Sum of the Flows from the Two
Pipes and the Flow from the Equivalent Pipe
Resulting,
Resulting,
solve for D
C,n
Length 100 80 100 100
Diameter 1 0.75 0.88 1.18n, 1.21k
C 100 120 100 163
k 0.002 0.0015 0.002 X

Thiessen Polygon Generation Theory
Table B-8: Comparison between the Sum of the Flows from the Two
Pipes and the Flow from the Equivalent Pipe (Cont’d)
Resulting,
Resulting,
solve for D
C,n
n 0.013 0.012 0.013 0.0083
Q (Hazen) 2.31 1.47 3.74 3.77
Q (Manning) 2.40 1.35 3.72 3.75
Q (Darcy) 2.26 1.31 3.55 X
B.10 Thiessen Polygon Generation Theory

Thiessen polygon generation comprises two methods:
• “Naïve Method”
• “Plane Sweep Method”
B.10.1 Naïve Method
A Thiessen polygon of a site, also called a Voronoi region, is the set of points that are
closer to the site than to any of the other sites.
Let P = {p1, p2,…pn} be the set of sites, and V = {v(p1), v(p2),…v(pn)} represent the
Voronoi regions or Thiessen polygons for Pi, which is the intersection of all of the half
planes defined by the perpendicular bisectors of pi and the other sites. Thus, a naïve
method for constructing Thiessen Polygons can be formulated as follows:

WaterCAD Theory
Step 1 For each i such that i = 1, 2,…, n, generate n - 1 half planes H(pi,pj), 1 </= j </
= n, i <> j, and construct their common intersection v(pi).
Step 2 Report V = {v(p1), v(p2),…v(pn)} as the output and stop.
This naïve procedure is, however, very inefficient for generating Thiessen polygons.
The computation time increases exponentially as the number of sites increases. There
are many other more competent methods for constructing a Thiessen polygon.
B.10.2 Plane Sweep Method
The plane sweep technique is a fundamental method for solving two-dimensional

geometric problems. It works with a special line called a sweepline, a vertical line
sweeping the plane from left to right. It hits objects one by one as the sweepline
moves. Whenever it crosses an object, a portion of the problem is solved. Therefore, it
enables a two-dimensional problem to be solved in a sequence of one-dimension
processing. Sweep plane technique provides a conceptually simple and efficient algo-
rithm. Steven Fortune (1986; 1987) has developed a sweepline algorithm for
constructing Thiessen polygons. This algorithm has been implemented in the Water-
GEMS Thiessen Polygon Generator. The detailed working algorithm is given as
follows:
1. Q <------- P.
2. Choose and delete the left-most point, say pi from Q.
3. L <------- the list consisting of a single region ϕ(V(pi).
4. While Q is not empty, repeat Steps 1-3.
5. If w is a site, say w = pi, do:
a. Find region ϕ(V(pi) on L containing pi.
b. Replace ϕ(V(pi) on L by the sequence (ϕ(V(pj), h-(pi, pj), (ϕ(V(pi)), h+(pi, pj),
ϕ(V(pj).
c. Add to Q the intersection of h-(pi, pj) with the intermediate lower half hyper-
bola on L, and the intersection of h+(pi, pj) with the immediate upper half
hyperbola on L.
6. If w is an intersection, say w = ϕ(qt), do:
a. Replace sub-sequence (h±(pi, pj), ϕ(V(pi)), h±(pi, pk)) on L by h = h-(pi, pk) or

h = h+(pi, pk) appropriately.
b. Delete from Q any intersection of h±(pi, pj) or h±(pi, pk) with others.

Thiessen Polygon Generation Theory
c. Add to Q any intersection of h with its immediate upper half hyperbola and its
immediate lower half parabola on L.
d. Mark ϕ(qt) as a Voronai vertex incident to h±(pi, pj), h±(pi, pk), and h.
7. Repeat all half hyperbolas ever listed on L, all the Voronai vertices marked in the
preceding step, and the incidence relations among them.
The sweepline algorithm is an efficient technique for constructing a Thiessen polygon.

The computation time required for the worst case is O(nlog n). It produces a far more
competent method than the naïve method and provides satisfactory performance for
generating Thiessen polygons for a large number of points.

Appendix
Scenario Management C
Guide
Haestad Methods’ scenario management feature can dramatically increase your

productivity in the “What If?” areas of modeling, including calibration, operations
analysis, and planning.
By investing a little time now to understand scenario management, you can avoid
unnecessary editing and data duplication. Take advantage of scenario management to
get a lot more out of your model, with much less work and expense.
In contrast to the old methods of scenario management (editing or copying data), auto-
mated scenario management using inheritance gives you significant advantages:
• A single project file makes it possible to generate an unlimited number of “What

If?” conditions without becoming overwhelmed with numerous modeling files
and separate results.
• Because the software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project, it
can provide you with powerful automated tools for directly comparing scenario
results. Any set of results is immediately available at any time.
• The Scenario/Alternative relationship empowers you to mix and match groups of
data from existing scenarios without having to re-declare any data.
• With inheritance, you do not have to re-enter data if it remains unchanged in a
new alternative or scenario, avoiding redundant copies of the same data. Inherit-
ance also enables you to correct a data input error in a parent scenario and auto-
matically update the corrected attribute in all child scenarios.
These advantages, while obvious, may not seem compelling for small projects. It is as
projects grow to hundreds or thousands of network elements that the advantages of
true scenario inheritance become clear. On a large project, being able to maintain a
collection of base and modified alternatives accurately and efficiently can be the
difference between evaluating optional improvements and being forced to ignore
them.
WaterCAD User's Guide C-783

About this Guide
C.1 About this Guide

The depth of scenario management as implemented by Haestad Methods is probably
far beyond what you have ever seen before. With that in mind, this guide is intended
as an introduction to the philosophy and terminology upon which scenario manage-
ment is based.
This is not intended as a step-by-step guide to using the software. If you are a moder-
ately experienced Windows software user, you should have no difficulty learning and
exploring the scenario management interface.
Excellent tutorials and context-sensitive online help are also available within the soft-
ware itself. These learning tools will prove to be of tremendous assistance to you for
all aspects of the software, and should certainly not be ignored if you are having diffi-
culty. For more information, just click the Help button, which is available from
anywhere within the program. In addition, contact Haestad Methods information on
the different training services it offers.
C.2 Before Haestad Methods—Distributed

Scenarios
Let us begin by understanding the approaches that have historically been used to
attempt “What If?” analyses. Traditionally, there have only been two possible ways of
analyzing the effects of change on a software model:
• Change the model, recalculate, and review the results

• Create a copy of the model, edit that copy, calculate, and review the results
Although either of these methods may be adequate for a relatively small system, the
data duplication, editing, and re-editing becomes very time-consuming and error-
prone as the size of the system and the number of possible conditions increase. Addi-
tionally, comparing conditions requires manual data manipulation, because all output
must be stored in physically separate data files.
C-784 WaterCAD User's Guide

Scenario Management Guide
Figure C-1: Before Haestad Methods—Distributed Scenarios
C.3 With Haestad Methods—Self-Contained

Scenarios
Effective scenario management tools need to meet these objectives:
• Minimize the number of project files the modeler needs to maintain (one, ideally)
• Maximize the usefulness of scenarios through easy access to things such as input
and output data, and direct comparisons
• Maximize the number of scenarios you can simulate by mixing and matching data
from existing scenarios (data reuse)
• Minimize the amount of data that needs to be duplicated to consider conditions
that have a lot in common

The Scenario Cycle
The scenario management feature developed by Haestad Methods successfully meets

all of these objectives. A single project file enables you to generate an unlimited
number of What If? conditions, edit only the data that needs to be changed, and
quickly generate direct comparisons of input and results for desired scenarios.
C.4 The Scenario Cycle

The process of working with scenarios is similar to the process of manually copying
and editing data, but without the disadvantages of data duplication and troublesome
file management. This process allows you to cycle through any number of changes to
the model, without fear of overwriting critical data or duplicating important informa-
tion. Of course, it is possible to directly change data for any scenario, but an audit trail
of scenarios can be useful for retracing the steps of a calibration series or for under-
standing a group of master plan updates.
Figure C-2: With Haestad Methods—Self-Contained Scenarios

C.5 Scenario Anatomy: Attributes and

Alternatives
Before we explore scenario management further, a few key terms should be defined:
• Attribute—An attribute is a fundamental property of an object, and is often a

single numeric quantity. For example, the attributes of a pipe include diameter,
length, and roughness.
• Alternative—An alternative holds a family of related attributes so pieces of data
that you are most likely to change together are grouped for easy referencing and
editing. For example, a physical properties alternative groups physical data for the
network’s elements, such as elevations, sizes, and roughness coefficients.
• Scenario—A scenario has a list of referenced alternatives (which hold the
attributes), and combines these alternatives to form an overall set of system condi-
tions that can be analyzed. This referencing of alternatives enables you to easily
generate system conditions that mix and match groups of data that have been
previously created. Note that scenarios do not actually hold any attribute data—
the referenced alternatives do.
C.6 A Familiar Parallel

Although the structure of scenarios may seem a bit difficult at first, anyone who has
eaten at a restaurant should be able to relate fairly easily. A meal (scenario) is
comprised of several courses (alternatives), which might include a salad, an entrée,
and a dessert. Each course has its own attributes. For example, the entrée may have a
meat, a vegetable, and a starch. Examining the choices, we could present a menu as in
the following figure:
Figure C-3: A Restaurant Meal Scenario

Scenario Behavior: Inheritance
The restaurant does not have to create a new recipe for every possible meal (combina-
tion of courses) that could be ordered. They can just assemble any meal based on what
the customer orders for each alternative course. Salad 1, Entrée 1, and Dessert 2 might
then be combined to define a complete meal.
Generalizing this concept, we see that any scenario references one alternative from
each category to create a big picture that can be analyzed. Note that different types of
alternatives may have different numbers and types of attributes, and any category can
have an unlimited number of alternatives to choose from.
Figure C-4: Generic Scenario Anatomy
C.7 Scenario Behavior: Inheritance

The separation of scenarios into distinct alternatives (groups of data) meets one of the
basic goals of scenario management: maximizing the number of scenarios you can
develop by mixing and matching existing alternatives. Two other primary goals have
also been addressed: a single project file is used, and easy access to input data and
calculated results is provided in numerous formats through the intuitive graphical
interface.
But what about the other objective: minimizing the amount of data that needs to be
duplicated to consider conditions that have a lot of common input? Surely an entire set
of pipe diameters should not be re-specified if only one or two change?
The solution is a familiar concept to most people: inheritance.
In the natural world, a child inherits characteristics from a parent. This may include
such traits as eye-color, hair color, and bone structure. There are two significant differ-
ences between the genetic inheritance that most of us know and the way inheritance is
implemented in software:

C.7.1 Overriding Inheritance
Overriding inheritance is the software equivalent of cosmetics. A child can override

inherited characteristics at any time by specifying a new value for that characteristic.
These overriding values do not affect the parent, and are therefore considered local to
the child. Local values can also be removed at any time, reverting the characteristic to
its inherited state. The child has no choice in the value of his inherited attributes, only
in local attributes.
For example, suppose a child has inherited the attribute of blue eyes from his parent.
Now the child puts on a pair of green-tinted contact lenses to hide his natural eye
color. When the contact lenses are on, we say his natural eye color is overridden
locally, and his eye color is green. When the child removes the tinted lenses, his eye
color instantly reverts to blue, as inherited from his parent.
C.7.2 Dynamic Inheritance
Dynamic inheritance does not have a parallel in the genetic world. When a parent’s
characteristic is changed, existing children also reflect the change. Using the eye-color
example, this would be the equivalent of the parent changing eye color from blue to
brown, and the children’s eyes instantly inheriting the brown color also. Of course, if
the child has already overridden a characteristic locally, as with the green lenses, his
eyes will remain green until the lenses are removed. At this point, his eye color will
revert to the inherited color, now brown.
This dynamic inheritance has remarkable benefits for applying wide-scale changes to
a model, fixing an error, and so on. If rippling changes are not desired, the child can
override all of the parent’s values, or a copy of the parent can be made instead of a
child.
C.8 When Are Values Local versus Inherited?

Any changes that are made to the model belong to the currently active scenario and
the alternatives that it references. If the alternatives happen to have children, those
children will also inherit the changes unless they have specifically overridden that
attribute. The following figure demonstrates the effects of a change to a mid-level
alternative. Inherited values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black
text.

Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance
Figure C-5: A Mid-level Hierarchy Alternative Change
C.9 Minimizing Effort through Attribute

Inheritance
Inheritance has an application every time you hear the phrase, “just like x except for
y.” Rather than specifying all of the data from x again to form this new condition, we
can create a child from x and change y appropriately. Now we have both conditions,
with no duplicated effort.
We can even apply this inheritance to our restaurant analogy as follows. Inherited
values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text.
Note: Salad 3 could inherit from Salad 2, if we prefer: “Salad 3 is just

like Salad 2, except for the dressing.”
• “Salad 2 is just like Salad 1, except for the dressing.”

• “Salad 3 is just like Salad 1, except for the dressing.”
Note: If the vegetable of the day changes (say from green beans to
peas), only Entrée 1 needs to be updated, and the other entrées
will automatically inherit the vegetable attribute of “Peas”
instead of “Green Beans.”

• “Entrée 2 is just like Entrée 1, except for the meat and the starch.”
• “Entrée 3 is just like Entrée 2, except for the meat.”
Note: Dessert 3 has nothing in common with the other desserts, so it

can be created as a “root” or base alternative. It does not inherit
its attribute data from any other alternative.
• “Dessert 2 is just like Dessert 1, except for the topping.”
C.10 Minimizing Effort through Scenario

Inheritance
Just as a child alternative can inherit attributes from its parent, a child scenario can
inherit which alternatives it references from its parent. This is essentially still the
phrase just like x except for y, but on a larger scale.
Carrying through on our meal example, consider a situation where you go out to
dinner with three friends. The first friend places his order, and the second friend orders
the same thing except for the dessert. The third friend orders something totally
different, and you order the same meal as hers except for the salad.
The four meal scenarios could then be presented as follows (inherited values are
shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text):
• “Meal 2 is just like Meal 1, except for the dessert.” The salad and entrée alterna-
tives are inherited from Meal 1.
• “Meal 3 is nothing like Meal 1 or Meal 2.” A totally new base or root is created.
• “Meal 4 is just like Meal 3, except for the salad.” The entrée and dessert alterna-
tives are inherited from Meal 3.

A Water Distribution Example
C.11 A Water Distribution Example

Let us consider a fairly simple water distribution system: a single reservoir supplies
water by gravity to three junction nodes.
Figure C-6: Example Water Distribution System
Although true water distribution scenarios include such alternative categories as initial
settings, operational controls, water quality, and fire flow, we are going to focus on the
two most commonly changed sets of alternatives: demands and physical properties.
Within these alternatives, we are going to concentrate on junction baseline demands
and pipe diameters.
C.12 Building the Model (Average Day

Conditions)
During model construction, probably only one alternative from each category is going
to be considered. This model is built with average demand calculations and prelimi-
nary pipe diameter estimates. At this point we can name our scenario and alternatives,
and the hierarchies to look like the following (showing only the items of interest):

C.13 Analyzing Different Demands (Maximum

Day Conditions)
In our example, the local planning board also requires analysis of maximum day
demands, so a new demand alternative is required. No variation in demand is expected
at J-2, which is an industrial site. As a result, the new demand alternative can inherit J-
2’s demand from Average Day while the other two demands are overridden.
Now we can create a child scenario from Average Day that inherits the physical alter-
native, but overrides the selected demand alternative. As a result, we get the following
scenario hierarchy:
Since no physical data (pipe diameters) have been changed, the physical alternative
hierarchy remains the same as before.
C.14 Another Set of Demands (Peak Hour

Conditions)
Based on pressure requirements, the system is adequate to supply maximum day
demands. Another local regulation requires analysis of peak hour demands, with
slightly lower allowable pressures. Since the peak hour demands also share the indus-
trial load from the Average Day condition, Peak Hour can be inherited from Average
Day. In this instance, Peak Hour could inherit just as easily from Maximum Day.

Correcting an Error
Another scenario is also created to reference these new demands, as shown below:
Note again that we did not change any physical data, so the physical alternatives
remain the same.
C.15 Correcting an Error

This analysis results in acceptable pressures, until it is discovered that the industrial
demand is not actually 500 gpm—it is 1500 gpm. Because of the inheritance within
the demand alternatives, however, only the Average Day demand for J-2 needs to be
updated. The changes will ripple through to the children. After the single change is
made, the demand hierarchy is as follows:
Notice that no changes need to be made to the scenarios to reflect these corrections.
The three scenarios can now be calculated as a batch to update the results.
When these results are reviewed, it is determined that the system does not have the
ability to adequately supply the system as it was originally thought. The pressure at J-
2 is too low under peak hour demand conditions.
C.16 Analyzing Improvement Suggestions

To counter the headloss from the increased demand load, two possible improvements
are suggested:

• A much larger diameter is proposed for P-1 (the pipe from the reservoir). This
physical alternative is created as a child of the Preliminary Pipes alternative,
inheriting all the diameters except P-1’s, which is overridden.
• Slightly larger diameters are proposed for all pipes. Since there are no commonal-
ities between this recommendation and either of the other physical alternatives,
this can be created as a base (root) alternative.
These changes are then incorporated to arrive at the following hierarchies:
This time, the demand alternative hierarchy remains the same since no demands were
changed. The two new scenarios (Peak, Big P-1, Peak, All Big Pipes) can be batch run
to provide results for these proposed improvements.
Next, features like Scenario Comparison Annotation (from the Scenario Control
Center) and comparison Graphs (from the element editor dialog boxes) can be used to
directly determine which proposal results in the most improved pressures.
C.17 Finalizing the Project

It is decided that enlarging P-1 is the optimum solution, so new scenarios are created
to check the results for average day and maximum day demands. Notice that this step
does not require handling any new data. All of the information we want to model is
present in the alternatives we already have!

Conclusion
Also note that it would be equally effective in this case to inherit the Avg. Day, Big P-
1 scenario from Avg. Day (changing the physical alternative) or to inherit from Peak,
Big P-1 (changing the demand alternative). Likewise, Max. Day, Big P-1 could inherit
from either Max. Day or Peak, Big P-1.
Neither the demand nor physical alternative hierarchies were changed in order to run
the last set of scenarios, so they remain as they were.
C.18 Conclusion
These are the fundamental concepts behind the architecture of Haestad Methods’
scenario management. To learn more about actually using scenario management in
Haestad Methods software, start by running the scenario management tutorial from
the Help menu or from within the Scenario Control Center itself. Then load one of the
SAMPLE projects and explore the scenarios defined there. For context-sensitive help,
press F1 or the Help button any time there is a screen or field that puzzles you.
Haestad Methods’ scenario management feature gives you a powerful tool for
modeling real-world engineering scenarios when analyzing system response to
different demands, reviewing the impacts of future growth, and iterating to find the
least expensive design. That means you will be able to finish your projects faster,
spend less money, and improve your bottom line.

Appendix
Capital Cost D
Estimating
Capital cost estimating includes:
• “Capital Cost Estimating Basics” on page D-797

• “Unit Cost Functions” on page D-802
• “Building Cost Scenarios” on page D-810
• “Viewing Cost Results” on page D-811
• “Assigning Costs to Model Elements” on page D-815
D.1 Capital Cost Estimating Basics

The Cost Manager in WaterGEMS, WaterCAD, StormCAD, and SewerCAD is a tool
for tracking the costs associated with a water distribution, storm sewer, or sanitary
sewer construction project. It is set up to mimic the way that a typical engineer would
track the costs of a capital improvement project during a planning study. In order to
compute the cost of a particular Scenario, you must supply the model with the
following information:
• Elements included in costing—The first step is to select the elements from the
model that you want to include in a given Cost Scenario. This set of elements may
include all the elements in the model if, for instance, you are modeling a new
subdivision, or a subset of the elements if you are expanding an existing system.
• Unit Costs—The second level of data is the costs associated with each element.
The costs for each element are broken down into two types, construction and non-
construction. Construction costs are specified on a per unit basis where the unit
can be either an item (e.g., $/hydrant) or a length unit (e.g., $/ft. or $/m). Most unit
costs are constants, but unit costs for pipe elements and gravity structures can also
be specified as a function of diameter or some other property of the element using
a unit cost function. A unit cost function defines the relationship between the unit
cost for an element and some attribute of that element. Non-construction costs can
be specified as either a percentage of the total construction costs or as a lump sum
amount.
WaterCAD User's Guide D-797

Capital Cost Estimating Basics
• Quantities—The third level of information is the quantity of each item (e.g.,

number of service lines, length of pipe, number of valves) associated with a given
element. In the case of pipes, you need not specify the length, as the default value
for the quantity is the length of the pipe segment.
• Adjustments—Finally, you can enter the adjustments that should be made to the
total costs computed for the elements in a Scenario (i.e., project). You can specify
these project level cost adjustments as a lump sum or as a percentage of the total
cost.
Capital cost estimating basics includes:
• “Element Cost Data versus Cost Manager” on page D-798

• “Navigating within the Cost Manager” on page D-798
• “Entering Data for Multiple Elements” on page D-800.
D.1.1 Element Cost Data versus Cost Manager
The early sections of this appendix describe how to handle cost data for each
element. Entering the cost data for individual elements does not involve the
use of the Cost Manager portion of the program. The Cost Manager is used to
sum the costs of the elements and prepare project cost reports. The Cost Manager is
accessed by clicking the Cost Manager button, or by selecting Analysis > Compute
Costs. Costs for individual elements can be calculated without entering the Cost
Manager.
D.1.2 Navigating within the Cost Manager
There are five selections within the Cost Manager:
• Unit Cost Functions—Use this selection to construct unit cost functions.

• Cost Alternatives—Opens the Cost Alternative dialog box where you can edit
the element cost data defined in the project.
• Cost Adjustments—This selection lets you enter cost adjustments that pertain to
the overall Scenario, not just individual elements.
• Active Scenarios—You can specify which Scenarios will appear in the Cost
Manager.
• Cost Reports—View cost reports with varying levels of detail.
The Cost Manager also provides a way of viewing the calculated costs at user-selected
levels of detail.
D-798 WaterCAD User's Guide

Capital Cost Estimating
Level of Detail
The cost analysis feature is extremely flexible with regard to the level of detail in
which you can develop cost estimates. At the simplest level, you may want to capture
all the costs of a pipe in a single $/ft. or $/m unit cost. At the other extreme, you may
break down the cost of a pipe into numerous cost items, including materials, installa-
tion, repaving, hydrants, services, valves, land, engineering, inspection, legal, permits,
and contribution to a capital clearing account, plus an explicit allowance for omissions
and contingencies. Either approach can be easily accommodated using the Cost
Manager.
Construction versus Overall Project Cost

It is important to understand which costs you are calculating, construction costs or
overall capital costs. For example, you must decide if the costs calculated are pure
construction costs, or if they include items such as inspection, design, land, easements,
etc. There is no single correct way to compute costs, but it is important to realize
which costs are included or not included in the totals, and to perform cost evaluations
in a consistent manner.
Indirect Costs by Element or by Project

Indirect costs such as design and inspection may be assigned to each element individ-
ually or to the project as a whole, depending on how you wish to account for the costs
in your estimate. For instance, if a pipeline project is made up of five pipe elements,
the inspection cost may be added into each element, or calculated after summing the
individual costs and added to the overall project cost.
Cost Functions versus Fixed Unit Cost

For pipes and gravity node structures, it is possible to specify unit costs as a function
of an attribute of the element. For instance, the unit cost of a pipe might be a function
of the diameter, or the cost per unit for a gravity structure could be a function of the
structure depth. By using a cost function, the unit cost for an element will be automat-
ically updated as the physical characteristics of the element change.
Scenarios versus Cost Alternatives

While cost data are stored in the Cost Alternatives, costs are calculated for individual
Scenarios. This distinction is necessary because element properties such as pipe diam-
eter and manhole depth are not stored with cost data, but rather with the system’s
physical data. So, the cost must be based on a Scenario, which includes both a Cost
Alternative and a Physical Properties Alternative.

Capital Cost Estimating Basics
Multiple Scenarios
The cost data that you enter is stored in a Cost Alternative, so you can easily change
the cost data that is used from Scenario to Scenario. For instance, you may have
several phases of construction for which you wish to separately compute the associ-
ated costs. You can do this by creating two Cost Alternatives, one containing the cost
data for the elements in phase one, and another containing the costs for the elements in
phase two. By creating the appropriate Scenarios to reference these Alternatives, you
can quickly compute and compare the costs associated with each phase.
D.1.3 Entering Data for Multiple Elements
Thus far, data entry has been described for individual elements. However, in most
cases, unit costs are the same for a given type of item regardless of the element with
which it is associated. For example, a service line may cost $1200, and you want to
use that same unit price for all elements. You can define these costs by either using:
prototypes, globally editing the costs, or using unit cost functions.
Prototypes
If you know that you will be using the Cost Manager before you begin your project,
the Prototype feature allows you to easily establish default cost data by using the Cost
tab. For instance, if you know that all your pipes are going to have construction cost
items for material and installation, valves, and service connections, you can enter
these items into the construction cost table, along with their unit costs. Then, when
you have finished laying out your system, you can select the Pipe Editor and update
the appropriate quantity for each of these items.
For example, the pipe prototype may have an item labeled Service Connection with a
quantity of 0 and a unit cost of 750. Then, for each element, the labels and unit costs
will appear with the default values from the prototype, and you only need to specify
the quantity of each item.

Setting the Include in Cost Calculation Box

In the prototype shown above, cost data has been entered, but the box labeled Include
in Cost Calculation has not been checked. When new pipes are created in the graphical
editor, their cost data will default to the values shown here, but they will not be
selected for inclusion in the cost analysis. If you select Include in Cost Calculation in
the prototype, the program will calculate costs for every element subsequently entered
into the model. It may be necessary to use the Table Manager or Alternative Manager
to ensure that the model is only calculating costs for the elements that you want
included in the costing. For example, costs should not be calculated for existing pipes.
The Pressure Pipe tab in the Cost Alternative Editor below shows how you can specify
that only certain pipes are included in the cost calculation.

Unit Cost Functions
Entering Cost Items and Unit Prices Globally

If you have already entered a system for which you would like to compute the cost,
you can globally edit the cost data either through a FlexTable or the Cost Alternative
Editor. Once in the Cost Alternative Editor, select the alternative to be edited, and
choose the tab corresponding to the type of element to be edited. There, right-click the
Element Costs column heading and select Global Edit. In this way, it is possible to add
a global unit cost for hydrants or service lines. Then, within each element, you need
only enter the quantity of these items. If necessary, you can still override the unit cost
in an individual Element Editor or delete an item entirely.
Using Filters to Edit Only Some Elements

If you use FlexTables, you can easily select subsets of elements for applying different
default cost data. For instance, you may wish to apply a different unit cost function to
a material item and an installation item for pipes having different materials. In the
FlexTables, you can filter a table to view only the pipes that are made of ductile iron,
and then globally edit the cost data for these pipes. You can then repeat the process for
your PVC pipes. Combining element prototypes and the global editing capabilities
makes it easy for you to quickly enter large amounts of cost data and develop a plan-
ning-level estimate of the cost of your system.
D.2 Unit Cost Functions

Unit cost functions define a relationship between a unit cost and a certain property of
an element. For pipe elements, the unit cost would be in units of $/length and might be
related to the diameter of the pipe. In WaterCAD, pipes are the only elements for
which unit cost functions can be defined. However, in StormCAD and SewerCAD,
you can also define unit cost functions for gravity structures like inlets, junctions, and
manholes. Unit cost functions for gravity structures relate the cost of the element to
some property, such as structure depth. As with any function, unit cost functions can
give the relationship between cost ($/length or $/structure) and an element property
(diameter or structure depth) in either a tabular form or an equation.
Unit cost functions includes:
• “Form of Cost Functions” on page D-803

• “Formula Cost Functions” on page D-806
• “Tabular Cost Functions—Defining Cost Tables” on page D-808

D.2.1 Form of Cost Functions
Cost functions can be specified in formula (equation) or tabular (table) format as

shown below:
Formula Unit Cost Function
$/ft = 0.4 D1.5
Where: D = Diameter (in.)
Tabular Unit Cost Function
D (in.) 6 8 10 12 14 16
$/ft. 5.90 9.00 12.60 16.60 20.90 25.60

Unit Cost Functions
The two cost functions are essentially the same at the actual discrete diameters. The
method that you choose is strictly a matter of individual preference or dependent on
the data you have. Graphs of the formula and tabular unit cost functions given above
are shown below:

Multiple Cost Functions

Of course, not every pipe of a given size is going to have the same unit cost. Pipes laid
in new subdivisions in soil generally have lower costs than pipes laid in congested
downtown areas with a great deal of rock and extensive repaving. You might therefore
want to define several different cost functions corresponding to different pipes and
different conditions. Each of these cost functions should be given its own unique name
or label.
Some typical unit cost functions may be:
• New roads
• Cross country with rock
• Downtown urban area
• Old neighborhood
• Boring under highway
A typical list of cost functions (in this case for pipes) is shown below. Note that you
can build a new cost function by adding it or by duplicating and editing an existing
function.

Unit Cost Functions
Assigning Cost Functions to Elements

Once the cost functions have been named and defined, you can assign them to any
number of construction cost items for each pipe being included in the cost calcula-
tions. This assignment can be made using the Pipe Editor, FlexTables, or the Cost
Alternative Editor.
Entering Cost Function Data

You can enter data to construct the cost functions by selecting Unit Cost Functions
from the Cost Manager, or by clicking the Ellipsis (…) button in the Advanced
Options dialog box located under the Cost tab of any element that supports cost func-
tions. The units of the independent variable will be the units of that variable elsewhere
in the model, while the units of the unit cost are $/ft. or $/m for pipe and $/unit for
non-pipes.
D.2.2 Formula Cost Functions
Formula cost functions includes:
• “Defining Cost Formulas” on page D-807

• “Coefficients in Cost Formulas” on page D-807

Defining Cost Formulas

When you decide to use a formula rather than a table to describe unit costs, you need
only enter four coefficients to describe the cost function, rather than an entire table of
values. With this method, adjusting the costs for a different cost function involves
changing only one or two of the coefficients of the equation rather than an entire table.
The general form of the cost function is:
$/ft = d + a (x-c)b
Where: x is the value of an element attribute such as diameter, rise, or

span (in length units such as inches and millimeters for
diameter and feet or meters for depth); and a, b, c, and d are
coefficients of the cost equation.
In general, typical ranges for the coefficients for pipe cost functions in $/ft. where
diameter (span) is expressed in inches are:
0.4 < a < 1.0
1.2 < b < 1.8
0.0 < c < 20
0.0 < d < 6
Coefficients in Cost Formulas

Costs are most dependent on b since it is an exponent. It indicates how sensitive costs
are to size. If costs are relatively independent of size, b is small, while if they vary
dramatically with size, b is larger. The coefficient d represents a minimal cost for
something like pavement restoration, which is independent of the size of the pipe. The
coefficient a is the best parameter to adjust when converting cost from one laying/
excavation condition to another.
The figure below shows the effects of the coefficients on the shape of the cost curve.

Unit Cost Functions
If you have few data points, it is best to set c and d to zero, b to 1.6, and see what value
of the a coefficient best fits the cost data. Try using a spreadsheet graph for this. Then,
adjust b to get the curvature of the cost curve, and c and d to get the correct x- and y-
axis intercepts.
D.2.3 Tabular Cost Functions—Defining Cost Tables
Setting up a cost table involves typing in pairs of values in the Unit Cost Function
Editor dialog box. While the independent variables for the formula cost functions
were required to be numbers, the independent variables for tabular functions can be
numeric or text values, as shown below.
Note: In a circular gravity pipe, the rise and span both equal the
diameter.
• Numeric Variables
– Rise
– Structure Depth
– Structure Diameter
– Pipe Diameter
– Minor Loss Coefficient
– Complex Pipe Elements
• Text Variables
– Section Size
– Material Type

Sometimes a single pipe may actually have different unit costs along its length.
Consider a 500 foot pipe that has an 80 foot stream crossing part way along the pipe,
320 feet of cross country pipe, and 100 feet of pipe laid in an old neighborhood. There
are two ways to approach costing this kind of pipe element:
• Set up three separate model elements (i.e., pipes), each with its own cost function.
This method is the most straightforward way, even though it increases the number
of pipes the hydraulic model must solve.
• Or, set up one 500 foot pipe with the cost function for cross country pipe and add
the following: a cost item for the additional cost of the stream crossing with a
quantity of 80 feet and a unit price of, say, $20/ft., and a cost item for the addi-
tional cost of laying pipe in the old neighborhood with a quantity of 100 feet and a
unit price of $30/ft., where the $20 and $30 represents the incremental costs for
the more expensive pipe laying. The difficulty with this approach is that the add-
on cost is independent of pipe size. If the add-on costs are a function of pipe size,
new cost functions for those items can be defined.

Building Cost Scenarios
D.3 Building Cost Scenarios

Costs are calculated for Scenarios, which are made up of physical data, demands or
loads, initial settings, costs, and other Alternatives. The data used in the cost calcula-
tions is primarily found in the Cost Alternative, but pipe and manhole sizes are taken
from the Physical Alternative, and system adjustment data is entered in the Cost
Manager under Cost Adjustments on a Scenario basis. Values in the other Alterna-
tives, such as demands and water quality, have no impact on the cost calculations. The
relationship between sources of data for cost calculations is shown in the figure below.
D.3.1 Associating Costs with Scenarios
While cost data is entered in the Element Editors, FlexTables, and Cost Alternatives,
these costs must be associated with a Scenario. This is done in the Scenario Control
Center by selecting the Cost Alternative to be used with a Scenario. Each Scenario has
a cost associated with it, which means that there may be many Scenarios with the
same cost. This occurs when the Cost and Physical Alternatives are the same for a
particular Scenario even though the Scenarios may have a different demand alterative
or initial condition. However, you can control which Scenarios will appear in the Cost
Manager.

D.3.2 Application
For example, consider a pipe on Jones Street that is assigned a cost function in a Cost
Alternative that is based on the diameter of the pipe. In Physical Properties Alternative
1, the pipe is given a diameter of 12 inches; in Physical Properties Alternative 2, it is
given a diameter of 16 inches. When Physical Properties Alternative 1 is combined in
a Scenario with the Cost Alternative, it will generate a cost for the 12-inch Jones
Street pipe, and when Physical Properties Alternative 2 is combined with the Cost
Alternative, it will generate a cost for the 16-inch.
Using Cost Alternatives to Segregate Multiple Projects

Cost Alternatives can also be used to separate costs into distinct projects. A Cost
Alternative identifies which elements are included in the cost calculation and
summary.
For example, you may have ten elements, such as nine pipes and a pump station, that
have costs calculated for them in the model. Seven of the pipes will be installed on the
north side of town in a single project, while two pipes and a pump station will be
installed in the south side under a different project. When defining the Cost Alterna-
tive, you set up one Cost Alternative with the seven north side pipes, and another Cost
Alternative with the two south side pipes and the pump station. Checking the Include
in Cost Calculation box in the Cost Alternative Editor under the Cost Manager deter-
mines which elements are part of the cost analysis for each Scenario.
D.4 Viewing Cost Results

You can view cost results on the screen, by exporting them to spreadsheets and other
software, and by printing them for use in reports. These reported costs can be given on
an element-by-element basis in the element dialog boxes, aggregated by pipes and
nodes in FlexTables, and on a project basis in the Cost Manager. The default display
units on cost are dollars ($) with no decimal places, although they can be changed to
thousands of dollars (k$), and the display precision can be adjusted.
Viewing cost results includes:
• “Active Scenarios” on page D-812

• “Use of Cost FlexTables” on page D-812
• “Individual Element Costs” on page D-813
• “Node and Pipe Cost Tables” on page D-813
• “Cost Scenario Tables” on page D-813

Viewing Cost Results
D.4.1 Active Scenarios
The Cost Manager can calculate costs for every Scenario created in the Scenario
Control Center. However, some Scenarios may share the same Cost Alternative and
Physical Alternative, and differ only in the loading (demand) or initial conditions. In
these cases, the costs will be the same for the different Scenarios. You may therefore
want to view the costs for only a few of the available Scenarios. This can be done by
selecting Active Scenarios in the Cost Manager and checking the appropriate boxes.
Only those Scenarios that are selected as active in the Cost Manager will have costs
calculated for them.
D.4.2 Use of Cost FlexTables
The cost reports are formatted as FlexTables, so the columns can be adjusted and
display properties changed. The tables can also be exported to a tab delimited or
comma delimited file, or copied to the Windows Clipboard and pasted into other soft-
ware. The actual values displayed in the cells, not the formulas, are copied, so the
numerical values should not be adjusted once they are exported. That is, if the unit
cost or quantity is changed, the totals will not automatically update in the spreadsheet.

D.4.3 Individual Element Costs
For any element, costs can be viewed under the Cost tab of the element dialog box. If
there are more than three construction or non-construction costs, not all will be visible
at once. The costs can be viewed in a report like the one shown below by selecting
Report > Cost Report. To obtain a printout, select Print Preview and Print.
D.4.4 Node and Pipe Cost Tables
Just as the model contains some standard pipe and node tables, they also contain stan-
dard cost tables. These can be viewed from the Tabular Reports dialog box by
selecting Node Cost Report or Pipe Cost Report. In this view, it is possible to sort or
filter elements and use all the functionality of FlexTables to customize the look of the
table. The table can also be exported, copied, and printed. You can filter out elements
not included in the cost calculation by selecting Options > Filter > Custom.
D.4.5 Cost Scenario Tables
The costs can be viewed for an entire Scenario (project) in the Cost Manager itself.
The costs are presented in a tree structure such that you can expand or collapse various
branches of the tree to suit the level of detail desired.
More attractive tables are available by selecting Cost Reports. There are four levels of
detail available, as shown in the examples below:
Detailed tables show all unit costs and quantities.

Viewing Cost Results
Element Summary gives construction and non-construction costs for each element.
Project Summary gives totals for each type of element (e.g., Pipes, Tanks, etc.).

Pipe Costs gives the total length and cost for the pipes included in the cost analysis.
D.5 Assigning Costs to Model Elements

Assigning costs to model elements includes:
• “Construction versus Non-Construction Costs” on page D-815

• “Cost Considerations for Different Elements” on page D-816
• “Pipe Costs” on page D-816
• “Node Costs” on page D-818
• “Pump Station Costs” on page D-821
• “Non-Construction Costs” on page D-822
D.5.1 Construction versus Non-Construction Costs
The costs for each type of element are divided into two types—construction and non-
construction. The definition of each type of cost depends to a certain extent on you.
However, in general, the difference between the two types of costs is that construction
costs are based on a unit cost multiplied by a quantity, while non-construction costs
are specified as either a lump sum or as a percentage of the total construction costs.
The method of specifying non-construction costs is identical for every element. There
are slightly different options for specifying construction costs, depending on the type
of element to which you are assigning the cost. These nuances will be explained in
more detail in the sections that follow.

Assigning Costs to Model Elements
D.5.2 Cost Considerations for Different Elements
While cost management for the various elements shares most features, different types
of elements have some special behaviors. The four distinct categories are pipes, nodes
with cost functions, nodes without cost functions, and pump stations. Each type is
described in more detail in the corresponding topics.
D.5.3 Pipe Costs
Pipe costs includes:
• “Cost per Item versus Cost per Length” on page D-816

• “Items with Cost per Length” on page D-817
• “Unit Cost Functions for Pipes” on page D-817
Cost per Item versus Cost per Length

The construction costs for pipes are entered into the construction cost table portion of
the Cost tab for the element. The table can contain any number of construction cost
items. You can specify each pipe construction cost item as either a cost per item or a
cost per length. If you specify the cost on a per item basis, then the total construction
cost is the cost per item multiplied by the quantity or number of objects. You indicate
the type of cost in the Unit column by selecting:
• Each, if the costs are calculated per item

• Any length unit, if the costs are calculated per length

Items with Cost per Length

If a length unit (e.g., ft. or m) is selected in the Unit column, the number in the quan-
tity column is the length by which the unit cost is to be multiplied. The default value in
the quantity field is the length of the pipe used in the hydraulic calculations. However,
if that particular unit cost only applies to a portion of the pipe, you can enter another
value by deselecting Set Quantity Equal to Pipe Length in the Advanced Options
dialog box for each cost item.
Unit Cost Functions for Pipes

The Cost Manager allows you to specify the unit cost as a function of a pipe attribute
using a unit cost function. The unit cost function relates the cost per unit length to a
pipe property such as diameter. If you specify a unit cost function for a construction
cost item, then the program will calculate the unit cost for that item. Creating unit cost
functions is described later.
EXAMPLE:
Consider 650 feet of a 10-inch diameter pipe with the following cost data:
Table D-1: Unit Cost as a Function

of Diameter
Diameter (in) Unit Cost ($/ft.)
8 45
10 55
12 60
And with the following unit costs and quantities:
• Material and installation $55/ft. (calculated based on the above table)

• 7 service connections at $650 each
• Omission and contingency at 15% of construction cost
• Inspection services at 5% of construction cost
• Utility Easement at $350
The Cost tab for this pipe would appear as follows:

Each pipe can have as many construction cost items as you wish, which means
that any number of unit cost functions can be used for a single pipe. For instance,
you could have unit cost functions for materials, excavation, or resurfacing. The
advantage of specifying the costs in terms of unit cost functions is that as the
physical characteristics of the pipe change, the cost for the element is automati-
cally updated.
D.5.4 Node Costs
Node costs includes:
• “Types of Nodes by Cost” on page D-818

• “Cost Items for Nodes” on page D-819
Types of Nodes by Cost

In terms of assigning construction costs, nodal elements can be broken down into two
categories: those that support unit cost functions and those that do not support unit
cost functions. For the most part, the construction cost items for these two categories
of nodal elements are specified in a very similar fashion. The first category includes
the gravity structures: manholes, inlets, and junctions. The second category consists of
the remaining nodal elements: outlets, pressure junctions, pumps, valves, tanks, and
reservoirs.

Cost Items for Nodes

The construction cost items for nodal elements consist of a label, quantity, unit, and
unit cost. The unit field contains a user-defined string and is primarily used for book-
keeping, since it does not affect the total cost of the item. The total cost for the
construction cost item is the quantity multiplied by the unit cost, which are parameters
defined by you.
For elements that support unit cost functions (manholes, inlets, and junctions), the
function can be defined in the Cost Manager and assigned to the construction cost
item. As with pipes, if a unit cost function is assigned to a construction cost item, then
the unit cost is computed based on some attribute. The difference is that for pipes the
unit cost function computes a cost per length (e.g., ft. or m), while for nodal elements
the unit cost function computes a cost for the item (e.g., structure). So if a unit cost
function is assigned to a construction cost item, the quantity will default to 1, and the
unit will default to each. A quick way to determine if an element supports cost func-
tions is to look at the element dialog box. If it is possible to select the Advanced
button, then you can assign a cost function to that element. It is in the Advanced
Options dialog box that cost functions can be assigned to items, as described later in
this document.
EXAMPLE: NODE WITHOUT A COST FUNCTION
The construction cost of a tank, a type of element that does not support unit cost
functions, may consist of the following items:
• 1 steel tank at $250000

• 600 ft. of fencing at $15/ft.
• Site clearing and grading at $20000
• 1 SCADA system and radio transmitter at $20000
The Cost tab for this item is shown below:

EXAMPLE: NODE WITH A COST FUNCTION
For an inlet, you could use a unit cost function so that the construction costs for
the element are updated as the design is changed. Consider an inlet with the
following cost data.
Table D-2: Unit Cost Function of Structure Depth
Depth (ft.) Cost of Subsurface Structure ($)
6 3000
8 3500
10 4000
• 1 subsurface structure 8-ft. deep at $3500 (calculated from the unit cost func-
tion)
• 1 surface inlet at $2000
The Cost tab for this item would appear as shown below:

D.5.5 Pump Station Costs
Pump stations are a special case of nodal elements. In terms of the hydraulic model, a
pump station with three pumps makes up three hydraulic elements. However, in terms
of cost estimating, a pump station is a single entity. There are two ways to address this
situation. You can either apportion the costs evenly between the three elements or
aggregate the cost for the entire pump station on a single pump. From a reporting and
management perspective, it often makes the most sense to assign all the costs to a
single pump as illustrated below:
• 3 pumps at $12000 each

• 3 pump installations at $4000 each
• 9 gate valves installed at $2500 each
• 3 check valves at $690 each
• 1 pump station structure at $80000
• 1 SCADA system with sensors and radio at $25000
• Engineering and inspection at 15% of construction
• Allowance for contingencies @ 5% of construction
• Land for pumping station at $20000

The sum of all these costs is the total cost for the element and would show up only in
the selected pump. The other two pumps at the station would have zero cost. In the
screen capture below, note that only three items are shown in the table, but the table
can be scrolled to show the remaining items.
D.5.6 Non-Construction Costs
There are numerous indirect costs that are applied to construction projects. The termi-
nology describing these costs varies depending on local conventions, whether a public
or private utility is involved, and whether construction is being done with force
account labor or outside contractors. There are numerous items that can be included in
these indirect costs, such as:
• Design and bidding

• Construction phase engineering services
• Inspection
• Utility overhead
• Capital clearing account
• Administration
• Legal
• Permits

• Allowance for interest on funds used during construction

• Insurance
You are able to include these costs in the following ways:
• With each element as a lump sum.

• With each element as a percentage.
• For the overall Scenario as a lump sum.
• For the overall Scenario as a percentage of construction costs.
• For the overall Scenario as a percentage of both construction and non-construction
costs (% of total cost).
• As a factor applied to the overall project (multiplier).
Non-construction costs include:
• “Omissions and Contingencies” on page D-823

• “Land, Easement, and Right-of-Way Costs” on page D-823
• “Specifying Non-Construction Costs” on page D-824
Omissions and Contingencies

Usually, cost estimators make an allowance for unforeseen items that come up during
projects, sometimes referred to as Omissions and Contingencies (O&C). These costs
are usually high when the project is being formulated initially (25%) and get smaller
(5%) as the scope and details of the project are worked out.
It is important not to count the allowance for O&C twice by including an allowance on
an element-by-element basis, and then another allowance for the project as a whole.
Land, Easement, and Right-of-Way Costs

Many projects involve procurement of land, easements, or rights-of-way. These costs
are usually not a function of element size, and so can be handled on an element by-
element basis as a lump sum or as a cost per foot or acre multiplied by the number of
feet or acres. If the land costs are not going to be accounted for element-by-element,
but rather by a single land purchase for the entire project, a lump sum cost adjustment
should be made to the appropriate Scenario.

Specifying Non-Construction Costs

Non-construction cost items for all types of elements are computed in the same
manner, and can be specified as either a lump sum or as a percentage of the total
construction costs. For instance, you may wish to make allowances for omissions and
contingencies on an element-by-element basis. You can do this by assigning a non-
construction cost item to every element that is 15% of the total construction cost of the
element.
The dialog boxes and reports below illustrate how the construction and non-construc-
tion costs for the following elements will appear in Cost tab of the Element Editor
dialog box and in the cost report for each element.
• Pipe (using values from a previous example):

– 650 feet of 10-inch diameter pipe at $55/ft.
– 7 service connections at $650 each
– Omission and contingency at 15% of construction
– Inspection Services at 5% of construction
– Utility easement at $350

• Tank:
– 1 steel tank at $250000
– 600 ft. of fencing at $15/ft.
– Site clearing and grading at $20000
– 1 SCADA system and radio transmitter at $20000
– Engineering and inspection at 12% of construction
– 2 acres of land at $50000/acre

• Inlet (using values from a previous example):

– 1 surface inlet at $2000
– 1 subsurface structure 8-ft. deep at $3500
– Engineering and inspection at 25% of construction cost



Appendix
Haestad Methods E
Haestad Methods offers software solutions to civil engineers throughout the world for
analyzing, modeling, and designing all sorts of hydrologic and hydraulic systems,
from municipal water and sewer systems to stormwater ponds, open channels, and
more. With point-and-click data entry, flexible units, and report-quality output,
Haestad Methods is the ultimate source for your modeling needs.
In addition to the ability to run in Stand-Alone mode with a CAD-like interface, some
of our products—WaterCAD, WaterCAD, StormCAD and SewerCAD—can be totally
integrated within AutoCAD. These programs also share numerous powerful features,
such as scenario management, unlimited undo/redo, customizable tables for editing
and reporting, customizable GIS, database and spreadsheet connection, and annota-
tion.
Be sure to contact us or visit our Web site at http://www.haestad.com to find out about
our latest software, books, training, and open houses.
E.1 Software
Haestad Methods software includes:
• “WaterGEMS”
• “WaterCAD”
• “SewerCAD”
• “StormCAD”
• “PondPack”
• “FlowMaster”
• “CulvertMaster”
• “WaterSafe”
• “PumpMaster”
WaterCAD User's Guide E-829

Software
E.1.1 WaterGEMS
WaterGEMS brings the concept of water modeling and GIS integration to the next
level. It is the only water distribution modeling software that provides full, completely
seamless integration with GIS applications. Now the combined functionality of
WaterCAD and GIS can be utilized simultaneously, synthesizing the distinct advan-
tages of each application to create a modeling tool with an unprecedented level of
freedom, power, efficiency, and usability.
You can design, create, display, edit, run, and map, water models from within the GIS
environment, and view the results of the simulations as native GIS maps or with tradi-
tional Haestad Methods modeling tools. Further, you can use WaterObjects to
customize WaterGEMS to meet your specific needs. These abilities, in conjunction
with the cross-product functionality provided by the core Unified Data and Object
Model architecture, provide a powerful cutting-edge solution for your modeling
projects.
WaterGEMS works within your choice of environments: ArcView, ArcEdit, ArcInfo,

AutoCAD, or the WaterGEMS Modeler interface.
E.1.2 WaterCAD
WaterCAD is the definitive model for complex pressurized pipe networks, such as
municipal water distribution systems. You can use WaterCAD to perform a variety of
functions, including steady-state and extended-period simulations of pressure
networks with pumps, tanks, control valves, and more.
WaterCAD abilities also extend into public safety and long-term planning issues, with
extensive water quality features, including: automated fire protection analyses,
comprehensive scenario management, skeletonization, calibration, cost analysis, and
enterprise-wide data sharing faculties. Further, you can use WaterObjects to customize
WaterCAD to meet your specific needs.
WaterCAD is available with your choice of a Stand-Alone graphical user interface, an

AutoCAD integrated interface, or an ArcView or ArcInfo integrated interface.
E-830 WaterCAD User's Guide

Haestad Methods
E.1.3 SewerCAD
SewerCAD is a powerful design and analysis tool for modeling sanitary sewage
collection and pumping systems. With SewerCAD, you can develop and compute
sanitary loads, tracking and combining loads from dry-weather and wet-weather
sources. You can also simulate the hydraulic response of the entire system (gravity
collection and pressure force mains), observe the effects of overflows and diversions,
and even automatically design selected portions of the system. Output covers every-
thing from customizable tables and detailed reports to plan and profile sheets.
SewerCAD can be run in a Stand-Alone graphical user interface, an AutoCAD inte-

grated interface, or an ArcView or ArcInfo integrated interface.
E.1.4 StormCAD
StormCAD is a highly-efficient model for the design and analysis of storm sewer
collection systems. From graphical layout and intelligent network connectivity to flex-
ible reports and profiles, StormCAD covers all aspects of storm sewer modeling.
Surface inlet networks are independent of pipe connectivity, and inlet hydraulics
conform to FHWA HEC-22 methodologies. Gradually varied flow algorithms and a
variety of popular junction loss methods are the foundation of StormCAD’s robust
gravity piping computations, which handle everything from surcharged pipes and
diversions to hydraulic jumps.
StormCAD is available with your choice of a Stand-Alone graphical user interface, an

AutoCAD integrated interface, or an ArcView or ArcInfo integrated interface.
E.1.5 PondPack
PondPack is a comprehensive, Windows-based hydrologic modeling program that

analyzes a tremendous range of situations, from simple sites to complex networked
watersheds. PondPack analyzes pre- and postdeveloped watershed conditions, and
estimates required storage ponds. PondPack performs interconnected pond routing,
and also computes outlet rating curves with tailwater effects, multiple outfalls, pond
infiltration, and pond detention times.
PondPack builds customized reports organized by categories, and automatically

creates section and page numbers, tables of contents, and indexes. You can quickly
create an executive summary for an entire watershed, or build an elaborate drainage
report showing any or all report items. Graphical displays, such as watershed
diagrams, rainfall curves, and hydrographs are fully compatible with other Windows
software, such as AutoCAD.

Software
E.1.6 FlowMaster
FlowMaster is efficient software for the design and analysis of a wide variety of
hydraulic elements, such as pressure pipes, open channels, weirs, orifices, and inlets.
FlowMaster’s Hydraulics Toolbox can create rating tables and performance curves for
any variables, using popular friction methods. Inlet calculations follow the latest
FHWA guidelines, and irregular section roughness can be weighted based on any
popular techniques.
E.1.7 CulvertMaster
CulvertMaster helps engineers design new culverts and analyze existing culvert
hydraulics, from single barrel crossings to complex multi-barrel culverts with
roadway overtopping. CulvertMaster computations use HDS No. 5 methodologies,
and allow you to solve for whatever hydraulic variables you don’t know, such as
culvert size, peak discharge, and headwater elevation. Output capabilities include
comprehensive detailed reports, rating tables, and performance curves.
E.1.8 WaterSafe
WaterSafe is an add-on module for WaterCAD and WaterCAD. It allows you to run
multiple constituent, trace, and age analyses, and it also incorporates previously
unavailable statistical results. Enhanced reporting and graphing capabilities improve
your ability to compare, examine and predict the effects of various water quality
scenarios.
E.1.9 PumpMaster
PumpMaster is software service for the selection of pumps from pump manufacturer
catalogs provided through three different solutions: a stand-alone application, an
online catalog, and a programmable pump library for use within Haestad Method
products. Features include: Automated selection of pumps based on a basic criterion

Haestad Methods
(duty point) or more elaborate parameters (application, pump type, speed, etc), Simul-
taneous access to catalogs from multiple pump manufacturers, and Enhanced work
flow and design capabilities for complex pump stations, such as variable speed
pumping or analyzing arrangements of identical and multiple size pumps.
E.2 Haestad Press

Haestad Press provides civil engineering professionals with
affordable, quality reference and textbooks dedicated to the
practical application of engineering theory to hydraulics and
hydrology. Haestad Press publications include:
References and Textbooks: Authored by industry-recognized experts, Haestad

Press offers a complete line of reference books for
use in both academic and professional settings.
Technical Journals: With an eye towards computer technology, journals
like “Current Methods” address the latest innovations
in water resources modeling and practical modeling
case studies, as well as offering credit towards
certification.
Independent Papers: Haestad Press also provides funding for engineers to
write case studies of their projects, for potential
publication in a variety of industry journals and
magazines.
E.3 Training and Certification

Haestad Methods Continuing Education depart-
ment has rightfully earned a reputation for excel-
lence among hydraulic modelers, because of both
the high quality of the educational experience and
the friendly and professional environment that is
provided at locations throughout the world. These
training programs are famous for efficiently and
effectively teaching engineers how to apply
hydraulic theory and state-of-the-art software to
real-world design situations.
Modelers can become certified in a variety of water-related fields, through an assort-

ment of teaching methods including:
• JumpStart Seminars

Internet Resources
• Comprehensive Workshops
• Publication-Based Programs
To obtain more information about Haestad Methods certification programs, or to see

upcoming events in a city near you, visit http://www.haestad.com.
E.3.1 Accreditations
Haestad Methods has achieved the highest levels of accreditation from both the Inter-
national Association for Continuing Education and Training (IACET), and the Profes-
sional Development Registry for Engineers and Surveyors (PDRES). In addition to
Haestad Methods’ own prestigious certifications, these endorsements enable modelers
to earn Continuing Education Units (CEUs) and Professional Development Hours
(PDHs) for their satisfactory participation in various training and educational
programs.
E.4 Internet Resources

In addition to modeling software, continuing education, and publications, Haestad
Methods also provides Internet-based tools to help engineers manage their account
information, manage their projects, and manage their sanity.
Use the Globe button to access the Haestad Methods’ knowledge base and
instant software updates for ClientCare subscribers, etc.
E.4.1 Instant Account Management
Now you can go online to manage your own account information, such as to conve-
niently maintain your products, customize your communication settings, or indicate
your areas of interest. Just visit the accounts section at http://www.haestad.com.
E.4.2 CivilProjects.com
CivilProjects.com is a special Internet service for

posting and locating Requests for Proposal (RFPs). The
database is updated daily with postings from around the
world, and there are extensive search capabilities that
allow you to find exactly what you are looking for.

Haestad Methods
E.4.3 CivilQuiz.com
CivilQuiz.com is a great way to treat yourself to some fun with a

quick online engineering challenge, and maybe win a laptop or
other prizes along the way. You can even submit your own ques-
tions to stump future CivilQuiz players!
E.4.4 Haestad Engineering Forums
The WaterTalk™, SewerTalk™, and StormTalk™ online forums will keep you up-to-
date with the latest tips and tricks in hydraulic and hydrologic modeling. Post your
engineering questions and share your unique modeling experiences with a global audi-
ence of thousands of professionals. For more information, visit http://
www.haestad.com and click the links to use the forums.

Internet Resources

Appendix
Glossary F
Age: An analysis for the age of water determines how long the
water has been in the system, and is a general water
quality indicator.
Available Fire Flow: Amount of flow available at a node for fire protection
while maintaining all fire flow pressure constraints.
Base Elevation & Level: Elevation from which all tank levels are measured. For
example, a tank level of two meters represents a water
surface elevation two meters above the base elevation.
Boundary Node: Node with a known hydraulic grade. It may be static
(unchanging with time), such as a reservoir, or dynamic
(changes with time), such as a tank. Every pipe network
must contain at least one boundary node. In order to
compute the hydraulic grade at the other nodes in the
network, they must be reachable from a boundary.
Bulk Reaction Coefficient: Coefficient used to define how rapidly a constituent
grows or decays over time. It is expressed in units of 1/
time, for first-order reactions.
Calc. Min. System Pressure: Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the
system during fire flow withdrawal at a node.
Calc. Min. Zone Pressure: Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the same
zone as the node where fire flow withdrawal occurs.
Calc. Residual Pressure: Calculated pressure at the junction node where the fire
flow withdrawal occurs.
Calculation Unready: An element that does not have all the required
information for performing an analysis is considered to
be calculation unready.
C-Coefficient: Roughness coefficient used in the Hazen-Williams
Equation.
WaterCAD User's Guide F-837

Check Valve: Prevents water from flowing backwards through the pipe.
In other words, water can only flow from the From Node
to the To Node.
Closed/Inactive Status: You can control the status of a valve to be either inactive
or closed. Inactive means that the valve will act like an
open pipe where flow can occur in either direction, and
the headloss across the valve will be calculated using the
valve’s minor loss factor. Closed means that no flow will
occur through the valve.
Constituent: Any substance, such as chlorine or fluoride, for which the
growth or decay can be adequately described through the
use of a bulk reaction coefficient and a wall reaction
coefficient.
Context Menu: A shortcut menu opened by right-clicking a project
element or data entry field. Commands on the context
menu are specific to the current state of the selected item.
Control Status: A pressure pipe can be either Open or Closed. Open
means that flow occurs in the pipe, and Closed means
that no flow occurs in the pipe.
Conveyance Element: A pipe or channel used to transport water.
Coordinates: Distances perpendicular to a set of reference axes. Some
areas may have predefined coordinate systems, while
other coordinate systems may be arbitrary. Coordinates
may be presented as X and Y values or may be defined as
Northing and Easting values, depending on individual
preferences.
Cross Section Type: Tanks can have either a constant area cross section or a
variable area cross section. The cross section of a tank
with a constant area is the same throughout the depth.
The cross section of a tank with a variable area varies
throughout the depth.
Crosshair: The cursor that looks like a plus sign (+).
Current Storage Volume: The volume of water currently stored in a tank. It
includes both the hydraulically active volume and the
hydraulically inactive volume.
CV: Check valve
Database Connections: A connection represented by a group of database links.
There may be a single linked external file within a
connection, or there may be several external file links
within a single connection.
Dataset: A dataset is a WaterCAD project.
F-838 WaterCAD User's Guide

Glossary
DBMS: An acronym that stands for Database Management

System. These systems can be relational (RDBMS) or
non-relational.
DEM: Digital elevation model
Demand: Represents the total demand from an individual junction
for the current time period. It is based on the information
from the Demand tab of the Junction Editor.
Design Point: Point at which a pump was originally intended to operate,
and is typically the best efficiency point (BEP) of the
pump. At discharges above or below this point, the pump
is not operating under optimum conditions.
Diameter: Refers to a pipe or valve’s inside diameter. It is the
distance between two internal points directly opposite
each other.
Discharge: Volumetric rate of flow given in units of length3/time.
DLG: Digital line graph
Double-Click: To click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession.
Drag: To hold down one of the mouse buttons while you move
the mouse.
Element: An object such as a tank, junction node, or pipe in a
drawing.
Elevation: The distance from a datum plane to the center of the
element. Elevations are often referenced with mean sea
level as the datum elevation.
Energy Grade Line (EGL): Sum of datum (base elevation), elevation, velocity head,
and pressure head at a section.
EPS: Extended Period Simulation
Extended Edit Button: A small button with an ellipsis (…) as the label.
Extended edit buttons are located next to drop-down
choice lists, and provide further editing for the associated
choice list items.
External Files: Any file outside of this program that can be linked. These
include database files (such as FoxPro, Dbase or
Paradox) and spreadsheets (such as Excel or Lotus).
Throughout the documentation, all of these file types will
be referred to as databases or external files
interchangeably.

Extrapolate: To infer a value based on other known values, with the
desired value lying outside the known range. Often based
upon extending the slope of the line connecting the
previous known values to the desired point. See also:
interpolate.
Feature Class: 1. A classification describing the format of geographic
features and supporting data in a coverage. Coverage
feature classes for representing geographic features
include point, arc, node, route-system, route, section,
polygon and region. One or more coverage features are
used to model geographic features; for example, arcs and
nodes can be used to model linear features such as street
centerlines. The tic, annotation, link, and boundary
feature classes provide supporting data for coverage data
management and viewing.
2. The conceptual representation of a geographic feature.
When referring to geographic features, feature classes
include point, line, area, and surface.
Feature Dataset: A feature dataset is a collection of feature classes that
share the same spatial reference.
Field Links: Define the actual mapping between model element
attributes and columns within each database table.
File Extension: The period and three characters, typically, at the end of a
filename. A file extension usually identifies the kind of
information the file contains. For example, files you
create in AutoCAD have the extension *.DWG.
Fire Flow Upper Limit: The maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at a
withdrawal location. This is a user-specified practical
limit that will prevent this program from computing
unrealistically high fire flows at locations such as
primary system mains, which have large diameters and
high service pressures. Remember that a system’s ability
to deliver fire flows is ultimately limited by the size of
the hydrant opening and service line, as well as the
number of hydrants available to combat a fire at a
specific location.
Flow: Represents the calculated value of the pipe, valve, or
pump discharge at the given time.
From Node: Represents the pipe’s starting node. Positive flow rates
are in the direction of from towards to. Negative flow
rates are in the opposite direction.
From Pipe: The pipe that connects to the upstream side of a valve or
pump.

Glossary
GA: Genetic algorithm

Generations: The maximum value for genetic algorithm generations is
determined by the Maximum Era Number and Era
Generation Number you set in the GA Parameters. The
actual number of generations that get calculated depend
on the Stopping Criteria you set.
Geodatabase: Short for geographic database, a geodatabase stores
spatial and descriptive data in an efficient manner.
Geodatabases are the standard file format for ArcGIS v8
and later.
Headloss: Represents the energy lost due to friction and minor
losses. The headloss field displays the pipe, valve, or
pump’s total headloss at the given time.
Headloss Gradient: Presents the headloss in the pipe as a slope, or gradient.
This allows you to more accurately compare headlosses
for pipes of different lengths.
Hydraulic Grade: Elevation to which water would rise under zero pressure.
For open surfaces, such as reservoirs and tanks, this is
equal to the water surface elevation. The hydraulic grade
field presents the hydraulic grade for the element at the
current time period as calculated based on the system
flow rates and head changes.
Hydraulic Grade Setting: The constraint to which a valve regulates, expressed in
units of head (Length). Depending on the type of valve, it
may refer to either the upstream or downstream hydraulic
grade or the headloss across the valve.
Inactive Volume: The volume of water below the minimum elevation of the
tank. This volume of water is always present, even when
the tank reaches its minimum elevation and closes itself
off from the system. Therefore, it is hydraulically
inactive. It is primarily used for water quality
calculations.
Inflow & Outflow: An inflow is a flow into a node from the system, while an
outflow is a flow from the node into the system. A
negative outflow is the same as a positive inflow, and a
negative inflow is the same as a positive outflow.
Inheritance: Refers to the parent-child relationships used by scenarios
and alternatives. Just as in the natural world, inheritance
is used to refer to the situation where an entity receives
something from its parent. For example, we speak of a
child inheriting blue eyes from a parent. Unlike in the

natural world, inheritance in scenarios and alternatives is
dynamic. If the parent’s attribute changes, the child’s
attribute automatically changes at the same time, unless
the value is explicitly changed in a child.
Initial Settings: Sets the status of an element for a steady-state analysis or
the first time step in an extended period simulation. The
initial settings for a pipe, pump, or valve can be set using
the elemental dialog boxes or a table.
Initial Water Quality: Represents the starting conditions at a node for age, trace,
or constituent concentration. The initial value will be
slightly different depending on the analysis type.
Interpolate: Estimating a value between two known values assuming
a linear relationship. See also: extrapolate.
Invert: Lowest point of a pipe opening. Sometimes referred to as
the flow line.
Label: The unique name by which an element will be referenced
in reports, error messages, and tables.
Length: Represents the distance on a pipe from the From Node to
the To Node, according to the scaled length of the pipe.
To enter an overriding length, click the User Defined
Length field and type in your desired length value.
LIDAR: Light Detection and Ranging
Manning’s Coefficient: Roughness coefficient used in Manning’s Formula.
Material: The selection of a pipe’s construction material. This
material will be used to determine a default value for the
pipe’s roughness.
Maximum Elevation: The highest allowable water surface elevation in a tank.
If the tank fills above this point, it will automatically shut
off from the system.
Max. Extended Operating Point:The absolute maximum discharge at which a pump
can operate, with zero head being added to the system.
This value may be computed by the program or entered
manually.
Maximum Operating Point: The highest discharge for which a pump is actually
intended to run. At discharges above this point, the pump
may behave unpredictably, or its performance may
decline rapidly.
Messages: The section that contains information generated during
the calculation of the model, such as warnings, errors,
and status updates.

Glossary
Messages Light: A light that appears on the Tab of the Messages sheet.
The light will be red if errors occurred during the
analysis, yellow if there are warnings or cautions, and
green if there are no warnings or errors.
Metadata: Additional information (aside from tabular and spatial
data) that makes the data useful. Includes characteristics
and information that are required to use the data but are
not contained within the data itself.
Minimum Elevation: The lowest allowable water surface elevation in a tank. If
the tank drains below this point, it will automatically shut
off from the system.
Minimum System Junction: The junction where the calculated minimum system
pressure occurs.
Minimum System Pressure: The minimum pressure allowed at any junction in the
entire system as result of fire flow withdrawal. If the
pressure at a node anywhere in the system falls below
this constraint while withdrawing fire flow, fire flow will
not be satisfied. A fire flow analysis may be configured
to ignore this constraint.
Minimum Zone Junction: The junction where the calculated minimum zone
pressure occurs.
Minimum Zone Pressure: The minimum pressure to maintain at all junction nodes
within a Zone. The model determines the available fire
flow such that the minimum zone pressures do not fall
below this target pressure. Each junction has a zone
associated with it, which can be specified in the
junction’s input data. If you do not want a junction node
to be analyzed as part of another junction node’s fire flow
analysis, move it to another Zone.
Minor Loss: The field that presents the total minor loss K value for a
pipe or valve. If an element has more than one minor
loss, each can be entered individually by clicking the
Ellipsis (…) button.
Modeler/Stand-Alone: The Haestad Methods software environment, and not the
AutoCAD one.
Mouse Buttons: The left mouse button is the primary button for selecting
or activating commands. The right mouse button is used
to activate shortcut context menus and help. Note that the
mouse button functions can be redefined using the
Windows Control Panel. If your mouse is equipped with
a mouse wheel, you can use it for various panning and
zooming functions.

Needed Fire Flow: The flow rate required at a junction to satisfy fire flow
demands.
Network Element: An element that forms part of the network model.
Annotation elements, such as polylines, borders, and text,
are not network elements.
Number: The number of parallel conveyance elements in a model.
Notes: The field that allows you to enter text relevant to the
model. It may include a description of an element, a
summary of your data sources, or any other information
of interest.
ODBC: Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) is a standard
programming interface developed by Microsoft for
accessing data in relational and non-relational database
management systems (DBMS).
On/Off Status: The status of a pump can be either on or off. On means
that flow will occur in the downstream direction, and the
pump will add head to the system according to it’s
characteristic curve. Off means that no flow will occur,
and no head will be added.
Open/Closed Status: The status of a pipe can be either open or closed. Open
means that flow can occur in either direction. Closed
means that no flow will occur through the pipe.
PBV: Pressure breaker valve (see “Valve Theory” on page B-
726)
Percent Full: The ratio of the current storage volume to the total
storage volume, multiplied by 100.
Pipe Status: Indicates whether the pipe is open or closed. As input,
this determines how the pipe begins the simulation. As
output, it shows the calculated status of the pipe at the
given time.
Polyline: A composite element that consists of a series of line
segments. Each line segment begins and ends at a vertex.
A vertex may be another element such as a junction, tank,
or pump.
Power: Represents the water horsepower of a pump. This is the
horsepower that is actually transferred from the pump
into the water. Depending on the pump’s efficiency, the
actual power consumed (brake horsepower) may vary.
Pressure: The field that displays the pressure for the current time
period.

Glossary
Pressure Setting: The constraint to which a valve regulates, expressed in

units of pressure (Force per Length²). Depending on the
type of valve, it may refer to either the upstream or
downstream pressure or the pressure drop.
PRV: Pressure reducing valve (see “Valve Theory” on page B-
726)
PSV: Pressure sustaining valves (see “Valve Theory” on
page B-726)
Menu: A menu of available commands or actions you can
perform. Access menus from the menu bar at the top of
the main program window.
Pump Status: A pump can have two different status conditions: On,
which is normal operation, or Off, which is no flow under
any condition.
RDBMS: An acronym that stands for Relational Database
Management System.
Relate: A temporary connection between table records using a
common item shared by both tables. Each record in one
table is connected to those records in the other table that
share the same value for the common item.
Relational Database: A database in which the data is structured in such a way
as to associate tables according to attributes that are
shared by the tables.
Relational Join: The process of merging two attribute tables using a
common item.
Relative Speed Factor: Defines the characteristics of a pump relative to the speed
for which the pump curve was entered, in accordance
with the affinity laws. A speed factor of 1.00 would
indicate pump characteristics identical to those of the
original pump curve.
Residual Pressure: The minimum residual pressure to occur at a junction
node. The program determines the amount of fire flow
available such that the residual pressure at a junction
node does not fall below this target pressure.
Reynolds Number: Ratio of viscous forces relative to inertial forces. A high
Reynold’s number indicates turbulent flow, while a low
number indicates laminar flow.
Roughness: A measure of a pipe’s resistance to flow. Pipes of
different ages, construction material, and workmanship
may have different roughness values.

Roughness Coefficient: A value used to represent the resistance of a conveyance
element to flow. In the Manning’s equation, this value is
inversely proportional to flow. The smaller the roughness
coefficient, the greater the flow.
Satisfies Fire Flow: A true or false statement indicating whether this junction
node meets the fire flow constraints. A check mark in the
box means the Fire Flow Constraints were satisfied for
that node. If there is no check mark, the Fire Flow
Constraints were NOT satisfied.
Schema: A diagrammatic representation; an outline or model.
Essentially, a schema represents the number of tables, the
columns they contain, the data types of the columns, and
any relationships between the tables.
Select: The process of adding one or more elements to an active
selection set.
Selection Set: The active group of selected elements. A selection set
allows editing or an action, such as move or delete, to be
performed on a group of elements.
Shape: The cross-sectional geometric form of a conveyance
element (i.e., circular, box, arch, etc.).
Shapefile: A file format that stores spatial and attribute data for the
spatial features within the dataset. A shapefile consists of
a main file, an index file, and a dBASE table. Shapefiles
were the standard file storage format for ArcView 3.x and
earlier.
Shutoff Point: The point at which a pump will have zero discharge.
Typically the maximum head point on a pump curve.
Size: Inside diameter of a pipe section for a circular pipe.
Spatial Reference: The spatial reference for a feature class describes its
coordinate system (for example, geographic, UTM, and
State Plane), its spatial domain, and its precision. The
spatial domain is best described as the allowable
coordinate range for x, y coordinates, m- (measure)
values, and z-values. The precision describes the number
of system units per one unit of measure. A spatial
reference with a precision of 1 will store integer values,
while a precision of 1000 will store three decimal places.
Stand-Alone/Modeler: The Haestad Methods software environment, and not the
AutoCAD one.
Starting Elevation: The value that is used as the beginning condition for an

Glossary
Status Pane: The area at the bottom of the window used for displaying
status information.
Storage Node: Special type of node where a free water surface exists,
and the hydraulic head is the elevation of the water
surface above sea level.
Table Links: A table link must be created for every database table or
spreadsheet worksheet that is to be linked to the current
model. Any number of Table Links may reference the
same database file.
TCV: Throttle control valve (see “Valve Theory” on page B-
726)
To Node: Represents a pipe’s ending node. Positive flow rates are
in the direction of from towards to. Negative flow rates
are in the opposite direction.
To Pipe: The pipe that connects to the downstream side of a valve
or pump.
Total Active Volume: The volume of water between minimum elevation and
maximum elevation of a tank. This is an input value for
variable area tanks.
Total Storage Volume: The holding capacity of a tank. It is the sum of the
maximum hydraulically active storage volume and the
hydraulically inactive storage volume.
Total Needed Fire Flow: If you choose to add the fire flow to the baseline demand,
the Total Needed Fire Flow is equal to the Needed Fire
Flow plus the baseline demand. If you choose not to add
the fire flow to the baseline demand, the Total Needed
Fire Flow is equal to the Needed Fire Flow.
Trace (Source Ident.): Determines what percentage of water at any given point
originated at a chosen tank, reservoir, or junction.
Trials: The maximum value for genetic algorithm trials is
determined by what you set for Stopping Criteria. Note
that you can set a number larger than (Maximum Era
Number)*(Era Generation Number)*(Population Size),
but calculations beyond that number (for this example,
the value is 45,000) are less likely to produce significant
improvements in optimization.
Valve Status: A valve can have several different status conditions:
Closed (no flow under any condition), Active (throttling,
opening, or closing dependent on system pressures and
flows), and Inactive (wide open, with no regulation).

Velocity: The field that displays the calculated value for a pipe,
valve, or pump velocity at a given time. It is found by
dividing the element’s flow rate by its cross-sectional
area.
Vertex: An element in a topological network.
Wall Reaction Coefficient: Defines the rate at which a substance reacts with the wall
of a pipe, and is expressed in units of length/time.
WaterCAD Datastore: The relational database that WaterCAD uses to store
model data. Each WaterCAD project uses two main files
for data storage, the datastore (.MDB) and the WaterCAD
specific data (.WCD).
WaterObjects: The object model used by WaterCAD, which allows for
the extension and customization of the core software
functions.
Water Quality: The field that displays the water quality for the current
time period.
Water Quality Analysis: An analysis that can be one of three types: Age, Trace, or
Constituent.

Appendix
References G
Benedict, R. P., Fundamentals of Pipe Flow, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York,
1980.
Brater, Ernest F. and Horace W. King, Handbook of Hydraulics, McGraw-Hill Book

Company, New York, 1976.
Cesario, A. Lee, Modeling, Analysis, and Design of Water Distribution Systems,

AWWA, 1995.
Clark, R. M., W. M. Grayman, R. M. Males, and A. F. Hess, “Modeling Contaminant

propagation in Drinking Water Distribution Systems,” Journal of Environmental
Engineering, ASCE, New York, 1993.
Computer Applications in Hydraulic Engineering, Fifth Edition, Waterbury, Connect-

icut, Haestad Press, 2002.
CulvertMaster User’s Guide, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Methods, 2000.
Essential Hydraulics and Hydrology, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Press, 1998.
FlowMaster PE Version 6.1 User’s Guide, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Methods,

2000.
Males R. M., W. M. Grayman and R. M. Clark, “Modeling Water Quality in Distribu-

tion System,” Journal of Water Resources Planning and Management, ASCE, New
York, 1988.
Practical Guide to Hydraulics and Hydrology, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Press,

1997.
Roberson, John A., John J. Cassidy, and Hanif M. Chaudhry, Hydraulic Engineering,
Houghton Mifflin Company, Massachusetts, 1988.
Roberson, John A. and Clayton T. Crowe, Engineering Fluid Mechanics 4th Edition,
Houghton Mifflin Company, Massachusetts, 1990.
WaterCAD User's Guide G-849

Rossman, Lewis A., EPANet User’s Manual (AWWA Workshop Edition), Risk Reduc-
tion Engineering Laboratory, Office of Research and Development, USEPA, Ohio,
1993.
Rossman, Lewis A. et al., “Numerical Methods for Modeling Water Quality in Distri-
bution Systems: A Comparison,” Journal of Water Resources Planning and Manage-
ment, ASCE, New York, 1996.
Rossman, Lewis A., R. M. Clark, and W. M. Grayman, “Modeling Chlorine Residuals

in Drinking-water Distribution Systems,” Journal of Environmental Engineering,
ASCE, New York, 1994.
Sanks, Robert L., Pumping Station Design, Butterworth-Heinemann, Inc., Stoneham,

Massachusetts, 1989.
Streeter, Victor L. and Wylie, E. Benjamin, Fluid Mechanics, McGraw-Hill Book

Company, New York, 1985.
Todini, E. and S. Pilati, “A Gradient Algorithm for the Analysis of Pipe Networks,”
Computer Applications in Water Supply, Volume 1 - Systems Analysis and Simulation,
ed. Bryan Coulbeck and Chun-Hou Orr, Research Studies Press Ltd., Letchworth,
Hertfordshire, England.
Walski, Thomas M., Water System Modeling Using CYBERNET, Waterbury, Connect-
icut, Haestad Methods, 1993.
Zipparro, Vincent J. and Hasen Hans, Davis’ Handbook of Applied Hydraulics,

McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, 1993.
G-850 WaterCAD User's Guide

Index
Symbols toolbar 81
trace 391
.BAK 506 water age 389
.MDB 506 water quality 389, 390, 391
.PDF 28 analysis results report 70, 516
animation options 82, 530, 666
annotation 139, 140, 141, 509, 510
A comparison wizard 555
multipliers 247
abbreviated labels 341 size 700
accuracy 392 annotation wizard 510
action apply minor losses 647
rehabilitation 479 assigning costs to model elements 815
actions tab 404 attribute
active scenario 81 annotation 510
active scenarios 798 inheritance 790
active topology 353, 354, 419 auto prompting 244
active topology alternative 353 AutoCAD 607
address command line 57
See contacting Haestad Methods. 45 commands 615
adjustments drawing synchronization 610
demand 431 DXF 605, 606
advanced options 316 element scale 613
advective transport in pipes 733 entities 615
aerial view 266, 267 exporting DXF file 605
affinity laws 724 importing DXF files 606
age 837 importing WaterCAD 619
alternative 358 importing WaterCAD DXF files 605
analysis 389 multiple sessions 240
alternative 348, 349 proxies 619
alternatives 116, 345, 346, 372, 787, 788 rebuild figure labels 610
child 346 undo/redo 617
editor 349, 365 AutoCAD mode 48, 607
inheritance 789, 790 graphical layout 608
manager 347 project files 610
merge 346 toolbars 609
analysis Autodesk 607
constituent 390 automated skeletonization 621
fire flow 385, 386 auto-refresh 85
hydraulic 377, 378, 379, 714, 715
options 380
WaterCAD User's Guide Index-851

B
B calibration groups 438

calibration manager 421
backflow preventer 384 calibration options 440, 441
background drawing 605 calibration options formulae 444
background DXF (AutoCAD) 605 calibration results statistics 429
background layer 52 calibration solutions 426
base 422 calibrations 426
base alternative 346, 349 capital 797, 799
base elevation 837 cost 447
base scenarios 364, 366 cost manager 448, 449
batch run 364, 368, 640 cost warnings report 464
bends unit cost function 457
adding to a pipe 703 capital cost alternative 363
in AutoCAD 614 capital cost estimating overview 797
Bernoulli equation 716 capital cost reports 461
bibliography 849 certification 833
blocks (AutoCAD mode) 599, 605 change pipe width 614
borders 558 characteristic curve
boundary conditions 490 pump 724
boundary node 837 pumps 723, 724
brake power 766 check data 382
branch collapsing check valve 726, 838
See Skelebrator. 624 chemical analysis 390
branch trimming 624, 627, 644 Chezy’s equation 728, 731
break repair cost child 348, 349, 422, 790
Darwin Designer 756 alternative 346
building cost scenarios 810 scenario 364, 791
bulk flow reactions 735 Cholesky 722
bulk reaction 568 CivilProjects.com 834
coefficient 837 CivilQuiz.com 835
buttons ClientCare 44
online help topic navigation 77 clipboard
copy table 344
copy to 83
C coefficient 846
roughness 846
C coefficient 729, 838 coefficients
calculation 373, 374, 391 engineer’s reference 743
options 391 Colebrook-White
problem summary report 518 equation 728
results status 84 typical values 744
unready 837 collapsing branch
calibration 381, 421 See Skelebrator. 624
calibration adjustment groups dialog 438 color coding 128, 141, 142, 513, 514, 558, 700
calibration export to scenario dialog 427 column
calibration field data observation dialog 433 allow duplicate 335
calibration field data set dialog 430 change units 699
calibration field data sets dialog 432 heading 341
calibration group selection dialog 261 table customization 340
Index-852 WaterCAD User's Guide

C
command line (AutoCAD Only) 57 contour labeling 550

commands (AutoCAD mode) 615 control 305, 306
common user access 243 status 838
compare scenarios 556 valve 726
composite logical action dialog 415 controls tab 402
composite logical condition dialog 411 copy to clipboard 83
composite minor loss 284 Darwin Designer 499
concentration 390 table 344
concentration limit 568 cost 447, 448, 765, 768, 769, 797, 798, 799, 800
conditions tab 403 alternative 363
configuration 242 analysis 447, 448
conjugate gradient method 722 design 500
connection 571, 572, 573 manager 448
database 578 new pipe 475
editing 577 rehabilitation 475, 500
hiding 584 total 500
management 574 unit cost function 457
shapefile 588 cost adjustments 798
sharing 584 cost alternatives 798
synchronization 610, 611 cost function 819
connectivity tolerance 602 cost manager 798
conservation button section 449
of mass & energy 717 center pane 450
consider pressure benefit 489 left pane 450
constant horsepower pump 725 cost reports 798
constant power pump 290, 725 cost tab 313
constituent 568, 838 cost warnings report 464
alternative 358, 360 cost-benefit trade-off 753
analysis 390 costs
baseline load 354, 358 globally editing 800
library 568 new pipe 475
pattern 359 creating a new logical control 399
source 358, 372 creating scenarios 695
constituents crosshair
reactions 735 location 84
construction costs 315 CUA 243
construction costs table 315 CulvertMaster 832
contacting Haestad Methods cursor location 84
e-mail 45 curve
fax 45 pump 290, 291, 293, 723, 724, 725
hours 44 curved pipes 703
mail 45 custom AutoCAD entities 615
sales 44 custom extended
technical support 44 pump 725
telephone 45 custom sort 338
context menu 838 customize
contour 547, 548, 549 database 574, 575
plan view 519 drawing 246, 247, 248, 609
smoothing 549 labels 341

D
libraries 563 simple first order 736

tables 340 default 322
cut probability 443 delete
elements 262, 613
table 332
D delete selection set 264
demand 300
daily energy cost summary section 321 alternative 354, 355
Darcy Weisbach graph 521
Colebrook-White equation 728 multipliers 396
equation 729, 730 demand adjustments 431
roughness values 744 demand import dialog box 302
Darwin 421 demand multiplier 487
Darwin calibration 424 design costs 474
Darwin Calibrator 421 design event 469
Darwin Calibrator methodology 748 adding 471
Darwin Calibrator troubleshooting tips 696 design event editor 484
Darwin Designer 465 design event name 470
cost-benefit trade-off 753 design events 493
graphing 499 design group 471
how to 465 adding 472
least cost 753 editing 472
maximum benefit 753 name 472
report 499 design groups 494, 500
Darwin Designer genetic algorithm 753 design option group 471
Darwin Designer methodology 753 design point 290, 725
Darwin Designer theory 753 design run 492
Darwin manager 421 computing 498
data design studies 465
check 382 design study 466
entry 87, 322, 790, 791 design type tab 483
organization 345 design variables
validation 382 Darwin Designer 754
data scrubbing 624, 626 designer data verification summary 507
database 571, 572, 573 detailed report 516
export 575, 576, 577 diffusivity 568
import 575, 576, 577 dimensionless benefit 484
ODBC 581, 582, 583 discharge 384, 839
synchronization options 579 dispersion 733
table link editor 579 display precision 253
database connection 571, 578 display tips 699
editor 577 change units in a column 699
example 585 color code elements 700
manager 574 control element/label sizing 700
ODBC 583 dissolved substance in pipes 733
standard 575, 576, 577 dominant pipe criteria 645, 649
dead-end pipes 624 downstream elements selection 276
decay drafting 262, 557
second order 736 drag 839

E
drawing 261 maximum 843

options 241, 242, 246 minimum 353
pane 50, 51 spot 551
preview 604 e-mail 45
review 267, 268, 269, 600 e-mail address 45
scale 246, 247 energy 765, 767, 768, 769
setup (AutoCAD mode) 609 conservation 717, 718
synchronization (AutoCAD mode) 610 equation 716
DWG 237, 610 grade line 717, 839
DXF 605 pricing 364
exporting from WaterCAD 605 principle 715
import 605, 606 energy cost alternative 363, 364
properties 53 energy cost manager 452
dynamic inheritance 788, 789 energy cost theory 765
energy pricing editor 456
energy pricing manager 455
E energy tab 319
engineering forums 835
edit elements 614 engineering library 563, 565
editable 362 constituent 568
editable table columns 336, 337 editor 565
editing elements 261, 701 liquid 567
efficiency manager 564
pump 766 material 565, 566
efficiency settings section 320 minor loss 566, 567
efficiency summary section 322 enhanced pressure contours 550
EGL 717 enter key behavior 242, 243
element 275, 276, 613 entering data for multiple elements 800
annotation 509 entering fire flow test results 434
deleting 262, 613 entities
editing 61, 62, 276, 613 change into pipe 618
find 265 in AutoCAD 615
labeling 272, 701 to pipes 618
modify 613 entity conversion 618
morphing 258 EPANET
moving 262, 616 import 681
numbering 270, 701 EPS 378
scale (AutoCAD mode) 61, 613 analysis 378, 379
search 265 equally distributed 628, 646
selection 259, 260, 263, 271 equations 713
type 258 equivalent pipe method 645, 649
visibility 248 era generations number 442
element detailed cost report 462 error messages 382
element properties 612 results report 374
element selector error.log 44
Darwin Designer 501 ESRI 571, 572, 596
elevation 837, 839, 843 export shapefile 593
base 837 import shapefile 589
input mode 245 shapefile connection 588

F
estimate 840, 843 fire flow dialog 389

example projects 43 fire flow upper limit 843
lessons 87 fire hydrants 688
tutorials 42 fire hydrants as flow emitters 691
exclamation point in circle 202 first order
existing loads 628 saturation growth 736
exit WaterCAD 60 simple decay 736
explode elements (AutoCAD mode) 616 fitness 426, 500
export 59, 60 fitness tolerance 424
database 574, 575, 576, 577 fitness type 440, 441
DXF 605 fitting loss coefficients 732, 747
profiles in AutoCAD 554 fittings library 566
shapefile 593, 594, 595 FlexTables 329, 802
shapefile link editor 594 FlexUnits 252, 253
spot elevations 682 table 254
table to ASCII 344 flow 843
export to scenario 499, 505 arrow visibility 248
exporting a submodel 241 flow constraints 489, 501
extended edit button 840 flow control valve 726
extended period analysis 378 flow emitters 384, 691
lesson 2 107 flow per fitness point 440
external files 840 FlowMaster 832
extrapolate 840 format 253
user data 324, 325
formulas 743
F forums 835
friction method theory 244
F1 28 from node 843
factor from pipe 843
relative speed 291 function editor
favorites 75 Darwin Designer 483
fax 45 function manager
field Darwin Designer 481
links 581, 840
share 327
field data import 435 G
file format update 506
file management 237 GA 421, 751, 752, 762, 763
filter tables 339 Gaussian elimination method 723
find element 265 general purpose valve 352, 357
find logical action dialog 417 general status information 84
find logical condition dialog 417 general tab 568
find logical control dialog 416 genetic algorithm
fire flow 311, 312, 434 Darwin Designer 753
alternative 360, 361, 362 genetic algorithms 421, 752, 762, 763, 764
analysis 385, 386 calibration tips 428
input 312, 313 methodology 748
results 313, 386 optimized calibration 423, 752
theory 385 optimized calibration advanced options 442

H
global edit 337 head-discharge points 299

global options 242, 243, 244 headloss 843
global settings 237 coefficient 567
globe button 37 headloss gradient 843
glossary 42 help 87
GO button 383 button 70
GPV 352, 357 menu 70, 71
grade line tutorial 42
energy 717 tutorials 42
hydraulic 717 See also online help.
gradient algorithm 719 HGL 717, 843
derivation 719 input mode 245
graph dialog box HGL setting 843
Darwin Designer 503 hide button 72
graph setup 522 hide results 499
graphic annotation 66, 557 horse power (pump) 290
graphical editor 255 how to
graphical layout use Darwin Designer 465
AutoCAD 608 hydrants 688
Stand-Alone 255 hydrants as flow emitters 691
graphically 261 hydraulic analysis 378
groundwater well 684 hydraulic equivalency 629
group name hydraulic grade 843
rehabilitation 474 hydraulic grade line 717
grouping elements 259 hydraulic grade setting 843
selection sets 263 hydraulically close tanks 687
hydropneumatic tank 684
H
I
Haestad forums 835
Haestad Methods 37 impeller 724
about us 829 Import
accreditations 834 WaterCAD 619
certification 833 import 59
continuing education 833 command 239
e-mail addresses 45 Cybernet 674, 675, 676, 677, 679, 680
publications 833 database 575
software 829 database and shapefile data created in v3 682
training 833 DXF files into AutoCAD 605, 606
Web site 45 EPANET 681
Haestad Methods Knowledge Base 696 KYPIPE 681
Haestad Press 833 polyline to pipe 58
Haestad.log 44 shapefile link editor 591
Hazen-Williams equation 729 spot elevations 682
coefficients 746 submodels 59
roughness values 745 WaterCAD 59, 60, 619
head 384 import/export tips 674
head per fitness point 440 importing demands 301

J
importing patterns 396 abbreviate 341

inactive elements 340 elements 272, 701
inactive pipes 507 rebuilding (AutoCAD mode) 610
inactive volume 843 sizing 700
importing from EPANET 681 visibility 248
include active topology 340 Lagrangian transport algorithm 739
include in cost calculation 314 laws
independent papers 833 affinity 724
index 73 conservation of mass and energy 717
inflow 843 layer 248, 604, 612
inheritance 788, 789, 843 layout 89, 90, 91, 92
dynamic 789 AutoCAD 608
overriding 789 network 256
initial settings 843 pipe using entity 618
alternative 355 least cost 753
initial water quality 843 legend 67, 557, 558
input 261 quick view 273
data 275 length 843
modes 245 level 837
quick view 273 mode 245
insert Levenberg-Marquardt method 726
elements 258 library
nodes 258 constituent 568
installation guide for network license versions 40 editor 565
installation problems 35 engineering 563, 565
installing Haestad Methods products 35 liquid 567
intermediate node removal 625 manager 564
interpolate 843 material 565
inventory 517 minor loss 566
invert 843 licenses 36, 37
light 843
messages 843
J line 557
linear system equation solver 722
junction condition editor 652 linear theory method 719
link color coding 513, 700
liquid 245
K library 567, 568
load boundary conditions 491
K coefficients 566, 747 load distribution strategy 644, 646
kinematic viscosity 567 local
knowledge base 696 units 342
KYPIPE 681 local units 342
KYPIPE import 681 log files 44
logical 306
logical control 305, 306, 307
L dialog box 405
manager 401
label 843 set alternative 357

M
set editor 419 alternatives 347, 348

sets dialog 418 merge
logical control: alternatives 346
See operational controls alternative. submodel 240
logical controls merging pipes by 647
operation 401 merging pipes of the same diameter 647
overview 397 messages 317, 843
loop retaining sensitivity 643 light 843
loop-based algorithms 719 metric 253
losses microstation 605
friction 244, 613, 721, 729 minimize cost 484
minor 723, 727, 732 minimum
allowed value 254
increment 423
M system junction 843
system pressure 837
mail 45 system requirements 33, 34
manager 349 zone pressure 837
Manning’s coefficient 843 minor loss element 350, 352
Manning’s equation 731 minor loss strategy 649
roughness values 743 minor losses 723, 727, 732
typical values 746 fitting 747
manual calibration 425 properties 566
manual fire flow scenarios 387 mix units in a tabular report 342
manual fire flow scenarios dialog 388 mode
manual selection 494, 497 AutoCAD 48
manual skeletonization 632, 639 input 245
mass conservation 717 scaled 246, 247
material 843 schematic 246, 247
library 565 Stand-Alone 48
material editor Stand-Alone/AutoCAD 48
Darwin Designer 478 model 275, 276, 377
maximize benefit 484 modeler definition 843
maximum modeling fire hydrants as flow emitters 691
era number 442 modeling tips 683, 693
extended operating point 290, 843 modeling variable speed pumps 693
increment 423 morphing elements 258
number of removal levels 648 motor
number of trimming levels 644 pump 765, 766, 771
operating point 290, 843 mouse tips 701
trials 424 move
maximum benefit 753 elements 262, 616
maximum trials 497 labels 616
memory 683 moving element labels and annotation 273
menu 55, 57, 66 multi segmented polyline 702
context 838 multi-objective trade-off 484
shortcut keys 56 multiple
toolbars 55, 56 pump curve 725, 726
merge 240, 241, 348, 349 units 342, 343

N
multiple point pump 725 online help 70

multiple sessions 240 favorites tab 75
multipliers 247 index tab 73
mutation probability 442 navigation buttons 77
previous/next buttons 77
related topics 73, 76
N search tab 74
showing contents 72
native AutoCAD entities converting 599, 618 topics 76
network deployment folder 41 using 72
network hydraulics theory 714 open database connectivity 581
network license 39 operating point 292
network licensing 37 operating range section 303
network walking algorithm 632 operational alternative 357
new base 422 operational controls alternative 357
new calibration 422, 423 optimized calibration 424
new child 422 options 83
new logical action dialog 413 calculation 391
new logical condition dialog 406 design run 497
new multiple design groups 471 drawing 246
new pipe cost 475 global 242
Darwin Designer 755 graph 560, 561
new pipe costs 475 project 244
See also design option groups options groups tab 474
nodal demand vector 720 organize data 345
node 837, 843 orphaning of pipes 626
boundary 837 out of memory 683
color coding 513, 700 outflow 843
from 843 output 509
node costs 818 quickview 273
non-construction costs 823, 824 tables 329
non-continuable protection violation 683 override defaults 488, 490
non-convergence 378 override scenario demand alternative 487
non-improvement generations 424, 497 overview 421, 452
northing/easting mode 245
notation
scientific 253 P
number
of digits after decimal point 252 parallel pipes 685
Reynolds 845 modeling 685
removal 630, 648
parallel pumps 686
O parent 349
parent alternative 347, 348
objective type 483 parent scenario 364, 367, 370
ODBC 581 Pareto optimal defined 504
online book 28 pareto plot 503
See also .PDF. pattern 393
online forums 835 demand 395, 396

P
demand multipliers 395 water 765

extended period analysis 379, 396 precision display 253, 254
pattern editor 395 predefined reports 515
pattern graph 521 preserve network integrity 642
time steps 395 pressure
peak demand summary section 321 head 716, 717
physical alternative 350 mode 245
physical alternative editor for GPVs 352 pressure benefit
physical properties 350 coefficient 484
pipe 277, 843 exponent 484
adding vertices 703 pressure benefits
advective transport 733 Darwin Designer 756
align text with pipe 248 pressure breaker valve 726
condition editor 651 pressure constraints 487, 501
diameter 647 pressure sustaining valve 726
dissolved substance 733 pressurized tank 684
fittings 566 preview 559
from 843 skeletonization 637
layout using entity 618 print 58, 60, 83
length 843 preview 83
length rounding 244, 246 preview window 559
material 843 setup 58
merging 625 table 344
merging same diameters 647 problem solving 673
parallel 685 problems with setup or uninstall 35
splitting 258 profile 70, 552
text 248 plot 553
tool 67, 257 setup 553
pipe cost project
adding 476 example 43
editing 476 files 237, 238, 239, 610
pipe costs 816 options 241, 244
report 464 settings 237
pipe count summary 58, 242
design group 472 title 241, 242
rehabilitation 474 project detailed cost report 463
pipe option group 477 project element summary cost report 463
adding 478 project summary cost report 463
pipe size usage plot 503 proportional to coalesced pipe attributes 628
plan view reports 518 proportional to dominant criteria 646
plot proportional to existing load 646
Darwin Designer 499 protected elements manager 641
polyline prototype 322, 800
conversion problem 604 prototypes 275
polyline to pipe conversion 599 proxies 619
wizard 601 pump 279, 280, 686
population size 442 affinity laws 723
power 291, 293 constant horsepower 725
brake 766 curve 290, 293, 723, 724, 725, 726

Q
custom extended 725 references 849

definition 290 references and textbooks 833
efficiency 294, 766 refresh 85
groundwater well 684 registering network programs 38
head definition 291 registration 36, 37, 70
impeller 724 regulating valves 727
importing from EPANET 681 rehab groups 496, 500
initial condition 291 rehabilitation action 479
initial settings 355 rehabilitation benefits
motor 765, 766, 771 Darwin Designer 757
multiple point 725 rehabilitation cost 475
operating point 292, 723, 724, 725 adding 478
parallel 686 editing 478
power 290 rehabilitation group 473
series 686 adding 472
static head 724 editing 472
static lift 723 rehabilitation option group
theory 723 defining 478
three point 725, 771 rehabilitation pipe cost
type 725 Darwin Designer 755
variable speed 724 relabel elements 270
pump curve 291 relabel operations 270
pump efficiency section 320 related topics 73
pump station costs 821 defined 76
pumps relative speed factor 291, 845
723 remove
columns 334
elements 262
Q Haestad Methods products 35
remove orphaned nodes 643
quick attribute selector 56 removing color coding from labels imported
quick edit window 64 from pre-v3.5 files 701
quick selection set dialog 420 repaint 85
report
Darwin Designer 499
R reports 127, 128, 129, 130, 131, 132, 509
analysis results 516
random seed 442 detailed 515, 516
reaction rates tab 569 menu 70
reactions plan view 518
bulk flow 735 predefined 515
read-only 362 project inventory 517
rebuild figure labels 610 scenario 517
recent files 58 tabular 517
red circle 202 representative scenario 469
redefine WaterCAD blocks 605 reservoirs 279
redo 61, 62, 617 residual pressure 845
reference resize to fit 499
engineer’s 743 results 509

S
Darwin Designer 498 inheritance 788, 789, 791

getting results from Darwin Designer 498 lesson 3 116
review drawing 267 management 345
Reynolds number 845 results 374
rotate labels (AutoCAD mode) 248, 613 selection 365
roughness summary report 517
Chezy’s equation 728 scenario control center 366
coefficient 565, 566, 743 scenario dataset wizard 249
Colebrook-White equation 728 scenario management 63, 116, 345, 366, 367,
Darcy-Weisbach equation 729 783
Hazen-Williams equation 729 example 792
Manning’s equation 731 schema
roughness height 728, 730, 744 Darwin Designer 506
roughness values 743 format 506
Colebrook-White 744 schema definition 846
Darcy-Weisbach 744 schematic mode 247
Hazen-Williams 745 scientific notation 254
Manning’s 743 scrubbing
typical 746 See Skelebrator. 624
rounding 253 search for elements 265
pipe length 246 second order
RPBP valves 281 decay 736
rule based 306, 307, 401 second-order decay 736
running the model 383 section 303
select 66, 261
by selection set 263
S element types 590
elements 61, 62, 63, 259, 260
sales 44 field links 581
sample projects 43 layer 612
saturation growth text style 612
first order 736 select from drawing 261
save 58, 59, 60, 79 selection 261
as 58, 59, 60 selection set 264
as drawing *.DWG 611 dialog box 264, 439
SCADA 819 general 263
scale 246 manager 64, 263
elements (AutoCAD mode) 613 selection set dialog 439
scaled mode 246, 247 selection tool 66
scenario 70, 364, 368, 555, 556, 788 series pipe merging
alternatives 116, 117, 119, 120, 121, 124, See Skelebrator. 625
372 series pipe removal 625, 628, 645
analysis toolbar 81 series pumps 686
base 364 set field options 252, 507
batch run 368 setup 35, 242, 609
calculation 372 drawing options 246
child 116, 117, 118, 120, 121, 788 problems 35
comparison 122, 124, 555 project options 244
editor 365 prototypes 322

S
SewerCAD 831 what it does 632

SewerTalk 835 skeletonization 621
shapefile 586, 587, 588, 589, 590, 591 branch trimming 624
format 596 data scrubbing 624
properties 53 example 622
shapefile connection 586, 587, 588, 590, 591, manager 634
592 network walking algorithm 632
editor 587 series pipe removal 625
example 596 Skelebrator 626
export example 595 techniques 623
export wizard 593 See also Skelebrator.
import example 592 skeletonization preview 637
import wizard 589 smoothing contours 549
link wizard 588 snap menu (AutoCAD mode) 617
manager 586 software registration 36
wizard 586 solutions 426, 427
shapefile connections solutions to keep 498
sharing between projects 596 solutions to modeling problems 683
share fields 327 sort
shortcut keys 55, 56 custom 338
show button 72 tables 338
show results 499 source
shutoff point 290 tracing 391
simple 306 sparse matrix 719, 722, 723
simple control dialog box 306 splice probability 443
simple first-order decay 736 splitting pipes 258
simple logical action dialog 413 spot elevations 551, 682
simple logical condition dialog 407 stand-alone definition 846
simultaneous path adjustment method 719 Stand-Alone mode 48
single element selection dialog 260 standard database import/export 575
size elements (AutoCAD) 613 standard extended pump 725
Skelebrator 626 static head
batch run 640 pump 724
branch trimming 627, 644 static lift
conditions and tolerances 650 pump 723
data scrubbing 626 status 84
junction condition editor 652 bar 55, 84
manual skeletonization 639 log 561
parallel pipes removal 630, 648 statuses
pipe condition editor 651 initial settings 843
protected elements manager 641 steady state analysis 378
recommended practices 653 sticky tools 244
series pipe removal 628, 645 Stieltjes 722
skeletonization stopping criteria 497
preview 637 storage volume 843
skeletonization manager 634 active 847
skeletonization preview 631 inactive 843
troubleshooting 653 StormCAD 831
using 633 StormTalk 835

T
stretch 262 hydropneumatic 684

submodel 240 importing from EPANET 681
submodel import 240 mixing model 359
suggestions 45 pressurized 684
support 44 technical journals 833
addresses 45 technical support 44
hours 44 text 616
Swamee and Jain equation 730 style 612
symbol text height 247
size multiplier 247 FAQ 700
visibility 248 multiplier 247
visibility (AutoCAD mode) 609 theory 713, 769
synchronize 587 network hydraulics 715
database links 574 valve 726
options 579 three point pump 725, 771
via ODBC 583 throttle control valve 726
synchronize (AutoCAD mode) 610 time condition 307
synchronized units 342 T-intersections 602
system title
international 243, 253 project 241, 242
system cost adjustments table 450 tolerance 269
system head curve dialog 520 tool pane 78, 242
system operating point 723 toolbar 56, 609
analysis 81
and shortcut keys 55
T buttons 78
top feed/bottom gravity discharge tank 690
table 329, 335 top solutions 498
change units 341 topics
copy to clipboard 344 online help 76
customization 340 topology 382, 719
editing 331 total active volume 847
export to ASCII file 344 total benefit 500
filtering 339, 340 total cost 500
FlexUnits 254 totalizing flow meters 519
manager 330 trace
mixing units 342 alternative 360
navigation 336 trace alternative 360
print 344 trace analysis 391
print preview 344 training 833
properties 333 transport algorithm 739
setup 332 transport in pipes 733
type 333 trimming
tabular 70 See Skelebrator. 624
tabular report 329 troubleshooting
tabular report window 519 Darwin Designer 507
tank 278 tutorials 42, 71, 87
curve 521 lessons 87
hydraulically close 687 two-component second-order decay 736

U
type coercion 572 valves

RPBP 281
variable frequency drive 317, 693, 769
U variable frequency drives 765
variable speed pump 769
U.S. customary units 243, 253 curve equations 724
undo 61, 62 efficiency 767
undo/redo operations in AutoCAD 617 theory 769
uninstallation 35 VSP tab 317
problems 35 See also VSP.
unit conversion 572 variable speed pumps 724, 767
unit cost 457 velocity
data table 460 head 717
function formula 460 verification report 507
function manager 458 verification summary 507
table coefficients 461 vertices
unit cost functions 798, 802, 804, 805 adding to a pipe 703
unit system 243, 254 VFD 317, 693, 765, 769
unit system status 84 view
unitized benefit 484 menu 64
units 243, 254, 507, 699 tabular 329
change in a column 699 viewing cost results 811
local 342 visibility of symbols 248, 609
synchronized 342 volume 843
update file format 465, 506 inactive 843
updates 70 total active 847
upgrades 36, 37 VSP 317, 318, 319, 693, 694, 695, 765, 770,
upstream node demand proportion 646 771, 772, 773
usage 566
use 50/50 split 649
use equivalent pipes 645, 649 W
use ignore minor losses 649
use skip pipe if minor loss > max 649 walk 554
user data 322, 323 pipe and node 554
alternative 363 selection 554
user memos 317 wall reaction 568
user-data extension, zone manager 275 warning
user-defined ratio 628, 646 Darwin Designer 202
using Skelebrator 633 water main 688
water power 765
water quality
V analysis options 392
water quality theory 733
validation 382 WaterCAD 830
valve 281, 282, 838 custom AutoCAD entities 615
characteristics 297 elements 275
check 838 main window 49
importing from EPANET 681 theory 713
theory 726 WaterCAD engineering library modules 564

X
WaterCAD in AutoCAD 607

files 610
WaterGEMS 830
WaterTalk 835
WCD file 237, 238, 239, 610
Web site 45
welcome dialog 70, 242, 243
well 684
groundwater 684
well groundwater 685
white 362
white table columns 336
wizards 510, 593
annotation comparison 555
polyline to pipe 599, 601
project setup 241
shapefile connection 586
shapefile link 588, 589
workshops 43
X - Y mode 245
X coordinate 245
Y coordinate 245
yellow 362
zone 328
manager 328
zoom 65, 79, 265, 266

Z

WaterCAD Users Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

WaterCAD Users Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WATERCAD

WATER DISTRIBUTION MODELING SOFTWARE

WaterCAD User’s Guide.

WaterCAD Online Help.

The following are registered trademarks of Haestad Methods, Inc.:

CulvertMaster, Cybernet, Darwin, FlowMaster, Graphical HEC-1, PondPack, SewerCAD,

The following are trademarks of Haestad Methods, Inc.:

HEC-Pack, HAMMER, PumpMaster, and GISConnect.

Haestad Methods is a registered tradename of Haestad Methods, Inc.

AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc. ESRI is a registered trademark of

WaterCAD User's Guide Contents-1

Contents-2 WaterCAD User's Guide

Chapter 3: Quick Start Lessons 87

WaterCAD User's Guide Contents-3

Chapter 4: Starting a WaterCAD Project 237

Contents-4 WaterCAD User's Guide

Chapter 5: Layout and Editing Tools 255

WaterCAD User's Guide Contents-5

Chapter 6: Hydraulic Element Editors 275

Contents-6 WaterCAD User's Guide

WaterCAD User's Guide Contents-7

Chapter 7: FlexTables 329

Contents-8 WaterCAD User's Guide

Chapter 8: Scenarios/Alternatives 345

WaterCAD User's Guide Contents-9

Chapter 9: Modeling Capabilities 377

Contents-10 WaterCAD User's Guide

Chapter 10: GA Optimization and Calibration 421

WaterCAD User's Guide Contents-11

Chapter 11: Cost Estimating 447

Contents-12 WaterCAD User's Guide

Chapter 12: Using Darwin Designer 465

WaterCAD User's Guide Contents-13

Chapter 13: Presenting your Results 509

Contents-14 WaterCAD User's Guide

WaterCAD User's Guide Contents-15

Chapter 15: Shapefile and Database Connections 571

Contents-16 WaterCAD User's Guide

Chapter 16: Exchanging Data with CAD Software 599

Chapter 17: Additional Features for AutoCAD 607

WaterCAD User's Guide Contents-17

Chapter 18: Automated Skeletonization 621

Contents-18 WaterCAD User's Guide

Chapter 19: WaterSafe 659

Appendix A: Frequently Asked Questions 673

WaterCAD User's Guide Contents-19

Contents-20 WaterCAD User's Guide

WaterCAD User's Guide Contents-21

Contents-22 WaterCAD User's Guide

Appendix C: Scenario Management Guide 783

WaterCAD User's Guide Contents-23

Appendix D: Capital Cost Estimating 797

Contents-24 WaterCAD User's Guide

Appendix E: Haestad Methods 829

Appendix F: Glossary 837

Appendix G: References 849

WaterCAD User's Guide Contents-25

Contents-26 WaterCAD User's Guide

WaterCAD is a feature-rich program with extensive online documentation that is able

Before you run WaterCAD, you should be familiar with:

• “What’s New?” on page 1-29

WaterCAD User's Guide 1-27

1.1 Using the WaterCAD Documentation